advertisement
Pro Tools
®
Reference Guide
Version 7.3
Copyright
This guide is copyrighted ©2007 by Digidesign, a division of
Avid Technology, Inc. (hereafter “Digidesign”), with all rights reserved. Under copyright laws, this guide may not be duplicated in whole or in part without the written consent of
Digidesign.
96 I/O, 96i I/O, 192 I/O, 888|24 I/O, 882|20 I/O, 1622 I/O,
24-Bit ADAT Bridge I/O, AudioSuite, Avid, AVoption, Digi 002,
Digi 002 Rack, DigiDelivery, Digidesign, DigiTranslator, DINR,
DV Toolkit, M-Audio, Mbox, Mbox 2, Mbox 2 Pro, Mbox 2 Mini,
Pro Tools M-Powered, Pro Tools, Pro Tools|HD, Pro Tools LE,
RTAS, Smack!, SoundReplacer, and TL Space Native are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digidesign and/or Avid
Technology, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Product features, specifications, system requirements, and availability are subject to change without notice.
PN 9106-55991-00 REV A 1/07
Contents
Part I Introduction
Chapter 1. Welcome to Pro Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Chapter 2. Pro Tools Concepts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Chapter 3. Keyboard and Right-Click Mouse Shortcuts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Part II System Configuration
Chapter 4. Pro Tools Systems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DV Toolkit 2 and Music Production Toolkit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Contents iii
Chapter 5. System Setup
Starting Up or Shutting Down Your System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Configuring Pro Tools System Settings (in the Playback Engine)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Configuring Pro Tools Hardware Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Chapter 6. I/O Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Routing Hardware I/O to Pro Tools I/O
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Chapter 7. Preferences
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Part III Sessions & Tracks
Chapter 8. Sessions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Creating Custom Session Templates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Chapter 9. Pro Tools Main Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
iv Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 10. Tracks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Track Name Right-Click Pop-Up Menus
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Assigning Inputs and Outputs to Tracks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Track Priority and Voice Assignment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Chapter 11. DigiBase
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Performance and Transfer Volumes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Contents v
Chapter 12. Importing and Exporting Session Data
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Sample Rate Conversion Quality
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Importing Audio Files and Regions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Importing Tracks and Track Attributes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Importing Items with Drag and Drop
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Chapter 13. File and Session Management and Compatibility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Sharing Sessions Created on Different Pro Tools Systems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Sharing Sessions Created on Different Pro Tools Software Versions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Multilingual Application Support for Pro Tools Systems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Part IV Recording
Chapter 14. Record Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Input Connections and Audio Levels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Monitor Levels for Record and Playback
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Allocating Hard Drive Space for Recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Setting the Default Meter and Tempo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 vi Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 15. Audio Recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Auditioning Different Record Takes in the Timeline
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Recording from a Digital Source
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Half-Speed Recording and Playback
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Chapter 16. MIDI Recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Configuring MIDI or Instrument Tracks for Recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Recording System Exclusive Data
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Recording Audio from a MIDI Instrument
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Chapter 17. Advanced Punch Recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
DestructivePunch Audio Recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Contents vii
Part V Editing
Chapter 18. Editing Basics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Displaying Region Names, Region Times, and Other Data in Playlists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Timebase Rulers and Conductor Rulers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Region Name Right-Click Pop-Up Menus
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Chapter 19. Playing and Selecting Track Material
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Auto-Scrolling Tracks in the Mix and Edit Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Linking or Unlinking Timeline and Edit Selections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Linking or Unlinking Track and Edit Selections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
TCE (Time Compression and Expansion) Edit To Timeline Selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Playing Timeline and Edit Selections with the Playhead
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 viii Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 20. Working with Regions and Selections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Audio Regions from Field Recorders
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Editing Stereo and Multichannel Tracks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Processing Audio with AudioSuite Plug-ins
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Waveform Repair with the Pencil Tool
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Chapter 21. Fades and Crossfades
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Creating Fades at the Beginnings and Ends of Regions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Moving and Nudging Fades and Crossfades
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Separating Regions That Include Fades or Crossfades
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Trimming Regions That Include Fades or Crossfades
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Fade Boundaries and Shapes in Displayed Automation View
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Chapter 22. Managing Regions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Stripping Silence from Regions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Contents ix
Chapter 23. Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Changing the Linearity Display Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Chapter 24. Beat Detective
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Defining a Beat Detective Selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Calculating Tempo with Beat Detective
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Generating Bar|Beat Markers with Beat Detective
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Separating Regions with Beat Detective
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Conforming Regions with Beat Detective
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Detection (Normal) and Collection Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 x Pro Tools Reference Guide
Part VI MIDI Editing
Chapter 25. MIDI Editing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Time Compression/Expansion Trim Tool Functionality on MIDI Regions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Patch Select (Program and Bank Changes)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Chapter 26. MIDI Operations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Chapter 27. MIDI Event List
Inserting Events in the MIDI Event List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Editing Events in the MIDI Event List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Contents xi
Part VII Mixing
Chapter 28. Basic Mixing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Views in the Mix and Edit Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Output Windows for Tracks and Sends
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Signal Routing for Monitoring and Submixing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Using a Control Surface with Pro Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Chapter 29. Plug-in and Hardware Inserts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Moving and Duplicating Plug-in and Hardware Inserts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Connecting and Integrating External Devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Chapter 30. Automation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Enabling and Suspending Automation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Writing Automation to the Start, End, or All of a Track or Selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Writing Automation to the Next Breakpoint or to the Punch Point
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Guidelines for “Write To” Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Overwriting or Extending Mute Automation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730 xii Pro Tools Reference Guide
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Chapter 31. Mixdown
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Part VIII Video, Sync, Surround
Chapter 32. Pro Tools Setup for Surround (Pro Tools HD Only)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Pro Tools Audio Connections for 5.1 Mixing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Default I/O Selectors in I/O Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
5.1 Track Layouts, Routing, and Metering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Chapter 33. Multichannel Tracks and Signal Routing (Pro Tools HD Only)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
Example Paths and Signal Routing for a Surround Mix
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Chapter 34. Surround Panning and Mixing (Pro Tools HD Only)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
Introduction to Pro Tools Surround Panning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Divergence and Center Percentage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Contents xiii
Chapter 35. Working with Synchronization
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
Configuring Pro Tools for SMPTE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Spotting Regions to SMPTE Frame Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Identifying a Synchronization Point
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Troubleshooting Synchronization
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Chapter 36. Working with Video in Pro Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Video Track Controls and Indicators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Importing Video into Pro Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Extracting Audio from QuickTime-Compatible Video
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
Browsing Video in the Video Universe Window
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Playback of HD QuickTime Movies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Bouncing the Video Track to a QuickTime Movie
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
Using Pro Tools LE to Import Video from Other Versions of Pro Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
xiv Pro Tools Reference Guide
Part I: Introduction
1
2
Chapter 1: Welcome to Pro Tools
Welcome to Pro Tools
®
. Pro Tools integrates powerful multitrack digital audio and MIDI sequencing features, giving you everything you need to record, arrange, compose, edit, mix, and master professional quality MIDI and audio for music, video, film, and multimedia.
The Pro Tools Guides
Pro Tools systems include the following guides:
Getting Started Guide Instructions for installing your Pro Tools system and connecting your studio. For Pro Tools LE™ and M-Powered™, these guides also contain specific methods for accomplishing common tasks (such as recording in a Pro Tools session, importing audio from a CD, and creating an audio CD from a Pro Tools session).
Pro Tools Reference Guide Full details on all
Pro Tools functionality and operations.
(Pro Tools LE and M-Powered systems only include an electronic PDF version of the Reference
Guide .)
Pro Tools Menus Guide Electronic PDF guide to the Pro Tools on-screen menus.
Pro Tools Shortcuts Guides Separate electronic
PDF guides for Windows and Mac that list keyboard and Right-click shortcuts, including those shown in Pro Tools menus.
DigiRack Plug-ins Guide Electronic PDF guide with instructions for using the DigiRack™ plugins (included with Pro Tools) for both real-time and file-based audio processing in Pro Tools.
Digidesign Plug-ins Guide Electronic PDF guide with instructions for using optional Digidesign
® plug-ins for both real-time and file-based audio processing in Pro Tools.
Expanded Systems Guide (Pro Tools|HD Systems
Only) Instructions for expanding a
Pro Tools|HD
®
system with optional Digidesign cards or an expansion chassis.
MachineControl™ Guide (Pro Tools|HD Systems
Only) Electronic PDF guide for Machine-
Control™ option, includes installation and operation instructions for using the Machine-
Control option for Pro Tools to enable serial communication with remote audio and video transports.
Additional Guides
Additional PDF guides (such as a Glossary) are installed with Pro Tools. Refer to your Pro Tool documentation folder.
Digidesign also provides guides with audio interfaces, dedicated worksurfaces (such as D-Control™) and controllers (such as Command|8
®
), and other Digidesign options (such as
MIDI I/O™, PRE, and SYNC I/O™). Refer to the separate guide provided with each Digidesign product.
Chapter 1: Welcome to Pro Tools 3
Conventions Used in These Guides
:
The Pro Tools guides use the following conventions to indicate menu choices, keyboard commands, and mouse commands:
Convention Action
File > Save Choose Save from the
File menu
Control+N
Control-click
Right-click
Hold down the Control key and press the N key
Hold down the Control key and click the mouse button
Click with the right mouse button
The following symbols are used to highlight important information:
User Tips are helpful hints for getting the most from your Pro Tools system.
Important Notices include information that could affect your Pro Tools session data or the performance of your Pro Tools system.
Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or mouse shortcuts.
Cross References point to related sections in this guide and other Digidesign guides.
Pro Tools M-Powered and Academic
References to Pro Tools LE™ in this guide are usually interchangeable with Pro Tools
M-Powered™ or Pro Tools Academic™, except as noted in the Pro Tools M-Powered and Academic Getting Started Guides.
Compatibility Information
Digidesign can only assure compatibility and provide support for hardware and software it has tested and approved.
For a list of Digidesign-qualified computers, operating systems, hard drives, and third-party devices, visit the Digidesign website
(www.digidesign.com).
About www.digidesign.com
The Digidesign website (www.digidesign.com) is your best online source for information to help you get the most out of your Pro Tools system. The following are just a few of the services and features available.
Registration Register your purchase online. See the Digidesign Registration Information Card included with your system for instructions.
Support Contact Digidesign Technical Support or Customer Service; download software updates and the latest online manuals; browse the
Compatibility documents for system requirements; search the online Answerbase or join the worldwide Pro Tools community on the Digidesign User Conference.
Training and Education Study on your own using courses available online or find out how you can learn in a classroom setting at a certified
Pro Tools training center.
Products and Developers Learn about Digidesign products; download demo software or learn about our Development Partners and their plugins, applications, and hardware.
News and Events Get the latest news from Digidesign or sign up for a Pro Tools demo.
4 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Pro Tools Concepts
This chapter explains the principles and concepts that form the foundation of Pro Tools operation and functionality.
Hard Disk Audio Recording
Tape-based recording is a linear medium—you need to rewind or fast forward a tape to hear a particular spot in a recording. To rearrange or repeat material in a linear system, you need to rerecord it, or cut and splice it.
Hard disk recording is a nonlinear (or random access) medium—you can go immediately to any spot in a recording without having to rewind or fast forward.
Nonlinear systems have several advantages. You can easily rearrange or repeat parts of a recording by making the hard disk read parts of the recording in a different order and/or multiple times. In addition, this re-arrangement is nondestructive , meaning that the original recorded material is not altered.
Pro Tools is a nonlinear recording system that lets you rearrange and mix recorded material nondestructively.
The Digidesign Audio Engine
DAE (or Digidesign Audio Engine) is Digidesign’s real-time operating system for digital audio recording, playback, and processing.
When you install Pro Tools, DAE is automatically installed on your system.
In the same way that a computer’s operating system provides the foundation for programs that run on the computer, DAE provides the foundation for much of the hard disk recording, digital signal processing, and mix automation required by Pro Tools and other products from
Digidesign and its Development Partners.
The DAE Playback Buffer Size determines the amount of memory DAE allocates to manage disk buffers. The DAE Playback Buffer Size can be changed in the Playback Engine dialog.
For information on configuring the DAE
Playback Buffer Size, see “DAE Playback
Playback Engine Dialog
Pro Tools takes advantage of your computer’s host processor for certain tasks and optional host-based DSP processing.
Chapter 2: Pro Tools Concepts 5
Pro Tools LE uses host (CPU) processing to provide audio track recording, playback, mixing, and effects processing. Pro Tools HD also uses host processing to run RTAS
®
plug-ins for effects processing. Performance is determined by your system and its Playback Engine settings.
The Playback Engine dialog lets you set a hardware buffer size and allocate a percentage of
CPU resources for these tasks.
Playback Engine dialog for Pro Tools HD
On Pro Tools|HD systems, you can select the number of voices and voiceable tracks for your system and its sessions. Voice count choices are based on how much DSP processing you want to allocate for voicing.
For more information, see “Configuring
Pro Tools System Settings (in the Playback
Engine)” on page 32. See also “System Resources” on page 10.
On Pro Tools|HD systems, the Playback Engine dialog is also where you assign dedicated DSP resources for Delay Compensation.
Pro Tools Sessions
When you start a project in Pro Tools, you create a session . Some basic elements of sessions are explained in this section.
Session File
A s ession file is the document that Pro Tools creates when you choose File > New Session and configure a new session. Pro Tools can open only one session file at a time. The session file is named with a .ptf (Pro Tools file) extension. Session files contain maps of all elements associated with a project, including audio files, MIDI data, and all your edit and mix information. It is important to realize that a Pro Tools session file does not contain any media files (audio or video). Instead, it references audio, video, MIDI, and other files. You can make changes to a session and save those changes in a new session file. This lets you create multiple versions of a session or back up your editing and mixing work.
Pro Tools HD, Pro Tools LE, and Pro Tools
M-Powered have different session file icons.
Pro Tools HD Pro Tools LE
Pro Tools M-Powered
Session file icons
Pro Tools Academic
6 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Although there are different session file icons, the session files may be opened by all three ap-
plications (with certain restrictions). See “Opening a Session” on page 85.
When a session is transferred to a different
Pro Tools system, its session file icon changes to the icon type of the destination system.
Tracks
Pro Tools tracks are where audio, MIDI, video, and automation data are recorded and edited.
Pro Tools tracks also provide audio channels for routing internal busses, and physical inputs and outputs for audio and MIDI.
Pro Tools provides seven types of tracks: audio,
Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, VCA Master,
MIDI, Instrument, and video.
Master Fader tracks provide controls for physical audio output channels, including the volume level of your mix, panning, and plug-in inserts.
VCA Master tracks (Pro Tools HD only) provide control of tracks in a Mix Group that has been assigned to the VCA Master.
Video tracks support both QuickTime movies and Avid video, but an individual video track can play back only one of these types of video at a time.
Audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, VCA Master (Pro Tools HD only), and Instrument tracks can be mono, stereo, or multichannel
(Pro Tools HD only). When creating a new track, select from the list of channel formats supported by your system.
Audio File
When you record audio into a Pro Tools session, audio files are created.
Audio track in the Edit window (stereo track shown)
MIDI track in the Edit window
Audio, MIDI, and Instrument track data can be edited into regions or repeated in different locations to create loops, re-arrange sections or entire songs, or to assemble tracks using material from multiple takes.
Auxiliary Input tracks can route internal audio busses or physical inputs to internal busses or physical outputs. Auxiliary Inputs are typically used for audio effects busses, audio throughput
(monitoring), and submixing.
Audio file icon
Audio files for each session are stored in a folder named “Audio Files.” Audio files are listed in the
Pro Tools Region List and can appear in an audio track. A section of an audio file can be de-
fined as a region. See “Regions” on page 8.
Chapter 2: Pro Tools Concepts 7
Regions
Audio region
A region is a segment of audio, MIDI, or video data. A region could be a drum loop, a guitar riff, a verse of a song, a recording take, a sound effect, some dialog, or an entire sound file. Regions are especially useful for arranging audio and MIDI. A region can also have associated automation data. In Pro Tools, regions are created from audio files or MIDI data, and can be arranged in audio and MIDI track playlists. Regions can also be grouped and looped.
Playlist
dio can be used in different places and have different effects applied. On MIDI and Instrument tracks, edit playlists can store multiple MIDI sequences (or performances) on a track.
A playlist can be made up of a single region or many separate regions. It can be made up of similar elements, such as regions from several different takes of a solo, or dissimilar elements, such as several sound effects.
You can create any number of alternate edit playlists for a track. This lets you assemble different versions of performances or edits on a single track and choose between them from a popup menu on the track.
Each track also has a single set of automation playlists, for volume, pan, mute, and each automation-enabled control for the insert and send assignments on that track.
Playlist selector pop-up menu
A playlist is a sequence of regions arranged on an audio, MIDI, or video track. Tracks have edit playlists and automation playlists .
On audio tracks, an edit playlist tells the hard disk which audio regions to play in what order.
For example, you can use the same audio region to access the same piece of audio multiple times at different locations and not use additional disk space. Different versions of the same original au-
Channel
The term channel is used to describe several related components of a Pro Tools system. The first example of channel refers to a physical input or output of your Pro Tools system. For example, a 96 I/O audio interface provides up to
16 channels of input and output to a
Pro Tools|HD system, while an Mbox 2 audio interface provides up to four inputs and two outputs.
The second use of the term channel refers to a channel strip in the Pro Tools Mix window.
Each track in a Pro Tools session has a corresponding channel strip in the Mix window.
Audio and MIDI channel strips have similar controls, but those controls have slightly different effects. For example, audio, Auxiliary Input, and Instrument track channel strip faders con-
8 Pro Tools Reference Guide
trol the output gain to the mix bus for that channel, while MIDI channel strip faders send
MIDI volume data (MIDI controller 7) to the
MIDI instrument.
Signal Routing
Pro Tools provides software-based mixing and signal routing controls, which are located in the
Mix window. Some of these controls can also be accessed from the Edit window.
A common signal routing task is to submix multiple tracks to a single channel strip (such as an
Auxiliary Input) for shared processing and level control. The following example shows three audio tracks submixed to a stereo Auxiliary Input.
Stereo plug-in
Inserts
Sends
Outputs to stereo bus path
Input from stereo bus path
Output to stereo output path
Channel strip in the Mix window (audio track)
The term MIDI channel also describes a
separate aspect of MIDI operation. See
Auxiliary
Input track
Audio tracks
Submixing to an Auxiliary Input
Chapter 2: Pro Tools Concepts 9
Signal Routing Options
Signal routing options include the following:
Track Input and Output (I/O) Controls The most basic type of signal routing is track input and output. A track needs to have an assigned input path to record audio, and an assigned output path in order to be audible through a hardware output. Signals can also be routed to or from other tracks in Pro Tools (or hardware inputs and outputs) using internal busses.
Auxiliary Input and Master Fader Tracks Auxiliary Inputs can be used as returns, submixers, and bus masters. Master Fader tracks are used as bus and output master level controls. Both Auxiliary Input and Master Fader tracks can have plug-in and hardware inserts.
Instrument Tracks Instrument tracks let you route sound from a physical input or instrument plug-in to outputs, sends and busses, or other inserts.
Sends Sends route audio from tracks to hardware outputs, or to internal busses that are in turn routed to other tracks within Pro Tools.
Master Fader and VCA Master tracks do not have sends.
Plug-in and Hardware Inserts Plug-in processing occurs completely within the Pro Tools system.
Hardware inserts use audio interface inputs and outputs, for traditional insert routing to and from external effects and other devices.
Paths Paths are any routing option in Pro Tools, including internal or external inputs, outputs, busses, and inserts. Pro Tools lets you name these paths, and these path names appear in the
Audio Input and Output Path selectors and
other menus. See Chapter 6, “I/O Setup” for
more information.
Mixing Formats Sessions can include combinations of mono, stereo, and greater-than-stereo multichannel format tracks, busses, inputs, outputs, and inserts. Greater-than-stereo multichannel formats are supported on Pro Tools|HD systems only.
System Resources
Track count, plug-in processing, signal path and routing options, and voice availability are ultimately limited by the combined resources available from the host computer, and from your
Pro Tools hardware.
Pro Tools provides several ways to manage and conserve resources to maximize the performance of your system. As you begin working with Pro Tools sessions and tracks, you can take advantage of the following features to extend the effectiveness of your available DSP and other resources:
â—† Pro Tools lets you adjust the performance of your system by changing system settings that affect its capacity for processing, playback, and re-
cording. See “Configuring Pro Tools System
Settings (in the Playback Engine)” on page 32.
â—† In order to free up needed DSP resources,
Pro Tools allows for certain items (such as tracks and inserts) to be manually made inactive. Inactive elements are viewable, editable, and re-
tained within the session. See “Active and
â—† All Pro Tools systems provide flexible voice options for audio tracks, to help maximize use of available voices in your system. For more information on voice management and options,
see “Voice Borrowing” on page 139.
10 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Active and Inactive Items
Pro Tools lets you make certain items (such as tracks and inserts) inactive , in order to free up
DSP resources and mixer connections.
Items in Pro Tools that can be made inactive (or active) include the following:
• Audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader,
VCA Master, and Instrument tracks
• Track Inputs and Outputs
• Sends
• Side-chain inputs
• Plug-ins
• Hardware inserts
• Paths (session-wide)
MIDI tracks cannot be made inactive.
In addition to manually setting Active and Inactive modes, Pro Tools automatically makes items inactive if there are insufficient or unavailable resources.
When active , items are fully engaged and operational.
When inactive, items are silent and off, although most associated controls can still be adjusted.
Different inactive items affect available system resources in specific ways, as follows:
Plug-ins When a plug-in is inactive on a track, its
DSP is made available for other plug-ins and processing. Plug-in assignments can be made in-
active manually, or automatically (see “Automatic and Manual Inactive Mode” on page 12).
Paths and Path Assignments When a path or path assignment is inactive, its mixer resources are made available for other signal routing purposes in the session. Paths and assignments can be made inactive manually, or automatically
(see “Automatic and Manual Inactive Mode” on page 12).
Tracks When a track is made inactive, its voices become available for another track. Mono inactive tracks free up one voice; stereo and multichannel tracks free up one voice per channel.
Additionally, when an audio, Auxiliary Input,
Instrument, or Master Fader track is made inactive, its plug-ins, inserts, sends, and I/O assignments become inactive, and the associated DSP used is freed up for use elsewhere in the session.
Display of Inactive Items
When items are inactive, their names appear in italics, and their background becomes dark grey.
When a track is inactive, the entire channel strip is grayed out.
Inactive track
Active and inactive items and tracks
Chapter 2: Pro Tools Concepts 11
Automatic and Manual Inactive Mode
Active and Inactive modes are powerful options for session transfer and system resource management. Pro Tools provides automatic and manual Inactive mode switching. You can manually make items inactive (or active) to selectively manage system resources while editing and mixing.
Automatically Inactive Items
When opening a session, it is possible that not all signal paths, plug-ins, or audio interfaces used in the session will be available as defined on the current system. When opening a session, sufficient voices may also be unavailable if the session was created on a different Pro Tools system type (for example, opening a session created on a Pro Tools HD system on a Pro Tools LE system).
Whenever this occurs, the session will open as it was last saved. All items that are unavailable, or cannot be loaded due to insufficient resources, are made inactive.
Manual Inactive Switching
You can manually apply Active or Inactive modes to manage system resources. By making an item inactive, its associated resources are made available elsewhere in the session.
The following are basic instructions for manually making items inactive. Throughout the
Pro Tools Reference Guide , instructions are provided whenever an item can be made inactive.
To toggle an item active or inactive:
â– Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the item.
You can apply Active or Inactive modes to all or all selected tracks using standard Pro Tools modifiers (Alt and Alt+Shift in Windows, Option and
Option+Shift on the Mac).
Side-chain inputs support direct active and inactive switching, but do not follow switching all or all selected side-chain inputs.
MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a communication protocol for musical instruments. This industry standard enables connections between a variety of devices from different manufacturers. Examples of MIDI-compatible equipment include synthesizers, sound modules, drum machines, patch bays, effects processors, MIDI interfaces, MIDI control surfaces, and sequencers.
MIDI devices are equipped with 5-pin DIN connectors, labeled as either IN, OUT, or THRU. The
MIDI OUT port transmits messages. The MIDI
IN port receives messages. The MIDI THRU outputs whatever is received from the IN port. MIDI devices are connected with MIDI cables that are available at most music stores.
passes input
MIDI signal flow
Not all devices will have all three MIDI ports (IN, OUT, and THRU).
12 Pro Tools Reference Guide
The MIDI protocol provides 16 channels of
MIDI per port. A single MIDI cable can transmit a separate set of messages for each of the 16 channels. These 16 channels can correspond to separate MIDI devices or to multiple channels within a single device (if the device is multitimbral ). Each channel can control a different instrument sound. For example, bass on channel 1, piano on channel 2, and drums on channel 10. Similar to a multitrack tape recorder, a MIDI sequencer can record complex arrangements—even using only a single multitimbral keyboard.
MIDI Terms
The following are some basic MIDI terms:
MIDI Instrument A hardware MIDI device or software instrument (such as an instrument plugin).
MIDI Interface Hardware that lets computers connect to and communicate with MIDI devices.
MIDI Device Any physical MIDI keyboard, sound module, effects device, or other equipment that can send or receive MIDI information.
MIDI Controller Any MIDI device that transmits
MIDI performance data. These include MIDI keyboards, MIDI guitar controllers, MIDI wind controllers, and others. Controllers transmit
MIDI from their MIDI OUT ports.
MIDI Control Surface Any device (such as the
Digidesign Command|8), which uses a MIDI connection to send control messages to a software program, but is not generally used to record MIDI information.
MIDI Tone Generator (MIDI Sound Source) Any
MIDI device capable of playing back MIDI-triggered sound. Sound sources receive MIDI from their MIDI IN ports and output audio from their audio outputs.
Multitimbral The ability of one MIDI device to play several different instrument sounds (such as piano, bass, and drums) simultaneously on separate MIDI channels. This makes it possible for a single multi-timbral MIDI instrument to play back entire arrangements.
MIDI Channel Up to 16 channels of MIDI performance data can be transmitted on a single MIDI cable. The channel number separates the different messages so your sound sources can receive the right ones.
Program Change Event A MIDI command that tells a sound source which of its sounds (or sound patches) to use. The MIDI protocol lets you choose from a range of 128 patches.
Bank Select Message Many devices have more than 128 patches, which are arranged in banks.
The Bank Select Message is a MIDI command that specifies the bank of patches from which to choose.
Local Control A controller setting found on most
MIDI keyboards that lets them play their own sound source. Disabling “local control” ensures that a device’s internal sound source is only played by external MIDI messages (such as those sent from Pro Tools when MIDI in Pro Tools is routed to the MIDI keyboard). When using
Pro Tools, “local control” should usually be disabled. When “local control” is off, your keyboard still transmits data to its MIDI OUT port.
Continuous Controller Events MIDI instructions that allow real-time changes to notes that are currently sounding. These include pitch bend, modulation, volume, pan, and many others.
Chapter 2: Pro Tools Concepts 13
System Exclusive Data MIDI data commonly used for sending and retrieving patch parameter information for storage purposes.
Common MIDI Misconceptions
MIDI is not audio, and by itself makes no sound.
MIDI is control information only. It is like the piano roll for a player piano; it provides control information for what note to play when, for how long, and at what volume. For example, when you strike a key on a MIDI keyboard, it sends a message to a MIDI instrument or tone generator to play that particular note at that particular velocity. This could be its internal tone generator, an external MIDI instrument, or an instrument plug-in, which can be contained completely within Pro Tools. In order to create or play a MIDI recording, you must have a MIDI instrument. Audio from your instrument can be sent to an external mixer or monitored through your Pro Tools audio interface.
If you are using an external MIDI instrument, it must be connected to MIDI ports that are recognized by your computer. These ports can be on a
Pro Tools interface that has MIDI ports (such as an Mbox 2) or some other MIDI interface (such as a Digidesign MIDI I/O).
Signal paths for external MIDI instruments
To actually hear an external MIDI instrument, you need to connect its audio outputs to a mixing console or connect it to one of the audio inputs of your Pro Tools audio interface.
Just as each Pro Tools system has unique hardware features, each MIDI device has its own features (and limitations) as to the number of voices and instruments it can play at one time.
Consult the device’s documentation for information on its capabilities.
Virtual MIDI Nodes
When using MIDI with instrument plug-ins in
Pro Tools, virtual MIDI nodes are created. These nodes act like MIDI ports and provide software
MIDI connections between Pro Tools and other
MIDI software, such as instrument plug-ins. For example, when you insert Propellerhead’s Reason as a ReWire client on a track, its various
MIDI inputs to Reason become available to
Pro Tools MIDI and Instrument track MIDI outputs.
DigiBase
DigiBase is a database management tool for
Pro Tools. DigiBase expands upon basic
Pro Tools search and import capabilities by providing powerful tools to manage your data both inside and outside of your sessions, on any hard drive connected to the system.
A database is a way of organizing data such that it can easily be searched, sorted, managed, and utilized. Your checkbook is an example of a database file. For every check you write, you enter a new record. That record contains information about the check, such as when you wrote it, to whom you wrote it, and for what amount. This information is written in specific columns, or fields. Everything you need to know (the check’s metadata ) is there, even though the check itself is not.
14 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 3: Keyboard and Right-Click
Mouse Shortcuts
This chapter provides an overview of Pro Tools keyboard and mouse shortcuts.
A PDF listing of all shortcuts is available in
Pro Tools. Choose Help > Keyboard Shortcuts.
Right-Click Mouse Shortcuts
Pro Tools provides Right-click shortcuts for choosing various Pro Tools commands and menus with any Right-click capable mouse.
For a complete list of Right-click shortcuts, refer to the PDF versions of the Keyboard
Shortcuts Guides .
Global Key Commands
This section shows keyboard shortcuts that apply to many functions in Pro Tools.
Track Functions
Pro Tools provides keyboard shortcuts for the following track functions:
• Changing Automation mode
• Enabling playlists
• Adding plug-ins
• Record enabling, soloing, and muting tracks
• Record safing and solo safing tracks
• Assigning inputs, outputs, and sends
• Toggling volume/peak/delay display
• Clearing meters
• Changing track heights
Command
Apply action to all channel strips/tracks
Apply action to selected channel strips/tracks
Windows
Alt+ action
Alt+
Shift+ action
Mac
Option+ action
Option+
Shift+ action
Chapter 3: Keyboard and Right-Click Mouse Shortcuts 15
List and Parameter Selection
Pro Tools provides keyboard shortcuts for the following items:
• Selection of tracks in Track List
• Enabling of groups in Group List
• Automation Enable window parameters
• Setting Memory Location parameters
Command
Toggle item and set all others to same new state
Toggle item and set all others to opposite state
Windows Mac
Alt-click item Option-click item
Control-click item
Commandclick item
Controls and Editing Tools
Pro Tools provides keyboard shortcuts for moving plug-in controls, faders and sliders, the
Scrubber, and automation data.
Command Windows
Fine adjustment of sliders, knobs, and breakpoints
Hold Control while clicking the item
Mac
Hold Command while clicking the item
There are three types of Keyboard Focus:
Commands Keyboard Focus When selected, this provides a wide range of single key shortcuts from the QWERTY keyboard for editing and playing.
With Commands Keyboard Focus disabled, you can still access any of its key shortcuts by pressing the Start key (Windows) or Control (Mac) along with the key.
Region List Keyboard Focus When selected, audio regions, MIDI regions, and Region Groups can be located and selected in the Region List by typing the first few letters of the region’s name.
Group List Keyboard Focus When selected, Mix and Edit Groups can be enabled or disabled by typing the Group ID letter (in either the Mix or
Edit window).
Commands Keyboard Focus
(in the Edit Window bar)
Group List
Keyboard Focus
Region List
Keyboard Focus
Keyboard Focus
The Keyboard Focus in Pro Tools determines how the alpha keys function. Depending on which Keyboard Focus is enabled, you can use the keys on your QWERTY (alpha) keyboard to select regions in the Region List, enable or disable groups, or perform an edit or play command.
You can only enable one of the three Keyboard
Focus modes at a time. Enabling a Keyboard Focus will disable the one previously enabled.
Keyboard Focus buttons
16 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To set the Keyboard Focus, do one of the following:
â–
Click the a–z button for the focus you want to enable.
– or –
â–
While pressing Control+Alt (Windows) or
Command+Option (Mac), press one of the following keys: 1 (Commands), 2 (Region List), or
3 (Group List).
Although multiple plug-in windows can have a keyboard focus enabled, only the front-most window receives any keyboard input.
Numeric Keypad Modes
The Operation preference for Numeric Keypad mode determines how the numeric keypad functions for Transport.
There are two Shuttle Lock modes (Classic and
Transport), and one Shuttle mode.
No matter which Numeric Keypad mode is selected, you can always use the numeric keypad to select and enter values in the Event Edit Area,
Edit Selection indicators, Main and Sub
Counters, and Transport fields.
To set the Numeric Keypad Mode:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the Operation tab.
2 In the Transport section, select a Numeric Keypad mode (Classic, Transport, or Shuttle).
3 Click OK.
For more information on each mode, see
“Numeric Keypad Mode” on page 67.
Shuttle Lock Modes
With either Shuttle Lock mode (Classic or Transport) you can use the numeric keypad to shuttle forward or backwards at specific speeds.
• 5 is normal speed.
• 6–9 provide increasingly faster fast-forward speeds.
• 1–4 provide progressively faster rewind speeds (4 is the slowest rewind Shuttle Lock speed, 1 is the fastest).
• Press 0 to stop Shuttle Lock, then press the number to resume Shuttle Lock speed.
• Press Escape or Spacebar to exit Shuttle
Lock mode.
Custom Shuttle Lock Speed
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
The highest fast-forward Shuttle Lock speed
(key 9) can be customized.
For information, see “Custom Shuttle Lock
Classic Mode
This mode emulates the way Pro Tools worked in versions lower than 5.0. With the Numeric
Keypad mode set to Classic, you can:
• Play up to two tracks of audio in Shuttle
Lock mode. Press the Start key (Windows) or Control (Mac), followed by 1–9 for different play speeds.
• Press Plus or Minus to reverse direction.
• Press 0 to stop Shuttle Lock, then press the number to resume Shuttle Lock speed.
• Press Escape or Spacebar to exit Shuttle
Lock mode.
• Recall Memory Locations by typing the
Memory Location, followed by a Period (.).
Chapter 3: Keyboard and Right-Click Mouse Shortcuts 17
Transport Mode
This mode allows you to set a number of record and play functions, and also operate the Trans-
: port from the numeric keypad.
Function Key
Click on/off 7
Countoff on/off
MIDI Merge/Replace mode
8
9
Loop Playback mode on/off
Loop Record mode on/off
QuickPunch mode on/off
Rewind
4
5
6
1
Fast Forward
Record enable
Play/Stop
2
3
0
With the Numeric Keypad mode set to Transport, you can also:
• Play up to two tracks of audio in Shuttle
Lock mode. Press the Start key (Windows) or Control (Mac), followed by 1–9 for different play speeds.
• Press Plus or Minus to reverse direction.
• Press 0 to stop Shuttle Lock, then press the number to resume Shuttle Lock speed.
• Press Escape or Spacebar to exit Shuttle
Lock mode.
• Recall Memory Locations by typing Period
(.), the Memory Location number, and Period (.) again.
Shuttle Mode
(Pro Tools HD Only)
:
Pro Tools offers another form of shuttling, different from that of the two Shuttle Lock modes.
With the Numeric Keypad mode set to Shuttle, playback of the current Edit selection is triggered by pressing and holding the keys on the numeric keypad—playback stops once the keys are released. Various playback speeds are available in both forward and reverse. In this mode, pre- and post-roll are ignored.
Playback Speeds Key
1x Forward 6
1x Rewind
4x Forward
4
9
4x Rewind
1/4x Forward
1/4x Rewind
1/2x Forward
7
3
1
5+6
1/2x Rewind
2x Forward
2x Rewind
1/16x Forward
1/16x Rewind
Loop Selection (1x)
5+4
8+9
8+7
2+3
2+1
0
With the Numeric Keypad mode set to Shuttle, you can also:
• Recall Memory Locations by typing Period (.), the Memory Location number, and Period (.) again.
Shuttle Lock modes are not available when the Numeric Keypad mode is set to Shuttle.
18 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Part II: System Configuration
19
20
Chapter 4: Pro Tools Systems
There are four types of Pro Tools systems:
Pro Tools|HD These systems include
Pro Tools HD
®
software for Pro Tools|HD system hardware.
Pro Tools LE These systems include Pro Tools LE software for Digi 002
®
, Digi 002 Rack
™
, Mbox
®
2, Mbox 2 Pro, Mbox 2 Mini, or Mbox hardware.
Pro Tools M-Powered These systems include
Pro Tools M-Powered software for Digidesignqualified M-Audio
®
interfaces.
Pro Tools Academic These systems include
Pro Tools Academic software for Mbox 2 and for
Digidesign-qualified M-Audio
®
interfaces.
References to Pro Tools LE in this guide are usually interchangeable with Pro Tools M-
Powered or Pro Tools Academic, except as noted in the Pro Tools M-Powered and Academic Getting Started Guides.
Optional Systems
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 Pro Tools LE systems that have been upgraded with the
DV Toolkit
™
2 software option.
Pro Tools LE or M-Powered with Music Production
Toolkit Pro Tools LE or M-Powered systems that have been upgraded with the Music Production
Toolkit software option.
Pro Tools|HD Systems
Pro Tools|HD systems are available in the con-
figurations shown on page 22. Each system re-
quires at least one Digidesign audio interface
(sold separately). Pro Tools|HD systems can be expanded by adding Pro Tools|HD system cards to increase track count, add to the amount of possible plug-in and mixer processing, and connect additional audio interfaces.
Pro Tools system performance depends on factors such as computer processor speed, amount of system memory, and hard drive performance. Contact your Digidesign dealer or visit the Digidesign website
(www.digidesign.com) for the latest system requirements and compatibility information.
Chapter 4: Pro Tools Systems 21
Pro Tools|HD Systems
Pro Tools|HD 1
Includes:
• HD Core card
• Pro Tools HD software
Pro Tools|HD 2 Accel
Includes:
• HD Core card
• HD Accel card
• Pro Tools HD software
Pro Tools|HD 3 Accel
Includes:
• HD Core card
• Two HD Accel cards
• Pro Tools HD software
Pro Tools|HD 2
Includes:
• HD Core card
• HD Process card
• Pro Tools HD software
Pro Tools|HD 3
Includes:
• HD Core card
• Two HD Process cards
• Pro Tools HD software
Expanded Pro Tools|HD Systems
Any Pro Tools|HD system can be expanded by adding additional HD Process or HD Accel cards.
For more information, see the Expanded Systems
Guide .
HD Accel and HD Process cards can be used in the same system. For more information, refer to the Pro Tools|HD Getting Started
Guide.
Supported Audio Interfaces
(Pro Tools|HD Systems Only)
The following audio interfaces are compatible with Pro Tools|HD systems:
• 192 I/O™
• 192 Digital I/O™
• 96 I/O™
• 96i I/O™
Pro Tools|HD systems require the use of at least one 192 I/O, 192 Digital I/O, 96 I/O, or 96i I/O.
The following “Legacy” Digidesign audio interfaces are supported with Pro Tools|HD systems:
• 888|24 I/O™ and 882|20 I/O™
• 1622 I/O™
• 24-bit ADAT Bridge I/O™
“Legacy” I/Os (such as 888|24 I/O) require the use of at least one 192 I/O, 192 Digital
I/O, 96 I/O, or 96i I/O.
22 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Pro Tools|HD System Playback, Recording and Voice Limits
The following table lists the audio playback, recording, and voiceable track limits of each type of
Pro Tools|HD system. Playback and recording voices refer to the number of unique simultaneous playback and record tracks on your system. Total voiceable tracks refers to the maximum number of audio tracks that can share the available voices on your system. (Mono tracks take up one voice. Stereo and multichannel tracks take up one voice per channel.) Voice limits are dependent on the session sample rate and the number of DSP chips dedicated to the system’s Playback Engine.
Pro Tools|HD systems can open sessions with up to 256 audio tracks, but any audio tracks beyond that system’s voiceable track limit will be automatically set to Voice Off.
Table 5. Pro Tools|HD system audio playback, recording and voice limits
Core System Type
Sample
Rate
(kHz)
Playback
Voices
(Mono Tracks of
Simultaneous
Playback)
Pro Tools|HD 1 44.1/48
88.2/96
96
48
Pro Tools|HD Accel 2,
Pro Tools|HD Accel 3
176.4/192
44.1/48
88.2/96
176.4/192
12
192
96
36
Pro Tools|HD 2,
Pro Tools|HD 3, or any expanded Pro Tools|HD system
44.1/48
88.2/96
176.4/192
128
64
24
12
192
96
36
Recording
Voices
(Mono Tracks of
Simultaneous
Recording)
96
48
128
64
24
Total
Voiceable
Tracks
120
36
224
80
24
112
48
12
224
Pro Tools|HD systems provide up to 160 Auxiliary Input tracks and a total of 128 internal mix busses.
These systems also provide up to 5 inserts and 10 sends per track (depending on the DSP capacity of your system). Pro Tools|HD systems also support up to 128 Instrument tracks, 256 MIDI tracks, 128
VCA tracks, and multiple video tracks.
Chapter 4: Pro Tools Systems 23
Audio Interfaces for Pro Tools|HD Systems
Table 6 lists the input and output capabilities of the various audio interfaces for Pro Tools|HD systems.
Table 6. Pro Tools|HD system audio interface channel capabilities
Interface Type
Number of I/O
Channels
Sample Rates
(kHz)
A/D
Conversion
192 I/O 16 in/16 out 24-bit
192 Digital I/O 16 in/16 out
44.1, 48, 88.2,
96, 176.4, 192
44.1, 48, 88.2,
96, 176.4, 192
None
96 I/O 16 in/16 out 24-bit
96i I/O
888|24 I/O
16 in/2 out
8 in/8 out
44.1, 48, 88.2,
96
44.1, 48, 88.2,
96
44.1, 48
24-bit
24-bit
882|20 I/O
1622 I/O
24-bit ADAT
Bridge I/O
8 in/8 out
16 in/2 out
16 in/16 out
44.1, 48
44.1, 48
44.1, 48
20-bit
20-bit
None
D/A
Conversion
24-bit
None
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit (or
20-bit, on older I/O)
20-bit
24-bit
24-bit
Digital I/O
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
You can expand your Pro Tools|HD system by adding Pro Tools|HD cards to your computer, either directly in the computer or using an expansion chassis. Expanding your Pro Tools system will provide an increased track count, add to the amount of possible plug-in and mixer processing, and let you connect additional audio interfaces. For more information, see the Expanded Systems Guide .
“Legacy” I/Os (such as 888|24 I/O) require the use of at least one 192 I/O, 192 Digital I/O, 96 I/O, or 96i I/O.
24 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Pro Tools LE Systems
Pro Tools LE-based systems are available in the following configurations:
Digi 002
A Digi 002 system includes:
• Pro Tools LE software
• Digi 002 audio and MIDI interface, with control surface
Digi 002 Rack
A Digi 002 Rack system includes:
• Pro Tools LE software
• Digi 002 audio and MIDI interface
Mbox 2 Pro
An Mbox 2 system includes:
• Pro Tools LE software
• Mbox 2 Pro audio and MIDI interface
Mbox 2
An Mbox 2 system includes:
• Pro Tools LE software
• Mbox 2 audio and MIDI interface
Mbox 2 Mini
An Mbox 2 system includes:
• Pro Tools LE software
• Mbox 2 Mini audio interface
Mbox
An Mbox system includes:
• Pro Tools LE software
• Mbox audio interface
Processing Capacity
The total processing capacity of a
Pro Tools LE system depends on the processing power of your computer. Contact your Digidesign dealer or visit Digidesign’s website (www.digidesign.com) for the latest system requirements and compatibility information.
Chapter 4: Pro Tools Systems 25
Pro Tools LE System Capabilities
Table 7 lists the playback, recording, and input and output capabilities of each Pro Tools LE system.
Mono tracks of simultaneous playback refers to the number of unique simultaneous playback and record tracks on your system. Total voiceable tracks refers to the maximum number of audio tracks that can share the available voices on your system. (Mono tracks take up a single audio track, while stereo tracks take up two tracks.) If you open a Pro Tools session created on a Pro Tools|HD system containing more than the number of tracks supported on the LE-based system, audio tracks beyond the LE system’s voiceable track limit will be automatically set to inactive.
Table 7. Pro Tools LE system audio playback, recording, and channel capabilities
System
Type
Mono Tracks of
Simultaneous
Playback
Total
Voiceable
Tracks
Number of I/O
Channels
A/D
Conversion
D/A
Conversion
Digi 002 or
Digi 002
Rack
Mbox 2
Pro
32
32
128
128 up to 18 in/18 out
(48 kHz or lower) up to 10 in/10 out
(88.2 or 96 kHz) up to 6 in/8 out
(48 kHz or lower) up to 4 in/6 out
(88.2 or 96 kHz)
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
Digital
I/O
24-bit
24-bit
Mbox 2 or Mbox
Mbox 2
Mini
32
32
128
128 up to 2 in/2 out up to 2 in/2 out
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
24-bit
N/A
Pro Tools LE systems provide up to 128 Auxiliary Input tracks, a total of 32 internal mix busses, and up to 5 inserts and 10 sends per track (depending on your computer’s processing capacity). In addition, Pro Tools LE systems support up to 32 Instrument tracks and 256 MIDI tracks. Pro Tools LE also supports a single QuickTime video track.
For details on transferring session material between Pro Tools|HD and Pro Tools LE systems, see
“Sharing Sessions Created on Different Pro Tools Systems” on page 248.
26 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Pro Tools M-Powered
A Pro Tools M-Powered system includes:
• Pro Tools M-Powered software
• Digidesign-qualified M-Audio interface (not supplied with M-Powered software)
References to Pro Tools LE in this guide are usually interchangeable with Pro Tools
M-Powered, except as noted in the
Pro Tools M-Powered Getting Started
Guide.
For the most current list of Digidesign-qualified M-Audio interfaces, visit the Digidesign website (www.digidesign.com) .
Pro Tools Academic
A Pro Tools Academic system includes:
• Pro Tools Academic software
• One of the following:
• Mbox 2 audio and MIDI interface
– or –
• Digidesign-qualified M-Audio interface
References to Pro Tools LE in this guide are usually interchangeable with Pro Tools Academic, except as noted in the Pro Tools Academic Getting Started Guide.
For the most current list of Digidesign-qualified M-Audio interfaces, see the Digidesign website (www.digidesign.com) .
DV Toolkit 2 and Music
Production Toolkit
In addition to all the regular capabilities provided with Pro Tools LE and Pro Tools M-Powered, Pro Tools LE systems equipped with
DV Toolkit 2 and Pro Tools LE and M-Powered systems equipped with Music Production Toolkit provide expanded capabilities.
Support for 48 Mono or Stereo
Tracks
Pro Tools LE systems with the DV Toolkit 2 option and Pro Tools LE or M-Powered systems with the Music Production Toolkit option let you play or record up to 48 simultaneous stereo or mono tracks. These higher track counts may require additional drives and faster Digidesignqualified computers.
Visit the Digidesign website for more information (www.digidesign.com).
For more information on track priority and
voice assignment, see “Voice Assignment with Toolkit Options” on page 138.
Support for Up to 24 QuickPunch
Tracks
With DV Toolkit 2 or Music Production Toolkit, up to 24 mono or stereo audio tracks can be simultaneously recorded with QuickPunch.
The combination of audio tracks and
QuickPunch tracks cannot be greater than
48.
Chapter 4: Pro Tools Systems 27
DV Toolkit 2 Capabilitites
(Pro Tools LE Only)
Pro Tools LE Features
DV Toolkit 2 enables the following features for working with audio, film, video, or digital video in Pro Tools LE:
• Session and track features:
• Up to 48 audio tracks of simultaneous playback or recording, mono or stereo
• Multiple video tracks, with multiple video playlists and multiple QuickTime movies per track.
• Ability to use QuickPunch on up to 24 tracks
• Import Session Data options (Destination
Track Names, Time Code Mapping, Find
Matching Tracks, Session Data to Import,
Track Playlist)
• MP3 export option (for bounce recording or exporting a region as an MP3 file)
• DigiBase Pro (including support for Catalog browsers and the ability to search on multiple criteria simultaneously in DigiBase browsers)
• Editing features:
• Universe window
• Continuous Scroll
• Scrub Trim tool
• Replace Region command
• TCE Edit to Timeline Selection command
• Selection of alternate field recorder audio channels in the Pro Tools timeline
• Expanding alternate field recorder audio channels to new tracks
• Mixing and Automation features
• Snapshot automation for writing or trimming automation data
• Glide Automation commands
28 Pro Tools Reference Guide
• Time code and synchronization features:
• Timebase rulers (Time Code and
Feet+Frames)
• Time Code Rate selector
• Feet+Frame Rate selector
• Current Time Code Position command
• Current Feet+Frames Position command
• Use Subframes option
• Audio Rate Pull Up and Pull Down
• Video Rate Pull Up and Pull Down
Additional Software
DV Toolkit 2 includes the following additional software for working with audio or digital video in Pro Tools LE:
DINR™ (Digidesign Intelligent Noise Reduction™)
LE Plug-in For reducing noise in audio.
DigiTranslator
™
Software Option For exchanging audio and video files, and sequences with other
AAF and OMFI-compatible applications.
TL Space Native
™
Convolution Reverb
Plug-in For applying convolution reverb to your audio.
VocALign Project Plug-in from Synchro Arts Software For automatically adjusting the timing of one audio signal to match another.
Music Production Toolkit
Overview
(Pro Tools LE and Pro Tools M-Powered Only)
Pro Tools Features
Music Production Toolkit enables the following features in Pro Tools LE and M-Powered:
• Session and track features:
• Up to 48 audio tracks of simultaneous playback or recording, mono or stereo
• Ability to use QuickPunch on up to 24 tracks
• MP3 export option (for bounce recording or exporting a region as an MP3 file)
• Beat Detective features:
• Ability to apply Beat Detective across multiple tracks
• Collection Mode
Additional Software
Music Production Toolkit includes the following additional software for working with
Pro Tools LE and M-Powered:
DINR
™
(Digidesign Intelligent Noise Reduction™)
LE Plug-in For reducing noise in audio.
Hybrid RTAS Synthesizer Plug-in For use as a virtual instrument in your Pro Tools sessions.
Smack!
™
LE Compressor Plug-in For applying compression to your audio.
SoundReplacer™ Plug-in For replacing one sound in a track with another (such as replacing only the snares in your drum track with a different one-hit sample)
TL Space Native
™
Convolution Reverb
Plug-in For applying convolution reverb to your audio.
Chapter 4: Pro Tools Systems 29
30 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 5: System Setup
Starting Up or Shutting Down
Your System
To ensure that the components of your
Pro Tools system communicate properly with each other, you need to start them in a particular order.
Start up your Pro Tools system in this order:
1 For Pro Tools|HD systems with an expansion chassis, turn on the chassis.
2 Turn on any external hard drives. Wait approximately ten seconds for them to spin up to speed.
3 Turn on any MIDI interfaces, MIDI devices, or synchronization peripherals.
4 Lower the volume of all output devices in your system.
5 Do one of the following, depending on your
Pro Tools system:
• For Pro Tools|HD systems, turn on your
Pro Tools audio interfaces. Wait at least fifteen seconds for your system hardware to initialize.
• For Pro Tools LE, M-Powered, and Academic systems that use hardware requiring external power (such as the Digi 002), turn on the hardware.
6 Turn on your computer.
7 Launch Pro Tools or any third-party audio or
MIDI applications.
Shut down your Pro Tools system in this order:
1 Quit Pro Tools and any other running applications.
To quit Pro Tools, choose File > Exit (Windows) or Pro Tools > Quit (Mac).
2 Turn off or lower the volume of all output devices in your system.
3 Turn off your computer.
4 Do one of the following depending on your
Pro Tools system:
• For Pro Tools|HD systems, turn off your
Pro Tools audio interfaces.
• For Pro Tools LE, M-Powered, and Academic systems that use hardware requiring external power (such as the Digi 002), turn off the hardware.
5 For Pro Tools|HD systems with an expansion chassis, turn off the chassis.
6 Turn off any MIDI interfaces, MIDI devices, or synchronization peripherals.
7 Turn off any external hard drives.
Chapter 5: System Setup 31
Configuring Pro Tools System
Settings (in the Playback
Engine)
Pro Tools lets you adjust the performance of your system by changing system settings that affect its capacity for processing, playback, and recording.
These system settings are available in the Playback Engine Dialog (Setup > Playback Engine).
In most cases, the default settings for your system provide optimum performance, but you may want to adjust them to accommodate large or processing-intensive Pro Tools sessions.
Hardware Buffer Size
The Hardware Buffer Size (H/W Buffer Size) controls the size of the hardware cache used to handle host-based tasks such as Real-Time Audio-
Suite (RTAS) plug-in processing.
â—† Lower Hardware Buffer Size settings reduce monitoring latency, and are useful when you are recording live input.
â—† Higher Hardware Buffer Size settings allow for more audio processing, and are useful when you are mixing large sessions and using more RTAS plug-ins.
In addition to causing slower screen response and monitoring latency, higher
Hardware Buffer Size settings can affect the accuracy of plug-in automation, mute data, and timing for MIDI tracks.
To change the Hardware Buffer Size:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
2 From the H/W Buffer Size pop-up menu, select the audio buffer size, in samples.
3 Click OK.
32 Pro Tools Reference Guide
RTAS Processors
The RTAS Processors setting determines the number of processors in your computer allocated for RTAS (real-time plug-ins) plug-in processing.
With computers that have multiple processors, or that feature multi-core processing or hyperthreading, this setting lets you enable multi-processor support for RTAS plug-ins. Used in combination with the CPU Usage Limit setting, the
RTAS Processors setting lets you control the way
RTAS processing and other Pro Tools tasks are handled by the system. For example:
• For sessions with large numbers of RTAS plugins, you can allocate 2 or more processors to
RTAS processing and set a high CPU Usage
Limit.
• For sessions with few RTAS plug-ins, you can allocate fewer processors to RTAS and set a low
CPU Usage Limit to leave more CPU resources available for automation accuracy, screen response, and video.
• Increase these settings to accommodate TDM to RTAS plug-in conversion. Conversely, decrease these settings if you are only using
TDM plug-ins or are converting RTAS plug-ins to TDM. TDM/RTAS conversion can be desirable during recording, depending on latency, voicing needs, and record-monitoring capabilities of the specific TDM and RTAS plug-ins.
• Depending on the importance of video and overall screen response, and on the density of automation being employed, try different combinations of RTAS Processing and CPU
Usage Limit settings to achieve the best results. For example, to improve screen response in a medium-sized session using a moderate number of RTAS plug-ins, try reducing the number of RTAS plug-ins, but keep the
CPU Usage Limit set to the maximum (99%) on a single processor system.
To set the number of RTAS Processors:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
that you are at the limit of available resources, increase the number of RTAS processors and adjust the CPU Usage Limit setting. (For more in-
formation, see “System Usage” on page 42.)
Playback Engine dialog
2 From the RTAS Processing pop-up menu, select the number of available processors you want to allocate. The number of processors available varies depending on how many processors are available on your computer:
• Choose 1 Processor to limit RTAS processing to one CPU in the system.
• Choose 2 Processors to enable load balancing across two available processors.
• On systems running four or more processors, choose the desired number of RTAS processors as needed.
3 Click OK.
System Usage Window and RTAS Processing
The System Usage window displays the combined amount of RTAS processing occurring on all enabled processors with a single indicator, regardless of how many processors are available in the system. If the System Usage Window shows
CPU Usage Limit
The CPU Usage Limit controls the percentage of
CPU resources allocated to Pro Tools host processing tasks. Used in combination with the
RTAS Processors setting, the CPU Usage Limit setting lets you control the way Pro Tools tasks are carried out by the system.
â—† Lower CPU Usage Limit settings limit the effect of Pro Tools processing on other CPU-intensive tasks, such as screen redraws, and are useful when you are experiencing slow system response, or when running other applications at the same time as Pro Tools.
â—† Higher CPU Usage Limit settings allocate more processing power to Pro Tools, and are useful for playing back large sessions or using more RTAS plug-ins.
The maximum CPU Usage Limit is 85 percent for single-processor computers (except for
Digi 002, which has a limit of 99 percent), and
99 percent for multiprocessor computers (which dedicate one entire processor to Pro Tools).
On multiprocessor computers, the maximum
CPU Usage Limit is reduced when you use all your processors (as selected in the RTAS Processing pop-up menu). For example, on dual-processors, the limit will be 90%. On four-processor computers, the limit will be 95%.
Increasing the CPU Usage Limit may slow down screen responses on slower computers.
Chapter 5: System Setup 33
To change the CPU Usage Limit:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
2 From the CPU Usage Limit pop-up menu, select the percentage of CPU processing you want to allocate to Pro Tools.
3 Click OK.
Enabling RTAS Error Suppression
To enable RTAS error suppression:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
RTAS Engine Options
Pro Tools provides two RTAS Engine options in the Playback Engine dialog for suppressing RTAS error reporting during playback and recording.
This is especially useful when working with instrument plug-ins.
You should only enable RTAS error suppression if you are experiencing frequent RTAS errors that are interrupting your creative workflow.
When RTAS error suppression is enabled, you can experience a degradation of audio quality.
However, this may be acceptable in order to avoid interrupting playback and recording when working with instrument plug-ins. Be sure to disable RTAS error suppression when you need to ensure the highest possible audio quality, such as for a final mix.
Playback Engine dialog, Mbox 2
2 Select Ignore Errors During Playback/Record.
3 If available, you can also select Minimize Additional I/O Latency.
4 Click OK.
34 Pro Tools Reference Guide
RTAS Error Suppression Options
Ignore Errors During Playback/Record When enabled, Pro Tools continues to play and record even if the RTAS processing requirements exceed the selected CPU Usage Limit. This can result in pops and clicks in the audio, but does not stop the transport.
Minimize Additional I/O Latency When enabled, any additional latency due to suppressing RTAS errors during playback and record is minimized to 128 samples. Suppressing RTAS errors requires at least 128 samples of additional buffering on some systems. If this option is disabled, the buffer is half the H/W Buffer Size, or at least
128 samples (whichever is greater). If you are on an older, slower computer, you may want to disable this option to avoid adverse performance.
This option is only available if the Ignore Errors
During Playback/Record option is enabled and the Pro Tools system you are using requires additional buffering for RTAS error suppression, as follows:
• Windows XP:
• Mbox 2 Pro
• Digidesign-qualified M-Audio interfaces with Pro Tools M-Powered or Academic
• Mac OS X:
• Mbox
• Mbox 2
• Mbox 2 Mini
• Mbox 2 Pro
• Digi 002 and 002 Rack
• All Pro Tools M-Powered systems
• All Pro Tools Academic systems
Number of Voices
(Pro Tools HD Only)
On Pro Tools|HD systems, the Number of Voices setting lets you control the number of available voices and how those voices are allocated to
DSPs in your system. For example, the default number of voices on a Pro Tools|HD 1 system is
48 voices, using one DSP (at sample rates of
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz).
Changing the number of voices affects
DSP usage, the total number of voiceable tracks, and overall system performance.
Depending on the session sample rate and the number of Pro Tools|HD cards in your system, there are different choices for voice count. For voice limits on different Pro Tools|HD systems,
see “Pro Tools|HD System Playback, Recording and Voice Limits” on page 23.
To change the number of voices and DSP to allocate for voicing:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
Playback Engine dialog, Ignore Errors During
Playback/Record option enabled
Chapter 5: System Setup 35
2 Select the number of voices and DSPs to allocate for voicing by selecting a value from the
Number of Voices pop-up menu as follows:
• Select higher voice numbers when your
Pro Tools|HD cards are the only PCI cards in your computer, or when you are using an expansion chassis to run higher track counts.
• Select medium voice numbers when your
Pro Tools|HD cards are in an expansion chassis, or when you are using other PCI cards along with Pro Tools|HD cards.
• Select minimum voice numbers if you are using high-bandwidth PCI cards (such as video capture cards) along with your
Pro Tools|HD cards. In addition, to free up
DSP for plug-ins and processing, select the minimum number of voices and DSPs needed to play back the current session.
3 Click OK.
Default Sample Rate
The Sample Rate setting appears as the default sample rate when you create a new session.
With Pro Tools HD, the Sample Rate setting can affect the number of available voices.
To change the default Sample Rate:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
2 Select the sample rate from the Sample Rate pop-up menu.
This setting is available only when there is no session open. Otherwise, the current session sample rate is displayed, but cannot be changed.
3 Click OK.
You can change the sample rate when creating a new Pro Tools session by selecting a different sample rate in the New Session dialog. (
See “Creating a New Session” on page 83.)
Delay Compensation Engine
(Pro Tools HD Only)
The Delay Compensation Engine lets you manage DSP delays in the Pro Tools mixer.
There are three settings in the Playback Engine dialog for dedicating DSP resources for Delay
Compensation:
None Allocates no DSP resources for Delay Compensation.
Short Allocates minimal DSP resources for Delay
Compensation for each channel. This is the most efficient setting for Pro Tools|HD Accel systems.
Long Allocates maximum DSP resources for Delay Compensation for each channel. Long Delay
Compensation uses the SRAM contained on
DSPs needed by DSP-intensive plug-ins.
36 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To configure the Delay Compensation Engine:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
2 From the Delay Compensation Engine pop-up menu, select a Delay compensation setting.
3 Click OK.
The Delay Compensation setting is saved as a session and system preference.
For more information, see “Delay Compensation” on page 656.
DAE Playback Buffer Size
The DAE Playback Buffer Size determines the amount of memory DAE allocates for disk buffers. The optimum DAE Playback Buffer Size for most disk operations is Level 2.
â—† DAE Playback Buffer Size settings lower than
Level 2 may improve playback and recording initiation speed, but may make it difficult to play or record tracks reliably with sessions containing a large number of tracks or a high density of edits, or running on slower or heavily fragmented hard drives.
â—† DAE Playback Buffer Size settings higher than
Level 2 will allow for a higher density of edits in a session or a higher track count when using slower hard drives. However, a higher setting can also cause a time lag to occur when starting playback or recording, and result in a longer audible time lag while editing during playback.
Using a larger DAE Playback Buffer Size leaves less system memory for other tasks.
The default setting of Level 2 is recommended unless you are encountering -9073
(“Disk too slow or fragmented”) errors.
To change the DAE Playback Buffer Size:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
Playback Engine dialog
2 From the DAE Playback Buffer pop-up menu, select a buffer size. Memory requirements for each setting are shown at the bottom of the
Playback Engine dialog.
3 Click OK.
4 If Pro Tools needs more system memory for the DAE Playback Buffer, it will prompt you to restart your computer.
Chapter 5: System Setup 37
System Memory Allocation
(Pro Tools HD Only)
When you start your computer, Pro Tools automatically reserves a portion of system memory for the DAE Playback Buffer. This reserved memory is unavailable to other applications, even if
Pro Tools is not running.
You can set Pro Tools to reserve only the minimum amount of required memory, so that system memory is available to other applications.
To minimize system memory allocation:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
2 Select the “Minimize System Memory Allocation” option.
3 Click OK.
4 Do one of the following:
• On Windows systems, restart your computer.
– or –
• On Mac systems, if prompted, enter your password, then restart your computer.
Configuring Pro Tools
Hardware Settings
Pro Tools allows you to configure the signal routing, digital I/O format, default sample rate, clock source, and other hardware-based settings depending on your system configuration.
The following section outlines the configuration of a Pro Tools|HD system with one or more
Pro Tools|HD interfaces (with one or more Legacy interfaces attached).
To configure another Pro Tools system, refer to the Getting Started Guide that came with your system.
Configuring Pro Tools|HD
Hardware
On Pro Tools|HD systems, you configure Hardware settings for each audio interface connected to your system. For example, Pro Tools|HD systems can have 192 I/O, 192 Digital I/O, 96 I/O, or 96i I/O audio interfaces connected to
HD Core and HD Accel or HD Process cards in the system. The 192 I/O, 192 Digital I/O, and
96 I/O can have additional interfaces attached
(including older Digidesign audio interfaces—
Legacy I/Os —such as the 888|24 I/O, 882|20 I/O or 1622 I/O). For more information, see
Chapter 4, “Pro Tools Systems.”
38 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Configuring Hardware Setup
The Main page of the Hardware Setup dialog is where you define which physical inputs and outputs on your audio interface are routed to available inputs and outputs in Pro Tools.
Hardware Setup dialog for 96 I/O (Main page)
Additional pages are available to configure other controls for each audio interface (such as setting operating levels). For details, refer to the Getting
Started Guide for your system, or to the guide for your audio interface.
Identify audio interface connections at any time by selecting the interface name in the
Peripherals list, then clicking Identify. All the LEDs on the interface front panel illuminate.
To configure audio interfaces on a Pro Tools|HD system:
1 Choose Setup > Hardware.
2 From the Peripherals list, select the Digidesign audio interface connected to the first card in your system. This will be the interface at the top of the list.
3 Click the Main tab.
4 From the Clock Source pop-up menu, select the appropriate clock source for the system. In many cases, you will use Internal. The other choices are for resolving Pro Tools to external clock sources. Depending on your audio interface, Clock Source options can include:
AES/EBU [Encl], S/PDIF, Optical [Encl], AES/EBU
1–8, TDIF, ADAT, and Word Clock (optional
Word Clock rates are available when operating at higher sample rates).
5 From the Ext. Clock Output pop-up menu, select the appropriate clock output to send to devices attached to your audio interface.
6 Select which digital I/O port on your audio interface enclosure is active under Digital Format.
Choices include: AES/EBU, S/PDIF, and Optical
(S/PDIF). Selecting Optical (S/PDIF) resets the
Optical I/O port (which is, by default, eight channels of ADAT I/O) to two channels of
S/PDIF Optical I/O.
7 For S/PDIF compatibility with Tascam DA-30
DAT recorders select the Tascam option under
S/PDIF Format.
8 For the 96 I/O and 96i I/O, click the Meters pop-up menu and select whether to meter the input or output signal.
9 From the Input and Output pop-up menus, select the physical ports (such as Analog 1–2 or
Optical 1–2), that will be routed to the corresponding Pro Tools input and output channels
(such as Ch 1–2 or Ch 3–4), listed on the left side of the Main page.
Inputs and outputs of similar format are differentiated in the input and output channel popup menus. For example, the AES/EBU inputs and outputs in the 192 I/O enclosure are listed as AES/EBU [Encl], while the AES/EBU inputs and outputs on the factory-installed Digital I/O card are listed (in pairs) as AES/EBU 1–2,
AES/EBU 3–4, AES/EBU 5–6, and AES/EBU 7–8.
Chapter 5: System Setup 39
For 192 I/Os equipped with the optional
Digital I/O Card, the additional AES/EBU I/O ports on the optional card are listed as AES/EBU
9–10, AES/EBU 11–12, AES/EBU 13–14, and
AES/EBU 15–16.
10 Click other tabs (such as Analog In and Analog Out) for additional configuration options specific to the audio interface. These include:
• On the 96 I/O, configuring the operating levels of analog inputs and outputs (+4 dBu or –10 dBV).
• On the 96i I/O, configuring the operating levels of analog inputs and outputs (+4 dBu or –10 dBV).
• On the 192 I/O analog input, setting the input connector and Soft Limit
• On the 192 I/O, configuring the two sets of trims for analog inputs and outputs.
• On the 192 I/O and 192 Digital I/O, configuring real-time Sample Rate Conversion for digital inputs.
• On the 192 I/O and 192 I/O Digital, configuring inputs and outputs on any optional
A/D card, D/A card, or Digital I/O cards installed in the unit.
For more information on Hardware Setup controls for each Pro Tools|HD audio interface, refer to the Pro Tools|HD Getting
Started Guide or the guide for that audio interface.
11 Repeat the above steps for each additional
Pro Tools|HD audio interface.
Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll though peripherals in the Peripherals list.
12 Repeat the above steps for any Legacy I/Os connected to the Pro Tools|HD audio interfaces in your system. Before you can configure a Legacy I/O, it must first be initialized in Hardware
Setup.
40 Pro Tools Reference Guide
13 Click OK.
Initializing MIX-Series Legacy
Peripherals (on a Pro Tools|HD System)
Before you can configure a Legacy I/O, it must first be initialized in Hardware Setup.
To initialize a Legacy I/O on a Pro Tools|HD system:
1
Start up your Pro Tools system. See “Starting
Up or Shutting Down Your System” on page 31.
2 Make sure to lower the volume of your output devices. Very loud digital noise may be emitted before the Legacy I/O is initialized.
3 Turn on your Legacy I/O.
4 From the Peripherals list, choose the primary audio interface (the Pro Tools|HD interface to which your Legacy I/O is connected).
5 In the Main page of the Hardware Setup dialog, select the Legacy I/O option under Port Settings.
6 In the Peripherals list, “No Interface” is listed twice, directly below the primary audio interface. Click the first “No Interface.” An Interface pop-up menu appears in the Hardware Setup dialog, listing supported I/O choices.
7 From the Interface pop-up menu, select the type of Legacy I/O you connected.
The Main page updates with controls that can be configured.
8 Repeat the above steps for each additional
Legacy I/O.
For information on Hardware Setup controls for each Legacy audio interface, refer to the guide for that interface.
Configuring I/O Setup
The I/O Setup dialog provides a graphical representation of the signal routing for each connected audio interface, with controls to route physical ports on the audio interface to
Pro Tools inputs and outputs. These controls mirror the routing controls found in the Hardware Setup dialog—changes made to physical routing in one dialog are always reflected in the other.
The I/O Setup dialog lets you label and map
Pro Tools input, output, insert, and bus signal paths . The I/O Setup dialog also provides important audition, meter, and surround settings. For
more information, see Chapter 6, “I/O Setup.”
Routing a Pro Tools Output Pair to
Multiple Destinations
Pro Tools channel pairs can be routed to multiple outputs on an audio interface through the
Hardware Setup dialog. For example, if you assign both Analog 1–2 and Analog 3–4 interface outputs to Pro Tools Output pair 1–2, when you send a signal to Pro Tools Outputs 1–2, that signal will be routed simultaneously to both pairs of output ports on your audio interface.
This lets you send the same signal (such as a stereo pair, a stem mix, or a multichannel mix) to multiple destinations (such as multiple mastering devices).
To select multiple output ports for a Pro Tools output channel pair:
1 Choose Setup > Hardware.
2 From the Peripherals list, select an interface.
3 Click the Main tab.
4 Select an output port pair from an Output pop-up menu.
5 Start-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the same pop-up menu a second time to choose an additional output port pair.
The output name updates with a plus sign (“+”) before it to indicate that multiple output ports are selected. In the pop-up menu, each physical port pair assigned to that Pro Tools output pair is indicated by a check mark.
Hardware Setup dialog for 96 I/O (Main page)
6 Repeat the above steps to select additional output destinations. The only limit to output choices is the number of outputs available in your system.
Pro Tools output pairs can also be routed to multiple audio interface outputs in the
I/O Setup dialog. For more information, see
“Routing Hardware I/O to Pro Tools I/O” on page 48.
Chapter 5: System Setup 41
System Usage
About Processing Bandwidth
Meters in the System Usage window indicate how much of your system’s processing power is being used in processing audio, and when writing and playing back automation.
Pro Tools HD, LE, M-Powered, and Academic have three common meters, showing PCI bus activity, CPU processing activity, and Disk processing activity.
System activity meters
System Usage window (Pro Tools LE shown)
As these meters approach their limits, native processing and recording or playback of automation data can be affected.
With Pro Tools HD, there are addition meters, showing TDM Time Slot usage and DSP usage of each Pro Tools|HD system card.
System activity meters
TDM Time Slot usage
DSP usage
If CPU or PCI Activity are high, a system error may occur. If Disk Activity is high, Pro Tools may miss playback of some automation data during particularly dense periods of activity, such as while using the Bounce to Disk command.
To monitor the usage of resources during a
Pro Tools session:
â– Choose Window > System Usage.
For more information, see “Bounce to Disk” on page 746.
To reduce processing load, try one of the following:
â– Reduce the density of automation in places where it shows the most activity. For details, see
“Thinning Automation” on page 711.
â– Turn off meters in Sends View, if enabled (by disabling Show Meters in Sends View in the Dis-
play Preferences page). For details, see “Individual Send Views and Meters” on page 642.
System Usage Views
(Pro Tools HD Only)
With Pro Tools HD, there are five different System Usage Views: Small, Large, Detailed, Gas
Gauge, and Activity Only. The Detailed and Gas
Gauge formats show the percentage of each DSP chip in use.
To change the System Usage View:
â– Choose View > System Usage, and one of the
System Usage View formats (such as Small).
For information on using different views to monitor DSP usage, see the Pro Tools|HD
Getting Started Guide.
System Usage window (Pro Tools HD shown)
42 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 6: I/O Setup
The I/O Setup dialog provides tools to label, format, and map Pro Tools input, output, insert, or bus signal paths for each session.
A signal path is a logical grouping of multiple inputs, outputs or busses that has a single name and (channel) format. In Pro Tools, paths are similar to stems , as they are known in the film
and video industry (see “Stems and Stem Mixes” on page 45). The I/O Setup dialog lets you de-
fine and name paths according to the needs of each project.
With Pro Tools HD, the I/O Setup dialog provides a graphical representation of the signal routing for each connected audio interface, with controls to route physical ports to Pro Tools inputs and outputs. These controls mirror the routing controls found in the Hardware Setup dialog—changes made to physical routing in one dialog are always reflected in the other.
Each Pro Tools system can have a different
I/O Setup configuration, determined by:
• Whether it is a Pro Tools|HD, Pro Tools LE,
Pro Tools M-Powered, or Pro Tools Academic system
• On Pro Tools|HD systems, the number and types of audio interfaces
• On Pro Tools|HD systems, the installed
Mixer plug-in (Stereo or Surround)
Each Pro Tools session retains its path configurations as I/O Settings. The I/O Settings saved with the session are loaded automatically when the session is opened. Unavailable items (including hardware, paths, or required resources)
remain in the session as inactive items (see “Active and Inactive Paths” on page 54).
When you create a new session, you can specify a default I/O Setup configuration, including presets for stereo or multichannel mixing formats. Multichannel mixing requires a
Pro Tools|HD system.
The I/O Setup dialog also lets you save and import I/O Settings files.
Navigating in the I/O Setup Dialog
To resize the I/O Setup dialog:
â– Drag the lower-right corner of the window according to standard convention for your operating system.
To scroll left or right in the I/O Setup dialog:
â–
Press Alt+Page Up/Down (Windows) or Option+Page Up/Down (Mac).
Chapter 6: I/O Setup 43
Paths in Sessions
In sessions, audio is routed using the track Input, Output, Insert, Plug-in, and Send selectors.
These selectors let you assign tracks to hardware inputs and outputs, internal busses, and other
Pro Tools signal paths.
Paths comprise the lists of available signal routing choices in track Input, Output, Insert and
Send selectors.
Output Path selector and paths
Paths and I/O Setup
The signal routing choices available in a session are defined in the I/O Setup dialog.
Input Path selector and paths
44 Pro Tools Reference Guide
I/O Setup dialog Output paths (Pro Tools HD)
Main Paths and Sub-Paths
Paths in the I/O Setup dialog include main paths and sub-paths .
Stereo main path mono sub-path mono sub-path
Main and sub-paths in the I/O Setup Channel Grid
Main Paths
Main paths are logical groupings of inputs, inserts, busses, or outputs. For example, a master stereo output path could be named Main Out.
Path names in a stereo path are often appended with “.L” and “.R” for left and right.
Sub-Paths
A sub-path represents a signal path within a main path. For example, a default stereo output path consists of two mono sub-paths, left and right. Mono tracks and sends can be routed to either mono sub-path of the stereo output path.
It is especially useful to define and name sub-paths for complex mixing setups, such as a 5.1 Surround mix.
Default I/O Settings
A default I/O Settings file is installed automatically by Pro Tools, so you have a set of default paths that will get you started, without the need to configure the I/O Setup dialog. You can then customize your I/O Setup configuration at any time, according to the needs of each project (see
“The I/O Setup Dialog” on page 46).
Default Settings Files
The default Stereo settings file is available on all
Pro Tools systems, and provides stereo main paths, each with its own mono sub-paths.
Multichannel settings files are available on
Pro Tools|HD systems. These settings provide specialized path definitions for surround mix-
ing. See “Configuring Pro Tools for Multichannel Sessions” on page 760.
Default Path Names
Default names for input, output, and insert paths are based on the type of system (such as specific Pro Tools LE systems) or type and number of interfaces (Pro Tools|HD systems) you are using.
Stems and Stem Mixes
The use of stems and stem mixes originated in the post production industry as a method to organize and manage elements of a mix by type or content.
For example, a film mix often requires a stem mix for Foley, a stem mix for sound effects, a stem mix for dialog, and another for music. In this scenario, the dialog stem would contain all the dialog elements mixed relative to each other. The dialog stem can then be mixed with the other stems during the final mix of the scene or reel. The final mix is simplified by the ability to control the level of each stem, rather than the multitude of individual tracks that comprise a typical film mix.
In Pro Tools, you can work with main and subpaths as you would stem mixes. These can be assigned as needed, including the ability to assign multiple outputs to individual tracks and sends.
For more information, see “Multiple Output Assignments” on page 638.
Chapter 6: I/O Setup 45
The I/O Setup Dialog
The I/O Setup dialog defines Pro Tools input, output, insert, and bus paths. Routing I/O ports to
Pro Tools inputs and outputs can also be done here.
Path Name column
Path Type tabs
Path Format selector
Interface label
Input and Output selectors
Expand/collapse paths
Channel Grid
Main and Sub-Paths
Active/Inactive
Status
Path tools
Options
Figure 1. I/O Setup dialog on a Pro Tools | HD system with a 96 I/O
To open the I/O Setup dialog:
1 Make sure your audio interfaces are enabled and configured properly in the Hardware Setup.
See “Configuring Pro Tools Hardware Settings” on page 38.
2 Choose Setup > I/O.
To open the Input, Output, Insert, Bus, Mic
Preamps (Pro Tools HD only), or H/W Insert Delay page (Pro Tools HD only) in the I/O Setup dialog:
â– Click the corresponding tab at the top of the
I/O Setup dialog.
Closing the I/O Setup Dialog
You can click Cancel at any time to close the
I/O Setup dialog without saving any changes.
When you click OK, Pro Tools checks several settings for routing validity (to prevent feedback loops). If there are any overlapping or invalid settings, you will be required to correct them before the I/O Setup dialog will close. For more in-
formation, see “Setting the I/O Setup” on page 54.
46 Pro Tools Reference Guide
I/O Setup Dialog Controls
This section provides an overview of the controls in the I/O Setup dialog.
Path Type Tabs Select the type of I/O control to configure. Choices are Input, Output, Insert,
Bus, Mic Preamps (Pro Tools HD only), or H/W
Insert Delay (Pro Tools HD only).
Input and Output Selectors Select the physical ports on your audio interface to route to
Pro Tools inputs and outputs. Ports are selectable in channel pairs. Available ports for each displayed interface are based on Hardware Setup settings; for example, if the AES/EBU inputs and outputs of an interface are enabled in Hardware
Setup, they are available for routing in I/O
Setup. The functionality provided with the Input and Output selector is the same as that provided on the Main page of the Hardware Setup dialog.
Path Name Column Shows paths that are available for selection, including the name of each defined path. Path names can be renamed.
Expand/Collapse Shows or hides the sub-paths associated with a main path.
Active/Inactive Status Shows and changes the active/inactive status of each path.
Path Format Selector Shows and selects the type/format (such as Mono, Stereo, Quad, or
5.1) of each defined path (greater-than-stereo multichannel formats are supported with
Pro Tools|HD systems only).
Channel Grid Maps paths to specific interfaces and channels.
Compensation for Input and Output Delays
(Pro Tools HD Only) Allows automatic compensation for input and output delays caused by
Digidesign analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog hardware.
Path Tools Customize the I/O Setup configuration. Buttons include: New Path, New Sub-Path,
Delete Path, and Default.
Show Last Saved Setup Appears in the I/O Setup dialog in certain session transfer situations. For details on this feature, see “Show Last Saved
Setup and Show Current Setup” on page 56.
Options Provide selectors with pop-up menus to set paths or orders for Controller Meter Path,
Audition Paths (Region List previewing), New
Track Default Output, Default Path Order,
AFL/PFL Path (Pro Tools HD only), and AFL/PFL
Mutes (Pro Tools HD only). See “I/O Setup Options” on page 59.
Chapter 6: I/O Setup 47
Routing Hardware I/O to
Pro Tools I/O
The I/O Setup dialog lets you define which physical ports on your I/O peripheral are routed to available inputs and outputs in Pro Tools. Use the Input and Output selectors in the I/O Setup dialog to serve as a patchbay to route any of the physical inputs or outputs to your Pro Tools mixer.
I/O Channel selector pop-up menu
To configure I/O routing in I/O Setup:
1 Choose Setup > I/O.
2 Click the Input or Output tab to display the corresponding path type.
3 Click the Input or Output selector for the first interface channel pair, located below the first audio interface icon.
4 From the pop-up menu, select a physical port pair (such as Analog 1–2), to route to a Pro Tools channel pair (such as A 1–2) in the Path Name column on the left.
5 Repeat the above step for additional channel pairs.
6 Click OK.
Routing a Pro Tools Output Pair to
Multiple Destinations
Pro Tools channel pairs can be routed to multiple outputs on an audio interface through the
I/O Setup dialog. For example, if you assign both
Analog 1–2 and Analog 3–4 interface outputs to
Pro Tools Output pair 1–2, when you send a signal to Pro Tools Outputs 1–2, that signal will be routed simultaneously to both pairs of output ports on your audio interface.
This lets you send the same signal (such as a stereo pair, a stem mix, or a multichannel mix) to multiple destinations (such as multiple mastering devices).
The only limit to output choices is the number of outputs available in your system.
0utput path assignments cannot overlap.
See “Valid Paths and Requirements” on page 54 for details.
Pro Tools outputs pairs can also be routed to multiple audio interface outputs in the Hard-
48 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To route a Pro Tools output channel pair to multiple audio interface output ports:
1 Choose Setup > I/O.
2 Click the Output tab.
3 Click the Output selector for an interface channel pair, just below an audio interface icon.
4 From the pop-up menu, select a physical port pair (such as Analog 1–2) to route to the corresponding Pro Tools channel pair (such as A 1–2) in the Path Name column on the left.
5 Start-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the same Output selector and select an additional output pair from the same pop-up menu.
The output name updates with a plus sign (“+”) before it to indicate that multiple output ports are selected. In the pop-up menu, each physical port pair assigned to that Pro Tools output pair is indicated by a check mark.
6 Repeat the above steps to select additional output destinations.
7 Click OK.
Creating and Editing Paths
The I/O Setup dialog lets you create and customize signal path definitions.
Paths can be:
• Renamed, for easier identification after changing or renaming audio interfaces
• Remapped, to or from different sources or destinations
• Deactivated (or reactivated) to manage unavailable or unnecessary I/O resources
• Deleted
In addition, you can import and export your
I/O Setup configurations as I/O Settings files, as well as set default path parameters.
The following table lists the available path attributes for each path type.
Path options by type
Path Type Path Options (Attributes)
Input
Output
Names, formats, and source channel (analog or digital audio interface)
Names, formats, and destination
(audio interface output channel or internal send bus)
Insert
Bus
Names, formats and destination
(audio interface channels)
Names and formats
Chapter 6: I/O Setup 49
Creating a Default Main or Sub-
Path
You can set an I/O Setup path type to its default path configuration at any time.
To restore default paths and path names:
1 Choose Setup > I/O.
2 Click the Input, Output, Insert, or Bus tab to display the corresponding path type.
3 Click Default.
Pro Tools creates all possible stereo main paths.
Mono sub-paths are also auto-created for every stereo main path. These default path names appear in a session’s track Audio Input and Output
Path selectors.
Creating New Paths
You can create new main path and sub-paths with custom names, format, and mapping. Custom path names appear in a session’s track Input, Output, Insert, and Bus selectors.
To create a new path:
1 Choose Setup > I/O.
2 Click the Input, Output, Insert, or Bus tab to display the corresponding path type.
3 Do one of the following:
• Click New Path, or press Control+N (Windows) or Command+N (Mac).
– or –
• Select a main path and click New Sub-Path.
4 Double-click in the Name field and enter a name for the path.
5 Press Tab to set the new path name and move to the next path’s Name Field, or press Enter
(Windows) or Return (Mac) to set the new path name.
6 Choose a format from the Path Format selector (mono, stereo, or multichannel).
Default stereo output paths
With Pro Tools|HD systems, to optimize
DSP resources, it is best to create mono subpaths for Outputs and Busses, rather than mono main paths.
Path Format selector
7 Repeat the previous steps to configure other path types (Input, Output, Insert, or Bus).
50 Pro Tools Reference Guide
8 Click OK to close the I/O Setup dialog. If there are any overlapping or identically named paths, you will be instructed to correct them before the
I/O Setup dialog will close. For more informa-
tion, see “Setting the I/O Setup” on page 54.
Multichannel paths and mixing are ex-
plained in Chapter 32, “Pro Tools Setup for
Surround (Pro Tools HD Only).”
Changing Path Names
Path names can be customized in the I/O Setup dialog.
I/O paths can also be renamed directly from the Edit or Mix window by Right-clicking the Input or Output selector and choosing
Rename.
To rename a path in the I/O Setup dialog:
1 Double-click the path name.
2 Enter a new path name.
3 Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac).
Changing Interface Names
Audio interface names can be customized in the
I/O Setup dialog. With Pro Tools HD only, the
I/O Setup dialog then bases default Input and
Output path names on the custom names.
To rename an audio interface in the I/O Setup dialog:
1 Double-click the label above an interface.
2 Enter a new interface name.
3 Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac).
Interface name
Interface Names
Selecting and Arranging Paths
Individual and multiple paths can be selected in the I/O Setup dialog Path Name column. Selected paths and sub-paths can be moved higher or lower in the Path Name column to change their menu order in track Input, Output, Insert, and Bus selectors. Paths can also be deleted. Subpaths follow their main paths when they are moved in the I/O Setup dialog.
To select a main path or sub-path:
â– Click the path name.
Selecting paths in the I/O Setup dialog
To select a range of paths:
1 Click the path name.
2 Shift-click an additional path name.
All paths that occur between the first path name selected and the additional path name will also be selected.
Chapter 6: I/O Setup 51
To select or deselect noncontiguous paths, do one of the following:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) path names that are unhighlighted to select them.
– or –
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) path names that are highlighted to deselect them.
To select all paths and sub-paths:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) any path name that is unhighlighted.
To deselect all paths and sub-paths:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) any path name that is highlighted.
To rearrange paths:
â– Drag one or more path names up or down.
Resetting to Default Paths
The Default button in the I/O Setup dialog provides two primary functions:
• Creates new default paths up to the capacity of your system’s available audio interfaces and
resources. See “Creating a Default Main or
• Resets selected path names to matching or corresponding paths in the current I/O Setup configuration. For example, if you replace an audio interface on a Pro Tools|HD system, you can use the Default switch to update your
I/O Setup definitions with the new hardware configuration.
Interface names can be customized. See
“Changing Interface Names” on page 51.
To reset path names:
â–
Click Default.
If there are matching paths available with the new system configuration, existing paths will be updated to include new audio interfaces
(Pro Tools|HD systems).
Resetting Mix Busses
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Pro Tools HD supports up to 128 mix busses
(Pro Tools HD 7.x and Pro Tools TDM 6.9).
However, lower versions of Pro Tools TDM and
Pro Tools LE provide only up to 64 or 32 mix busses respectively. When you open a session that was created with Pro Tools LE or a lower version of Pro Tools TDM on a current version of Pro Tools HD, only the number of busses supported on the original system are initially available. You can reset the number of available busses to match your Pro Tools HD system’s full capabilities.
To make all of your busses available in sessions that support a lower number of mix busses:
1 Open the I/O Setup dialog.
2 Click the Bus tab in the upper left.
3 Click Default.
Setting busses to the default setting will rename all busses to their default name.
52 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Deleting Paths
Path definitions can be deleted from the current session to reflect changes to your hardware setup, or to clean up track selector menus by removing unwanted or unnecessary path definitions. After deleting a path, any tracks or send assignments to that path are reset to No Output.
To delete a main path or sub-path:
1 In the I/O Setup dialog, select the path you want to delete.
2 Click Delete Path.
To delete all paths:
1 Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) any path name.
2 Click Delete Path.
For example, when mapping a new stereo path, clicking in the path row under output channel 1 fills both channel 1 and 2 (left to 1, right to 2).
To remap channels in a path, see “Remapping Channels” on page 53.
Channel Mapping and Surround Mixer
(Pro Tools HD Only)
When mapping multichannel paths, the left channel (L) is mapped first to the clicked Grid box, and remaining channels fill immediately to the right according to the default path order. Because some multichannel mixing formats use unique track layouts, Pro Tools lets you set the
default format in the I/O Setup dialog (see “I/O
Channel Mapping
Once a path has been created and formatted, it can be mapped to specific audio interface, or bus channels in the Grid.
To map channels:
1 Select a main or sub-path.
2 In the row for the selected path, click in the
Grid column under an audio interface and channel. Other channels for the path type, if any, fill to the right.
Mapping channels
Customized Output paths for a 5.1 mix
Remapping Channels
You can move the individual assignments to different channels, to reorder the path’s definition
(for example, changing a multichannel map to
L-R-C-LF-LS-RS).
To remap channels in a path:
â– Drag the channel to the new location in the
Grid. Other channel assignments will move
(shuffle) to accommodate dragged channels.
Chapter 6: I/O Setup 53
Channel Shuffling
Moving a signal from right to left results in a shuffle of other signals after the new destination channel. Moving a signal from left to right shuffles any and all signals after the new destination channel and leaves the previous channel empty.
Changing a path’s format erases any current channel mapping.
Sub-Paths Follow Main Paths
When a main path is remapped, its sub-paths (if any) will remap automatically to maintain consistent routing. For example, remapping a stereo path to different hardware outputs results in any of its sub-paths moving with it.
Overlapping Channels and Valid Paths Channel mapping follows certain rules regarding overlapping paths.
• There can be no partial or complete overlaps between any two main Output paths, any two Insert paths, or any two main Bus paths.
• A newly-created Output or Bus path must either be completely independent of other maps (not mapped to any other available
I/O interface/channels), or it must be a subpath completely contained within a larger path (for example, an LCR sub-path within a larger 5.1 path).
• Output and Insert paths can overlap in I/O
Setup, but only one or the other can be used at any given time in a session. (Inputs, however, can be routed to multiple tracks.)
Setting the I/O Setup
To set the current I/O Setup configuration:
â– Click OK in the I/O Setup dialog.
All paths must be valid before the I/O Setup configuration can be applied.
Valid Paths and Requirements
While configuring the I/O Setup dialog, certain rules apply for path definition and channel mapping.
Though it is possible to set up invalid mappings in the Channel Grid, Pro Tools will not accept an I/O Setup configuration unless all paths meet the path definition and channel mapping requirements, as follows:
Minimum Path Definitions All paths must have a name, be of a specific format, and have a valid
I/O mapping.
Active and Inactive Paths
Pro Tools paths can be Active (on) or Inactive
(off, or unavailable). You can manually switch paths between Active or Inactive on a track-bytrack or session-wide basis. In addition,
Pro Tools sets paths to Inactive automatically when I/O is unavailable.
Track Path Assignments Track input, output, and bus path assignments can be switched to Inactive using the corresponding selector on the track. This leaves track playlists intact, while disconnecting that particular track from the output or bus path. Use this to remove a track from a signal path.
Session-Wide Path Assignments Paths can be globally activated or deactivated in the
I/O Setup dialog. Use this to turn off a signal path on any and all tracks currently assigned to it. Pro Tools also sets unavailable paths to inac-
54 Pro Tools Reference Guide
tive. Paths can be unavailable when hardware or other system resources are unavailable, such as when opening a session saved on a different system.
Track Path Assignments
(Mix and Edit Windows)
To toggle a track path assignment to be Active or
Inactive:
â– In the Mix or Edit window, Control-Start-click
(Windows) or Command-Control-click (Mac) the track’s Input, Output, Insert, or Send selector.
Inactive track path assignments are listed in italics and are unhighlighted.
Toggling All or All Selected
The Alt (Windows) and Option (Mac) modifiers apply the path toggle to all tracks. The Alt+Shift
(Windows) and Option+Shift (Mac) modifiers apply the path toggle to all selected tracks. However, Pro Tools will only apply the change to identical path assignments, if any, in the current track or tracks. Toggling multiple tracks only affects tracks that have the same path assignment as the one you are explicitly toggling.
Toggling Multiple Paths
If a track has only one main output assignment,
Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the track’s Output Path selector to toggle the main output to inactive.
When there are multiple assignments, the track selector will be displayed for you to specify the input, output, insert, or bus path.
If a Send (A–J) has multiple output assignments and one of those is toggled, then all of the output assignments for that Send (A–J) will be toggled.
Session-Wide Path Assignments
(I/O Setup Dialog)
Paths can be globally configured for Active or
Inactive status in the I/O Setup Dialog.
To globally activate or deactivate a path:
1 Choose Setup > I/O.
2 Select a path type using the tabs at the top of the window.
3 Set the Active/Inactive control for the path.
Active
Inactive
Active and inactive path settings in I/O Setup
Any track path assignment can also be deactivated on a track-by-track basis. See
“Track Path Assignments” on page 55.
Inactive paths are displayed in italics in the track path selectors.
Active and inactive paths in a track Output Path selector
Chapter 6: I/O Setup 55
Display of Active and Inactive Status
Unhighlighted (Italics) Indicates the path is inactive.
Highlighted (Non-Italics) Indicates the path is active.
Highlighted (Italics) Indicates the path is active, but there are not enough system resources available.
Hardware Setup and Session
Transfer
Pro Tools sessions store the type and order of audio interfaces connected and active when the session was last saved.
Unavailable I/O
When opening a session, Pro Tools checks to see if the hardware configuration has changed since the session was last saved. If the current hardware configuration differs from that saved in the session, paths associated with the unavailable
I/O are made inactive.
Remapping
Remapping occurs when a session’s original
I/O Setup does not match that of the current system and session paths are remapped to current hardware.
Systems of equivalent I/O capability are remapped directly. For example, a session tracked to a Pro Tools|HD system through two
192 I/O audio interfaces would include 32 input paths spread across the two 16-channel interfaces. The session is taken to a second Pro Tools system that has a 96 I/O audio interface (a 16channel I/O unit) and a 1622 I/O (with its 16 analog inputs) connected to its Legacy Port. When the session is first opened on the second system,
Pro Tools will map the 32 input paths to the inputs of the two interfaces.
When hardware is unavailable to a session being opened, assignments can either be replaced using the remap option, or opened as Inactive.
Any tracks left assigned to an unavailable path will not be audible. This can be beneficial, however, when you want to reassign tracks into your system’s mix one at a time.
See “Active and Inactive Paths” on page 54
for more information.
Show Last Saved Setup and Show Current
Setup
When a session is opened that contains path definitions for unavailable I/O interfaces, the
I/O Setup dialog lists those paths in italics.
The Show Last Saved Setup button displays the audio interfaces used in the original session.
This temporary display lets you check the last saved I/O configuration for reference while configuring the session for your system.
Once a session has been opened with unavailable I/O retained, you can then reassign tracks to available I/O paths.
To redefine the paths, see “Creating and
56 Pro Tools Reference Guide
I/O Settings Files
I/O Settings can be managed when transferring sessions, and when developing I/O Setup configurations over the course of multiple sessions and projects.
Defaults, Settings Files, and Last
Used Settings for New Sessions
When creating new sessions, you can set the session’s I/O Setup configuration using the following options:
Default I/O Setups The Pro Tools Installer provides factory presets for factory I/O setups for stereo and surround (Pro Tools HD only). See
“Factory I/O Settings Files” on page 58 for more
information.
Custom Presets You can store and recall custom presets using the export and import features of the I/O Setup dialog.
Last Used The most recent (or last used )
I/O Setup configuration is saved as a Last Used
settings file. See “Last Used I/O Settings” on page 58 for more information.
Default I/O Settings at First Launch
The first time you create a session, you can choose default Stereo Mix or Surround Mix settings, depending on your system and installa-
tion choices. See “Factory I/O Settings Files” on page 58.
Importing and Exporting I/O Settings
Files
You can export and import I/O Setup configurations as I/O Settings files. This lets you save settings for different projects, import settings for reconfiguring I/O Setup, and manage path definitions and signal routing setups.
Exporting I/O Settings
To export and save an I/O Setup configuration:
1 Click Export Settings.
2 Name and save the settings file.
To start sessions with a blank or empty
I/O Setup dialog, you can create and export an I/O Settings file in which all definitions have been deleted.
Importing I/O Settings
I/O Settings can be imported before you open a session, or you can import settings into a session
that is already open (see “Default I/O Settings at
When you import I/O Settings in an existing session, you can choose to delete any unused path definitions before importing the new paths, or leave unused path definitions intact and add the new paths to the current I/O Setup configuration.
Chapter 6: I/O Setup 57
To import I/O Settings:
1 Click Import Settings in the I/O Setup dialog.
2 Select an I/O settings file in the Import Settings dialog and click Import.
3 A dialog appears asking whether you want to delete existing paths. Do one of the following:
• Click Yes to remove any unused paths and add the imported paths to the current I/O
Setup configuration. Any I/O assignments and automation data associated with the unused paths are also deleted.
– or –
• Click No to add the imported paths to the current I/O Setup configuration.
If the import results in overlapping paths, the new paths will appear in the I/O Setup dialog as
Inactive. See “Active and Inactive Paths” on page 54.
After importing I/O Settings, you can then reassign path routing definitions in the I/O Setup dialog by remapping, renaming, and deleting
paths. See “Creating and Editing Paths” on page 49.
Last Used I/O Settings
If any changes are made to the I/O Setup dialog during a session, these changes are saved to the
Last Used settings file when the I/O Setup dialog is closed (by clicking OK).
Changes to I/O Setup are saved along with the current session. User Presets files will not contain recent changes unless you export an updated settings file.
The Last Used settings are available as a choice when creating or opening sessions, in addition to the factory presets described below.
Factory I/O Settings Files
Pro Tools provides I/O Settings files for Stereo and Surround mixing. These files provide generic main and sub-path definitions for either mixing format.
Stereo Mix Settings File
The Stereo Mix preset consists of all possible stereo and mono paths for your session.
Using the “Stereo Mix” preset has the same effect as clicking Default for every individ-
ual tab in I/O Settings. See “Creating and
Editing Paths” on page 49 for details.
Specifically, the Stereo Mix preset will create the maximum number paths of each type, as determined by the available system’s I/O Setup and hardware configuration.
Surround Mix Settings File (Pro Tools HD Only)
The Surround Mix provides additional, sur-
round-specific Output and Bus presets. See “Surround Mix Settings Files” on page 761 for more
information.
About Direct Outputs Mode
Direct Outputs mode, as found in older versions of Pro Tools, has been replaced by the default mono sub-paths available through all valid I/O in the I/O Setup dialog.
The Default switch creates main Output paths with appropriate mono sub-paths. These subpaths provide discrete monophonic routing.
When a session is opened that was saved in Direct Outputs mode, Pro Tools maps all the output assignments to equivalent mono sub-paths
(as available). See “Hardware Setup and Session
Transfer” on page 56 for more information on
remapping.
58 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To convert a session so that it emulates Direct
Outputs mode, use the Auto Assign Ascending
Outputs feature, as follows:
To auto assign track outputs for Direct Outputs:
1 Make sure that all tracks you want to assign are visible (hidden tracks will not be affected).
2 Select the tracks you want to assign.
3 Control-Alt-click (Windows) or Command-
Option-click (Mac) the Output selector of the left-most track and assign it to the sub-path for
Output #1. All visible tracks will be auto-assigned to unique mono sub-path outputs in ascending order.
You can identify audio interface connections at any time by selecting the interface name in the Peripherals list of the Hardware
Setup dialog, then clicking Identify. All the
LEDs on the interface front panel will illuminate.
I/O Setup Options
Pro Tools systems have additional I/O Setup features. These include default signal routing for metering and auditioning, and default track layout for multichannel mix formats.
Controller Meter Path
(D-Control, D-Command, and ProControl Only)
The Controller Meter Path selector determines the path displayed across the Output meters of
D-Control, D-Command, or ProControl control surfaces. For more details, refer to your control surface documentation.
Audition Paths
You can specify the output path through which files and regions are auditioned in the Region
List or in DigiBase browsers.
Using the Default Audition Path
When you audition a file or region in the Region
List, Pro Tools routes the audio output through the Audition Path. Pro Tools assigns a default
Audition Path to the first available main Output path of the corresponding format. You can also select a different Audition Path in the I/O Setup dialog.
On Pro Tools | HD systems with more than one audio interface, you can only select the first audio interface as an audition path.
Configuring Audition Paths
You can specify the monitoring outputs for Region List auditioning using the Audition Paths menu.
Audition Paths Main Menu The main menu consists of all path format choices available on the current system (Mono and Stereo on all systems, and LCR and greater on Pro Tools|HD systems).
Audition Paths Submenus Each path format choice has a submenu listing Output paths of that given format. (The mono submenu lists
Output paths of any format.)
To configure an Audition Path:
â–
Select a path from the Audition Paths menu or submenus.
To audition regions in the Region List:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the region in the list.
Chapter 6: I/O Setup 59
Auditioning Discrete Signals in Multichannel
Items
In the Region List, multichannel regions are auditioned through the current Audition Path. Signals can be auditioned “in-place,” or through all outputs, as described below.
Audition In-Place
When auditioning a mono component of a mono component region, the mono region can be played from the corresponding channel of its parent mono component region. This playback method is called audition in-place .
To audition in-place:
1 In the Region List, make sure the stereo or multichannel region is in expanded view (showing .L, .R, and other component channels).
2 Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the region for the channel you want to audition.
Audition to All Outputs
When auditioning a mono component of a mono component region, the region can be routed equally to all outputs of the parent region’s Audition Path.
To audition through all channels of the main audition path:
â–
Shift-Alt-click (Windows) or Shift-Optionclick (Mac) on the signal in the Region List.
New Track Default Output Path
You can specify the default output path assignment for new tracks, in each available format.
The New Track Default Output can be set to bus paths, as well as output paths.
To specify a default output for new tracks in the
I/O Setup dialog:
â– Click the New Track Default Output selector and select a format and Output.
AFL/PFL Path
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Tracks soloed in AFL (After Fader Listen) or PFL
(Pre Fader Listen) Solo mode are routed to the current AFL/PFL Path, as set with the AFL/PFL
Path selector.
See “Solo Modes” on page 142 for more in-
formation on using AFL or PFL Solo modes.
To select the AFL/PFL Path output:
1 Choose Setup > I/O.
2 Click the Output tab to display the Output page.
If you do not see the AFL/PFL Path selector, check that you have installed the Surround
Mixer.
3 Select a path from the AFL/PFL Path selector.
Selecting None as the AFL/PFL Path disables
AFL and PFL Solo modes. When None is selected, AFL and PFL cannot be used.
4 Click OK to close the I/O Setup dialog.
60 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Setting AFL or PFL Path Levels
You can set a separate master AFL/PFL Path level for all AFL solos and all PFL solos.
Tracks do not need to be soloed to have the master AFL/PFL Path level adjusted.
To set the AFL/PFL Path level for AFL or PFL solos:
1 Choose Options > Solo Mode, and select a
Solo mode, as follows:
• If you want to set the level for AFL solos, select AFL.
– or –
• If you want to set the level for PFL solos, select PFL.
2 In the Mix or Edit window, Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Mac) a Solo button on any track.
3 Adjust the AFL/PFL Path fader.
4 Click on the new fader position (or press Esc) to close the fader display.
To set the AFL/PFL Path level to 0 dB, Control-Start-click (Windows) or Control-Command-click (Mac) any Solo button.
AFL/PFL Mutes (Output Path) Selector
(Systems without a D-Control or D-Command
Control Surface)
If you are not using a D-Control or D-Command control surface, your regular Pro Tools output path can be muted when you send a signal to the AFL/PFL Path. The muted path is set with the AFL/PFL Mutes (Output Path) selector.
See “Solo Modes” on page 142 for more in-
formation on selecting and using AFL or
PFL Solo modes.
To set which output path is muted when tracks are soloed in AFL or PFL Solo mode:
1 Choose Setup > I/O.
2 Click the Output tab to display the Output page.
3 Select a path from the AFL/PFL Mutes (Output
Path) selector.
4 Click OK to close the I/O Setup dialog.
Default Path Order
(Pro Tools HD Only)
The Default Path Order selector lets you select the default track layout you want Pro Tools to follow when creating and mapping 5.1-format main or sub-paths in the I/O Setup dialog.
This setting does not affect existing path definitions or metering—it only specifies channel mapping in new 5.1-format paths.
To choose a Default Path Order:
â–
Select the channel mapping from the Default
Path Order menu.
Default Path Order selector
For more information about multichannel
mixing, see Chapter 32, “Pro Tools Setup for Surround (Pro Tools HD Only).”
Chapter 6: I/O Setup 61
H/W Insert Delay
Compensation
(Pro Tools HD Only)
To compensate for the delay (latency) of any external hardware devices (such as an effects unit) used in your session, you can set the amount of delay compensation (in milliseconds) for each external device. These times will be used by the
Delay Compensation Engine to time align input paths when the hardware insert is in use and Delay Comp is enabled.
Insert offset delay field
To set an insert delay offset:
â–
Enter a value, in milliseconds, in the field corresponding with the input where the hardware insert is connected.
Insert delay offsets only have an effect when the I/O is used for hardware inserts.
62 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 7: Preferences
The Preferences dialog has several tabbed pages in which you can specify your preferred settings for various session parameters. Each new session uses these preferences.
To change Pro Tools preferences:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences.
2 Click the tab for the page that has preferences you want to change.
3 When finished, click OK.
Display Preferences
Basics Section
Draw Grids in Edit Window Adds grid lines to the
Edit window. Grid line resolution is based on the zoom level of the Edit window.
Draw Waveforms Rectified Displays audio waveform data in rectified view. In this view, audio waveforms are displayed so that their positive and negative waveform excursions (the portions that fall above and below the center line) are summed together and viewed as a single positive-value signal. This view allows more waveform detail to be seen in either normal or reduced track height views. It can be particularly useful when editing volume automation data, since it depicts waveform levels as starting at the bottom of the track.
Chapter 7: Preferences 63
Recompute Invalid Overviews Prompts Pro Tools to look for missing or corrupted overview data
(the data used to create waveform displays) when it opens sessions. If Pro Tools finds that overview data is missing or corrupted, it will recreate one or more overviews for the session.
This may take some time if there are many tracks in the session. If you suspect that overview data for a session has become corrupted, or if you import audio files which have no overview data into a session, make sure this preference is enabled for the session, save and close the session, then reopen it. Pro Tools will recreate any overviews for the session when it opens.
Track Position Numbers Stay with Hidden
Tracks When selected, tracks keep their track numbers even when hidden. When not selected, numbers are only assigned to tracks that are shown. In this case, shown tracks are then numbered sequentially, and hidden tracks are not numbered.
Tool Tips Display Options
Function Configures Tool Tips to show the basic function of the item.
Details Configures Tool Tips to show the complete name of an abbreviated name or item. Details view can also show the hidden or abbreviated value of parameters, as well as input and output assignments.
Edit Window Default Length
This preference sets a default length for the Edit window in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames
(Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 only). This is useful if you want to assemble a session of a particular length or leave extra room to expand the Edit window’s work area in your session. The maximum length is 12 hours and
25 seconds at 48 kHz, and proportionally less at higher sampling rates.
64 Pro Tools Reference Guide
“Organize Plug-in Menus By” Options
These option customize how plug-in menus are organized in the Insert selector or Plug-in selector.
Flat List Organizes plug-ins in a single list, in alphabetical order.
Category Organizes plug-ins by process category
(such as EQ, Dynamics, and Delay), with individual plug-ins listed in the category submenus.
Plug-ins that do not fit into a standard category
(such as the DigiRack Signal Generator), or third-party plug-ins that have not had a category designated by their developers, appear in the Other category. Plug-ins can appear in more than one category.
Manufacturer Organizes plug-ins by their manufacturer (such as Digidesign, Eventide, Line 6, and McDSP), with individual plug-ins listed in the manufacturer submenus. Plug-ins that do not have a Manufacturer defined will appear in the “Other” manufacturer folder.
Most Digidesign-distributed third party plug-ins will be grouped under Digidesign when Manufacturer view is enabled.
Category and Manufacturer Organizes plug-ins in two levels of menus. The top menus display plug-ins by process category (such as EQ, Dynamics, and Delay), with individual plug-ins listed in the category submenus. The bottom menus display plug-ins by manufacturer (such as Digidesign, Eventide, Line 6, or McDSP), with individual plug-ins listed in the manufacturer submenus.
Meters Section
Peak Hold Options
These options determine how long the peak indicators on track meters stay lit after a peak is detected.
3 Second Peak Hold When selected, track meters display the last peak level for three seconds.
Infinite Peak Hold When selected, track meters display the last peak level until you click them to clear them.
No Peak Hold When selected, track meters do not hold the peak level.
Clip Indication Options
These options determine how long the clip indicators on plug-in, send, and track meters stay lit after a clip is detected.
3 Second Clip Hold When selected, meters display the last clip indication for three seconds.
Infinite Clip Hold When selected, meters display the last clip indications until you click them to clear them.
No Clip Hold When selected, meters do not hold the clip indication.
Show Meters in Sends View
When the Sends View is displaying individual send controls, you can select this option to show send level meters. Deselecting this option can help speed up screen redraws and processing.
Color Coding
Always Display Marker Colors Lets you choose to view Marker colors in the Markers ruler, regardless of the settings you choose for Default Region Color Coding.
Default Track Color Coding Options
These color coding options determine the default color coding assignment for tracks in the
Edit and Mix windows. Choices are:
None Turns off color assignment for tracks.
Tracks and MIDI Channels Assigns a color to each track in the Mix or Edit window according to its voice assignment or MIDI channel assignment.
Tracks and MIDI Devices Assigns a color to each track in the Mix or Edit window according to its voice assignment or MIDI device assignment.
Groups Assigns a color to each track according to its Group ID. If groups are suspended using the
Suspend Groups command, the tracks color bars are not shown.
Track Type Assigns a color to each track according to its type (audio, MIDI, Instrument, Auxiliary or Master Fader).
Chapter 7: Preferences 65
Default Region Color Coding Options
These color coding options determine the default color coding assignment for regions in the track playlist. Choices are:
None Turns off color assignment for regions. Regions are drawn with black waveform or MIDI notes on a light gray background.
Tracks and MIDI Channels Assigns a color to each region in the Edit window according to its voice or MIDI channel assignment.
Tracks and MIDI Devices Assigns a color to each region in the Edit window according to its voice assignment or MIDI device assignment.
Groups Assigns a color to each region according to the Group ID of its track. If groups are suspended using the Suspend Groups command, all regions display black waveforms or MIDI notes on a light gray background.
Track Color Assigns a region color based on the color assigned to the track.
Marker Locations Assigns a color to data across all tracks based on the nearest preceding marker.
Region List Color Assigns a color to each region based on its color in the Region List.
Operation Preferences
Transport Section
Timeline Insertion/Play Start Marker Follows
Playback When selected, the Timeline Insertion and the Play Start Marker both move to the point in the Timeline where playback stops.
When deselected, the Timeline Insertion and
Play Start Marker do not follow playback.
Edit Insertion Follows Scrub/Shuttle When selected, the edit cursor automatically locates to the point where scrubbing stops.
Audio During Fast Forward/Rewind When selected, audio is audible during fast forward or rewind.
Play Start Marker Follows Timeline
Selection When enabled, the Play Start Marker snaps to the Timeline Selection Start Marker when you move the Timeline Selection, draw a new Timeline Selection, or adjust the Timeline
Selection Start. When disabled, the Play Start
Marker doesn’t move with the Timeline selection.
66 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Custom Shuttle Lock Speed Sets the highest fastforward Shuttle Lock speed (key 9) for Shuttle
Lock modes (Classic or Transport). The range for this setting is 50–800%.
For more information, see “Custom Shuttle
Back/Forward Amount Sets the default length of
Back, Back and Play, Forward and Forward and
Play. The timebase of the Back/Forward Amount settings follows the Main Time Scale by default, or you can deselect Follow Main Time Scale and select another timebase format: Bars:Beats,
Min:Sec, Time Code, Feet+Frames, or Samples
Numeric Keypad Mode
Numeric Keypad mode determines how the numeric keypad functions. You can always use the numeric keypad to select and enter values in the
Event Edit Area, Edit Selection indicators, Main and Sub Counters, and Transport fields.
Classic Selects a Shuttle Lock mode that emulates the way Pro Tools worked in versions lower than 5.0. With the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Classic, you can play up to two tracks of audio in
Shuttle Lock mode. Press the Start key (Windows) or Control (Mac), followed by 0–9 for different play speeds. Press Plus (+) or Minus (–) to reverse direction. Recall Memory Locations by typing the Memory Location number, followed by Period (.).
To customize the highest fast-forward Shut-
tle Lock speed, see “Custom Shuttle Lock
Transport Selects a Shuttle Lock mode that lets you set a number of record and play functions, and also operate the Transport from the numeric keypad. With the Numeric Keypad mode set to Transport, you can play up to two tracks of audio in Shuttle Lock mode. Press the Start key
(Windows) or Control (Mac), followed by 0–9 for different play speeds. Press Plus (+) or Minus
(–) to reverse direction. Recall Memory Locations by typing Period (.), the Memory Location number, and Period (.) again.
To customize the highest fast-forward Shut-
tle Lock speed, see “Custom Shuttle Lock
Shuttle (Pro Tools HD Only) Selects a type of shuttling different from that of Shuttle Lock mode. With the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Shuttle, playback is triggered by pressing and holding the keys on the numeric keypad—playback stops once the keys are released. Various playback speeds are available in both forward and reverse. You can also recall Memory Locations by typing Period (.), the Memory Location number, and Period (.) again.
Use Separate Play and Stop Keys
When enabled, this option lets you start playback with the Enter key and stop playback with the 0 key on the numeric keypad. This is useful for quickly starting and stopping playback when auditioning loop transitions. Use Separate Play and Stop Keys is only available in Transport Numeric Keypad mode.
When this option is enabled, it overrides using the Enter key to add Memory Location markers. Instead, press Period (.) and then
Enter on the numeric keypad to add a Memory Location marker.
Chapter 7: Preferences 67
Video Section
QuickTime Playback Priority Options
Normal This is the default setting for QuickTime
Movie Playback Priority. It gives no extra priority to movie playback over other screen update tasks such as metering, moving faders, and so on. In most cases you should use this setting.
Medium This setting gives QuickTime movie playback a higher priority relative to other
Pro Tools screen update tasks. Use this setting if you experience inconsistent QuickTime movie playback with the Normal setting.
Highest This setting gives QuickTime movie playback highest priority. In this mode,
Pro Tools disables screen activity and requires you to use the Spacebar to stop playback. Use this setting if you require uninterrupted Quick-
Time movie playback.
High Quality QuickTime Image
When enabled, Pro Tools decompresses both fields of each interlaced frame of QuickTime video. When viewing a QuickTime movie in the
Pro Tools Video window, select this option to display the movie at the highest possible resolution. Deselecting this option can help improve performance if your system experiences problems playing back a session with QuickTime video.
Avid Video Errors Stop Playback
(Pro Tools HD with Avid Video Engine Only)
When selected, Pro Tools automatically stops playback of audio and video if a single frame of video is dropped.
When not selected, Pro Tools continues playback of audio even if frames are dropped. In most cases, video playback will recover within a few frames and continue playing audio and video in sync.
Avid Video NTSC Has Setup (NTSC-J)
(Pro Tools HD with Avid Video Engine Only)
This preference lets you adjust the level of NTSC video black output between 7.5 IRE (standard) or 0 IRE. When this option is selected, output level is 0 IRE.
Auto Backup Section
Enable Session File Auto Backup When selected,
Pro Tools automatically saves backups of your
Pro Tools session file while you work. Backups are saved to in the Session Files Backup folder in your session folder.
Keep specifies the total number of incremental backups that are kept.
Backup Every Specifies how often the session is saved.
Record Section
Latch Record Enable Buttons When selected, multiple audio tracks can be record-enabled.
When not selected, multiple audio tracks cannot be record-enabled. Record-enabling an audio track takes other audio tracks out of recordenabled mode.
Link Record and Play Faders When selected,
Pro Tools does not remember separate fader levels for tracks when they are record-enabled, allowing you to maintain the same monitoring level for tracks during recording and playback.
68 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Audio Track RecordLock (Pro Tools HD
Only) This option configures Pro Tools tracks to either emulate a digital dubber, or to maintain legacy behavior for track record status.
• When selected, the record-enabled audio tracks remain record-enabled when playback or recording stops.
• When not selected, record-enabled audio tracks are taken out of record enable when
Pro Tools is stopped. This prevents tracks from remaining armed from pass to pass, emulating track record behavior of a digital dubber.
Transport RecordLock (Pro Tools HD Only) This option lets the Transport Record (the Record button in the Transport controls) be configured to either emulate a digital dubber, or to maintain legacy behavior for the Transport master
Record.
• When selected, the Transport Record remains armed when playback or recording stops. This saves having to re-arm the
Transport between takes, emulating digital dubber behavior.
• When not selected, the Transport Record disarms when Pro Tools is manually stopped or stops due to a loss of time code.
This replicates standard Pro Tools recording behavior.
The Transport RecordLock preference is automatically disabled and greyed out when
Destructive record mode is enabled.
Disable “Input” When Disarming Track (In “Stop”)
(Pro Tools HD Only) For flexibility, TrackInput monitoring can be customized to remain selected regardless of track record status, or to automatically switch to Auto Input monitoring after a recording pass. This lets you optimize monitoring for a typical dubbing workflow (in which you might want tracks to remain in Input
Only mode until explicitly switched to Auto Input monitoring) or a typical music tracking workflow (in which leaving a track in Input
Only monitoring mode after recording can result in accidental double-monitoring).
• When selected, taking an audio track out of record enable (any mode) takes it out of Input Only mode, regardless of the global monitor mode, and switches it to monitor audio from disk only.
• When not selected, audio tracks remain in
Input Only monitoring mode until explicitly switched to Auto Input monitoring.
Mute Record-Armed Tracks While Stopped
(Pro Tools HD Only) This setting determines monitor status of record-armed tracks.
• When selected, Pro Tools mutes all recordenabled tracks when the transport is stopped. Input can still be monitored while stopped using the TrackInput Monitor button.
• When not selected, Pro Tools does not mute audio input on record-enabled tracks when the transport is stopped.
PEC/Direct Style Input Monitoring (Pro Tools HD
Only) This option changes the way the TrackInput monitoring mode is indicated on-screen
(and on supported control surfaces) to emulate
“PEC” (playback) and “Direct” (input/bus) indication on some large format consoles.
• When not selected, the TrackInput button shows the letter “I.” The button remains gray to indicate Auto Input mode and lights green to indicate Input Only mode.
• When selected, the TrackInput button remains gray and shows the letter “D” to indicated Input Only mode (“Direct”); it lights green and shows the letter “P” to indicate Auto Input mode (“Pec” or playback).
Chapter 7: Preferences 69
Online Options
Record Online at Time Code (or ADAT)
Lock When selected, online recording begins as soon as Pro Tools receives and locks to incoming time code.
Record Online at Insertion/Selection When selected, online recording begins at the edit cursor location. Recording continues until Pro Tools stops receiving time code. If you make a selection, Pro Tools records online for the length of the selection.
Open Ended Record Allocation
This preference determines how much of your available hard drive space is allocated for recording.
Use All Available Space When selected, the drive’s entire available space is allocated. This can sometimes slow down the recording process for hard drives that use certain file systems, including HFS+ and NTFS.
Limit To Sets the maximum allowable recording duration. This can help reduce the time it takes to begin recording by allocating only a portion of your hard drive. The number of minutes specified is allocated for each record-enabled track.
You may want to experiment with this number to achieve the recording performance you want.
DestructivePunch File Length (Pro Tools HD
Only)
This preference sets the duration of consolidated audio files when preparing tracks for DestructivePunch mode. The default value for this setting is 25 minutes.
Misc (Miscellaneous) Section
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Auto Region Fade In/Out Length Sets a default length for fade-ins and fade-outs automatically applied to region boundaries. Using automatic fade-ins and fade-outs saves you the trouble of editing to zero-crossings or creating numerous rendered fades in order to eliminate clicks or pops in playback. Autofades are not written to disk. Value range is from 0–10 ms for the Auto
Region Fade In/Out Length. A value of zero means that no auto-fading will occur. The Auto
Fade value is saved with the session, and is automatically applied to all free-standing region boundaries until you change it.
Calibration Reference Level Sets a default calibration reference level in dB when Pro Tools is in Calibration mode. For audio interfaces that have trims (such as the 192 I/O), see the interface’s guide for calibration instructions.
Delay Compensation Time Mode This option lets you choose whether information in the Delay
Manager is displayed in milliseconds or samples. This option is only available when Delay
Compensation is enabled (Options > Delay
Compensation).
70 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Editing Preferences
Regions Section
Region List Selection Follows Edit
Selection When selected, selecting a region in a track also selects it in the Region List.
Edit Selection Follows Region List
Selection When selected, selecting a region in the Region List causes Pro Tools to highlight that region’s occurrence in a track.
Auto-Name Separated Regions When selected,
Pro Tools automatically names newly separated regions by appending a number to the region’s name. Disabling this option can be useful when importing region groups, REX files, or ACID files, because these file types can contain so many separate regions that it becomes difficult to read the Region List.
“Matching Start Time” Takes List
When you Right-click, or Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac) a region in a track, Pro Tools displays a list of regions (either in the Matches Right-click submenu or the Alternates pop-up menu) whose time stamp matches the current Cursor location. The following preferences determine which regions, or takes , appear in this list:
Includes Take Region Names That Match Track
Names When selected, only regions that share the same root name with the track and playlist appear in the Matches Right-click submenu or the Alternates pop-up menu.
Includes Take Region Lengths That Match When selected, only regions that match the length of the current selection appear in the Matches
Right-click submenu or the Alternates pop-up menu.
“Separate Region” Operates On All Related
Takes When selected, editing a region with the
Separate Region command also affects all other related takes (recording passes) with the same
User Time Stamp. This option helps you compare different sections from a group of related takes.
Memory Locations Section
Auto-Name Memory Locations When
Playing When selected, Pro Tools gives new
Memory Locations default names based on their time location in the session. The time units currently chosen in the View menu determine the units for the names.
Recall Memory Location at Original Track When selected, Memory Locations that recall a selection also recall the track in which the selection was made.
Tracks Section
New Tracks Default To Tick Timebase When selected, all new tracks default to ticks. When deselected, audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and VCA (Pro Tools HD only) tracks default to samples.
Chapter 7: Preferences 71
Fades Section
Crossfade Preview Pre-Roll This option specifies the amount of pre-roll to be added when you are auditioning crossfades in the Fades dialog.
Crossfade Preview Post-Roll This option specifies the amount of post-roll to be added when you are auditioning crossfades in the Fades dialog.
QuickPunch/TrackPunch Crossfade Length Specifies a default length for crossfades created by
QuickPunch or TrackPunch (Pro Tools HD only) recordings. Crossfades occur before the punch in and after the punch out.
Preserve Fades when Editing This option preserves fade-ins and fade outs, and converts separated crossfades into corresponding fade-ins and fade-outs.
Default Fade Settings
Fade In Selects the default envelope shape for fade-ins.
Fade Out Selects the default envelope shape for fade-outs.
Crossfade Selects the default envelope shape for crossfades.
REX/ACID Selects the default envelope shape for fades and crossfades between regions (“slices”) in imported REX and ACID files.
Automatically Create Fades for Imported REX and ACID files
When selected, this option automatically applies fades between regions (“slices”) within imported REX and ACID files to minimize clicks or pops during playback. If there is overlap between slices, a crossfade is applied. If there is a gap between slices, a fade out is applied to the end of the first region. (The fade shapes applied to REX/ACID files follow the Default Fade Settings for REX/ACID.)
Zoom Toggle
Vertical Zoom Select Selection or Last Used for the Zoom Toggle Vertical Zoom.
Horizontal Zoom Select Selection or Last Used for the Zoom Toggle Horizontal Zoom.
Remove Range Selection After Zooming
In When selected, the current Edit selection collapses into an insertion point after zoom toggling in. Zoom toggling back out reverts to the previous selection.
Track Height Select Last Used, Medium, Large,
Extreme, or Fit To Window for the Zoom Toggle
Track Height.
Track View Select Waveform/Notes, Last Used, or No Change for the Zoom Toggle Track View.
Separate Grid Settings When Zoomed In When selected, this option retains the same (current) grid setting when zoom toggling in or out.
When this option is deselected, the grid setting stored with Zoom toggle is recalled when zoom toggling in.
Levels of Undo
This preference sets the maximum number of actions that can be undone with the multiple undo feature. Setting this to a lower number can speed up the performance of slower computers.
Pro Tools supports up to 32 Levels of Undo.
72 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Mixing Preferences
Setup Section
Sends Default to –INF When selected, the initial fader level of newly-created sends is set to – ∞
(no audible signal level). When not selected, the initial fader level of newly-created sends is set to
0 dB.
Send Pans Default to Follow Main Pan When selected, newly created sends have Follow Main
Pan turned on, so the Send Pan controls follow the pan controls of the track. When not selected, newly created sends have Follow Main
Pan turned off.
Link Mix and Edit Group Enables When selected, this option links enabling and disabling of Mix and Edit Groups. For example, enabling Group
A in the Mix Window automatically enables
Group A in the Edit window.
Use Absolute Pan Linking (Pro Tools HD
Only) This option affects behavior of grouped pan controls.
• When selected, grouped pan controls do not maintain relative offsets when any of the grouped pan controls is adjusted. All grouped pan controls snap to the absolute value of the adjusted control.
• When not selected, grouped pan controls maintain relative offsets when any of the linked controls is adjusted.
Default EQ
This preference lets you choose any installed EQ plug-in as the default, which makes it available for quick assignment, both on-screen and on
ICON work surfaces. On-screen, the plug-in appears at the top of the Insert selector pop-up menu. On ICON work surfaces (Pro Tools HD only), the plug-in appears first in the list of menu choices on the rotary encoders.
Default Dynamics
This preference lets you choose any installed
Dynamics plug-in as the default, which makes it available for quick assignment, both on-screen and on ICON work surfaces. On-screen, the plug-in appears at the top of the Insert selector pop-up menu. On ICON work surfaces
(Pro Tools HD only), the plug-in appears first in the list of menu choices on the rotary encoders.
Chapter 7: Preferences 73
Controllers
Edit Window Follows Bank Selection If you are using a supported control surface with
Pro Tools, this option scrolls the Edit window to display the selected bank of tracks when you switch banks on the control surface, ensuring that the current bank is viewable on-screen.
Mix Window Follows Bank Selection If you are using a supported control surface with
Pro Tools, this option scrolls the Mix window to display the selected bank of tracks when you switch banks on the control surface, ensuring that the current bank is viewable on-screen.
“Scroll to Track” Banks Controllers When using a control surface (such as D-Control or ProControl) you can select this option to bank control surface faders to a numbered track when using the Track > Scroll to Track command.
Always Fill Channel Strips When Banking If you are using an ICON work surface (Pro Tools HD only), or other supported Digidesign control surface, you can select this option to maximize the number of channels displayed when banking. This setting optimizes the Bank commands to prevent the display of a small number of channels at the extremes of the surface.
Touch Timeout If you are writing automation in
Touch mode and you stop moving a non-touch sensitive fader or encoder, Pro Tools continues to write automation for the Touch Timeout value.
After the Touch Timeout period, writing of automation stops and the automation data returns to its previous automation value at the rate specified in the AutoMatch Time setting.
Automation Section
Smooth and Thin Data After Pass When selected, Pro Tools automatically smooths and then applies the specified amount of thinning to the automation data created in an automation pass.
Degree of Thinning Specifies the amount of thinning performed on automation data when you using the Thin Automation command, or if you have selected the Smooth and Thin Data After
Pass option.
Plug-in Controls Default to Auto-Enabled When selected, all applicable controls of newly added plug-ins are enabled for automation. When not selected, the controls of newly added plug-ins must be manually enabled for automation.
Suppress Automation “Write To” Warnings
(Pro Tools HD Only) When selected, Pro Tools suppresses the warnings that appear after invoking any of the Write Automation To Start, Selection, End, or Punch commands and then stopping the transport.
Latching Behavior for Switch Controls in
“Touch” This option determines the behavior of switch-type controls (such as mute or plug-in bypass) when writing automation in Touch mode.
• When selected, controls in Touch mode will latch in their current state. If an existing breakpoint is encountered, writing of automation stops. If the transport is stopped while writing, the control will AutoMatch to the underlying value.
• When not selected, controls in Touch mode will not latch.
74 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Allow Latch Prime in Stop (Pro Tools HD
Only) When selected and any tracks are in Latch mode, any automation-enabled controls on those tracks can be set to new values while the transport is stopped by touching or moving controls, to prepare for the next automation pass.
Coalesce when Removing Slaves from VCA Group
(Pro Tools HD Only) This option determines the behavior when removing slave tracks from a
VCA-controlled group.
• When selected, any automation on the
VCA Master is automatically coalesced
(without confirmation) to its slave tracks when the tracks are removed from the group.
• When not selected, a confirmation dialog lets you choose whether or not to coalesce the VCA Master automation to the slave tracks.
Standard VCA Logic for Group Attributes
(Pro Tools HD Only) This option determines which Mix group attributes may be selected in the Group dialog when the group is assigned to a VCA Master.
• When selected, Main Volume, Mute, Solo,
Record Enable, and Input Monitoring controls on slave tracks follow the VCA Master only and are not available to be independently linked. (This emulates the behavior of analog console VCA masters.)
• When deselected, Main Volume, Mute,
Solo, Record Enable, and Input Monitoring controls follow the VCA Master, but also remain available for independent linking with groups.
Include Sends in Trim Mode (Pro Tools HD
Only) This option determines the Trim status of
Send faders when a track is put in Trim mode.
• When selected, Send faders go into Trim mode along with the Main Volume fader.
• When deselected, the Main Volume fader goes into Trim mode, but the Send fader stays in the corresponding standard Automation mode.
Include Control Changes in Undo Queue This option determines whether certain mixer control changes, such as moving a fader or pan control, are entered into the Undo queue.
• When selected, mixer control changes appear in the Undo queue, and are undone if any prior operation is undone.
• When deselected, mixer control changes will not appear in the undo queue, allowing you to undo other types of operations without losing the current mixer settings.
Any set to default operations that affect mixer controls will be entered into the Undo queue.
AutoMatch Time If you are writing automation in Touch mode, when you release a fader or control, writing of automation stops and the automation data returns to its previous value. The rate of return to the previous value is the AutoMatch Time .
AutoGlide Time (Pro Tools HD Only) Specifies how quickly Pro Tools transitions (glides) from one automation value to another, when Auto-
Glide mode is used.
Chapter 7: Preferences 75
After Write Pass, Switch To Selects the Automation mode that Pro Tools tracks automatically switch to after an automation pass in Write (or
Write Trim) mode. You can choose to switch to
Touch or Latch mode, or stay in Write mode by selecting No Change. After an automation pass in Write Trim mode, tracks automatically switch to the Trim version of the specified setting.
Coalesce Trim Automation Options
(Pro Tools HD Only)
These options determine when Trim automation is committed to the main automation playlist on a track.
After Every Pass Sets Trim automation to coalesce when the transport is stopped at the end of each Trim automation pass. No Composite Playlist is indicated.
On Exiting Trim Mode Sets Trim Automation to coalesce on a track when the track is taken out of Trim mode. A Composite Playlist can be viewed before committing Trim moves.
Manually Trim Automation can be coalesced only with the Coalesce Trim Automation command. A Composite Playlist can be viewed before committing Trim moves.
Processing Preferences
AudioSuite Section
Buffer Size
AudioSuite Buffer Size sets the size of the memory buffer used for audio processing and previewing with AudioSuite plug-ins. If AudioSuite preview stutters, set the buffer to Mini or Small.
Use AudioSuite Dither When selected, applies a selectable dither plug-in to specific AudioSuite processing tasks (such as Gain and Normalize).
Plug-in Specifies the plug-in used for dither processing when the Use AudioSuite Dither option is selected.
Bit Depth Lets you select a bit depth for the dithered audio (24-bit, 20-bit, 18-bit, or 16-bit).
TC/E (Time Compression/Expansion) Section
TC/E Plug-in Lets you choose the plug-in used for Time Compression and Expansion when you edit audio with the Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool. This Trim tool works by using
76 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Time Compression/Expansion to match an audio region to the length of another region, a tempo grid, a video scene, or other reference point.
Default Settings Specifies the default settings used by the chosen Time Compression/Expansion plug-in.
Import Section
Convert Imported “WAV” Files To AES31/BroadcastWave When selected, this option applies to all newly imported WAV files, making them compliant with the AES31/EBU Broadcast standard.
Automatically Copy Files on Import When selected, all audio files that are imported by dragging and dropping are copied to the current session’s Audio Files folder, regardless of whether the files need to be converted to the current session’s file type, bit depth or sample rate. Additionally, when selected, the Import Session Data dialog defaults to “Copy from Source Media.”
The Automatically Copy Files on Import preference does not affect the Import Audio command.
Sample Rate Conversion Quality Lets you select the default sample rate conversion quality. Sample rate conversion is used in a variety of
Pro Tools processes including converting and importing audio files of different formats into a session, and bouncing and saving tracks to a different sample rate or bit depth. The higher the quality of sample rate conversion you choose, the longer Pro Tools will take to process the audio file.
MIDI Preferences
Basics Section
Play MIDI Notes When Editing When selected, causes MIDI notes to sound when you insert them with the Pencil tool or drag them with any of the Grabber tools.
Use MIDI to Tap Tempo When selected, you can tap a MIDI keyboard to enter a new tempo value into a tempo field.
Display Events as Modified by Real-Time Properties When selected, Pro Tools displays the effects of Real-Time Properties in both the Edit window and the MIDI Event List.
Use F11 Key for Wait for Note When selected, pressing the F11 Function key puts MIDI recording in Wait for Note mode.
Automatically Create Click Track in New
Sessions When enabled, Pro Tools automatically creates a new click track in new sessions.
Default Note On Velocity Sets the default Note
On velocity for MIDI notes inserted in the Edit window and the MIDI Event List.
Chapter 7: Preferences 77
Default Thru Instrument Sets the default MIDI
Thru instrument. Select a predefined device from your available MIDI instruments, or select
“First Selected MIDI Track” to use the assigned
MIDI output of the first selected MIDI or Instrument track. When multiple tracks are selected, the instrument in the selected track that is closest to the top of the Edit window (or closest to the left edge of the Mix window) is used.
Pencil Tool Resolution When Drawing Controller
Data Sets the default resolution for MIDI controller data created with the Pencil tool. Setting this to a lower resolution helps avoid creating controller data that is unnecessarily dense. The value range is from 1 to 100 milliseconds.
Global MIDI Playback Offset Sets an offset in samples to compensate for MIDI latency. Entering a value here has the same effect as setting an offset with the MIDI Track Offsets command.
Offset values can be positive (later) or negative
(earlier).
Note Display Options
These options set the reference for middle C as
C3, C4, or MIDI note number 60.
Delay for External Devices Options
(Pro Tools HD Only)
These options let you apply Delay Compensation to Pro Tools-generated MIDI Time Code or
MIDI Beat Clock. Generally, this delay should be applied when the external MIDI instrument is mixed externally, and when the external MIDI instrument is mixed through Pro Tools.
These options are only available when a Delay
Compensation Engine is chosen in the Playback
Engine dialog and Delay Compensation is enabled in Pro Tools. These options are distinct from the hardware offsets available for hardware inserts (in I/O Setup).
78 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Synchronization Preferences
These preferences determine how a connected transport responds to Pro Tools.
Machine Control Section
Machine Chases Memory Location When selected, navigating to a specific location in a session with a Memory Location causes a connected transport to chase to that location.
Machine Follows Edit Insertion/Scrub When selected, navigating to a specific location in a session by moving the selection point or by scrubbing a track will cause a connected transport to chase to that location.
Machine Cues Intelligently (Pro Tools HD
Only) When selected, if you navigate to a cue point that is more than 10 seconds from the current location, Pro Tools will command a connected transport to fast wind to the new location at full speed to within 10 seconds of the cue point. Cueing will then slow to normal speed until the point is reached. This can significantly speed up tape cueing with certain video transports.
Stop at Shuttle Speed Zero (Pro Tools HD
Only) Causes Pro Tools to send a Stop command whenever you stop shuttling. This is useful if you have a machine that requires an explicit stop command to park correctly.
Non-Linear Transport Error Suppression (Pro Tools
HD Only) When Transport = Pro Tools, keeps
Pro Tools from sending a Stop command when taken offline. This prevents Pro Tools from stopping any other 9-pin devices connected to the system.
Delay Before Locking to Time Code (Pro Tools HD
Only) Sets the amount of time (in frames) for
Pro Tools to wait before attempting to lock to machines that issue servo lock messages. This setting allows time for the servo mechanisms to achieve stable lock.
Remote Mode Section
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Ignore Track Arming Sets Pro Tools to ignore incoming track arming (record enable) commands. This is useful if you are using a master controller to arm tracks on other machines, but you do not want to arm tracks in Pro Tools.
Set Servo Lock Bit at Play (Tamura Support) Enable this option when using a Tamura synchronizer to control Pro Tools in Remote mode to minimize lock-up times during recording.
Allow Track Arm Commands in Local Mode Sets
Pro Tools to respond to incoming track arming
(record enable) commands even when the system is not in Remote Mode. This is useful if you are using a paddle device to control Pro Tools track arming or punching.
Punch In Frame Offset Sets an offset (in frames) to compensate for punch in timing advances or delays.
Punch Out Frame Offset Sets an offset (in frames) to compensate for punch out timing advances or delays.
Delay After Play Command Sets the amount of time (in frames) for Pro Tools to wait after receiving a Play command before starting the audio engine. This can prevent false starts when locking to synchronizers that are not fully supported by Pro Tools.
Synchronization Section
Minimum Sync Delay Sets the amount of time (in frames) your system’s devices need to achieve synchronization “lock.” This amount varies for each device. Pro Tools lock up delay is set by entering a value for Minimum Sync Delay in the
Synchronization page of the Preferences dialog.
The lowest value available is 15 frames. Find the shortest possible lock-up time that your equipment can operate at consistently, and set this as the Minimum Sync Delay. On systems utilizing
Digidesign MachineControl, enabling the Use
Serial Time Code setting will make machines lock up much faster. (Serial time code requires both a Digidesign-qualified synchronization peripheral and external devices to be locked to house video reference.)
Stable LTC Source (Pro Tools HD Only) When selected, this option suppresses the normal 1-second wait time before Pro Tools attempts to lock to incoming LTC. Enable this option when locking Pro Tools to a stable time code source (such as a non-linear tape machine or LTC generator) and not a linear tape machine.
Chapter 7: Preferences 79
80 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Part III: Sessions & Tracks
81
82
Chapter 8: Sessions
This chapter covers the basics of starting a project in Pro Tools, including how to create and save a Pro Tools session.
3 Select the audio file format for the session.
For optimum compatibility between Windows and Mac, set the file type to BWF
(.WAV).
Creating a New Session
The first step in beginning a Pro Tools project is creating a new session.
To create a new session:
1 Choose File > New Session.
New Session dialog
2 Select the drive where you want to save the session. The session should be saved on a dedicated audio drive.
Sound Designer II (SD II) files are not supported on Windows systems or at sample rates above 48 kHz.
4 Select the bit depth (16 bit or 24 bit) and the sample rate.
5 Select the I/O Settings to use for the session.
Several pre-configured I/O Settings are included with your system, or you can select a custom I/O
Setting. For more information, see Chapter 6,
6 Name the Session.
7 Click Save.
Selecting Bit Depth and Sample Rate
When selecting a bit depth or sample rate for your session, consider fidelity, any compatibility issues with others systems, and storage space.
Bit depth and sample rate also have an effect on the amount of mixing power available in a session. Fewer mixer channels are available with
24-bit sessions and with sessions at higher sample rates. (For more information, see your Getting Started Guide .)
Chapter 8: Sessions 83
It is not possible to combine different bit depths within a single Pro Tools session; files of different bit depths must be converted and imported into the session.
Session Files and Folders
When you create a new session, Pro Tools automatically creates a new folder named for your session. Within this folder is the session file, a
WaveCache.wfm file, and several subfolders (including (but not limited to) an Audio Files folder, a Fade Files folder, and a Region Group folder).
Typical session folder contents
Session File
The session file is the document that Pro Tools creates when you start a new project. Pro Tools can open only one session file at a time. The session file is appended with the extension .ptf
(Pro Tools file).
Audio Files Folder
The Audio Files folder contains all audio recorded or converted during the session.
When you record a new audio track, the track is saved as a new audio file to the Audio Files folder. You can also import other audio files into the session, and work with them as well.
For details on allocating audio tracks to different hard drive locations, including
shared media volumes, see “Disk Allocation” on page 265.
84 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Fade Files Folder
The Fade Files folder contains any crossfaded audio data generated by the session.
Region Groups Folder
The Region Groups folder is the default directory for any region groups that you export from your Pro Tools session.
WaveCache File
The WaveCache.wfm file stores all of the waveform display data for the session. If you delete the WaveCache.wfm file, Pro Tools creates a new one the next time you open the session.
By storing waveform data in the WaveCache file, sessions open more quickly. The session
WaveCache file can be included whenever a session is transferred to another Pro Tools 7.x system.
Pro Tools also maintains a distinct WaveCache file inside the local Digidesign Databases folder
(C:\\Digidesign Databases), which retains waveform data for all files used on the system.
Additional WaveCache files are created on each hard drive attached to your system, and stored in the Digidesign Databases folder on each drive.
Deleting or trashing a WaveCache file does not harm the session or your system. However, each session takes longer to open because it has to recalculate waveform data for any associated audio files and store that data in a new WaveCache file.
Session File Backups Folder
The Session File Backups folder contains automatically-generated backups of your Pro Tools sessions. These files are created when working on a session and the Operations preference for
Enable Session File Auto Backup is enabled. (See
“Enable Session File Auto Backup” on page 68.)
Renamed Audio Files Folder
This folder includes file names that have been renamed when you open a session that contains audio file names with incompatible characters, or, in certain situations, save a copy of a session to a Pro Tools version that does not support long file names.
For more information, see “Renamed Audio
Files and the Renamed Audio Files Folder” on page 243.
To open an existing session:
1 Choose File > Open Session.
2 Locate the session you want to open and click
Open.
Open Session dialog
Opening a Session
When you open a session, Pro Tools looks in the session folder for audio and fade files linked to the session.
For more information on opening sessions created on different platforms, Pro Tools systems, or versions of Pro Tools software,
see Chapter 13, “File and Session Management and Compatibility.”
You can also open a session from a Digi-
Base browser by double-clicking it.
Opening a Session that Contains
Unavailable Files
DigiBase notifies you if files are located but reside on Transfer volumes (such as CD or DVD discs), or if any required files cannot be found.
For more information, see “Locating Audio
Opening a Session from a Transfer
Volume
When opening a session from a Transfer volume
(such as a CD or DVD disc), DigiBase prompts you to save the session on a Performance volume, and copy and convert any referenced me-
dia files. For more information, see “Locating
Chapter 8: Sessions 85
Opening a Session that Contains
Unavailable Resources
Pro Tools prompts you when opening a session that contains unavailable voices, I/O paths, DSP resources, or plug-ins. This is common when transferring sessions between systems with different Digidesign hardware.
The Unavailable Resources dialog provides an initial report of the missing session components. To save a text (.txt) file containing a more detailed Notes report, along with the resulting action, click Yes. The Notes report is named with the session name, followed by Notes.txt.
You can choose to save this file in your Session folder, or in another location.
The following occurs when opening a session with unavailable items:
With all Pro Tools Systems:
â—† Inserts assigned to unavailable plug-ins are made inactive.
â—† Inputs, outputs, and sends that are assigned to unavailable paths are made inactive.
With Pro Tools HD Only:
â—† Any tracks beyond the maximum number of available voices on the current system are made inactive.
With Pro Tools LE Only:
â—† Any tracks beyond the maximum number of available voices on the current system are set to voice off .
Opening a Session with Audio File
Names that Contain Illegal
Characters
Pro Tools 7.x does not support audio file names that contain the following ASCII characters:
/ (Forward Slash)
\ (Backslash)
: (Colon)
* (Asterisk)
? (Question mark)
“ (Quotation marks)
< (Less-than symbol)
> (Greater-than symbol)
| (vertical line or pipe)
Any “high order” ASCII character (created with a key combination)
When opening sessions that contain audio files with illegal characters, Pro Tools automatically creates a renamed copy of each file (replacing these characters with an underscore “_”). Renamed files are copied to the Renamed Audio
Files folder. The original files are left intact in the Audio Files folder.
Before the session opens, you are prompted to save a detailed report of the renamed files and their original file names to a Notes text file. Follow the on-screen instructions. By default, the
Notes text file is saved to the Session folder.
Opening a Session that Was Saved with +6 dB Fader Gain
All Pro Tools 7.x sessions have a +12 dB fader gain level. However, when saving a Pro Tools
7.x session to a lower version of Pro Tools that supports +6 dB and +12 dB fader gain, the new session can be saved with either a +6 dB or a
+12 dB maximum fader gain.
86 Pro Tools Reference Guide
When saving a +12 dB session as a +6 dB session, Pro Tools alerts you that any automation settings over +6 dB will be lowered to +6 dB. See
“Saving a Copy of the Session” on page 88.
In Pro Tools 7.x, when opening a session that was saved with a +6 dB maximum gain level, the session will update to a +12 dB range.
Opening Recent Sessions
The Open Recent submenu in the File menu lets you open any of the 10 most recently opened
Pro Tools sessions.
To open a recent session:
â– Choose File > Open Recent and choose the session you want to open.
If a session is open when choosing a recent session, you are prompted to save it before
Pro Tools closes the session and opens the chosen recent session.
Control+Shift+O (Windows) or Command+Shift+O (Mac) opens the most recent session.
Saving a Session
You should save regularly while working on your session to ensure that your work is preserved on your hard drive.
Saving the Session File
The Save command saves the changes you have made to your session and writes them over the previously saved version of the session file. The
Save command cannot be undone.
To save a session:
â– Choose File > Save.
Revert to Saved Command
If you have made changes to a session since you last saved it, you can discard those changes and revert to its previously saved state.
To revert to the last saved version of a session:
â– Choose File > Revert to Saved.
If you have enabled the Operation preference for Auto Backup, you can also open up a backup copy of your session. This feature lets you specify the total number of incremental backups that are kept and how often
the session is saved. See “Auto Backup Section” on page 68.
Saving the Session File with a
New Name
To save a copy of the current session with a new name or to a different hard drive location, use the Save As command. The Save As command closes the current session and lets you keep working on the renamed copy. This is useful if you are experimenting and want to save successive versions of the session.
By working this way, you can quickly retrace your steps if you want to go back to an earlier version of your session. The Save As command saves a new version of the session file only, and does not duplicate versions of the audio or fade files.
Chapter 8: Sessions 87
To save a session with a new name:
1 Choose File > Save As.
2 Enter a new name for your session.
Pro Tools 7.x lets you name files with as many characters as your operating system supports.
3 Click Save.
The renamed session file is saved in the session folder along with the original session (unless you specify a different destination). Any new audio files that you record in your renamed session will be placed into the same Audio Files folder that was created for your original session.
Saving a Copy of the Session
To save a copy of the current session with or without its audio files and fade files, use the
Save Copy In command. In addition, you can specify the session file format, audio file format, bit depth, and sample rate for the session copy.
For information on sharing sessions between different platforms, Pro Tools systems, or Pro Tools software versions, see
Chapter 13, “File and Session Management and Compatibility.”
Unlike the Save As command, Save Copy In does not close the original session, so subsequent edits are made to the original session. Session copies can be used to archive important sessions, or as a means to prepare sessions for transfer to another Pro Tools system.
Save Copy In can save only the audio being used in the session. Any audio that was recorded or imported and then later removed from the session, but not deleted from disk, is not included in the new session copy.
To include all audio with the session copy,
All Audio Files must be selected in the Items to Copy section.
Using the Save Copy In command is the only way to change the sample rate of a session. The sample rate of each of the session’s copied audio files is converted to the selected sample rate.
When you save a copy of the session to a lower bit depth, Dither (and Noise Shaping) are applied. See the following table:
Dither and Noise Shaping with Save Copy In
Session Bit Depth Dither
Noise
Shaping
24-bit to 24-bit
16-bit to 24-bit
24-bit to 16-bit
16-bit to 16-bit
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
The Dither setting used for any conversion is the
Digidesign Dither plug-in with Noise Shaping enabled.
For more information about using Dither,
Save Copy In dialog
88 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To save a session copy in a new location:
1 Choose File > Save Copy In.
2 In the Save Copy In dialog, choose a destination and enter a name for the new session file.
3 Choose a session file format for the copied session.
4 Set the Audio File Type for the copied session.
If the audio files need to be compatible with either Windows or Mac, select BWF (.WAV) or
AIFF.
5 Set the session Sample Rate and Bit Depth for the copied session.
6 If applicable, select a Fader Gain level for the copied session.
7 If applicable, select “Enforce Mac/PC Compatibility” to create session and audio files that can be used on both Windows and Mac Pro Tools
systems (see “Saving Copies of Mac Sessions to be Compatible with Windows” on page 246).
8 Select the Items to Copy for the copied session.
To include audio with the session copy, All
Audio Files must be selected.
9 Click Save.
Session Format
You can save the session copy in the following formats, depending on your platform:
Windows:
• Pro Tools Session (.ptf); supports Pro Tools
7.x
• Pro Tools 5.1 -> 6.9 Session (.pts);
• Pro Tools 5.0 Session (.pt5)
• Pro Tools 4 24-Bit Session (.p24)
• Pro Tools 4 16-Bit Session (.pt4)
Mac:
• Latest; supports Pro Tools 7.x
• Pro Tools 5.1 -> 6.9 Session
• Pro Tools 5.0 Session
• Pro Tools 4 24-Bit Session
• Pro Tools 4 16-Bit Session
• Pro Tools 3.2 Session
When saving sessions to versions lower than Pro Tools 5.1, multichannel tracks
(including stereo) and multi-mono plug-ins are lost. In this case, separate the tracks and plug-ins to individual mono tracks before saving as a Pro Tools 5.0 session or lower.
Session Parameters
Audio File Type
You can save the session to reference BWF
(.WAV) or AIFF audio files. On the Mac, you can also save the session to reference SD II audio files (at sample rates up to 48 kHz).
SD II sessions are not supported with
Pro Tools on Windows, or with sample rates higher than 48 kHz. For optimal compatibility, convert SD II sessions to BWF
(.WAV).
Using Mixed File Types
A session can use mixed audio file types. If your original session has mixed file types, they are not converted to a different file type unless you specify that they be converted. However, when using mixed file types, audio performance will be reduced (due to additional file handling required for some file formats).
Chapter 8: Sessions 89
Bit Depth
You can save the session at 16-bit or 24-bit depth. If your session is in a different bit depth, audio files are converted to the new session bit depth, and copied to the specified location.
For information on bouncing to disk and
dither, see “Dither and Bounce to Disk” on page 744.
Sample Rate
You can save the session at sample rates of
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz (on Mbox 2, Mbox 2 Mini, and Mbox) and at sample rates up to 96 kHz (on
Mbox 2 Pro, Digi 002, Digi 002 Rack, and
Pro Tools|HD systems with a 96 I/O or 96i I/O) or up to 192 kHz (on Pro Tools|HD systems with a 192 I/O or 192 Digital I/O). If your session is at a different sample rate, audio files are converted to the new session sample rate, and copied to the specified location.
Fader Gain
When saving a Pro Tools 7.x session to a lower version of Pro Tools that supports +6 dB and
+12 dB fader gain, you can save the new session with either a +6 dB or a +12 dB maximum fader gain. When saving a +12 dB session as a +6 dB session, Pro Tools alerts you that any automation settings over +6 dB will be lowered to
+6 dB.
Enforce Mac/PC Compatibility
When saving a Pro Tools 7.x session to a lower version of Pro Tools, this setting forces Windows or Mac versions of Pro Tools to create sessions and audio files that are usable on both platforms.
For more information, see “Saving Copies of
Mac Sessions to be Compatible with Windows” on page 246.
90 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Items to Copy
All Audio Files
When this option is selected, all audio files are copied to the new location.
This setting is automatically selected if you change the bit depth or sample rate of the session.
All “Non-Native” Audio Files
The name of this option varies depending on the audio file type you select. If you change the audio file type of the session, this option ensures that all files in the copied session are converted to the selected file type. Use this option to avoid the reduced performance of a session with mixed file types.
This option is automatically selected if you do any of the following:
• Change bit depth or sample rate.
• Copy a session on the Mac from SD II format to AIFF or BWF (.WAV) format.
• Select Enforce Mac/PC Compatibility.
Don’t Copy Fade Files
When this option is selected, Fade Files are not copied to the new session Fade Files folder.
Pro Tools opens the session with all available media, then shows you how many files are missing (if any) and asks how you want to proceed.
You can choose to locate the existing fades, using Manually Find Relink or Automatically Find
Relink, or choose to Skip All to let Pro Tools recreate the fades from the session document. You can also select Regenerate Missing Fades to exclude fade files from the relink process and regenerate them instead.
Session Plug-in Settings Folder
When this option is selected, the session’s Plugin Settings folder is copied to the new location.
The references to these plug-in settings in the session are redirected to the copied settings files.
Root Plug-in Settings Folder
When this option is selected, the contents of the root-level Plug-in Settings Folder are copied into a folder named Place in Root Settings Folder , indicating that these files will need to be moved to the root level plug-in settings folder on the destination system before you can use them. The references to these settings files in the session are not redirected to point to the copied files.
Movie/Video Files
When this option is selected, session video files
(Avid or QuickTime) are copied to the new location, and session references are updated to point to the copied video files.
Preserve Folder Hierarchy (Pro Tools HD
Only) When selected, the relative arrangement of session audio files located across different drives or folders is maintained. The main folder for the session copy will include subfolders for each drive or folder in the original session and the destination subfolders will use the same names as the source drives and folders.
When this option is not selected, the Save Copy
In command copies all files of the same type, regardless of their location, into a single destination folder.
Creating Custom Session
Templates
You can create custom session documents that are pre-configured to the track setups, mixer setups, window arrangements, and zoom level
Memory Locations that you use most frequently. Doing this will save you the trouble of having to create your studio setup from scratch every time you start a new session.
You can also install and use the factory
Pro Tools Session Templates included on the Pro Tools Installer disc in the Additional
Files folder.
Creating Windows Templates
In Windows, you can create a session template by making a session file a Read Only document.
To create a custom session template in Windows:
1 Create a session and arrange its elements as you want them to appear in the template. You can also define elements such as signal routing, insert and send configurations, Track Views, ruler settings, and Preference settings.
2 Choose File > Save As.
3 Name the session and click Save.
4 Close the session.
5 In Windows Explorer, locate the session file that you just saved.
6 Right-click the file and choose Properties.
Chapter 8: Sessions 91
7 Under Attributes, select Read Only.
Making a session a Read Only file (Windows)
8 Click OK.
To use a session template, do one of the following:
â–
Double-click the session template in Windows Explorer.
– or –
â–
In Pro Tools, open the session template using the File > Open Session command.
Pro Tools prompts you to name the new session.
The original session template remains unchanged.
To modify the session template:
1 In Windows Explorer, open the session’s Properties.
2 Deselect the Read Only option and click Apply.
3 Open the session in Pro Tools and make your changes.
4 Save the session and quit Pro Tools.
5 In Windows Explorer, reopen its Properties, and change it back to a Read Only file.
Creating Mac Templates
On the Mac, create a session template by saving a session file as a Stationery Pad document. Once a session is saved as a Stationery Pad, it acts as a template that you can open and then resave as a normal Pro Tools session.
To create a custom session template on the Mac:
1 Create a session and arrange its elements as you want them to appear in the template. In addition to track setup, you can also define elements such as signal routing, insert and send configurations, Mix and Edit window views, ruler settings, and Preference settings.
2 Choose File > Save As.
3 Name the session and click Save.
4 Close the session.
5 In the Mac Finder, locate the session file that you just saved.
6 Click once on the file to select it.
7 Choose File > Get Info.
Saving a session as a Stationery Pad (Mac)
8 If necessary, click the General expand/collapse triangle to display the General information and options.
92 Pro Tools Reference Guide
9 Select the Stationery Pad option.
10 Select the Locked option.
11 Close the information window.
To use a session template, do one of the following:
â– Double-click the session template in the Mac
Finder.
– or –
â– In Pro Tools, open the session template using the File > Open Session command.
When you open a session saved as a Stationery
Pad, Pro Tools gives you the option of editing the template or starting a new session using the template settings. If you choose New Session,
Pro Tools creates a new folder containing a copy of your session template and Audio and Fades folders.
Exiting or Quitting Pro Tools
When you exit (Windows) or quit (Mac) the
Pro Tools application, Pro Tools prompts you to save any open session before exiting or closing the application.
To exit Pro Tools in Windows:
â– Choose File > Exit.
To quit Pro Tools on the Mac:
â–
Choose Pro Tools > Quit Pro Tools.
Closing a Session
Pro Tools only lets you work on just one session at a time. The Close Session command closes your current Pro Tools session but leaves the
Pro Tools application running. Pro Tools prompts you to save a session when closing it, but it is recommended that you save your work using the Save or Save As command before closing a session regardless.
To close a session:
â–
Choose File > Close Session.
Chapter 8: Sessions 93
94 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows
Pro Tools provides two complementary ways of viewing a session: the Mix window and the Edit window. Pro Tools lets you control the transport and transport-related functions using the
Transport window. Additionally, DigiBase browsers let you manage and import media in
Pro Tools sessions.
To toggle between the Mix and Edit windows, press Control+Equals (=) (Windows), or press Command+Equals (=) (Mac).
To display all Mix window view options:
â– Select View > Mix Window > All.
For information on selecting individual view
options, see “Views in the Mix and Edit Windows” on page 634.
Mix Window
In the Mix window, tracks appear as channel strips, with controls for:
• Inserts
• Sends
• Input and output assignments
• Volume
• Panning
• Record enable
• Track Input monitoring
• Automation mode
• Solo and Mute
• Instrument controls
• Mic preamps (Pro Tools HD only)
To display the Mix window:
â– Choose Window > Mix.
Edit Window
The Edit window provides a timeline display of audio, as well as MIDI data and mixer automation for recording, editing, and arranging tracks.
As in the Mix window, each track has controls for record enable, solo, mute, and automation mode.
To display the Edit window:
â– Choose Window > Edit.
To display all Edit window view options:
â– Select View > Edit Window > All.
For information on selecting individual view
options, see “Views in the Mix and Edit Windows” on page 634.
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 95
Send with
Send controls
Plug-in Insert
Track Color
Coding
Track List
Automation
Mode selector
Pan Slider
Output Window button
Group ID indicator
Voice selector
Mix Group
List
AutoMatch indicator
Delay
Compensation
Show/Hide
Track List/Group List
View
Figure 2. Pro Tools Mix window
96 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Mix Window
View selector
Stereo
Audio Track
Mono
Audio Track
Auxiliary
Input
Instrument
Track
MIDI
Track
Master
Fader
Instrument
View
Inserts
View
Sends
View
Track
Path Selectors and Controls
Volume
Fader
Level Meter
MIDI Track
Patch Select button
Track Name
Track
Comments
View
Commands Keyboard Focus
Graphic Tempo Editor
Edit Mode buttons
View Selectors
Track List
Timebase rulers
Audio Track
Track View selector
Timebase selector
Edit Group
List
Show/Hide
Track List/Group List
View
Timeline Selections
Edit tools
Edit Selection indicators
Grid and
Nudge values
Event Edit Area
Transport controls
Timeline
Edit Window bar
MIDI Track
MIDI Velocity View
Selected Region
MIDI Notes View
Show/Hide
Region List
Region
List
Region
Group
Volume
Automation
View
Audio
Waveform
View
Figure 3. Pro Tools Edit window
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 97
Track Path Selectors and Controls
Audio Input Path selector (page 122)
Audio Output Path selector (page 122)
Automation Mode selector (page 692)
Record Enable button (page 258)
TrackInput Monitor button (page 261)
(Pro Tools HD only)
Mix window track controls for mono audio track
(Wide View)
Record Enable button
Track Height selector (page 338)
Automation Mode selector
Track View selector (page 335)
TrackInput Monitor button (page 261)
Edit window track controls for stereo audio track
(medium track height)
Edit Tools
Trim tools
Zoomer tool
Selector tool
Grabber tools
Scrubber tool
Pencil tool
Zoom Toggle
Smart Tool
Edit tools in Edit window
Custom Note
Edit Window Counters and
Selection Indicators
Main and Sub Counters
Main and Sub Counters (page 393)
Edit window display showing counters
The Main and Sub Counters can be set for different Time Scale formats (such as Samples,
Bars:Beats, or Minutes:Seconds). For more infor-
mation, see “Main Time Scale” on page 348.
These counters are also displayed in the Transport window.
Edit Selection Indicators
Edit Selection indicators (page 393)
Edit Selection indicators in the Edit window
The Edit Selection Start, End, and Length indicators display can be set for different Time Scale formats (such as Samples, Bars:Beats, or Min-
utes:Seconds). For more information, see “Main
Event Edit Area
The Event Edit Area provides time, pitch, and other information for the currently selected audio or MIDI data. It also lets you define selections using the computer keyboard.
Pitch
Attack
Velocity
Release Velocity
Event Edit Area showing MIDI track information
98 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Edit Window Bar
The Edit Window bar contain various selectors, commands, indicators, and pop-up menus for working in the Pro Tools Edit window.
View Selectors
Cursor Location Indicators
Cursor Location indicator (page 389)
Cursor Location Value indicator
Cursor Location indicators in the Edit Window bar
Ruler View selector (page 634)
Edit window View selector (page 634)
View selectors in the Edit Window bar
Commands
Linearity Display
Mirrored MIDI
Editing
Tab to Transients
Link Track and Edit Selection
Commands Keyboard Focus
Link Timeline and Edit Selection
Commands in the Edit Window bar
Grid/Nudge Value Indicators and Pop-
Up Menus
Transport Window
The Transport window can be set to show basic transport controls, counters, MIDI controls, and expanded features. The counters in the Transport window mirror the controls and counters at the top of the Edit window.
To display the Transport window:
â– Choose Window > Transport.
Basic Transport Controls and
Counters
Return to Zero
Online
Rewind
Stop
Track Record Enable indicator
Fast Forward
Play
Go to End
Record
Grid Value indicator
Grid Value pop-up menu
Nudge Value indicator
Nudge Value pop-up menu
Grid/Nudge Value indicators and pop-up menus in the
Edit Window bar
Pre-Roll
Post-Roll
Transport Master
Pre-Roll indicator
Start, End, and Length
Selection indicators
Post-Roll indicator
TrackInput Monitor indicator
Transport window showing basic transport controls and counters (Main and Sub Counters and MIDI not shown)
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 99
Online Puts Pro Tools online so that playback and recording is triggered by an external time code source.
Return to Zero Locates to the beginning of the session.
Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac) to
Return to Zero.
Right-clicking the Return to Zero button accesses the Write to Start and Write to All automation commands.
Rewind Rewinds from the current play location.
You can also click repeatedly to rewind incrementally, by an amount based on the Main
Time Scale, as follows:
Rewind Increments
Main Time Scale Format Increment Amount
Min:Sec
Time Code
1 second
1 frame
(Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2)
Bars:Beats
Feet+Frame
1 bar
1 foot
(Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2)
Sample 1 second
With the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Transport, you can rewind by pressing 1.
Stop Stops playback or recording.
You can also stop the transport by pressing the Spacebar, or with the Numeric Keypad mode set to Transport, pressing 0.
Play Starts playback or (if the Record button was clicked first) recording from the Timeline insertion point or the Play Start Marker location if
Dynamic Transport mode is enabled.
You can also begin playback by pressing the
Spacebar, or with the Numeric Keypad mode set to Transport, pressing 0.
Right-clicking the Play button lets you select the playback mode from a pop-up menu:
• Half-Speed
• Prime for Playback
• Loop
• Dynamic Transport
To initiate playback at half-speed, you can also press Shift+Spacebar (Windows or
Mac) or Shift-click (Mac) the Play button.
With the Transport stopped, Start-click Play
(Windows) or Control-click Play (Mac) to toggle
Loop Playback mode. When enabled, a loop symbol appears in the Play button and Pro Tools plays continuously from the beginning of the selection to the end.
For more information on loop playback and
Dynamic Transport mode, see “Looping
100 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Fast Forward Fast forwards from the Timeline insertion point. You can also click repeatedly to fast forward incrementally (by an amount based on the Main Time Scale).
Fast Forward Increments
Main Time Scale Format Increment Amount
Min:Sec
Time Code
1 second
1 frame
(Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools
LE with DV Toolkit 2)
Bars:Beats
Feet+Frame
1 bar
1 foot
(Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools
LE with DV Toolkit 2)
Sample 1 second
With Numeric Keypad mode set to Transport, you can fast forward by pressing 2.
Go to End Locates to the end of the session.
You can press Control+Enter (Windows) or
Option+Return (Mac) on the QWERTY keyboard to locate to the end of the session.
You can also Right-click the Go to End button to access automation commands Write to End and Write to All.
Record Arms Pro Tools for recording (the button flashes). Clicking Play then starts recording on record-enabled tracks only.
You can also begin recording immediately by pressing F12, pressing Control+Spacebar
(Windows) or Command+Spacebar (Mac), or with the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Transport, pressing 3.
Right-clicking the Record button lets you select the record mode from a pop-up menu:
• Normal
• Loop
• Destructive
• QuickPunch
• TrackPunch (Pro Tools HD only)
• Destructive Punch (Pro Tools HD only)
You can also cycle through the Pro Tools record modes with the Transport stopped, by Startclicking (Windows) or Control-clicking (Mac) the Record button.
The Record button changes to indicate the currently selected mode: blank for Nondestructive,
“D” for Destructive, a loop symbol for Loop
Record, “P” for QuickPunch, “T” for Track-
Punch, and “DP” for DestructivePunch.
To initiate recording at half-speed, you can press Control+Shift+Spacebar (Windows) or Command+Shift+Spacebar (Mac).
Track Record Enable Indicator When lit (red), indicates that at least one audio track is currently record-enabled. When off (grey), no tracks are currently record-enabled.
TrackInput Monitor Indicator When lit (green), indicates that at least one audio track is currently set to Input Only monitoring (regardless of record enable status). When off (grey), all tracks are in Auto Input monitoring.
Pre-Roll During playback or record, specifies the amount of audio that plays before the Play
(Timeline) Cursor or Play Start Marker location, or beginning of the Timeline selection. Pre-roll is particularly useful with punch recording since it provides you with time to “catch the beat” be-
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 101
fore reaching the punch-in point. To set the preroll amount, enter a new value in this field, or drag the Pre-Roll flag in the Main Timebase ruler.
To enable pre-roll:
â– Click the Pre-Roll button to the left of the preroll field so it becomes highlighted.
Post-Roll During playback or record, specifies the amount that plays after the end of a Timeline selection. Post-roll is useful in punch recording since playback continues after the punch-out point so you can check for a smooth transition to previously recorded material. To set the post-roll amount, enter a new value in this field, or drag the Post-Roll flag in the Main
Timebase ruler.
To enable post-roll:
â– Click the Post-Roll button to the left of the post-roll field so it becomes highlighted.
Start Specifies the beginning of the play or record range. You can set the start point by entering a location in this field, or by dragging the corresponding Timeline Selection or Play Start
Marker in the Main Timebase ruler. For more in-
formation, see “Timeline Selection Markers” on page 289.
End Specifies the end of the play or record range.
You can set the end point by entering a location in this field, or by dragging the corresponding
Timeline Selection Marker in the Main Time-
base ruler. For more information, see “Timeline
Selection Markers” on page 289.
Length Specifies the length for the play or record range. You can set the length by entering a location in this field, or by selecting a range in any
Timebase ruler.
When the Timeline and Edit selections are linked, you can make an Edit selection in a track’s playlist to set the play and record
range. See “Linking or Unlinking Timeline and Edit Selections” on page 396
Transport Master Selector Specifies the “master” for transport functions and provides a control to take enabled devices offline.
To set a Transport Master:
â– Click the Transport Master selector, from the
Transport submenu, select a Transport Master:
Pro Tools, Machine, MMC (MIDI Machine Control), or Remote.
To take a device offline:
â– Click the Transport Master selector, from the
Online submenu, deselect the device (MIDI or
Machine). Device options depend on the current Transport Master, and which devices have been set up in Pro Tools.
To bring the device back online, select it in the
Online submenu.
If you using an MMC device, see Chapter 35,
“Working with Synchronization.”
If you are using the Digidesign Machine-
Control option, see the MachineControl
Guide.
102 Pro Tools Reference Guide
MIDI Controls
Wait for Note
Tempo Ruler
Enable
Countoff
Metronome Click
MIDI Merge
Current Meter
Current Tempo
Tempo Resolution
(Beat Value)
Tempo slider
Transport window showing MIDI controls
To view the MIDI controls in the Transport, do one of the following:
â– Select View > Transport > MIDI Controls.
– or –
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the Expand/Collapse “+” button in the
Transport window to display the MIDI controls.
Expand/Collapse “+” button
Transport Window with MIDI Controls
Wait for Note When selected, recording does not begin until a MIDI event is received. This ensures that you begin recording when you’re ready to play, and that the first note, or other
MIDI data, is recorded precisely at the beginning of the record range.
You can press F11 to turn on Wait for Note, unless the MIDI preference for “Disable F11 for Wait for Note” is enabled.
Metronome Click When selected, Pro Tools generates a metronome pulse that can be set to trigger built-in sounds or MIDI instruments during playback and recording.
The Pro Tools metronome is configured in the
Click/Countoff Options dialog. Double-click the
Metronome Click button to open the
Click/Countoff Options dialog.
With the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Transport, press 7 to enable the Metronome
Click.
Countoff When selected, Pro Tools counts off a specified number of measures (indicated in the button) before playback or recording begins.
Double-click the Countoff button, to open the
Click/Countoff Options dialog.
With the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Transport, press 8 to enable the Countoff.
MIDI Merge When selected (Merge mode), recorded MIDI data is merged with existing track material. When deselected (Replace mode), recorded MIDI data replaces existing track material.
With the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Transport, press 9 to enable MIDI Merge.
Tempo Ruler Enable (Conductor) When selected,
Pro Tools uses the tempo map defined in the
Tempo ruler. When deselected, Pro Tools switches to Manual Tempo mode and ignores the Tempo ruler.
In Manual Tempo mode, you can enter a BPM value in the tempo field, or tap in the tempo with the T key on your QWERTY keyboard.
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 103
Tempo Slider When the Tempo Ruler Enable
(Conductor) is disabled, Pro Tools ignores the tempo events in the Tempo track and instead plays back the specified Manual Tempo. This tempo can be set with the Tempo slider.
Current Meter Displays the session’s current meter based on the play location. Double-click the Current Meter indicator to open the Change
Meter window.
Current Tempo Displays the session’s current tempo based on the play location. In Manual
Tempo mode, you can enter a BPM value into this field, or manually tap in a tempo with a computer keyboard or an external MIDI keyboard.
The main elements of a DigiBase browser (see
Figure 4 on page 105) include the following:
Title Bar Shows the browser type (Work-space,
Volume, Project, or Catalog), and the name of its associated volume, session or catalog.
Toolbar Provides the Browser menu, Search icon,
View Presets (numbered 1–5), and browser navigation tools.
Column Headers Display the type of metadata displayed in the Items List. Column Headers can be:
• Resized by dragging the column border, or rearranged by dragging the Column headers.
• Dragged to either of two available panes, the Fixed or Scrolling panes.
Items List Displays the contents of a volume, folder, session, or Catalog database. Each column in the items list displays metadata (such as file name and format) for volumes, folders, and files in the Items List.
DigiBase Browsers
DigiBase databases are accessed through Digi-
Base browsers . Browsers provide an intuitive user interface to DigiBase databases with many convenient features for various file management tasks (such as search and sort functions).
Browsers in Pro Tools are analogous to windows in your computer’s operating system (such as
Windows Explorer or the Mac Finder), but are designed for Pro Tools workflow. Multiple browsers can be displayed simultaneously, and arranged independently with custom display settings for each.
Browsers let you search and sort audio files, video files, and sessions. These files are displayed in browsers and can be dragged directly into the current Pro Tools session.
When offline items are needed, Pro Tools lets you find the correct matching files, then relink to online media.
104 Pro Tools Reference Guide
TItle bar
Toolbar
Column headers
Items
List
Fixed pane
Show/Hide
Figure 4. Main elements of a DigiBase browser (Volume browser shown).
Pane split
Scrolling pane
There are three types of Pro Tools browsers available on all supported systems:
• The Workspace browser
• Volume browsers
• The Project browser
DigiBase Pro (Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 only) provides one additional browser:
• Catalogs
Workspace Browser
The Workspace browser provides access to all your mounted volumes, as well as the folders and files they contain.
Using the Workspace browser, you can:
• Access all mounted volumes.
• Access all Catalogs.
• Search across multiple volumes and Catalogs simultaneously.
• Designate volumes for Record and Playback, Playback Only, or Transfer.
• Unmount volumes.
• View, manage, audition and import individual items in any catalog or mounted volume.
• Update databases for entire volumes.
For more information about the Workspace
browser, see “Workspace Browser” on page 195.
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 105
Volume Browsers
Volume browsers provide file management for local and network volumes . Volumes are formatted partitions on a physical drive (hard drive).
Open a Volume browser by double-clicking a volume in the Workspace browser. Any changes made in Volume browsers (such as copying, deleting, or moving files and folders) is mirrored on the volumes themselves. Volumes include mounted hard drives, network storage, and
CD/DVD-ROMs.
Using Volume browsers you can:
• View, manage, audition and import individual items on the volume.
• Update a database for contents of the volume.
Project Browser
The Project browser provides powerful search and management tools for the files referenced in your current session, regardless of where they are stored. Using the Project browser, you can:
• Show all the media files associated with the current session, including any missing files.
• View, manage, audition and spot individual items.
For detailed information about the Project
browser, see “Project Browser” on page 198.
Catalogs (DigiBase Pro Only)
Catalogs provide the highest level of Pro Tools file management. Catalogs make it easy to organize files from multiple sources into libraries of favorite files. Catalogs can be sorted and searched, even when the files they reference are offline. Catalogs can also be shared.
Using Catalogs, you can:
• Collect and organize files from any combination of volumes.
• Create catalogs of complete volumes to view and search even if a volume is offline.
• View, manage, audition, and import individual items in the catalog.
• Update a database for contents of catalog.
For detailed information about Catalogs,
see “DigiBase Pro Catalogs” on page 199.
Task Window
The Task window is a utility for viewing and managing all of the background tasks that you initiate with Pro Tools. Use the Task window to monitor, pause, or cancel background tasks such as file copies, searches, indexing, and fade creation.
For detailed information about the Task
window, see “Task Window” on page 204.
Relink Window
The Relink window provides tools and features for relinking sessions and catalogs to media files.
Use Relink tools to search and reacquire missing files for use in the current session.
For detailed information about the Relink
window, see “Relink Window” on page 191.
106 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Window Configurations
Pro Tools provides a powerful means of managing the configuration of windows in your session, as well as the internal window configurations of the Edit, Mix, and Transport windows.
Use the Window Configuration List to create (or delete) and manage stored Window Configurations. Pro Tools lets you store up to 99 Window
Configurations. Window Configurations are saved with the session.
Create a session template with your favorite
Window Configurations. You can then use the template when you start a new session, or you can use Import Session Data to import Window Configurations into your current session.
A Window Configuration can store the location and size of all open windows, including:
• Edit window
• Mix window
• Workspace browser
• Project browser
• DigiBase browsers
• Session Setup window
• Time, Tempo, and MIDI Operations windows
• MIDI Event List
• Real-time MIDI Properties window
• Beat Detective window
• Plug-in windows
• Panner windows
• Mic Pre windows
• All floating windows listed in the Window menu:
• Task Manager window
• Transport window
• Big Counter window
• Automation window
• Memory Locations window
• Machine Track Arming window
• Universe window
• Video window
• Color Palette window
• Undo History window
• Disk Space window
• System Usage window
The location and size of the Window Configuration List is not stored with Window
Configurations.
A Window Configuration can also store the
Window Display Settings for the Edit, Mix, and
Transport windows.
Window Configuration List
The Window Configuration List lets you recall and manage stored Window Configurations, as well as create new Window Configurations.
Window Configuration List
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 107
To open the Window Configuration List:
â–
Select Window > Configurations > Window
Configuration List.
Press Control+Alt+J (Windows) or Command+Option+J (Mac) to show or hide the
Window Configuration List.
Window Configuration Properties
Window Configurations can be stored and recalled with the layout of windows in your
Pro Tools session, as well as with the settings for the Edit, Mix, and Transport windows. You can specify which of these properties are stored for each Window Configuration either in the New
Window Configuration dialog or the Edit Window Configuration dialog.
Edit Window Configuration dialog
Number Is the number of the slot in which the
Window Configuration is stored (1–99). You can type Period (.), the number of the Window
Configuration, and then Asterisk (*) on the numeric keypad on your computer keyboard to recall the Window Configuration stored in that slot.
Name Is the name of the stored Window Configuration.
Window Layout When enabled, stores the size and location of all open windows.
108 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Include Edit, Mix, and Transport Display
Settings When enabled, stores all window display settings for the Edit, Mix, and Transport windows with the Window Configuration (such as whether or not the Region List is shown in the Edit window).
Edit Window Display Settings Stores only the window display settings for the Edit window:
• Width of the Tracks List and Group List
• Height of the Tracks List
• Width of the Region List
• What rulers are shown (the main ruler is always shown)
• What track columns are shown (such as Inserts, Sends, or Comments)
• Tempo editor display
• Whether Transport controls are shown in the Edit window
Mix Window Display Settings Stores all window display settings for the Mix window:
• Width of the Tracks List and Group List
• Height of the Tracks List
• What track rows are shown (such as Inserts,
Sends, or Comments)
• Narrow/wide mixer view
Transport Window Display Settings Stores all window display settings for the Transport window:
• Counters display
• MIDI controls display
• Expanded view
Comments Lets you type comments for the Window Configuration.
Window Configuration Commands and
Options
View Filter Icons
Using the View Filter icons, the Window Configuration List lets you show or hide Window
Configurations based on whether or not they are stored with Window Layout, Edit Window settings, Mix Window settings, or Transport
Window settings.
Window Layout
Edit Window settings
Mix Window settings
Transport Window settings
Window Configuration List Pop-Up Menu
You can select viewing and sorting options, along with commands for creating and removing Window Configurations, from the pop-up menu in the Window Configuration List.
Window Configuration List view filter icons
To filter Window Configurations in the Window
Configuration List, do one of the following:
â–
Click the View Filter icon to show or hide
Window Configurations that include that property (Window Layout, Edit Window Settings,
Mix Window Settings, or Transport Window
Settings).
– or –
â–
Select or deselect the View Filter item in the
Window Configuration List pop-up menu.
Window Configuration List pop-up menu
View Filter Lets you show or hide Window Configuration filter icons in the Window Configuration List as well as show or hide Window Configurations with Window Layout, Edit Window
Settings, Mix Window Settings, or Transport
Window Settings.
Show Comments Lets you show or hide Comments in the Window Configuration List.
New Configuration Creates a new Window Configuration. This command is also available from
Window > Configurations.
Update <Name> Updates the selected Window
Configuration with any changes to the layout and settings of windows depending on the Window Configuration’s properties. This command is also available from Window > Configurations.
Edit <Name> Opens the Edit Window Configuration dialog where you can edit the properties of the selected Window Configuration.
Clear <Name> Clears the selected Window Configuration without deleting the slot (number).
Delete All Deletes all Window Configurations.
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 109
Insert Slot Before <Name> Inserts a new slot before the selected Window Configuration and, if necessary, increments the number of each following slot.
Delete <Name> Slot Deletes the selected Window Configuration and its slot (number), and renumbers each subsequent slot.
Auto-Update Active Configuration Automatically updates the active Window Configuration as you make changes to the layout and settings of windows. This command is also available from
Window > Configurations.
Active Window Configuration
The active Window Configuration is indicated by a diamond to the left of the Window Configuration Number in the Window Configuration
List and in the Configurations submenu (Window > Configuration). If Auto-Update Active
Configuration is enabled, the number of the active configuration is also displayed in the Window menu. Only Window Configurations that include Window Layout can be made active.
Window Configurations that do not include
Window Layout can be selected and update the
Window Display Settings in the active Window
Layout.
Active Window Configuration
Active Window Configuration
Creating a New Window Configuration
To create a new Window Configuration:
1 Open the windows you want to include in the
Window Configuration and position them where you want on the screen.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Window > Configurations > New
Configuration.
– or –
• Choose New Configuration from the Window Configuration List pop-up menu.
New Window Configuration dialog
3 In the New Window Configuration dialog, do one of the following:
• Select Window Layout and whether or not to include the Edit, Mix, and Transport window display settings.
– or –
• Select a Window Display Settings option from the pop-up menu (Edit Window Display Settings, Mix Window Display Settings, or Transport Window Display
Settings)
4 Name the Window Configuration.
110 Pro Tools Reference Guide
5 You can type a different number for the new
Window Configuration (if the number you type is already used by another Window Configuration, you are prompted to replace it or Cancel), otherwise Pro Tools automatically fills in the first available number (1–99) for the Window
Configuration.
6 Type any comments for the new Window
Configuration.
7 Click OK to store the new Window Configuration, or cancel.
The new Window Configuration is added to the
Window Configuration List.
On the numeric keypad, type Period (.), a number (1–99), and then Plus (+) to add a new Window Configuration at that number slot. If a Window Configuration already exists at that numbered slot, the new Window
Configuration overwrites it.
Recalling Window Configurations
You can use the Window Configuration List to recall stored Window Configurations. You can also use the Number Keypad on your computer keyboard to recall a specific Window Configuration.
To recall a Window Configuration, do one of the following:
â– Select the Window Configuration from Window > Configurations.
â– In the Window Configuration List, click the
Window Configuration to recall it.
â– On the numeric keypad, press Period (.), the number of the Window Configuration (1–99), and then Asterisk (*).
The Pro Tools session’s screen layout updates with the stored Window Configuration.
Undoing a Window Configuration
Pro Tools lets you revert to the previous Window Layout and Window Settings with a single level of undo. This is useful, for example, if you recall a Window Configuration, but then decide you want to revert to the previous screen state.
To undo a Window Configuration:
â– On the numeric keypad, press Period (.), 0, and then Asterisk (*).
To redo a Window Configuration:
â– On the numeric keypad, press Period (.), 0, and then Asterisk (*).
If Auto-Update Active Configuration is enabled, undoing the Window Configuration reverts to the previously stored Window Configuration without automatically saving changes (see “Updating Window Configurations” on page 112).
Editing Window Configurations
You can change which properties are stored with Window Configurations, as well as the number, name, or comments.
To edit a Window Configuration:
1 In the Window Configuration List, select the
Window Configuration you want to edit.
2 From the Window Configuration List pop-up menu, select Edit <Name>.
3 In the Edit Window Configuration dialog, make the desired changes and click OK.
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 111
Updating Window Configurations
After you recall a stored Window Configuration, you can make changes to the window layout and window settings, and then update the stored Window Configuration with your changes. You can do this manually, or you can have Pro Tools automatically update the active configuration.
To manually update a Window Configuration, do one of the following:
â– Choose Window > Configurations > Update
Active Configuration.
The active Window Configuration updates to include any changes to its included properties
(Window Layout and Window Display Settings).
– or –
â– From the Window Configuration List pop-up menu, choose Update <Name>.
The selected Window Configuration updates with any changes to its included properties.
To have Pro Tools automatically update the active
Window Configuration, do one of the following:
â– Select Window > Configurations > Auto-Update Active Configuration.
– or –
â– From the Window Configuration List pop-up menu, select Auto-Update Active Configuration.
When Auto-Update Active Configuration is selected, the active Window Configuration updates with every change to the Window Layout and Window Display Settings.
Window Configurations that do not include
Window Layout and only store Window Display
Settings cannot be made active and thus won't automatically update. If you want to update a
112 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Window Configuration with changes to the
Window Display Settings (such as the width of the Region List in the Edit window), use the Update command in the Window Configuration
List.
Clearing Window Configurations
Clearing a window configuration removes it and its associated slot number while keeping the slot numbers of other window configurations unchanged. The Clear command is useful if you want to insert another configuration it the same slot.
To clear a Window Configuration:
1 In the Window Configuration List, select the
Window Configuration you want to clear.
2 From the Window Configuration List pop-up menu, select Clear <Name>.
Deleting Window Configurations
Deleting a Window Configuration removes the it and its slot number, and renumbers any subsequent Window Configurations.
To delete a Window Configuration:
1 In the Window Configuration List, select the
Window Configuration you want to delete.
2 Do one of the following:
• From the Window Configuration List popup menu, select Delete <Name>.
– or –
• You can delete all Window Configurations by choosing Delete All.
Importing Window Configurations
You can import Window Configurations from another session using Import Session Data.
To import Window Configurations:
1 Choose File > Import > Session Data.
2 Select the Window Configurations option.
Import Window Configurations
3 If you only want to import Window Configurations, click the Session Data to Import pop-up menu and select None.
4 Click OK.
Hiding All Floating Windows
The Hide All Floating Windows command hides or shows all floating windows. This is useful for quickly clearing the screen of all floating windows so that you can work in the Edit or Mix windows.
To hide or show all floating windows:
â– Select or deselect Window > Hide All Floating
Windows.
Press Control+Alt+Start+W (Windows) or
Command+Option+Control+W (Mac) to hide or show all floating windows.
Menus
Pro Tools menus provide commands and options for configuring and working with
Pro Tools, sessions, and session material.
For detailed information on Pro Tools main menus and Region List pop-up menus, see the Pro Tools Menus Guide.
Pro Tools Main Menus
Pro Tools includes the following main menus:
File Provides commands that are used to create and maintain Pro Tools sessions.
Edit Provides commands that are used to edit and manipulate the current selection and affect data in the timeline or the clipboard.
View Provides options and commands to customize what is shown in various windows.
Track Provides commands that are used to create, manage, and edit tracks.
Region Provides commands that are used to manage and edit regions.
Event Provides commands for editing audio and
MIDI events.
AudioSuite Provides AudioSuite plug-ins.
Options Provides commands that let you select several editing, recording, monitoring, playback, and display options.
Setup Provides commands to open dialogs and windows or configure various Pro Tools hardware and software parameters.
Window Provides commands to toggle the display of various Pro Tools windows.
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 113
Help Provides access to PDF documentation for
Keyboard Shortcuts , Digidesign FAQ , the DigiRack
Plug-ins Guide , the Pro Tools Menus Guide , and the Pro Tools Reference Guide .
Track, Region, and Group List Menus
The Track, Region, and Group Lists provide popup menus for managing and working with the contents of each list, as follows:
Track List Pop-Up Menu Provides commands to show and hide tracks in the Mix and Edit windows. The Track List pop-up menu also lets you sort the contents of the Track List.
For more information, see “The Track List” on page 129.
Group List Pop-Up Menus (Edit Groups and Mix
Groups) Provides commands to create, display, suspend, and delete Mix and Edit Groups.
For more information, see “The Group List” on page 150
Region List Pop-Up Menu (Edit Window
Only) Provides commands to find, select, sort, clear, rename, time stamp, compact, export, and recalculate waveform overviews of items in the
Region List. The pop-up menu also lets you set the drop order for regions dragged from the Region List and dropped in the Timeline.
For more information, see “The Region
Track Name and Region Name Right-
Click Pop-Up Menus
Track and region names provide pop-up menus for managing and working with tracks or regions, as follows:
Track Name Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Rightclicking a track name in the Edit window, Mix window, or the Track List provides access to various track commands (such as show/hide, make active/inactive, rename, duplicate, and delete tracks).
For more information, see “Track Name
Right-Click Pop-Up Menus” on page 132.
Region Name Right-Click Pop-Up Menu (Edit
Window Only) Right-clicking a region name in the Region List provides commands to clear, rename, time stamp, or replace regions. The popup menu also lets you export region definitions or selected regions as files, recalculate waveform overviews, select the parent file of selected regions in the DigiBase Workspace Browser, or select a region as an object in the Edit window.
For more information, see “The Region
Group Name and Track Group ID
Indicator Pop-Up Menus
When you click and hold on a group name in the Group List, or click on a Group ID indicator in a track, a pop-up menu provides access to various group commands (such as selecting tracks in a group).
For more information, see “Group Name and Track Group ID Indicator Pop-Up
114 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Tool Tips
Pro Tools provides Tool Tips in all main windows. Holding the cursor for a few seconds over an abbreviated name, or unlabeled icon or tool, displays either the function or details of the item (depending on the Tool Tips preferences settings).
To configure Tool Tips for Pro Tools:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences, and click the Display tab.
2 In the Basics section, enable the Tool Tips options you want displayed.
Function Shows the functional name of different
Pro Tools items (such as specific buttons, indicators, modes, selectors, and Edit tools).
Details Shows abbreviated or hidden Pro Tools names or values for different Pro Tools items
(such as insert names, gain levels, settings, and routing assignments).
Leave both options unchecked to turn off
Tool Tips.
3 Click OK.
Chapter 9: Pro Tools Main Windows 115
116 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 10: Tracks
This chapter covers basic track management tasks such as creating and deleting tracks, assigning voices and output channels, and grouping tracks.
Track Types
In a Pro Tools session, you can have several different types of tracks. These can include audio,
Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, VCA Master
(Pro Tools HD only), MIDI, Instrument, and video tracks.
Video track features are described in
Chapter 36, “Working with Video in
Audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and VCA Master Tracks
Pro Tools provides mono, stereo, and multichannel format audio, Auxiliary Input, Master
Fader, and VCA Master tracks.
Audio Tracks
Audio tracks let you record to disk and play back from disk recorded or imported audio files.
Auxiliary Input Tracks
Auxiliary Input tracks can be used as effects sends, destinations for submixes, as a bounce destination, as inputs to monitor or process audio (such as audio from external MIDI instruments), and for many other audio routing tasks.
Master Fader Tracks
Master Fader tracks control the overall level of audio paths that are routed to physical output paths. For example, you could have 24 tracks in a session with channels 1–8 routed to Analog
Output 1–2, channels 9–16 to Analog Output
3–4, and channels 17–24 to Analog Output 5–6.
You could then create three master faders, one to control each of these output pairs.
Master Fader tracks have additional uses (such as controlling submix levels). For more informa-
tion, see “Master Fader Tracks” on page 628.
Chapter 10: Tracks 117
VCA Master Tracks
(Pro Tools HD Only)
VCA Master tracks (or VCA Masters) emulate the operation of voltage-controlled amplifier channels on analog consoles, where a VCA channel fader would be used to control, group, or offset the signal levels of other channels on the console.
VCA Master tracks do not pass audio, so they do not have inputs, outputs, inserts or sends. A Mix
Group is assigned to a VCA Master track, which appears in the VCA track’s Assignment selector.
The controls of the tracks in that Mix Group, called the slave tracks, are modified by the controls on the VCA Master.
For more information, see “VCA Master
MIDI Tracks
MIDI tracks store MIDI note, instrument, and controller data. You cannot select a track format when you create a MIDI track, because audio does not pass through it.
Instrument Tracks
Instrument tracks are a special type of track that provide both MIDI and audio capabilities in a single channel strip. Instrument tracks simplify using software and hardware instruments to record and monitor MIDI instruments.
Track Formats
Mono Tracks
A mono audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, or
Instrument track controls volume, and, in some cases, panning, for a single channel of audio. A mono audio track uses a single voice. A mono track can also be routed to a multichannel output.
Stereo Tracks
A stereo audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, or
Instrument track is a single channel strip that plays two channels of audio as a stereo pair. Stereo audio tracks use two voices.
Multichannel Tracks (Pro Tools HD Only)
A multichannel track is a single channel strip that plays multiple channels of audio (from 3–8 channels at a time). This allows Pro Tools to support multichannel mixing formats including
LCRS, 5.1, 6.1, and others. Audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and Instrument tracks can all use any supported multichannel format.
For more information on surround mixing with
Pro Tools, see the following chapters:
• Chapter 32, “Pro Tools Setup for Surround
• Chapter 33, “Multichannel Tracks and
Signal Routing (Pro Tools HD Only)”
• Chapter 34, “Surround Panning and Mixing
118 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Track Channel Strips
Audio Track Channel Strips
Each audio track has its own set of channel strip controls, including volume, pan, record enable, input monitoring (Pro Tools HD only), automation mode, solo, mute, and voice assignment.
Audio tracks also have a Comments View to enter and display comments.
Auxiliary Input Track Channel Strips
Each Auxiliary Input track has its own set of channel strip controls, including volume, pan, automation mode, solo, and mute. Auxiliary Input tracks also have a Comments View to enter and display comments.
Inserts
Inserts Sends (only A–E shown)
Sends (only A–E shown)
Audio Input/Output Path selectors
Automation Mode selector
Pan sliders
Pan indicators
Audio Input/Output Path selectors
Automation Mode selector
Pan slider
Pan indicator
Track Record Enable button
TrackInput Monitor button
(Pro Tools HD only)
Solo/Mute buttons
Output Window button
Volume fader
Level meter
Solo/Mute buttons
Output Window button
Volume fader
Level meters
Voice selector
Group ID
Track Type indicator
Volume/Peak/Delay indicator
Delay Compensation View (Pro Tools HD only)
Track Name button
Track Color Coding
Track Comments
Group ID
Track Type indicator
Volume/Peak/Delay indicator
Delay Compensation View (Pro Tools HD only)
Track Name button
Track Color Coding
Track Comments
Stereo Auxiliary Input track channel strip
Mono audio track channel strip
Chapter 10: Tracks 119
Master Fader Track Channel Strips
Each Master Fader track has its own set of channel strip controls, including volume and automation mode. Master Fader tracks also have a
Comments View to enter and display comments.
Inserts
VCA Master Track Channel Strips
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Each VCA Master track has its own set of channel strip controls, including volume, record enable, input monitoring, automation mode, solo, and mute. VCA Master tracks also have a Comments View to enter and display comments.
For more information, see “VCA Master
Group Assignment selector
Audio Output Path selectors
Automation Mode selector
Record
Enable
Solo
Volume
TrackInput
Mute
VCA Group ID
Level meter
Output Window button
Volume fader
Level meters
VCA Track Type indicators
Group ID
Track Type indicator
Volume/Peak/Delay indicator
Delay Compensation View (Pro Tools HD only)
Track Name button
Track Color Coding
Track Comments
VCA Master track
Stereo Master Fader track channel strip
120 Pro Tools Reference Guide
MIDI Track Channel Strips
Each MIDI track has its own set of channel strip controls, including MIDI volume, pan, record enable, automation mode, solo, mute, patch assignment, and channel assignment. MIDI tracks also have a Comments View to enter and display comments.
MIDI Input selector
MIDI Output selector
Automation Mode selector
MIDI Pan slider
MIDI Pan indicator
Record Enable
Solo/Mute buttons
MIDI Volume fader for MIDI input, output, mute, volume, and pan
(like on a MIDI track). Instrument tracks also have a Comments View to enter and display comments.
MIDI Volume
MIDI Input selector
MIDI Output selector
MIDI Velocity meter
MIDI Mute button
MIDI Pan slider
Inserts
Sends
MIDI Velocity meter
Patch Select
Group ID
Track Type indicator
MIDI Volume indicator
Audio Input/Output Path selectors
Automation Mode selector
Pan sliders
Pan indicators
Record Enable
Solo/Mute buttons
Output Window button
Volume fader
Level meters
Track Name button
Track Color Coding
Track Comments
MIDI channel strip
Instrument Track Channel Strips
Each Instrument track has its own set of channel strip controls, including audio (like an Auxiliary
Input track) volume, pan, automation mode, solo, and mute, and MIDI (like a MIDI track) record enable. Instrument tracks have an additional Instruments View that provides controls
Patch Select
Group ID
Track Type indicator
Volume/Peak/Delay indicator
Delay Compensation View (Pro Tools HD only)
Track Name
Track Color Coding
Track Comments
Stereo Instrument track channel strip
Chapter 10: Tracks 121
Track Controls and Indicators
Input/Output Selectors
The I/O View shows Input and Output selectors on audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader (output only), MIDI, and Instrument tracks.
Input Path selector
Output Path selector
Volume indicator
Pan indicator
Edit window I/O View (audio track)
Output Window button
For information on other track views, see
“Views in the Mix and Edit Windows” on page 634.
To show the I/O View in the Edit window:
â– Select View > Edit Window > I/O.
Channel strips in the Mix window always display Input and Output selectors as well as volume and pan values, so there is no I/O
View display option for the Mix window.
For details on Input and Output selectors,
see “Assigning Inputs and Outputs to
Volume/Peak/Channel Delay
Indicator
The Volume indicator on an audio track has three display modes: Volume, Peak, and Channel Delay.
To toggle the Volume indicator display:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the indicator to toggle it between the following modes:
122 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Volume Indicator (and Pop-Up Fader) Shows the current volume, or input level of a track as set by the track Volume fader. In I/O View (Edit window), click the Volume indicator to display the
Volume pop-up fader, which can be used to adjust the volume.
Edit window I/O View, Volume pop-up fader (audio track)
Peak Indicator Functions as a headroom indicator based on the last peak playback level. To reset the peak counter, click anywhere in the meter. Values range from – ∞ (no signal) to 0 dB.
Channel Delay Indicator Shows the total delay, in samples, incurred on the track from the use of any TDM plug-ins on that channel.
Pan Indicator
The Pan indicator displays the current pan setting of a track. Pan values range from < 100 (full left) to 100 > (full right). Pan controls are only available for stereo tracks or for mono tracks routed to a stereo output.
In I/O View (Edit window), click the Pan indicator to display the Pan pop-up slider, which can be used to adjust panning.
Edit window I/O View, Pan pop-up slider (audio track)
Pan Slider
The Pan slider controls the balance of a track between the assigned output pair. It only appears if you are using stereo tracks or mono tracks routed to a stereo output.
The Pan slider on a MIDI track is effective only if you are controlling a sound module that supports MIDI panning.
Send Pan controls can be linked to the Main
Pan controls of a track by enabling the Follow Main Pan button in Send window.
Volume Fader
The Volume fader controls the volume of a track when it is in playback, and the monitor level of the track when it is in record. You can link the record and monitor levels by enabling the Operation preference for “Link Record and Play Faders.”
The maximum fader gain for a volume fader is
+12 dB.
MIDI Volume Fader
If your MIDI sound module supports volume, the volume fader on a MIDI or Instrument track can send a value of 0–127 to the MIDI volume controller.
Track Level Meter
On audio tracks, Level meters indicate the level of the signal being recorded or played back from the hard drive. On Auxiliary Input, Master
Fader, and Instrument tracks, Level meters indicate the level of the signal being played through the channel output. Green indicates nominal levels; Yellow indicates pre-clipping (–6 dB below full scale); and Red indicates clipping.
When an audio track is record-enabled, these meters indicate record levels.
On MIDI tracks, the level meter shows the MIDI velocity of the most recent MIDI event.
Pre- and Post-Fader Metering
You can globally set audio track level meters to indicate pre- or post-fader levels. When prefader metering is selected, the level meters show levels independent of fader position. With postfader metering, the level meters respond to fader position.
To toggle track level metering between pre- fader and post-fader metering:
â– Select Options > Pre-Fader Metering.
Peak Hold
Pro Tools meters provide a Peak Hold feature with three options: 3 Second, Infinite, or None.
To choose a Peak Hold setting:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Display tab.
2 Select a Peak Hold option.
3 Click OK.
To clear a meter:
â– Click anywhere on the meter.
To clear all meters, do one of the following:
â–
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) any meter.
â–
Choose Track > Clear All Clip Indicators.
â–
Press Alt+C (Windows) or Option+C (Mac).
Chapter 10: Tracks 123
Clip Indication
Pro Tools meters provide Clip Indication with three options: 3 Second, Infinite, or None. If clipping occurs, the topmost LED will stay lit
(red).
Clip indicators appear in plug-in, send, and track windows.
To choose a Clip Indication setting:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Display tab.
2 Select a Clip Indication option.
3 Click OK.
To clear a clip indicator:
â– Click anywhere on the meter.
To clear all clip indicators, do one of the following:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) any meter.
â– Choose Track > Clear All Clip Indicators.
â– Press Alt+C (Windows) or Option+C (Mac).
Wide Meters View
Wide Meters View expands the width of the level meters for tracks in both the Mix and Edit windows, to make the track level meters easier to read. Wide Meters View are also available Narrow Mix View.
To toggle Wide Meters View on or off:
â–
Control-Alt-Start-click (Windows) or Command-Option-Control-click (Mac) any track level meter in the Mix or Edit window.
Wide Meters View, Mix and Edit windows
Adjusting Track Width
Mix Window
The Narrow Mix command lets you view all tracks/channels in the Mix window at a reduced width to conserve screen space in a large session.
(See “Track Height” on page 338, to adjust track
height in the Edit Window.)
To reduce the width of tracks in the Mix window:
â– Select View > Narrow Mix.
To display tracks at normal width:
â– Deselect View > Narrow Mix.
You can toggle track width by pressing Control+Alt+M (Windows) or Command+Option+M (Mac).
124 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Creating Tracks
On all systems, you can create mono and stereo tracks. With Pro Tools HD, you can also create multichannel tracks (LCR to 7.1 tracks).
When new tracks are created, they are given a default name that can be changed at any time.
â—† To insert new tracks next to a specific track in a session, select that track by clicking the track’s name in the Mix or Edit window before opening the New Tracks dialog. The new tracks are added immediately after the selected track.
â—† To insert new tracks after the last tracks in a session, make sure that no track names are selected on-screen before opening the New Tracks dialog.
You can also add tracks to your session by importing them from preexisting sessions.
See “Importing Tracks and Track Attributes” on page 218.
To create new tracks:
1 Choose Track > New.
Number of new tracks Track Type
Track Format
Add/Remove Row
Track Timebase
3 Select the track format (mono, stereo, or one of the multichannel surround formats) from the
Track Format pop-up menu. Surround formats are available on Pro Tools|HD systems only.
To auto-scroll the Track Format pop-up menu, press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) and use the Left/Right Arrow keys.
4 Select the timebase (samples or ticks) from the
Track Timebase pop-up menu.
To auto-scroll the Track Timebase pop-up menu, press Control-Alt (Windows) or
Command-Option (Mac) and use the
Up/Down Arrow keys.
5 Enter the number of new tracks.
6 Do the following, if desired:
• To add more tracks, click the Add Row button.
– or –
• To remove the previous track, click the Remove Row button.
You can also add a new track by pressing
Control+N (Windows) or Command+N
(Mac). To delete a track from the New
Tracks dialog Control+Minus (–) (Windows) or Command+Minus (–) (Mac).
7 To reorder tracks, click a Move Row icon and drag it up or down.
New Tracks dialog
2 Select the type of track you want to add from the Track Type pop-up menu.
To auto-scroll the Track Type pop-up menu in the New Tracks dialog, press Control
(Windows) or Command (Mac) and use the
Up/Down Arrow keys.
Move Row icon in the New Tracks dialog
Move Row icon
8 Click Create.
Chapter 10: Tracks 125
Naming Tracks
Track names are used to auto-name recorded au-
dio files and regions (see “Default Track Names” on page 264).
Track Name/Comments dialog
To rename a track:
1 Do one of the following:
• In the Mix or Edit window, double-click the
Track Name button for the track you want to rename.
– or –
• In the Track List, or Mix or Edit window,
Right-click the track name for the track you want to rename.
2 In the Track Name/Comments dialog, type a new track name.
3 Click Previous or Next to rename other displayed tracks.
To move to the previous or next track in the
Track Name/Comments dialog, you can press Control (Windows) or Command
(Mac) and use the Up/Down or Left/Right
Arrows.
4 Click OK.
Adding Comments to Tracks
To enter comments for a track, do one of the following:
â– From the track channel strip, click directly in the Comments area, type any comments for the track, and press Enter (Windows) or Return
(Mac).
– or –
â– In the Edit or Mix window, double-click the
Track Name button for a track. Then click directly in the Comments area, type any comments for the track, and press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac).
To enter a carriage return in the Comments area, press Shift+Enter (Windows) or
Shift+Return (Mac) on the QWERTY keyboard.
Track Numbering
With Track Number View enabled, each track is assigned a number corresponding to its position in the Mix and Edit Windows. When tracks are reordered, they are renumbered to maintain positional sequence.
To enable Track Number View:
â–
Choose View > Track Number.
126 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To navigate directly to any track number:
1 Do one of the following:
• Choose Track > Scroll to Track.
– or –
• Press Control+Alt+G (Windows) or Command+Option+G (Mac).
Scroll To Track dialog
2 In the Scroll To Track dialog, enter the Track
Position Number.
3 Click OK.
The track is selected, and the windows scroll as follows:
• The Mix window tracks scroll to bring the selected track as close to the left as possible.
• The Edit window tracks scroll to bring the selected track as close to the top as possible.
Selecting Tracks
Tracks need to be selected for operations such as duplicating tracks or adding tracks to a group.
One or more tracks can be selected at a time.
To select a track:
â–
Click the name of an unhighlighted track in its track channel strip.
To select a range of tracks:
1 Click the name of an unhighlighted track in its track channel strip.
2 Shift-click an additional Track Name button.
All tracks between the first track selected and the additional track will also be selected.
To select or deselect noncontiguous tracks, do one of the following:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) Track Name buttons that are unhighlighted to select them.
– or –
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) Track Name buttons that are highlighted to deselect them.
To select all tracks:
â–
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) any Track Name button that is unhighlighted.
To deselect all tracks:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) any Track Name button that is highlighted.
Selecting Tracks when Making Edit Selections
Pro Tools lets you link Track selection with Edit selections. When Track and Edit selections are linked, you can make a selection within a track or across multiple tracks for editing and each associated track is selected (track names automatically highlight).
To link Track and Edit selections:
â–
Select Options > Link Track and Edit Selection.
Scrolling a Track into View
(Pro Tools HD Only)
To scroll a track into view:
â– In the Track List, or Mix or Edit window,
Right-click the track name and select Scroll into
View.
Chapter 10: Tracks 127
The track is selected, and the windows scroll as follows:
• The Mix window tracks scroll to bring the selected track as close to the left as possible.
• The Edit window tracks scroll to bring the selected track as close to the top as possible.
Deleting Tracks
When you delete tracks, your audio or MIDI region data remains in the Region List, but your arrangement of the regions on the deleted track
(the track’s playlist) will be lost.
If the track contains playlists that are not assigned to any track, you are prompted to delete or retain them.
The Delete Track command cannot be undone.
To delete a track:
1 Click the name of the track in its track channel strip to select it.
To select multiple tracks, Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Mac) additional Track Names .
To select a range of tracks, Shift-click additional Track Names .
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Track > Delete.
– or –
• In the Track List, or Mix or Edit window,
Right-click the track name and select Duplicate.
3 Click OK to remove the selected tracks from the session.
Duplicating Tracks
The Duplicate Track command lets you duplicate one or more tracks, including their audio or
MIDI data, playlists, automation, and other attributes.
To duplicate one or more tracks:
1 Select the tracks you want to duplicate.
For information, see “Selecting Tracks” on page 127.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Track > Duplicate.
• Press Alt+Shift+D (Windows) or Option+Shift+D (Mac).
• Right-click the name of the track in the
Track List, or Mix or Edit window, and select Duplicate.
Duplicate Tracks dialog
128 Pro Tools Reference Guide
3 In the Duplicate Tracks dialog, configure the following options as needed:
• Enter how many copies you want to create by typing into the Number of Duplicates field.
• To copy the currently active (visible) Edit playlist from the source track, enable Active Playlist.
• To copy all Edit playlists on the source track, enable Alternate Playlists
• To copy all automation from the source track, enable Automation.
• To copy all plug-in and insert assignments, enable Inserts.
• To copy all sends and send assignments, enable Sends.
• To maintain all Mix and Edit Group assignments, enable Group Assignments.
4 If duplicating multiple tracks, do one of the following:
• If you want all the newly created tracks to follow the last selected source track (to the far-right of the Mix window, and at the bottom of the Edit window), enable the Insert after Last Selected Track option.
– or –
• If you want each newly-created track to be inserted directly after its source track, disable the option.
5 Click OK to duplicate tracks according to the settings in the Duplicate Tracks dialog. Click
Cancel to close the dialog and not create duplicate tracks.
In the Mix window, each duplicate track is created to the right of its original track. In the Edit window, each duplicate track is created below its original track. When duplicating multiple tracks, you can also choose to have the new tracks follow the last selected track (or have each new track follow its source track).
Duplicating VCA Slave Tracks
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Duplicating a VCA slave track without duplicating its group assignments will coalesce any automation on the duplicate track. The coalesced duplicate plays back exactly as if it were in the
VCA group.
The Track List
The Track List (at the left of both the Mix and
Edit windows) shows all tracks in the session. It allows you to show or hide a track in the Mix and Edit windows, by selecting or deselecting its name. Even though a track is hidden, the material on the track will still play as part of the session. Inactive tracks appear in italics in the
Track List.
The Track List can also be used to create new tracks while importing media from
DigiBase. See “Importing Items with Drag and Drop” on page 225.
Track Type icon
Track Color
Code
Track List
Track List pop-up menu
Track Number
Track name
Chapter 10: Tracks 129
Show/Hide Track List/Group List View
Button
To show (or hide) the Track List (and Group List):
â– Click the Show/Hide Track List/Group List
View button in the Mix or Edit window.
Show Only option
The Sort Tracks By command allows you to set the track order according to Name, Type, Edit
Group, Mix Group, or Voice. The sort order will be reflected in the Track List in the Mix or Edit
Window.
Show/Hide Track List/Group List View
Track List shown in Edit Window
Track List Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu at the top of the Track List provides commands that allow you to show or hide all tracks, tracks currently selected onscreen, or specific types of tracks (audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, MIDI, or Instrument).
Sort Tracks By option
When a track that is a member of an active group is hidden from view, editing operations performed on other members of the group in the Edit window will not affect the hidden track.
In the Mix window, however, all operations other than record-enable will affect a hidden track that is a member of an active group.
With Pro Tools HD, even if a track is hidden from view, its position relative to other tracks still affects its voiceable track play-
back priority (see “Voice Borrowing” on page 139 for details).
130 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To hide a track, do one of the following:
â–
Click the highlighted name of the track in the
Track List.
– or –
â–
In the Track List, or Mix or Edit window,
Right-click the track name and select Hide (or
Hide and Make Inactive if the track is active and you also want to make the track inactive).
To show a track that is currently hidden, do one of the following:
â– Click the unhighlighted name of the track in the Track List.
– or –
â– In the Track List, or Mix or Edit window,
Right-click the track name and select Show (or
Show and Make Active if the track is active and you also want to make it active).
To show all tracks:
â– Click the Track List pop-up menu and choose
Show All Tracks.
You can also show all tracks by Alt-clicking
(Windows) or Option-clicking (Mac) the name of any track that is unhighlighted.
To hide all tracks:
â– Click the Track List pop-up menu and choose
Hide All Tracks.
You can also hide all tracks by Alt-clicking
(Windows) or Option-clicking (Mac) the name of any track that is highlighted, or by clicking on a track symbol to the left of any highlighted track name.
To show a range of tracks:
1 Click the name of an unhighlighted track name in the Track List.
2 Shift-click an additional track name.
All track names that occur between the first track name selected and the additional track name will also be selected.
You can also select a range of tracks by moving the cursor to the left of the track names, so the Marquee appears, and dragging around the track names you want to select.
To show or hide a range of tracks in the Track List with the Marquee:
1 Press and hold Control (Windows) or Command (Mac).
2 Move the cursor to the left of a track name until the Marquee with a small “+” symbol appears.
• To show tracks, the Marquee should be to the left of an unhighlighted track name.
• To hide tracks, the Marquee should be to the left of a highlighted track name.
3 Click on the track name and drag up or down
(to show or hide the track and the tracks immediately above or below it).
To show or hide non-contiguous tracks, do one of the following:
â–
Click track names that are unhighlighted to select them.
– or –
â–
Click track names that are highlighted to deselect them.
To reorder tracks on-screen, drag the track names to new positions within the Track
List or in the Mix or Edit window.
Chapter 10: Tracks 131
About Mix/Edit Groups and Hidden
Tracks
In the Mix window, if a hidden track is part of an enabled group, all Mix window operations performed on other members of the group also affect the hidden track —with the exception of audio or MIDI record-enabling. If you solo, mute, or automation write-enable a grouped track, any group members that are hidden are soloed, muted, or automation write-enabled as well.
In the Edit window, however, editing operations performed on members of an enabled group do not affect hidden tracks that are also members of the enabled group.
About Clipping and the Track List
(Pro Tools HD Only)
When a track, send, or plug-in clips, the Track
List displays the track’s name in red. Both shown and hidden tracks display clipping indication.
About Track Numbering and Hidden
Tracks
In the Mix and Edit windows, Track Position
Numbers can include hidden tracks in their numbering sequence, or ignore them, as follows:
• Numbers are only assigned to tracks that are shown (when Track Position Numbers Stay with Hidden Tracks is not enabled in the Display Preferences page). In this case, active tracks are then numbered sequentially. Hidden tracks are un-numbered.
– or –
• Tracks keep their Track Position Numbers even when hidden (when Track Position
Numbers Stay With Hidden Tracks is enabled in the Display Preferences page).
132 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Track Name Right-Click
Pop-Up Menus
(Edit Window, Mix Window, or Track List)
When you Right-click a track name in the Edit window, Mix window, or the Track List, a popup menu provides access to the following commands:
Hide/Show Hides (or shows) the track (or selected tracks if any).
Hide and Make Inactive Hides the track and makes it inactive (or selected tracks if any).
Make Active/Inactive Toggles the active status of the track (or all selected tracks in the Mix or
Edit window only).
Scroll Into View Scrolls the track to the top of the
Edit window or to the left of the Mix window.
Send to Sibelius (MIDI and Instrument Tracks
Only) Exports the MIDI data from one or more
MIDI or Instrument tracks and automatically imports that MIDI data into Sibelius (or G7). For
more information, see “Send to Sibelius” on page 237.
Export MIDI (MIDI and Instrument Tracks
Only) Exports the MIDI data from one or more
MIDI or Instrument tracks to a standard MIDI
file. For more information, see “Exporting MIDI
Coalesce VCA Master Automation (Pro Tools HD
Only) Coalesces the VCA automation to the slave tracks of the VCA.
Coalesce Trim Automation (Pro Tools HD
Only) Coalesces Trim automation on the track
(or selected tracks if any).
Clear Trim Automation (Pro Tools HD
Only) Clears Trim automation on the track (or selected tracks if any).
Locked (Video Track Only) Toggles the locked/unlocked status of the video track (or selected video tracks if any).
Rename Opens the Track Name dialog.
Duplicate Duplicates the track (or selected tracks if any).
Split Into Mono (Multichannel Tracks Only) Splits a multichannel track (or selected multichannel tracks if any) into their mono component tracks.
Delete Deletes the track (or selected tracks if any).
Expand to New Tracks Expands multichannel audio files imported from a field recorder to new tracks, such that every channel resides on its own mono audio track. Pro Tools also automatically conforms all expanded tracks to the edits in the guide (expanded) track. You can expand multichannel files to new tracks ordered by channel name, by channel number, or by channel name and number.
For stereo and multichannel surround tracks, inputs and outputs appear as stereo pairs and multichannel groups. The available inputs, outputs, and busses are defined as paths in the I/O Setup
dialog (see Chapter 6, “I/O Setup”).
Automatic Input and Output
Assignments
When adding tracks to a new session, inputs are automatically assigned in ascending order. For example, if you have an audio interface with eight inputs, creating four new mono audio tracks will automatically add four audio tracks with inputs assigned to the first four paths defined in the I/O Setup dialog. When creating stereo tracks, inputs are automatically assigned to subsequent input pairs.
The outputs automatically assigned to new tracks are determined by the New Track Default
Output specified in the I/O Setup dialog.
Assigning Audio Track Inputs
(Audio Tracks, Auxiliary Inputs, Instrument
Tracks)
Assigning Inputs and Outputs to Tracks
Inputs for audio, Auxiliary Input, and Instrument tracks can be assigned to audio interface channels or busses. Outputs for audio, Auxiliary
Input, Master Fader, and Instrument tracks can also be assigned to audio interface channels or busses.
Track set to
Audio Input 2
Track set to
No Input
Track set to
Bus 2
Instrument tracks route their input automatically to any inserted Instrument plugin.
To assign an audio track input:
1 In order to assign audio track inputs in the
Edit window, select View > Edit Window > I/O.
2 In the Mix or Edit window, click the track’s Input Path selector and choose from the available audio interface channels and busses. Stereo and multichannel surround tracks have inputs available as pairs and multichannel groups.
Input/output assignments for three mono audio tracks
Chapter 10: Tracks 133
‘
The Input Path selector allows you to route any audio input or any of the Pro Tools internal busses to an audio track or an Auxiliary Input track.
The choices available in this pop-up menu are determined by the I/O Setup configuration. Inputs in use by another track appear as bold in the selector.
Assigning Audio Track Outputs
(Audio Tracks, Auxiliary Inputs, Instrument
Tracks, Master Faders)
To assign an audio track output:
1 In order to assign audio track outputs in the
Edit window, select View > Edit Window > I/O.
2 In the Mix or Edit window, click the track’s
Output Path selector and choose from the available audio interface channels and busses. Stereo and multichannel surround tracks have outputs available as pairs and multichannel paths.
Input Path selector
To remove an input assignment:
â– Select No Input from the Input Path selector.
Output Path selector
The Output Path selector lets you route a track to any configured audio output or internal bus.
The choices available in this pop-up menu are determined by the I/O Setup configuration.
Outputs in use by another track appear as bold in the selector.
134 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To auto-assign all visible tracks to unique mono sub-path outputs in ascending order:
1 Make sure you have enough mono sub-paths
defined in I/O Setup (see Chapter 6, “I/O
2 Control-Alt-click (Windows) or Command-
Option-click (Mac) the Output Path selector of the left-most track and assign it to the sub-path for Output #1. All visible tracks will be auto-assigned to unique mono sub-path outputs in ascending order.
To remove an output assignment:
â– Select No Output from the Output Path selector. Playlists become dimmed for tracks with no output assignment.
Assigning an audio track, Auxiliary Input,
Master Fader, or Instrument track to “No
Output” will cause its automation data for pan and plug-in controls to be lost.
Renaming Track Inputs and
Outputs from the Edit or Mix
Window
I/O path names can be renamed in the Edit or
Mix windows, or in the I/O Setup dialog.
To rename an I/O path in the Edit or Mix window:
1 In the Edit or Mix window, Right-click the Input selector or Output selector for a track, and choose Rename from the pop-up menu.
‘
2 In the Rename I/O dialog, enter a name for the
I/O Path, and click OK.
Rename I/O dialog
Making Track Inputs and Outputs
Inactive from the Edit or Mix
Window
Inputs and outputs can be made inactive. Making a track input or output inactive silences the input or output, while retaining all automation and playlist data. Inactive inputs and outputs do not consume resources for TDM mixer connections, but any assigned plug-ins on the track continue to use their required DSP resources.
RTAS plug-ins require CPU resources, and TDM plug-ins use the DSP available on Pro Tools|HD cards.
You can make track inputs and outputs inactive
(or active) directly from the Edit or Mix windows. Inactive I/O paths are grayed out.
To make a track input or output inactive (or active) using the I/O’s selector pop-up menu:
â–
In the Edit or Mix window, Right-click the Input selector or Output selector for a track, and choose Make Inactive (or Make Active) from the pop-up menu.
To toggle an input or output active/inactive:
â– Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the Input or Output selector in the Mix or Edit window.
Chapter 10: Tracks 135
Track Priority and Voice
Assignment
Pro Tools LE systems provide up to 32 voices of simultaneous audio playback and recording, depending on the system. For details on LE system
capabilities, see Table 7 on page 26.
Pro Tools|HD systems provide a certain number of voices (simultaneous channels of audio playback and recording), depending on the system.
For example, a Pro Tools|HD 1 system can provide up to 96 voices of audio playback and recording, at 44.1 or 48 kHz. For details on
Pro Tools system capabilities, see Table 5 on page 23.
Pro Tools LE systems with the DV Toolkit 2 option or the Music Production Toolkit option let you play or record up to 48 simultaneous stereo or mono tracks. For details on system capabili-
ties with these options, see “DV Toolkit 2 and
Music Production Toolkit” on page 27.
Track Priority
While your Pro Tools hardware allows a fixed number of voices, Pro Tools software allows for additional audio tracks beyond that fixed number of voices. While all of these tracks can be recorded to or imported, arranged, and cued for playback, not all of them can be played back simultaneously.
When the number of tracks exceeds the number of available voices, tracks with lower priority may not be heard. For these situations,
Pro Tools assigns priorities to tracks that compete for the available voices. Because there can be more tracks than available voices, Pro Tools provides multiple ways of adjusting the playback priority of audio tracks. See “Changing a
Track’s Playback Priority” on page 136 and
“Freeing up Voices on a Track” on page 137.
136 Pro Tools Reference Guide
With Pro Tools|HD systems, you can assign specific voices to multiple tracks such that those voices are shared by more than one track. This feature is called voice borrowing . The combination of playback/record tracks and shared voiced tracks comprises the total number of voiceable tracks on a Pro Tools|HD system.
To set multiple tracks to the same voice, see
“Setting Voice Assignment” on page 137. For
additional information on voice borrowing,
see“Voice Borrowing” on page 139).
Changing a Track’s Playback Priority
Tracks with higher positions (leftmost in the
Mix window or topmost in the Edit window) have priority over tracks in lower positions in a session.
To increase a track’s priority, do any of the following:
â–
In the Mix window, drag the Track Name button to the left of other tracks in the session.
Tracks at the left of the Mix window have higher priority than those on the right.
â–
In the Edit window, drag the Track Name button above other tracks in the session. Tracks at the top of the Edit window have higher priority than those below.
â–
In the Track List, drag the Track Name button to a higher position in the list. Tracks at the top of this list have higher priority than those below.
Freeing up Voices on a Track
You can also adjust the relative priority of tracks by freeing up the voices of individual tracks, making them available to other tracks in the session.
To free up the voice of a track, do one of the following:
â– Click the Voice selector of the track and set it
to Off. See “Setting Voice Assignment” on page 137.
â– Deactivate the track by Control-Start-clicking
(Windows) or Command-Control-clicking
(Mac) its track type icon in the Mix window.
â– Make sure the track does not have an output or send assignment.
â– With Pro Tools HD, you can temporarily free a track’s voice during playback by muting it (see
“Mute Frees Assigned Voice” on page 145).
Setting Voice Assignment
A track’s voice assignment can be turned off or set to be dynamically allocated, and with
Pro Tools HD, can also be assigned to a specific voice number.
On all Pro Tools systems, you can use Dynamically Allocated Voicing to automatically take care of voice management in the background, assigning voices not in use by other tracks.
Pro Tools LE supports Dynamically Allocated Voicing only; it does not support individual voice assignments.
With Pro Tools HD, tracks assigned to a specific voice number take priority over dynamically allocated tracks and support voice borrowing (see
“Voice Borrowing” on page 139). To ensure a
track is heard, or that it is available for Quick-
Punch, TrackPunch, or DestructivePunch recording, assign a voice number to that track.
With Pro Tools HD, QuickPunch, Track-
Punch, and DestructivePunch require additional voices. For more information, see
Chapter 17, “Advanced Punch Recording.”
With Pro Tools HD, the initial insert of an
RTAS plug-in uses additional voices in certain situations. See
Latency for RTAS Plug-ins” on page 665 .
For stereo and multichannel tracks, voices appear in pairs and multichannel groups. Voices already assigned to another track appear in bold in the Voice selector pop-up menu.
To set the voice assignment for a track:
â– Click the Voice selector and set the track to
Dyn, Off, or select a voice number (Pro Tools HD only).
Voice selector for stereo audio track (Pro Tools HD shown)
Chapter 10: Tracks 137
Voice Assignment with Toolkit Options
(Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 or Music
Production Toolkit)
Pro Tools LE systems with the DV Toolkit 2 option or the Music Production Toolkit option let you play or record up to 48 simultaneous stereo or mono tracks. Higher track counts are only supported with multiple hard drives and faster
Digidesign-qualified systems.
The first 48 audio tracks that are active and have their voice assignment set to DYN (Dynamically
Allocated Voicing) play back. Tracks which occur after these 48 tracks do not play back and cannot be recorded on. Their Dynamically Allocated Voicing button will be blue to indicate they are unavailable for playback or record.
Tracks do not play back when they are inactive or their voice assignment is set to Off.
When working with more than 48 audio tracks, you can play back audio in tracks 49 and higher by changing the higher track’s priority, as follows:
• Make a lower track inactive (click the Track
Name and select Track > Make Inactive).
• Set the voice assignment in a lower track to
Off (click the Voice selector and select Off).
• Drag the Track Name button of the higher track to the left (Mix window) or upwards
(in the Edit window or Track List) until it is one of the first 48 audio tracks. The previous 48th audio track will become the 49th audio track and its voice assignment will change to Off.
If the original track 49 (or higher) had its voice assignment set to Off, it automatically resets to
DYN when you do any of the above steps.
Automatic Assignment of Ascending Voices
(Pro Tools HD Only)
You can automatically assign all tracks or all selected tracks to successive voices. For example, you may want to select eight audio tracks and reassign them to voices 9–16.
To assign all audio tracks to successive voices:
â– While pressing Control+Alt (Windows) or
Command+Option (Mac), select the starting voice number from the Voice selector for the track at the far left of the Mix window, or at the top of the Edit window.
The voice is assigned to the first track, with successive voices assigned to tracks (with the same format) of lower priority.
To assign all selected audio tracks to successive voices:
1 Select the audio tracks by Control-clicking
(Windows) or Command-clicking (Mac) their names.
To select multiple tracks, Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Mac) additional Track Names .
To select a range of tracks, Shift-click additional Track Names .
2 While pressing Control+Alt+Shift (Windows) or Command+Option+Shift (Mac), select the starting voice number from the Voice selector for the left (Mix window) or top (Edit window) selected track.
The voice is assigned to the starting track, with successive voices assigned to currently selected tracks (with the same format) of lower priority.
138 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Voice Borrowing
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Pro Tools HD features voice borrowing , which lets you assign more than one track to the same voice. The track with the highest priority takes over that voice, but when a hole opens up in the higher-priority track, its shared voice is temporarily available, and the track with the next highest priority “pops through” and begins to play. When the original track returns, the track that had popped through relinquishes the shared voice to the higher priority track.
The following example demonstrates the concept of voice borrowing:
“Rhythm” regions play when there is no “Lead” region
In the above illustration, the two visible tracks are assigned to the same voice. There is an open area in the top track where no region appears. At this point, the voice is free since it is not being used, and the next highest priority track assigned to that voice (the bottom track) pops through the open area and plays.
By experimenting with track priority, voice assignment, and arranging regions so that they are positioned to “pop through” holes in higher priority tracks, you can find many useful ways to maximize voiceable tracks with Pro Tools HD.
Setting MIDI Input and Output
MIDI recording and playback is supported with
MIDI tracks and Instrument tracks.
Assigning MIDI Track Input
Pro Tools lets you assign specific MIDI ports and channels to a MIDI track input. The default selection of All receives all incoming MIDI data from all ports on all channels. Use the MIDI Input selector to specify a MIDI port and channel for input.
For information on assigning MIDI input to
Instrument tracks, see “Assigning MIDI Input and Output for Instrument Tracks” on page 140.
To assign a MIDI track input:
â– Click the track’s MIDI Input selector and assign a port and channel for MIDI input. Channels already assigned to another track appear in bold.
In the Edit window, select View > Edit Window > I/O to access any track’s Input selector.
MIDI Input selector (MIDI Track shown)
Chapter 10: Tracks 139
Assigning MIDI Track Output
Pro Tools lets you assign specific MIDI ports and channels to a MIDI track output. The default selection of none sends MIDI data to no port on any channel. Use the MIDI Output selector to specify a MIDI port and channel for output.
MIDI tracks in Pro Tools cannot contain multiple channels of MIDI data.
For information on assigning MIDI output
to Instrument tracks, see “Assigning MIDI
Input and Output for Instrument Tracks” on page 140.
To assign a MIDI track (and all its regions) to a specific MIDI device channel:
â– Click the track’s MIDI Output selector and assign a port and channel for MIDI output. Channels already assigned to another track appear in bold.
In the Edit window, select View > Edit Window > I/O to access any track’s Output selector.
To assign multiple destinations to a single MIDI track:
â– Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the MIDI Output selector and select additional channels from any device.
For information on recording and importing
MIDI data, see Chapter 16, “MIDI Recording.”
Assigning MIDI Input and Output for Instrument Tracks
Instrument tracks have a specific view for MIDI controls, including MIDI Input and Output selectors.
To view Instrument track MIDI controls, do one of the following:
â–
Select View > Mix Window > Instruments.
– or –
â–
Select View > Edit Window > Instruments.
MIDI Input selector
MIDI Output selector
Instrument View
MIDI Output selector (MIDI track shown)
140 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Instrument Track MIDI Input
Pro Tools lets you assign specific MIDI ports and channels to an Instrument tracks’ MIDI input.
The default selection of All receives all incoming
MIDI data from all ports on all channels. Use the
MIDI Input selector to specify a MIDI port and channel for input.
Channels in use by another track input appear bold in the MIDI Input Selector pop-up menu.
To assign an Instrument track MIDI input:
â– Click the track’s MIDI Input selector and assign a port and channel for MIDI input. Channels already assigned to another track appear in bold.
Instrument Track MIDI Output
Pro Tools lets you assign specific MIDI ports and channels to an Instrument tracks’ MIDI output.
The default selection of none sends MIDI data to no device, port, or node on any channel. Use the MIDI Output selector to specify a MIDI port and channel for output.
Channels in use by another track input appear as bold in the MIDI Input Selector pop-up menu.
To assign an Instrument track MIDI output:
â– Click the track’s MIDI Output selector and assign a port and channel for MIDI output. Channels already assigned to another track appear in bold.
Inserting Instrument Plug-ins on
Instrument Tracks
To insert an instrument plug-in on an Instrument track:
â–
Click the Insert Selector on the Instrument track and select the instrument plug-in that you want to use.
A MIDI node (virtual MIDI port) is automatically created and assigned the track’s MIDI output.
Insert with instrument plug-in
Instrument track with an instrument plug-in (Digidesign
Synchronic shown)
Soloing and Muting Tracks
The Solo and Mute buttons can be engaged at any time during playback. The Solo and Mute buttons affect MIDI as well as audio tracks. It is possible to have more than one track soloed or muted at the same time in a session.
Instrument tracks have separate sets of Solo and Mute buttons for MIDI and audio monitoring.
Chapter 10: Tracks 141
Track grouping also affects mute and solo behavior. Muting or soloing a track that is a member of an active Mix Group will mute or solo all other tracks that are a member of that active
Mix Group as well.
For information on creating and modifying groups for track soloing and muting, see
“Grouping Tracks” on page 149.
Solo Button
The Solo button normally mutes other tracks so that the selected track can be auditioned independently.
With Pro Tools HD, this behavior is selected as a
Solo mode, called “Solo In Place.” Additional
Solo modes are provided to change how the Solo button works. See
To solo tracks:
1 Click the Solo button on a track. The button is highlighted and all other tracks are muted.
2 Click the Solo button on another track. The buttons for both tracks are highlighted and all other tracks are muted.
To un-solo tracks:
â– Click the Solo button on soloed tracks.
Solo Modes
(Pro Tools HD Only)
With Pro Tools HD, the Solo button can be used to:
• Mute other tracks so that the chosen track can be auditioned alone.
– or –
• Route a chosen track to a separate output.
Solo button behavior is defined by the Solo mode, as follows:
SIP (Solo In Place) The Solo button mutes other tracks. When this mode is enabled, tracks can be
solo safed (see “Solo Safe Mode” on page 144).
AFL (After Fader Listen) The Solo button routes the track’s post-fader/post-pan signal to the
AFL/PFL Path output. The AFL/PFL Path is configured in the Output page of the I/O Setup dia-
log (see “AFL/PFL Path” on page 60).
With AFL, the level you hear is dependent on the fader level for that track. Additionally, there is a separate master level setting for AFL that affects the output of any or all tracks you solo in
AFL mode (see “AFL/PFL Path” on page 60). This
level setting is independent of the PFL level setting.
AFL and PFL Solo modes require the Surround Mixer plug-in (see the Pro Tools|HD
Getting Started Guide).
PFL (Pre Fader Listen) The Solo button routes the track’s pre-fader/pre-pan signal to the
AFL/PFL Path output. The AFL/PFL Path is configured in the Output page of the I/O Setup dia-
log (see “AFL/PFL Path” on page 60).
With PFL, the fader level and pan are ignored, and the level you hear is dependent on the signal’s recorded level. Additionally, there is a separate master level setting for PFL that affects the output of any or all tracks you solo in PFL mode
(see “AFL/PFL Path” on page 60). This level set-
ting is independent of the AFL level setting.
AFL and PFL Solo modes require the Surround Mixer plug-in.
If Mutes Frees Assigned Voice is enabled, muted tracks will not be audible in PFL mode.
142 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To select a Solo mode:
1 Choose Options > Solo Mode.
2 Select SIP, AFL, or PFL.
The Solo mode for all soloed tracks can be changed “on-the-fly” from any Solo mode to either SIP or AFL. Previously soloed tracks will switch their solo behavior to the new mode.
Switching the Solo mode for all soloed tracks “on-the-fly” to PFL will clear all previously soloed tracks before entering PFL mode. This prevents potentially large boosts in level.
DSP Usage when Using AFL or PFL Mode
AFL and PFL are accomplished by Pro Tools creating a “behind the scenes” mixer to route the signal to the chosen AFL/PFL Path. Depending on the size of your main mixer, Pro Tools will devote a substantial portion of its available DSP when using AFL/PFL mode.
Un-declaring the AFL/PFL Path will free up all
DSP resources previously used for AFL/PFL mode.
Using AFL/PFL on Pro Tools Systems with a
D-Control or D-Command
AFL/PFL is optimized for Pro Tools systems using a D-Control or D-Command control surface, where the XMON automatically switches its monitor source between the main output and the AFL/PFL output from Pro Tools.
For more information on using XMON and
AFL/PFL, see your control surface guide.
Using AFL/PFL on Pro Tools Systems without
D-Control or D-Command
If you are not using a D-Control or D-Command control surface, your regular Pro Tools output path is not necessarily muted when you send a signal to the AFL/PFL Path. If you need the main signal to automatically mute when an AFL/PFL signal is invoked, you need to do the following:
1 Configure the output path for AFL or PFL soloed tracks.
2 Select the main output path that will mute when you solo a track in AFL or PFL mode (see
“AFL/PFL Mutes (Output Path) Selector” on page 61).
3 Set up your hardware to monitor both the main and AFL/PFL paths simultaneously.
When AFL or PFL is selected as a Solo mode and a track is soloed, the main output path will mute and the AFL/PFL signal will appear at the
AFL/PFL Path for monitoring.
Chapter 10: Tracks 143
Solo Latch Options
Solos can be latched (where pressing subsequent buttons adds them to the soloed mix of tracks), unlatched, or temporarily latched (Pro Tools
HD only).
To select a Solo Latch mode:
â– Choose Options > Solo Mode and select from the following options:
Latch When selected, pressing subsequent Solo buttons adds them to the soloed mix of tracks.
X–OR (Cancels Previous Solos) When selected, pressing subsequent Solo buttons cancels previous solos.
To override X–OR mode and solo more than one track at a time, press and hold the Solo button on the first track. Subsequently pressed Solo buttons will latch.
Momentary (Pro Tools HD Only) When selected,
Solo buttons are not sticky. A track is soloed only when its Solo switch is held down.
With a Digidesign-qualified control surface, additional tracks can be soloed by pressing their
Solo switches (as long as at least one Solo button is held down). When no Solo switch is held down, all soloed tracks will unsolo.
Temporarily Latching Solos in Momentary Solo
Mode
(Pro Tools HD Only)
To temporarily latch solos:
1 Choose Options > Solo Mode > Momentary.
2 Press and hold the Solo button on the first track that will be soloed.
3 While still holding the first Solo button, press additional Solo buttons. Solo buttons will remain soloed as long as one Solo button is held.
As long as at least one Solo button is held down, all the solos will remain latched.
Solo Safe Mode
Pro Tools lets you solo safe a track. This prevents the track from being muted even if you solo other tracks. This feature is useful for tracks such as Auxiliary Inputs that are being used as a submix of audio tracks, or effects returns, allowing the audio or effects track to remain in a mix even when other tracks are soloed. It is also useful to solo safe MIDI tracks so that their playback is not affected when you solo audio tracks.
AFL or PFL soloed tracks (Pro Tools HD only) cannot be solo safed.
To solo safe a track:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the Solo button on the track. This prevents the track from being muted even if you solo other tracks. The Solo button changes to a transparent color in Solo Safe mode.
To return a solo safe track to normal:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the Solo button on the track again.
144 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Mute Button
The Mute button silences a chosen track. More than one track can be muted at one time. If Options > Mute Frees Assigned Voice (Pro Tools HD only) is enabled, muting a track will allocate its voice to the next highest priority voiceable track
(assigned to the same voice).
To mute a track:
â– Click the Mute button on the track. The track is grayed-out and muted.
To unmute a track:
â–
Click the Mute button again.
Mute Frees Assigned Voice
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Selecting Options > Mute Frees Assigned Voice and muting a track disables playback of that track, and surrenders control of its voice to the next highest priority track with the same voice assignment.
Muting a track with Mute Frees Assigned
Voice enabled does not free up the voice for
QuickPunch, TrackPunch, or Destructive-
Punch recording.
With this option enabled, there may be a delay
(ranging in length from one to several seconds depending on the processing power of your system) between the time you mute or unmute a track and when you hear the effect on playback.
Larger DAE Playback Buffer Sizes can also increase the lag time between the time you click the Mute button and the onset of mut-
ing. See “DAE Playback Buffer Size” on page 37.
Making Tracks Inactive
Audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, VCA Master (Pro Tools HD only), and Instrument tracks can be made inactive. Inactive tracks use no DSP or voices. Plug-ins, sends, voices, and automation on inactive tracks are all disabled. Tracks may also be automatically made inactive if a session is opened on a system with less DSP power than the system that it was created on.
MIDI tracks cannot be made inactive.
To toggle a track active/inactive:
â–
Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the Track Type indicator in the Mix window.
Track Type indicator
Toggling a track active/inactive
Playlists for inactive tracks are dimmed and track controls are grayed out.
To make one or more tracks inactive:
1 Click the name of the track (in its track channel strip) and select Make Inactive.
To select multiple tracks, Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Mac) additional Track Names .
To select a range of tracks, Shift-click additional Track Names .
Chapter 10: Tracks 145
Color Coding for Tracks,
Regions, Markers and Groups
Separate colors can be assigned to audio and
MIDI regions, tracks, markers, and groups.
Regions shown in Waveform and Block Views in the Edit window are drawn in color. Tracks shown in the Track List, Group List, and Mix and Edit windows have associated color bars.
Color Bars
Color coding at the track level is displayed using color bars, as follows:
Mix Window Track colors are displayed in horizontal color bars that appear above each channel strip, and below the track name.
Edit Window Track colors are displayed in vertical color bars that appear to the left of each track.
Track List Track colors are displayed in vertical color bars that appear to the left of each track name.
Group List Track colors are displayed in vertical color bars that appear to the left of each Group
Name.
Default colors are automatically assigned to tracks, but you can override those colors by choosing from a color palette of 96 possible col-
ors. For more information, see “Color Palette” on page 147.
Display Page Preferences for
Color Coding
Color Coding options determine how colors are assigned to the display of tracks and regions.
To change Color Coding options:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences.
2 Click Display.
3 Select a Default Track Color Coding option.
4 Select a Default Region Color Coding option.
5 Select or deselect the Always Display Marker
Colors option.
6 Click OK.
Always Display Marker Colors
This setting lets you choose to view Marker colors in the Markers ruler, regardless of the settings you choose for Default Region Color Coding.
Default Track Color Coding
The Default Track Color Coding options determine how colors are assigned to the display of tracks.
Default Region Color Coding options
None Turns off default color assignment for tracks.
Tracks and MIDI Channels Assigns a color to each track in the Mix or Edit window according to its voice assignment or MIDI channel assignment.
146 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Tracks and MIDI Devices Assigns a color to each track in the Mix or Edit window according to its voice assignment or MIDI device assignment.
Groups Assigns a color to each track according to its Mix or Edit Group ID. If groups are suspended using the Suspend Groups command, the tracks color bars are not shown.
Track Type Assigns a color to each track according to its type (audio, Auxiliary Input, Instrument, MIDI, or Master Fader).
Default Region Color Coding
The Default Region Color Coding options determine how colors are assigned to the display of regions.
Track Color Assigns a region color based on the
color assigned to the track. (See “Color Palette” on page 147.)
Marker Locations Assigns a color to data across all tracks based on the nearest preceding marker.
Region List Color Assigns a color to each region based on its color in the Region List. When this
Default Region Color Coding option is enabled, the assigned region color is maintained even if the region is placed in a track set to a different color coding.
Enabling any Default Region Color Coding option other than Region List Color will override Region List Color and reassign the parent track color to copies of the region placed in tracks. Copies of the region in the
Region List will retain their unique color, if any.
Color Palette
The Color Palette lets you make color selections for tracks, regions, groups and markers.
Apply to Selected Hold Default None
Default Region Color Coding options
None Turns off default color assignment for regions. Regions are drawn as black waveforms or black MIDI notes on a light gray background.
Tracks and MIDI Channels Assigns a color to each region in the Edit window according to its voice or MIDI channel assignment.
Tracks and MIDI Devices Assigns a color to each region in the Edit window according to its voice assignment or MIDI device assignment.
Groups Assigns a color to each region according to the Group ID of its track. If groups are suspended (using the Suspend Groups command) all regions display black waveforms or MIDI notes on a light gray background.
Last Assigned Color
Color Palette window
The Color Palette supports independent region color coding in the Region List and in tracks.
Chapter 10: Tracks 147
To apply a color from the Color Palette:
1 Choose Window > Color Palette.
2 Do one of the following:
• In the Apply to Selected pop-up menu, select the destination for color coding:
Tracks, Marker, Group, Regions in Tracks, or Regions in Region List.
– or –
• Select a track, marker, group, track region, or Region List region in the appropriate
Pro Tools window. The Apply to Selected menu will display the type of item you have selected.
If selecting a marker does not display the
Marker option in the Apply to Selected popup menu, then the Always Display Marker
Colors option in the Display Preferences
page is deselected. See “Always Display
Marker Colors” on page 146 for more infor-
mation.
3 Select a color from the palette, or select one of the following:
Default Removes any custom coloring and restores the color to the default color orientation.
See “Display Page Preferences for Color Coding” on page 146 for more information.
None Turns off color assignment. Affected regions are drawn with black waveform or MIDI notes on light gray background. Affected tracks and groups no longer show their color bars.
Using the Hold Button
The Color Palette provides a Hold button to simplify the process of assigning the same colors to multiple items (such as track and regions).
By default, the Hold button is off. When off, the
Color Palette automatically highlights the assigned color (if any) of items as you select them.
By default, the Hold button is off. When off, the
Color Palette automatically highlights the assigned color (if any) of items as you select them.
When the Hold button is enabled, the assigned color selected in the Color Palette persists and does not change when a different track or region is selected.
To use the Hold button to assign the same color to multiple items:
1 Click the Hold button to enable it. The Hold button becomes white, and the currently selected color is now highlighted with a wider white outline.
2 Select additional tracks or regions to which you want to assign the same color. Because the
Hold button is enabled, the Color Palette does not follow item selection; it remains (or
“holds”) at the last currently assigned color.
3 Click the assigned color again to assign it to the new selection of tracks or regions. Use the
Apply to Selected popup menu to determine which selected elements are affected.
4 To turn off Hold and return the Color Palette to its default mode, click the Hold button until it turns off.
148 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Grouping Tracks
Pro Tools provides a relative grouping function for linking tracks and their controls.
Groups are useful for editing several tracks in exactly the same way, or for mixing several tracks
(such as a pair of stereo tracks or a submix) while keeping them at the same relative volume level.
Pro Tools provides the following grouping features:
• Up to 104 different groups are available, arranged in 4 banks of 26 Group IDs.
• Groups can be nested (subgroups within groups).
• Grouped faders or controllers preserve their levels relative to each other.
• Groups are assignable to an available VCA
Master track (Pro Tools HD only).
You can also group regions into region
groups. See “Region Groups” on page 452.
Mix Groups, Edit Groups, and
Mix/Edit Groups
Mix Groups only affect mixing functions and
Edit Groups only affect editing. Mix/Edit
Groups link the grouping functions of the Mix
Group and the Edit Group.
Edit Groups
Edit Groups affect the following items in the
Edit window:
• Track View
• Track Height
• Track Timebase
• Audio and MIDI editing functions
• Automation editing functions
Mix Groups in Pro Tools HD
Mix Groups in Pro Tools HD can be set to affect the following items:
• Main Mute
• Solo
• Send Level
• Send Mute
• Main Volume
• Main Pan
• Main LFE Level
• Record Enable
• Input Monitoring
• Automation Mode
• Send Pan
• Send LFE Level
• Plug-in Controls
• Plug-in Bypass
In Pro Tools HD, when the Main Pan attribute is enabled for groups, grouped behavior applies to the Link, Front inverse,
Rear inverse and Front/Rear inverse controls in stereo and multichannel panner windows.
Mix Groups in Pro Tools LE
Mix Groups in Pro Tools LE always affect the following:
• Main volume
• Automation mode
Mix Groups in Pro Tools LE can also be set to affect the following:
• Main Mute
• Solo
• Send Level
• Send Mute
Chapter 10: Tracks 149
Grouping Limitations
Grouping does not affect these parameters:
• Voice assignment
• Output assignment
• Inserting plug-ins
To unlink Mix and Edit Groups:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the Mixing tab.
2 Deselect the “Link Mix and Edit Group Enables” option and click OK.
Selectable Group Attributes
You can select which parameters, or attributes , are linked in groups by the following methods:
• By making the group an Edit Group, a Mix
Group, or both (Mix/Edit Group)
• With Mix and Mix/Edit Groups, by selecting from a list of attributes for the group
• With Mix Groups in Pro Tools HD only, by choosing whether the selected attributes apply globally to all groups or to individual groups
Linking Mix and Edit Groupings
The “Link Mix and Edit Group Enables” option links group enabling between the Mix and Edit windows.
Pro Tools allows you to create groups that are both Mix and Edit Groups, but in some cases you may prefer not to link enabling of Mix and Edit
Groups. For example, when you are using the
Mix window for mixing, you may prefer to work with large, nested groups. However, in the Edit window, you may want to perform editing tasks within a smaller group. You could disable the
Link Mix and Edit Group Enables preference.
This would allow you to work with different groups in the two windows.
Mix Groups and VCA Masters
(Pro Tools HD Only)
An existing Mix Group can be assigned to a VCA
Master, or a new Mix Group can be assigned to a
VCA Master while it is being created. Only one group can be assigned to a VCA Master at a time.
A VCA Master cannot control a group that includes itself.
For information on assigning groups to
VCA Masters, see “Assigning Groups to
Group Controls
Menus and commands for creating and modifying groups are accessible in the following:
• Group List
• Group name in the Group List
• Group ID indicator on a track
• Track > Group menu
The Group List
The Pro Tools track grouping functions are located at the left side of the Mix or Edit window in the Group List. This scrolling window contains the names of all the groups in your session, as well as a pop-up menu for accessing grouping commands. From this menu, you can select and enable groups.
150 Pro Tools Reference Guide
By default, every session has a group named All , which includes every track in the session. The
All group cannot be edited or deleted.
Click to select group members on-screen
Group List pop-up menu
Click to select a group by typing its letter
Click to activate a group
Group Symbols
To the left of each Group ID (“a” through “z”) is a symbol indicating whether that group is selected in the current window (either the Mix or
Edit window). There are three types of Group symbols, as shown in the following figure:
Filled In Circle
Hollow Circle
Colors
Group IDs
Click to hide
Group List
Group List
Show/Hide Track List/Group List View
Button
To show the Group List (and Track List):
â– Click the Show/Hide Track List/Group List
View button in the Mix or Edit window.
Show/Hide Track List/Group List View
Edit Group List in Edit Window
Group ID
To the left of each name in the Group List is a letter denoting its Group ID (“a” through “z”).
Circle with a Dot
Groups Symbols
The Group symbols indicate the following:
Filled-in Circle Indicates that all members of the group are currently selected, and no members from outside the group are selected
Hollow Circle Indicates that only some members of the group are currently selected
Circle with a Dot Indicates that all members of the group are currently selected, plus additional members outside the group
Group List Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu at the top of the Group List provides the following commands:
New Group Executes Track > Group command
Display Provides commands to show Edit groups only, Mix groups only, or all groups (Edit, Mix, and Mix/Edit)
Suspend All Groups Suspends group behavior for all Mix and Edit groups
Modify Groups Opens Group dialog to modify existing groups only
Chapter 10: Tracks 151
Delete Active Groups Deletes only currently active groups
Group Name pop-up menu
Group List pop-up menu
Group Name and Track Group ID
Indicator Pop-Up Menus
When you click and hold on a group name in the Group List, or click a Group ID indicator in a track, a pop-up menu provides the following commands:
Tracks Displays track membership in group
Attributes Displays attributes of group
Modify Opens Group dialog to modify existing groups only
Duplicate Opens Group dialog for duplicated group
Delete Deletes a single group
Select Tracks in Group Selects tracks in the group
Show/Hide Tracks in Group Shows or hides tracks in the current group
Show Only Tracks in Group Shows only the tracks in the group and hides all other tracks
Show All Tracks Shows all tracks in the session
Group ID indicator pop-up menu
Group Dialog
Whether you are creating or modifying groups with the Group List, a tracks’s Group ID indicator, or the Track > Group menu command, you will be using the Groups dialog.
The Group dialog lets you create new groups and assign attributes to groups.
152 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Group Dialog in Pro Tools HD
In Pro Tools HD, the Group dialog has three pages:
Tracks Lets you add and remove tracks from the current group
Attributes Lets you select which parameters are linked for the current Mix or Mix/Edit Group
Globals Lets you select parameters to use as a template that can be applied to individual groups by selecting Follow Globals
Group Dialog in Pro Tools LE
In Pro Tools LE, the Group dialog has only a single page.
Group dialog (Pro Tools LE)
Group dialog (Pro Tools HD)
Chapter 10: Tracks 153
Working with Groups
Creating Groups
You can select the tracks you want to add to a group before creating it, or add and remove tracks from a group after it has been created.
Creating Groups in Pro Tools HD
To create a group in Pro Tools HD:
1 Select the tracks you want to include in the group. (If you do not select tracks at this time, you can add tracks later.)
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Track > Group.
– or –
• Choose New Group from the Group List pop-up menu.
3 Enter a name for the group.
4 Select the type of group to create: Edit Group,
Mix Group, or Mix/Edit Group.
5 Choose a Group ID from the ID pop-up menu.
Four banks of 26 are available: a–z, 2a–z, 3a–z,
4a–z. (If you do not choose a Group ID,
Pro Tools automatically assigns the next available ID to a new group.)
Choosing a Group ID
6 Click Tracks in the Group dialog, and do any of the following:
• To add the tracks that are currently selected in the session to the group, click the Add button at the bottom of the Group dialog.
• To add tracks to the group, select the track names in the Available track list, and click
Add or press A on the computer keyboard.
• To remove tracks from the group, select the track names in the Currently In Group list, and click Remove or press R on the computer keyboard.
• Double-click track names in either list to move them to the opposite column.
• To replace all tracks in the group with the tracks that are currently selected in the session, click the Replace button at the bottom of the Group dialog.
Selecting a Group Type
154 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Creating Groups in Pro Tools LE
To create a group in Pro Tools LE:
1 Select the tracks you want to include in the group. (If you do not select tracks at this time, you can add tracks later.)
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Track > Group.
– or –
• Choose New Group from the Group List pop-up menu.
3 Enter a name for the group.
4 Select the type of group to create: Edit Group,
Mix Group, or Mix/Edit Group.
Selecting track names to add to a group
In either list, Shift-click to select a range of track names. Control-click (Windows) or
Command-click (Mac) to select discontiguous track names.
7 If the group is if the group is a Mix Group or a Mix/Edit Group, do the following:
• Set the Attributes for the Group (see “Setting Group Attributes” on page 159).
• If you want to assign the group to an available VCA, select the VCA track from the
VCA pop-up menu.
Selecting a Group Type
5 Choose a Group ID from the ID pop-up menu.
Four banks of 26 are available: a–z, 2a–z, 3a–z,
4a–z. (If you do not choose a Group ID,
Pro Tools automatically assigns the next available ID to a new group.)
Choosing a VCA track to control a group
8 Click OK.
Chapter 10: Tracks 155
6 Do any of the following:
• To add the tracks that are currently selected in the session to the group, click the Add button at the bottom of the Group dialog.
• To add tracks to the group, select the track names in the Available track list, and click
Add or press A on the computer keyboard.
• To remove tracks from the group, select the track names in the Currently In Group list, and click Remove or press R on the computer keyboard.
• Double-click track names in either list to move them to the opposite column.
• To replace all tracks in the group with the tracks that are currently selected in the session, click the Replace button at the bottom of the Group dialog.
7 Select the items to be Linked within Groups
(Mutes, Solos, Send Mute, Send Levels).
Linked Within Groups options (Pro Tools LE)
8 Click OK.
Modifying Groups
To modify a group:
1 Do one of the following:
• Choose Modify Groups from the Group
List pop-up menu.
• In the Mix window, click the Group ID indicator on a track and choose Modify from the pop-up menu.
• Right-click the Group name in the Group
List and choose Modify from the pop-up menu.
Selecting track names to add to a group
In either list, Shift-click to select a range of track names. Control-click (Windows) or
Command-click (Mac) to select discontiguous track names.
156 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Group List pop-up menu
2 In the Groups dialog, choose the group you want to modify from the ID pop-up menu.
3 Change any of the following for the current group:
• Group name
• Group type (Edit, Mix or Mix/Edit)
• VCA status (Pro Tools HD only)
• Follows Global status (Pro Tools HD only)
• Track membership
• Attributes (Pro Tools HD only)
• Linked within Group items (Pro Tools LE only)
4 Click OK.
To modify the settings for the “All” group in
Pro Tools HD:
1 Right-click the “All” group name in the Group
List and choose Modify from the pop-up menu.
All Group pop-up menu
2 In the Group dialog, select Edit, Mix, or
Mix/Edit to change the settings for the ALL group. If you select Edit only or Mix only, the
ALL group will apply only to that Group type.
Modify ALL Group dialog
3 For Mix or Mix/Edit Groups, you can change any of the following:
• Follows Global status
• Attributes
4 Click OK.
To modify the settings for the “All” group in
Pro Tools LE:
1 Right-click the “All” group name in the Group
List and choose Modify from the pop-up menu.
2 In the Group dialog, select Edit, Mix, or
Mix/Edit to change the settings for the ALL group. If you select Edit only or Mix only, the
ALL group will apply only to that Group type.
Modify ALL Group dialog
Chapter 10: Tracks 157
3 For Mix or Mix/Edit groups, you can change any of the following Linked Within Groups options:
• Mutes
• Solos
• Send Mutes
• Send Levels
4 Click OK.
Deleting Groups
One or all groups can be deleted at a time.
Deleting a group cannot be undone.
To delete a single group, do one of the following:
â–
In the Mix window, click the Group ID indicator on a track and choose Delete from the popup menu.
– or –
â–
Right-click the Group name in the Group List and choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
To delete all currently active groups
â– Choose Delete Active Groups from the Group
List pop-up menu.
Duplicating Groups
You can duplicate a group and modify its settings in order to quickly set up a mix.
To duplicate a group:
1 Do one of the following:
• Click the Group ID indicator on a track and choose Duplicate from the pop-up menu.
– or –
• Right-click the Group name in the Group
List and choose Duplicate from the pop-up menu.
2 Change any of the following for the current group:
• Group name
• Group type (Edit, Mix, or Mix/Edit)
• VCA status (Pro Tools HD only)
• Follows Global status (Pro Tools HD only)
• Track membership
• Attributes (Pro Tools HD only)
• Linked within Group items (Pro Tools LE only)
3 Click OK.
Group List pop-up menu
The ALL group cannot be deleted.
158 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Setting Group Attributes
(Pro Tools HD Only)
When creating a Mix Group or a Mix/Edit
Group, you can select the Mix window parameters that will be linked for that group. These linked parameters are the attributes of the group.
You can select attributes in the Globals page and then set individual groups to follow the Global settings, or you can select attributes for groups individually.
To select attributes in the Global page:
1 While creating or modifying a group, click
Globals in the Group dialog.
3 Click OK to save the group and the new Globals settings.
For information on selecting attributes, see
“Selecting Group Attributes” on page 160.
To select attributes for an individual group:
1 While creating or modifying a Mix Group or a
Mix/Edit Group, do one of the following:
• Click Attributes in the Group dialog, and select the attributes you want to link.
– or –
• Click Follow Globals to follow the base set of attributes. The Attributes page greys out to indicate that the group is following the selections in the Globals page.
For information on selecting attributes, see
“Selecting Group Attributes” on page 160.
2 Click OK to save the settings.
Globals page of Group dialog
2 Select the base set of attributes for groups in your session.
Attributes page of Group dialog
Chapter 10: Tracks 159
Selecting Group Attributes
The following attributes can be selected for Global settings and for individual groups.
Track controls:
• Main Volume
• Main Mute
• Main Pan
• Main LFE Level
• Record Enable
• Input Monitoring
• Solo
• Automation Mode
Send controls (Sends A–J):
• Send Level
• Send Mute
• Send Pan
• Send LFE Level
Insert controls (Inserts A–E):
• Plug-in Controls
• Insert Bypass
To select the attributes for a group, do any of the following:
â– Select individual attributes by clicking their checkboxes.
â– To select or deselect all attributes, Alt-Shiftclick (Windows) or Option-Shift-click (Mac) any attribute.
â– To select or deselect all attributes for a single
Send or Insert (across a row), Start-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) any attribute in that row.
â– To select or deselect attributes for a single control across all Sends, all Inserts, or for the four track controls (down a column), Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) any attribute in that column.
Saving Group Attribute Presets
You can define six Group presets that can be recalled on either the Attributes or Globals page whenever you are creating or modifying a Mix or Mix/Edit Group.
To save the current attribute settings as a Group preset:
1 In the Groups dialog, click Save. (Follow Globals must be unchecked to save a setting from the Attributes page.)
Saving a Group preset
2 Choose one of the six preset locations from the Location pop-up menu, and click Save.
To save the current attribute settings directly to a preset location, Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Mac) the preset button.
To recall a Group preset:
â– Click the corresponding Preset button (1–6) in the Groups dialog. (Follow Globals must be unchecked to recall a setting in the Attributes page.)
Recalling a Group preset
160 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Enabling Groups
Editing operations are not applied to members of a group that are hidden with the Track List.
Mix operations (with the exception of recordenabling of tracks) are applied to hidden tracks.
Pro Tools lets you create separate groups for editing and mixing. You set this option when you use the New Group command. Groups that apply to both editing and mixing can be decoupled.
To enable a group:
â– In the Group List, click the name of the group you want to enable. The Group Name is highlighted to indicate that it is enabled.
To enable additional groups, click their names in the Group List.
Moving a fader of a group member will cause all other group members to move relative to it. If a fader belongs to multiple groups, and the groups conflict when faders are moved, the fader will follow the topmost or “parent” group that it belongs to.
To disable a group:
â–
In the Group List, click the name of the group you want to disable. The Group Name is unhighlighted to indicate that it is not enabled.
Keyboard Selection of Groups
The Group List Keyboard Focus allows you to type a Group ID letter to automatically toggle that group’s enable status.
â—† In the Mix window, the Group List Keyboard
Focus is always enabled.
â—† In the Edit window, you need to enable the
Group List Keyboard Focus to use it.
To enable the Edit Group List Keyboard Focus, do one of the following:
â– Click the Keyboard Focus button in upper right of the Edit Group List.
– or –
â– Press Control+Alt+3 (Windows) or Command+Option+3 (Mac).
Group List Keyboard Focus enabled
To enable and disable groups using the Edit and
Mix Group List Keyboard Focus:
â– With Group List Keyboard Focus enabled, type the Group ID letter (a–z) to automatically enable or disable the corresponding group.
Chapter 10: Tracks 161
Temporarily Isolating Control of an
Item from Group Operation
You can temporarily isolate control of a group item from group operation by Right-clicking on the item.
You can also temporarily suspend group behavior for a track by Start-clicking (Windows) or Control-clicking (Mac) the desired group function.
The following items can be isolated from group operation:
• Pan slider (Pro Tools HD only)
• Channel Record Enable (Pro Tools HD only)
• Channel TrackInput (Pro Tools HD only)
• Send Pan slider
• Channel Volume fader
• Channel Pan slider
• Channel Mute button
• Channel Solo button
• Channel Record Enable button
• Channel TrackInput button
• Send fader
• Send Pan slider
Grouped Control Offsets
When the following controls are grouped with offsets, and moved to their extremes, relative offsets are preserved when the controls are moved back from their extremes:
• Main Volume
• Main Pan (Pro Tools HD only)
• Send Level
• Send Pan
For example, when a grouped Volume fader is moved to its maximum value, any other faders in that group that had higher values will remember their relative offset whenever the first fader is pulled down again.
In Automation views, this “overflow” is indicated on the automation playlist by blue automation breakpoints at the extremes of the automation playlist.
Setting Group Pan Controls to
Ignore Offsets
By default, offsets are preserved for grouped pan controls. In some workflows, it is desirable to have grouped pan controls match absolute values rather than preserve offsets.
To set grouped pan controls to ignore offsets:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Select “Use Absolute Pan Linking.”
When this option is enabled, grouped pan controls will snap to the absolute value of the pan control that is being adjusted.
162 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 11: DigiBase
DigiBase and DigiBase Pro (Pro Tools HD and
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 only) combine an intuitive, browser-style interface with an integrated databasing engine, optimized for
Pro Tools data and media management.
DigiBase browsers provide extensive databasing tools for searching, sorting, auditioning, and importing of audio, MIDI, video, plug-in settings (.txf), and session files. Multiple browsers can be displayed and arranged, with custom display settings provided to optimize your work environment.
DigiBase Elements
Figure 5 shows the various elements of DigiBase.
Arrows show how files can be moved between the elements.
For information on dragging and dropping files from DigiBase browsers to your
Pro Tools session, see “Importing Items with Drag and Drop” on page 225.
Workspace Browser
Volume Browsers Catalogs
(DigiBase Pro Only)
Pro Tools
Session
Relink Window
Figure 5. Data flow between a Pro Tools session and DigiBase browsers
Project Browser
Task Window
Chapter 11: DigiBase 163
DigiBase Browsers
DigiBase databases are accessed through Digi-
Base browsers (see Figure 6). Browsers provide an intuitive user interface to DigiBase databases with many convenient features for various file management tasks (such as search and sort functions).
Browsers in Pro Tools are analogous to windows in your computer’s operating system, but are specifically designed for Pro Tools workflow.
Multiple browsers can be displayed simultaneously, and arranged independently with custom display settings for each.
Browsers let you search and sort audio files, video files, and sessions. Audio, video, and session files displayed in browsers can be dragged directly into the current Pro Tools session.
When offline items are needed, Pro Tools lets you find the correct matching files, then relink to online media.
The main elements of a DigiBase browser (see
Figure 6) include the following.
Title Bar Shows the browser type (Work-space,
Volume, Project or Catalog), and the name of its associated volume, session or catalog.
Toolbar Provides the Browser menu, Search icon,
View Presets (numbered 1–5), and browser navigation tools.
Items List Displays the contents of a volume, folder, session, or Catalog database.
Columns Identifies the type of metadata displayed in the items list (such as file name and format) for volumes, folders, and files in the
Items List.
• Columns can be resized by dragging the column border, or rearranged by dragging the Column headers.
• Columns can be dragged to either of two available panes, the Fixed or Scrolling panes.
164 Pro Tools Reference Guide
TItle bar
Toolbar
Column headers
Items
List
Fixed pane
Show/Hide
Figure 6. Main elements of a DigiBase browser (Volume browser shown).
Pane split
Scrolling pane
There are three types of Pro Tools browsers available on all supported systems:
• The Workspace browser
• Volume browsers
• The Project browser
DigiBase Pro (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 only) provides one additional browser:
• Catalogs
Workspace Browser
The Workspace browser provides access to all your mounted volumes, as well as the folders and files they contain.
Using the Workspace browser, you can:
• Access all mounted volumes.
• Access all Catalogs.
• Search across multiple volumes and Catalogs simultaneously.
• Designate volumes for Record and Playback, Playback Only, or Transfer.
• Unmount volumes.
• View, manage, audition and import individual items in any catalog or mounted volume.
• Update databases for entire volumes.
For detailed information about the Work-
space browser, see “Workspace Browser” on page 195.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 165
Volume Browsers
Volume browsers provide file management for local and network volumes . Volumes are formatted partitions on a physical drive (hard drive).
Open a Volume browser by double-clicking a volume in the Workspace browser. Any changes made in Volume browsers (such as copying, deleting, or moving files and folders) is mirrored on the volumes themselves. Volumes include mounted hard drives, network storage, and CD-
ROMs.
Using Volume browsers you can:
• View, manage, audition and import individual items on the volume.
• Update a database for contents of the volume.
Project Browser
The Project browser provides powerful search and management tools for the files referenced in your current session, regardless of where they are stored. Using the Project browser, you can:
• Show all the media files associated with the current session, including any missing files.
• View, manage, audition and spot individual items.
For detailed information about the Project
browser, see “Project Browser” on page 198.
Catalogs
(DigiBase Pro Only)
Catalogs provide the highest level of Pro Tools file management. Catalogs make it easy to organize files from multiple sources into libraries of favorite files. Catalogs can be sorted and searched, even when the files they reference are offline. Catalogs can also be shared.
Using Catalogs, you can:
• Collect and organize files from any combination of volumes.
• Create catalogs of complete volumes to view and search even if a volume is offline.
• View, manage, audition, and import individual items in the catalog.
• Update a database for contents of catalog.
For detailed information about Catalogs,
see “DigiBase Pro Catalogs” on page 199.
Task Window
The Task window is a utility for viewing and managing all of the background tasks that you initiate with Pro Tools. Use the Task window to monitor, pause, or cancel background tasks such as file copies, searches, indexing, and fade creation.
For detailed information about the Task
window, see “Task Window” on page 204.
Relink Window
The Relink window provides tools and features for relinking sessions and catalogs to media files.
Use Relink tools to search and reacquire missing files for use in the current session.
For detailed information about the Relink
window, see “Relink Window” on page 191.
166 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Performance and Transfer
Volumes
DigiBase lets you view, manage, and import sessions and media from both Performance and
Transfer volumes.
Performance Volumes Are storage volumes (hard drives) that are suitable for playback and have been designated in the Workspace browser as
Record and Playback (R) or Playback Only (P) of media files in a Pro Tools session.
Transfer Volumes Are volumes that are not supported for media playback in Pro Tools (such as shared network volumes or CD-ROMs), or storage volumes (hard drives) that have been designated in the Workspace browser as Transfer (T) volumes. Transfer volumes cannot be used to record or play back media in a Pro Tools session.
Designated Transfer (T) volumes can be useful for transferring session and media files between different Pro Tools systems.
For more information on volume designa-
tions, see “Audio and Video Volume Designators” on page 196.
Digidesign Databases
The information displayed in browsers is stored in individual databases. Pro Tools creates these databases automatically for all mounted volumes, including Transfer volumes.
Digidesign databases use three file types: volume.ddb Stores media and session file metadata for a particular volume.
catalog.ddb (DigiBase Pro Only) Stores media and session file metadata for a user defined Catalog.
Cataloged media and session files are can reside on multiple volumes, including Transfer volumes.
Wavecache.wfm Stores waveform overviews for all audio files referenced by each session.
Read/Write Volume Databases (Hard Drives)
For each volume, a database file is created in a folder named Digidesign Databases, on the root level of the volume. The database is stored with the volume it describes so that if the volume is later moved to a different system the database does not have to be recreated.
If you delete the Digidesign Database folder, all existing database information for that volume is lost. To recreate a deleted
Digidesign Database folder, re-index the
volume (see “Indexing DigiBase Databases” on page 172).
Chapter 11: DigiBase 167
Read-Only Volume Databases
(CD/DVD-ROMs and Write-Protected Volumes)
Since data cannot be written to read-only volumes, databases for read-only volumes are stored locally on your system drive.
On Windows, these databases are stored in the
Program Files\Digidesign\Pro Tools\
Databases\Volumes folder.
On Mac, they are stored in the Library/
Application Support/Digidesign/Databases/
Volumes folder.
Shared Network Volume Databases
Though a shared volume may be read/write,
Pro Tools treats it as if it were a Transfer volume and no database is stored on the shared volume.
Consequently, databases for shared volumes are stored locally on your system drive.
On Windows, volume databases are stored in the Program Files\Digidesign\Pro Tools\
Databases\Volumes folder.
On Mac, volume databases are stored in the
Library/Application Support/Digidesign/
Databases/Volumes folder.
Sharing Database Files
Database files can be shared among users. This is particularly useful for Transfer volumes, eliminating duplicate processing (indexing) time.
For example, shared volumes (such as network storage volumes) tend to be large, and indexing can be a time consuming task. To avoid duplicate effort, one user can manually index part or all of the shared volume just once, then email the database files to other users. Database files can be added by placing them within each user’s
Volumes folder. Periodic manual indexing then keeps all databases current.
168 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Sharing Catalogs
(DigiBase Pro Only)
Catalogs can be created for a particular project and then shared among multiple systems to help facilitate more efficient workflow. DigiBase
Pro Catalogs are stored as database files on your system drive.
On Windows, Catalog database files are stored in the Program Files\Digidesign\Pro Tools\
Databases\Catalogs folder.
On Mac, Catalog database files are stored in the
Library/Application Support/ Digidesign/
Databases/Catalogs folder.
Browser Windows and Tools
Browsers display all files in their database (see
Figure 7 on page 169), including Pro Tools and
non-Pro Tools files. Unknown file types can be shown, as well as aliases, and desktop folders.
To maximize processing speed and protect vital components, DigiBase does not display all folders. For example, in Windows, DigiBase browsers do not display the Program Files, Windows,
Digidesign Databases, WU Temp, or System Volume Information folders; and on Mac, DigiBase browsers do not display the System, Applications, Library, or Digidesign Databases folders.
This excludes them from being indexed, searched, sorted, or affected in any way by Digi-
Base tasks. You should not store Pro Tools session or media files in any of these folders.
The main elements of a DigiBase browser (see
Figure 6 on page 165) include the following:
Title Bar Shows the browser type (Workspace,
Volume, or Project), and the name of its associated volume or Catalog.
Toolbar Includes the Browser menu, Search icon,
View Presets, and browser navigation tools.
Items List Displays the contents of a volume, folder, session, or Catalog database.
Columns Display metadata (such as file name and format) for volumes, folders, and files in the
Items List.
Each row of data in a browser represents an Item
(such as a file or folder). Data about each item is displayed in columns. Columns can be arranged and placed in either the Fixed pane or the Scrolling pane.
Columns
Title bar Search icon
Browser menu
Toolbar
Column headers
View Presets
Items
List
Fixed pane
Show/Hide
Pane split
Scrolling pane
Figure 7. Basic browser tools, panes, and columns (Workspace browser shown)
Chapter 11: DigiBase 169
Opening Browsers
There are several ways to open, close, and navigate within browsers.
To open the Workspace browser:
â– Choose Window > Workspace.
To open a Volume browser:
1 Open the Workspace browser (Window >
Workspace).
2 Double-click a volume or folder in the Items
List. A new Volume browser opens.
To open the Project browser:
1 Open a Pro Tools session.
2 Choose Window > Project.
To open a Catalog browser (DigiBase Pro only):
1 Open the Workspace browser (Window >
Workspace).
2 Click the Expand/Collapse icon next to the
Catalogs icon to show all Catalogs, if they are not already visible.
3 Double-click a Catalog.
To open another Volume or Catalog in a new browser window and leave the current Volume or
Catalog browser open:
â–
Control-double-click (Windows) or Command-double-click (Mac) the Volume or Catalog.
Viewing the Contents of a Volume,
Folder, or Catalog
To expand or collapse the currently selected folder, do one of the following:
â– Click the Expand/Collapse icon next to the folder.
– or –
â– Select a volume, folder, or Catalog, and press the Right Arrow key to expand, or the left Arrow key to collapse.
To move up one browser level:
â–
Click the Back arrow in the Browser toolbar.
To move up one browser level, press Control+Up Arrow key (Windows), or Command+Up Arrow key (Mac).
Browser Back arrow
Browser navigation icon
Moving Browsers to the Foreground or
Background
To bring all open browsers to the foreground:
â– Choose Window > Browsers > Bring to Front.
To bring all browsers to the foreground, press Alt+J (Windows) or Option+J (Mac).
To send all browsers to the background:
â–
Choose Window > Browsers > Send to Back.
To send all browsers to the background, press Alt+Shift+J (Windows) or
Option+Shift+J (Mac).
170 Pro Tools Reference Guide
All open browsers are moved to the background, bringing the other windows to the foreground.
Browsers remain open and accessible.
To bring an open browser to the foreground:
â– Choose Window > Browsers, and select an open browser from the sub-menu.
To cycle to the next or previous browser:
â– Press Control+Left/Right Arrow keys (Windows) or Command+Left/Right Arrow keys
(Mac).
Closing Browsers
To close all browsers:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
Close box of any browser.
Because the Task window is a utility and not a browser, it remains open.
Working wIth Items in Browsers
Opening Sessions
To open a Pro Tools session listed in a browser:
â– With no Pro Tools session currently open, double-click a Pro Tools session file in any Digi-
Base browser.
Opening AAF and OMF Sequences
(DigiTranslator Only)
On systems with the DigiTranslator 2.0 Option,
AAF and OMF sequences can be opened from
DigiBase browsers.
You can also drag and drop AAF and OMF sequences from browsers into the current session.
To open an AAF or OMF sequence from a DigiBase browser:
1 Do one of the following:
• With no Pro Tools session currently open, double-click the AAF or OMF sequence in a browser.
– or –
• Drag the AAF or OMF sequence from a browser to the Timeline in an open session.
2 Configure the Import Session Data dialog.
3 Click OK.
For more information on importing AAF and OMF sequences, refer to the DigiTranslator Integrated Option Guide.
Creating and Opening Folders
Browsers let you create and manipulate folders
(file system sub-directories). All folders have Expand/Collapse icons to show their contents.
Dragging items onto a folder icon is the same as dragging into an open browser.
To create a new folder in a Volume browser or
Catalog:
1 Choose New Folder from the Browser menu.
2 Enter a name for the folder, and click OK.
(Click Cancel to cancel the new folder.)
In Volume browsers, the folder is created on disk. In Catalogs, the folder is created in the Catalog only. The Items List updates as new items are added.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 171
To open a folder in the current browser:
â–
Double-click the folder, or click the Expand/Collapse icon for the item.
With the browser in the foreground and the folder selected, press Control+Down Arrow key (Windows) or Command+Down Arrow key (Mac) to open a folder in the current browser.
To create and open a folder in its own new browser:
â– Control-double-click (Windows) or Command-double-click (Mac) the folder. The previous (parent) Browser window remains open.
With the browser in the foreground and the folder selected, press Control+Alt+Down
Arrow key (Windows) or Command+Option+Down Arrow key (Mac) to open a folder in its own new browser.
Scrolling and Moving Selections
To scroll the active pane up or down:
â– Press the Page Up or Page Down key.
To scroll to the top or bottom of the active pane:
â– Press Home (for the top) or End (for the bottom).
To move items up or down in the current browser:
1 Select items in a browser, and make sure that window is in the foreground.
2 Press the Up or Down Arrow key.
Text Entry in Browsers
Many text fields can be edited to replace or update data for an item.
To enter an edit to a text field and exit, and return to the previous display state:
â– Press Enter.
To revert to the previous text and cancel a text edit:
â–
Press Esc.
For details on column editing, see “Column
Designating Volumes for Record,
Playback, and Transfer
To manage volumes and data, the Workspace browser lets you designate volumes as R (Record and Playback), P (Playback only), or T (Transfer).
Separate columns are provided for audio designation (“A”) and video (“V”).
For detailed information on volume designa-
tion, see “Audio and Video Volume Designators” on page 196.
Indexing DigiBase Databases
Indexing is the process of reading media files, extracting just the metadata for each file, then storing that data in an associated database so that it may be displayed in the columns of a browser. Once a volume or folder has been fully indexed, it can be searched very quickly because all of the metadata has already been sorted and organized.
If a volume or folder has not been indexed, it is indexed automatically the first time it is opened in a DigiBase browser. Volumes or folders containing a lot of media files can take a long time to index. For this reason, you may want to manually index specific volumes or files prior to starting a project to help expedite workflow.
172 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Indexing while Browsing
The first time you open a Volume browser for a volume or folder that has never been indexed,
Pro Tools automatically begins to fill the database for that level of the volume. Files and folders appear in the browser Items List, along with metadata in the columns for each item. Indexing continues until you either close the browser, or until that folder is completely indexed.
The next time you open that browser, metadata for items that have already been indexed is visible immediately. If the browser or folder was closed before indexing was complete, or if the contents of the folder have changed since the last time it was browsed, Pro Tools automatically updates the database the next time it is opened. This way, the database is always up to date for the folder you are browsing. (View the
Task Manager to see current activity.)
Indexing while Browsing saves time because it only fills the database for items on the level of the volume that you are currently browsing. For example, if you are browsing the root level of the volume, it indexes only the folders and files on the root level. If you open a folder, Pro Tools indexes just the items in that folder. As a result, a database is only indexed for the parts of the volume that you have browsed. However, searches are faster and more complete when a volume is already completely indexed.
Manual Indexing
Manual indexing fills in all missing data, and updates changed data for selected folders and all of their sub-folders.
To update the index for a folder and all sub-folders:
1 Select the item in a browser Items List.
2 Choose Update Database for Selected from the
Browser menu.
To update the index for an entire volume:
1 Select the volume to update in the Workspace browser.
2 Choose Update Database for Selected from the
Browser menu.
Last Indexed Date Display
The Last Indexed column shows the date that the index for that folder and all of its sub-folders was updated. Keep in mind that individual subfolders may have been updated more recently.
Automatic Updating for Pro Tools Actions
Whenever Pro Tools adds, deletes, or modifies a file on a volume or in a session, the appropriate database is immediately updated to reflect the change.
Changes that are made with Windows Explorer or the Mac Finder (such as copying or moving files) are not tracked by Pro Tools and are only indexed if the necessary folder is browsed or if a manual index is performed.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 173
The Browser Menu
All Browser windows provide a Browser menu in the upper left corner of their toolbar. The
Browser menu provides commands specific to each type of browser, as described below.
Browser menu
Browser menu icon
Not all browser commands are available in all browsers, as noted.
New Folder Creates a new folder on the current volume, or within the current Catalog. In Volume browsers, a new folder is created on disk.
For more information, see “Creating and Opening Folders” on page 171.
Update Database for Selected Updates the database for the currently selected volumes or folders.
New Catalog Creates a new, empty Catalog. Requires DigiBase Pro.
Create Catalog from Selection Creates a fully indexed catalog of the selected items. Requires
DigiBase Pro.
Calculate Waveform Calculates the waveform displays for selected audio files, or all files contained in selected folders.
Reveal in Finder/Explorer Opens the corresponding parent window in the Finder (Mac) or
Explorer (Windows) for the currently selected file.
Reveal in Browser Opens the parent browser for the selected item. The selected item is highlighted in its parent browser.
Select Offline Files Selects all files that are currently offline.
174 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Select Transfer Files Selects all files identified as
Transfer files (files found on media that do not support playback).
Select Online Files Selects all files that are online.
Invert Selection Reverses (inverts) the current selection.
Copy and Relink Copies items currently selected in the Project browser to a chosen location, and relinks the session to the copies instead of the originals. Use this to easily move files from a
Transfer to a Performance volume. This command is also available in DigiBase Pro Catalogs to copy items and relink the current Catalog to the copies.
Relink Offline Opens the Relink window. Available in the Project browsers only.
Relink Selected Opens the Relink window, with all selected files from the current browser displayed and selected as Files to Match. Available in Catalogs and Project browsers only.
Duplicate Selected Creates a duplicate of the selected items in the same location.
Lock Selected Locks all selected items. Any files already locked remain so. Locking a folder locks all files and sub-folders it contains.
Unlock Selected Unlocks the selected items.
Delete Selected Deletes any selected item. In the Workspace, Project, and Volume browsers, deleting an item deletes it from the disk. In Catalogs, you are asked whether you want to clear the items from the Catalog (leaving your disks unchanged) or delete the files referenced by the
Catalog items.
Unmount Lets you unmount any online volume.
Available in the Workspace browser only.
While Pro Tools is running, always use the
Unmount command in the Workspace browser menu to unmount the volume, or quit Pro Tools and then unmount the volume.
Spacebar Toggles File Preview Enables or disables the Spacebar for starting and stopping preview. When this option is disabled, use the Preview button to start and stop preview.
When a browser is front-most, Control+P
(Windows) or Command+P (Mac) starts and stops preview. Also, the Esc key stops preview.
Auto-Preview Enables or disables automatic preview of files. When this option is enabled, selecting a file in the browser starts preview. The
Preview button updates to show that Auto-Preview is enabled.
Loop Preview Mode Previews the selected file by looping playback of the file. If multiple files are selected, only the first selected file previews. The
Preview button updates to show that Loop Preview mode is enabled.
Additional DigiBase Pro Commands
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
In Catalogs, the following additional commands are available to manage Comments in selected items.
For more information on Comments, see
“Comments Fields” on page 179.
Copy Database Comments to Clip Names Copies an item’s Database comments to its Clip Name.
Copy File Comments to Clip Names (Mac Only)
Copies an item’s File Comments to its Clip
Name.
Browser Panes and Display
Browsers display an Items List consisting of various columns (such as file name, size, creation date, and sample rate). The Items List is split into two panes. Individual columns can be placed in either pane, and all columns can be shown or hidden, resized, reordered, and sorted.
Moving Columns Between Panes
Columns in browser can be placed in either pane. Move columns you frequently need to see into the left-hand pane. Columns that you use less often can be moved to the right-hand pane.
To move columns between panes:
â– Click the column header and drag it to a different pane.
To show or hide the right-hand pane:
â– Click the Show/Hide icon in the lower right corner of the leviathan pane.
Show/Hide
Show/Hide Pane icon
Arranging and Resizing Columns
To rearrange columns in a pane:
â– Drag the column header to a new position.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 175
To resize a column:
â–
Drag the column header boundary to the desired width.
Showing and Hiding Columns
You can show or hide individual columns in DigiBase browsers to fit your workflow. The default column display includes the items you would use in most sessions.
To show or hide individual columns:
â–
Start-click (Windows), Control-click (Mac), or
Right-click a column label and select or deselect the column name from the pop-up menu.
View Presets
Pro Tools lets you save up to five preset views for each type of browser, and the Relink window.
Presets can be recalled by clicking a View Preset button. View Presets are specific to each type of browser.
To store a View Preset:
1 Open a browser, or the Relink window.
2 Arrange columns and views.
3 Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) one of the five View Preset buttons.
Browser View Presets
Showing and hiding columns
To show or hide all columns:
â– Start-click (Windows), Control-click (Mac), or
Right-click a column header and choose ALL or
NONE from the pop-up menu. (Only the Name and Clip Name columns remain when you choose NONE.)
To show the default set of columns:
â– Start-click (Windows), Control-click (Mac), or
Right-click a column header and choose DE-
FAULT from the pop-up menu.
View preset buttons
To recall a saved preset:
â– Click the appropriate View Preset button.
About View Preset 1
Preset 1 becomes the default layout for other browsers of its type when they are opened for the first time.
Sorting Columns
Columns can be sorted in ascending or descending order, and multiple sorts can be applied (up to four levels).
To sort by columns:
â–
Click the column title header.
It is often helpful to perform a secondary sort
(for example, to sort by tape and timestamp).
176 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To add a secondary sort:
â–
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the column title for the secondary sort criteria.
Performing a secondary sort
To toggle the current sort order between ascending and descending:
â– Click the Sort toggle arrow, at the top of the vertical scroll bars.
Column Data
In browsers, each row of data represents an item in a database (such as a file, session, or volume).
Each column displays specific data for an item, as follows.
Status The Status column is the first column on the left, and it displays the status of each item, as follows.
Status Icons and Display
Icon Text Status none none
T
Black
Blue italics
Blue italics
Online
Offline
Transfer
Name Displays the name of the file, folder, volume, catalog, or session. This text field is editable in all browsers except Catalogs.
A Designates volumes for audio R (Record and
Playback), P (Playback only), or T (Transfer).
Available in the Workspace browser only.
V Designates volumes as video R (Record and
Playback), P (Playback only), or T (Transfer).
Available in the Workspace browser only.
For more information, see “Audio and
Video Volume Designators” on page 196.
Kind Displays whether the volume, folder, catalog, or file. For files, this column displays what kind of file it is: session file, audio file, video file, or other. This field cannot be edited.
Size Displays the size of a file in kilobytes. For folders, the total size of all files in the folder is displayed. This field cannot be edited.
Date Indexed Displays the last indexed date for the item. This field cannot be edited.
Capacity Displays the total capacity of a volume.
This field cannot be edited.
Free Displays the unused space on volumes.
This field cannot be edited.
Waveform Displays a graphical overview of an
audio file. See “Waveforms and Auditioning” on page 180 for more information.
Duration Displays the duration of a file in absolute time (wall clock), regardless of the time code format. For region groups, Duration displays Bars and Beats. This field cannot be edited.
File Comment Displays any embedded comments associated with the file. File comments are supported with BWF and SD II files, but are not supported with AIFF files. File Comments always remain with the file when copied, con-
verted, or transferred. See “Comments Fields” on page 179 for more information.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 177
Database Comment Displays user comments stored with the database, with support for
Finder comments. Available in the Project
browser and Catalogs only. See “Comments
Fields” on page 179 for more information.
Date Modified Displays the last modified date for the item. This field cannot be edited.
Date Created Displays the creation date of an item. This field cannot be edited.
Number of Channels Displays the number of channels in an audio file: mono, stereo, or 3–8 as appropriate for supported multichannel files.
This field cannot be edited.
Format Displays the audio file format (such as
BWF (.WAV) or AIFF). This field cannot be edited.
Sample Rate Displays an audio file’s sample rate. This field can be edited in browsers for
WAV and SDII files only. This can be useful when dealing with audio that has been pulled up or down, or to force a sample rate conversion to occur if that is necessary before importing a file that otherwise would not require conversion.
Bit Depth Displays an audio file’s bit depth. This field cannot be edited.
Tempo Displays the tempo associated with region group, MIDI, REX, and ACID files, and session files. This field cannot be edited.
Original Time Stamp Displays the original time stamp (time code location) of audio or video files.
User Time Stamp Displays the user time stamp, if any, of audio files only.
Path Displays the directory path to the item.
Unique ID Displays the unique ID for a Pro Tools file.
Tape (DigiTranslator 2.0 Only) This column displays the original Avid tape name if the item is an OMF file (audio or video). If an audio file was originally recorded in Pro Tools, this field displays the name of the original session. Video files originally recorded in Pro Tools with AVoption|XL do not display a tape name.
TC Rate When DigiTranslator 2.0 is installed, this column displays the frame rate of the item if the item is an AAF sequence or an OMF sequence or file: 24, 25, 29.97, 30, drop or nondrop. For sequences, the frame rate at the start of the sequence is displayed.
Video Compression Displays the compression ratio of video files where applicable.
Frame Rate Displays the frame rate of video files where applicable.
Channel Names Displays the channel name and number data embedded in multichannel audio files. This field cannot be edited.
Scene Displays scene number data embedded in audio files.
Take Displays take number data embedded in audio files.
Shoot Date Displays origination date and time information embedded in audio files. This field cannot be edited.
Sound Roll Displays sound roll number data
(This data is usually named “Tape” in BWF files, but is distinct from the date displayed in the DigiBase Tape column). This field cannot be edited.
Sound Roll TC Displays the starting time code of audio files. This field cannot be edited.
178 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Sound Roll TC Rate Displays the frame rate information embedded in audio files: 24, 25,
29.97, 30, drop or non-drop. This field cannot be edited.
User Bits Displays text information embedded in audio files. This field can be used for user comments, or auto-generated info with certain field recorders.
Tape ID Displays tape ID information embedded in audio files. This field cannot be edited.
Project Displays the project name data embedded in audio files.
Circled Indicates if the status of a take is set to
“circled” ( No or Yes ) in audio files. This is usually for indicating which take should be used.
Plug-in Name Displays the name of the plug-in for Plug-in Settings files (.txf).
Plug-in Manufacturer Name Displays the plug-in manufacturer’s name for Plug-in Settings files
(.txf).
Link Path Displays the path to the file used for relinking. Available in the Relink window only.
Clip Name Displays the name of the file, or the
Avid clip name when the item is an AAF or OMF file. The Clip Name is what appears in the Timeline and Region List when a file is imported into a session. This field can be edited in Catalogs only, and can be generated using either of the
Copy Comments to Clip Name commands in the Browser menu (see “Additional DigiBase Pro
Commands” on page 175).
Comments Fields
Comments about individual files can be stored in the database, and embedded with the file’s metadata wrapper.
There are two types of comments fields: File
Comments and Database Comments.
File Comments
File Comments are stored with the metadata of the file itself. Not all file types support File Comments. Indexing stores File Comments in the database, allowing them to be searched and viewed even if the file is offline. File Comments can be edited in browsers, as long as the files or their parent media are not defined as read-only.
You can also add and edit File Comments to
Pro Tools Session files from the Project browser.
File Comments cannot be edited in Catalogs.
Database Comments
(Catalogs and Project Browsers Only)
Database Comments in a Catalog are stored in the Catalog database. Database comments in the Project browser are stored in the Session. Database Comments, which can be up to 256 characters in length, are searchable, cross-platform,
and editable. For more information, see “Comments and Catalogs” on page 201.
Adding and Editing Comments
To add, view, or edit a Comment:
1 Click the Comments field. The field expands to display the entire contents of the field if necessary.
2 Enter or edit a comment.
3 Press Enter, or click outside the text box to close it.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 179
Waveforms and Auditioning
The Waveform column shows the waveforms calculated for items that are audio files. Waveform display depends on the following:
• Waveforms are displayed if they have already been calculated and stored, either with the file metadata or in the global Waveform cache.
• When a file is imported into a session, a waveform is automatically calculated for it, if necessary.
Waveform displays in a browser
• Waveforms are grey if they have not been stored with the file metadata or in the global
Waveform cache.
Item waveforms prior to calculation
The waveform overview is stored in the file, or in the appropriate Digidesign Databases folder.
For more information, see “WaveCache” on page 181.
MIDI files can be auditioned from the session Region List, but not from DigiBase browsers.
Summed Waveforms for Multichannel Files
Waveform displays for stereo and multichannel files are summed.
Calculating Waveforms for Display
If an audio file item does not have a waveform, the waveform must be calculated to be visible in a browser Waveform display.
To calculate waveforms in a browser:
1 Select online audio files, or folders containing audio files, in a browser.
2 Choose Calculate Waveform from the Browser menu.
Auditioning Audio Files
Audio items can be auditioned from within DigiBase browsers to preview items before importing, copying, or deleting them.
Auditioning follows the master Audition path as selected in the Output pane of the Pro Tools
I/O Setup dialog. Level is determined by the
Master Fader (or Auxiliary Input) level in effect on the Audition path.
When auditioned from DigiBase, interleaved audio files with more than two channels are summed to mono for auditioning. Multi-mono files must be auditioned one file at a time.
Some Pro Tools operations can cause temporary interruptions in DigiBase auditioning.
180 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To start or stop auditioning an audio file in a browser:
1 Select an audio file in a browser Items List.
Make sure the browser is the foreground (active) window.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click the Waveform Preview button (the speaker icon to the left of the waveform display). Click again to stop auditioning.
• If Spacebar Toggles File Preview is selected in the Browser menu, press the Spacebar.
Press the Spacebar again to stop auditioning.
• Press Control+P (Windows) or Command+P (Mac) to start and stop auditioning.
• Press the Esc key to stop auditioning.
If the Auto-Preview option is enabled, auditioning starts as soon as the file is selected in a browser.
To loop audition:
1 In the Browser menu, select Loop Preview
Mode. The Browser Preview button updates to show the Loop Preview icon.
To stop loop audition, do one of the following:
â–
Click the Browser Preview button again.
â–
If Spacebar Toggles File Preview is selected in the Browser menu, press the Spacebar again.
To audition from a specific location within the file:
â– Click in the waveform display at the desired location. Press the Spacebar to stop playback.
Auditioning an audio file
To automatically audition files when selected:
â– From the Browser menu, select Auto-Preview.
The Preview button updates to show that Auto-
Preview is enabled.
DigiBase Preview button, Loop Preview mode
2 Select an audio file in a browser Items List.
Make sure the browser is the foreground (active) window.
3 Do one of the following:
• Click the Browser Preview button.
• Click the Waveform Preview button.
• If Spacebar Toggles File Preview is selected in the Browser menu, press the Spacebar.
DigiBase Preview button, Auto-Preview enabled
WaveCache
A global WaveCache file stores waveforms that cannot be written back to the sound file, such as read-only files, files on network and other readonly volumes, and interleaved files. The global
WaveCache is stored in the Digidesign Databases folder on your Pro Tools startup volume.
For write-enabled volumes, the cache is stored with the volume’s Digidesign Database files, on that volume.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 181
Selecting Items
To select a single item in a browser:
â– Click the icon for an item. When selected, the item Name is highlighted.
To select multiple items:
â–
Marquee-select a group of items, or Shift-click additional items. Control-click (Windows) or
Command-click (Mac) to select multiple noncontinuous items.
To select all items listed:
â– Press Control-A (Windows) or Command-A
(Mac).
To select all Transfer files in the current window:
â–
Choose Select Transfer Files from the Browser menu.
To select all offline files:
â– Choose Select Offline Files from the Browser menu.
To select all online files:
â–
Choose Select Online Files from the Browser menu.
To reverse the current selection:
â– Choose Invert Selected from the Browser menu.
Moving, Copying, Duplicating, and Deleting Items
Moving, copying, duplicating, and deleting items in browsers follow the same rules and behavior as in the operating system. For example, moving a file to another volume copies the file, and Pro Tools warns you if an items is about to be overwritten or replaced. Dragging an item from a Catalog to a Volume browser always makes a new copy of the item.
Moving Items
To move items:
â–
Select one or more items and drag them to a new location. Moving to a new location on the same volume moves the item, while moving to a different volume copies the item.
You can drag items directly into the Timeline or Region List of the current session. See
“Importing Items with Drag and Drop” on page 225.
Copying Items
To copy and move items:
â– Select one or more items and Option-drag them to a new location.
Duplicating Items
To duplicate one or more items:
1 Select one or more items.
2 Choose Duplicate Selected from the Browser menu.
To Duplicate selected items in the Browser, press Control-D (Windows) or
Command-D (Mac).
182 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Deleting Items and Folders
You can select and delete files and folders in all browsers. If a selected item resides on a readonly volume, it cannot be deleted.
If using DigiBase Pro, see “Deleting Catalog
Items” on page 183 for additional information.
To delete one or more items:
1 Select one or more items.
2 Press Delete, or choose Delete Selected from the Browser menu.
3 Pro Tools asks you to verify that you want to permanently delete selected files from disk.
Click Delete to proceed, or click Cancel to leave your files and disks unchanged.
To skip the warning dialog, hold down the
Option key while pressing Delete (or while choosing Delete Selected).
To delete locked files:
1 Select one or more items.
2 Press Control+Delete (Windows) or Command+Delete (Mac).
Deleting Catalog Items
(DigiBase Pro Only)
When you delete a folder or item from a Digi-
Base Pro Catalog, Pro Tools lets you choose whether to delete only the alias from the Catalog, or also delete the original files from the disk.
To delete an item from a Catalog.
1 Open a Catalog and select one or more items.
2 Press Delete, or choose Delete Selected from the Browser menu.
3 When prompted, do one of the following:
• To remove the aliases for the selected items from the Catalog, click Aliases.
– or –
• To delete the selected items from disk (and remove their aliases from the Catalog), click Files.
Deleting Folders in Catalogs
Deleting a folder from a Catalog does not delete the folder on disk (even if you choose to delete all files from disk). Because Catalogs are “snapshots” of items, their aliases only include files that resided in the corresponding folder at the time the Catalog was created. To avoid potential data loss, folders are never deleted from disk, even though you might choose to delete Files instead of Aliases.
Searching Items
DigiBase provides powerful search capabilities so you can quickly search and find files.
The Workspace browser lets you search across multiple volumes and catalogs (if available). All other browsers let you search the currently displayed contents of that individual browser.
Performing a search filters the Items List or
Search Results pane to display only found items that match the search criteria.
DigiBase Pro lets you search on multiple criteria in a single search pass, and search Catalogs.
The Relink window provides specialized search capabilities for finding and relinking missing
files. For more information, see “Linking and
Chapter 11: DigiBase 183
Search Features for All Systems
All systems provide the following search capability:
• Search by item Name, Kind, and Date Modified.
• Results of a search are displayed in the Items
List, where they can immediately be selected for auditioning, copying, and other operations. In the Workspace browser, a separate
“Search Results” pane displays found items.
• Utilize search syntax modifiers, such as OR, wildcard characters, and greater than/less than. See “Search Modifiers” on page 185.
• Search in Quick or Advanced Search mode.
Quick mode assumes (fills in) wildcard characters for faster data entry while searching. Advanced Search mode lets you specify wildcard characters for more precise searching. See
“Search Modes” on page 186 for more infor-
mation.
Additional Search Features for DigiBase Pro
Only
With DigiBase Pro you can also:
• Search by any data column, such as Comments fields, sample rate, format, and tempo
• Save the results of a search as a new Catalog.
Starting a Search
To search the current browser:
1 Click the Search icon to display the Search pane.
Search Icon
Search
Pane
Search icon and Search pane
You can also start a search by pressing Control+F (Windows) or Command+F (Mac).
2 Do one of the following:
• On all systems, enter text into the File
Name field to search by name, or enter a date, or select a kind from the Kind pop-up
menu. See “Entering Data for Searches” on page 185 for more information.
– or –
• If using DigiBase Pro (Pro Tools HD and
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2), choose additional search criteria as needed. Press Tab to move to the next available search field, or Shift+Tab to move to the previous.
3 Click the Search button, or press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac).
Searching begins, indicated by the spinning arrows in the toolbar, and by the Search button changing to Stop. The Results List (at the bottom of the browser) fills with items that match the search criteria. Items can be selected and auditioned as they are found.
184 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To stop a search:
â–
During a search, click the Stop button.
This stops the search routine, and the Stop button changes back to Search. Whatever results have already been found continue to be displayed, and all entries in search fields are retained.
To reset your search settings:
â– Click Reset to clear all criteria in search fields, and return to the main Browser view (all items).
The Search pane remains open.
To close the search pane and return to the complete Browser view:
â– Click the browser Search icon to toggle the
Search pane closed or open.
The search is stopped, the Search (and Search
Results pane) close, and the window returns to show the main Browser view.
Entering Data for Searches
Field Formats and Searching
The following describe the types of data formats available (not all search fields are available on all systems).
Text Fields Allow direct entry of text. By default, the field is empty.
Pull-Down Menus Provide options for certain fields. For example, the Bit Depth pull-down provides choices for Any, 16-bit, or 24-bit.
Date and Time Accepts date and time entries in a variety of formats.
Time Code Uses standard Pro Tools time code entry shortcuts in hh:min:sec:frames.
Search Modifiers
Certain fields have small pull-down menus containing modifiers , which limit the search criteria entered in the field.
Modifiers include:
• Equal to (=)
• Not Equal to ( != )
• Less Than (<)
• Greater Than (>)
• Less Than or Equal to (<=)
• Greater Than or Equal To (>=)
• Range (<…>)
About Range-Limited When enabled, a second search field is added so that a range of two values can be entered (such as two dates). Pro Tools finds all items that fall between or are equal to those two values.
Wildcard Characters (* and ?)
An asterisk (*) can be entered at the beginning or end of a text entry when you want to perform wildcard searches. For example, if you want to find all files with a name that ends with scratch , you could enter *scratch in the Search field. This finds files with names such as vocal.scratch
, and dialog2.scratch
.
A question mark (?) can be used for single-character wildcards. For example, a search on f?ee
finds free , and flee . A similar search on f*ee finds frendlee , flippee , flee , free , and so on.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 185
OR Searches
The Plus (+) and Minus (–) buttons add and delete OR rows to find results that match the criteria either in the top row or the additional rows.
To add and use OR rows in a search:
1 Click the Plus (+) button to add an OR row identical to the upper row, but with no entries in the search fields.
2 To add an additional OR row, click the Plus (+) button again. (An empty OR row has no effect on the search.)
3 Enter search criteria.
For example, to find all files named either Dog or Bark:
• Type Dog in the first File Name field.
• Add an OR row.
• Type Bark in the second File Name field.
4 Click Search.
To remove OR rows:
â– Click the Minus (–) button to delete the bottom OR row.
AND Searches
If you enter two or more words in a text field,
Pro Tools finds files that contain all of those words. For example, if you type Dog Bark , only files that contain both the words Dog and Bark are found.
Quotations Marks for Text Strings
Text enclosed in quotation marks is searched as one text string. For example, if you type “Dog
Bark” (with quotes), only items with Dog Bark anywhere in the File Name are considered a match.
Search Modes
DigiBase provides two different text searching environments:
Quick Search Mode Applies wildcards before and after each text string. For example, a Quick search for Dog finds Dogs , dog_bark , and howling_dogs .
Advanced Search Mode Does not automatically apply any wildcards. Therefore, an Advanced search on Dog finds Big Dog , but not Dogs (unless you manually add a wildcard, as described in
“Wildcard Characters (* and ?)” on page 185).
In addition, Advanced Search recognizes word breaks such as underscores and capitalization.
For example, an Advanced search on Dog also finds Big_Dog (Big-underscore-Dog) and BigDog , though it would not find BigDogs .
To enable Advanced Search mode:
â– Click to enable the Advanced Search mode option.
Advanced Search
Search pane
To return to Quick Search mode:
â– Click to deselect the Advanced Search mode.
Toggling search mode affects all DigiBase browsers.
186 Pro Tools Reference Guide
About the Searching Process
Searches are conducted in two passes, each indicated by Search Status displayed in the Search pane (and the Task window).
Searching Databases The existing databases are searched first. While this is the fastest search pass, this search pass can only be as accurate as the database (in other words, if the database is not completely up to date you might not find the files you want).
File System Search Pass This is the second pass of a search. This search is not as fast as the Database pass, but it is more thorough because it is not relying on the database, which may or may not be current.
Each pass is completed before the next pass begins.
Saving Search Results as a
Catalog
(DigiBase Pro Only)
To save the results of your search as a Catalog:
1 Choose Edit > Select All, or press Control+A
(Windows) or Command+A (Mac), to select all items in the Items List.
2 From the Browser menu, choose Create Catalog.
For more information, see “DigiBase Pro
Linking and Relinking Files
A Pro Tools session is made up of references, or links , to audio files and other session media. Audio and video files must be stored on suitable
Performance volumes and be properly linked in order to be playable in the session.
The following types of files are not playable:
Transfer Files Files that are stored on volumes not suitable for playback, such as network volumes or CD-ROMs.
Missing Files Files that cannot be found where the session expects them, either because they have been moved, or because they are stored on volumes that are not currently mounted (offline volumes).
The process of reacquiring Transfer and missing files is referred to as relinking . Relinking can involve certain sub-tasks, depending on the situation.
• Transfer files must first be copied to a suitable
Performance volume. The session is then relinked to the copies on the Performance volumes instead of the original Transfer files.
• Volumes may be searched for missing files and, when the files are found, Pro Tools relinks the session to the file's new location.
• Files that reside on offline volumes must first have their volumes mounted (brought online) before they can be relinked.
DigiBase Pro Catalogs have unique linking
characteristics. See “Relinking and Aliases in Catalogs” on page 195.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 187
Choosing When to Relink
Pro Tools lets you relink files while opening a session or after a session is already open, as follows:
â—† Relinking when opening a session ensures that the session opens with all media playable.
Automatic and manual relinking can be performed. See “Opening a Session with Missing
Files” on page 189.
â—† Relinking later (after a session is already open) is the fastest way to open the session, but all missing items remain offline and unplayable.
When items are needed, go to the Project browser to relink offline items. See “Missing
Files in an Open Session” on page 190.
Forcing a Relink
If you cannot relink to the original file, you can
force a relink to another file. See “Force Relinking Files” on page 194.
Transfer Files
Unlike missing files, Transfer files are files that have been found but which reside on volumes unsuitable for playback, such as CD-ROMs or network drives. These volumes appear as Transfer volumes in the Workspace browser.
Opening a Session with Transfer Files
If a session finds files on a volume unsuitable for playback, a dialog appears prompting you to copy them to a suitable volume. Do one of the following:
â—† Click Yes to open the Copy and Relink dialog.
– or –
â—† Click No to open the session with all Transfer files offline. When opened, the session’s Project browser indicates Transfer files with a “T” in their Status column.
Transfer Files in an Open Session
To make Transfer files playable in the current session:
1 Choose Window > Project.
2 Double click the Audio Files folder to display all of the audio files.
3 Choose Select Transfer Files from the Browser menu.
4 Choose Copy and Relink from the Browser menu.
5 Specify a location for the copied files on a valid Performance volume and click OK.
6 Repeat for video and fade files, as necessary.
Copy and Relink
The Copy and Relink command is a file management option in the Project browser and in
DigiBase Pro Catalogs.
Copy and Relink provides a convenient way to copy files and relink the session or Catalog to the copies rather than to the originals.
188 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To copy items to a new location and Relink to the copies:
1 Do one of the following:
• Choose Window > Project.
– or –
• Open the appropriate Catalog.
2 Select the items you want to copy and relink.
You can select any media files (online, offline, and Transfer files).
3 Choose Copy and Relink Selected from the
Browser menu.
4 If the default location for the copies (the session’s Audio Files folder) is not appropriate, specify a different location and click Choose.
5 The files are copied to the chosen destination and the session or Catalog is relinked in the background.
Missing Files
Files are missing if they are not found in the same location as when the session was last saved. This could be because you moved the files or the session folder, or because the files are on a volume that is not currently mounted.
Opening a Session with Missing Files
To open a session with missing files:
1 When you open a session, Pro Tools opens the session with all available media, then shows you how many files are missing (if any) and asks how you want to proceed. (If told that files are
unsuitable for playback, see “Transfer Files” on page 188.)
Missing files warning when opening a session
2 Select one of the following:
• Skip All. You can also select Skip All by pressing Control+A (Windows) or Command+A (Mac).
• Manually Find Relink. You can also select
Manually Find Relink by pressing Control+M (Windows) or Command+M (Mac).
• Automatically Find Relink. You can also select Automatically Find Relink by pressing
Control+A (Windows) or Command+A
(Mac).
3 Select Regenerate Missing Fades to exclude fade files from the relink process and regenerate them instead.
You can also select Regenerate Missing
Fades by pressing Control+R (Windows) or
Command+R (Mac).
4 Click OK
Chapter 11: DigiBase 189
Skip All
Use the Skip All option to skip all missing files and fades. This option is the fastest way to open the session utilizing all available media. Missing files are offline in the session, and shown in the
Region List and the Project browser with italic text. Missing fades are regenerated if the contributing files are online.
Manually Find and Relink
This option opens the Relink window. Use the
Relink window to search, compare, verify, and relink missing files. Files can be relinked one at a
time or in batches. See “Relink Window” on page 191 for more information.
Automatically Find and Relink
Automatically Find and Relink is the simplest method to relink sessions to required media, but it provides no way to compare files or verify links. This option cannot be undone. The Automatically Find and Relink option does the following:
• Searches all Performance volumes for all missing items with matching Name, ID, Format, and Length
• Links missing items to the first matches found
• Commits links for all items possible, in the background
Links, once committed, cannot be undone once the session is saved. The only way to revert to previous links is to close the session without saving changes.
• If some files remain unlinked, the Task window opens and a failed task appears in the
Paused Tasks pane. Double-click the Task icon to open the Relink window and manually find and relink files.
Even if all of the missing files are later found and relinked, the failed task remains in the Task Window. Like all failed tasks, it must be manually selected and deleted. See
“About Failed Tasks” on page 207.
Regenerate Missing Fades
Enable this option to exclude fades from the relinking process (fades are recalculated instead). This option is available when Automatically Find and Relink or Manually Find and
Relink is enabled.
Missing Files in an Open Session
You can open the Project browser to select and relink some or all missing files.
To relink missing (offline) files in an open session:
1 Choose Window > Project.
2 Choose Relink Offline from the Browser menu to open the Relink window.
3 Configure the Relink window as needed. See
“Relink Window” on page 191 for more infor-
mation.
To relink selected files in an open session:
1 Choose Window > Project.
2 Select the files to relink. Any file can be relinked, even if it is not an offline file.
3 Choose Relink Selected from the Browser menu.
4 Configure the Relink window as needed. See
“Relink Window” on page 191 for more infor-
mation.
190 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Relink Window
The Relink window provides tools for all relinking tasks (see Figure 8 on page 191).
The Relink window includes the following:
Menu and Toolbar Includes the Relink menu,
View Presets, and relinking buttons. Status is displayed at the far right.
Areas to Search Selects volumes on which to search for missing items.
Files to Relink Lists missing files.
Candidates Lists files that match the “relinking criteria” for a particular missing file. The Link icon next to the candidate can be toggled on or off to link (or unlink) the proposed candidate to the selected missing file.
The Relink window controls each phase of the relinking process.
The following sections explain how to:
• Open the Relink window.
• Select volumes and folders to search (and not search).
• Search, compare, and link individual files to one or more candidates.
• Quickly match and link missing files in batches, with the ability to adjust the criteria by which files are matched.
• Toggle links on or off for any candidate
• Compare and review links before committing.
Menu and toolbar
Areas to Search
Files to Relink
Candidates
Figure 8. Main elements in the Relink window
Chapter 11: DigiBase 191
Opening the Relink Window
When opening a session with missing files, use the Manually Find and Relink option to open the Relink window.
The Relink window can also be accessed after a session is open.
To access the Relink window from an open session:
1 Choose Window > Project.
2 Choose Relink Offline from the Browser menu.
Selecting Areas to Search
Selecting volumes and folders in the Areas to
Search pane lets you focus the search for missing files. This can speed the relinking process by limiting the number of volumes or folders to search. In addition, excluding folders from a search for missing files also lets you redirect a session or Catalog to a more appropriate copy of an item.
Single and Multi-File Relinking
The Relink window can be used to relink one missing file at a time, or to relink missing files in batches.
Relinking Individual Missing Files
In some situations, individual files must be relinked one at a time in order to relink the session to the correct file. This is necessary if multiple copies of a media file are online, or whenever you want the most control and flexibility over the relinking process.
To relink a missing file:
1 Configure the Areas to Search pane.
2 Select one item in the Files to Relink list.
3 Click Find All Candidates.
Find All Candidates
Volumes selected to include in the search
To select volumes or folders to include or exclude in a search:
1 Configure the Areas to Search pane to display the appropriate volume, Catalog, or folder.
2 Click each item’s Search column to toggle it to be included or excluded in the search. A check next to an item indicates it will be included in the search. All folders within items are also checked.
Relinking a selected missing file
Pro Tools searches the selected volumes and displays all files that match File Name and/or
Unique ID in the Candidates list. Link icons indicate if a Candidate is already linked.
OMF video clips can only be relinked to a session if they have matching Unique IDs.
192 Pro Tools Reference Guide
QuickTime video clips can only be relinked to a session by file name and file format
(QuickTime).
To control matching and linking criteria when relinking an individual missing file, use the Find Links button. Find Links is explained in “Relinking Multiple Missing
Files” on page 193.
4 Click the Link icon next to the appropriate
Candidate to which you want to relink. A Link icon next to an item indicates it will be relinked to the item currently selected in the Files to
Relink list.
4 Configure criteria for relinking, if necessary, in the Linking Options dialog:
• By default, Find by Name and ID is enabled.
• To add additional matching criteria, select an option from the Linking Options dialog.
(Modification Date is only applicable to
Catalogs.)
• If Match Duration is enabled, Pro Tools only selects files of the same length or greater .
Link icon
Indication of Linked status
5 Click the Link icon next to other Candidates, if you want to relink to additional missing files.
6 Click the Commit Links button.
Relinking Multiple Missing Files
Using the Find Links button, multiple files can be matched and linked in one procedure.
To relink multiple missing files:
1
Configure Areas to Search. (See “Selecting Areas to Search” on page 192.)
2 Select one or more items in the Files to Relink list. The Find Links button becomes available.
3 Click Find Links.
Linking options
5 Click OK to continue (or click Cancel to return to the Relink window).
Pro Tools begins to search for an acceptable candidate for the first missing file (the first item selected in the Files to Relink list). A link icon appears next to each file as Pro Tools finds and links the first acceptable candidate to the missing file. The Link Path column shows the location of the selected candidate. Pro Tools continues searching, matching, and linking for each missing file in the Files to Relink list.
6 To view the selected candidate for a particular missing file, select to highlight the missing file.
That file’s candidate appears in the Candidates pane, where you can view its file information and waveform.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 193
7 If, after the Find Links process is finished, you are not satisfied with the candidate selected for a particular missing file, you can click Find All
Candidates for the selected file (see “Relinking
Individual Missing Files” on page 192).
Force Relinking Files
If you want to link to a substitute file (for example, if you know a file has the same audio or video but does not have a matching File Name or Unique ID), you can force a relink.
â—† To force relink an audio file, its file format
(WAV, SD2, AIFF, or MXF), sample rate and bit depth must match those of the original file.
â—† To force relink a video file, its format (Quick-
Time, Avid, MXF, or OMF) and frame rate must match those of the original file.
To force a relink:
1 Choose Window > Project.
2 Choose Relink Offline from the Browser menu.
3 In the Relink window, select one item in the
Files to Relink list.
4 Navigate in the Areas to Search pane to locate the file you want to relink.
5 Drag the file to the Candidates pane in the
Relink window.
6 Click the Link icon next to the file you dragged to the Candidates pane.
7 Click the Commit Links button.
Committing Links
There is no Undo for relinking. Once a file has been relinked and the session saved, the session always remembers the new link (the original link is forgotten). For this reason, no files are actually relinked until you click Commit Links.
The Automatically Find and Relink option is the only relinking process that does not ask you to verify links before they are committed. If you use this option and are unsatisfied with the results, close the session without saving to prevent the new links from being committed.
To commit links:
1 Use the Relink window to link files as ex-
plained in “Single and Multi-File Relinking” on page 192.
2 Click Commit. You are asked to verify committing links.
Commit Links dialog
3 Do one of the following:
• Click Yes to commit links.
– or –
• Click No to stop without affecting files.
194 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Relinking and Aliases in Catalogs
DigiBase Pro Catalogs are collections of “aliases” or “shortcuts” to actual files. If the files are moved, an item in a Catalog can become unlinked from the file it references.
To relink a Catalog:
1 Open the Catalog.
2 Select items to relink.
3 Choose Relink Selected from the Browser menu in that Catalog window.
Workspace Browser
The Workspace browser is your starting point for managing media (see Figure 9 on page 195).
The Workspace browser is always available while Pro Tools is running, even if no session is open.
Only the Workspace browser lets you do the following:
• Designate volumes as Performance volumes (Playback or Record volumes) or as
Transfer volumes.
• View and access all available volumes
• Unmount volumes
• Create, view, and access Catalogs.
• Search multiple volumes and Catalogs simultaneously.
The Workspace browser is similar to your computer’s desktop, in that it shows all of the mounted local and network volumes. The
Workspace browser has all the common browser elements, including an Items list, View presets, and access to all files. In addition, the Workspace browser provides drive allocation settings, access to catalogs, and the ability to search multiple volumes and catalogs simultaneously.
Volume designators
Browser name
Menu and toolbar
Search pane
Items List
Search Results
Fixed pane
Figure 9. Workspace browser, with the Search pane displayed
Scrolling pane
Show/Hide
Pane split
Chapter 11: DigiBase 195
Opening the Workspace Browser
To open the Workspace browser:
1 Launch Pro Tools.
2 Choose Window > Workspace.
Press Alt+; (Windows) or Option+; (Mac) to open the Workspace browser.
Audio and Video Volume
Designators
The Workspace includes columns for Audio and
Video Volume designators. These two columns display, and let you designate, whether a volume is a Record, Playback, or Transfer volume.
R (Record and Playback) Able to play audio and video files already on the volume, and record new files.
P (Playback Only) Can play audio and video files already on the volume, but cannot have new files recorded to it.
T (Transfer) Can only be used for storing, transferring, or auditioning files, and cannot be used for recording or playback.
To change a volume designator:
1 Open the Workspace browser.
2 Click and select the appropriate Audio and/or
Video designator for the volume.
Mounting and Unmounting
Volumes
The Workspace browser lets you unmount volumes while Pro Tools is running, and shows newly mounted volumes as they come online.
To unmount a volume from within the Workspace browser:
1 Select a volume in the Workspace browser.
2 Choose Unmount Volumes from the Browser menu.
The Workspace browser closes the database file for the selected online volume and removes it from the Workspace browser, and unmounts the disk from the computer. If the item represents a removable volume (such as CD-ROM), it is ejected.
Pro Tools alerts you if the volume being unmounted has files referenced in the Timeline.
Always use the Unmount command in the
Workspace browser menu to unmount volumes, or quit Pro Tools and then unmount the volume. Do not use any other method to unmount a volume while Pro Tools is running.
Designating a volume in the Workspace
196 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Catalogs in the Workspace
Browser
(DigiBase Pro Only)
With DigiBase Pro, the Workspace browser provides special tools for creating and accessing
Catalogs. Once Catalogs have been created, they appear in the Workspace browser in the Catalogs folder.
To show all Catalogs:
1 Open the Workspace browser.
2 Click the Expand/Collapse icon next to the
Catalogs folder.
Search pane
Areas to search
Search results
Viewing Catalogs in the Workspace.
To open an individual Catalog:
â– Double-clicking a catalog opens a Browser window for that catalog.
For complete instructions on creating and
working with Catalogs, see “DigiBase Pro
Searching in the Workspace
Browser
The Workspace browser provides the most comprehensive DigiBase search capabilities. The
Workspace browser lets you perform searches across a single volumes, multiple volumes, or across any combination of volumes, folders, and
Catalogs. You select which volumes to include in the search, and which to exclude. The Workspace also provides a separate Search Results pane to view, select and manage the results of searches.
Search and Search Results panes in the Workspace
The Search Results pane lets you maintain the results of searches, while still viewing and configuring options for additional searches.
To search from the Workspace:
1 Choose Window > Workspace to open the
Workspace browser.
2 Click the Search icon to display the Workspace Search pane.
3 Configure search criteria.
4 Click next to each item in the Areas to Search list to include or exclude volumes to be searched. Checked items and their sub-folders are included in the search. (The next time you open a Search pane in the Workspace, these settings remain in effect.)
5 Click Search.
6 The results of the search are shown in the
Search Results pane.
For more information on searching, see
“Searching Items” on page 183.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 197
Project Browser
The Project browser displays and manages all the files related to the current session, regardless
of what volume they reside on (see Figure 10 on page 198).
The Project browser is similar to the Region List in that it contains all files associated with a session, with the added data, searching, and sorting capabilities of Pro Tools browsers.
Unlike the Region List, however, individual regions are not displayed in the Project browser
(in which only complete files are listed).
Use the Project browser and its Browser menu commands to:
• View all media files associated with a session
• Identify, select, and relink offline files
• Identify, select, copy, and relink Transfer files
Opening the Project Browser
To open the Project browser:
1 Launch Pro Tools and open a session.
2 Choose Window > Project.
Press Alt+O (Windows) or Option+O (Mac) to open the Workspace browser.
The Project browser displays the following:
Audio Files Folder Contains all of the audio files currently referenced by the session, regardless of where they are located.
Fade Files Folder Contains all of the fade files referenced by the session, regardless of where they are located.
Render Sources Folder Contains all files that have been imported into the session, but are still being converted, copied, or processed.
Video Files Folder Contains any video files referenced by the session.
Each of the folder types in the Project browser has an Expand/Collapse icon. Clicking the icon shows or hides all of the files in the sub-group.
The folders displayed in the Project browser are session-specific groupings of files, not physical folders on disk.
Browser menu and toolbar
Folders and files
Figure 10. Project browser
198 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Locating Parent FIles of Regions
The Project Browser can be set to automatically highlight the parent file of any region selected in the Pro Tools Region List.
To highlight the parent file of a selected region:
1 Select a region in the Region List. If the Region
List Selection Follows Track Selection preference is enabled, you can select a region on a track.
2 From the Region List pop-up menu, select Select Parent in Project Browser.
When the Select Parent in Project Browser option is enabled, the Project browser automatically highlights the parent file of any file or region selected in the Region List.
About the Project Browser
No Drag and Drop to the Project
Browser
To import a file from another browser into the current session, you must drag files to the Timeline or Region List. You cannot import a file into a session by dragging it to the Project browser.
(You can, however, spot files from the Project browser into the current session using drag/drop.)
Deleting Items in the Project Browser
Deleting items in the Workspace browser or in
Volume browsers deletes the files from disk.
Video and session files cannot be deleted in the
Project Browser.
Deleting an item from the Project browser lets you remove items from the current session, or delete them from disk (using the Pro Tools Clear
Regions dialog).
Copy and Relink Restrictions
In the Project Browser, the Copy and Relink command (in the Browser menu) cannot be used on session files, or on offline audio files.
Use the Relink window to first bring items online. In addition, the Relink Selected command cannot be used on session files.
Updating the Project Browser
The Project browser is automatically updated whenever a file is added to or deleted from the session, so it is always fully indexed and up to date.
For instructions on searching, sorting, and working with the Project Browser, see
“Project Browser” on page 198.
DigiBase Pro Catalogs
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
Catalogs are available with DigiBase Pro, which is included with Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 (see Figure 11).
While Volume browsers are designed to be an accurate representation of the file structure on a given volume, Catalogs are similar to having a
Favorites folder, and serve as a way to collect and organize frequently used items regardless of where they are stored.
A Catalog is analogous to a folder full of aliases or shortcuts. Placing a file in a Catalog does not create a copy of the file, and does not change where the file is stored. Rather, it stores a reference (or alias) to the file so that it can be found and manipulated without having to search for its physical location.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 199
Catalog name
Menu and toolbar
Items List
Figure 11. Catalog browser
Opening a Catalog Browser
Catalogs are displayed in the Workspace browser.
Catalogs
Fixed pane
Catalogs item in the Workspace
To open a Catalog browser:
1 Open the Workspace browser.
2 Click the Catalogs Expand/Collapse icon.
Show/Hide
Pane split
Scrolling pane
3 Do one of the following:
• Click the Expand/Collapse icon for the desired Catalog to view its contents in the
Workspace.
– or –
• Double-click the Catalog name to open it in its own browser window.
Clip Names in Catalogs
Clip Names are the names that appear in the timeline and Region List when a file is imported into a session.
For most files, the Clip name is the same as the file name. For OMF Files, the Clip Name is the name that appears in the Avid bin.
200 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Clip names can only be edited in a Catalog. Editing the Clip name does not affect the actual file; however, if you add the same file to a new
Catalog, it retains its original Clip Name. When you drag a file from a Catalog into a session, the edited Clip Name is what appears in the timeline and Region List.
If the Clip Name is longer than 32 characters,
Pro Tools truncates the name automatically when imported into the session.
Comments and Catalogs
Catalogs provide commands for managing OS 9
Finder comments, Database comments, and
Clip Names.
Database Comments in a Catalog are stored in the Catalog database. Database Comments, which can be up to 256 characters in length, are searchable, cross-platform, and editable.
Copy OS 9 Finder Comment to Database Comments Copies an item’s OS 9 Finder comments to its Database comments.
OS 9 Finder comments (from the OS 9 Get
Info window) are not supported in OS X Get
Info windows. Use the Copy OS 9 Finder
Comment to Database Comments command to utilize any OS 9 Finder comments stored with your media.
Copy Database Comments to Clip Names Copies an item’s Database comments to Clip Name.
Copy File Comments to Clip Names Copies an item’s File Comments to Clip Name.
Creating Catalogs
Catalogs can be added to the Workspace as new, empty Catalogs, or you can select items first and then save a Catalog of all selected items.
To create a new, empty Catalog:
1 Open the Workspace browser.
2 Choose New Catalog from the browser menu.
3 Enter a unique name and click OK.
To catalog a selection of items:
1 Open any browser (including an existing Catalog).
2 Select the items you want to include in the new Catalog.
3 Choose Create Catalog from Selection from the Browser menu.
A new, fully indexed Catalog database of the selected items is created.
Creating Catalogs of Folders
To create a Catalog of an entire folder and all its contents:
1 Open the Workspace browser, if not already open.
2 Drag and drop a single folder onto the Catalog icon in the Workspace browser.
Pro Tools first indexes the folder, then a fully indexed Catalog is created, with the same name as the dropped folder.
Renaming a Catalog
Catalogs can be renamed at any time.
To rename a Catalog:
1 Click the Catalog item in the Workspace browser until its name highlights.
2 Enter a new name for the Catalog.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 201
Modifying Catalogs
To add items to a Catalog, do one of the following:
â– Open the Catalog and drop new items from another browser.
– or –
â– Click the main Catalogs icon in the Workspace, to expand your view of all existing Catalogs, then drop items onto any Catalog.
To add a folder to a Catalog:
1 Open the Catalog.
2 Choose Create Folder from the Browser menu.
To delete items from a Catalog:
1 Select the items.
2 Press the Delete key, or choose Delete Selected from the Browser menu. A warning dialog appears.
3 In the warning dialog, do one of the following:
• Click Cancel to cancel the delete operation.
• Click Delete Files to delete aliases and associated files from disk.
• Click Delete Aliases to delete only the aliases and not the associated files.
This operation cannot be undone.
Consolidating Files with Catalogs
Catalogs are excellent tools for consolidating files from a variety of sources.
For example, create a Catalog named “Thumps” and fill it with sound effects from three different volumes. You can then drag the Catalog from the Workspace browser to another volume, and a folder named “Thumps” is created on that volume. All of the files referenced by the Catalog are automatically copied to the volume. Folders and sub-folders, if any, and their contents are included in the copy.
Delete Catalog warning dialog
Updating Catalogs
Since a Catalog database is not linked to any particular volume, there is a limit to the abilities of the Update Index command. When Update
Database for Selected is selected from the
Browser menu in a Catalog, Pro Tools searches for the items represented by the aliases in the
Catalog and updates the following information:
Metadata Metadata for all files found online, including File comments, are updated.
Database Comments Database Comments are not updated, because they are unique to each
Catalog and are not part of the file’s metadata.
202 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Relinking Catalog Items
If files are ever missing from a Catalog, use the
Relink window to locate, copy, and relink files.
For more information, see “Linking and Relinking Files” on page 187.
Deleting Catalogs
To delete a Catalog:
1 Select one or more Catalogs in the Workspace browser.
2 Press the Delete key, or choose Delete Selected from the Browser menu. A warning dialog appears.
Delete Catalog warning dialog
3 In the warning dialog, do one of the following:
• Click Cancel to cancel the delete operation.
• Click Delete Files to delete aliases and associated files from disk.
• Click Delete Aliases to delete only the aliases and not the associated files.
This operation cannot be undone.
Importing Catalog Items
You can import online and offline items from
Catalogs into the current session.
Importing Online Items from a Catalog
Dragging and dropping audio files to the
Pro Tools Region List and Timeline is identical to dragging and dropping from Volume browsers.
For more information, see “Importing Items with Drag and Drop” on page 225.
Importing Offline Items from a Catalog
With Catalogs, it is possible to search and import files that are offline. For example, if you have a music cue that you know you want to use, but it resides on a CD-ROM or other unmounted volume, you can spot the file from a
Catalog to the session timeline, and it is automatically imported into the session when the volume is mounted.
The first step is to add files to a Catalog (files must be online to be added to a Catalog). Once added to a Catalog, if the items are taken offline they are listed in italicized text.
Offline files can be dropped from a Catalog to the timeline just like online files. When you drop the files, a dialog appears asking if you want to relink the files or skip relinking. Click
Skip All to load all the items as offline files (in the timeline, their regions appear in light blue).
In the Project browser, these items are listed in the Render Sources folder, to ensure that
Pro Tools remembers that these items need to be relinked.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 203
Whenever the volume containing the offline items is mounted, Pro Tools automatically starts to import the files, in the background. This is true even if you have saved the session, quit, and relaunched Pro Tools.
Once the items are completely imported, they appear as online items in the timeline, Region
List, and in the Project browser.
If the offline items match the session sample rate, bit depth, and file format, no conversion is necessary. As long as the volume is playable, the items become playable in the session as soon as the volume is mounted.
If the volume is unsuitable for playback, you are informed that some items must be copied to suitable volumes first.
For more information on Transfer files,
missing files, and relinking, see “Relink
Task Window
For maximum performance and flexibility with file management tasks, Pro Tools provides the
Task window (see Figure 12 on page 205). File
management with Pro Tools involves nearly constant creating, copying, converting, searching, and indexing files. These tasks occur in the background, letting you continue recording, editing, and mixing without delay.
The Task window lets you monitor, pause and cancel ongoing tasks including file copying, fade creation and indexing.
You cannot drag and drop items to or from the Task window.
Opening the Task Window
To open the Task Window:
â– In Pro Tools, choose Window > Task Manager.
Press Alt+’ (Windows) or Option+’ (Mac) to open the Workspace browser.
Task Window Messages
If any background task cannot be successfully completed, the Task window comes to the foreground to notify you. The incomplete task is shown in the Paused Tasks pane of the Task window.
Because the Task window is a floating window, it does not interrupt current work. This allows you to continue recording and editing, and postpone file management until a more convenient time.
204 Pro Tools Reference Guide
View Toggle
(Minimize)
Status
Active Tasks
Paused Tasks
View Toggle
(Maximize)
Status
Figure 12. Task window, maximum view (upper) and minimized view (lower)
Task Window Views
The Task window provides a maximized and minimized view.
To toggle between maximized and minimized views:
â– Click the View Toggle icon in the top of the
Task window.
Task Window Tools, Columns, and
Displays
The Task window menu provides commands for
Task window operations.
The following data is always displayed in the
Task window (both views):
Item Name Indicates affected item, whether a file, database, or other supported item.
Status Action being taken (for example, Copying, Processing, Indexing and so on).
Progress Indicates the progress of the task or its sub-tasks, which include assessing the size of the items and the estimated amount of time necessary to complete the task.
Progress Indicator Indicates processing is ongoing.
Quantification Shows percentage of progress of the current task.
Active Tasks Pane
The upper Active Tasks pane shows the tasks that are in progress or waiting to start. The currently executing task is at the top. Tasks in this pane will be processed.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 205
As tasks complete, they disappear from the queue.
Any task that fails to complete successfully is moved to the Paused Tasks pane (see below).
The Status column displays a description of the failure.
Paused Tasks Pane
The Paused Tasks pane is displayed below the
Active Tasks pane, and is separated by a moveable horizontal divider. Tasks listed in this pane will not be processed until they are moved back to the Active Tasks pane.
Pausing and Cancelling Tasks
The Task window lets you pause, resume, and cancel tasks.
To pause a task:
â–
Drag the appropriate task from the Active
Tasks pane to the Paused Tasks pane.
The task moves to the top of the Paused Tasks pane.
To pause all tasks:
â– Choose Pause All from the Task window menu.
To resume a task:
â–
Drag a task from the Paused Tasks pane to the
Active Tasks pane. The task returns to its previous position in the queue.
To resume all paused tasks:
â– Select Resume All from the Task window menu. All tasks in the Paused Tasks pane (except failed tasks) are moved to the Active Tasks pane.
To cancel a task:
1 Highlight any task in either pane of the Task window.
2 Press Delete to remove it from the Task window.
To cancel all tasks:
1 Select any single task in either pane.
2 Press Control-A (Windows) or Command-A
(Mac) to select all the tasks in that pane.
3 Press Delete.
This command cannot be undone.
About Cancelling Tasks
Some tasks involve one or more sub-tasks. Deleting a task cannot undo sub-tasks already completed. For example, if importing and converting multiple files appears as a single task, deleting that task before it is completed stops the import and conversion process, but files already converted and imported remain on disk. If you want to cancel a task involving multiple sub-tasks, you can instead let the process complete and then use Undo to completely undo all sub-tasks, as available.
Closing Sessions with Pending
Tasks
If you close a session or quit Pro Tools while tasks are still pending (either in the Active or
Paused Tasks panes of the Task window)
Pro Tools asks if you want to cancel, or complete the pending tasks. You can choose to open the
Task window and wait for pending tasks to complete, cancel the pending tasks, or quit. If you quit, some tasks are cancelled. Tasks that involve file copies are remembered and restarted when you relaunch Pro Tools.
206 Pro Tools Reference Guide
About Failed Tasks
The Paused Tasks pane shows any tasks that could not be completed. The reason for the failure is shown in the Status column.
Failed Tasks cannot be resumed, and must be deleted manually from the Paused Tasks pane.
If Automatically Find and Relink was unable to find all files in a session, a failed task is placed in the Paused Tasks pane of the Task window. It remains there unless you manually remove it from the Task window (even if you have since found the files through a subsequent search and relink task).
Stored Tasks
Any task that imports files into a session is stored with a session when it is closed, and resumes when the session is re-opened.
For example, if you Import Tracks with Copy
Media selected, then save and quit before the copy completes, the copy tasks resume when the session is reopened.
Task Prioritization
A task that is in progress may be interrupted by a task of higher priority. When this happens, the partially completed task is halted and rescheduled later in the queue, and shown with a progress bar in the Active Tasks pane. When the higher priority task is finished the first incomplete task in the queue resumes.
Tips for Using the Task Window
Pause Tasks During Playback
A global preference Pause during Playback is provided in the Task window Browser menu.
When enabled, Active Tasks are paused whenever Pro Tools is playing (or recording). This setting is especially useful when working on slower
CPUs, or whenever you want to minimize system load for maximum playback and recording performance. This Preference maintains its setting until the next time it is changed.
Grouped Tasks
Some tasks consist of many smaller tasks. For instance, Copy and Relink may require hundreds of individual files to be copied. To help manage these tasks, they are grouped under the originating command. So in the example of a Copy and
Relink command, one Copy task would appear with an Expand/Collapse icon in the Task window. Clicking the icon shows each of the individual sub-tasks.
If there is more than one grouped task in the queue, all of the sub-tasks for the first group must be completed before the sub-tasks of the second group can be processed.
If the session is saved and closed while several of these group tasks are in the queue, and if those tasks are the type that are saved across close and reopen, all of the tasks appear when the session is reopened as part of the same group.
Chapter 11: DigiBase 207
Workflow Example
This example demonstrates how DigiBase browser features, including DigiBase Pro Catalogs, can be used in a typical post production project.
For this example, imagine posting audio for an animated television commercial for a line of products from the Aviary Fish & Chips company.
Launch Pro Tools and Check the Workspace:
1 Launch Pro Tools. The Workspace browser displays all mounted volumes. It also shows the
Catalogs icon.
5 Click OK.
A new folder named Aviary appears under the
Catalog icon in the Workspace browser.
A new Catalog shown in the Workspace browser
Find and Select Audio for the Project:
6 You need to use the sound of footsteps for this project and you already have some footsteps recorded into the session on a local hard drive. To view them, return to the Workspace browser and open the Volume browser for this drive.
7 To find all footstep recordings, click the Search icon in the Volume browser to show the Search tools.
Search icon
Items in the Workspace browser
2 Click the Expand/Collapse icon next to the
Catalogs icon to show all the Catalogs in the
Catalogs folder. Since this project does not have a Catalog, start by creating one.
Create a Catalog (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit Only):
3 From the Browser menu select New Catalog.
Browser menu the Search icon in the Browser toolbar
8 In the File Name Find field, type “foot” and press Enter (or click Search).
Matching files are displayed as they are found.
Selecting New Catalog from the browser menu
4 Name the Catalog Aviary .
208 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Search results in the Workspace browser
9 Select all the files found on that volume and drag them onto the Aviary Catalog icon (listed in the Workspace browser).
10 Close the Volume browser and double-click the Aviary Catalog, the Aviary Catalog browser opens, showing the footstep files completely indexed.
16 Select the three best files, and drag them to the Aviary Catalog browser. They now appear there next to the footsteps we found in the previous step.
17 Close the browser for the CD-ROM.
Search on Multiple Criteria:
18 Next, you need a car crash that is 5–6 seconds long. A Catalog already exists for a five-disc sound effects library, and even though the CD-
ROMs are not mounted their contents can be searched.
19 Click the Search icon in the Workspace browser, select the five Catalogs to be included in the search, type “car crash” in the File Name
Find field, and configure the Absolute Duration field to find files that are between 5 and 6 seconds in duration. Despite the fact that the CD-
ROMs are offline (not mounted), matching candidates can still be found.
Items in the Catalog
11 Next, you need to find some mouse squeaks from a new sound effects CD-ROM. Mount the
CD-ROM and it appears as a new volume in the
Workspace browser.
12 To avoid having to index and search through every file on the CD-ROM, double-click on the
CD-ROM’s icon in the Workspace browser to open the Volume browser for the CD-ROM. The browser shows twenty or more folders (typical of sound effects libraries, where sounds are organized by contents).
13 Click to select (highlight) just the folder named Animals, and select Update Database for
Selected from the Browser menu. This indexes only the selected folder, rather than the entire disc.
14 With the folder indexed, perform a search on
“Mouse.” Several files are found and listed in the browser.
15 Audition each item by clicking the Speaker icon next to the waveform.
Searching for audio files between 5 and 6 seconds
20 Four files are found that match the search criteria. Drag them onto the Aviary Catalog browser to add them to the Catalog (they appear as offline items).
Chapter 11: DigiBase 209
Spot Files from the Catalog (Pro Tools HD and
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit Only) :
21 Close all the browsers except the Aviary Catalog.
22 From the Aviary Catalog browser, drag files onto the current session Timeline to spot the files to the desired locations:
• The footsteps are immediately available and playable because they are already located in the Audio Files folder.
• When mouse squeaks are added, copies of the files are automatically made from the mounted CD-ROM to the Audio Files folder for the session. Copying, and any necessary conversion, takes place in the background.
• Spot the desired car crash from the Catalog
(the crash found on one of the offline CD-
ROMs). Even though the disc is not mounted, the car crash file appears in the
Timeline and the Region List as an offline audio file. When you are ready to listen to and work with the (offline) car crash effects, mount the CD-ROM with the car crashes. Because the CD-ROM is not a qualified playback drive, the file still appears in the Timeline as offline.
23 In the Project browser, highlight the desired file and choose Copy and Relink from the
Browser menu. Then select an available playback volume for the file. Once the copy is completed, the file appears online in the session, indicating it is ready to play.
For more information about linking, see
Spotting audio from a Catalog into the session
210 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting
Session Data
Pro Tools lets you import a variety of data into a session, including audio and MIDI files, region groups, video files, track playlists, I/O configurations, and signal routing configurations.
You can import audio and MIDI files into a session, or transfer entire audio or MIDI tracks, along with all of their attributes, from another session. Additionally, with Pro Tools HD, you also have the option of importing any combination of track attributes from another session, such as a track’s audio or MIDI playlists, signal
routing, plug-ins, or automation. See “Importing Audio” on page 211 and “Importing Tracks
and Track Attributes” on page 218.
To import or export video files, see
Chapter 36, “Working with Video in
Importing Audio
Audio files and regions can be imported to new tracks, or they can be imported into the Region
List, where they can be dragged to existing tracks.
Pro Tools can automatically convert files that don’t match the session’s audio file type, sample rate, or bit depth. Audio files that don’t match the session audio file type, sample rate, and bit depth must be converted on import. Pro Tools also splits interleaved audio files into multiple mono files.
Files and regions can be auditioned before they are imported.
If region definitions are present in an audio file, you can convert and import the audio for a region without importing the entire parent audio file.
Pro Tools 7.x does not support audio file names that contain certain ASCII charac-
ters (see “Opening a Session that Contains
Audio File Names with Illegal Characters” on page 243).
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 211
Audio files of the following types can be imported into Pro Tools sessions:
• AIFF
• WAV or BWF (.WAV)
• SD II
• SD I
• MP3
• MXF audio
• Sound Resource (AIFL—Mac only)
• WMA (Windows Media—Windows only)
• QuickTime (Mac only)
• AAC audio (including audio with AAC,
Mp4, and M4a file extensions)
Pro Tools cannot import protected AAC or
MP4 files with the .M4p file extension.
These files are protected under the rules of digital rights management.
• ReCycle (REX 1 and 2) files
• ACID files
Importing ACID and REX Files
When working with ACID files or REX 1 and 2 files, consider the following:
â—† ACID files without slice data are imported as audio regions.
â—† Sliced ACID files and REX 1 and 2 files are im-
ported as region groups (see “Importing and Exporting Region Group Files” on page 238).
â—† After importing ACID files and REX 1 and 2 files, you can reduce clutter in the Region List by hiding auto-created regions in the Region List
(deselect Show > Auto-Created in the Region
List pop-up menu).
â—† Pro Tools can automatically apply real-time crossfades to imported REX and ACID files (see
“Automatic Fades for Imported REX and ACID
Copying, Adding, and Converting Audio
Depending on the properties of the audio files you are importing, you can add, copy, or convert the files. The following options appear in the Import Audio dialog when they are applicable to the selected audio file.
Add
Audio files that are of the same file type and bit depth as a session can be added directly to the session. When you add an audio file, the session references the original audio file in its original location. Use this option when you do not want to use extra hard drive space for audio files that are already of the same bit depth and sample rate as your session.
Pro Tools does allow audio files that are not the session’s native file type to be added to the session. For example, Windows sessions allow AIFF or WAV files to be added to any session, and
Mac sessions allow SD II, AIFF, or WAV files to be added to any session. However, sessions with mixed file types have reduced performance.
Audio files that are of a different bit depth than the session must be converted before they can be imported.
Pro Tools allows you to add files to a session that are at a different sample rate than your session. In the comments field of the
Import Audio dialog, a warning is posted that these files will play back at the wrong speed and pitch if they are not converted.
Copy
If a file can be added to your session, you will also be given the option to copy it. This option creates a copy of the audio file and places it in a folder you choose. When you copy an audio file, the session references the copied file in its new location.
212 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Use Copy to move audio from an unsupported or removable drive to an audio drive, or to archive audio files for a session to a specific location.
Convert
Audio files that are not of the same bit depth or sample rate as a session, or audio files that are of an incompatible file type (such as SD II files in
Windows) must be converted to be used with the session. When an audio file is converted, a new file with the correct bit depth, file type, and sample rate is created and placed in a folder you choose.
The quality of sample rate conversion used by
Pro Tools is determined by the preference for
Conversion Quality. For details, see “Sample
Rate Conversion Quality” on page 213.
Importing Stereo Files
When using the Import Audio command, interleaved stereo files are automatically imported to stereo tracks.
Split stereo (dual mono) audio files can be automatically imported to stereo tracks. Split stereo audio files must have the channel identifiers
“.L” and “.R” in their names (for example, filename .L and filename .R), and the files must be the same length. In Windows, or in Mac/PC Compatibility mode, these files will have a 3-letter file extension appended after the “.L” or “.R” channel identifier.
Pro Tools also lets you import multichannel interleaved files of any supported file type.
Automatic Fades for Imported REX and
ACID Files
Pro Tools can automatically apply real-time crossfades to the regions or “slices” in imported
REX and ACID format files.
To apply real-time crossfades to REX and ACID files:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Editing.
2 Select the “Automatically Create Fades For Imported REX and ACID files” option.
3 Click REX/ACID and choose the shapes for the crossfades, and click OK.
4 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
Depending on your edits or tempo changes after importing REX or ACID files, the fades may get deleted and you will have to recreate them yourself.
Sample Rate Conversion
Quality
The Sample Rate Conversion Quality preference determines the quality of sample rate conversion used when converting and importing audio into a session. There are five possible settings, ranging from Low (lowest quality) to Tweak Head
(highest quality). The higher the quality, and the larger the conversion, the longer it will take.
To set the sample rate conversion quality:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Processing tab.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 213
2 From the Sample Rate Conversion Quality pop-up menu, select a quality setting. For most applications, the Good or Better setting will yield very good results.
To import audio files or regions into a session from the Pro Tools File menu:
1 Choose File > Import > Audio.
2 In the Import Audio dialog, select an audio file to display its properties and associated regions.
Sample Rate Conversion Quality preference
3 Click OK.
Importing Audio Files and
Regions
Pro Tools provides several ways to import audio files and regions into an open session.
• “Importing Audio Files and Regions Using
Pro Tools Menu Commands” on page 214
• “Importing Audio Files Using the Pro Tools
Application Icon or Alias” on page 216
• “Importing Audio Files with Drag & Drop” on page 216
• “Importing Audio from Audio CDs” on page 216
Importing Audio Files and Regions
Using Pro Tools Menu Commands
Pro Tools provides menu commands to import audio files or regions.
To import entire tracks from other sessions,
see “Importing Tracks and Track Attributes” on page 218.
Figure 13. Import Audio dialog
You can choose to display only a certain file type (such as AIFF) by selecting the type from the Show pop-up menu. To display all supported file types, select All Documents from the
Show pop-up menu.
In the import list, audio files are distinguished from regions by their icons.
Audio File icon
Audio Region icon
File and Region icons in the Import Audio dialog
On the Mac, Sound Resource files must have the “.SFIL” extension to be imported by Pro Tools.
214 Pro Tools Reference Guide
3 To audition a selected file or region before you import it, click the Play and Stop buttons in the
Import Audio dialog.
Adjust playback volume with the vertical slider.
To navigate to a particular location in the file, use the horizontal slider under the Play and Stop buttons.
The audition output defaults to channels 1–2.
With Pro Tools HD, the audition output channels can be changed in I/O Setup or Hardware
Setup.
4 Do any of the following:
• To place a file or region in the Import list, select the file and click Add or Convert.
• To import all files and regions in the current directory, click Add All or Convert All.
• To remove a file or region from the Import list, select it and click Remove.
• To remove all files and regions, click Remove All.
5 When you have added all audio files and regions to the Import list, you can apply sample rate conversion by doing the following:
• Enable Apply SRC.
• Specify the Source Sample Rate either by typing a number, or by selecting a sample rate from the pop-up menu.
• Select the sample rate conversion quality from the Quality pop-up menu. This setting overrides the Sample Rate Conversion
Quality setting in the Processing Preferences page.
6 Click Done.
7 If you are copying or converting files, choose a location for the new files. Choose a folder on a valid audio drive, such as the Audio Files folder for the current session.
8 In the Audio Import Options dialog, choose where the imported files will go in the session:
New Track Each audio file is imported into its own individual track and into the Region List.
When importing audio into a track, you can also choose the location in the track where the audio file will begin (such as Session Start).
Region List Audio files are imported into the Region List without creating a new track. Imported audio files appear in the Region List and can then be dragged into an audio track.
Audio Import Options dialog
9 If you chose to create a new track, choose a location for the imported file in the track:
Session Start Places the file or region at the start of the session.
Song Start Aligns the beginning of the file or region to the Song Start point.
Selection Aligns the beginning of the file or region to the edit cursor or to the beginning of a selection in the timeline.
Spot Displays the Spot dialog, which lets you spot the file or region to a precise location based on any of the Time Scales.
10 Click OK.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 215
Importing Audio Files Using the
Pro Tools Application Icon or Alias
Audio files can be imported into a session using the Pro Tools application icon or alias.
To import audio files into a session, using the
Pro Tools application icon or alias:
1 Open or create a new session.
2 From Windows Explorer or Mac Finder, locate the audio files you want to import.
Audio files must be in WAV, SD II, or AIFF/AIFC format in order to be dropped into Pro Tools.
Audio files will be converted if they are not of the correct bit depth or number of channels.
They will be converted to mono files of the default audio file format, with the session’s bit depth and sample rate.
3 Drag the audio files onto the Pro Tools application icon or alias.
Importing Audio Files with Drag &
Drop
You can drag and drop audio files from a
DigiBase browser, Windows Explorer or Mac
Finder to the Timeline, a track, the Track List, or the Region List.
To import audio into the Region List:
1 Select audio files in a DigiBase browser, or
Windows Explorer or Mac Finder.
2 Drag the files onto the Region List of the current session.
To import audio into an existing track:
1 Select audio files in a DigiBase browser, or
Windows Explorer or Mac Finder.
2 Drag the files onto an existing track in the Edit window of the current session.
To import audio into new tracks:
1 Select audio files in a DigiBase browser, or
Windows Explorer or Mac Finder.
2 Do one of the following:
• Shift-click the files and drag them anywhere in the Edit window of the current session.
• Drag the files onto any empty space in the
Edit window of the current session.
• Drag the files to the Track List.
For more information on using DigiBase
browsers, see Chapter 11, “DigiBase.”
Importing Audio from Audio CDs
Pro Tools lets you import tracks from audio CDs using the same methods that you use to import audio files, as follows
• Drag and drop CD audio from the CD folder.
• Drag and drop files from DigiBase Browser.
• Use the Import Audio command.
Importing CD audio with either drag and drop method lets you continue working in the session foreground (such as in the Mix or Edit window), while the Task Manager
(Window > Task Manager) works in the background (importing and converting the audio until the import is completed).
For more information on the Task Manager,
see “Task Window” on page 204.
216 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Since the transfer is made in the digital domain, there is no signal loss.
The sample rate for audio CDs is 44.1 kHz.
Therefore, if your session’s sample rate is set to
48 kHz or higher, Pro Tools will convert the sample rate for the imported audio. Before importing CD audio, set the Conversion Quality preference accordingly. For more information,
see “Sample Rate Conversion Quality” on page 213.
Before importing CD audio, make sure your hard drive has enough space for the converted audio files.
To import a CD audio track using the DigiBase
Browser:
1 Insert the audio CD into your CD/DVD drive.
If Autoplay is enabled, stop playback and close the application that is configured for
Autoplay.
2 Choose Window > Workspace.
3 In the DigiBase browser, click on the CD and select the audio track.
4 Do one of the following:
• Drag the file to the Region List to add it to the session.
• Drag the file to a track to place (or spot) it in the track.
• Drag the file to the Track List to add and create a new track.
Pro Tools converts the CD audio track to the session’s audio file format, bit depth, and sample rate, and saves it on your hard drive.
The imported audio file appears in the Region
List. From there you can drag the region to a track in your session.
Importing Multichannel Audio
Files from a Field Recorder
Pro Tools lets you use any of the import methods to import monophonic and polyphonic audio files recorded by a field recorder. When you import these types of files, they must be converted to an audio format compatible with
Pro Tools.
For more information on importing files from a field recorder, refer to the Field
Recorder Workflow Guide.
Importing Monophonic Audio Files
A monophonic audio file contains one mono channel and relevant metadata from a single multichannel recording.
When you import monophonic audio files that were recorded simultaneously, they are converted to multichannel regions and displayed together in the Region List. Any metadata is also imported with the files.
Importing Polyphonic Audio Files
A polyphonic audio file contains multiple mono channels and relevant metadata recorded simultaneously in a multichannel recording.
When imported into Pro Tools, a polyphonic audio file is divided into individual monophonic audio files written to disk—one file for each channel. Regions for each channel appear in the playlist, and a multichannel region appears in the Region List with the channels expandable underneath. Any metadata is also imported with the files.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 217
Importing Tracks and Track
Attributes
You can import entire tracks from other
Pro Tools sessions into the current Pro Tools session using the Import Session Data command or drag and drop.
With Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with DV
Toolkit 2, you can select specific session data
(such as automation and routing) to import.
You can also import main playlist options—either replacing existing options or overlaying elements onto existing tracks.
For example, with Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2, you can choose to import only the track’s audio into your current
Pro Tools session. This is analogous to “changing the tape reel” in a traditional studio setup with a tape machine and mixing console. Or, you can choose to import all of a track’s mixer settings without its audio, effectively importing a channel strip and using it on a track in your current session. By importing mixer settings for all of the tracks in a session or session template, you can reuse an entire Pro Tools mixer on all the sessions in a project.
To import tracks or their attributes:
1 Open or create a new session.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose File > Import > Session Data, select the session to import data from, and click
Open.
– or –
• Drag the session file whose tracks or attributes you want to import from a DigiBase browser,
Windows Explorer, or Mac Finder into the track playlist area in the current session’s Edit window or to the Track List.
3 If the Fader Gain of the sessions are different, you will be prompted to keep or change Fader
Gain before the Session Data dialog opens.
4 In the Source Tracks section, select tracks to import by clicking the pop-up menu to the right of each track name and selecting Import As New
Track.
To select multiple tracks, Alt-click (Windows) or Opt-click (Mac) on any track popup men and select Import As New Track.
If the current Pro Tools system does not support surround mixing, surround tracks are not displayed in the Source Tracks list.
5 With Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2, for each track you select, you can choose to import it as a new track, or choose a destination track from the corresponding popup menu. Click Match Tracks to automatically match source and destination tracks with the same names.
6 With Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2, select from among the Track Playlist options to choose how you want to import the source tracks.
7 If applicable, choose options for how media files should be imported from the Audio Media
Options and the Video Media Options pop-up menus.
8 Choose the Time Code Mapping option for imported data.
9 If the sample rates of the sessions are different, select the sample rate for the source session from the Source Sample Rate pop-up menu.
10 To import the meter and tempo maps from the source session, select the Import
Tempo/Meter Map option.
218 Pro Tools Reference Guide
11 To import key signatures from the source session, select the Import Key Signature Map option.
12 To import Markers and Memory Locations from the source session, select the Import
Marker/Memory Locations option.
13 With Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2, select the Import Mix/Edit Groups option to import any Mix or Edit Groups from the source session.
14 With Pro Tools HD, select the Import Mic Pre
Settings option to import any Mic Pre settings from the source session.
15 Click OK when you are finished.
16 If you chose to copy or consolidate media, choose a location to place the media files.
Imported tracks are made inactive if their source media is unavailable, or if the current session does not contain an equivalent output path.
Importing Grouped Playlists from Other
Sessions
You can import tracks that use Grouped Playlists from another Pro Tools session, and the playlist grouping function will remain intact for those imported tracks. There is, however, a restriction for importing from pre-Pro Tools 6.1 sessions:
After importing a partial set of grouped playlists
(such as tracks 1–7 of a 10-track group), you cannot subsequently import tracks 8–10 and have them “rejoin” the playlist group for tracks 1–7.
Import Session Data dialog (Pro Tools HD)
Import Session Data Dialog
The Import Session Data dialog lets you view the properties of the source session, select which tracks to import, and with Pro Tools HD, choose which attributes of those tracks you want to import into the current session.
Import Session Data dialog (Pro Tools LE)
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 219
Source Properties
The Import Session Data dialog displays properties for the source session. These properties include source session name, session type, start time of the session, audio bit depth, and sample rate. For Pro Tools 5.1 or higher sessions, the program that created the session and the session’s audio file type are listed.
Audio Media Options
Refer to Source Media (Where Possible) This option lets you avoid duplicating audio files by referring to the original files when possible. If the source files do not reside on supported playback media (such as a CDs or DVDs), or if they require bit depth or sample rate conversion, the source files are copied instead. This option allows the current session to refer to files that do not match the current session’s audio file format.
Copy from Source Media This option copies all audio files related to the imported tracks from the source media to a new specified location, and converts the files to the current session’s audio file format, bit depth, and sample rate if necessary. This is useful if you are importing tracks from a source such as CD or DVDs or shared storage, and you want to place the audio files on a different hard drive.
Consolidate from Source Media This option consolidates audio while copying it. This is useful if you want to copy only the regions of the audio files used in the source tracks, without copying unused audio. This option copies and converts consolidated audio to the current session’s audio file format, bit depth, and sample rate if necessary.
When you choose this option, you can also choose the size of the handle (in milliseconds) applied to consolidated audio. Handle is the amount of the original audio file that is preserved before and after each region in case you need to make any edits to the new regions.
Force to Target Session Format This option copies and converts any files that do not match the current session’s file format, bit depth, and sample rate. Files that do match the current session’s file type, bit depth and sample rate are referred to directly and not copied.
Video Media Options
You can either choose to leave video media files in their original locations or copy them to a new location. This is useful if you are importing tracks from a source such as CDs or DVDs or shared storage, and you want to place video files on a different drive.
Time Code Mapping Options
You can specify where the imported tracks are placed in the current session. Times are indicated in time code for Pro Tools|HD and
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2, and minutes:seconds for other Pro Tools LE systems.
From the Import Session Data dialog, the following Import Mapping Options are available:
Maintain Absolute Time Code Values This option places tracks at the locations where they were located in the source session. For example, if the current session starts at 00:01:00:00, and the session from which you are importing starts at
10:00:00:00, the earliest imported tracks can appear in your session is 9 hours and 59 minutes after the start of the session.
220 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Maintain Relative Time Code Values This option places tracks at the same offset from session start as they had in the source session. For example, if the source session starts at 01:00:00:00 and contains a track that starts at 01:01:00:00, and the current session start is 02:00:00:00, the track will be placed at 02:01:00:00 in the current session.
Map Start Time Code To This option places tracks relative to their original session start time.
(With Pro Tools|HD or Pro Tools LE with DV
Toolkit 2 systems, times are expressed in hh:mm:ss:ff, and on Pro Tools LE systems, times are expressed in hh:mm:ss.) For example, if the current session starts at 00:01:00:00, and the session from which you are importing starts at
10:00:00:00, you can reset the start time code to
00:01:00:00, to avoid placing files 9 hours and
59 minutes from the start of your session.
Track Offset Options
You can specify a track offset in addition to any offset incurred with the Time Code Mapping options. Any imported audio is offset in the current session’s timeline by the specified amount.
You can enter values in Minutes:Seconds,
Bars|Beats, Samples, Time Code, or Feet/Frames.
Sample Rate Conversion (SRC) Options
You can set options that control how sample rate conversion is applied to imported audio files. If the source session and the current session have the same sample rate, this portion of the dialog is unavailable.
Source Sample Rate For audio files created in any session, no matter what the session sample rate is, you can have the sample rate conversion process treat the files in several ways to compensate for pull-up, pull-down, and NTSC or PAL frame rates. This setting allows you to choose the sample rate from which you want the sample rate conversion process to start.
Destination Sample Rate The destination sample rate is always set to the sample rate of your current session.
Conversion Quality This option lets you set the quality of the sample-rate conversion process.
See “Sample Rate Conversion Quality” on page 213.
Source Tracks
This area of the dialog lists the tracks in the source session that can be imported, each with a corresponding pop-up menu.
Operation/Destination Track Pop-Up
Menus
For each source track, there is a corresponding pop-up menu that lists options for importing the track and, with Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools
LE with DV Toolkit 2, possible destination tracks in the current session. The pop-up menus display the following items:
Do Not Import Neither the source track nor any of its attributes are imported.
Import as New Track The source track and all attributes selected in the Session Data to Import menu are imported into a new track in the current session.
Destination Track Names (Pro Tools HD and
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 Only) The names of possible destination tracks in the current session are listed at the bottom of the pop-up menu. Imported playlists and all attributes selected in the Session Data to Import will be placed in the destination track you choose.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 221
Only destination tracks that match the track type (audio, Instrument, MIDI, Auxiliary Input, or Master Fader) and the channel format (mono, stereo, or any of the supported multichannel formats) of the source track appear in the popup menu.
Find Matching Tracks
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
If you are importing playlists from source tracks with the same name as destination tracks in the current session (such as a new cut of a scene), click Find Matching Tracks to automatically match the track names. Tracks must have the same name, track type, and channel format to be automatically matched.
Session Data to Import
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
The Session Data to Import menu is where you select which attributes of the selected tracks you want to import into the current session.
Session Data options in the Import Session Data dialog
Selected attributes are applied to all tracks that you choose to import into the current session.
Replacing Track Attributes
When you import an attribute of the source track into an existing track in the current session, it replaces the corresponding attribute in the destination track. If you choose not to import an attribute of the source track, the corresponding attribute in the destination track is retained.
Replacing Track Path Names
When you import a track’s input, output, send output or hardware insert assignments, any custom path names and I/O configurations from the source session are not imported. You can import path names and I/O configurations by im-
porting I/O Setup settings. See “I/O Settings
Files” on page 57 for more information.
Selecting Track Attributes to Import
You can select All, None, or any combination of the listed attributes to import. The following attributes are available to import:
All Imports all of the source track’s playlists, according to the Track Playlist Option setting, and all of the attributes in the Session Data to Import list.
None Imports only the source track’s main playlist, according to the Track Playlist Option setting, and no other attributes of the source track.
Alternate Playlists Imports all of the source track’s alternate playlists. The alternate playlists appear in the destination track’s playlist pop-up menu.
Regions and Media Imports all of the audio files or regions in the source track, and places them in the Region List.
222 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Volume Automation and Setting Imports the source track’s Volume fader setting and any automation data on the track’s Volume Automation playlist. The Volume fader setting and any
Volume automation data in the destination track are replaced.
Pan Automation and Setting Imports the source track’s Pan Slider settings and any automation data on the track’s Pan Automation playlist. The
Pan Slider setting and any Pan automation data in the destination track are replaced.
Mute Automation and Setting Imports the source track’s Mute setting and any automation data on the track’s Mute Automation playlist. The
Mute setting and any Mute automation data in the destination track are replaced.
Main Output Assignments Imports the source track’s channel output assignments, including any multiple output assignments. The channel output assignments in the destination track are replaced.
Send Output Assignments Imports the source track’s send output assignments. Any Send output assignments in the destination track are replaced.
Plug-in Assignments Imports the source track’s plug-in assignments. Any plug-ins in the destination track are removed, and their associated settings and automation are lost.
If the source track uses a plug-in that is not available on the destination system, it appears in the destination track and is made inactive.
Plug-in Settings and Automation When the source track’s plug-in assignments are imported, this option imports the track’s plug-in settings and any automation data associated with the plug-ins. If no plug-in assignments are imported, this option has no effect.
Hardware Insert Assignments Imports the source track’s hardware Insert assignments. Any Insert assignments in the destination track are replaced.
Voice Assignments Imports the source track’s voice assignment from the source session. Any voice assignments in the destination track are replaced.
Input Assignments Imports the source track’s channel input assignment. The Input assignment in the destination track is replaced.
Side-Chain Assignments When the source track’s plug-in assignments are imported, this option imports any side-chain assignments associated with the plug-ins. If no plug-in assignments are imported, this option has no effect.
I/O Labels (Path Names) Imports the source track’s path names.
Track Active State Imports the active/inactive state of the source track from the source session.
Track Comments Imports the track comments associated with the source track. Any comments in the destination track are replaced.
Record Safe/Solo Safe Settings Imports the record safe and solo safe settings of the source track from the source session. Any record safe or solo safe settings in the destination track are replaced.
Track View Settings Imports the track height and playlist view of the source track from the source session.
Mix/Edit Groups: Imports track groups from source session.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 223
Import Options
Import Tempo/Meter Map Imports the meter and tempo maps, as they appear in the Tempo and Meter Conductor rulers, from the source session. Any Tempo or Meter events in the destination session are replaced.
Import Key Signature Map Imports all key signatures (if present) into Pro Tools with the imported session data. Any Key Signatures in the destination session are replaced.
Import Marker/Memory Locations Imports markers and Memory Locations as they appear in the Marker ruler, from the source session.
Any markers and Memory Locations in the destination session are retained. Imported marker and Memory Locations are assigned the next available Marker/Memory Location numbers.
Import Window Configurations Imports the Window Configurations from the source session.
Import Pre Settings
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Imports any Pro Tools Mic Pre settings from the source session. Any Mic Pre settings in the destination session are replaced.
Track Playlist Options
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
You can select from the following options to control how the main playlist from each source track is imported to the destination track in the current session.
Import Main Playlists — Replacing Destination
Main Playlists Imports the main playlist from the source track. When you import the playlist into an existing track, the main playlist in the destination track is deleted and replaced with the imported playlist.
â—† If you select the above option and import all of the source track’s attributes, this is equivalent to importing the entire track.
â—† If you select the above option and do not import any of the source track’s attributes, you replace the audio playlists while keeping your current mixer settings.
Import Main Playlists—Overlaying New with Existing, Trimming Existing Regions Imports the main playlist from the source track. When you import the playlist into an existing track, any existing playlist data that overlaps data imported from the source track is trimmed and replaced with the imported data. Any playlist data in the destination track that does not overlap remains in the destination track.
Do Not Import Main Playlists—Leaving Destination Playlists Intact Does not import the main playlist from the source track. No audio is imported; only the attributes selected in the Session Data to Import list are imported to the selected tracks. When selected, importing all of the source track’s input, output, send, insert and plug-in attributes is equivalent to importing a channel strip.
224 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Importing Items with Drag and
Drop
Figure 14 illustrates some of the options available to import media using DigiBase.
Importing Media Files
Importing does not always convert or copy
audio files. See “File Conversion on Import”
on page 227 and “Copying during Import” on page 228 for details.
Importing using drag and drop does not necessarily bring the Edit window to the foreground. For example, dragging and dropping a file from a browser into a track leaves the source browser in the foreground (not the Edit window). Always verify the active, foreground window or browser before continuing.
Workspace
Volumes
Catalogs
Drop items or session files to existing tracks, or to the
Track List to add as new tracks
Drop items in the
Region List to import
Figure 14. Importing from browsers by drag and drop
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 225
To import items into the Region List:
1 Select audio, video, MIDI, region group, REX, or ACID files in a browser.
2 Drag the selected item onto the Region List.
To import items into an existing track:
1 Select an item in a browser.
2 Drag the selected file onto an existing, compatible track at the desired location. The file is imported and placed where it was dropped.
To import items as new tracks:
1 Select items in a browser.
2 Do any of the following:
• Shift-drag items and drop anywhere in the
Edit window.
• Drop items to the Track List.
• Drop items on to empty space in the Edit window, below or between tracks.
To import and spot audio into a track:
1 Enable Spot mode.
2 Select an audio file in a DigiBase browser.
3 Drag the items onto a Track playlist in the
Pro Tools Timeline. The Spot dialog appears.
4 Enter the appropriate time code location
(where you want to spot the imported item).
Auto Spot mode is not supported when importing from DigiBase browsers. Import to the Region List first, then drag from there to utilize Auto Spot mode. See the Pro Tools
Reference Guide for more information.
To import and spot an audio file by its Waveform:
1 Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) in an item Waveform display at the approximate reference point you want to use for placement in a track.
2 While continuing to press Control (Windows), or Command (Mac), drag the waveform onto an existing audio track (the source audio file and the destination audio track must have the same number of channels).
Snapping to Head and Tail
To import and snap to head:
â–
Start-drag (Windows) or Control-drag (Mac) an item onto a track.
To snap to head and copy the item to the session
Audio files folder:
â– Alt-Start-drag (Windows) or Option-Controldrag (Mac) an item onto a track.
To snap to tail:
â– Control-Start-drag (Windows) or Command-
Control-drag (Mac) an item onto a track.
To snap to tail and copy the item to the session
Audio Files folder:
â–
Control-Alt-Start-drag (Windows) or Command-Option-Control-drag (Mac) an item onto a track.
226 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Importing AAF and OMF
Sequences
(DigiTranslator 2.0 Required)
You can import AAF and OMF sequences from browsers by doing the following.
To import sequences into an existing track:
1 Select an AAF or OMF sequence in a browser.
2 Drag the item at the desired location in the current session. The file is imported and placed where it was dropped. If the sequence contains video the video track will also be imported.
Importing Sessions and Tracks
Session files can be dragged into the current session to import (and spot) audio, video, MIDI, region group, REX and ACID files, tracks, and session data.
• Dragging a session to the Region List imports all the regions from that session (without importing tracks).
• Dragging a session to a track in Pro Tools LE lets you import tracks.
• Dragging a session to a track playlist in
Pro Tools HD opens the Import Session Data dialog, letting you select tracks and attributes to import. The imported session data will begin wherever you drop the session in the
Timeline.
To import tracks and other session data by drag and drop:
1 Open a browser.
2 Drag a Pro Tools session file, or an AAF or OMF sequence (requires DigiTranslator 2.0), into the current session, as follows:
• Drag onto an existing track to overlay or overwrite data on the target tracks. Hold the Shift key while dragging if you intend to replace the current track playlists with those being imported (the Shift key preconfigures the settings in the Import Session Data dialog).
• Drag onto an empty (non-track) space in the Edit window Timeline to create new tracks for the imported session data.
• Configure the Import Session Data dialog as appropriate. (See the Pro Tools Reference
Guid e for details on the Import Session
Data dialog.)
File Conversion on Import
By default, files added to the session by drag and drop reference the original media, unless they do not reside on a valid Performance volume, or unless any of the following are true:
• Sample Rate does not match.
• Bit Depth does not match.
• The file is compressed.
• The file is multichannel interleaved.
• The file is WAV format, but the Pro Tools Preference to Convert all imported.WAV files to
AES31/Broadcast Wave is enabled.
Sample Rate Conversion quality follows the
Pro Tools Preference setting.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 227
Assuming that the file resides on a suitable Performance volume, and that the bit-depth matches, automatic sample rate conversion can be suppressed (for example, to speed importing for rough auditioning or when playback speed is not critical).
Copying during Import
If no conversion is necessary, and the files reside on a suitable Performance volume, Pro Tools references the original version of the media. You can also choose to copy media while importing by using key commands, or enabling the Automatically Copy Files on Import preference. Copies are created in the session’s Audio Files Folder.
To manually copy files on import:
â–
Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac) the files. A copy is created in the session Audio Files folder.
When importing sessions or tracks, the Import
Session Data dialog lets you specify whether to reference the source media, or copy it.
To automatically copy files on import:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences, and click the Operations tab.
2 Select Automatically Copy Files on Import.
3 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
Exporting Audio
Pro Tools supports exporting regions as audio files, exporting left and right audio files as stereo interleaved files, and exporting region information.
You can also export audio from Pro Tools by bouncing or consolidating audio tracks. For
more information, see “Consolidate Com-
mand” on page 487 and “Bounce to Disk” on page 746.
Exporting a Region as a New
Audio File
You can export regions as audio files with the
Export Regions as Files command. Use this command if you intend to use a region in other sessions (or other audio applications) without using its parent source file.
This command also provides a way to convert regions to a different audio format, sample rate, or bit depth.
To export regions as new audio files:
1 In the Region List, select the regions you want to export.
2 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose
Export Regions as Files. The Export Selected dialog appears.
Using Undo after Importing
Using Undo after importing removes any affected files from the Timeline. However, imported items remain in the session (in the Region List and Project browser) and are off-line. If you do not remove or delete the files from the session manually, Pro Tools will report them as missing files the next time the session is opened.
228 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Table 13. Dither and Noise Shaping with Export
Selected dialog
Bit Depth Dither
Noise
Shaping
24-bit to 8-bit
16-bit to 8-bit
Yes
Yes
No
No
Export Selected dialog
3 In the Export Selected dialog, set the file type, format, bit resolution, and sample rate. In addition, specify the Conversion Quality, and choose the destination directory.
When you export regions to a lower bit depth,
Dither (with or without Noise Shaping) is ap-
Table 13. Dither and Noise Shaping with Export
Selected dialog
Bit Depth Dither
Noise
Shaping
24-bit to 24-bit No No
16-bit to 24-bit
24-bit to 16-bit
16-bit to 16-bit
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
The Dither setting used for any conversion is the
Digidesign Dither plug-in (with or without
Noise Shaping enabled, as noted in Table 13).
For more information about using Dither,
4 Select an option for how Pro Tools should resolve duplicate file names.
Prompting for Each Duplicate Prompts you for a file name for any file that has the same name as a file in your destination directory.
Auto Renaming Automatically changes the name of any duplicate file by adding a number at the end of the file name (such as file_01).
Replacing with New Files Replaces files with the same name with the new files.
5 Once the Export Options are configured, click
Export to export the new audio files.
Exporting Stereo or Multichannel
Interleaved Files
You can use the Export Regions as Files command to export audio regions to stereo or multichannel interleaved files for use in other applications. (Pro Tools cannot use interleaved files directly in the timeline—these must be converted into multi-mono files.) For example, for this to work with a stereo file, the selected re-
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 229
gions must have identical names with “.L” and
“.R” suffixes (for instance, vocals_01.L and vocals_01.R). These regions appear as a stereo region in the Region List.
Pro Tools HD also lets you bounce multichannel interleaved files of any supported file type.
To export regions as a stereo or multichannel interleaved file:
1 Select the stereo or multichannel audio region in the Region List or in the track playlist. If the regions appear on mono tracks in the session, select the two mono regions.
2 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose
Export Regions as Files.
3 In the Export Selected dialog, select “Stereo
Interleaved” in the Format pop-up menu. For multichannel regions, the Stereo Interleaved option produces a multichannel interleaved file.
4 Configure any other output settings, then click Export to export the new stereo interleaved file.
To export region definitions for an audio file:
1 In the Region List, select any regions or region groups for which you want to export definitions. You do not have to select the parent file audio region.
2 Choose Export Region Definitions from the
Region List pop-up menu.
3 Click Export.
Exporting Region Definitions
Pro Tools stores region definitions for audio files within each session. If you want to use an audio file’s regions in another session, or with another application that supports them, you can export the region information.
If you plan to transfer Pro Tools session data to another session, you should export region definitions for sessions containing multiple takes created with Loop Record.
The Export Region Definitions command does not export regions as audio files (unlike the Export Regions as Files command). Instead, it stores pointers to the regions within the parent source file.
Exporting Pro Tools Tracks as
AAF or OMFI Sequences
With the DigiTranslator Integrated Option (DigiTranslator 2.0 or higher), Pro Tools lets you export individual tracks in AAF or OMFI format.
Use the Export Selected Tracks as AAF/OMF command.
Pro Tools with DigiTranslator does not support AAF files with embedded media.
For more information on installing, using, or removing DigiTranslator with Pro Tools, refer to the DigiTranslator Guide.
Exporting Sessions as Text
(Pro Tools HD Only)
You can use the Export Session Info as Text command to create a text file that contains extensive information about your session.
This text file can contain a list of audio files, audio regions, audio track EDL (Edit Decision List) information, extended timestamp information, and information about crossfades.
230 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Track EDLs are exported as tab-delimited text— that is, with tabs between each column heading, and tabs between each event parameter. You can use this data in a program for reading EDLs, or you can format the EDL data into tables using a word processor or spreadsheet application.
Export Session Info as Text
Options
Export Session Info as Text dialog
Include File List/Region List
You can choose to export a list of the session’s audio files and regions. The File List provides a list of all the audio files and fades in the session, and their hard drive locations. The Region List displays all audio regions in the session, and the source audio file for each region.
Include Track EDLs (Playlists)
You can export track EDLs (playlists). Track
EDLs can be used to spot-check region placement and edits, or in a conforming program for post applications. In extreme circumstances the
EDL can be used to recreate the entire session.
MIDI track EDLs are not exported.
When exporting track EDLs, the following options are available:
Show Subframes This option allows you to export subframe time information with track
EDLs, if used in your session.
Include User Timestamps You can include user timestamps with track EDLs. User timestamps indicate a user-defined session location for the region, or the original location of the region when recorded.
Fade Handling For track EDLs, you can choose whether to show crossfades, not to show them, or to combine crossfaded regions. When regions are combined, their durations and locations are listed up to the center of the crossfade (for the leading region) and from the center of the crossfade (for the following region).
Time Format You can select the appropriate time format that exported EDL information is based on. For example, for post work, you might select
SMPTE time, but for music creation locked to a grid, you might select Bars & Beats.
File Format
You can choose to export to any of several different text formats. These include standard text formats, and Microsoft Word and Excel formats.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 231
Exported Session Text
Session Information
The session text file starts with basic information about the session. This information includes the session name, sample rate, bit depth, time code format, and number of audio tracks, audio regions, and audio files, as shown in the following example.
Session Information example
SESSION NAME: Ripleys II-092700
SAMPLE RATE:
BIT DEPTH:
TIME CODE FORMAT:
# OF AUDIO TRACKS:
# OF AUDIO REGIONS:
# OF AUDIO FILES:
48000.000000
24-bit
30 Frame
19
203
54
File List and Region List
Next, if you choose to include them, are the lists of audio files and regions.
Track EDLs
The final item, if exported, is the list of track
EDLs. A track EDL lists the track name, and all edits, including the event number, the region name, region start and end time, and region duration. The region timestamp is also exported, if you select this option. Subframes are shown in each time field if you select this option.
To export a session as text:
1 Choose File > Export > Session Info as Text.
2 Select whether to include the File List, Region
List, and track EDLs.
3 If you choose to include track EDLs, select whether to show subframes, and whether to include user timestamps. Also select an option for crossfade handling.
4 If you choose to include track EDLs, select the
Time Format for the exported session text from the pop-up menu.
5 Select the File Format for exported text using the pop-up menu.
6 When you have set your options, click OK.
7 Select a location and enter a filename for the exported text file. In Windows, Pro Tools adds the correct 3-letter filename extension, while on the Mac, the file extension “.txt” is added.
232 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Send via DigiDelivery
DigiDelivery
®
is Digidesign’s system for efficient and reliable transfer of digital media files over the Internet. Send via DigiDelivery lets you send a Pro Tools session and all of its related files using DigiDelivery from within Pro Tools.
Like the Save Copy In command, DigiDelivery copies all files of the same type, regardless of their location, into a single destination folder.
Anyone can send and receive files from a Digi-
Delivery system, even if they do not own a Digi-
Delivery network appliance, as follows:
â—† To send a delivery, senders must have an Internet connection, an account on a DigiDelivery network appliance, and the DigiDelivery client application.
â—† To receive a delivery, recipients only need an
Internet connection and the DigiDelivery client application. An account on the network appliance is not needed.
For more information, visit the
DigiDelivery website
(www.digidesign.com/digidelivery).
To send a session from Pro Tools using
DigiDelivery:
1 Choose File > Send via DigiDelivery.
2 Do one of the following:
• If the DigiDelivery client is not installed on your system, Pro Tools will launch your
Web browser, and connect to the DigiDelivery site where you can download the current DigiDelivery client.
– or –
• If the DigiDelivery client is installed on your system, the Send to DigiDelivery dialog will open.
3 In the Send to DigiDelivery dialog, select which files to include.
Include in Delivery dialog
You have the option to include:
• Audio files
• Fade files
• Video files
• Plug-in settings files
• Timeline files only (files that are referenced in the current session timeline)
4 Click OK. The DigiDelivery client will launch, and the DigiDelivery Send Wizard (Page 1) will open. On this page you can name the delivery and add or remove files.
5 Complete the remaining DigiDelivery Send
Wizard pages and send the file, following the instructions that came with the DigiDelivery client software.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 233
Importing MIDI Files
You can import Standard MIDI Files (SMF) into your Pro Tools sessions.
Pro Tools provides several ways to import MIDI files into an open session.
• “Importing MIDI Files Using Pro Tools
• “Importing MIDI Files with Drag & Drop” on page 235
Pro Tools does not import proprietary sequence files. To use sequences from other MIDI applications in a Pro Tools session, you will need to first save them as Standard MIDI Files. Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation for details on saving Standard MIDI Files.
There are two types of Standard MIDI Files, both of which are supported by Pro Tools:
â—† Type 0 MIDI files store data for all MIDI channels in a single track. When importing these files, Pro Tools separates the data by channel and places each track’s data in separate regions and tracks.
â—† Type 1 MIDI files, sometimes referred to as multitrack MIDI files, contain multiple tracks of
MIDI data. When importing these files, each track’s data is placed on its own new MIDI track in the Pro Tools session.
Importing MIDI Files Using
Pro Tools Menu Commands
Pro Tools provides menu commands to import
MIDI files.
To import Standard MIDI files into a session using the Pro Tools File menu:
1 Choose File > Import > MIDI and select the file you want to import.
2 In the MIDI Import Options dialog, choose where the imported file will go:
New Track Creates a new track where the file will be imported.
Region List Imports the file into the Region List, where it will be available to place into tracks.
MIDI Import Options dialog
3 If you chose to create a new track, choose a location for the imported file in the track:
Session Start Places the file or region at the start of the session.
Song Start Aligns the beginning of the file to the Song Start point.
234 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Selection Aligns the beginning of the file to the edit cursor or to the beginning of a selection in the timeline.
Spot Displays the Spot dialog, which lets you spot the file to a precise location based on any of the Time Scales.
4 Select any of the following Import options:
Import Tempo Map From MIDI File When selected, overwrites any existing tempo and meter map with tempo and meter information read from the MIDI file.
Import Key Signature From MIDI File When selected, overwrites any existing key signatures with key signature information read from the
MIDI file.
Remove Existing Instrument Tracks When selected, deletes any existing Instrument tracks.
Selecting this option does not remove any current MIDI tracks. All existing MIDI regions will be left in the Region List.
Remove Existing MIDI Tracks When selected, deletes any existing MIDI tracks. Enabling this option does not remove any current Instrument tracks. All existing MIDI regions will be left in the region bin.
Remove Existing MIDI Regions When selected, deletes existing MIDI regions (all data on all
MIDI and Instrument tracks) but leaves existing
MIDI and Instrument tracks in place.
5 Click OK.
The MIDI file will be imported according to the settings in the Import MIDI Settings dialog.
If the Standard MIDI File contains markers, they are only imported if the current session does not contain any markers.
6 In the Mix window, click the MIDI Output selector for each new track and assign a MIDI instrument and channel.
Importing MIDI Files with Drag &
Drop
You can drag and drop MIDI files from a
DigiBase browser, Windows Explorer or Mac
Finder to the Timeline, a track, the Track List, or the Region List.
To import MIDI into the Region List:
1 Select MIDI files in a DigiBase browser, or
Windows Explorer or Mac Finder.
2 Drag the files onto the Region List of the current session.
To import MIDI into an existing track:
1 Select MIDI files in a DigiBase browser, Windows Explorer or Mac Finder.
2 Drag the files onto an existing track in the Edit window of the current session.
To import MIDI into new tracks:
1 Select MIDI files in a DigiBase browser, Windows Explorer or Mac Finder.
2 Do one of the following:
• From the DigiBase browser, Shift-drag the files and drag them anywhere in the Edit window of the current session.
• Drag the files onto any empty space in the
Edit window of the current session.
• Drag the files to the Track List.
For more information on using DigiBase browsers, refer to the DigiBase Guide.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 235
Exporting MIDI Files
To export a session’s MIDI tracks for use in another MIDI application, or for playback with an external (hardware) MIDI sequencer, you can export Pro Tools MIDI and Instrument tracks as a Standard MIDI File.
MIDI can be exported from Pro Tools as a merged, single, multichannel track (Type 0), or as multiple tracks (Type 1).
If your Pro Tools session uses key signatures and meters, they are exported with the MIDI file.
To export all MIDI and Instrument tracks in the current session:
1 Make sure to unmute any MIDI tracks in the session that you want included in the exported
MIDI file. (Or, conversely, mute any MIDI tracks you do not want included in the exported MIDI file.) For Instrument tracks, enable or disable the
MIDI mute button (Instruments View) as desired.
2 Choose File > Export > MIDI. The Export MIDI
Settings dialog opens.
Export MIDI Settings dialog
3 From the MIDI File Format pop-up menu, select 1 (multi-track) or 0 (single-track).
4 If the Song Start time is different from the Session Start time, select Session Start or Song Start from the Location Reference pop-up menu.
5 Enable or disable the Apply Real-Time Properties option as desired.
6 Click OK. A Save dialog opens.
7 Specify a folder destination and name for the
MIDI file.
8 Click Save.
Pro Tools exports all unmuted MIDI and Instrument tracks in the current session to a Standard
MIDI File and writes it to your hard drive. Exported MIDI information includes notes, controller events, program changes, and System Exclusive data, as well as events for tempo, meter, and markers.
The SMPTE start time for the session or the song
(depending on the selection from the Location
Reference pop-up menu) is also exported. This ensures that the exported tracks, when played from another MIDI application, will align with the correct SMPTE frames, and also synchronize correctly to tape and video devices, or Pro Tools.
Refer to your third-party MIDI sequencer documentation to determine whether it supports importing SMPTE start times from MIDI files.
Items Not Exported with MIDI Files
Mute automation and muted regions do not affect exported MIDI. As long as a MIDI track is not muted by clicking its Mute button, or an Instrument track is not muted by clicking its MIDI mute button (Instruments View), all of its MIDI data is exported.
When exporting MIDI files from Pro Tools, device assignments for tracks are not retained
(though channel assignments are). If you export
MIDI or Instrument tracks from Pro Tools and later re-import them, you will need to reassign the tracks to devices in your studio.
236 Pro Tools Reference Guide
All playlist information for MIDI and Instrument tracks is lost when exporting. For example, tracks that previously contained dozens of
MIDI regions will be flattened and only contain single regions after exporting and re-importing.
Exporting Individual MIDI and
Instrument Tracks
You can also export individual MIDI and Instrument tracks as MIDI files. This can be useful for storing libraries of your favorite MIDI sequences or SysEx data (such as bulk or individual patch dumps for your external MIDI devices), or for importing MIDI into notation applications
(other than Sibelius or G7).
To export a single MIDI or Instrument track as a
MIDI file:
1 Do one of the following:
• Right-click the Track name of an unselected track in the Edit or Mix window, or in the Track List.
– or –
• In the Track List, or Mix or Edit window,
Control-Right-click (Windows) or Command-Right-click (Mac) the track name.
2 From the Right-click pop-up menu, select Export MIDI.
3 Set the Export MIDI settings in the Export
MIDI Settings dialog.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Save dialog, type a name for the MIDI file, specify where you want to save it, and click
Save.
Alt-Right-click (Windows) or Option-Rightclick (Mac) to export all tracks to a single
MIDI file.
To export all selected Pro Tools Instrument or
MIDI tracks as a MIDI file:
1 Select the tracks you want to export to a MIDI file.
2 Right-click the Track name of one of the selected tracks in the Edit or Mix window, or in the Track List.
3 From the Right-click pop-up menu, select Export MIDI.
4 Set the Export MIDI Settings as desired.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Save dialog, type a name for the MIDI file, specify where you want to save it, and click
Save.
Alt-Shift-Right-click (Windows) or Option--
Shift-Right-click (Mac) to export all selected tracks as a single MIDI file.
Send to Sibelius
Pro Tools lets you send all or only selected MIDI and Instrument tracks to Sibelius or G7 notation software. This lets you print the score and parts from your Pro Tools session. For example, if you are working in Pro Tools with a sampled trumpet part, but you want to bring in a real trumpet player to play the part, you can send just the trumpet track to Sibelius and print the part for the trumpet player. You can then record the trumpet player reading the part.
To send all Pro Tools Instrument and MIDI tracks to Sibelius:
â– Choose File > Send To Sibelius.
Pro Tools exports all Instrument and MIDI tracks to Sibelius as a MIDI file. If Sibelius is installed on your computer, it launches Sibelius. If
Sibelius is not installed, but G7 is, G7 launches.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 237
Sibelius (or G7) prompts you to import the MIDI file exported from Pro Tools with the Open
MIDI File dialog. You can then further edit the notation in Sibelius and print the score of your session.
If your Pro Tools session uses key signatures and meters, they are exported with the MIDI file and imported into Sibelius.
MIDI files exported from Pro Tools using the
Send to Sibelius command are saved in an automatically created “MIDI Files” folder in the
Pro Tools session folder. MIDI files are named after the session, or if only one track is exported,
MIDI files are named after the track.
To send a single Pro Tools Instrument or MIDI track to Sibelius:
1 Do one of the following:
• Right-click the Track name of an unselected track in the Edit or Mix window, or in the Track List.
– or –
• In the Track List, or Mix or Edit window,
Control-Right-click (Windows) or Command-Right-click (Mac) the track name.
2 From the Right-click pop-up menu, select
Send To Sibelius.
The track is selected and sent to Sibelius.
Alt-Right-click (Windows) or Option-Rightclick (Mac) to send all tracks to Sibelius.
To send all selected Pro Tools Instrument or MIDI tracks to Sibelius:
1 Select the tracks you want to send to Sibelius.
2 Right-click the Track name of one of the selected tracks in the Edit or Mix window, or in the Track List.
3 From the Right-click pop-up menu, select
Send To Sibelius.
All selected tracks are sent to Sibelius.
Alt-Shift-Right-click (Windows) or Option-
Shift-Right-click (Mac) to send all selected tracks to Sibelius.
Importing and Exporting
Region Group Files
Pro Tools can export and import the region group file format (.rgrp). This lets you do the following:
• Separate region group metadata from audio files to avoid unnecessary file copy operations when exporting audio region groups composed from multiple source files.
• Export MIDI data as part of a region group.
• Create multitrack loops.
Region group files store the following metadata:
• References to all audio files within the region group
• Region names and relative location in tracks
• Fades and crossfades
• Region group names and format (single or multitrack)
• All MIDI data present in the region group
(such as notes, controllers, and Sysex)
• Track names
Region group files do not store the following:
• Audio
• Automation
• Plug-ins
• Track routing
• Tempo and Meter map
• Region List information
238 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Pro Tools provides several ways to import Region Groups into an open session:
• “Importing Region Groups with Pro Tools
• “Importing Region Groups with Drag &
Importing Region Groups with
Pro Tools Menu Commands
To import a region group with Pro Tools menu commands:
1 Choose File > Import > Region Groups and select the region group you want to import.
2 In the Region Group Import Options dialog, choose where the region group will go:
New Track Creates a new track where the region group will be imported.
Region List Imports the region group into the
Region List, where it will be where it will be available to place into tracks.
Region Group Import Options dialog
3 If you chose to create a new track, choose a location for the imported group in the track:
Session Start Places the group at the start of the session.
Song Start Aligns the beginning of the group to the Song Start point.
Selection Aligns the beginning of the group to the edit cursor or to the beginning of a selection in the timeline.
Spot Displays the Spot dialog, which lets you spot the group to a precise location based on any of the Time Scales.
4 Select any of the following import options:
Import Tempo Map from Region Group File When selected, replaces the session tempo map with the tempo map of the region group. This option is only available when importing the region group to the Session Start.
5 Click OK.
Importing Region Groups with
Drag & Drop
You can drag and drop Region Groups from a
DigiBase browser or from Windows Explorer or the Mac Finder to the Timeline, a track, the
Track List, or the Region List.
To import Region Groups into the Region List:
1 Select one or more Region Groups in a Digi-
Base browser, Windows Explorer or Mac Finder.
2 Drag the files onto the Region List of the current session.
To import Region Groups into an existing track:
1 Select one or more Region Groups in a
DigiBase browser or from Windows Explorer or
Mac Finder.
2 Drag the files onto an existing track in the Edit window of the current session.
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Session Data 239
To import Region Groups into new tracks:
1 Select one or more Region Groups in a Digi-
Base browser, Windows Explorer or Mac Finder.
2 Do one of the following:
• From the DigiBase browser, Shift-drag the files and drag them anywhere in the Edit window of the current session.
• Drag the files onto any empty space in the
Edit window of the current session.
• Drag the files to the Track List.
For more information on using DigiBase browsers, refer to the DigiBase Guide.
Exporting Region Groups
To export a region group:
1 Select one or more region groups in the Region List.
2 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose
Export Region Groups. The Export Region
Groups dialog opens.
4 Enable one of the following options for resolving duplicate region group file names:
• Prompting for Each Duplicate (default)
• Auto Renaming
• Replacing with New Files
5 Click OK.
Exporting Region Groups to Another Hard Drive
Generally, if you are exporting region groups to another hard drive, you should copy any referenced audio files. This way you can move region groups not only from one session to another, but from one system to another.
To export a region group to a different hard drive and include its audio files:
1 Export one or more region groups to the desired drive.
2 Create a new session on the new drive.
3 Choose Setup > Preferences.
4 In the Preferences dialog, click the Processing tab and select Automatically Copy Files on Import.
5 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
6 Import all previously exported region groups by dragging and dropping them into the session.
The audio files folder of the new session now contains all files referenced by the region groups.
Export Region Groups dialog
3 The Destination Directory defaults to the auto-created Region Groups folder in the session folder. You can change the Destination Directory by clicking the Choose button, navigating to the desired location, and clicking Choose.
Click Reset to reset the Destination Directory to the default location.
240 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 13: File and Session
Management and Compatibility
When you work with Pro Tools, you encounter several different kinds of computer files.
Pro Tools systems require that you keep certain files in specific hard drive locations in order to function properly.
â—† Pro Tools software files (such as the application and plug-ins files) should be located on your Startup drive (the drive that contains your operating system and other system-related files).
â—† On Pro Tools|HD systems, data files (such as session files, audio files, and fade files) can be located on any compatible drive connected to your computer’s internal or external ATA/IDE,
FireWire, or SCSI busses (including SCSI HBA).
For maximum performance, SCSI drives are recommended for Pro Tools|HD systems. FireWire and ATA/IDE drives are also supported. See the
Digidesign website for details (www.digidesign.com).
â—† On Pro Tools LE systems, data files (such as session files, audio files, and fade files) can be located on any compatible hard drive connected to your computer’s internal or external
ATA/IDE, FireWire, or SCSI busses.
Although Pro Tools lets you record to your system drive, this is generally not recommended. You should record to system drives only when necessary—for example, if your computer system has just one hard drive, or it your other hard drives are completely out of space.
Audio File Management
Unique File IDs
Pro Tools tags each audio file in a session with a unique identifier that allows it to distinguish a particular file even if its name or location has changed.
Locating Audio Files
With Pro Tools, you manage links to audio and other media files using the Relink window.
Pro Tools classifies storage volumes according to their suitability for performance (recording or playback) or transfer (storage or copying) of audio and other media files. Audio files must be stored on suitable Performance volumes and be properly linked in order to be playable in a
Pro Tools session.
Chapter 13: File and Session Management and Compatibility 241
When you open a session, if Pro Tools determines that audio files are not located on a Performance volume, or if it is unable to locate audio files contained in the session, you can locate or copy the files in order to play back the session. This process is called relinking .
For more information on storage volume
classifications, see “Performance and
Transfer Volumes” on page 167.
Transfer Files
Transfer files reside on volumes unsuitable for playback, such as CD or DVD discs, or network drives.
To open a session containing Transfer files:
â– Open the Pro Tools session. If any files are on a volume unsuitable for playback, Pro Tools prompts you to do one of the following:
• Click Yes to open the Copy and Relink window.
– or –
• Click No to open the session with all Transfer files offline.
To make Transfer files playable in the current session:
1 Choose Window > Project.
2 Double-click the Audio Files folder to display all of the audio files.
3 Choose Select Transfer Files from the Browser menu.
4 Choose Copy and Relink from the Browser menu.
5 Specify a location for the copied files on a valid Performance volume.
6 Click OK.
For complete information on relinking
Transfer files, see “Linking and Relinking
Missing Files
A file is missing if it is not found in the same location as when the session was last saved.
To open a session with missing files:
1 Open the Pro Tools session. If any files are missing, Pro Tools posts a Missing Files warning.
Missing files warning when opening a session
2 Choose one of the following options:
Skip All Ignores all missing files and fades. The missing files are offline in the session.
Manually Find and Relink Opens the Relink window, where you can search, compare, verify, and relink missing files.
Automatically Find and Relink Searches all Performance volumes for all missing files with matching name, unique file ID, format, and length, and automatically commits links to missing files where possible.
3 To exclude fades from the relinking process, and have them recalculated instead, select Regenerate Missing Fades.
4 Click OK.
For more information on relinking missing
files, see “Linking and Relinking Files” on page 187.
242 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Renamed Audio Files and the Renamed
Audio Files Folder
Renamed audio files are located in the auto-created Renamed Audio Files folder in the
Pro Tools session folder. Files can be renamed when you open a session that references audio file names with incompatible characters. Files can also be renamed in certain situations when saving a copy of a session to a Pro Tools version that does not support long file names
Opening a Session that Contains Audio File
Names with Illegal Characters
Pro Tools 7.x does not support audio file names that contain the following ASCII characters:
/ (Forward Slash)
\ (Backslash)
: (Colon)
* (Asterisk)
? (Question mark)
“ (Quotation marks)
< (Less-than symbol)
> (Greater-than symbol)
| (vertical line or pipe)
Any “high order” ASCII character (created with a key combination)
When opening sessions that contain audio file names with illegal characters, Pro Tools automatically creates a renamed copy of each file that contains illegal characters (replacing these characters with an underscore “_”). Renamed files are copied to the Renamed Audio Files folder. The original files are left intact in the Audio Files folder.
Before the session opens, you are prompted to save a detailed report of the renamed files and their original file names to a Notes text file. By default, the Notes text file is saved to the Session folder.
It is possible to have a Pro Tools 7.x session that contains audio file names with illegal characters. If you Save Copy In the session to Pro Tools 6.9.x or lower with Mac/PC
Compatibility on, the tracks are renamed with legal characters. If Mac/PC Compatibility is off, the characters are not changed.
Saving a Copy of a Session that Contains Long
Audio File Names
When saving files to Pro Tools 6.9.x and lower
(using Save Copy In), audio files with file names that exceed the limits of the destination format are truncated and located in the Session folder, as follows:
• If the new session is saved to the same directory as the original, a Renamed Audio Files folder is created in the session’s original folder, and the renamed audio files are placed in it.
• If the new session is saved to a different directory than the original and the All Audio Files option is not checked , a new Session folder is created, which includes an Audio Files folder and a Renamed Audio Files folder. Renamed audio files are included in the Audio Files folder.
• If the new session is saved to a different directory than the original and the All Audio Files option is checked , a new Session folder is created, which includes an Audio Files folder. Renamed audio files are included in the Audio
Files folder.
Chapter 13: File and Session Management and Compatibility 243
WAV File Compatibility
Convert Imported WAV files to
AES31/BroadcastWave
Pro Tools always creates AES31/Broadcast compliant BWF (.WAV) files when the file originates in Pro Tools. This option makes imported WAV files compliant with the AES31/EBU Broadcast standard.
AES31/Broadcast Wave is a variant of the standard audio WAV file type. The AES31 format contains SMPTE time stamps and other information beyond the raw PCM audio data.
This variant complies with standards set by the
AES (Audio Engineering Society) and EBU (European Broadcasters Union). Choose this option to ensure compatibility with other workstations that recognize this file type.
To make imported WAV files compliant with the
AES31/EBU Broadcast standard:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the Processing tab.
2 Select Convert imported “wav” files to
AES31/BroadcastWave, then click OK.
Sharing Sessions Created on
Different Computer Platforms
This section includes the following:
• “Working with Mac-Based HFS+ Drives on
Windows Computers” on page 244.
• “Saving Copies of Mac Sessions to be Compatible with Windows” on page 246.
Working with Mac-Based HFS+
Drives on Windows Computers
Either the Digidesign HFS+ Disk Support option or the MacDrive Utility is required to mount
HFS+ drives on an NTFS system for use with
Pro Tools.
Digidesign HFS+ Drive Support Option
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE on Windows
Only)
Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE for Windows XP support recording and playback of sessions directly from Mac-formatted (HFS+) drives using the Digidesign HFS+ Disk Support option. The
HFS+ Disk Support option is automatically installed with Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE software by default.
When using the Digidesign HFS+ Disk Support option for recording and playback on a Windows system, the session file and all associated files (such as audio and MIDI files) must be stored on Mac-formatted (HFS+) drives. Recording and playback of a session from a mixture of
Windows- and Mac-formatted drives is not supported.
For more information, see the Mac HFS+
Disk Support Option Guide.
244 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Moving Sessions on Windows Systems to Mac-Based HFS+ Drives
(From Window-Based NTFS Drives Only)
There are specific steps for transferring session files from Windows-based NTFS drives to Macbased HFS+ drives.
Mac systems can read (but not write to) sessions located on Windows-based Fat 32 formatted drives.
To transfer Pro Tools Windows sessions from NTFS drives to HFS+ drives:
1 Set the Digidesign HFS+ Disk Support Options or the MacDrive Options to Backup/File Transfer.
2 Do one of the following:
• Drag the session folder from the NTFS drive to the HFS+ drive.
– or –
• Open the Windows session on the NTFS drive, choose Save Copy In, and save a copy of the session to the HFS+ drive.
Moving Mac-Based Sessions on HFS+
Drives to Windows Systems
(To Windows-Based NTFS Drives Only)
There are specific steps for transferring files from
Mac-based HFS+ drives to Windows-based NTFS drives.
To save (or create) Mac sessions to be com-
patible on Windows systems, see “Saving
Copies of Mac Sessions to be Compatible with Windows” on page 246.
When transferring Pro Tools sessions from
HFS+ drives to NTFS drives, Pro Tools sessions cannot relink to audio files and fades that have Mac characters that are illegal in
Windows. These characters are automatically converted to underscore (“_”) characters. These files are saved to the Renamed
Audio Files folder. You need to manually relink each file by File ID. See “Missing
Files” on page 242.
To save session with no illegal characters,
see “Saving Copies of Mac Sessions to be
Compatible with Windows” on page 246.
To transfer Pro Tools Mac sessions from HFS+ drives to NTFS drives:
1 Set the Digidesign HFS+ Disk Support option or the MacDrive Options to Normal Use.
Chapter 13: File and Session Management and Compatibility 245
2 Do one of the following:
• Drag the session folder from the HFS+ drive to the NTFS drive.
– or –
• Open the Mac session on the HFS+ drive, and when prompted, choose Save Copy In and save a copy of the session to the HFS+ drive.
In previous versions of Pro Tools, Macformatted HFS+ drives could only be used as Transfer volumes when connected to
Windows XP systems using MacDrive.
When using either the Digidesign HFS+ Disk
Support option or MacDrive for recording and playback on a Windows system, the session file and all audio files must be stored on Mac-formatted (HFS+) drives. Recording and playback of a session from a mixture of Windows- and
Mac-formatted drives is not supported.
For information on using the Digidesign
HFS+ Disk Support option, see the Mac
HFS+ Disk Support Option Guide.
To record or play back from HFS+ drives with
Windows using MacDrive:
1 In Windows, go to the MacDrive Control
Panel.
2 Choose Options > File Names and select the
“International Use” option.
3 Delete all options listed under “File Name
Maps.”
4 In Pro Tools, choose Window > Workspace and make sure that all Mac-formatted volumes are set to R (record) or P (playback) in the A (Audio) and V (Video) columns.
Save Copy In dialog
If the session previously used SD II files, the files are converted to the new audio file format.
Recording and Playback from HFS+
Drives on Windows
Windows XP supports recording and playback of sessions directly from Mac-formatted (HFS+) drives using either the Digidesign HFS+ Disk
Support option or the MacDrive software application.
Saving Copies of Mac Sessions to be Compatible with Windows
(Save Copy In to Pro Tools 6.9.x and Lower
Only)
Sessions created and saved as Pro Tools 7.x sessions are always compatible on both Windows and Mac systems.
246 Pro Tools Reference Guide
If you create a Pro Tools 6.9.x or lower session on a Mac system, the session is only compatible on Windows systems if the Enforce Mac/PC
Compatibility option is selected during the Save
Copy In. In addition, there are cross-platform limits to consider when completing the Save
Copy In.
Cross-Platform Session Limits
When saving (or creating) a copy of a Pro Tools session that you want to be compatible on both
Mac and Windows, keep in mind the following limits and how Pro Tools deals with them:
Audio File Types
The recommended file format for cross-platform interoperability is BWF (.WAV). To support optimal session interchange, Pro Tools defaults to
BWF format for new sessions.
Pro Tools lets you save, bounce, and export in a variety of file formats. However, if you create a session using the SD II format, a warning dialog appears reminding you of its limitations:
• SD II is not supported on Windows XP.
• The maximum sample rate for SD II files is
48 kHz.
File Name Extensions
For cross-platform compatibility, all files in a session must have a 3-letter file extension added to the file name. Pro Tools 5.1 to 6.9.x session files have the extension “.pts,” and Pro Tools 5 sessions have the extension “.pt5.” Wave files have the “.wav” file extension, and AIFF files have the “.aif” file extension.
Incompatible ASCII Characters
Region names, track names, file names, and plug-in settings cannot use ASCII characters that are incompatible with either system.
When importing files into a session, incompatible characters are converted to underscores (“_”) and the renamed files are placed in the Renamed Files folder.
The following characters cannot be used in
Windows sessions:
/ (Forward Slash)
\ (Backslash)
: (Colon)
* (Asterisk)
? (Question mark)
“ (Quotation marks)
< (Less-than symbol)
> (Greater-than symbol)
| (vertical line or pipe)
Any “high order” ASCII character (created with a key combination)
Saving Cross-Platform Sessions
To save an existing session to Pro Tools 6.9.x or lower and maintain Mac and Windows compatibility:
1 Choose File > Save Copy In.
2 In the Save Copy In dialog, choose a destination and enter a name for the new session file.
3 Set the Audio File Type to AIFF or BWF (.WAV).
These file formats are compatible with either platform.
4 Set the Sample Rate and Bit Depth for the session.
5 Select Enforce Mac/PC Compatibility. This option must be selected to make the session crossplatform compatible.
6 Select the Items to Copy to the new session.
7 Click Save.
Chapter 13: File and Session Management and Compatibility 247
If the session previously used SD II files, the files are converted to the new audio file format.
Pro Tools can convert a file created on a
Mac and saved without the “Enforce
Mac/PC compatibility” option selected to a
Windows compatible file. For more infor-
mation, see “Sharing Sessions Created on
Different Computer Platforms” on page 244.
Sharing Sessions Created on
Different Pro Tools Systems
Pro Tools makes it easy to share sessions between Pro Tools|HD systems and Pro Tools LE systems. There are some important differences between the three types of systems that can affect how session material is transferred.
For details on transferring sessions between
Windows and Mac systems, see “Sharing
Sessions Created on Different Computer
The following table also includes Pro Tools LE systems with the DV Toolkit 2 option, as well as
Pro Tools LE systems with the Music Production
Toolkit option.
Differences between Pro Tools systems
Feature
Pro Tools|HD
Systems
Pro Tools LE
Systems
Maximum number of audio tracks
Maximum number of Instrument tracks
Maximum number of mix busses
Inserts per track
Sends per track up to 256 tracks
128
128 busses
(Pro Tools 6.9 and higher)
64 busses
(Pro Tools 6.7 and lower) up to 5 inserts up to 10 sends
(Pro Tools 7.x) up to 5 sends
(Pro Tools 6.9.x and lower) up to 128 tracks
(32 voiceable)
32
32 busses
(Pro Tools 7.x)
16 busses
(Pro Tools 6.9.x and lower) up to 5 inserts up to 10 sends
(Pro Tools 7.x) up to 5 sends
(Pro Tools 6.9.x and lower)
Pro Tools LE
Systems with
DV Toolkit 2 up to 128 tracks
(48 voiceable)
32
32 up to 5 inserts up to 10 sends
Pro Tools LE
Systems with Music
Production Toolkit up to 128 tracks
(48 voiceable)
32
32 up to 5 inserts up to 10 sends
248 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Opening Pro Tools HD Sessions in
Pro Tools LE
A Pro Tools HD 7.2 or higher session that does not contain video tracks or VCA Masters can be opened with Pro Tools LE 7.x, but certain session components open differently or not at all.
Pro Tools HD 7.2 sessions that contain video tracks or VCA Master tracks can only be opened with Pro Tools LE 7.0cs3 and higher.
When opening a Pro Tools HD 7.x session in
Pro Tools LE 7.x, the following occurs:
Tracks
• Any tracks beyond the first 32, as well any inactive tracks, are set to voice off .
• Any assignments to busses beyond 32 are made inactive.
• Any Instrument tracks beyond 32 are made inactive.
• TDM plug-ins with RTAS equivalents are converted; those without equivalents are made inactive.
• Multichannel surround tracks are removed from the session.
• Unavailable input and output paths are made inactive.
• Any Delay Compensation settings are removed.
• VCA Master tracks are removed and any uncoalesced VCA automation is dropped.
Groups
• In Pro Tools LE 7.1 or lower only, all groups beyond the first 26 (Bank 1, Groups a–z) are dropped.
• Mix Groups keep only Main Volume information.
• Mix/Edit Groups keep only Main Volume and
Automation Mode information.
• Automation overflow information for grouped controls is be preserved.
• Group behavior of Solos, Mutes, Send Levels,
Send Mutes is be preserved.
• Solo Mode and Solo Latch settings are dropped.
Video
• Only the main video track is displayed.
• Only the first QuickTime movie in the session is displayed or played back.
• If the session contains QuickTime movies in the Region List but no video track, the session opens with a new QuickTime Movie track containing the first QuickTime movie from the Region List.
• The Timeline displays and plays back only the video playlist that was last active. Alternate video playlists are not available.
• In Pro Tools LE 7.1 or lower only, video regions and video region groups are not shown or saved.
Chapter 13: File and Session Management and Compatibility 249
Sharing Sessions Created on
Different Pro Tools Software
Versions
Pro Tools makes it easy to share sessions between different software versions of a particular
Pro Tools system (such as sharing sessions between Pro Tools HD 7.x and Pro Tools HD 6.x).
Sharing Pro Tools HD 7.2 or Higher
Sessions with Lower Versions of
Pro Tools HD
Opening Pro Tools HD 7.2 or Higher
Sessions with Pro Tools HD 7.1 or 7.0
A Pro Tools HD 7.2 or higher session that does not contain video tracks or VCA Masters can be opened with Pro Tools HD 7.1 or 7.0, but certain session components open differently or not at all.
Pro Tools HD 7.2 or higher sessions that contain video tracks or VCA Masters can only be opened with Pro Tools HD 7.1cs3 and higher.
When opening a Pro Tools HD 7.2 a higher session with a version of Pro Tools HD 7.1 or
7.0, the following occurs:
Tracks
• VCA Master tracks are removed and any uncoalesced VCA automation is dropped.
• Any uncoalesced Trim automation is dropped.
Groups
• All groups beyond the first 26 (Bank 1, Groups a–z) are dropped.
• Mix Groups keep only Main Volume information.
• Mix/Edit Groups keep only Main Volume and
Automation Mode information.
• Automation overflow information for grouped controls is not preserved.
• Group behavior of Solos, LFEs, Mutes, Send
Levels, Send Mutes is not preserved.
• Solo Mode and Solo Latch settings are dropped.
Video
• Only the main video track is displayed.
• Only the first QuickTime movie in the session is displayed or played back.
• If the session contains QuickTime movies in the Region List but no video track, the session opens with a new QuickTime Movie track containing the first QuickTime movie from the Region List.
• The Timeline displays and plays back only the video playlist that was last active. Alternate video playlists are not available.
• Video regions and video region groups are not shown or saved.
250 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Saving Pro Tools HD 7.2 or Higher
Sessions to Pro Tools 5.1 -> 6.9 Format
A Pro Tools 7.2 or higher session cannot be opened with Pro Tools versions 6.9.x through
5.1.
To save a Pro Tools 7.x session so it is compatible with Pro Tools version 6.9.x through 5.1, use the File > Save Copy In command to choose the
“Pro Tools 5.1 -> 6.9” session format.
When saving a Pro Tools HD 7.2 or higher session to Pro Tools HD 5.1 -> 6.9 format, the following occurs:
Tracks
• Instrument tracks are split into separate Auxiliary Input and MIDI tracks.
• VCA Master tracks are removed and VCA automation is coalesced to the corresponding slave tracks.
• Trim automation playlists are coalesced to their corresponding automation playlists.
• Fader Gain levels and automation breakpoints higher than +6 dB are changed to +6 dB.
• Long names are shortened to 31 characters.
• The following attributes are dropped:
• Region groups
• Region loops
• Sample-based MIDI regions
• Sample-based MIDI tracks
• Sends F–J and any associated automation
• Marker/Memory Locations 201–999
Groups
• All groups beyond the first 26 (Bank 1, Groups a–z) are dropped.
• Mix Groups keep only Main Volume information.
• Mix/Edit Groups keep only Main Volume and
Automation Mode information.
• Automation overflow information for grouped controls is not preserved.
• Group behavior of Solos, LFEs, Mutes, Send
Levels, Send Mutes is not preserved.
• Solo Mode and Solo Latch settings are dropped.
Video
• Only the main video track is displayed.
• Only the first QuickTime movie in the session is displayed or played back.
• If the session contains QuickTime movies in the Region List but no video track, the session opens with a new QuickTime Movie track containing the first QuickTime movie from the Region List.
• The Timeline displays and plays back only the video playlist that was last active. Alternate video playlists are not available.
• Video regions and video region groups are not shown or saved.
Chapter 13: File and Session Management and Compatibility 251
Saving Pro Tools HD 7.2 or Higher
Sessions to Pro Tools 5.0 Format
A Pro Tools 7.2 or higher session cannot be opened with Pro Tools version 5.0.
To save a Pro Tools 7.x session so it is compatible with Pro Tools version 5.0, use the File >
Save Copy In command to choose the
“Pro Tools 5.0” session format.
When saving a Pro Tools HD 7.2 or higher session to Pro Tools 5.0 format, all items that occur when saving a Pro Tools HD 7.2 session to Pro Tools HD 5.1->6.9 format, plus the following:
• Multichannel surround tracks are removed from the session.
• Inactive tracks are removed from the session.
• Tracks assigned to “No Output” are routed to
Busses 31 and 32.
• Tracks or sends assigned to Busses 33–64 are routed to Busses 31 and 32.
• Tracks assigned to multichannel paths or subpaths of multichannel paths are routed to
Busses 31 and 32.
• Sends assigned to multichannel paths or subpaths of multichannel paths are dropped.
• Tracks or sends assigned to stereo paths referring to even/odd channels (such as 2–3) are routed to Busses 31 and 32.
• Multi-mono plug-in instances are dropped
Sharing Pro Tools LE 7.3 Sessions with Lower Versions of
Pro Tools LE
Opening Pro Tools LE 7.3 Sessions with
Pro Tools LE 7.1 or 7.0
A Pro Tools LE 7.3 session that does not contain video tracks can be opened with Pro Tools LE
7.1 or 7.0, but certain session components open differently or not at all.
When opening a Pro Tools LE 7.3 session with a version of Pro Tools LE 7.1 or 7.0, the following occurs:
Groups
• All groups beyond the first 26 (Bank 1, Groups a–z) are dropped.
• Mix Groups keep only Main Volume information.
• Mix/Edit Groups keep only Main Volume and
Automation Mode information.
Video
• Only the main video track is displayed.
• Only the first QuickTime movie in the session is displayed or played back.
• If the session contains QuickTime movies in the Region List but no video track, the session opens with a new QuickTime Movie track containing the first QuickTime movie from the Region List.
• The Timeline displays and plays back only the video playlist that was last active. Alternate video playlists are not available.
• Video regions and video region groups are not shown or saved.
252 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Sharing Pro Tools LE 7.3 Sessions with Pro Tools LE 6.9 or Lower
A Pro Tools LE 7.3 format session cannot be opened on Pro Tools LE versions 6.9.x or lower, but it can be saved to a lower compatible version. Some session components in the new copy open differently or not at all.
Saving Pro Tools LE 7.x Sessions to
Pro Tools LE 5.1 -> 6.9 Format
• Instrument tracks are split into separate Auxiliary Input and MIDI tracks.
• The following attributes are dropped.
• Region groups
• Region loops
• Sample-based MIDI regions
• Sample-based MIDI tracks
• Sends F–J and any associated automation
• Marker/Memory Locations 201–999
• Busses 17–32 (Pro Tools LE)
To save a Pro Tools 7.x session so it is compatible with Pro Tools version 6.9.x through 5.1, use the File > Save Copy In command to choose the
“Pro Tools 5.1 -> 6.9” session format.
When saving a Pro Tools LE session to Pro Tools
5.1 -> 6.9 format, the following occurs:
• All groups beyond the first 26 (Bank 1, Groups a–z) are dropped.
• Mix Groups keep only Main Volume information.
• Mix/Edit Groups keep only Main Volume and
Automation Mode information.
• Only the main video track is displayed.
• Only the first QuickTime movie in the session is displayed or played back.
• If the session contains QuickTime movies in the Region List but no video track, the session opens with a new QuickTime Movie track containing the first QuickTime movie from the Region List.
• The Timeline displays and plays back only the video playlist that was last active. Alternate video playlists are not available.
• Video regions and video region groups are not shown or saved.
• Fader Gain levels and automation breakpoints higher than +6 dB are changed to +6 dB.
• Long names are shortened to 31 characters.
Saving Pro Tools LE 7.x Sessions to
Pro Tools LE 5.0 Format
To save a Pro Tools LE 7.x session so it is compatible with Pro Tools version 5.0, use the File >
Save Copy In command to choose the
“Pro Tools 5.0” session format.
When saving a Pro Tools LE 7.x session to
Pro Tools 5.0 format, all items that occur when saving a Pro Tools LE 7.3 session to Pro Tools
5.1->6.9 format, plus the following:
• Fader Gain levels and automation breakpoints higher than +6 dB are changed to +6 dB.
• Multi-mono plug-in instances are dropped.
• Sends assigned to multichannel paths or subpaths of multichannel paths are dropped.
• Tracks assigned to “No Output” are routed to
Busses 31 and 32.
• Tracks/sends assigned to Busses 33–64 are routed to Busses 31 and 32.
• Tracks assigned to multichannel paths or subpaths of multichannel paths are routed to
Busses 31 and 32.
• Tracks/sends assigned to stereo paths referring to even/odd channels (such as 2–3) are routed to Busses 31 and 32.
Chapter 13: File and Session Management and Compatibility 253
Multilingual Application
Support for Pro Tools
Systems
(Localized OS on Mac OS X Only)
An English and localized version of Pro Tools
(such as Pro Tools Korean, simplified Chinese, or Japanese) can be opened on a Digidesignqualified Mac that can run English and the localized language versions of Mac OS X. Only one language version of Pro Tools can be open at a time.
To change to a different language version of
Pro Tools:
1 Close Pro Tools if it is currently open.
2 Launch Apple System Preferences.
3 Click International (the “flag” icon).
4 Click the Language tab if the Language page is not the current page.
5 In the Languages column, click the language you want, and drag it to the top of the list.
6 Close the International window.
7 Do one of the following:
• If you are changing from a localized language to English, launch Pro Tools.
– or –
• If you are changing from one localized language to another (or from English to a localized language), log out and log in from the Apple menu, then launch Pro Tools.
If you want your computer to start with the previous language (after working on a different language version) follow the above steps and change the International preference back to the previous language.
254 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Part IV: Recording
255
256
Chapter 14: Record Setup
Before you start recording, make sure your
Pro Tools system is connected and configured properly. For details on connecting Pro Tools to your studio, refer to the Getting Started Guide that came with your system.
While some of the information in this chapter is relevant to recording MIDI, there are more specific setup details for MIDI recording in
Input Connections and Audio
Levels
Pro Tools|HD audio interfaces operate as linelevel devices and offer no pre-amplification.
Low-level sources like microphones and electric guitars need to be pre-amplified. You can do this with a quality mixing board or dedicated preamp (such as the Digidesign PRE).
The Digidesign PRE can be used as a standalone preamp with all Pro Tools systems, or it can be remote-controlled from within a
Pro Tools session when used with a
Pro Tools|HD system.
The Digi 002 and Digi 002 Rack have four inputs with preamps, to which you can connect low-level signals, and four additional line-level inputs with switchable gain.
Mbox 2, Mbox 2 Pro, Mbox 2 Mini, and Mbox each have two inputs with preamps, to which you can connect low-level signals.
For input information on Digidesign-qualified
M-Audio units, refer to your M-Audio documentation.
For all systems, volume and pan controls for tracks in Pro Tools only affect monitoring levels—not the recording input gain. The LED meters on Digidesign audio interfaces indicate both full-code (highest level before clipping) and true clipping of Pro Tools output signals.
The on-screen meters in Pro Tools indicate only true clipping.
Digital Clipping
Clipping occurs when you feed a signal to a recorder or mixer that is louder or “hotter” than the device allows. On many analog tape decks, a little clipping adds a perceived warmth to the sound due to tape compression. In digital recording, however, clipping causes digital distortion, which is undesirable and should always be avoided.
Chapter 14: Record Setup 257
Set Input Levels High But Not High
Enough to Clip
When you feed a signal into any audio recording system, including Pro Tools, make sure to adjust the input level to optimize the dynamic range and signal-to-noise ratio of the recorded file. If the input level is too low, you will not take full advantage of the dynamic range of your
Pro Tools system. If the input level is too high, the waveform clips and distorts the recording.
Try to set levels so that they register within the top 6 dB of the input meter without triggering the clipping indicator on your audio interface.
Calibration Mode
(Pro Tools HD Only)
You can use the Calibration mode in Pro Tools to adjust the input and output levels for your audio interface so they match those of your mixing console and other audio devices in your studio.
The 192 I/O has two sets of adjustable trim pots for its inputs, and two sets of adjustable trim pots for its outputs. Additionally, the reference level for the input can be set to +4 dBu or
–10 dBV. The 888|24 I/O has adjustable trim pots for its inputs and outputs.
For more information on calibrating your audio interface, or using Calibration mode, see the 192 I/O Guide (or Calibration Mode
Instructions included with earlier shipments of 192 I/O), or the 888|24 I/O
Guide .
There are no input or output trims on the following audio interfaces: 192 Digital I/O, 96 I/O,
96i I/O, 882|20 I/O, 1622 I/O, and 24-bit ADAT
Bridge I/O. Some Digidesign I/Os that do not have output trims (such as the 96i I/O) offer software-controllable input levels, adjustable from Setup > Hardware (refer to the guide for your particular I/O).
Record Enabling Tracks
To record to a track you must first enable the track’s Record Enable button. To record simultaneously to multiple tracks, record enable multiple audio, Instrument, or MIDI tracks.
When one or more tracks are record-enabled, click the Record button (in the Transport or Edit window) to arm recording, and then click the
Play button (in the Transport or Edit window) to start recording.
MIDI and Instrument tracks can be recordenabled during playback or record. To record enable audio tracks, the Transport must be stopped, or QuickPunch, Track-
Punch, or DestructivePunch must be enabled. For more information on Quick-
Punch, TrackPunch, and DestructivePunch,
see “Record Modes” on page 268.
For information on digitizing (recording)
video in Pro Tools, see Chapter 36, “Working with Video in Pro Tools” or the Avid
Video Peripherals Guide.
258 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To record enable an audio, MIDI, or Instrument track:
â– From either the Mix or Edit window, click the track’s Record Enable button to toggle record enable on or off for the track. The Record Enable button is lit when on; also, in the Mix window, the track’s fader is highlighted.
Edit window
Mix window
Record-enabled audio track in Mix and Edit windows
To record enable multiple audio tracks:
â– From either the Mix or Edit window, click each audio track’s Record Enable button to toggle record enable on or off for each track.
If Latch Record mode is not enabled, Shiftclick each track’s Record Enable button to toggle record enable on or off for each track.
See “Latch Record Enable Buttons Preference” on page 260.
To record enable multiple MIDI and Instrument tracks:
â– From either the Mix or Edit window, Shiftclick each MIDI or Instrument track’s Record Enable button to toggle record enable on or off for each track.
To record enable MIDI and Instrument tracks using the Up/Down Arrows:
â– While pressing Control (Windows) or Command (Mac), press the Up/Down Arrows to record enable the previous or next MIDI or Instrument track. The previous (or next) record track is no longer record-enabled.
To keep the previous track record-enabled while enabling new tracks, press Control+Shift+Up/Down (Windows) or Command+Shift+Up/Down (Mac).
To record enable all audio, or all MIDI and
Instrument tracks:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
Record Enable button to toggle record enable on or off for all audio, or Instrument and MIDI tracks.
For record-enable, Pro Tools treats MIDI and Instrument tracks as the same type. Consequently,
Alt-clicking (Windows) or Option-clicking
(Mac) the Record Enable button on any MIDI or
Instrument track will record enable all MIDI and
Instrument tracks.
Chapter 14: Record Setup 259
To record enable all selected audio, or all selected
MIDI and Instrument tracks:
â– Alt-Shift-click (Windows) or Option-Shiftclick (Mac) the Record Enable button on any selected audio, or MIDI or Instrument track to toggle record enable on or off for all selected audio, or MIDI and Instrument tracks.
Record enabling a track that is part of a Mix
Group does not record enable the other tracks in the Group. To record enable all tracks in a group, click directly to the left of the group’s name in the Group List to select all tracks in the group, and then Alt-Shiftclick (Windows) or Option-Shift-click (Mac) the Record Enable button of one of the tracks to record enable the selected tracks.
Latch Record Enable Buttons
Preference
When the Latch Record Enable Buttons preference is selected, record enable additional audio tracks by clicking their Record Enable buttons.
Previously record-enabled tracks will remain enabled. The Latch Record Enable Buttons preference affects audio tracks only.
When the Latch Record Enable Buttons preference is deselected, record enabling a subsequent audio track disables the previously record-enabled audio track.
To enable the Latch Record Enable Buttons preference:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Operations tab.
2 Select Latch Record Enable Buttons.
Record Safe Mode
Pro Tools provides a Record Safe mode on a per track basis that prevents tracks from being record-enabled. Use Record Safe mode to protect important track recordings.
To put an audio or MIDI track in Record Safe mode:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the track’s Record Enable button. The
Record Enable button is greyed out.
Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) again to take the track out of Record Safe mode.
To put all tracks in Record Safe mode:
â–
Control-Alt-click (Windows) or Command-
Option-click (Mac) the Record Enable button on any track.
Control-Alt-click (Windows) or Command-Option-click (Mac) again to take all tracks out of
Record Safe mode.
To put all currently selected tracks into Record
Safe mode:
â– Control-Alt-Shift-click (Windows) or Command-Option-Shift-click (Mac) the Record Enable button on any of the selected tracks to toggle them in and out of Record Safe mode.
260 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Record Monitoring Modes
Pro Tools offers two modes of input monitoring:
Auto Input and Input Only. These monitoring modes determine how input signals are monitored during playback, record, or while the transport is stopped.
Auto Input Monitoring
In Auto Input mode, when session playback is stopped, Pro Tools monitors audio input. When playback is started for a punch-in, Pro Tools monitors existing track material up until the punch point. While punched in, the input signal is monitored. On punch-out, monitoring switches back to the existing track material. This is similar to the auto-switching logic found on digital and analog multitrack tape machines.
When in Auto Input mode, the switch back to monitoring track material on punch-out is not instantaneous.
With Pro Tools HD, tracks are in Auto Input mode by default, and a monitoring control (TrackInput button) is provided for each
track. See “Selecting Record Monitor Modes with TrackInput Monitoring” on page 261.
Input Only Monitoring
In Input Only mode, when a track is record-enabled, Pro Tools monitors audio input only, regardless of any punch-in/out selection or state.
For Pro Tools LE, the Input Monitor Enabled
Status indicator (in the Transport window) lights green when Input Only mode is enabled.
Input Monitor Enabled Status indicator
Transport window
For Pro Tools HD, the indicator lights green when one or more tracks have TrackInput enabled.
Selecting a Record Monitor Mode in Pro Tools LE
For record-enabled tracks to use Auto Input
Monitoring:
â– Select Track > Auto Input Monitoring.
For record-enabled tracks to use Input Only
Monitoring:
â–
Select Tracks > Input Only Monitoring.
To toggle between Auto Input and Input
Only monitoring, press Alt+K (Windows) or Option+K (Mac).
Selecting Record Monitor Modes with TrackInput Monitoring
(Pro Tools HD Only)
TrackInput monitoring lets you toggle individual audio tracks between Auto Input and Input
Only monitoring modes at any time, during playback, recording, while stopped, and even when a track is not record-enabled. TrackInput monitoring provides the necessary monitoring flexibility for overdubbing and mixing, and is similar to input switching on analog multitrack recorders and similar machines.
Chapter 14: Record Setup 261
When the TrackInput button in a track is enabled (green), the track monitors audio in Input
Only mode.
When the TrackInput button in a track is disabled, the track monitors in Auto Input mode.
TrackInput button
Off (Auto Input)
Disable “Input” When Disarming Track
With this Operation preference checked, Track-
Input monitoring is disabled whenever a track is taken out of record enable. This is useful for certain workflows, such as when you are recording on a series of tracks, one at a time.
Disabling this option allows TrackInput buttons to remain enabled when deselecting the track’s
Record Enable button.
TrackInput button
On (Input Only)
TrackInput Monitor buttons in the Edit Window
To toggle the monitoring mode of audio tracks, do one of the following:
â– To toggle individual tracks, click the TrackInput Monitor button for each track you want to toggle.
â– To toggle all tracks in the session, Alt-click
(Windows) or Option-click (Mac) a TrackInput
Monitor button.
â– To toggle all selected tracks in the session, Alt-
Shift-click (Windows) or Option-Shift-click
(Mac) a selected track’s TrackInput Monitor button.
To toggle the TrackInput button states of all record-enabled tracks, do one of the following:
â– To change all record-enabled tracks to Auto
Input monitoring, select Track > Set Record
Tracks to Auto Input.
â– To change all record-enabled tracks to Input
Only monitoring, select Tracks > Set Record
Tracks to Input Only.
To toggle record-enabled tracks between
Auto Input and Input Only monitoring, press Alt+K (Windows) or Option+K
(Mac).
262 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Monitor Levels for Record and
Playback
Pro Tools remembers two different fader levels for monitoring each audio track: one for when the track is record-enabled, and one for when it is not record-enabled.
Pro Tools keeps track of these two states for fader levels automatically. If you adjust a fader when a track is record-enabled and then turn off record enable for the track, the fader returns to its playback level.
When audio tracks are record-enabled, their volume faders in the Mix window turn red, indicating that the record monitor level is active.
Link Record and Play Faders
When the Operation preference for “Link
Record and Play Faders” is selected, Pro Tools does not keep track of record and play levels for audio tracks. In this case, record enabling an audio track has no effect on the fader level for the track. This lets you maintain a consistent mix regardless of whether you're recording or just listening.
Monitoring Latency
(Pro Tools LE)
Because Pro Tools LE uses the host processor in your computer for all audio processing, playback, and recording, there is a small amount of audio delay, or latency, in the system. This latency amount is related to the H/W Buffer Size— the larger the buffer size the greater the latency.
You can reduce the amount of monitoring latency for Pro Tools LE systems by reducing the
H/W Buffer Size. However, even at the smallest buffer size, there is still some latency. In addition, reducing the buffer size limits the number of simultaneous audio tracks you can record without encountering performance errors.
While there may be times when you want a larger buffer size, such as when you have higher track counts with more plug-ins, you’ll generally want a smaller buffer size when recording audio that is monitored through your
Pro Tools LE system.
If you are monitoring the recording source with an external mixer before it is routed to
Pro Tools, you will not hear any latency.
To set the Hardware Buffer Size:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
2 Choose the number of samples from the H/W
Buffer Size pop-up menu.
3 Click OK.
Computers with slower CPUs may not be able to use the 128 buffer size without encountering performance errors.
Zero Latency Monitoring
(Mbox 2, Mbox 2 Mini, and Mbox Only)
Mbox 2, Mbox Mini, and Mbox give you the ability to monitor your analog input signals while recording, without hearing any latency.
This zero-latency analog monitoring is controlled by the front panel Mix knob, which you can use to blend and adjust the ratio between the interface’s analog input and Pro Tools playback. For more information, refer to your system’s Getting Started Guide .
Low Latency Monitoring
(Digi 002, Digi 002 Rack, and Mbox 2 Pro
Only)
Digi 002, Digi 002 Rack, and Mbox 2 Pro systems can use the Low Latency Monitoring option to record with an extremely small amount of monitoring latency, to as many tracks as each system supports. Only tracks with inputs set to an audio interface (not a bus) use Low Latency
Monitoring.
To use Low Latency Monitoring:
1 Record enable audio tracks by clicking their
Record Enable buttons.
2 From the Output Path selector, assign each track to either Output 1 or Output 2 (mono), or both (stereo). Only tracks assigned to these outputs use Low Latency Monitoring.
3 Select Options > Low Latency Monitoring.
When Low Latency Monitoring is enabled, any plug-ins and sends assigned to record-enabled tracks (routed to Outputs 1–2) are automatically bypassed, and must remain bypassed. Also, these tracks do not register on meters for Master
Faders.
Chapter 14: Record Setup 263
Low Latency Monitoring and
Bounce To Disk
With Low Latency Monitoring enabled, only audio tracks are included with the Bounce to Disk command—Auxiliary Input and Instrument tracks are ignored. To include Auxiliary Input and Instrument tracks, disable Low Latency
Monitoring before using Bounce to Disk.
External input cannot be recorded during a
Bounce to Disk. To include external input in your bounce, it must be recorded to new audio tracks before using Bounce to Disk
(see “Recording to Tracks” on page 745).
Low Latency Monitoring with
Delay Compensation
(Pro Tools HD Only)
If you choose to record with Delay Compensation active, Pro Tools automatically suspends
Delay Compensation for tracks that are
“punched in” or monitoring input. In either of these cases, no compensating delay is added to the track, and the Track Compensation indicator displays zero.
Delay Compensation should be enabled whenever possible during mixing and playback. In some cases when recording, Delay Compensation should be disabled.
The automatic suspension of Delay Compensation on record-enabled tracks during recording can be defeated on a per-track basis, regardless of record status or input mode.
For information about defeating suspended
Delay Compensation, see “Low Latency
Monitoring During Recording” on page 659.
Default Track Names
When creating new audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, VCA Master, MIDI, and Instrument tracks, Pro Tools names them as “Audio,”
“Aux,” “Master,” “VCA,” “MIDI, or “Inst” accordingly and numbers them consecutively. For example, when you create two new audio tracks, their default names are “Audio 1” and
“Audio 2.” You can rename tracks and also log comments for each track.
Track names define new file and region names
when recording to a track. See “Naming Tracks” on page 126
.
Default Names for Audio Files and
Regions
When recording to an audio track, the resulting file and region names are based on the name of the track. For example, after recording for the first time on a track called “Electric Gtr,” an audio file is created with the name “Electric
Gtr_01.” In addition, a region appears in the Region List with the name “Electric Gtr_01.” This region is a whole-file region.
Subsequent record takes on the same track are named identically, but the digits (indicating the take number) are incremented (for example,
“Electric Gtr_02.”) A second set of digits (such as used in “Electric Gtr_01-01”) indicates that the region was auto-created from an edit.
QuickPunch, TrackPunch, and Destructive
Punch modes use a different method for
numbering regions. For details, see “Region and Take Numbering with QuickPunch” on page 316.
264 Pro Tools Reference Guide
When recording MIDI tracks, a similar naming scheme is used, though with only one set of digits. For example, after recording to a track called
“Synth 1,” a region is created called “Synth 1-
01.” Subsequent regions for that track, generating either from additional record takes or region edits, are numbered sequentially (for example,
“Synth 1-02”).
Names for Stereo Audio Tracks
When recording to stereo audio tracks, audio file and region names for the left and right channels are appended with a “.L” and “.R” suffix.
Names for Multichannel Tracks
(Pro Tools HD Only)
When recording to multichannel surround tracks, audio file and region names for each channel are appended with the following suffixes:
6.1
7.0
7.1
Multichannel
Format
LCR
Quad
LCRS
5.0
5.1
6.0
File and Region Suffixes
L, C, R
L, R, Ls, Rs
L, C, R, S
L, C, R, Ls, Rs
L, C, R, Ls, Rs, LFE
L, C, R, Ls, Cs, Rs, LFE
L, C, R, Ls, Cs, Rs
L, Lc, C, R, Rc, Ls, Rs
L, Lc, C, R, Rc, Ls, Rs, LFE
Disk Allocation
By default, Pro Tools records audio files to the
Audio Files folder inside the session folder. You can use the Disk Allocation window to specify other locations for your audio files for each audio track.
Hard drives that are full do not appear in the
Disk Allocation window.
To increase system performance, Pro Tools can record and play each track from a different hard drive. You can also automatically distribute any newly created tracks to multiple audio drives with Round Robin Allocation.
Navigating in the Disk Allocation Window
To resize the Disk Allocation window:
â– Drag the lower-right corner of the window according to standard convention for your operating system (Windows or Mac).
To scroll up or down in the Disk Allocation window:
â–
Press Page Up or Page Down.
Chapter 14: Record Setup 265
Allocating Audio Drives in Your System
To allocate the audio drives in your system:
1 Choose Setup > Disk Allocation.
2 In the Disk Allocation window, assign a hard drive for each track by clicking in the Root Media Folder column and selecting a volume from the Disk Allocation pop-up menu.
Disk Allocation window
Only drives designated as R (Play and Record) can be selected in the Disk Allocation window.
For more information, see “Performance and
Transfer Volumes” on page 167.
• To make a continuous selection, Shift-click a track name (in the Track column) to extend the selection to include already-selected tracks and all tracks in between.
• To make a noncontiguous selection, Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) a track name in the Track column to extend the selection to include already-selected tracks without including tracks inbetween.
3 To save recorded audio files to an existing folder (without creating another session folder), select Customize Allocation Options, then click the Change button and choose the folder. To create subfolders in this folder, select “Create
Subfolders for audio, video, and fade files.”
4 To automatically distribute any newly created tracks among the drives connected to your system, select “Use Round Robin Allocation for
New Tracks.”
If you are using Round Robin Allocation and want audio to be recorded to your system’s startup drive, do the following:
• Open the Workspace browser (Window >
Workspace) and set the Volume Designator for your system volume to R (Record and
Playback). See “Workspace Volume Designation” on page 267.
Round Robin Allocation is not supported with partitioned hard drives.
Disk Allocation pop-up menu
A folder with the session name is created on each hard drive, containing subfolders for audio and fade files.
• To assign a track to a different hard drive, click the track and select a drive name.
• To assign all tracks to the same hard drive, press Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) while selecting a drive name.
If you want to exclude individual, valid, mounted volumes from Round Robin Allocation passes, open the Workspace browser and make the volume safe, by designating it as P (Playback only) or T (Transfer). For
more information, see “Audio and Video
Volume Designators” on page 196.
5 When you are finished, click OK.
266 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Saving Disk Allocation Settings
To save Disk Allocation settings for use with future sessions, save the session as a template. For
details, see “Creating Custom Session Templates” on page 91.
Disk Allocation and Cross-Platform
Sessions
To ensure cross-platform operation, it is required that Mac Pro Tools sessions and their associated audio files be on Mac-formatted (HFS or
HFS+) drives. Windows Pro Tools sessions and their associated audio files must be on Windows-formatted (NTFS or FAT32) drives.
See “Saving Copies of Mac Sessions to be
Compatible with Windows” on page 246
and “Sharing Sessions Created on Different
Computer Platforms” on page 244.
On Windows, with the Digidesign HFS+
Disk Support option installed, you can record to and play back from Mac-formatted
HFS+ drives. For more information, see the
Mac HFS+ Disk Support Option Guide.
Reallocating Tracks
When opening a session where some of the previously assigned hard drives are no longer available (or do not match the current session platform), Pro Tools automatically reassigns tracks to the volume where the session file is stored. In such cases, use Disk Allocation if you need to reallocate tracks to other drives.
Reallocating tracks does not affect the previously recorded audio. Reallocating tracks only affects where new audio recording is saved.
Workspace Volume Designation
The Workspace volume designation can alter disk availability, thus affecting Disk Allocation.
From the Workspace browser, you can designate volumes as Record, Playback, or Transfer. If you change a drive’s designation, making it readonly (Play Only or Transfer), check the Disk Allocation window for any tracks formerly allocated to that drive. For more information, see
“Audio and Video Volume Designators” on page 196.
Recording to the System Volume
Pro Tools lets you record to your system volume, however this is generally not recommended. Performance for audio recording and playback on system drives is not as good as on non-system hard drives.
Record to system drives only when absolutely necessary, such as if your computer system has only one hard drive, or if your other hard drives are completely full.
By default, the system volume is not included in
Round Robin Allocation (regardless of volume designation in the Workspace browser). To include the System Volume in Round Robin Allo-
cations, see “Allocating Audio Drives in Your
Chapter 14: Record Setup 267
Allocating Hard Drive Space for Recording
The Operation preference for Open Ended
Record Allocation determines how much of your available hard drive space is allocated whenever you record into one or more tracks in
Pro Tools.
When this allocation preference is set to Use All
Available Space, the drive’s entire available space is allocated. This setting lets you record lengthy takes, or longer sessions.
However, when allocating all available space,
Pro Tools may take a little longer to begin recording. You can reduce this delay by allocating a specific amount of time for recording.
You can also avoid recording delays by putting Pro Tools in Record Pause mode before
beginning to record. See“Record Pause
In general, the Use All Available Space preference makes hard drives work harder. In addition to record and punch lag times, many systems see better overall recording performance when the Open Ended Record Allocation is limited.
To allocate a specific amount of time to recording:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Operation tab.
2 Under the Open Ended Record Allocation option, select Limit To and enter the number of minutes to be allocated.
Open Ended Record Allocation, Operation preference
The number of minutes specified is allocated for each record-enabled track.
268 Pro Tools Reference Guide
3 When you are finished, click OK.
Monitoring Drive Space
To monitor available space on your drive during a
Pro Tools session:
â– Choose Window > Disk Space.
To display available drive space in different view formats:
â– Choose View > Disk Space, and select a format
(Text View or Gas Gauge).
Record Modes
For recording audio, Pro Tools has the following
Record modes:
• Normal (Nondestructive)
• Destructive
• Loop
• QuickPunch
• TrackPunch (Pro Tools HD only)
• DestructivePunch (Pro Tools HD only)
To select the Record mode, do one of the following:
â– Select the Record mode in the Options menu.
If no Record mode is selected, Pro Tools is in
Normal (Nondestructive) Record mode.
â– Right-click the Record button in the Transport and select the Record mode from the pop-up menu.
You can also cycle through the Pro Tools record modes with the Transport stopped, by Start-clicking (Windows) or Controlclicking (Mac) the Record button.
The Record button changes to indicate the selected Record mode as follows:
• Blank for Normal (Nondestructive)
• “D” for Destructive
• Loop symbol for Loop Record
• “P” for QuickPunch
• “T” for TrackPunch (Pro Tools HD only)
• “DP” for DestructivePunch (Pro Tools HD only)
Destructive Record mode enabled
When recording, you can preserve disk space by removing unwanted record takes
(see “Removing Unwanted Regions” on page 490) and compacting audio files (see
“Compacting an Audio File” on page 488).
Normal (Nondestructive) Record Mode
In Normal, Nondestructive Record mode,
Pro Tools records audio nondestructively, which means that if you record over a track’s existing regions, the audio is not erased from your hard drive. Both the new and old audio files remain on your hard drive, available as regions from the
Region List.
In Normal Record mode, the record range can be defined by selecting a range in a ruler or in a track’s playlist, or by specifying start and end points in the Transport window. If there is no selection, recording begins from the current
Cursor location and continues until the Transport’s Stop button is clicked.
To set a record range by selecting within a track’s playlist, the Timeline and Edit selec-
tions must be linked. See “Linking or Unlinking Timeline and Edit Selections” on page 396.
The pre- and post-roll settings allow material to be heard up to and after the start and end points, which is useful when punch recording
(see “Punch Recording Audio” on page 283).
Destructive Record Mode
In Destructive Record mode, recording over existing regions replaces the original audio permanently, which allows you to keep disk use to a minimum. However, if you have sufficient drive space, it is usually best to use Pro Tools in Nondestructive Record mode, to avoid losing any previously recorded material.
When defining the record range and setting pre- and post-roll, Destructive Record mode works the same as Normal (Nondestructive) mode.
Unlike the other record modes, it is not possible to cancel or Undo record takes when using De-
structive Record mode (see “Canceling a Record
In Destructive Record mode, the waveform overview is not redrawn until you stop recording.
Chapter 14: Record Setup 269
Loop Record Mode
Loop Record mode allows you to record take after take (nondestructively) while the same section of audio repeats. This is a convenient technique for quickly recording multiple takes of a part without losing spontaneity.
The time range that is looped and recorded— which must be at least one second in length—is defined by selecting a range in a ruler or in a track’s playlist, or by specifying start and end points in the Transport window. The pre-roll setting, if enabled, is used during the first record pass, but on each successive loop the pre- and post-roll times are ignored.
To set a record range by selecting within a track’s playlist, the Timeline and Edit selec-
tions must be linked. See “Linking or Unlinking Timeline and Edit Selections” on page 396.
When using Loop Record mode, each successive take appears as a region in the Region List and each is numbered sequentially. The various takes, which are identical in length and start time, are easily auditioned and placed in the track at the correct location with the Matches
pop-up menu (see “Auditioning Different
Record Takes in the Timeline” on page 286).
In Loop Record mode, the waveform overview is not redrawn until you stop recording.
QuickPunch
QuickPunch gives you the ability to manually and instantaneously punch in (initiate recording) and punch out (stop recording) on recordenabled audio tracks during playback by clicking the Record button in the Transport. Recording with QuickPunch is nondestructive.
When using QuickPunch, Pro Tools begins recording a new file when playback begins, automatically generating regions in that file at each punch in/out point. These regions appear in the track’s playlist; and the complete audio file appears in the Region List along with the Quick-
Punch created regions. Up to 200 of these “running punches” can be performed in a single pass.
Though you can punch record in the other record modes by manually specifying the record range, only QuickPunch provides instantaneous monitor switching on punch-out.
For more information on QuickPunch, see
“QuickPunch Audio Recording” on page 313.
TrackPunch
(Pro Tools HD Only)
TrackPunch lets individual tracks be punched in, punched out, and taken out of record enable without interrupting online recording and playback.
TrackPunch is a nondestructive recording mode. When a track is TrackPunch-enabled,
Pro Tools begins recording a new file when playback begins. During playback, you may record arm or disarm, or punch in or out a combination of any or all TrackPunch enabled tracks.
TrackPunch automatically creates regions in that file at each punch-in and punch-out point.
These regions appear in the track’s playlist, and the complete audio file appears in the Region
List along with the TrackPunch created regions.
Up to 200 of these “running punches” can be performed in a single pass.
For more information on TrackPunch, see
“TrackPunch Audio Recording” on page 316.
270 Pro Tools Reference Guide
DestructivePunch
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Destructive Punch is a destructive recording mode that lets you instantaneously punch in
(start recording) and punch out (stop recording) on individual audio tracks during playback, while preserving a contiguous audio file on each punched track.
For more information on DestructivePunch,
see “DestructivePunch Audio Recording” on page 325.
Record Modes and MIDI
In addition to the various record modes, there is also a MIDI Merge button in the Transport window that determines how MIDI is recorded.
When enabled ( Merge mode), recording over existing MIDI regions results in the new data being merged with the old. When the MIDI Merge button is disabled ( Replace mode), the new material replaces the old.
MIDI Merge button
MIDI Merge enabled
MIDI recording works the same whether using
Nondestructive or Destructive Record mode. In addition, neither QuickPunch nor TrackPunch need to be enabled to punch on-the-fly with
MIDI—this capability is available in Nondestructive and Destructive Record modes.
Unlike audio loop recording, the state of the
MIDI Merge toggle determines whether existing material is replaced or merged.
Unless MIDI Merge is enabled, MIDI recording is destructive (though you can undo a MIDI record pass), either overwriting or adding to region material. One exception to this rule is when Loop
Record mode is enabled; in this mode, existing track regions are replaced with new regions when new material is recorded. The old regions remain intact and available from the Region
List, and from the Matches pop-up menu. In
Loop Record mode, MIDI Merge has no effect, so its button is dimmed.
Recording with a Click
If you intend to work with MIDI or Instrument tracks in your session, or if the audio you’re working with is bar and beat-oriented, you can record your tracks while listening to a click . This ensures that recorded material, both MIDI and audio, aligns with the session’s bar and beat boundaries.
When your track material lines up with the beats, you can take advantage of some useful editing functions in Pro Tools, such as quantizing
MIDI and audio regions, quantizing individual
MIDI notes, and copying and pasting measures and song sections in Grid mode.
Material that is recorded without listening to a click can still be aligned to bar and beat boundaries in Pro Tools with Beat Detective
(see Chapter 24, “Beat Detective”), or use
the Identify Beat command to determine the
tempo (see “Identify Beat Command” on page 509).
You can record MIDI with or without a click and manually add Bar|Beat markers or generate a tempo and meter map from it by us-
ing Beat Detective. See Chapter 24, “Beat
Chapter 14: Record Setup 271
Creating a Click Track
Pro Tools lets you create a Click track using the
DigiRack Click plug-in. You can also create a click track using MIDI.
For more information on the Click plug-in, see the DigiRack Plug-ins Guide.
To create a click track using the DigiRack Click plug-in:
â–
Choose Track > Create Click Track.
Pro Tools creates a new Auxiliary Input track named “Click” with the Click plug-in already inserted. In the Edit window, the click track’s
Track Height is set to Mini. You can create more than one click track and each subsequent click track is named in sequence. For example, Click
1, Click 2, and Click 3.
To hear the click during playback and recording,
configure the Click Options (see “Click Options” on page 272) and ensure that Click is en-
abled (see “Enabling Click” on page 273).
To create a click track using MIDI:
1 Create a new (mono) Auxiliary Input or Instrument track.
2 Do one of the following:
• From the track’s Input selector, select the path to which the MIDI device is connected.
– or –
• Insert an instrument plug-in on the track
(such as Digidesign’s Xpand!).
3 Configure the Click/Countoff options, and be sure to select the port for the MIDI device or instrument plug-in from the Output pop-up menu
(see “Click Options” on page 272).
4 Enable Click (see “Enabling Click” on page 273).
272 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Click Options
Pro Tools provides options and controls for driving a click. The following steps are for configuring and enabling a click using the DigiRack
Click plug-in or MIDI.
To configure click options:
1 Open the Click/Countoff Options dialog by doing one of the following:
• Choose Setup > Click.
– or –
• Double-click the Metronome Click or
Countoff button in the Transport window.
2 In the Click/Countoff Options dialog, do one of the following:
• If using the DigiRack Click plug-in, select
None in the Output pop-up menu.
– or –
• If playing a click using MIDI, select the port number (device) and channel for the click from the Output pop-up menu.
Click/Countoff Options dialog
3 Specify the note, velocity, and duration for the accented and unaccented notes.
If one is connected, you can also play new note values on a MIDI controller keyboard.
When listening to the click in your Pro Tools sessions, the accented note sounds on the first beat of each measure and the unaccented note sounds on the remaining beats.
4 Select whether the click is heard “During play and record,” or “Only during record,” or “Only during countoff.”
5 If using a countoff, specify the number of Bars to be counted off. To hear the countoff only when recording, select that option.
6 Click OK.
Enabling Click
Click tracks must be enabled to be heard during playback or recording.
To enable click from the MIDI menu:
â– Select Options > Click.
To enable click in the Transport:
1 Display the MIDI controls in the Transport by doing one of the following:
• Select View > Transport > MIDI Controls.
• Control-click (Windows) or Commandclick (Mac) the Expand/Collapse “+” button in the Transport window to display the
MIDI controls.
• Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the Expand/Collapse “+” button in the
Transport window to display the MIDI controls and the Counters.
Expand/Collapse “+” button
2 In the Transport, click the Metronome Click button so it is highlighted.
Metronome Click button
Metronome Click enabled
3 To use a countoff when recording or playing, click the Countoff button in the Transport so it is highlighted.
Countoff button
Countoff enabled
Hearing the countoff before recording helps musicians to start playing at the right time and in tempo. The Countoff button in the Transport window displays the number of bars counted off.
The countoff is ignored when Pro Tools is online and synchronized to SMPTE time code.
Transport Window with MIDI Controls
Chapter 14: Record Setup 273
Setting the Default Meter and
Tempo
2 Enter the Meter for the session and set the Location to 1|1|000 (to ensure that the inserted meter event replaces the default).
Setting the Default Meter
When opening a new session in Pro Tools, the meter defaults to 4/4. If you intend to record with a click in a meter other than 4/4, make sure to set the default meter accordingly.
If a session’s meter does not match the music you’re recording, the accented clicks will not line up with what you’re playing, and, as a result, the recorded material may not align with the bars and beats in the Edit window.
Meter events, which can occur anywhere within a Pro Tools session, are stored in the Meter Track and appear in the Meter ruler. For more information on inserting and editing meter events,
see “Meter Events” on page 512.
To set the default meter for a session:
1 Double-click the Current Meter button in the
Transport window.
Current Meter button
Meter Change window
3 From the Click pop-up menu, select a note value for the beat.
4 Click OK to insert the new meter event.
Setting the Default Tempo
When opening a new session in Pro Tools, the tempo defaults to 120 BPM. If you intend to record with a click at a tempo other than
120 bpm, make sure to set the default tempo accordingly.
Tempo events, which can occur anywhere within a Pro Tools session, are stored in the
Tempo track and appear in the Tempo ruler. For more information on inserting
and editing tempo events, see “Tempo” on page 492.
274 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To insert a default tempo event:
1 Double-click the Song Start Marker in the Edit
window (see “Song Start Marker” on page 491).
2 Enter the BPM value you will use for the session.
3 Set the Location to 1|1|000 (to ensure that the inserted tempo event replaces the default).
To set the Manual Tempo with the Tempo slider:
1 To view the MIDI controls in the Transport window, select View > Transport > MIDI Controls.
2 In the Transport window, click the Tempo
Ruler Enable button (Conductor) button so it becomes unhighlighted. Pro Tools switches to
Manual Tempo mode. In this mode, any tempo events in the Tempo track are ignored.
Tempo Ruler
Enable button
Tempo Change window
4 From the Resolution pop-up menu, select the note value for the beat.
5 Click OK.
Using Manual Tempo Mode
In Manual Tempo mode, Pro Tools ignores tempo events in the Tempo track and instead plays back a Manual Tempo. This tempo can be set with the Tempo slider, or if you are not sure of the actual tempo, by tapping in the tempo.
While you can adjust the Manual Tempo during playback, doing so momentarily interrupts playback.
Tempo Resolution selector
Manual Tempo mode enabled
3 To base the BPM value on something other than the default quarter-note, click the Tempo
Resolution selector and select a different note value.
4 To enter a new tempo, drag the horizontal
Tempo slider in the Transport window.
Tempo slider
Tempo slider
For finer resolution with the Tempo slider, press
Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) while dragging.
To exit Manual Tempo mode and enable the Tempo track:
â– Click the Tempo Ruler Enable (Conductor) button in the Transport window so it becomes highlighted.
Chapter 14: Record Setup 275
To set the Manual Tempo by tapping:
1 To view the MIDI controls in the Transport window, select View > Transport > MIDI Controls.
2 In the Transport window, click the Tempo
Ruler Enable (Conductor) button so it becomes unhighlighted. Pro Tools switches to Manual
Tempo mode. In this mode, any tempo events in the Tempo track are ignored.
3 Do one of the following:
• Click in the Tempo field so it becomes highlighted and tap the “T” key on your computer keyboard repeatedly at the new tempo.
– or –
• Click in the Tempo field so it becomes highlighted and tap in the tempo by playing a note repeatedly at the new tempo on your MIDI keyboard controller.
To compute the new tempo, Pro Tools averages the last eight (or fewer) taps to determine the correct tempo. The computed BPM value appears in the Transport window’s Tempo field.
To lock in the new tempo:
â– Take Pro Tools out of Manual Tempo mode by clicking the Tempo Ruler Enable (Conductor) button, then set the default tempo for the Song
Start Marker to the new tempo.
276 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 15: Audio Recording
Recording an Audio Track
In Pro Tools, you record audio to audio tracks.
Audio tracks can be mono, stereo, or multichannel as appropriate for the recording source.
When recording a mono source, record to a single, mono audio track in Pro Tools. A single, mono audio file is written to disk, and the file appears as a region both in the track’s playlist and in the Region List.
When recording a stereo audio source, record to a single, stereo audio track in Pro Tools. A single, mono audio file is written to disk for each channel of a stereo track: one for the left channel, and one for the right channel. These files appear as a stereo region both in the track’s playlist and in the Region List.
Recording a multichannel source to a multichannel track (Pro Tools HD only) is similar to recording stereo audio tracks. A single, mono audio file is written for each channel in the track, and these files appear as multichannel regions in both the track’s playlist and in the Region List.
For more information on multichannel
tracks, see “Multichannel Audio Tracks” on page 766.
To configure an audio track for recording:
1 Connect mono or stereo sound sources to inputs on your Pro Tools audio interface.
2 Choose Setup > Hardware and do the following:
• Select the audio interface to be used for recording your source.
• Select the channel format corresponding to the number of channels for your source.
Some Pro Tools audio interfaces (such as
Mbox 2), have only two channels that can only be set to either analog or digital.
3 Create a new mono or stereo audio track (see
“Creating Tracks” on page 125).
4 Rename the track something descriptive or your source (such as “Guitar” or “Vocal”), or use the default track name.
Chapter 15: Audio Recording 277
5 Assign a hardware input (recording source) by doing one of the following:
• In the Mix window, select the corresponding hardware input for your source from the track’s Input Path selector.
Input Path selector, Mix window
– or –
• In the Edit window, with I/O View enabled, select the corresponding hardware input for your source from the track’s Input Path selector.
Output Path selector, Edit window
7 Record enable the track by doing one of the following:
• In the Mix window, click the track’s Record
Enable button.
Record
Enable
Input Path selector, Edit window
6 Assign a hardware output by doing one of the following:
• In the Mix window, select the corresponding hardware output for monitoring (such as A 1–2) from the track’s Output Path selector.
Track Record Enable button (Mix window)
– or –
• In the Edit window, click the track’s Record
Enable button.
Record
Enable
Output Path selector, Mix window
– or –
• In the Edit window, with I/O View enabled, select the corresponding hardware output for monitoring (such as A 1–2) from the track’s Output Path selector.
Track Record Enable button (Edit window)
The track’s Record Enable button flashes red, the track’s fader is solid red, and the Track Record
Enabled indicator in the Transport turns red (indicating at least one track is record-enabled).
278 Pro Tools Reference Guide
8 Adjust the output level of your sound source
(instrument, mixer, or preamp). Monitor the track’s meter levels in Pro Tools to ensure that you get the highest possible signal without clipping.
9 Do one of the following:
• In the Mix window, adjust the track’s volume and pan faders. These settings are for monitoring purposes only and do not affect the recorded material.
– or –
• In the Output window for the track, adjust the track’s Volume fader and Pan sliders.
These settings are for monitoring purposes only and do not affect the recorded mate-
rial. (See “Output Windows for Tracks and
To record to an audio track :
1 With Pro Tools HD, make sure that Delay
Compensation is deselected in the Options menu.
Digidesign recommends recording without
Delay Compensation in most cases. For
more information, see “Delay Compensation” on page 656.
2 In the Options menu, ensure that the following are deselected: Destructive Record, Loop
Record, QuickPunch, TrackPunch, and DestructivePunch.
3 Enable Click and Countoff in the Transport window to record with a click and countoff (see
“Recording with a Click” on page 271).
4 If you are using meter and tempo information, specify the session’s default meter and
tempo (see “Setting the Default Meter and
5 To have recording start from the beginning of the session, click Return to Zero in the Transport.
6 Click Record in the Transport to arm Pro Tools for recording (Record Ready mode). The Record button flashes.
7 Click Play in the Transport to begin recording.
If using Countoff, Pro Tools counts off the specified number of measures and then begins recording.
8 Click Stop in the Transport to stop recording.
The newly recorded audio is written to disk and appears as an audio region both in the track’s playlist and in the Region List.
To play back the audio track:
1 Click the Record Enable button for the audio track so that it is no longer record-enabled.
Track volume faders now function as playback level controls.
If a record-enabled track is in Auto Input
Monitor mode, you will hear “through” the input while the Transport is stopped. The track automatically switches to playback when you press play, then back to Input mode when you either stop, or punch into
record. For more information, see “Auto Input Monitoring” on page 261.
2 To have playback start from the beginning of the session, click Return to Zero in the Transport.
3 To start playback, click Play in the Transport.
Adjust the track’s volume and pan faders.
Chapter 15: Audio Recording 279
Undo or Cancel Audio Recording
Once you have recorded an audio track and the transport is stopped, you can undo the record take.
To undo an audio recording:
â– Once the Transport has been stopped, choose
Edit > Undo Record Audio.
The track’s playlist is restored to its previous state and material is discarded as follows:
• When in normal Record mode, only the most recent take is discarded.
• When in Loop Record mode, all takes from each record pass are discarded.
• When using QuickPunch, TrackPunch, or
DestructivePunch mode, all punches from the last recording pass are discarded.
If you undo a record pass during recording,
Pro Tools removes any previously undone record pass from the session and lets you delete the previous record pass from your hard drive.
If no actions are available to undo, the menu displays a grayed out Can’t Undo.
Canceling a Record Take
While recording, it is possible to discard the current record take. This removes the audio (recorded up to that point) from your hard drive and deletes the region from the track’s playlist and the Region List. When using Loop Record mode, all takes from each record pass are discarded. Canceling recording when in Destructive Record mode is prohibited.
To cancel a record take while recording:
â– Press Control+Period (.) (Windows) or Command+Period (.) (Mac) before the Transport is stopped.
280 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Recording Multiple Audio Tracks
Pro Tools can record multiple audio tracks simultaneously, up to the track recording limits of your system. To record to multiple tracks, configure and record enable each track, then record.
Follow the same steps as in “Recording an Audio
For each record-enabled track, a new audio file is written to disk, and a new region is created that appears both in the track’s playlist and in the
Region List.
Record Shortcuts
In addition to clicking the Record button in the
Transport or Edit window to arm Pro Tools recording, you can arm and start recording with the following keyboard shortcuts:
• Press F12 to start recording immediately.
On Mac systems, to use F12 for recording, the Mac “Dashboard” feature must be disabled or remapped. See your Getting Started
Guide for details.
• Press Control+Spacebar (Windows) or Command+Spacebar (Mac) to start recording.
On Mac systems, to use Command+Spacebar for recording, the Mac “Spotlight” feature must be disabled or remapped. See your Getting Started Guide for details.
• Press 3 on the numeric keypad (when the Numeric Keypad mode is set to Transport) to start recording.
To initiate recording at half-speed, press
Control+Shift+Spacebar (Windows) or
Command+Shift+Spacebar (Mac). For de-
tails, see “Half-Speed Recording and Playback” on page 295.
Record Pause Mode
When recording a large number of tracks or channels, or playing back a large number of tracks while recording, Pro Tools may take a little longer to begin recording. To avoid this delay, put Pro Tools in Record Pause mode before beginning to record.
To record from Record Pause mode:
1 Click Record in the Transport. The Record button flashes.
2 Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac)
Play in the Transport to put Pro Tools in Record
Pause mode. The Play and Record buttons both flash.
3 To begin recording instantaneously, click Play.
4 Click Stop to stop recording.
When synchronizing to time code, use
Record Pause mode to record or play back large numbers of tracks. This decreases the time it takes to lock to time code.
Recording Additional Takes
After recording to an audio track, you can record additional takes to the same track. However, if you record these additional takes in Destructive
Record mode, the audio residing on your hard drive from the previous takes is permanently lost.
To keep the audio from previous takes, record the new takes in Normal (Nondestructive)
Record mode.
For information on audio file and region
names for new takes, see “Default Track
To nondestructively record a new take on the same track:
1 In the Options menu, ensure that the following options are deselected: Destructive Record,
Loop Record, QuickPunch, TrackPunch, and DestructivePunch.
2 Record enable the track.
3 Do one of the following:
• To record from the beginning of the session, click Return to Zero in the Transport.
– or –
• If Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection is enabled, click anywhere in the track’s playlist to begin recording from that point.
To record a specific track range, with precise
start and end points, see “Punch Recording
4 Click Record in the Transport to arm Pro Tools for recording.
5 Click Play to start recording.
6 Click Stop to stop recording.
An audio file for the new take is written to disk and appears as an audio region both in the track’s playlist and in the Region List.
The audio from the original take remains on your hard drive, and is still available as a region in the Region List.
Chapter 15: Audio Recording 281
To destructively record over a previous take:
1 Select Options > Destructive Record. When in
Destructive Record mode, a “D” appears in the
Record button.
Destructive
Record
Destructive Record mode enabled
2 Record enable the track.
3 Do one of the following:
• To record from the beginning of the track, click Return to Zero in the Transport.
– or –
• If Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection is enabled, click anywhere in the track’s playlist to begin recording from that point.
To record a specific track range, with precise
start and end points, see “Punch Recording
4 Click Record in the Transport to arm Pro Tools for recording.
5 Click Play to start recording.
6 When finished, click Stop to stop recording.
The audio for the new take is written to disk, permanently overwriting the original. The new material replaces the original material within the existing region and the region is not renamed.
Appending New Material to the End of a
Track
You can also append new material to the end of a track.
To append new material to the end of a track:
1 Do one of the following:
• Click the Go to End button in the Transport to locate to the end of the track (this locates the end of the session).
– or –
• Tab to the end point of the last region on the track.
2 From there, begin recording.
Pro Tools adds the new material to the end of the track. If using Destructive Record mode, the new audio is appended to the audio file and region from the first take. In Nondestructive
Record mode, a new file and region are created.
Recording to a New Playlist
Instead of recording over existing audio regions, there is another way to nondestructively record new takes to the same track. Do this by creating a new playlist for the track, then record just as before.
Tracks can have multiple edit playlists, each of which stores a list of regions strung together in a particular order. Also, since playlists follow groups, duplicating or selecting alternate playlists for a track in an enabled group will affect all tracks in the group.
282 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To record to a new playlist for a track:
1 From the track’s Playlist selector, choose New.
Playlist selector
2 Enter a name for the new playlist.
3 Click OK.
When a new playlist is created, its name replaces the track name. Names for new audio files and regions are based on the track name.
4 Record enable the track.
5 To start from the beginning of the session, click Return to Zero in the Transport.
6 Click Record in the Transport to arm Pro Tools for recording.
7 Click Play to start recording.
8 Click Stop to stop recording.
An audio file for the new take is written to disk and appears as an audio region both in the track’s new playlist and in the Region List.
Selecting a previous playlist from track’s Playlist selector recalls its regions as they previously appeared in the track. At any time, all regions from all playlists are available in the Region List, and can be mixed and matched between playlists and tracks.
For more information on playlists and play-
list editing, see “Playlists” on page 352.
Punch Recording Audio
To define a record range in the playlist, or replace a portion of a recorded track, you can punch in by specifying the record range before recording.
To manually punch in and out on recordenabled audio tracks during playback, refer
to Chapter 17, “Advanced Punch Recording.”
Though there are several ways to set record and
play ranges (see “Setting Punch/Loop Points” on page 288), perhaps the easiest is to select within
the track’s playlist the range for recording.
To set a record or play range by selecting within a playlist, the Edit and Timeline selections must be linked (select Options >
Link Timeline and Edit Selection).
During the recording process, playback begins at the pre-roll time (if enabled) and proceeds to the start time (the punch-in point), where recording begins. When the end time (the punchout point) is reached, Pro Tools automatically switches out of Record mode and continues playing through the specified amount of postroll. This automated punch-in/out feature is a powerful and precise way of recording or re-recording on a track.
Chapter 15: Audio Recording 283
To punch record on an audio track:
1 Do one of the following:
• To record nondestructively, make sure that
Options > Destructive Record is not selected.
– or –
• If you do want to permanently record over the specified record range, select Options >
Destructive Record.
If you are recording in any mode other than
Destructive Record mode, punches do not permanently replace previously recorded material. If you do want to permanently record over the specified record range (and keep only the most recent take), select Options > Destructive Record.
2 Record enable the track.
3 Select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
4 With the Selector tool, drag in the track’s playlist until the selection encompasses the punch
range (see “Setting Punch/Loop Points” on page 288).
5 To hear any existing track material up to the start point, or after the end point, enable and set
pre- and post-roll times (see “Setting Pre- and
6 Click Record in the Transport to arm Pro Tools for recording.
7 Click Play to start recording.
Pro Tools starts recording from the punch-in
(start) point. If there is any pre-roll, recording starts when the punch-in (start) point is reached. Recording continues until the punchout (end) point is reached (unless you manually stop recording first). If post-roll is enabled, playback continues for the specified post-roll amount.
284 Pro Tools Reference Guide
If recording nondestructively, a new audio file is written to your hard drive and a new audio region appears both in the track and the Region
List.
If recording in Destructive Record mode, the new audio overwrites the previous material in the existing audio file and region.
Monitoring During Punch-Ins
Pro Tools provides two monitoring modes for recording: Auto Input monitoring and Input
Only monitoring.
For more information, see “Auto Input
Loop Recording Audio
Pro Tools provides a loop recording feature that lets you record take after take while the same section of audio repeats over and over. This is a convenient technique for quickly recording multiple takes of a part without losing spontaneity.
When loop recording, you must first specify the start and end points for the loop. Though there are several ways to set record and play ranges
(see “Setting Punch/Loop Points” on page 288),
the easiest is to select the range to be looped in the track’s playlist (ensure that Options > Link
Timeline and Edit Selection is selected).
The pre-roll setting, if enabled, is used only during the first record pass, and the post-roll setting, if enabled, is used only on the last record pass. Pre- and post-roll times are ignored on each successive loop. To compensate for this, you may want to make the loop range slightly longer. Later, you can trim back the recorded takes to the proper length with the Trim tool
(see “Using the Trim Tools” on page 374).
When loop recording audio, Pro Tools creates a single audio file that includes all takes. Takes appear as individual regions in the Region List and are numbered sequentially. Once you stop recording, you can audition any of the recorded takes.
To use alternate takes created with Loop
Record in other sessions (such as when using Import Session Data), export region def-
initions (see “Exporting Region Definitions” on page 230). If region definitions
are not exported, alternate takes created with Loop Record will be inaccessible when imported into another session.
To loop record an audio track:
1 Select Options > Loop Record. When Loop
Record mode is enabled, a loop symbol appears in the Record button.
Loop Recording enabled
2 Record enable the audio track by clicking its
Record Enable button.
3 Select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
4 With the Selector tool, select the loop range on the track. For other methods of setting the
record range, see “Setting Punch/Loop Points” on page 288.
5 To hear track material up to the start point of the loop, enable pre-roll and set the pre-roll
time (see “Setting Pre- and Post-Roll” on page 291).
6 Click Record in the Transport to arm Pro Tools for recording.
7 Click Play to start recording.
The Record button flashes during the pre-roll.
When the start point is reached, Pro Tools begins recording. When the end point is reached,
Pro Tools loops back to the start time and continues recording.
8 To cancel all recorded takes while loop recording, press Control+Period (.) (Windows) or
Command+Period (.) (Mac).
9 When finished, click Stop to stop recording.
If you stop recording before you reach the midpoint of the loop, Pro Tools discards that take. If you record more than half of the looped take,
Pro Tools will leave the take in the track when you stop recording.
The recorded takes appear as regions in the Region List and are numbered sequentially. The most recently recorded take appears in the active playlist on the track. For details on audi-
tioning the different takes, see “Auditioning Different Record Takes in the Timeline” on page 286.
Loop Playback and Audio Recording
Pro Tools ignores “loop playback” when recording. The only way to loop while recording is to enable Loop Record mode.
Chapter 15: Audio Recording 285
Auditioning Different Record
Takes in the Timeline
After recording multiple takes with loop or punch recording, you can replace the current take in the track’s active playlist with previous takes. (Takes must have the same start time to be available.) Different takes (regions) can also be auditioned by Alt-clicking (Windows) or Option-clicking (Mac) them in the Region List.
All takes are numbered sequentially.
To select an alternate take, do one of the following:
â– Right-click the region with the Selector or
Grabber tools, and select a different take from the Matches submenu in the pop-up menu.
Selecting a Different Take from the Region List
To select a take from the Region List:
1 In the Edit window, select the current take with the Time Grabber tool.
2 Control-drag (Windows) or Command-drag
(Mac) another take from the Region List into the playlist.
The region replaces the previous take and snaps precisely to the correct location.
3 Repeat the above steps to audition other takes.
Selecting an Alternate Take on a
Track
Each region resulting from a punch or loop record pass has an identical start time (the User
Time Stamp ). You can select and audition alternate takes from the Right-click Matches submenu or the Alternate Takes pop-up menu— even during playback.
Right-click Matches submenu
â– With the Selector tool, Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac) at the precise beginning of the loop or punch range and select a different take from the Alternate Takes pop-up menu.
â– If the take currently residing in the track is selected, with the Selector tool, Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Mac) anywhere on the selected take and select a different take from the Alternate Takes pop-up menu.
Alternate Takes pop-up menu
The selected take (region) replaces the previous take and snaps precisely to the correct location.
286 Pro Tools Reference Guide
One way to ensure that future takes have the same User Time Stamp (and appear in the
Matches pop-up menu) is to store punch and loop record selections as Memory Locations.
Then, if you later need to record additional takes, recall the Memory Location. For more in-
formation, see “Memory Locations” on page 290.
To change the User Time Stamp of other regions so that they appear in the Matches pop-up menu for a specific location, use the Time Stamp command in the Region List pop-up menu. For
more information, see “Time Stamping” on page 814.
Matches and Multiple Tracks
If you have recorded in Loop Record mode on multiple tracks, and each contains multiple takes with identical User Time Stamps, you can change all takes simultaneously.
To switch takes for multiple tracks:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Editing tab.
2 Enable the following options under “Matching Start Time” Takes List:
• Includes Take Region Name(s) that Match
Track Names
– and –
• Includes Take Regions Lengths That Match
3 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
4 With the Selector tool, select the take range for each track you want to replace.
5 Do one of the following:
• Right-click any of the selected takes and select a different take from the Matches submenu.
– or –
• Control-click (Windows) or Commandclick (Mac) any of the selected takes and select a different take from the Alternate
Takes pop-up menu.
The selected take replaces the previous take and snaps precisely to the correct location on each track.
Editing Preferences for Takes
In addition to having the same User Time
Stamp, regions that appear in the Matches submenu and the Alternate Takes pop-up menu are also restricted according to options in the Preferences dialog.
To set Editing preferences for takes:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Editing tab.
2 Enable or disable the following options in the
“Matching Start Time” Takes List section:
Includes Take Region Name(s) That Match Track
Names When selected, only regions that share the same root name with the track/playlist appear in the Matches submenu and the Alternate
Takes pop-up menu. For example, the Matches for a track named “Gtr.L” would show the regions “Gtr.L_01” and “Gtr.L_02-01,” but not
“Guitar.L_01.”
Chapter 15: Audio Recording 287
Includes Take Region Lengths That Match When selected, only regions that match the length of the current selection (even if it is not an entire region) appear in the Matches submenu and the
Alternate Takes pop-up menu. If there is no selection, all takes with the same User Time Stamp are displayed.
“Separate Region” Operates On All Related
Takes When selected, editing a region with the
Separate Region command also affects all other related takes with the same User Time Stamp.
This option helps you compare different sections from a group of related takes. For example, you can quickly separate an entire group of related vocal takes into sections, then audition and select the best material from each section independently.
If this option is selected, make sure the Include
Take Region Names That Match Track Name(s) and Include Take Region Lengths That Match options are also selected. If they are not, all regions in the session that have the same User
Time Stamp will be affected.
In most instances, you’ll want to deselect the
Separate Region Operates On All Related Takes option, to prevent a large number of regions from being created when you use the Separate
Region command.
Setting Punch/Loop Points
The start and end points of a record range for punch and loop recording can be set by the following methods:
• Select a range in a track’s playlist (with Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection enabled).
• Select a range in a Timebase ruler.
• Drag the Timeline Selection Markers in the ruler.
• Enter start and end times in the Transport window.
• Recall a Memory Location that includes an
Edit selection (with Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection enabled).
To set the record range in a track’s playlist:
1 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
3 Do one of the following:
• With the Selector tool, select the record range in a track’s playlist.
Playlist selection
– or –
• If a region’s start and end points define the record range, select the entire region.
288 Pro Tools Reference Guide
You can also enter a start and end point during playback. Press the Down Arrow to set the start point, and press the Up Arrow to set the end points. Note that when in Grid mode, start and end point when entered in this manner do not snap to the grid.
To set the record range in a Timebase ruler:
1 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Select the record range in any Timebase ruler.
To set the record range by dragging the Timeline
Selection Markers:
1 If you want the Timeline Selection Markers to snap to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid
2 Drag the first Timeline Selection Marker
(down arrow) to the start point of the range.
Timeline selection
If the Selector tool is not active, you do not need to manually select it. Other Edit tools
(such as the Time Grabber tool) automatically turn into the Selector tool when used in
Timebase rulers.
Timeline Selection Markers
When tracks are record-enabled, Timeline Selection Markers for start and end times appear as red up and down arrows in the Main Timebase ruler. If no tracks are record-enabled, the Timeline Selection Markers are blue.
Dragging a Timeline Selection Marker (start time) in the
Main Timebase ruler
3 Drag the second Timeline Selection Marker
(up arrow) to the end point of the range.
If the current record range is already the right length and the range needs only to be moved to a new location, Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac) either Timeline
Selection Marker to move both to a new location (while keeping the same length).
Start, End, and Length Fields
In its Expanded View, the Transport window can display start, end, and length times, and pre- and post-roll settings. When setting a record or play range, the range is reflected in these fields.
Timeline Selection Markers in the Main Timebase ruler
The Timeline Selection Markers can be moved, either separately or at the same time, to set record and play ranges.
Transport window with Start, End, and Length fields displayed
You can enter locations in the start and end fields to set the record or play range. The Timeline Selection Markers in the Main Timebase ruler are updated accordingly.
Chapter 15: Audio Recording 289
To set the record range by entering start and end times in the Transport window:
1 To see the start, end, and length times, do one of the following:
• Select View > Transport > Expanded.
– or –
• Shift-click the Expand/Collapse “+” button in the Transport window.
2 Do one of the following:
• In the Transport window, click in the Start field.
– or –
• Press Alt+Forward Slash (/) (Windows) or
Option+Forward Slash (/) (Mac) on the numeric keypad to select the start field in the
Transport window.
3 Type in the start location and press Alt+Forward Slash (/) (Windows) or Option+Forward
Slash (/) (Mac) on the numeric keypad to enter the value and automatically move to the end field.
4 Type in the end location and press Enter to accept the value.
Use the Period (.) or Left/Right Arrow keys to move through the different time fields for
Start and End. Use the Up/Down Arrow keys to increase or decrease the numerical values.
Memory Locations
You can store Edit selections as Memory Locations, which can also include current pre- and post-roll values.
For more information on Memory Loca-
tions, see “Memory Locations and Markers” on page 524.
To save an Edit selection with a Memory Location:
1 Ensure that Options > Link Timeline and Edit
Selection is selected.
2 Set the record range by making an Edit or
Timeline selection, or by entering start and end times in the Transport window.
3 To save the pre- and post-roll values, enable and set the pre- and post-roll amounts by entering them in the Transport window, or by dragging the Pre- and Post-Roll Flags in the ruler that
represents the Main Time Scale (see “Setting Pre- and Post-Roll” on page 291).
4 Press Enter on the numeric keypad or click the
Add Marker/Memory Location button in the
Edit window.
5 In the New Memory Location dialog, set Time
Properties to Selection, and if saving pre- and post-roll values, select the General Properties option for Pre/Post Roll Times.
New Memory Location dialog
6 Enter a name for the new Memory Location.
7 Click OK.
290 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To recall an Edit selection with a Memory
Location:
1 Make sure to select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
2 Choose Windows > Memory Locations.
Setting Pre- and Post-Roll
Pre- and post-roll times appear as flags in the ruler that represents the Main Time Scale. When pre- and post-roll are enabled, the flags are green, otherwise they are gray.
Memory Locations window
3 Do one of the following:
• In the Memory Locations window, click the name or number of the Memory Location.
– or –
• Recall the Memory Location by typing Period (.), the Memory Location number, and
Period (.) again on the numeric keypad.
(See “Numeric Keypad Modes” on page 17).
The start and end times and pre- and post-roll settings stored with the Memory Location are recalled.
Green Pre- and Post-Roll Flags (enabled) in the Main
Timebase ruler
Pre- and post-roll amounts can be entered in the
Transport window, set from a track’s playlist or
Timebase ruler, or by recalling a Memory Location.
Setting Pre- and Post-Roll in the
Transport Window
Pre- and post-roll can be enabled and set in the
Transport window.
To set and enable the pre- and post-roll times in the Transport window:
1 Select View > Transport > Expanded.
2 In the Transport window, click in the pre-roll field.
3 Type in the pre-roll amount and press Forward
Slash (/) on the numeric keypad to enter the value and automatically move to the post-roll field.
4 Type in the post-roll amount and press Enter to accept the new value.
5 To enable either pre- or post-roll, click the appropriate button so it is highlighted.
Use the Period (.) or Left/Right Arrow keys to move through the different time fields for pre and post-roll. Use the Up/Down Arrow keys to increase or decrease the numerical values.
Chapter 15: Audio Recording 291
Setting Pre- and Post-Roll in a Playlist
You can use the Selector tool to enable and disable pre- and post-roll by clicking in a track’s playlist.
To set and enable the pre- and post-roll by clicking in a playlist:
1 Select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
2 With the Selector tool, select the record range in the track’s playlist.
3 With the Selector tool, Alt-click (Windows) or
Option-click (Mac) in the track’s playlist before the selection to enable the pre-roll at that location.
4 With the Selector tool, Alt-click (Windows) or
Option-click (Mac) in the track’s playlist after the selection to enable the post-roll at that location.
To disable the pre- and post-roll by clicking in a playlist:
1 With the Selector tool, Alt-click (Windows) or
Option-click (Mac) in the Edit selection near the start to disable the pre-roll.
2 With the Selector tool, Alt-click (Windows) or
Option-click (Mac) in the Edit selection near the end to disable the post-roll.
In the timeline, you can reset the pre- and post-roll to zero. First, drag the Pre-Roll Flag to the Timeline Selection Start Marker, then drag the Post-Roll Flag to the Timeline Selection End Marker.
3 Drag the Pre-Roll Flag to the Timeline Selection Start Marker.
4 Drag the Post-Roll Flag to the Timeline Selection End Marker.
Enabling Pre/Post-Roll from the
Options Menu
Pre- and post-roll (as a pair) can be enabled and disabled from the Options menu.
To enable both pre/post-roll from the Options menu:
â– Select Options > Pre/Post-Roll.
Dragging Pre- and Post-Roll Flags in the
Timebase Ruler
The Pre- and Post-Roll Flags can be moved in the
Main Timebase ruler, either separately or at the same time, to set their location.
To set the pre- and post-roll amounts by dragging in the Main Timebase ruler:
1 If you want the Pre- and Post-Roll flags to snap to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to
Grid.
2 Drag the Pre-Roll Flag to a new location in the ruler.
Dragging a Pre-Roll Flag in a Timebase ruler
3 Drag the Post-Roll Flag to a new location in the Timebase ruler.
To set pre- and post-roll values to the same amount, Alt-drag (Windows) or Optiondrag (Mac) either the Pre- or the Post-Roll
Flag in the ruler. The deselected flag will immediately reset to the same value, and will adjust accordingly as you drag the selected flag.
292 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Recording from a Digital
Source
If you plan to use a DAT player, digital-output
CD recorder, or other digital device with your
Pro Tools system, make sure it supports the correct digital format. For example, your Pro Tools audio interface’s AES/EBU inputs and outputs should only be connected to another AES/EBU device.
For additional information on configuring your particular Pro Tools system for recording from a digital source, see your Getting
Started Guide.
Pro Tools|HD Digital Options
The 192 I/O, 192 Digital I/O, and 96 I/O include
AES/EBU, S/PDIF, and ADAT digital options. Additionally, the 192 I/O and 192 Digital I/O include TDIF digital I/O options. The 96i I/O includes only the S/PDIF digital option.
On a 192 I/O, 192 Digital I/O, or 96 I/O,
Pro Tools can receive digital audio from the factory-installed Optical (ADAT) I/O at any time (if it is not set to S/PDIF). However, Pro Tools can only receive digital audio from one of its enclosure [Encl] digital sources—AES/EBU, S/PDIF, or
Optical (S/PDIF) at a time.
Enclosure digital sources come standard with
Pro Tools|HD I/Os and are labelled on-screen as
[Encl] versions, to differentiate them from digital inputs and outputs available on the 192’s
Digital I/O card. For example, the AES/EBU inputs and outputs that come standard in the
192 I/O enclosure are identified as AES/EBU
[Encl].
The additional digital ports on the 192 I/O and
192 Digital I/O are TDIF, AES/EBU, and ADAT.
Pro Tools can only receive digital audio from one of these ports at a time.
However, inputs on both the 192 I/O enclosure
I/O and Digital card can be used simultaneously.
For example, on a 192 I/O, it is possible to clock off a source from one of the enclosure inputs and have another digital input from the digital ports doing a sample rate conversion, thus having two digital sources.
Pro Tools LE Digital Options
The Digi 002 and Digi 002 Rack include S/PDIF and ADAT digital I/O.
Mbox 2, Mbox 2 Pro, and Mbox include only the S/PDIF digital option.
All digital outputs are active at all times, so you can actually send digital audio to different digital devices simultaneously at mix time.
Recording from Digital Sources
To record from a digital source with Pro Tools:
1 Connect the digital output of the recording source to the appropriate digital input of your audio hardware.
2 If you want to start a new session with a different sample rate, do the following:
• Choose File > New Session
• Select the sample rate.
• Configure the rest of the New Session dialog accordingly.
• Click Save.
Chapter 15: Audio Recording 293
3 Specify the format (digital) of the inputs of the audio interface to which the digital recording source is connected:
• Choose Setup > Hardware.
• Choose the audio interface.
• Select the digital format for the appropriate channel pair (such as AES/EBU or S/PDIF).
Some Digidesign I/O units only have two channels that can be set for analog or digital. For example, Mbox 2 has S/PDIF L–R
(Stereo) digital inputs and In 1–2 analog inputs. Mbox 2 can record through analog and digital inputs simultaneously.
4 For Pro Tools|HD systems only, do the following:
• In the Session Setup window, select the appropriate Clock Source.
– or –
• Choose Setup > Hardware.
• Select the appropriate Clock Source connected to the appropriate audio interface.
• Click OK to close the Hardware Setup dialog.
5 Create a new stereo audio track.
6 Assign the Input Path selector for the track to the appropriate input. Since this is a digital transfer, you do not need to worry about input levels.
7 Assign the Output Path selector for the track to the appropriate output for monitoring (such as A 1–2).
8 In the Options menu, ensure that the following options are deselected: Destructive Record,
Loop Record, QuickPunch, TrackPunch, and DestructivePunch.
9 To have recording start from the beginning of the session, click Return to Zero in the Transport.
294 Pro Tools Reference Guide
10 Record enable the new audio track.
11 Click Record in the Transport to arm
Pro Tools for recording.
12 Click Play to start recording.
13 Start playback on the recording source.
14 When the material from the source has finished, click Stop in the Transport.
15 Stop playback on the recording source.
After a Digital Transfer
After you have finished recording digitally, set the Clock Source pop-up menu in the Session
Setup window back to Internal. Otherwise,
Pro Tools will not switch back to its own internal clock and may not record or play audio properly. Failure to switch back to Internal synchronization typically results in pitch problems
(fast or slow playback), clicks and pops, or DAE errors, since a DAT machine or CD Recorder that is idle can default to a different sample rate or stop outputting a sample rate clock altogether.
Half-Speed Recording and
Playback
Pro Tools lets you play and record at half-speed.
This capability is similar to that of a tape deck where you can record material at half-speed and then play it back at normal speed (faster and up an octave), or record material at normal speed and play it back at half-speed (slower and down an octave), for special effects.
Half-Speed Recording
Use half-speed recording to record difficult to play MIDI tracks or to record complex automation moves.
To record at half-speed:
1 Record enable the tracks you want to record at half-speed.
2 Click Record in the Transport to arm Pro Tools for recording.
3 Press Control+Shift+Spacebar (Windows) or
Command+Shift+Spacebar (Mac). Recording begins and all existing track material plays at halfspeed.
4 When you have finished recording, click Stop.
Half-Speed Playback
Use half-speed playback to learn or transcribe difficult passages in recorded tracks.
To play at half-speed:
1 Shiftclick the Play button in the Transport.
You can also play at half-speed by pressing
Shift+Spacebar.
2 Click Stop in the Transport to stop playback.
Chapter 15: Audio Recording 295
296 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 16: MIDI Recording
Although recording MIDI in Pro Tools is similar to recording audio, there are some important differences:
â—† Unlike audio, MIDI recording is almost always
destructive. See “Record Modes and MIDI” on page 271 for details.
â—† Unlike audio tracks, MIDI and Instrument tracks can be record-enabled on-the-fly during playback or recording.
â—† MIDI and Instrument tracks have an Input selector that determines which port on your MIDI interface (devices) and which MIDI channel is routed and recorded to the track. If the MIDI Input selector is set to All, all channels for all devices are routed to the track.
â—† Similar to Auxiliary Inputs, Instrument tracks have audio Input and Output selectors. These selectors are different than the Instrument track’s selectors for MIDI Input and Output and are primarily used for monitoring audio from
MIDI instruments or instrument plug-ins.
â—† It is not necessary to use QuickPunch, Track-
Punch, or DestructivePunch to punch in on-thefly with MIDI or Instrument tracks. This capability is available both in Normal (Nondestructive)
Record mode and Destructive Record mode.
Recording from MIDI Devices
The MIDI Inputs for record-enabled MIDI and
Instrument tracks determine what MIDI data is recorded in Pro Tools. MIDI Inputs can be set to a specific device (port) and channel, or they can be set to All, where all channels for all devices are merged to the track.
MIDI and Instrument tracks in Pro Tools do not contain multiple channels and always play back on the track’s assigned MIDI output devices and channels. Multiple MIDI channels can be simultaneously recorded to multiple tracks.
The following Pro Tools options determine whether you can record from a MIDI controller
(such as a MIDI keyboard or drum pad):
â—† Devices that are assigned as a MIDI Controller in the Peripherals dialog (Setup > Peripherals) are ignored when MIDI tracks are recorded. This is to avoid recording data from MIDI control surfaces (such as the Digidesign Command|8).
â—† To record and play MIDI, the device must be enabled in the Input Devices dialog. For more
information, see “Enabling Input Devices” on page 298.
Chapter 16: MIDI Recording 297
In addition, the following options affect how
MIDI data is recorded in Pro Tools:
â—† The MIDI Input Filter can filter out MIDI messages that you may not want to record, such as
Polyphonic Aftertouch or System Exclusive
data. For more information, see “MIDI Input Filter” on page 299.
â—† Input Quantize, when enabled, automatically quantizes (time corrects) all MIDI notes that are
recorded. For more information, see “Input
To enable input devices:
1 Choose Setup > MIDI > Input Devices.
2 In the MIDI Input Enable dialog, do the following:
• Select the MIDI devices you want to record.
Also, select any device to be used as a control surface.
• Deselect any input devices you want to ignore while recording MIDI.
Enabling Input Devices
To record from a MIDI device (such as a MIDI keyboard) in Pro Tools, the device must be enabled in the Input Devices dialog. You can also use this dialog to make sure unwanted notes from certain devices, such as drum machines or arpeggiators, are not recorded.
MIDI Control Surfaces In order to use any MIDI control surfaces (such as the Digidesign Command|8), they must be enabled in the Input Devices dialog.
MMC In order for Pro Tools to synchronize to
MMC, the MMC source must be enabled in the
Input Devices dialog.
MIDI Input Enable dialog
Devices do not need to be selected to receive
MIDI data from Pro Tools. For example, a device used exclusively as a sound module does not need to be selected in the MIDI Input Enable dialog.
3 Click OK.
298 Pro Tools Reference Guide
MIDI Thru
To monitor MIDI tracks while recording, enable
MIDI Thru. When enabled, Pro Tools routes
MIDI from your controllers to the device and channels assigned to the MIDI track currently record-enabled.
The MIDI preference for Global MIDI Playback Offset and individual MIDI track offsets do not affect MIDI routed with MIDI
Thru.
When MIDI Thru is enabled, System Exclusive (Sysex) events are echoed to the MIDI device assigned to the record-enabled track—but only if the Sysex events are smaller than 256 bytes.
To enable MIDI Thru:
â– Select Options > MIDI Thru.
When using MIDI Thru, you should disable
Local Control, if present, on your MIDI devices. Otherwise, your MIDI device may receive double MIDI notes, which can lead to stuck notes. If you are unsure how to disable
Local Control for your instrument, refer to the manufacturer’s documentation.
The Default Thru Instrument
In addition to any MIDI tracks that are recordenabled, you can also route MIDI to the Default
Thru Instrument. This saves the extra steps of creating a MIDI track and record enabling it to hear a particular MIDI device and channel.
Unlike MIDI tracks, which only receive MIDI from the device and channel assigned to its
MIDI Input selector, all incoming MIDI data is routed to the Default Thru Instrument.
If the Default Thru Instrument is assigned to a record-enabled MIDI track, Pro Tools only routes incoming MIDI to the record-enabled track.
To configure a default Thru instrument:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences.
2 Click the MIDI tab.
3 Do one of the following:
• Select a specific device from the Default
Thru Instrument pop-up menu to play
MIDI through on that device by default.
• Select “Follows First Selected MIDI Track” to have MIDI preview assignment follow
MIDI track selection. When multiple MIDI tracks are selected, previewing uses the top track or left track in the Edit or Mix windows.
• To disable the Default Thru Instrument, select None.
The Default Thru Follows First Selected
MIDI Track Selection option also lets you play an instrument without having to create and record-enable a MIDI or Instrument track.
MIDI Input Filter
Use the MIDI Input Filter to prevent certain types of MIDI messages from being recorded.
The MIDI Input Filter can be set to record All messages, Only the specified messages, or All Except the specified messages.
For example, to filter out program changes:
1 Choose Setup > MIDI > Input Filter.
2 In the MIDI Input Filter dialog, select the All
Except option.
Chapter 16: MIDI Recording 299
3 Select the option for Program Changes. Leave all other messages deselected.
MIDI Input Filter dialog
4 Click OK.
When using the All Except option, the selected types of MIDI messages are not recorded. Conversely, when using the Only option, only the selected types of MIDI messages are recorded.
Wait for Note
The Wait for Note button, located in the Transport window, determines how Pro Tools begins recording. When enabled, Pro Tools does not start recording until a MIDI event is received.
This ensures that recording begins only when you start playing, and that the first note, or other MIDI data, is recorded precisely at the beginning of the record range (start time).
Wait for Note can be used when recording normally, when punching in, or when loop recording. If pre-roll is enabled, it occurs after the
MIDI event is received and before recording begins.
Wait for Note and Countoff are mutually exclusive and cannot both be enabled at the same time. If, for instance, Countoff is enabled and you click the Wait for Note button, Countoff is disabled.
To enable Wait for Note:
1 To view the MIDI controls in the Transport window, select View > Transport > MIDI Controls.
Input Quantize
When Input Quantize is enabled, all recorded
MIDI notes are quantized automatically. Input
Quantize is often useful for achieving rhythmically precise MIDI recordings. However, to preserve all of the original nuance of your recorded
MIDI tracks (such as rubato phrasing), disable this option.
For more information on Input Quantize,
see “Input Quantize” on page 604.
Transport window with MIDI Controls
300 Pro Tools Reference Guide
2 In the Transport window, click the Wait for
Note button so it becomes highlighted.
Wait for Note button
To enable MIDI Merge:
1 To view the MIDI controls in the Transport window, select View > Transport > MIDI Controls.
2 In the Transport window, click the MIDI
Merge button so it becomes highlighted.
Wait for Note enabled
MIDI Merge button
With the Operation preference for “Use F11 for Wait for Note” enabled, you can press
F11 to turn on Wait for Note. (On Mac systems, the Mac “Desktop” keyboard shortcut must be disabled or remapped.)
MIDI Merge enabled
MIDI Merge/Replace
The MIDI Merge button, located in the Transport window, determines how MIDI is recorded when overdubbing or punching in. When MIDI
Merge is on ( Merge mode), recorded MIDI is merged with existing track material. When
MIDI Merge is off ( Replace mode), existing data within the punched region is replaced by the newly recorded material.
The MIDI Merge button can be turned on and off during playback and recording. In Loop
Record mode, MIDI Merge has no effect, and the button is dimmed.
To enable MIDI Merge with a keyboard shortcut, set the Numeric Keypad mode to
Transport, and press the 9 key on the numeric keypad.
Configuring MIDI or
Instrument Tracks for
Recording
To configure one or more MIDI or Instrument tracks for recording:
1 Create a new MIDI or Instrument track, or use an existing MIDI or Instrument track.
2 For Instrument tracks, select View > Mix Window > Instruments or View > Edit Window > Instruments.
You can also paste and merge MIDI notes
using Paste Special commands. See “Special
Paste Function for Automation Data” on page 720.
Chapter 16: MIDI Recording 301
3 From the track’s MIDI Input selector, select the device and channel to be recorded. (For Instrument tracks, the MIDI Input selector is available in Instruments View.)
MIDI Input selector
4 From the MIDI Output selector, select the device and channel for MIDI play back.
MIDI Output selector
MIDI track Input selector, Mix window
MIDI Input selector
MIDI track MIDI Output selector, Mix window
MIDI Output selector
Instrument track MIDI Input selector, Mix window
MIDI Input selector
Instrument track MIDI Output selector, Mix window
MIDI Output selector
MIDI track MIDI Input selector, Edit window
MIDI Input selector
MIDI track MIDI Output selector, Edit window
MIDI Output selector
Instrument track MIDI Input selector, Edit window
Instrument track MIDI Output selector, Edit window
302 Pro Tools Reference Guide
5 To assign multiple destinations to a single
MIDI or Instrument track, Start-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the MIDI Output selector and select additional channels from any device.
When multiple destinations are selected for a single MIDI track, an Asterisk (*) appears next to the first destination name in the track’s MIDI
Output selector.
6 To assign a default program change to the track, do the following:
• Click the Patch Select button.
• Make the necessary selections for program and bank select.
• Click Done.
Default program changes are sent whenever the track is played. For more information,
see “Patch Select (Program and Bank
7 If recording to multiple MIDI or Instrument tracks, repeat the preceding steps for each track, then continue to the next step.
8 To use a click, enable and configure the click, and set a default tempo and meter for the ses-
sion (see “Recording with a Click” on page 271).
9 Enable either Wait for Note or Countoff in the
Transport window as appropriate.
10 To replace existing track material, disable
MIDI Merge in the Transport window (see
“MIDI Merge/Replace” on page 301).
11 To automatically quantize material as it is re-
corded, enable Input Quantize (see “Input
12 To start recording from the beginning of the session, click Return to Zero in the Transport.
13 Record enable the MIDI or Instrument track by clicking its Record Enable button.
14 Select Options > MIDI Thru is selected, then play your MIDI controller. The MIDI device or instrument plug-in assigned to the track’s MIDI
Output sounds, and the track’s meters register
MIDI activity.
You are now ready to record MIDI data to the record-enabled MIDI and Instrument tracks.
Recording MIDI and
Instrument Tracks
In Pro Tools, you can record to one or more
MIDI and Instrument tracks. Recording simultaneously to multiple tracks lets you:
• Record from multiple MIDI devices at the same time, such as when recording several performers.
• Record multiple channels from the same device, such as recording from a split keyboard.
• Transfer MIDI tracks from an external MIDI sequencer.
To take full advantage of the MIDI editing capabilities in Pro Tools, make sure to record tick-based MIDI tracks with a click.
This ensures that recorded data aligns with the session’s bar and beat boundaries. You can also record to sample-based MIDI tracks without a click and derive the tempo and meter from the performance.
To record audio from a MIDI instrument or instrument plug-in, bus the audio output of the Instrument or Auxiliary Input track that is monitoring the instrument to an audio track. Record enable the audio track and
start recording. See “Recording Audio from a
Chapter 16: MIDI Recording 303
To record to one or more MIDI or Instrument tracks:
1 With Pro Tools HD, make sure that Delay
Compensation is disabled in the Options menu.
Digidesign recommends recording without
Delay Compensation in most cases. For
more information, see “Delay Compensation” on page 656.
2 Configure a MIDI or Instrument track for re-
cording (see “Configuring MIDI or Instrument
Tracks for Recording” on page 301).
3 Record enable the track you want to record by clicking its Record Enable button.
To record enable additional MIDI and Instrument tracks, Shift-click their Record Enable buttons.
4 Ensure that Pro Tools is in Normal (Nondestructive) Record mode. If necessary, deselect the following in the Options menu: Destructive
Record, Loop Record, QuickPunch, TrackPunch
(Pro Tools HD only), and DestructivePunch
(Pro Tools HD only).
5 Check your MIDI Merge settings.
6 Check the pre-roll and Countoff settings.
7 To have recording start from the beginning of the session, click Return to Zero in the Transport.
8 Click Record in the Transport to arm Pro Tools for recording (Record Ready mode). The Track
Record Enabled indicator lights red.
Record button in Record Ready mode
9 Click Play to start recording. If using Countoff, Pro Tools counts off the specified number of measures and then begins recording. If using
Wait for Note, recording begins as soon as you start playing (when a MIDI event is received).
10 Play your MIDI controller.
11 When you are finished playing, click Stop in the Transport to stop recording.
For each record-enabled track, a new MIDI region is created and appears both in the playlist and in the Region List.
Press F12 to start recording immediately.
You can also Press Control+Spacebar (Windows) or Command+Spacebar (Mac) to start recording. For more information, see
“Record Shortcuts” on page 280.
MIDI Regions Created on Barlines
When recording MIDI, or when manually entering MIDI notes, the beginning and ending of
MIDI regions are created on bar boundaries.
This greatly facilitates arranging MIDI regions in a musically meaningful way, in whole bar lengths.
The beginning of a recorded MIDI region always starts on the barline immediately before the first
MIDI note (note on) of the region. Likewise, the
MIDI region ends on the barline immediately following the last note (note off) of the region.
Recording Over Exisiting MIDI Regions
Unlike audio regions, existing MIDI regions are never overwritten even though MIDI data within regions can be overwritten. When MIDI
Merge mode is disabled and recording MIDI on a track with existing regions, newly recorded
MIDI data overwrites existing MIDI data within existing regions, but the existing region boundaries remain. New MIDI regions are only created
304 Pro Tools Reference Guide
to fill the gaps between existing MIDI region boundaries. Typically, new MIDI regions are always created on barlines. However, if existing region boundaries are not on barlines, newly created regions are bound by the existing regions.
It is possible to have the note on of a MIDI note be in one MIDI region, and its note off be in a subsequent MIDI region. It is also possible to have the region end before the note off, resulting in notes that extend beyond the region boundary. However, note ons can never precede the beginning of a region.
Playing Back Recorded MIDI
To play back recorded MIDI and Instrument tracks:
1 To start from the beginning of the session, click Return to Zero in the Transport.
2 Click Play in the Transport to begin playback.
The recorded MIDI data plays back through each track’s assigned Output device (port) and channel.
Undoing MIDI Recording
You can undo previous MIDI record takes.
To undo a MIDI recording:
â–
Once the Transport has been stopped, choose
Edit > Undo MIDI Recording.
The track’s playlist is restored to its previous state. However, the following conditions apply:
• If you punched in and out several times before stopping the Transport, only the last punch is undone.
• When using Loop Record mode, all takes from each record pass are discarded.
Canceling a Record Take
It is also possible to discard the current record take before the Transport is stopped.
To cancel a take while recording:
â– Press Control+Period (.) (Windows) or Command+Period (.) (Mac) before the Transport is stopped.
When in Loop Record mode, all takes from each record pass are discarded.
Punch Recording MIDI
To replace a portion of a MIDI or Instrument track, you can punch in by specifying the record range before recording.
To punch in on a MIDI or Instrument track:
1 Configure a MIDI or Instrument track for re-
cording (see “Configuring MIDI or Instrument
Tracks for Recording” on page 301).
2 Ensure that Pro Tools is in Normal (Nondestructive) Record mode. If necessary, deselect the following in the Options menu: Destructive
Record, Loop Record, QuickPunch, TrackPunch
(Pro Tools HD only), and DestructivePunch
(Pro Tools HD only).
3 In the Transport window, disable Wait for
Note and Countoff.
4 Select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
5 With the Selector tool, select the punch range in the track’s playlist.
For other methods of setting the record
range, see “Setting Punch/Loop Points” on page 288.
Chapter 16: MIDI Recording 305
6 To hear existing track material up to the start point, or after the end point, enable and set pre-
and post-roll times (see “Setting Pre- and Post-
7 Record enable the track containing the previous take.
8 Click Record in the Transport to arm Pro Tools for recording. The Record button flashes.
9 Click Play to start recording.
If pre-roll is enabled, the track material leading up to the punch-in point plays. You can start playing during the pre-roll to get the “feel.”
MIDI is not recorded until the start point is reached.
When the start point is reached, Pro Tools begins recording. Recording continues until the end point is reached. If post-roll is enabled, playback continues for the specified post-roll amount.
10 When you have finished recording, click
Stop in the Transport.
The newly recorded MIDI data appears in the track.
Punch Recording During Playback with
MIDI
You do not have to set a record range to punch in on a MIDI or Instrument track. In fact, you can punch in and out on-the-fly at any time during playback. Unlike audio tracks, it is not necessary to enable QuickPunch to perform realtime punch recording.
To punch record on-the-fly with MIDI:
1 Configure a MIDI or Instrument track for re-
cording (see “Configuring MIDI or Instrument
Tracks for Recording” on page 301).
2 Ensure that Pro Tools is in Normal (Nondestructive) Record mode. If necessary, deselect the following in the Options menu: Destructive
Record, Loop Record, QuickPunch, TrackPunch
(Pro Tools HD only), and DestructivePunch
(Pro Tools HD only).
3 In the Transport window, disable Wait for
Note and Countoff.
4 Record enable the track containing the previous take.
5 Click Play in the Transport to start playback.
6 When you reach the punch-in point, do one of the following:
• Click Record in the Transport.
– or –
• For Pro Tools systems using a Digidesign control surface, or Digi 002 and Digi 002
Rack systems, with a connected footswitch, press the footswitch at the punch-in point.
The Record button in the Transport and the track’s Record Enable button stop flashing and stay lit during recording.
7 To punch out, click Record again (or press the footswitch).
Pro Tools exits Record mode and continues playing. You can perform additional punches during the same pass.
306 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Regions and Punch Recording
Depending on the record range, new regions may be created after punch recording. For example, Figure 15 shows two existing regions before recording. If MIDI Merge mode is disabled, recording overwrites any existing MIDI data within the record range. Since the start and end times for recording are located within both of the existing regions, newly recorded notes are written into both of the existing regions, and into a new region created to fill the space between them.
before punch record after punch record
MIDI Merge was enabled during recording). If an existing region contains material you want to keep, use Duplicate to make a copy of the region
(“Duplicate Command” on page 449), or dupli-
cate the track’s playlist or record in a new play-
list to keep a backup (see “Working with Playlists” on page 353).
Loop Recording MIDI
Loop recording with MIDI is supported by two methods:
• In Normal (Nondestructive) Record mode, enable Loop Playback and MIDI Merge for drum machine style loop recording.
– or –
• Use Loop Record mode to record multiple takes on each record pass. This is similar to loop recording audio.
newly recorded material new region
Figure 15. Region added after punch record
When selecting an entire region, or a section within a region, before punching, no new regions are created. In this instance, only the material residing within the existing region changes, with no new material recorded outside the region.
Unlike audio recording, MIDI recording in this scenario is destructive. Newly recorded MIDI data overwrites existing MIDI data while leaving the existing region boundaries intact.
If the MIDI data within a region is altered because of a record take, the original material is either lost (unless you choose Edit > Undo MIDI
Recording) or combined with new material (if
Loop Recording in MIDI Merge
Mode
For MIDI loop recording, use Normal (Nondestructive) Record mode with Loop Playback and
MIDI Merge enabled. With this method, MIDI is recorded and merged to the same region with each new record pass—for example, you can record hi-hats on the first pass and kick and snare on the next.
For drum machine style step entry, use Step
Input (see “Step Input” on page 604).
Chapter 16: MIDI Recording 307
Make sure that MIDI Merge is enabled in the
Transport window, otherwise (in Replace mode) each subsequent take destructively replaces the previous take.
You can record enable a different MIDI or
Instrument track on-the-fly while loop recording. While pressing Control (Windows) or Command (Mac), use the Up/Down Arrows to record enable the previous or next
MIDI or Instrument track.
To loop record in MIDI Merge mode:
1 Configure a MIDI or Instrument track for re-
cording (see “Configuring MIDI or Instrument
Tracks for Recording” on page 301).
2 Ensure that Pro Tools is in Normal (Nondestructive) Record mode. If necessary, deselect the following in the Options menu: Destructive
Record, Loop Record, QuickPunch, TrackPunch
(Pro Tools HD only), and DestructivePunch
(Pro Tools HD only).
3 Select Options > Loop Playback. When Loop
Playback is enabled, a loop symbol appears in the Play button.
Loop Playback enabled
4 Record enable the MIDI or Instrument track.
Ensure that no audio tracks are record-enabled.
5 In the Transport window, click the MIDI
Merge button so it is highlighted.
6 Disable Wait for Note and Countoff in the
Transport window.
7 Select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
8 With the Selector tool, select the loop range in the track’s playlist.
For other methods of setting the record
range, see “Setting Punch/Loop Points” on page 288.
9 To hear track material up to the start point of the loop, enable and set the pre-roll time (see
“Setting Pre- and Post-Roll” on page 291).
10 Click Record in the Transport to arm
Pro Tools for recording. The Record button flashes.
11 Click Play to start recording.
The Record button flashes during pre-roll.
When the start point is reached, Pro Tools begins recording. When the end point is reached,
Pro Tools loops back to the start point and continues playing and recording.
12 Play your MIDI controller. Newly recorded
MIDI data appears as a region in the record track. On each successive take, recorded material shows up in the region, without replacing material from previous takes.
13 To switch to a new record track, press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac), and press the Up/Down Arrow keys to record enable the previous or next MIDI or Instrument track.
14 When you are finished recording, click Stop in the Transport.
The newly recorded MIDI data appears as a MIDI region in the track’s playlist, and in the Region
List.
308 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Loop Recording Multiple Takes
When recording MIDI in Loop Record mode, new regions are created each time new material is received during a record pass. This differs somewhat from loop recording audio, where
Pro Tools creates a single audio file that comprises all takes, which appear as individual regions in the Region List.
You can use MIDI loop recording to record successive takes without stopping the record process, thereby capturing your creative spontaneity. Another advantage with this method of recording MIDI, which is nondestructive, is that all existing and newly recorded regions remain intact (and available in the Region List).
To record MIDI in Loop Record mode:
1 Configure a MIDI or Instrument track for re-
cording (see “Configuring MIDI or Instrument
Tracks for Recording” on page 301).
2 Select Options > Loop Record. When Loop
Record mode is enabled, a loop symbol appears in the Record button.
Loop Recording enabled
3 If you have not done so already, record enable the MIDI or Instrument track by clicking its
Record Enable button. Make sure no audio tracks are record-enabled.
4 Disable Wait for Note and Countoff in the
Transport window.
5 Select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
6 With the Selector tool, select the loop range in the track’s playlist.
For other methods of setting the record
range, see “Setting Punch/Loop Points” on page 288.
7 To hear track material up to the start point of the loop, enable and set the pre-roll time (see
“Setting Pre- and Post-Roll” on page 291).
8 Click Record in the Transport to arm Pro Tools for recording. The Record button flashes.
9 Click Play to start recording.
The Record button flashes during the pre-roll.
When the start point is reached, Pro Tools begins recording. When the end point is reached,
Pro Tools loops back to the start point and continues playing and recording.
10 Play your MIDI controller. A new MIDI region containing the newly recorded material is automatically created and appears in the track’s playlist, replacing the previous region.
Regions are replaced (nondestructively) during subsequent record passes when new MIDI material is received.
11 When you are finished recording, click Stop in the Transport.
The recorded takes appear as regions in the Region List and are numbered sequentially. The takes, which are the same length and easily interchangeable, can be auditioned from the
Matches pop-up menu—even while the session plays or loops.
Chapter 16: MIDI Recording 309
To audition the various record takes, do one of the following:
â– Right-click the region with the Selector or
Grabber tools, and select the desired take from the Matches submenu in the pop-up menu.
â– With the Selector tool, Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac) at the precise beginning of the loop or punch range and select a different take from the Alternate Takes pop-up menu.
â– If the take currently residing in the track is selected, with the Selector tool, Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Mac) anywhere on the selected take and select a different take from the Alternate Takes pop-up menu.
MIDI Step Input
Step Input lets you use a MIDI keyboard (or any other MIDI controller that sends MIDI note data) to enter notes individually, one step at a time. This gives you precise control over note placement, duration, and velocity. With MIDI
Step Input you can also create musical passages that might be difficult to play accurately, or at faster tempos.
For more information on Step Input, see
Selecting an alternate MIDI take
The selected take (region) replaces the previous take and snaps precisely to the correct location.
For more information on auditioning and
managing takes, see “Auditioning Different
Record Takes in the Timeline” on page 286.
Recording System Exclusive
Data
Pro Tools supports recording and playing System Exclusive data (Sysex) with MIDI tracks.
This allows you to use MIDI tracks in Pro Tools to store patch and configuration data for your
MIDI devices, or to record real-time Sysex changes for a particular parameter of a MIDI device that cannot be controlled by a standard
MIDI controller.
To record a Sysex dump at the beginning of a MIDI track:
1 Make sure that the MIDI OUT for the device sending the Sysex is connected to your MIDI interface’s MIDI IN.
2 In the MIDI Input Filter dialog, enable Only and System Exclusive.
3 Configure a MIDI track for recording (see
“Configuring MIDI or Instrument Tracks for Recording” on page 301).
310 Pro Tools Reference Guide
4 Ensure that Pro Tools is in Normal (Nondestructive) Record mode. If necessary, deselect the following in the Options menu: Destructive
Record, Loop Record, QuickPunch, TrackPunch
(Pro Tools HD only), and DestructivePunch
(Pro Tools HD only).
5 Record enable a MIDI track.
6 Enable Wait for Note in the Transport window.
7 To start recording from the beginning of the session, click Return to Zero in the Transport.
8 When you are ready to begin recording, click
Record in the Transport window.
The Record, Play, and Wait for Note buttons flash, indicating that Pro Tools is waiting for
MIDI data.
9 Initiate the Sysex transfer from the MIDI device, according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Pro Tools automatically begins recording as soon as it starts to receive Sysex data.
10 When the Sysex transfer is complete, click
Stop in the Transport.
The newly recorded MIDI data appears as a MIDI region in the track’s playlist, and in the Region
List. MIDI regions that contain System Exclusive data appear blank when the MIDI Track View is set to Regions.
To see the Sysex event blocks, which indicate the location of the data, set the MIDI Track View
to display Sysex (see “Regions View for MIDI and Instrument Tracks” on page 345).
For information on moving and copying of
Sysex data, see “System Exclusive Events” on page 578.
To send Sysex data from Pro Tools to an external
MIDI device:
1 For the device receiving the System Exclusive data, make sure its MIDI IN is connected to the
MIDI interface’s MIDI OUT. Also, make sure the device is set to receive Sysex. Some devices require that memory protect be off. For more information, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
2 Make sure that the MIDI track containing the
Sysex data is not record enabled.
3 Click the track’s MIDI Output selector and assign the device from the pop-up menu.
4 Configure the external MIDI device to receive
Sysex data according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
5 Click Play in the Transport to begin playback.
Pro Tools begins playing and transmits the previously recorded Sysex to the assigned MIDI device.
Recording Audio from a MIDI
Instrument
Typically, you can monitor the audio from MIDI instruments (both hardware and plug-ins) using
Instrument and Auxiliary Input tracks. During the final mixdown, audio from Instrument and
Auxiliary Input tracks can be included when using Bounce to Disk, or on a bussed recording path if recording to a new track.
When using instrument plug-ins, you may want to record the audio from a MIDI instrument to a new track before mixing in order to free up DSP resources.
Chapter 16: MIDI Recording 311
Recording Audio from an Instrument
Plug-in
To record audio from an instrument plug-in:
1 Create a new Instrument track.
2 Insert an instrument plug-in on that track.
3 Do one of the following:
• Record your MIDI performance on the Instrument track.
• Manually enter MIDI data in the Instrument track.
You can also record both the MIDI and audio from your performance at the same time.
4 Create a new audio track with the same number of channels as the Instrument track.
5 Set the Instrument track’s Audio Output Path selector to a bus (for example, Bus 1–2).
6 Set the audio track’s Audio Input Path selector to the same bus.
7 Set the audio track’s Audio Output Path selector to the main monitoring path (for example,
A 1–2).
8 Record enable the audio track.
9 Do one of the following:
• To record from the beginning of the session, click Return To Zero in the Transport.
– or –
• Make a Timeline selection for the record range.
10 Click Record in the Transport to arm
Pro Tools for recording.
11 Click Play in the Transport to start recording.
Recording audio from an instrument plug-in
12 When your previously recorded MIDI performance is finished playing, click Stop in the
Transport to stop recording.
Recording Audio from an External MIDI
Instrument
You can record audio from an external MIDI instrument in one of two ways:
• By bussing audio from the output of the Instrument (or Auxiliary Input) track used to monitor the MIDI instrument to an audio track for recording.
• By setting the audio track’s Audio Input Path selector to the same Audio Input Path as the
Instrument (or Auxiliary Input) track used for monitoring the external MIDI instrument.
This second method avoids any additional latency associated with bussing. However, be sure to mute the Instrument (or Auxiliary Input) track used for monitoring while recording the same audio path to the audio track.
312 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 17: Advanced Punch Recording
There are three advanced recording methods that differ from basic recording: QuickPunch,
TrackPunch, and DestructivePunch.
QuickPunch A nondestructive Record mode that lets record-enabled tracks be punched in and punched out during playback by clicking the
Record button in the Transport.
TrackPunch (Pro Tools HD Only) A nondestructive Record mode that lets individual tracks be punched in, punched out, and taken out of record enable without interrupting online recording and playback.
DestructivePunch (Pro Tools HD Only) A destructive Record mode that maintains a single continuos audio file, and lets individual tracks be punched in, punched out, and taken out of record enable without interrupting online recording and playback.
QuickPunch Audio Recording
Pro Tools features an on-the-fly punch capability called QuickPunch. QuickPunch lets you instantaneously punch in and out on record-enabled audio tracks during playback by clicking the Record button in the Transport.
For Pro Tools systems with Digidesign control surfaces, and Digi 002 and Digi 002
Rack systems, you can use a footswitch to punch in and out when recording with
QuickPunch.
When using QuickPunch, Pro Tools begins recording a new file when playback begins, automatically generating regions in that file at each punch-in and punch-out point. These regions appear in the track’s playlist; and the complete audio file appears in the Region List along with the QuickPunch created regions. Up to 200 of these “running punches” can be performed in a single pass. Unlike normal punch recording (see
“Punch Recording Audio” on page 283), Quick-
Punch provides instantaneous monitor switching on punch-out. All QuickPunch recording is nondestructive.
You do not need to use QuickPunch to punch on-the-fly with MIDI tracks. This capability is available in Normal (Nondestructive) Record mode, and in Destructive
Record mode.
Chapter 17: Advanced Punch Recording 313
QuickPunch/TrackPunch Crossfade
Length
Pro Tools can automatically write a crossfade for each punch point when using QuickPunch. The length for these crossfades is set with the Quick-
Punch Crossfade/TrackPunch Length option in the Editing Preferences page.
To set the QuickPunch Crossfade Length:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Editing tab.
2 Enter a new value (in msec) for the Quick-
Punch/TrackPunch CrossFade Length.
A good general-purpose crossfade length for punches is 10 milliseconds. If you set the preference to zero, Pro Tools will not create any crossfades at the punch-in/out points.
3 Click OK.
If a value other than zero is specified for the
QuickPunch/TrackPunch Crossfade Length,
Pro Tools writes a pre-crossfade at the punch-in point (which occurs up to but not into the punched region boundary), and a post-crossfade at the punch-out point (which occurs after the punched region).
Even if the QuickPunch/TrackPunch Crossfade
Length is set to zero, Pro Tools always executes a
4 millisecond “monitor only” crossfade (which is not written to disk) to avoid distracting pops or clicks that might occur as you enter and exit record mode.
QuickPunch crossfades can be edited in the
same manner as standard crossfades (see “Using
QuickPunch Guidelines for
Pro Tools HD
When using QuickPunch with Pro Tools HD, two voices are required for each record-enabled, mono track. This means that you can record up to half the total number of voices available on your system. For example, a Pro Tools|HD Accel system configured for 192 voices can simultaneously record on up to 96 mono tracks with
QuickPunch (or 48 stereo tracks).
If the required number of voices for the recordenabled tracks is not available when switching to QuickPunch mode, you are prompted to free up the necessary voices.
To free up voices on tracks that are not recordenabled, and do not need to be heard while recording, do any of the following:
â– Set voice assignments for tracks to Off.
â– Make tracks inactive.
â– Group all RTAS plug-ins before TDM plug-ins.
Voices that are in use by others track, but not record-enabled, may be “stolen” while recording with QuickPunch as necessary. Priority for tracks while recording with QuickPunch are as follows:
• Tracks with assigned voices that are not record-enabled.
• Tracks with assigned voices that are recordenabled.
• Tracks with Dynamically Allocated Voicing that are not record-enabled.
• Tracks with Dynamically Allocated Voicing that are record-enabled.
314 Pro Tools Reference Guide
If the session has plenty of available voices, you should have no trouble using QuickPunch with tracks using Dynamically Allocated Voicing.
However, if you are running out of voices, and want to ensure that a track is heard when recording with QuickPunch, assign it a voice.
QuickPunch and Dynamically Allocated
Voicing
(Pro Tools HD Only)
When using QuickPunch with a Pro Tools|HD system configured for its maximum number of voices, make sure to set the voice assignment for each audio track to Dyn (for Dynamically Allocated Voicing). This ensures that Pro Tools handles the distribution of voices between each set of voices automatically. For example, for a 192voice configured Pro Tools|HD Accel system,
Dynamically Allocated Voicing distributes voices evenly across four sets of voices (1–48,
49–96, 97–144, and 145–192).
If you do not use Dynamically Allocated Voicing, the voices must be evenly distributed between all DSP engines. For example, to use
QuickPunch on 32 tracks without Dynamically
Allocated Voicing, tracks 1–16 must be assigned to voices 1–16 and tracks 17–32 must be assigned to voices 33–48.
For Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 or Music Production Toolkit, up to 24 mono or stereo audio tracks can be simultaneously recorded with
QuickPunch. On these systems, the combination of audio tracks and QuickPunch cannot be greater than 48.
QuickPunch uses CPU processing power, and may reduce the number of tracks and plug-ins you can use.
Recording with QuickPunch
To punch on-the-fly with QuickPunch:
1 With Pro Tools HD, make sure that Delay
Compensation is deselected in the Options menu.
Digidesign recommends recording without
Delay Compensation. For more informa-
tion, see “Delay Compensation” on page 656.
2 Select Options > QuickPunch. When Quick-
Punch is enabled, a “P” appears in the Record button in the Transport.
QuickPunch Guidelines for
Pro Tools LE
For Pro Tools LE systems, up to 16 mono, or 8 stereo audio tracks can be simultaneously re-
corded with QuickPunch (see “Pro Tools LE System Capabilities” on page 26).
QuickPunch enabled
QuickPunch enabled
3 To change the automatic crossfade used by
QuickPunch, configure QuickPunch Crossfade
Length option in the Editing Preferences page
(see “QuickPunch/TrackPunch Crossfade
4 Record enable the tracks on which you want to punch in. Make sure there are enough available voices on your system.
Chapter 17: Advanced Punch Recording 315
5 Prepare to record by cueing Pro Tools to an appropriate location. To use pre-roll, enable a preroll value in the Transport window.
6 Start playback by clicking Play in the Transport window.
7 Do one of the following:
• When you reach the punch-in point, click
Record in the Transport.
– or –
• For Pro Tools systems using a Digidesign control surface, or Digi 002 or Digi 002
Rack systems, with a connected footswitch, press the footswitch at the punch-in point.
The Record button stops flashing and stays lit during recording.
8 To punch out, click Record again (or press the footswitch).
As Pro Tools continues playing, you can perform additional punches (up to 100). When recording multiple punches during a single pass, a single audio file is recorded from which
Pro Tools creates the appropriate regions.
QuickPunch with an Edit Selection
If you make an Edit selection and use Quick-
Punch, the following rules apply:
â—† If the Transport is not online, recording begins and stops whenever you click the Record button in the Transport—regardless of the selection’s start or end point.
â—† If the Transport is online, punch-in/out behavior is controlled by the Online Options setting in the Operation Preferences page. If you select Record Online at Insertion/Selection,
QuickPunch punches in and out only within the selection (or in the case of an insertion point, only after the insertion point). If you select Record Online at Time Code Lock, Quick-
Punch disregards the selection and punches in and out whenever you want (after Pro Tools has locked to time code).
Region and Take Numbering with
QuickPunch
After recording with QuickPunch, the new audio regions appear in the Region List. This includes the whole-file audio region encompassing all punches from the record pass, along with the regions derived for each punch.
Names for the punched regions are numbered consecutively starting with “01.” For example, if
QuickPunch is used to punch in twice on a track called “Lead Gtr,” a region for the parent audio file appears and is named “Lead Gtr_01,” and two regions for the punches are named “Lead
Gtr_01-01” and “Lead Gtr_01-02.”
If you stop playback and record additional punches with QuickPunch, subsequent regions are named by incrementing the first two digits in the name. For example, on the second pass, the punched regions are named “Lead Gtr_02-
01,” “Lead Gtr_02-02,” and so forth.
TrackPunch Audio Recording
(Pro Tools HD Only)
TrackPunch is especially useful as a digital dubber for film re-recording (dubbing) and mixing.
Keyboard shortcuts and preference settings for recording and input monitoring provide flexibility that makes TrackPunch equally useful for loading dailies and recording Foley, as well as over-dubbing and tracking in music sessions.
316 Pro Tools Reference Guide
TrackPunch Usage Guidelines
TrackPunch and Dynamically Allocated Voicing
When using TrackPunch with a Pro Tools|HD system configured for maximum voices, make sure to set the voice assignment for each audio track to dyn for Dynamically Allocated Voicing
(this mode was previously known as Auto Voice mode). This ensures that Pro Tools can automatically manage voices most efficiently.
Audio Files and TrackPunch
After a TrackPunch recording pass, the punched track’s playlist in the Edit window displays the regions created by punching. You can use any of the Trim tools after punch recording to open up the head or tail of TrackPunch (and Quick-
Punch) recorded regions, or to reveal the parent audio file that was recorded in the background.
This lets you compensate for any late or missed punches.
As necessary, voices in use by other tracks may be “stolen” while recording with TrackPunch
(thus silencing some tracks).
TrackPunch voice playback priority follows the same guidelines as QuickPunch, as follows
(from highest to lowest playback priority):
• Tracks with assigned voices that are not record-enabled.
• Tracks with assigned voices that are recordenabled.
• Tracks with Dynamically Allocated Voicing that are not record-enabled.
• Tracks with Dynamically Allocated Voicing that are record-enabled.
If the session has plenty of available voices, you should have no trouble using TrackPunch with tracks that use Dynamically Allocated Voicing.
However, if you are running out of voices, and want to ensure that a track will be heard when recording with TrackPunch, assign it a voice.
Voice Requirements for
TrackPunch Recording
TrackPunch requires two voices for each recordenabled, mono track. This means that you can record up to half the total number of voices available on your system.
When switching to TrackPunch mode, you are prompted to free up additional voices if not enough are available.
To free up voices on tracks that are not recordenabled, and do not need to be heard while recording, do any of the following:
â– Set voice assignments for tracks to Off.
â– Make tracks inactive.
â– Group all RTAS plug-ins before TDM plug-ins.
TrackPunch Recording
Before using TrackPunch, configure Pro Tools and TrackPunch as follows:
To configure Pro Tools and TrackPunch:
1 Configure TrackPunch preferences (see
“TrackPunch Preferences” on page 318).
2 If necessary, configure Pro Tools synchronization settings for online recording and track arm-
ing (see “Configuring Synchronization and
Chapter 17: Advanced Punch Recording 317
To use TrackPunch:
1 Make sure Pro Tools is not recording or playing back (the Transport is stopped).
2 Make sure that Delay Compensation is deselected in the Options menu.
Digidesign recommends recording without
Delay Compensation. For more information about using Delay Compensation, see
“Delay Compensation” on page 656.
3
Enable TrackPunch mode (see “Enabling
TrackPunch Mode” on page 320).
4 TrackPunch enable all audio tracks that you want to punch during the record pass (see
“TrackPunch Enabling Tracks” on page 321).
5 Configure monitoring for record-enabled tracks by selecting the appropriate mode from the Track menu, as appropriate. Choices include:
• Set Record Tracks to Auto Input
• Set Record Tracks to Input Only
Selecting either monitoring mode only affects tracks that are record-enabled.
You can also use the TrackInput buttons to switch the monitor source for record-enabled tracks.
6 Start playback.
7 To compare levels of the input source with audio on disk, click the TrackInput button. When lit (green), the track is monitoring input. When unlit (grey), the track is monitoring from disk
(see “Selecting Record Monitor Modes with
TrackInput Monitoring” on page 261).
8 To punch tracks one at a time, click Record in the Transport and then use each individual track’s Record Enable button to punch in and out on-the-fly.
9 To punch multiple tracks simultaneously, do one of the following:
• Record enable as many as 16 TrackPunch enabled audio tracks, then click Record in the Transport to punch in and out all
TrackPunch-enabled tracks simultaneously.
– or –
• Click Record in the Transport first, then
Alt-Shift-click (Win) or Option-Shift-click
(Mac) track’s Record Enable button to simultaneously punch in and out on all currently selected TrackPunch enabled tracks.
Use groups for single-click selection of multiple tracks (click to the left of the Group
Name in the Group List).
10 While continuing local or remote playback, do any of the following:
• Punch in on other TrackPunch enabled tracks individually.
• After punching out, take tracks out of record enable then record enable different
TrackPunch enabled tracks.
• Repeat as needed to punch other stems, tracks, or takes.
TrackPunch Preferences
The following preference settings let you customize TrackPunch performance.
TrackPunch Crossfade Length
Pro Tools can automatically write a crossfade for each punch point when using TrackPunch. The length for these crossfades is set with the Quick-
Punch Crossfade/TrackPunch Length option in the Editing Preferences page. For more informa-
tion, see “QuickPunch/TrackPunch Crossfade
318 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Transport and Track Record Settings
The TrackPunch preferences appear on the Operation Preferences page. These preferences specify how track and Transport record status respond when the Transport is stopped (during playback and recording), and let you optimize
Pro Tools for film, video, and music production workflows.
TrackPunch preferences
Transport RecordLock
This setting lets the Transport Record be configured to either emulate a digital dubber, or to maintain legacy behavior for the Transport master Record.
â—† When not enabled, the Transport Record disarms when Pro Tools is manually stopped or stops due to a loss of time code. This replicates legacy Pro Tools recording behavior.
â—† When enabled, the Transport Record remains armed when playback or recording stops. This saves having to re-arm the Transport between takes, emulating digital dubber behavior.
Punching out of record by pressing Record on the Transport takes the transport out of record enable.
Destructive Recording and Transport
RecordLock
As a precaution against accidentally recording over previous material, the Transport Record-
Lock preference is automatically disabled and greyed out when Destructive record mode is enabled.
Audio Track RecordLock
This setting lets Pro Tools tracks either emulate a digital dubber, or maintain legacy behavior for track record status.
â—† When the Audio RecordLock preference is enabled, the record-enabled audio tracks remain armed when playback or recording stops.
â—† When the Audio RecordLock preference is not enabled, record-enabled audio tracks are taken out of record enable when Pro Tools is stopped.
This prevents tracks from remaining armed from pass to pass, emulating track record behavior of a digital dubber.
Destructive Recording and Transport
RecordLock
As a precaution against accidentally recording over previous material, the Transport Record-
Lock preference is automatically disabled and greyed out when Destructive record mode is enabled.
Configuring Synchronization and
Track Arming
For online recording and punching, configure the following Peripheral and Session Setup settings. For best lockup times when synchronizing, it is recommended that no more than 16 tracks be TrackPunch-enabled at a time.
Chapter 17: Advanced Punch Recording 319
To record online using TrackPunch switching:
1 Choose Setup > Peripherals. Make sure the
Digidesign SYNC peripheral is the selected synchronization peripheral, and that it is communicating with Pro Tools.
2 Choose Setup > Session, and do the following:
• Select a Clock and Positional reference.
• If you want Pro Tools to be the time code master, enable Using SYNC. This option is located in the Generator controls in the
Time Code Settings section of the Session
Setup window.
3 If you are controlling Pro Tools using 9-pin protocol, do the following:
• Click the Machine Control tab to display the Machine Control page of the Peripherals dialog (Setup > Peripherals).
• Configure Remote 9-pin Deck Emulation mode settings (see the MachineControl
Guide for details).
• Click OK to close the Peripherals dialog.
Consult the manufacturer of your controller for the most recent machine profiles and updates available for Pro Tools support.
Enabling TrackPunch Mode
Before you can enable individual audio tracks for TrackPunch recording, TrackPunch mode must be enabled in the Pro Tools transport.
To enable TrackPunch mode:
1 Make sure Pro Tools is not recording or playing back (the Transport is stopped).
2 Do one of the following:
• Select Options > TrackPunch.
• Right-click the Record button in the Transport, and select TrackPunch from the popup menu.
• Start-click (Windows) or Control-click
(Mac) the Record button in the Transport to cycle through available Record modes until TrackPunch mode is selected (a “T” indicates TrackPunch mode).
• Press Control+Shift+T (Windows) or Command+Shift+T (Mac).
Transport Record with TrackPunch mode enabled
Transport Display of TrackPunch
Status
TrackPunch enabled Record Enable
Status indicator
Input Status indicator
TrackPunch and TrackInput Status indicators in the
Transport window
Transport Record Button
The Transport Record button indicates Track-
Punch and Record status as follows:
When TrackPunch mode is enabled:
â—† A “T” appears in the Record button in the
Transport.
â—† If at least one track is TrackPunch-enabled, the Record button lights solid blue.
320 Pro Tools Reference Guide
When TrackPunch mode is enabled and the transport is armed for recording:
â—† If no tracks are TrackPunch-enabled, the
Record button in the Transport flashes gray and red.
â—† If at least one track is TrackPunch-enabled, the Record button flashes blue and red.
â—† If at least one TrackPunch-enabled track is also record-enabled, the Record button flashes blue and red, and the record LED lights.
â—† Whenever at least one audio track is recording, the Transport Record button lights solid red.
Create track groups for each stem or set of tracks on which you plan to punch. Use the
Group List to quickly select all tracks in the group. This makes it easier and faster to take multiple tracks in and out of Track-
Punch enable simultaneously.
Track Record Status Display
Each track’s Record Enable button indicates its
TrackPunch and record enable status as follows:
• When a track is both TrackPunch-enabled and record-enabled, its Record enable button flashes blue and red.
TrackPunch Enabling Tracks
You can TrackPunch enable tracks without record enabling them. This lets you punch in and out on individual tracks after you start playback.
To TrackPunch enable or disable an audio track:
â–
Start-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the track’s Record Enable button. When Track-
Punch enabled, the button is solid blue.
To TrackPunch enable or disable all audio tracks:
â– Alt-Start-click (Windows) or Option-Controlclick (Mac) a track’s Record Enable button.
When TrackPunch enabled, the tracks’ Record
Enable buttons are solid blue.
To TrackPunch enable or disable all selected audio tracks:
â– Alt-Start-Shift-click (Windows) or Option-
Control-Shift-click (Mac) a track’s Record Enable button. When TrackPunch enabled, the selected tracks’ buttons are solid blue.
Record Enable button
TrackPunch status indication in an audio track in the
Mix window
• When a track is TrackPunch-enabled but not record-enabled, its Record Enable button lights solid blue.
• When a track is record-enabled only, its
Record Enable button flashes red.
• While a track is recording (in any mode), its
Record Enable button lights solid red.
Red (not flashing) indicates recording
(all modes)
Track Record status in the Edit window
Chapter 17: Advanced Punch Recording 321
TrackPunch Recording
After you have put Pro Tools in TrackPunch mode, and enabled tracks for TrackPunch recording, you can record with TrackPunch in several ways.
Punching In on Individual Tracks
To punch in on individual tracks:
1 Put Pro Tools in TrackPunch mode.
2 Start-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the Record Enable button for each track you want to punch in, so that the track is Track-
Punch-enabled only. The track’s Record Enable button should light solid blue.
3 Click Record in the Transport to enter the
TrackPunch Record Ready mode. The Record button flashes blue and red.
4 Click Play in the Transport to begin playback.
5 During playback, punch in and out on individual TrackPunch-enabled tracks by clicking their respective Record Enable buttons.
6 Stop playback. When you are finished with the record pass, track Record Enable status and transport Record Arm status follow the current
TrackPunch preference settings.
Punching In on Multiple Tracks
Simultaneously
To punch in on multiple tracks simultaneously:
1
Enable TrackPunch mode (see “Enabling
TrackPunch Mode” on page 320).
2 Click the Record Enable button on each track you want to punch in, so that the track is both
TrackPunch- and Record-enabled. The track’s
Record Enable button flashes blue and red.
3 Click Play in the Transport to begin playback.
322 Pro Tools Reference Guide
4 During playback, click Record in the Transport to punch in and out on all TrackPunch-enabled tracks simultaneously.
5 Stop playback. When you are finished with the record pass, track Record Enable status and transport Record Arm status follow the current
TrackPunch preference settings.
Start Recording on All Tracks
To punch in on all tracks:
1
Enable TrackPunch mode (see “Enabling
TrackPunch Mode” on page 320).
2 Click the Record Enable button on each track you want to punch in, so that the track is both
TrackPunch- and Record-enabled. The track’s
Record Enable button flashes blue and red.
3 Click Record in the Transport to enter the
TrackPunch Record Ready mode. The Record button flashes blue and red.
4 Click Play in the Transport to begin playback.
5 During playback, punch out and back in on individual TrackPunch-enabled tracks by clicking their respective Record Enable buttons.
6 Stop playback. When you are finished with the record pass, track Record Enable status and transport Record Arm status follow the current
TrackPunch preference settings.
Example TrackPunch Workflows
Pro Tools emulates and enhances the following four “workflows” commonly performed in film, video, and music production:
• Dubbing and mixing film (see “Film Dubbing and Mixing with TrackPunch” on page 323)
• Loading dailies (see “Loading Dailies Using
• Recording Foley (see “Foley Recording with
• Tracking and overdubbing in music production and any other recording situation (see
“Tracking and Overdubbing Music with
Each of these workflows takes advantage of
TrackPunch features and options.
In the following example workflows, it is assumed you already familiar with routing, selecting, and grouping Pro Tools tracks. If you are
not, see Chapter 10, “Tracks” and Chapter 28,
Film Dubbing and Mixing with
TrackPunch
By providing all the essential online punch recording and monitor switching capabilities of a digital dubber, TrackPunch optimizes Pro Tools for re-recording and mixing for film.
Film dubbing and mixing features of Track-
Punch let you do the following:
• Arm and punch Pro Tools audio tracks remotely from a master synchronizer such as
SoundMaster through P2 commands at any time, without having to stop playback and while maintaining time code lock. (Requires
Digidesign MachineControl.)
• Toggle Pro Tools audio tracks between input and disk monitoring.
• Use TrackPunch when Pro Tools is the time code master (generating) or when slaving.
• Because Pro Tools can be networked, Track-
Punch (and all other) audio files and whole sessions can be available for secure transfer to other systems for review, editing, and archiving.
A typical pre-dub session using TrackPunch includes the following steps:
1 Configure synchronization between Pro Tools and other devices as appropriate.
2 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Operation tab.
3 Select (enable) Transport RecordLock. This keeps the Transport Record armed after the transport stops.
In Remote mode, Transport RecordLock has no effect. The synchronizer determines the behavior.
4 Deselect Audio Track RecordLock. This causes the audio track record to disarm when the transport stops.
In Remote mode, Audio Track RecordLock has no effect. The synchronizer determines the behavior.
5 Choose Options > TrackPunch to enable
TrackPunch mode.
6 Create 32 new tracks, then do the following:
• Assign their inputs
• Group them into eight-track groups.
7 Click the record enable buttons in the first eight tracks to TrackPunch enable the first eight tracks (or, the group for the first pre-dub).
Use the Group List to quickly select all tracks in the group, and Alt-Shift-click
(Windows) or Option-Shift-click (Mac) to record-enable all the tracks in the group.
8 Assign the console paddles to the first eighttrack group in the session.
9 Begin the pre-dub pass. Use the console paddles to arm Pro Tools, and to punch in and out on the first group.
Chapter 17: Advanced Punch Recording 323
10 When the first pre-dub is over and all tracks are punched out, clear all TrackPunch enabled tracks.
11 Select the next group of tracks and Track-
Punch-enable them.
12 Punch in and out on the second group of tracks.
13 Repeat the preceding steps as necessary.
Loading Dailies Using RecordLock
In addition to its uses on dub and mix stages,
Pro Tools makes it easy to load dailies. Dailies and similar types of transfers are comprised of multiple takes or scenes, each recorded while locked to unique time-of-day time code. In between each take, time code does not continue but stops completely. Because of this, the time code on dailies and similar source material is said to be “discontiguous” or discontinuous
(also known as broken time code).
When a session is taken offline while recording due to broken time code, Pro Tools remains armed and waits for time code to resume.
Pro Tools begins recording again when lock is re-established with the time code of the next take. Each take is recorded to its own audio file.
To configure RecordLock for loading:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Operation tab.
2 Enable Transport RecordLock.
3 Enable Audio Track RecordLock.
4 Configure synchronization and other settings as required.
5 Put Pro Tools online, and start the external source player.
6 Whenever time code drops out or stops,
Pro Tools remains online and waits to receive new time code. The Transport and record-enabled tracks remain record-enabled (or Track-
Punch enabled). When time code resumes,
Pro Tools begins recording to a new audio file
(properly time stamped based on the incoming code).
Because Pro Tools has a 13-hour timeline limit, you must use multiple sessions to load dailies if the span is more than
13 hours.
Foley Recording with TrackPunch
Foley recording is one of the more specialized forms of recording in film production with unique monitoring requirements. Between punches and takes, inputs must be muted while
Foley artists move themselves and equipment as they progress through a scene.
TrackInput monitoring can be configured to support Foley style TrackPunch recording using the Mute Record-Armed Tracks While Stopped preference.
To configure Pro Tools for Foley-style punch record monitoring:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Operation tab.
2 Enable Mute Record-Armed Tracks While
Stopped.
3 Configure synchronization and other settings for Pro Tools and your other devices, then enable TrackPunch mode and proceed with punch
recording. (See “TrackPunch Recording” on page 317 for the complete steps.)
324 Pro Tools Reference Guide
When recording online and Mute Record-
Armed Tracks While Stopped is enabled, recordenabled tracks mute when the Transport is stopped. Input can still be monitored at any time by using the TrackInput switch.
Tracking and Overdubbing Music with TrackPunch
Modern multitrack recording requires the flexibility to “capture the moment” by allowing onthe-fly record enabling and punch recording, as provided by TrackPunch. Features of Track-
Punch for all tracking, overdubbing, and punching situations include the following:
• Record enable tracks on-the-fly.
• Punch tracks in and out using on-screen
Record Enable buttons, remotely from a synchronizer, from a control surface, or using a foot switch.
• Compare and match levels using TrackInput switching.
DestructivePunch is essentially a destructive version of TrackPunch mode. Where Track-
Punch always records audio to a new file in the background, DestructivePunch destructively records audio directly into the original file, using a fixed 10-millisecond linear crossfade. Up to 200 “running punches” can be performed in a track during a single DestructivePunch pass.
DestructivePunch and MachineControl
When using Digidesign MachineControl software in Remote 9-Pin Deck Emulation Mode,
DestructivePunch can be controlled via P2 protocol.
DestructivePunch and Voice Allocation
As with TrackPunch and QuickPunch, DestructivePunch requires 2 available voices per mono track. When using DestructivePunch with a
Pro Tools|HD system configured for maximum voices, make sure to set the voice assignment for each audio track to dyn for Dynamically Allocated Voicing. This ensures that Pro Tools can automatically manage voices most efficiently.
DestructivePunch Audio
Recording
(Pro Tools HD Only)
DestructivePunch is a destructive recording mode that lets you instantaneously punch in
(start recording) and punch out (stop recording) on individual audio tracks during playback, while preserving a contiguous audio file on each punched track. No additional regions are created when recording in DestructivePunch mode.
DestructivePunch is useful for mixing and predubbing workflows where you want the final result to be a single, contiguous file without any edits.
Configuring Pro Tools for
DestructivePunch Recording
Before using DestructivePunch, configure DestructivePunch preferences and related
Pro Tools settings as described in this section.
Transport and Track Record Settings
The Transport RecordLock and Audio Record-
Lock preferences specify track and Transport
Record Enable behavior when playback or recording are stopped. They function with DestructivePunch as with TrackPunch. For more
information, see “TrackPunch Preferences” on page 318.
Chapter 17: Advanced Punch Recording 325
Delay Compensation Settings
When using DestructivePunch to punch in on an existing recording, make sure the Delay
Compensation settings are the same as when the original file was recorded.
â—† If Delay Compensation was active when recording the original file, it should be kept active while punching into the original file in DestructivePunch mode.
â—† If Delay Compensation was inactive when recording the original file, it should be deactivated while punching into the original file in DestructivePunch mode.
To ensure that the Delay Compensation path on record tracks remains consistent while using DestructivePunch, you need to prevent Pro Tools from using the Low Latency monitoring path when record tracks switch to Input monitoring.
To ensure that Low-Latency monitoring is disabled for a record track:
â– Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the Track Compensation indicator on the track.
To ensure that Low-Latency monitoring is disabled for all selected record tracks:
â– Control-Start-Shift-click (Windows) or Command-Control-Shift-click (Mac) the Track Compensation indicator on the track.
To ensure that Low-Latency monitoring is disabled for all record tracks:
â–
Control-Alt-Start-Shift-click (Windows) or
Command-Option-Control-Shift-click (Mac) the Track Compensation indicator on the track.
Enabling DestructivePunch Mode
Before you can enable individual audio tracks for DestructivePunch recording, you must put
Pro Tools in DestructivePunch mode.
To enable DestructivePunch mode:
1 Make sure Pro Tools is not recording or playing back (the Transport is stopped).
2 Do one of the following:
• Select Options > DestructivePunch.
• Right-click the Record button in the Transport and select DestructivePunch from the pop-up menu.
• Start-click (Windows) or Control-click
(Mac) the Record button in the Transport to cycle through available Record modes until DestructivePunch mode is indicated by “dp” in the Transport Record Enable button.
Enabling Tracks for
DestructivePunch Recording
DestructivePunch Enabling Tracks without Record Enabling Them
You can enable tracks for DestructivePunch without record enabling them. This lets you punch in on individual tracks at any time after starting playback by clicking their respective
Record Enable buttons.
To DestructivePunch-enable an audio track:
â–
Start-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the track’s Record Enable button to toggle the button to solid blue.
326 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To DestructivePunch-enable all audio tracks:
â–
Alt-Start-click (Windows) or Option-Controlclick (Mac) a track’s Record Enable button to toggle all Record Enable buttons to solid blue.
To DestructivePunch-enable all selected audio tracks:
â– Alt-Start-Shift-click (Windows) or Control-
Option-Shift-click (Mac) a track’s Record Enable button to toggle the Record Enable buttons for the selected audio tracks solid blue.
Create a VCA group for each stem or set of tracks on which you plan to punch, and use the VCA Record Enable button to arm all tracks in the group for DestructivePunch.
For more information, see “VCA Master
DestructivePunch-Enabling and Record-
Enabling Tracks Simultaneously
You can simultaneously DestructivePunch enable tracks and record enable them. This starts recording as soon as the transport is recordarmed and playback begins.
To simultaneously DestructivePunch enable and record enable an audio track:
â– Click the track’s Record Enable button. The track’s Record Enable button flashes blue and red.
To simultaneously DestructivePunch enable and record enable all audio tracks:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) a track’s Record Enable button. All tracks’ Record
Enable buttons flash blue and red.
To simultaneously DestructivePunch enable and record enable all selected audio tracks:
â– Alt-Shift-click (Windows) or Option-Shiftclick (Mac) a track’s Record Enable button. The
Record Enable buttons for the selected audio tracks flash blue and red.
Display of DestructivePunch
Status
Transport Record Enable Button
The Transport Record Enable button indicates
DestructivePunch mode and Record status as follows:
When DestructivePunch mode is enabled:
â—† The letters “dp” appears in the Record button in the Transport.
Transport Record Enable button with DestructivePunch mode enabled
â—† If at least one track is DestructivePunch-enabled, the Record button in the Transport lights solid blue.
DestructivePunch Enabled
Record LED
Input Status
LED
DestructivePunch status in the Transport window
Chapter 17: Advanced Punch Recording 327
When DestructivePunch mode is enabled and the transport is armed for recording:
â—† If no tracks are DestructivePunch-enabled, the
Record button in the Transport flashes gray and red.
â—† If at least one track is DestructivePunch-enabled, the Record button flashes blue and red.
â—† If at least one DestructivePunch-enabled track is also record enabled, the Record button flashes blue and red, and the record LED lights.
â—† Whenever at least one audio track is recording, the Record button lights solid red.
Track Record Status Display
When Pro Tools is in DestructivePunch mode, each track’s Record Enable button indicates its
DestructivePunch and record enable status as follows:
• When a track is both DestructivePunch-enabled and record-enabled, its Record Enable button flashes blue and red.
Record Enable button
DestructivePunch status indication in an audio track in the Mix window
• When a track is DestructivePunch-enabled but not record-enabled, its Record Enable button lights solid blue.
• When a track is record-enabled only, its
Record Enable button flashes red.
• While a track is recording (in any mode), its
Record Enable button lights solid red.
Red (not flashing) indicates recording
(all modes)
Track Record status in the Edit window
Record and Input Status LEDs
Record and Input LEDs next to the Transport
Record Enable button indicate track Record and
Input status as follows, in all recording modes:
Record Status LED When lit (red), indicates that at least one audio track is currently record-enabled. When off (grey), no tracks are currently record-enabled.
.
Input Status LED When lit (green), indicates that at least one audio track is currently set to
Input Only monitoring (regardless of record enable status). When off (grey), all tracks are in
Auto Input monitoring
Track Record Enable buttons also appear in blue to indicate that track is Destructive-
Punch-enabled.
Preparing Tracks for
DestructivePunch Recording
In order for a track to be enabled for Destructive-
Punch recording, the track must contain a contiguous audio file that meets the following requirements:
• The file must start at the beginning
(sample 0) of the session.
– and –
• The File Length must be equal to or greater than the DestructivePunch File Length setting (see “DestructivePunch File Length” on page 329).
328 Pro Tools Reference Guide
If a track does not contain a file that meets these requirements, you can do any of the following to meet the requirements:
• Move the current file in the track timeline so that its beginning aligns with the session start.
• Select the material in the track and use the
Consolidate command to create a continuous file of the required length.
• Change the DestructivePunch File Length setting so that the current file is equal to or greater than the required length.
• Use the Prepare DPE Tracks command to consolidate audio on all DestructivePunchenabled tracks. (See “Using the Prepare DPE
Tracks Command” on page 329.)
DestructivePunch File Length
To use DestructivePunch on an audio track, the track must contain a contiguous audio file of a minimum length, which is set in the Pro Tools
Operation preferences page.
To set DestructivePunch File Length:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Operation.
2 Enter a value for DestructivePunch File
Length.
3 Click OK.
Using the Prepare DPE Tracks Command
To prepare a track for DestructivePunch recording:
1
Enable DestructivePunch mode (“Enabling
DestructivePunch Mode” on page 326).
2 Make sure the tracks you want to prepare are
DestructivePunch-enabled (“DestructivePunch
Enabling Tracks without Record Enabling
Them” on page 326).
3 Choose Options > Prepare DPE Tracks.
Pro Tools consolidates audio on all Destructive-
Punch-enabled tracks from the beginning of the session to the value specified in the Destructive-
Punch File Length preference.
DestructivePunch Recording
After you have put Pro Tools in Destructive-
Punch mode, enabled tracks for Destructive-
Punch recording, and prepared tracks if necessary, you can record in several ways.
Punching In On Single Tracks
To punch in on single tracks:
1
Enable DestructivePunch mode (“Enabling
DestructivePunch Mode” on page 326).
2 Start-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the Record Enable button for each track you want to punch in, so that the track is DestructivePunch-enabled only. The track’s Record Enable button lights solid blue.
3 Click Record in the Transport to enter Record
Ready mode. The Record Enable button flashes blue and red.
4 Click Play in the Transport to begin playback.
5 During playback, punch in and out on individual DestructivePunch-enabled tracks by clicking their Record Enable buttons.
6 Stop playback. When you are finished with the record pass, track Record Enable status and transport Record Arm status follow the current
Audio Track RecordLock and Transport Record-
Lock preference settings.
Chapter 17: Advanced Punch Recording 329
Punching In on Multiple Tracks
To punch in on multiple tracks simultaneously:
1
Enable DestructivePunch mode (“Enabling
DestructivePunch Mode” on page 326).
2 Click the Record Enable button on each track you want to punch in, so that the track is both
DestructivePunch-enabled and Record-enabled.
Each track’s Record Enable button flashes blue and red.
3 Click Play in the Transport to begin playback.
4 During playback, click Record in the Transport to punch in and out on all DestructivePunchenabled tracks simultaneously.
5 Stop playback. When you are finished with the record pass, track Record Enable status and transport Record Arm status follow the current
Audio Track RecordLock and Transport Record-
Lock preference settings.
Starting Recording Immediately on
Multiple Tracks
To punch in on multiple tracks:
1
Enable DestructivePunch mode (“Enabling
DestructivePunch Mode” on page 326).
2 Click the Record Enable button on each track you want to punch in, so that the track is both
DestructivePunch-enabled and Record-enabled.
Each track’s Record Enable button flashes blue and red.
3 Click Record in the Transport to enter Record
Ready mode. The Record button flashes blue and red.
4 Click Play in the Transport to begin playback.
5 During playback, punch out and back in on individual DestructivePunch-enabled tracks by clicking their respective Record Enable buttons.
6 Stop playback. When you are finished with the record pass, track Record Enable status and transport Record Arm status follow the current
Audio Track RecordLock and Transport Record-
Lock preference settings.
330 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Part V: Editing
331
332
Chapter 18: Editing Basics
Pro Tools Editing
The Edit window in Pro Tools provides a powerful collection of tools for editing and assembling audio, video, and MIDI. Track material can be edited nondestructively and in real time during playback. The Edit window also lets you graphically edit track automation.
For more information on MIDI editing, see
For more information on video editing, see
Chapter 36, “Working with Video in
For more information on Automation in the
Edit window, see Chapter 30, “Automation.”
Nondestructive Editing
The vast majority of audio editing in Pro Tools is nondestructive. Whether cutting, pasting, trimming, separating, or clearing regions, you are only performing these functions on a map of the actual audio data. The source audio files remain untouched. However, certain processes or tools work destructively (that is, it can permanently change audio files on your hard disk), as noted in this guide.
While editing for MIDI tracks is in some instances destructive, with a few precautions you can keep important MIDI tracks and regions safe
when performing edits (see “Nondestructive
Editing During Playback
Pro Tools lets you perform many editing tasks while the session plays. This powerful capability lets you interactively modify and edit a session, hearing the changes as you make them. You will find many instances where you can use this capability to increase your productivity when working with a session.
Following are just a few examples of editing that can be performed while your tracks loop or play:
• Capture, separate, and trim regions
• Place, spot, or rearrange regions
• Add fades or crossfades to audio regions
• Transpose, quantize (including Groove
Quantize), and otherwise modify MIDI tracks
• Nudge audio or MIDI regions
• Audition different playlists
• Adjust or scale automation data
• Insert a real-time plug-in
• Process audio with an AudioSuite plug-in
• Automation breakpoint editing
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 333
There are a few things that cannot be changed while Pro Tools plays, as noted throughout this guide.
Track Material
Each time you record or import audio, video, and MIDI, Pro Tools creates regions for the new track data, which not only indicate where the material begins and ends, but also provides good feedback on its general shape and content.
When you record additional takes, or “punch in” on a specific location within a track,
Pro Tools creates additional regions.
Regions are also created by cutting and pasting, resizing, separating, and re-capturing existing regions. Regions in a session are listed in the Region List, where they can be dragged to existing tracks. A track can contain any number of regions, in any arrangement. The order and location of regions in a track define its playlist .
In addition to audio and MIDI regions, tracks provide automation playlists of any automation data (such as volume). Automation can be recorded and edited in the
Mix or Edit windows. For more informa-
tion, see Chapter 30, “Automation.”
Region Types
There are different types of audio and MIDI regions, based on how they are created:
For information on video regions, see
Chapter 36, “Working with Video in
Whole-File Audio Regions These audio regions are created when recording or importing audio, consolidating existing regions, and when nondestructively processing with an AudioSuite plug-in. Whole-file audio regions reference an
334 Pro Tools Reference Guide entire audio file that resides on your hard drive.
Whole-file audio regions are displayed in bold
in the Region List (see “The Region List” on page 357). Normal regions often reference only
a portion of the parent audio file and are created in the course of editing and, in some instances, when punch recording.
User-Defined Regions These are regions that are explicitly defined, such as when you record or import audio or MIDI; capture, separate, or consolidate a selection; trim a whole-file audio region; or rename an existing region.
Auto-Created Regions These regions are automatically created in the course of editing, and, in some instances, when punch recording over existing regions. Since these regions can accumulate rapidly in a session, you can hide them
in the Region List (see “Naming and Displaying
Regions” on page 488). Auto-created regions
can be turned into user-defined regions by renaming them.
Offline Regions Regions are offline when their parent files cannot be located, or are not available, when opening a session or importing a track. Offline regions appear in the Region List as italicized and dimmed; they appear in playlists as light blue regions with italicized names.
Offline regions can be edited like other regions, but they cannot be processed with AudioSuite plug-ins.
Multichannel Regions These regions, which are displayed as a single region in the Region List, reference multiple regions and audio files for stereo and surround tracks. Multichannel regions can be expanded (by clicking the triangle next to their name) to see the individual channels, which can be dragged independently to tracks.
Region Groups A region group is a collection of any combination of audio and MIDI regions that looks and acts like a single region. Region groups are essentially containers holding one or more regions. Region groups can be created on a single track or on multiple adjacent audio,
MIDI, and Instrument tracks. Region groups let you “nest” multiple regions into “macro” regions for groove and tempo manipulation, editing, and arranging.
For more information on region groups, see
Track View
The Track View determines which data is displayed and edited in the track’s playlist area.
Track View data can be set to Blocks, Waveform,
Volume, Pan, Mute, or an automated control or continuous controller, based on the track type.
Audio Tracks ume , Volume
Can be set to
Trim , Pan ,
Blocks
Mute
, Waveform necessary detail for important region edits.
, trols that are enabled for automation. By default, audio tracks are set to Waveform view
Vol-
, or any plug-in conwhere track material is graphically drawn with amplitude waveforms (a time-domain representation of sound). This Track View provides the
Track View set to Waveform for audio track
Auxiliary Input Tracks Can be set to Volume , Volume Trim , Pan , Mute , or any plug-in controls that are enabled for automation.
Master Fader Tracks Can be set to Volume , Volume Trim , or any plug-in controls that are enabled for automation.
VCA Master Tracks (Pro Tools HD Only) Can be set to Volume , Volume Trim , or Mute .
MIDI Tracks Can be set to Blocks , Regions , Notes ,
Volume , Pan , Mute , Velocity , Pitch Bend , After
Touch , Program , Sysex , and any continuous controller type. MIDI tracks are commonly set to
Notes or Regions, each of which displays notes in a “piano roll” format. Use Notes View for inserting, editing, and copying and pasting MIDI notes. Use Regions View to arrange, capture, or consolidate regions. Other MIDI track views are useful for editing controller data, program changes, and Sysex events.
Track View set to Regions for MIDI track
Instrument Tracks Can be set to Blocks, Regions,
Notes, Volume, Pan, Mute, Velocity, Pitch Bend, After Touch, Program, Sysex , and any continuous controller type for MIDI, as well as Volume, Volume Trim , Pan, Mute , or any plug-in controls that enabled for automation. Instrument tracks are commonly set to Notes or Regions, each of which displays notes in a “piano roll” format.
Use Notes View for inserting, editing, and copying and pasting MIDI notes. Use Regions View to arrange, capture, or consolidate regions.
Other Instrument track views are useful for editing automation, controller data, program changes, and Sysex events.
With the Track View set to Blocks, audio and
MIDI regions are displayed as empty blocks bearing the region’s name. This mode is most useful once you have finished capturing and editing regions at the waveform or MIDI event level and are moving and rearranging them.
Screen redraws are fastest with this format.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 335
When an audio or Instrument track is displayed as Volume, Pan, or another automated control, or when a MIDI or Instrument track is set to one of the continuous controller types (Volume,
Pitch Bend, After Touch), the data for that track appears in the form of a line graph with a series of editable breakpoints. The breakpoints can be dragged to modify the automation data, and new breakpoints can be inserted with the Pencil tool or a Grabber tool.
Click for Track View pop-up menu
Auxiliary Track View selector
Click for Track View pop-up menu
Master Fader Track View selector
Track View set to Pan for audio track
For details on editing automation data for
audio tracks, see Chapter 30, “Automation.”
Click for Track View pop-up menu
VCA Master Track View selector (Pro Tools HD only)
For details on inserting and editing control-
ler data for MIDI tracks, see “Continuous
Controller Events” on page 571.
To set the Track View:
â– Click the Track View selector for the track and select the format from the pop-up menu.
The track displays the new format. If the track is part of an active Edit Group, all tracks in the group are set to the new format.
Click for Track View pop-up menu
Click for Track View pop-up menu
MIDI Track View selector
Audio Track View selector
336 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Click for Track View pop-up menu
Instrument Track View selector
For information on video track views, see
“Video Track View” on page 822.
Changing Track Views
For audio, Auxiliary Input, MIDI, and Instrument tracks, you can change to the next or previous Track View, or toggle between pre-defined common views.
Changing to Previous or Next Track View
When changing to the next or previous Track
View, Track View list ordering is maintained as shown in the Track View selector.
Track Views at the beginning of the list
(such as Blocks for audio or MIDI tracks) cannot be changed to the previous Track
View. Tracks Views at the end of the list
(such as a MIDI controllers option) cannot be changed to the next Track View.
To change to the previous or next Track View:
1 Click in the track you want to change. To change views on multiple tracks, Shift-click or drag the Selector tool to select additional tracks, or select a group.
2 Do one of the following:
• To change to the previous or next Track
View on all selected tracks, press Control+Start (Windows) or Control+Command (Mac) and the Left or Right Arrow key.
– or –
• To change to the previous or next Track
View on all tracks, press Control+Alt+Start
(Windows) or Control+Option+Command
(Mac) and the Left or Right Arrow key.
Toggling Common Track Views
The most common editing view for audio tracks are Waveform and Volume View. The most common editing views for MIDI and Instrument tracks are Notes and Regions View. Pro Tools provides an easy way to toggle these views.
To toggle Track Views on selected tracks:
1 Click in the track you want to toggle. To toggle multiple tracks, Shift-click or click and drag with the Selector tool to select additional tracks.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 337
2 Do one of the following:
• Press Start+Minus (Windows) or Control+Minus (Mac) on the QWERTY keyboard.
To toggle Track Views for all tracks, press
Alt+Start+Minus (Windows) or Option+Control+Minus (Mac) on the QW-
ERTY keyboard.
– or –
• With Commands Keyboard Focus enabled
(see “Keyboard Focus” on page 16), press
Minus on the QWERTY keyboard.
To toggle Track Views for all tracks with
Command Focus enabled, press Alt+Minus
(Windows) or Option+Minus (Mac) on the
QWERTY keyboard.
Audio tracks are toggled between Waveform and
Volume View. MIDI and Instrument tracks are toggled between Notes and Regions View.
Master Views for Tracks
Audio, MIDI, and Instrument tracks have Track
Views that act as “master.” When a track is displayed in its Master View, any edits performed apply to all data in the track. For instance, when an audio track is set to Waveform, copying and pasting affects not just the waveform information, but all of the automation data as well.
The Master View is based on the type of track, as follows:
• Audio tracks: Waveform and Blocks
• MIDI and Instrument tracks: Regions,
Blocks, and Notes (when using the Selector tool)
Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and VCA Master tracks also have a Master View (Volume). When an Auxiliary Input or Master Fader track is displayed in its Master View, any edits performed apply to all automation data in the track.
Track Height
Tracks can be viewed in the Edit window at any of eight heights: Micro, Mini , Small , Medium ,
Large , Jumbo , Extreme and Fit To Window . Larger track heights are particularly useful for precise editing, especially for MIDI. Smaller track heights are useful for conserving screen space in a large session.
You can adjust track heights on an individual track basis or set all tracks to the same height.
Track heights can be adjusted during playback.
To set the Track Height, do one of the following:
â– Click the small arrow next to the Track View selector to get the Track Height pop-up menu.
Track Height pop-up menu
– or –
â–
Right-click in the area just to the right of the track controls and choose the height from the pop-up menu.
338 Pro Tools Reference Guide
The track is resized to the new height. If the track is part of an Edit Group, all tracks in the group are set to the new height.
Press Start+Up/Down Arrow key (Windows) or Control+Up/Down Arrow key
(Mac) to increase/decrease track height of any track that contains a selection or in which the edit cursor is currently placed.
Expanded Track Display
Stereo and multichannel tracks share a single playlist for volume and mute. This shared playlist normally occupies the entire height of the track, extending across all channels.
To turn on Expanded Track Display:
â–
From the Track Height selector, click Expanded Track Display.
Track Height pop-up menu
Track Controls and Track Height
The Track Height affects how the various track controls appear in the Edit window. For instance, when a track’s height is set to Small, most of the buttons are reduced in size.
Volume playlist for stereo track
With Expanded Track Display, you can display playlists individually for each channel, thereby allowing for more accurate breakpoint editing.
This is also useful for editing pan or multi-mono plug-in data, both of which can be different for each channel.
Track Height set to Small
When the Track Height is set to Mini or Micro, only controls for Record, Solo, and Mute appear, and the menus for Playlist, Track Timebase,
Track Height, and Track View are accessed from the same selector.
Stereo track in Expanded Track Display
Expanded Track Display also provides for a larger waveform display (equal to mono tracks), as well as a separate Track View selector and meter for each channel.
Track Height set to Mini
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 339
When the Track Height is set to Large, Jumbo, or
Extreme, all track controls are displayed at their full size.
The track’s Track Height changes incrementally.
Adjusting the Track Height of an audio track
Track Height set to Large
Continuously Variable Track Height
In the Edit window, you can continuously resize the Track Height of any given track by simply clicking and dragging the lower boundary of the
Track Controls column.
To resize the Track Height of any track in the Edit window:
â– Click and drag the bottom line of any given track’s Track Controls column up or down. The cursor changes to indicate that you can resize the track.
Press and hold Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) while adjusting track height for continuous, non-incremental adjustments.
To continuously resize all tracks, Alt-click
(Windows) or Option-click (Mac) and drag.
To continuously resize all selected tracks,
Alt-Shift-click (Windows) or Option-Shiftclick (Mac) and drag.
Displaying Region Names,
Region Times, and Other Data in Playlists
Region names and times can sometimes get in the way of editing audio waveforms and MIDI data. In these instances, you may want to disable their display. In other instances, such as arranging or spotting Foley, displaying region names and times is extremely useful.
To enable or disable the display of region names in playlists:
â–
Select or deselect View > Region > Name.
340 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To display region times:
â–
From View > Region, select one of the following options:
No Time Disables display of region times.
Current Time Displays start and end times for regions.
Original Time Stamp Displays the Original Time
Stamp for each region. The Original Time Stamp is the original time code location for the region when it was first recorded or created.
User Time Stamp Displays the User Time Stamp for each region. The User Time Stamp, which defaults to the Original Time Stamp, can be redefined with the Time Stamp command.
Display enabled for region names, Overlap, and times
Region and region group Sync Points can be dis-
played on regions in playlists (see “Sync Points” on page 434). This is useful when visually spot-
ting to time code or in arranging in Grid mode.
Region Overlaps can be displayed on regions in playlists. This is useful for arranging and when
working with tick-based audio tracks (see “Region Overlap and Underlap” on page 420).
Channel Name and Scene And Take information can be displayed in regions in playlists and in the Region List. This is useful for working with multichannel recordings and metadata made by field recorders.
See the Field Recorder Workflow Guide for detailed information on workflows for field recorders.
Audio Regions and Waveforms
When the Track View for audio tracks is set to
Waveform, Pro Tools draws a waveform diagram of the audio. Audio waveforms tell you several things about the recorded sound.
Figure 16. Audio waveform of a drum track
In Figure 16, the “peaks” represent places in the
recording where the attack of the sound causes the volume to increase momentarily. These are followed by “valleys,” where the volume decreases.
Different types of sounds produce different types of waveforms. Drums, for example, generally produce waveforms with sharp transients
(peaks of short duration) that are clearly defined. A drum hit has a loud, sharp attack and a rapid decay.
Other sounds, such as vocals or sustained synthesizer pads, produce very different waveforms.
These sounds have less pronounced peaks and valleys because they generally have softer attacks and longer decays.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 341
Draw Waveforms Rectified Preference
When the Display preference for Draw Waveforms Rectified is selected (in the Display Preferences page), audio waveforms are displayed so that their positive and negative waveform excursions are summed together and viewed as a single positive-value signal. However, even when this preference is enabled, zooming in beyond a certain point will cause the waveforms to be displayed normally.
Audio displayed in Rectified mode
Audio displayed in Normal mode
Rectified mode displays more detailed waveforms when using track heights of Medium or
Small, and can be particularly useful when editing volume automation data, since it depicts waveform “levels” as starting at the bottom of the track.
Guidelines for Editing Waveforms
With the Selector tool in the Edit window, you can select portions of audio waveforms and divide them into segments called regions , so that you can rearrange and manipulate them in tracks.
While editing, try to create regions that let you maintain a consistent beat. If you always define regions so that they contain a whole number of beats, you will be able to string the regions together and maintain a smooth, steady rhythm.
It is sometimes useful to have a steady, well-defined waveform (such as a drum track) as a guide when selecting and defining other regions. If you have played in time with the beat, it should be easier to create rhythmically accurate regions by referring to the drum waveform.
Some important rules to keep in mind when defining regions:
â—† Whenever possible, begin a region precisely before a volume peak, and end it immediately before another volume peak.
â—† Whenever possible, make sure a region starts and ends on exactly the same part of a beat.
â—† Use the following Pro Tools features to help you edit rhythmic material or audio with clear transients into precise regions:
• Tab to Transients (see “Tabbing to Transients” on page 407 .
)
• Editing to a Grid (see “Grid” on page 365)
• Beat Detective (see Chapter 24, “Beat Detective”)
342 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Avoiding Clicks and Pops
If an edited region begins or ends at a point of high amplitude, you may hear a click when
Pro Tools plays from one region to another. In order to avoid clicks or pops do any of the following:
â—† Make sure that the start and end points of your selection are as close as possible to the point where the amplitude of the waveform tapers down to meet the zero-crossing line (the center line of the track’s waveform display). If necessary, use the zooming tools in the Edit
window (see “Using the Zoomer Tools” on page 367) to display waveforms in greater detail.
When trimming audio regions with any of the
Trim tools, or when editing the placement or order of regions within a track, use multiple playlists to easily return to a track’s previous state.
For more information, see “Playlists” on page 352.
Audio Regions and Automation
Data
Automation data for audio resides in tracks and not in the Region List. This means that when you drag an audio region from the Region List to a new track, no automation data is placed in the track. However, if you drag an audio region from an existing track (that contains automation data) to another track, the automation from the source track is placed in the destination track.
Selection that begins and ends at zero crossings
â—† Apply a crossfade between regions where a
click or pop occurs. See “Creating a Crossfade” on page 474
for details.
â—† With Pro Tools HD, use the AutoFade feature to apply real-time fade-ins/outs to all region boundaries that do not touch or overlap other
regions. See “Using AutoFades” on page 475 for
details.
MIDI Regions and MIDI Data
The two most common Track Views you will use for MIDI and Instrument tracks are Notes and
Regions.
Use Notes View for inserting and editing individual MIDI notes, and for working with and affecting groups of notes.
Use Regions View for arranging regions.
For more information on setting Track
View, see “Track View” on page 335.
Nondestructive Audio Editing
When editing an audio track’s playlist in
Pro Tools, you are not actually cutting and moving pieces of sound as you would if you were cutting and splicing analog tape. Instead,
Pro Tools creates a map of the audio file on your hard disk, which describes the order in which to play the track portions.
To toggle the Track View, click in the track you want to toggle and press Start+Minus
(Windows) or Control+Minus (Mac) on the
QWERTY keyboard.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 343
Notes View for MIDI and
Instrument Tracks
When a MIDI or Instrument track’s Track View is set to Notes, MIDI notes are displayed in a
“piano roll” format. Each note is displayed as a small rectangle with its vertical placement indicating pitch and its horizontal placement indicating location (and duration).
Up arrow
MIDI note above the current display
To scroll the Notes display up or down for a MIDI or
Instrument track, do one of the following:
â– Click either the up or down arrow of the minikeyboard.
Scrolling notes with the Up arrow on mini-keyboard
– or –
â–
With any of the Edit tools (such as the Time
Grabber tool) selected, press Control+Alt+Start
(Windows) or Command+Option+Control
(Mac) and click and drag up or down on the mini-keyboard.
Keyboard reference
Down arrow
MIDI note
Figure 17. MIDI track displaying notes
To the left of the MIDI or Instrument track’s playlist is a vertical mini-keyboard, complete with octave numbering, for pitch reference. You can click the mini-keyboard to audition pitches.
Arrows at the top and bottom of the mini-keyboard (not available in the smaller track heights) are used to scroll the Notes display up and down.
In Notes View, the pitch range of MIDI notes that can be displayed depends on the track height, and on the current zoom value. Any time a track’s notes do not fit within its current height, notes above or below the viewed area are displayed as single-pixel lines at the very top
and bottom of the range (see Figure 17 above).
Scrolling Notes display by dragging
Using the Edit tools, notes can be inserted, transposed, trimmed, and moved. For more in-
formation, see “Manually Editing MIDI Notes” on page 564.
If you have a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can use it to scroll a MIDI or Instrument track’s Notes display. Place the mouse over a MIDI or Instrument track in the Edit window, and Control-Alt-Start-scroll (Windows) or Command-Option-Control-scroll
(Mac) the scroll wheel to scroll the Notes display for that track.
344 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Regions View for MIDI and
Instrument Tracks
MIDI and Instrument tracks can also be viewed as Regions, which is similar to Waveform View for audio tracks. While a track’s notes are visible in Regions View, individual note editing is not available in this view. Instead, all editing occurs across a time range encompassing all track data, including continuous controller events, program changes, and System Exclusive events.
Use Regions View to define regions that represent song sections and clips, or to rearrange or assemble track material.
In Regions View, the vertical Zoom is automatically scaled to fit the entire range of pitches of
MIDI notes on a track.
For more information on setting Track
View, see “Track View” on page 335.
To toggle Track View between notes and regions, click in the track you want and press
Start+Minus (Windows) or Control+Minus
(Mac) on the QWERTY keyboard, or press
Control+Alt (Windows) or Command+Option (Mac) and use the Left and Right Arrow keys to cycle between Track Views.
There are a few things to consider when selecting, copying and cutting, and trimming MIDI regions:
â—† When cutting or clearing a region or region group selection that includes a note’s start point, the entire note is removed. This is even the case when only a portion of the note (that includes its start point) is selected.
â—† When cutting or clearing a region or region group selection that includes a note’s end point
(but not its start point), the note remains and overlaps the edge of the region.
Cutting a MIDI region with note overlap
â—† Similar rules also apply when MIDI regions or region groups containing MIDI regions are trimmed with any of the Trim tools. If the MIDI region’s start point is moved beyond a note’s start point, the note is removed. If the region’s end point is trimmed so that a note’s start point is within the region but its end point is not, the note remains and overlaps the edge of the region.
When moving and placing MIDI regions with overlapping notes, the notes always move with the regions. When placing MIDI regions with overlapping notes next to or near another region, the overlapping notes extend into the next region on the track.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 345
MIDI Regions Created on Barlines
When recording MIDI, or when manually entering MIDI notes, the beginning and ending of resulting MIDI regions are constrained to bar boundaries. This greatly facilitates arranging
MIDI regions in a musically meaningful way, in whole bar lengths.
The beginning of a recorded MIDI region always starts on the barline immediately before the first
MIDI note (note on) of the region. Likewise, the
MIDI region ends on the barline immediately following the last note (note off) of the region.
MIDI Regions and Continuous
Controller Events
Continuous controller events reside in MIDI regions and not in tracks. This means that when dragging regions that contain controller data from either a track or the Region List, the controller data is written to the destination track.
Unlike continuous controller events, which represent nuances that are part of a MIDI performance, Mute in Pro Tools is an automation playlist that actually mutes the MIDI engine.
Mute automation does not correspond to actual
MIDI events and is therefore not exported when saving as a Standard MIDI File.
Nondestructive MIDI Editing
While editing audio regions is usually nondestructive, this is generally not the case for MIDI regions. For instance, if a MIDI region resides in just one track at a single location, editing for that region is destructive. This means that altering the pitch, duration, or placement of notes in
Notes View permanently alters the region.
However, when editing a MIDI region that appears elsewhere, in the same track (at another location or in a different playlist) or in another track, the editing is nondestructive and creates a new auto-created region. To go back to the previous material, drag the original region from the
Region List, or return to a previously saved playlist.
One way to safely return to a track’s previous state is with playlists. Before you edit notes, trim regions, or rearrange the order of regions, make a duplicate of the track’s existing playlist and then edit the duplicate
(see “Playlists” on page 352).
To apply edits to all instances of a MIDI region, enable Mirrored MIDI Editing mode
(see “Mirrored MIDI Editing” on page 559).
346 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Timebase Rulers and
Conductor Rulers
All rulers displayed
Any or all of the following Timebase rulers can be displayed at the top of the Edit window:
• Bars:Beats
• Minutes:Seconds
• Time Code (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 only)
• Feet+Frames (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools
LE with DV Toolkit 2 only)
• Samples
• Time Code 2 (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools
LE with DV Toolkit 2 only)
In addition to providing a timing reference for track material, the Timebase rulers are also used to define Edit selections for track material, and
Timeline selections for record and play ranges.
With the Selector tool, drag in any Timebase ruler to select material across all tracks in the Edit window. To include the Conductor tracks in the selection, press Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) while dragging.
Any or all of the following Conductor rulers can be displayed:
• Tempo (and Tempo Editor)
• Meter
• Key Signature
• Markers
The Meter and Tempo rulers indicate changes in meter and tempo within the Session. The Key
Signature ruler indicates changes of key. The
Markers ruler displays markers to important track locations.
For more information on Memory Location markers and Meter, Tempo, and Key Signa-
ture rulers, see Chapter 23, “Conductor
To display all rulers:
â– Select View > Rulers > All.
To remove a ruler from the display, do one of the following:
â–
Option-click the ruler’s name (to the left of the ruler display).
– or –
â–
Choose View > Rulers, and select a ruler option.
To display only the Main Time Scale in the
Timebase ruler:
â–
Select View > Rulers > None (“Main Time
To add a specific ruler to the display, such as the
Markers ruler, for instance:
â–
Select View > Rulers > Marker.
To change the display order for the rulers:
â– Click a ruler’s name and drag up or down to the new location.
Ruler View Selector
The Timebase and Conductor rulers can also be configured with the Ruler View selector.
Click the Ruler View selector
Ruler View selector in the Edit Window.
Secondary Time Code Ruler
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
A secondary time code ruler, labeled
Time Code 2, lets you reference video frame rates in the timeline that are different from the session time code rate. However, you cannot
Spot to the Time Code 2 ruler and it cannot be set as the Main Time Scale.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 347
The secondary time code ruler can be set to show any of the following rates:
• 23.976 FPS
• 24 FPS
• 25 FPS
• 29.97 FPS
• 29.97 FPS Drop
• 30 FPS
• 30 FPS Drop
• 50 FPS
• 59.94 FPS
• 59.94 FPS Drop
• 60 FPS
• 60 FPS Drop
Main Time Scale
While all Timebase rulers can be displayed simultaneously in the Edit window, there is only one that represents the Main Time Scale . This ruler is also called the Main Timebase ruler.
The Main Time Scale determines the time format used for:
• The Main Counter in the Transport window
• The Main Counter at the top of the Edit window
• Start, End, and Length values
• Pre- and post-roll amounts
• Grid and Nudge values
The Main Time Scale can be set to the following formats:
Bars:Beats Displays the Time Scale in bars and beats. Use this Time Scale if you are working with musical material that must align with bars and beats.
To ensure your tracks align with the bars and beats in your session, record with a
click (see “Recording with a Click” on page 271). Material that is recorded with-
out listening to the click can still be aligned to bar and beat boundaries in Pro Tools
with the Identify Beat command (see “Identify Beat Command” on page 509), or with
Beat Detective (see Chapter 24, “Beat Detective”).
Minutes:Seconds Displays the Time Scale in minutes and seconds. As you zoom in farther with the Zoomer tool, the Time Scale begins to display tenths, hundredths, and thousandths of a second.
Time Code (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only) Displays the Time Scale in
SMPTE frames. The Time Code Rate and Session
Start time are set from the Session Setup window.
Pro Tools supports the following frame rates:
23.976, 24, 25, 29.97 Non-Drop, 29.97 Drop,
30 Non-Drop, and 30 Drop frames per second.
Feet+Frames (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only) Displays the Time Scale in feet and frames for referencing audio-for-film projects. The Feet+Frames time display is based on the 35 millimeter film format.
Samples Displays the Time Scale in samples.
This format is very useful for high-precision sample editing.
348 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Setting the Main Time Scale
To set the Main Time Scale, do one of the following:
â– Click a Main Counter selector (located at the top of the Edit window and also in the Transport window, when it is set to display Counters) and select a Time Scale.
Main Counter selector (in the Edit window)
â– If a Timebase ruler is displayed, click its name so it becomes highlighted.
Setting the Main Time Scale to the timebase currently displayed in the Sub Counter switches the two Time Scales, setting the
Sub Time Scale to the previous timebase of the Main Time Scale.
Navigating with the Main Counters
The Main Counters (at the top of the Edit window and in the Transport window) provide a convenient way to navigate to a specific time location.
The Main Counter indicator in the Transport window only displays when the Transport is set to display Counters.
To navigate with a Main Counter:
1 Click in a Main Counter.
2 Type in a location.
3 Press Enter (Windows or Mac) or Return (Mac) to automatically navigate to a new location.
Setting the Sub Counter Time Scale
Below each Main Counter is a Sub Counter, which provides an additional timing reference.
The Sub Counter indicator in the Transport window only displays when the Transport is set to display Counters and its view is maximized.
To set the Time Scale for the Sub Counter:
â– Click a Sub Counter selector and select a Time
Scale.
Switching the Main Time Scale
Sub Counter selector (in the Edit window)
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 349
Tick-Based Timing
Pro Tools is a sample-based program with an internal MIDI resolution of 960,000 pulses per quarter note (ppq). However, when the Time
Scale is set to Bars|Beats, the display resolution in Pro Tools is 960 ppq.
In Bars|Beats, Pro Tools is tick-based (960 ticks to a quarter note), which means that some amount of sample-rounding may occur when placing events at certain locations (see “Sample
Rounding and Edit Operations” on page 352).
When working in Bars|Beats, you will often want to specify tick values for a number of operations, including:
• Placing and spotting regions
• Setting lengths for regions or MIDI notes
• Locating and setting play and record ranges (including pre- and post-roll)
• Specifying settings in the Grid/Groove
Quantize and Change Duration pages of the MIDI Operations window
• Setting the Grid and Nudge values
The following table lists the number of ticks for each of the main note sizes:
Note Value
1/2 note
1/4 note
1/8 note
1/16 note
1/32 note
1/64 note
Normal Dotted Triplet
1920 2880 1280
960
480
1440
720
640
320
240
120
60
360
180
90
160
80
40
Tick- and Sample-Based
Timebases
Pro Tools lets you set any track timebase to either sample-based or tick-based.
Audio in Pro Tools is sample-based by default.
This means that if an audio region is located at a particular sample location, it will not move from that location if the tempo changes in the session—though its bar and beat location will change.
MIDI data in Pro Tools is tick-based by default.
This means that if a MIDI region is located at a particular bar and beat location, it will not move from that location if the tempo changes in the session—though its sample location will change.
Sample-Based Audio and MIDI
With a sample-based audio track, all audio regions in the track have an absolute location on the Timeline. Audio stays fixed to the sample time, regardless of where tempo or meter changes occur in a session.
If you make a MIDI track sample-based, all MIDI events in the track have an absolute location on the timeline. MIDI events stay fixed to the sample time, regardless of where tempo or meter changes occur in a session.
350 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Tick-Based Audio and MIDI
Tick-based audio is fixed to Bars|Beats, and moves relative to the sample timeline when tempo and meter changes occur. However,
MIDI events and tick-based audio respond differently to tempo changes in respect to duration. MIDI note events change length when tempo or meter is adjusted, while audio regions do not. Meter and tempo changes affect only the start point (or sync point) for each audio region in a tick-based track.
You can select whether a track is sample-based or tick-based when it is created, or change timebases later.
To have all new tracks default to tick-based, enable the New Tracks Default to Tick
Timebase option in the Editing Preferences.
Switching Timebases
All Pro Tools tracks can be switched between being sample-based or tick-based.
Track height affects how various track controls appear in the Edit window. The Timebase selector, which is used for switching a track’s timebase, is only visible in Small or larger track heights.
To switch the timebase of a track, do one of the following:
.
â– If the track’s height is set to Small or larger, click the Timebase selector for the track and select the desired timebase. The Timebase selector icon changes to reflect your choice.
Timebase selector
(ticks)
Timebase selector
(samples)
Track Timebase selector on a track with a Medium height
Timebase selector
(ticks)
Timebase selector
(samples)
Track Timebase selector on a track with a Small height
– or –
â– If the track’s height is set to Mini, click the small arrow next to the Track View selector to get the Track Height pop-up menu, and select the desired timebase from the Track Timebase sub-menu.
Track Height pop-up menu
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 351
Alternate Playlist Timebases
When you change a track’s timebase, you can choose to apply the timebase change to the active Playlist on that track only, or to that track and all the alternate playlists for that track.
To configure a timebase change to affect timebases of all playlists in a track:
â–
Click the Timebase selector and enable the
“Selection Changes Alternate Playlists” option.
Timebase selector and pop-up menu
Groups
When you change the timebase for an audio track that is part of an active group, all the tracks in the group will change to the same timebase.
Audio Region Location
In tick-based audio tracks, the location of an audio region is determined by the region’s start point, unless the region contains a sync point.
If the region contains a sync point, the sync point determines where the audio region is fixed to the grid.
Marker Location
When creating markers and Selection Memory
Locations, you can specify whether they have an Absolute (sample-based) or Bar|Beat (tickbased) reference. For more information, see
“Bar|Beat and Absolute Reference” on page 525.
Sample Rounding and Edit Operations
When audio material in Pro Tools is samplebased, some amount of sample-rounding may occur with some edits when the Main Time
Scale is set to Bars|Beats. This is most evident when you need audio regions to fall cleanly on the beat (as when looping) and notice that the material is sometimes a tick or two off. With a few simple precautions, this can be avoided.
When selecting audio regions to be copied, duplicated, or repeated, make sure to select the material with the Selector tool (enable Grid mode for precise selections), or set the selection range by typing in the start and end points in the
Event Edit area. Do not select the material with any of the Grabber tools (or by double-clicking with the Selector tool). This ensures that the selection is precise in terms of the grid (and not based on the length of the material in samples).
Playlists
The ability to create playlists is a powerful feature of Pro Tools. Each track maintains a “main” playlist and any number of “alternate” edit playlists.
Edit playlists let you take a snapshot of a track’s current arrangement of regions, thereby freeing you to experiment with alternate arrangements, returning as necessary to previously saved playlists.
A playlist, which can consist of a single region or many regions, can only be assigned to a track if it is not in use by another track. While you can create an almost unlimited number of edit playlists, which are shared among all tracks, each track has its own set of dedicated automation playlist s.
352 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Automation playlists for audio tracks store data for volume, pan, mute, and plug-in controls.
Automation playlists for MIDI tracks, however, store only mute information; continuous controller events, program changes, and Sysex events are stored in MIDI regions and therefore reside within edit playlists.
For more information on automation playl-
ists, see Chapter 30, “Automation.”
Working with Playlists
When you create a new track, it contains a single, empty playlist until you record, import, or drag and drop material to it.
Audio material can be dragged and dropped onto a track from the Region List, DigiBase browsers, from Windows Explorer or the
Mac Finder.
New playlists can be created that are empty or duplicates of the current playlist. Once created, you can recall, rename, and delete playlists as needed by using the Playlist selector.
Playlist selector
Duplicating a Playlist
When you edit a track, you can work with a copy of the track's playlist and keep the original playlist arrangement intact.
To duplicate a track’s current playlist:
1 Click the track’s Playlist selector and choose
Duplicate from the pop-up menu.
2 Enter a name for the new playlist and click
OK.
The duplicated playlist appears in the track and the track’s name is changed to the name of the new playlist.
New and duplicated playlists are auto-named with the track name, followed by a Period (.) and the playlist number. For example, the first duplicated playlist on a track named “Kick” is auto-named “Kick.01,” subsequent duplicated playlists are auto-named “Kick.02,” “Kick.03,” and so on.
Creating a Playlist
You can create new empty playlists for recording or importing audio and MIDI. This can be useful for creating alternate takes of audio or
MIDI, or for constructing alternate arrangements.
To create a new (empty) playlist:
1 Click the track’s Playlist selector and choose
New.
2 Enter a name for the new playlist and click
OK. An empty playlist with the specified name appears in the track.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 353
Assigning a Playlist to Another Track
By default, a playlist is typically available only for the track on which it was created. However, if the playlist is no longer in use on its original track or any other track, it can be reassigned in another track using the Other Playlists feature.
When a playlist is reassigned to another track
(assigned on any track), it is unavailable to other tracks including the track on which it originated.
An audio playlist’s timebase is saved with the playlist. When assigning an unassigned playlist to any track, the track assumes the saved timebase of the playlist.
To assign a track playlist:
â– Click the track’s Playlist selector and do one of the following:
• Select one of the track’s playlists.
– or –
• Select a playlist from a different track by clicking the Other Playlists submenu, and selecting the desired playlist.
Selecting a playlist from a different track
The selected playlist appears in the track and the track’s name is updated to that of the selected playlist.
Renaming a Playlist
You can rename a playlist by renaming the track to which it is assigned.
To rename a track’s assigned playlist:
1 Double-click the track’s name.
2 Enter a new name and click OK. Both the track and playlist names are updated.
Deleting a Playlist
You can delete a playlist from a session entirely.
However, since playlists require minimal disk space, you do not need to delete them to conserve storage.
To delete one or more playlists from a track:
1 Click the track’s Playlist selector and choose
Delete Unused.
2 Select the unassigned playlists you want to delete. Shift-click (Windows or Mac), Control-click
(Windows), or Command-click (Mac) to select multiple playlists.
3 Click OK to delete the selected playlists. This operation cannot be undone.
When deleting a track from a session, you have the option of deleting or keeping its playlists, so they can be used on other tracks.
Playlists and Groups
Creating new playlists with grouped tracks automatically increments the suffixes of the playlist names for each track of the active group. This lets you revert back to an earlier take by switching the playlist takes by group.
354 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Using this method, you can add new tracks to the existing group and the suffixes for their playlist names are synchronized with the original tracks.
“Empty” playlists are created automatically to keep the playlist takes synchronized when switching back to the earliest playlist takes in the group.
To keep your playlist names and performances synchronized (example workflow):
1 Create new tracks and group them together.
For more information on grouping tracks,
see “Grouping Tracks” on page 149.
2 Make sure the group is enabled.
3 Create a new playlist (by clicking the Playlist selector in one of the tracks in the group and choosing New). The default suffix will now be
“.01”—signifying take 1.
4 Record take 1, then create a new playlist. The playlists on all tracks in the group increment to
“.02.”
5 Create new tracks (for example, for an additional musician or microphone), then add these tracks to the group (or create a new group with all the tracks).
6 Increment all the playlists by clicking the
Playlist selector in one of the tracks in the group and choosing New.
All the playlists will now have the same suffix appended to them. (Creating additional playlists in any of the group tracks will increment their playlists to keep them synchronized.)
7 If you want to hear the .01 take on the first group of tracks, you can switch any playlist in the group back to playlist .01.
All tracks in the group have playlists numbered with .01 suffixes (even those tracks that were added to the original group after the earlier takes). Empty playlists are automatically created on these newly-added members so that playlist numbers match across all members of the group.
Multiple Undo
Pro Tools can keep track of up to 32 of the last undoable operations, allowing you to return to a previous editing state.
The Undo operations in Pro Tools are stored in a queue, in the order in which they were invoked.
When choosing Edit > Undo, the most recent operation is undone. If you choose Undo again, the next operation in the queue is undone. You can also choose Edit > Redo to redo an operation, which moves back through the Undo queue by one step.
When the number of operations in the Undo queue reaches the maximum Level of Undo, performing another undoable operation will remove the oldest operation at the top of the queue.
To undo the last operation, do one of the following:
â– Choose Edit > Undo.
– or –
â– Press Control+Z (Windows) or Command+Z
(Mac).
If no actions are available to undo, the menu displays Can’t Undo.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 355
To redo the last undone operation, do one of the following:
â– Choose Edit > Redo.
– or –
â– Press Shift+Control+Z (Windows) or
Shift+Command+Z (Mac).
If no actions are available to redo, the menu displays Can’t Redo.
Undo History Window
You can use the Undo History window to view the queue of the undoable and redoable operations and return to any previous state. The
Undo History can show edit creation times, enabling you to revert to the state a session held at a particular time.
Options selector
Undoable operations
Redoable operations
Creation times
Undo History Window
To show (or hide) the Undo History window:
â– Choose Window > Undo History.
To undo operations in the Undo History window:
â– Click the operation (bold) in the list to undo.
All operations in the queue that were performed after the operation you select are also undone.
In the Undo History window, undoable operations are shown in bold and redoable operations
(operations that have already been undone) are shown in italics.
To redo operations in the Undo History window:
â– Click the operation (italics) in the list to redo.
The operation you choose, as well as all the operations in the queue before it, are redone.
To toggle display of creation times in the Undo
History window:
â–
Click the Options pop-up menu and choose
Show Creation Times.
To undo all the operations in the Undo Queue:
â– Click the Options pop-up menu and choose
Undo All.
To redo all the operations in the Redo Queue:
â–
Click the Options pop-up menu and choose
Redo All.
To clear the Undo Queue
â– Click the Options pop-up menu and choose
Clear Undo Queue.
Other operations that clear the Undo Queue include:
• Deleting a track, or clearing a region from the Region List
• Selecting “Select > Unused,” or “Select >
Unused Audio Except Whole Files” in the
Region List pop-up menu
356 Pro Tools Reference Guide
When the number of operations in the Undo
History reaches the maximum level of Undo, performing another undoable operation removes the oldest operation at the top of the
Undo History queue. When the oldest operation is one operation away from being pushed out of the queue, it is shown in red.
Levels of Undo and Memory
Because Pro Tools needs to keep track of the playlists for all tracks that are edited, the use of multiple Levels of Undo can be memory intensive. You can lower the Levels of Undo in
Pro Tools to reduce the amount of system memory (RAM) used by the Undo queue. If you have plenty of memory available for Pro Tools, you can use higher Levels Of Undo.
Use the Undo History window to view a queue of undo operations and return to a previous state.
To set the Levels of Undo in Pro Tools:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Editing tab.
2 Click in the Levels of Undo field and enter a value of between 1–32.
The Region List
The Edit Window displays all audio regions,
MIDI regions, and region groups in a single, comprehensive Region List.
All regions of all types that are recorded, imported, or created by editing appear in the Region List. Items can be dragged from the list to tracks and arranged in any order. All types of regions can be auditioned from the Region List by
Alt-clicking (Windows) or Option-clicking
(Mac) them.
At the top of the Region List is the Region List pop-up menu, which provides commands and tools for managing the contents of the list.
Drag to resize width of Region List
Click for pop-up menu
Keyboard Focus
Levels of Undo preference
3 Click OK.
Click Show/Hide Region List button to hide Region List
Figure 18. Region List
Region List Pop-Up Menu
The Region List pop-up menu provides tools to search, select, sort, export, clear, and manage items in the Region List.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 357
To access the Region List pop-up menu:
â–
In the Edit window, click the Region List popup menu.
Region List menu
Region List menu
Displaying Regions in the Region List
In the Region List, whole-file audio regions are displayed in bold, and stereo and multichannel regions can be expanded to display individual channels.
Because region names can become lengthy, the
Region List can be scrolled or resized as necessary (see Figure 18 on page 357).
If the Editing preference for “Region List Selection Follows Edit Selection” is enabled, selecting a region or region group in the Region List selects it on any track where it is present in assigned playlist. Likewise, selecting a region or region group on a track selects it in the Region
List.
Use the Region List as a bin for storing your favorite audio loops and MIDI clips. Save the session as a template and the regions are
available for future sessions (see “Creating
Custom Session Templates” on page 91).
Displaying File Info for Audio Regions
In addition to region names, the Region List can also display information about the region’s color coding, type (audio, MIDI, and region group), timebase, and parent file:
Color Displays the color coding for regions.
Icon Displays the icon for audio and MIDI regions, and region groups.
Timebase Displays the timebase for audio and
MIDI regions, and region groups.
File Name Displays the parent file name.
Disk Name Displays the name of the hard drive on which referenced file resides.
Full Path Displays the full directory path of the region’s parent file.
Channel Name Displays the channel name for audio files imported from field recorders.
Scene and Take Displays the scene and take for audio files imported from field recorders.
Regions with file information shown in the Region List
358 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Pro Tools displays only the region name in the
Region List by default.
When editing, the Region List can become cluttered with auto-created regions. You can hide auto-created regions by choosing Show in the Region List pop-up menu, and deselecting Auto-Created.
Sorting and Searching in the
Region List
Most sessions will contain many regions, which can make it challenging to swiftly locate a particular region in the Region List. Pro Tools lets you sort and search regions in the Region List to quickly locate any region you want.
To sort regions in the Region List:
1 Click the Region List pop-up menu (at the top of the Region List) and choose Sort By.
2 Select a basis for sorting from the submenu:
• Region Type (audio regions, region groups,
MIDI regions)
• Name
• Length
• Original Time Stamp
• User Time Stamp
• Timebase
• Start in Parent
• End in Parent
• File Name
• File Length
• File Creation Date
• File Modification Date
• Disk Name (audio and region groups only)
• Track Format/Width
• By Channel Name
• By Scene and Take
3 Click the Region List pop-up menu, choose
Sort By, and select one of the following to apply additional sort criteria (in other words, to add a secondary sort criteria):
• Ascending
• Descending
Finding Regions
Use the Find command to display all regions in a list whose names contain a particular word or phrase.
To find and display regions in the Region List:
1 Do one of the following:
• Click the Region List pop-up menu and choose Find.
– or –
• Press Control+Shift+F (Windows) or Command+Shift+F (Mac).
Find Regions dialog
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 359
2 In the Find Regions dialog, do any of the following:
• Select By Name and type the name, or any portion of the name, for regions you want to find. The search string appears at the top of the Region List.
• Select Include Subsequently Added Regions to limit the display to newly added regions.
A plus (+) sign appears at the top of the Region List to indicate this option is selected.
• Select both options to start with a list of named regions and allow display of added regions.
To repeat a previous search:
1 Click the Region List pop-up menu, and choose Find.
2 Click the small arrow to the right of the text field in the Find dialog and select a text string from the Find History pop-up menu.
Found Regions in the Region List
3 Click OK.
Regions of any type whose name match the word or phrase you searched are displayed in the Region List. The search string is displayed at the top of the Region List in brackets.
Text entered into the Find dialog is saved in a
Find History, letting you quickly repeat previous searches with a minimum of retyping.
An example of a Find history
The Find History is saved with the session.
In addition to storing each text string previously entered, you can insert multiple entries into the
Find History manually (without having to perform each Find in order to store words or phrases).
To compile a Find History without performing each search:
1 Click the Region List pop-up menu, and choose Find.
2 Type the name, or any portion of the name, for the regions you want to find.
3 Click and hold the double arrow to the right of the text field in the Find dialog and choose
Insert Entry from the pop-up menu.
Region List while searching
4 Type another entry and choose Insert Entry again to add additional search strings to the history.
360 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To remove an entry from the history:
1 Select it from the Find History pop-up menu so it is displayed in the text field.
2 Choose Remove Entry from the Find History pop-up menu.
To clear the Find History:
â– Choose Remove All Entries from the Find History pop-up menu.
Selecting Regions in the Region
List
In the Region List, you can select regions so they can be dragged to tracks, processed with Audio-
Suite plug-ins, or exported.
To select or deselect a region in the Region List, do the following:
â– Click a region name that is unhighlighted to select it.
– or –
â– Click a region name that is highlighted to deselect it.
To select a range of regions in the Region List, do one of the following:
â– Move the cursor to the left of the region names, so the Marquee appears, and drag around the regions you want to select.
Regions selected with Marquee
– or –
â– Click the name of a region in the Region List, and Shift-click an additional region name.
All regions that occur between the first region selected and the additional region will also be selected.
To select or deselect a range of regions with the
Marquee:
1 Move the cursor to the left of the region name until the Marquee icon with a small “+” symbol appears:
• To select regions, the Marquee should be to the left of an unhighlighted region name.
• To deselect regions, the Marquee should be to the left of a highlighted region name.
2 Click on the region name and drag up or down (to select or deselect regions immediately above or below the region name).
To select multiple noncontiguous regions in the Region List, press and hold Control
(Windows) or Command (Mac) when making subsequent selections.
To select or deselect noncontiguous regions, do one of the following:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) region names that are unhighlighted to select them.
– or –
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) region names that are highlighted to deselect them.
Keyboard Selection of Regions
If the Region List Keyboard Focus is enabled, you can type the first few letters of a region’s name and Pro Tools will automatically locate and select the region in the Region List.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 361
To enable and use the Region List Keyboard Focus:
1 Click the Keyboard Focus button in the upper right of the Region List.
Click to enable or disable
Keyboard Focus
Stereo and multichannel regions are displayed in the Region List by default in collapsed view.
The individual regions can be displayed by clicking the arrow to the left of the region to expand the name.
Expand/collapse triangles
Region List Keyboard Focus enabled
2 Type the first or first few letters of the region to automatically locate and select it. Once a region is located and selected, it can be dragged to a track.
Keyboard selection of audio regions locates regions based on their region name, not on the names for their parent audio files or the volumes on which they reside.
Auditioning Regions in the Region List
To audition a region in the Region List:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the region name.
Stereo and Multichannel Tracks in the Region List
Stereo and multichannel regions, whether imported or recorded into Pro Tools, are displayed as single items in the Region List. For example, two mono source regions named “Main Piano.L” and “Main Piano.R” are listed as “Main
Piano (Stereo).” An expand/collapse triangle indicates stereo and multichannel regions.
Stereo regions, collapsed (top) and expanded (bottom)
To expand or collapse all stereo and multichannel regions:
â– Press Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) while clicking the expand/collapse triangle.
Individual items of an expanded-view stereo or multichannel region can be selected independently of the other associated regions in the Region List.
Rules for Stereo and Multichannel
Regions
For stereo and multichannel audio regions to be shown as collective regions, the component regions must be the same length. If an existing stereo or multichannel region has been dragged onto multiple mono tracks and edited such a way that one or more components are no longer the same length, the stereo display is removed and the regions are displayed as individual regions in the Region List.
362 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Region Name Right-Click
Pop-Up Menus
(Region List)
When you Right-click a region name in the Region List, a pop-up menu provides access to the following commands:
Clear Removes selected regions from the session.
Rename Renames selected regions.
Time Stamp Redefines the time stamp of selected regions.
Replace Region (Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2
Only) Replaces multiple instances of a region with another region.
Compact Compacts selected regions.
Export Region Definitions Exports definitions for selected regions.
Export Regions as Files Exports selected regions as files.
Recalculate Waveform Overviews Redraws waveforms for selected regions.
Select Parent in Workspace Highlights the parent file of selected region in the DigiBase Workspace Browser.
Object Select in Edit Window Selects region as an object in the Edit window.
Edit Modes
Pro Tools has four Edit modes: Shuffle, Spot,
Slip, and Grid. Grid mode provides two modes of operation, Relative and Absolute, explained below. The Edit mode is selected by clicking the corresponding button in the upper left of the
Edit window.
Edit mode buttons
You can also use F1 (Shuffle), F2 (Slip), F3
(Spot), and F4 (Grid) to set the Edit mode.
The Edit mode affects the movement and placement of audio and MIDI regions (and MIDI notes), how commands like Copy and Paste function, and also how the various Edit tools
(Trim, Selector, Grabber, and Pencil tools) work.
Use the Accent key ( ` ) to toggle through the
Edit modes.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 363
Shuffle
In Shuffle mode, you can move, trim, cut, or paste regions freely within a track or to other tracks, but their movement is constrained by other regions. That is, if you place several regions in a track, they automatically snap to each other. You can then “shuffle” their order, but you cannot separate them from each other and you cannot make them overlap as in Slip mode.
However, if there is silence between existing regions, and the regions are shuffled, the silence is maintained, and not removed.
In Shuffle mode, adding another region to the beginning of a track moves all subsequent regions to the right by the length of the region added.
When using any of the Trim tools in Shuffle mode, changing a region’s start or end point automatically moves any subsequent regions as necessary. The placement and insertion of MIDI notes is not affected by Shuffle mode.
Shuffle Lock
With certain workflows, it is important to exclude Shuffle mode in order to ensure that regions stay time-aligned while editing. Shuffle
Lock prevents you from inadvertently entering
Shuffle mode by disabling all key commands and control surface switches for Shuffle mode.
You cannot invoke Shuffle Lock while in Shuffle mode.
To lock out Shuffle Mode:
â–
While in any Edit mode other than Shuffle mode, Control-click (Windows) or Commandclick (Mac) the Shuffle button on-screen. A lock icon appears in the Shuffle button.
Shuffle
Lock
Lock icon indicating Shuffle Lock
To unlock Shuffle Mode:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the locked Shuffle button on-screen.
Slip
In Slip mode, regions can be moved freely within a track or to other tracks. In this mode, it is possible to place a region so that there is space between it and other regions in a track. When the track is played back, this space is silent. It is also possible to move a region so that it overlaps or completely covers another region.
Use Slip mode when you want the Trim, Selector, Grabber, and Pencil tools to work without any restrictions to placement in time.
Spot
Use Spot mode to place regions at precise locations. In Spot mode you can specify a frame location (or a location based on any of the other time formats), capture an incoming Time Code address, or use a region’s time stamps as reference points for spotting. This can be particularly useful when performing post production tasks around SMPTE frame locations.
364 Pro Tools Reference Guide
When Spot mode is enabled, Pro Tools asks you to specify a destination location when a region is dragged from the Region List, a DigiBase browser, Windows Explorer, or the Mac Finder.
Grid
In Grid mode, regions and MIDI notes that are moved, trimmed or inserted “snap” to the currently selected Grid value, or to precise increments on a user-definable time grid.
Absolute and Relative Grid
Grid mode can be applied in Absolute or Relative mode:
â—† In Absolute Grid mode, moving any region snaps the region start to Grid boundaries . If a region’s start point falls between beats, and the
Grid is set to 1/4 notes, dragging the region will snap its start time to the nearest 1/4 note (the current absolute Grid value).
â—† In Relative Grid mode, regions can be moved by Grid (or Nudge) units . If a region’s start point falls between beats and the Grid is set to 1/4 notes, dragging the region will be constrained to
1/4 notes, preserving the region’s relative position to the nearest beat.
To select Absolute or Relative Grid mode:
â–
Click the Grid mode selector and choose Absolute or Relative.
To temporarily suspend Grid mode and switch to Slip mode while dragging a region, hold down the Control key (Windows) or
Command key (Mac) after clicking with the mouse.
Configuring the Grid
The actual Grid size, chosen from the Grid value pop-up menu can be based on a time value using the Main Time Scale; or, if Follow Main Time
Scale is deselected, another time format can be used for the Grid size.
The Grid Value indicator and pop-up menu are located in the Edit window.
Grid Value indicator and pop-up menu
The current Grid value is also used for the
Quantize to Grid command (see “Quantizing Regions to Grid” on page 438) and Sep-
arated Region At Grid command (see “Separate Region Commands” on page 418).
For more information on Relative Grid
mode, see “Sliding Regions in Grid Mode” on page 432.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 365
Also available in the Grid Value pop-up is an option for Regions/Markers. When selected, events can be placed freely (as in Slip mode) but will snap to region locations (start, end, and sync points), markers, and Edit selections when placed near them.
MIDI notes inserted with the Pencil tool ignore the Regions/Markers option, and instead snap to the time value selected in the
Grid Value pop-up menu.
To display the Grid lines in the Edit window, do one of the following:
â–
Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Display tab, then Enable Draw Grids in Edit
Window.
Edit Tools
Pro Tools has several Edit tools: the Zoomer,
Trim, Selector, Grabber, Scrubber, and Pencil tools, and the multifunctional Smart Tool. Select an Edit tool by clicking it in the Edit window. The Zoom, Trim, Grabber, and Pencil tools have multiple modes, which you can select from a pop-up menu when you click the tool.
Zoom buttons
Zoomer tool Selector tool
Trim tools
Scrubber tool
Grabber tools Pencil tool
Zoom Toggle Smart Tool
Zoom buttons and Edit tools
You can use F5 (Zoomer), F6 (Trim), F7
(Selector), and F8 (Grabber), F9 (Scrubber), and F10 (Pencil) to select the Edit tool and toggle through each tools’ respective subset of tools.
Grid lines displayed in the Edit Window
– or –
â–
Enable (and disable) Grid lines by clicking the currently selected Timebase ruler name.
Click to enable or disable Grid lines
Turning on Grid lines from a Timebase ruler
Press the Escape key to toggle through the
Edit tools.
Zoom Buttons Use the Zoom buttons to zoom in and out vertically and horizontally on MIDI and audio track material. You can also store and recall five Zoom presets.
Zoomer Tool Use the Zoomer tool to select a zoom view in a track.
Zoom Toggle Use the Zoom Toggle to switch between the current zoom view and a defined zoom view.
Trim Tools Use the Trim tools to trim regions and region groups.
366 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Selector Tool Use the Selector to make selections on tracks.
Grabber Tools Use the Grabber tools to select, separate, or move regions on tracks.
Smart Tool Use the Smart tool to Trim, Select, or
Grab regions in tracks.
Scrubber Tool Use the Scrubber tool to scrub through track material.
Pencil Tool Use the Pencil tool to draw automation and MIDI data.
To zoom out horizontally for all tracks, do one of the following:
â– Click the Horizontal Zoom Out button.
â– Press Control+[ (Windows) or Command+[
(Mac).
â– Click and drag on the Horizontal Zoom Out button to zoom out continuously.
Audio and MIDI Zoom In and Out Buttons
The Audio and MIDI Zoom buttons let you zoom in and out vertically on audio and MIDI data respectively.
Audio Vertical
Zoom buttons
MIDI Vertical
Zoom buttons
Using the Zoomer Tools
Zooming options in Pro Tools include Zoom buttons, the Zoomer tool, the Zoom Preset buttons, and the Zoom Toggle command.
Zoom Buttons
Pro Tools include different Zoom buttons for zooming on track data.
Horizontal Zoom In and Out Buttons
The Horizontal Zoom In and Out buttons let you zoom in and out horizontally on track data.
Horizontal
Zoom Out button
Horizontal Zoom In button
Horizontal Zoom
In button
(selected)
To zoom in horizontally for all tracks, do one of the following:
â–
Click the Horizontal Zoom In button.
â–
Press Control+] (Windows) or Command+]
(Mac).
â–
Click and drag on the Horizontal Zoom In button to zoom in continuously.
Audio and MIDI Vertical Zoom buttons
To zoom in vertically for all audio tracks, do one of the following:
â–
Click the Audio Zoom In button.
â–
Press Control+Alt+] (Windows) or Command+Option+] (Mac).
â–
Click and drag on the Audio Zoom In button to zoom continuously.
To zoom out vertically for all audio tracks, do one of the following:
â– Click the Audio Zoom Out button.
â– Press Control+Alt+[ (Windows) or press Command+Option+[ (Mac).
â– Click and drag on the Audio Zoom Out button to zoom continuously.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 367
To zoom in vertically for all MIDI and Instrument tracks, do one of the following:
â– Click the MIDI Zoom In button.
– or –
â– Press Control+Shift+] (Windows) or Command+Shift+] (Mac).
To zoom out vertically for all MIDI and Instrument tracks, do one of the following:
â–
Click the MIDI Zoom Out button.
– or –
â–
Press Control+Shift+[ (Windows) or Command+Shift+[ (Mac).
To zoom in or out vertically for a single MIDI or
Instrument track:
1 Make sure the Track View is not set to Regions
View.
2 Select the Zoomer tool.
3 Hold Start (Windows) or Control (Mac) and click and drag upwards to zoom in, or downward to zoom out.
Additional Zoom Button Features
To return to the previous zoom level, do one of the following:
â–
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) any of the Horizontal, Audio, or MIDI Zoom buttons.
– or –
â–
Press Control+Alt+E (Windows) or Command+Option+E (Mac).
To zoom in on a selection:
â– Press Alt+F (Windows) or Option+F (Mac).
To zoom so that all regions are visible in the Edit window, do one of the following:
â– Double-click the Zoomer tool in the toolbar.
– or –
â– Press Alt+A (Windows) or Option+A (Mac).
Zoomer Tool
Use the Zoomer tool to zoom in and out around a particular area within a track. The Zoomer tool offers two modes: Normal, and Single Zoom mode.
â—† In Normal Zoom mode, the Zoomer tool remains selected after zooming.
â—† In Single Zoom mode, the previously selected
Edit tool is automatically reselected after zooming.
Normal Zoomer Tool
To zoom around a certain track point:
1 Enable Normal Zoom mode by doing one of the following:
• Click the Zoomer tool pop-up menu and select Normal Zoom mode.
– or –
• Press the F5 key to toggle to Normal Zoom mode.
Zoomer tool
2 Click once with the Zoomer tool at a location within the track. All tracks are zoomed in by one level and the Edit window is centered around the zoomed location.
368 Pro Tools Reference Guide
3 To zoom back to the previous level, Alt-click
(Window) or Option-click (Mac) with the
Zoomer tool.
To zoom into a particular track area:
1 Enable Normal Zoom mode by doing one of the following:
• Click the Zoomer tool pop-up menu and select Normal Zoom mode.
– or –
• Press the F5 key to toggle to Normal Zoom mode.
2 Do any of the following:
• To zoom horizontally, drag with the
Zoomer tool in the track’s playlist.
– or –
• To zoom horizontally and vertically, press
Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) while dragging in the track’s playlist.
To use Single Zoom mode, do one of the following:
â–
Click the Zoomer tool pop-up menu and select Single Zoom mode.
– or –
â–
Press the F5 key to toggle to Single Zoom mode.
Single Zoom is identified with an arrow to the right of the Zoomer icon.
Single Zoom mode
Normal Zoom mode does not have the arrow.
Normal Zoom mode
Zooming in a Ruler
To zoom horizontally in a ruler:
1 Press Control+Alt (Windows) or Command+Control (Mac) and move the cursor into the ruler area, so the Zoomer tool appears.
Zooming horizontally with Zoomer tool
The zoomed area fills the entire Edit window.
Single Zoom Mode
Single Zoom mode returns you to the previously selected tool after a zoom has been performed.
For example, when using the Smart Tool you can click the Single Zoomer tool, and once the
Zoom operation has been performed, Pro Tools automatically switches back to the Smart Tool.
Zooming in a ruler
2 Do one of the following:
• Click once to zoom in one level around a certain point.
– or –
• Drag to zoom in around a particular ruler range.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 369
Continuous Zoom with the Zoomer Tool
Use the Zoomer tool to zoom in or out continuously.
To use continuous zoom on one track or a group of tracks:
1 Select the Zoomer tool.
2 Hold the Start key (Windows) or Control
(Mac) and do one of the following:
• Drag up to zoom in vertically
• Drag down to zoom out vertically
• Drag to the right to zoom in horizontally
• Drag to the left to zoom out horizontally
For horizontal zoom, all tracks zoom together.
Tracks will zoom in or out centered horizontally on the location where you click.
Vertical Zooming In or Out of All Audio Tracks
Continuously
The continuous zoom feature usually only affects the track or group of tracks in which you click and drag up or down to zoom out or in.
When using continuous zoom on audio tracks, you can choose to have all shown audio tracks zoom as one.
To vertically zoom in or out of all audio tracks using continuous zoom:
1 Select the Zoomer tool.
2 Press Start+Shift (Windows) or Control+Shift
(Mac) and drag up or down. When you release the mouse, all shown audio tracks will zoom to the same zoom level.
Zoom Preset Buttons
Pro Tools lets you save up to five horizontal Edit window Zoom presets, which can be recalled by typing a number or by clicking a Zoom Preset button.
To store a view as a Zoom preset:
1 Use the Zoomer tool to configure the Track
View as desired.
2 Click and hold one of the Zoom Preset buttons (1–5) and choose Save Zoom Preset from the Zoom Preset pop-up menu. The preset button flashes momentarily, and any previously stored Zoom preset at that number is replaced.
Zoom Preset pop-up menu
To recall a saved Zoom preset, do one of the following:
â– Click the appropriate Zoom Preset button
(1–5).
– or –
â– Click and hold the Zoom Preset button and choose Recall Zoom Preset from the Zoom Preset pop-up menu.
370 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Zoom Toggle
Zoom Toggle lets you define and toggle between zoom states directly from the Edit window.
Zoom Toggle Parameters
The Zoom Toggle stores and recalls the following parameters:
• Vertical Zoom
• Horizontal Zoom
• Track Height
• Track View
• Grid setting
Zoom Toggle Preferences
The Zoom Toggle preferences determine how
Zoom Toggle works. Adjust the Zoom Toggle preferences to fit your workflow.
Zoom Toggle preferences
For MIDI Editing, set the Zoom Toggle preferences as follows: Vertical Zoom to Last
Used, Horizontal Zoom to Last Used, Track
View to Waveform/Notes, and Track
Height to Fit to Window.
For audio editing, set the Zoom Toggle preferences as follows: Vertical Zoom to Selection, Horizontal Zoom to Selection, Track
Height to Fit to Window, and Track View to
No Change.
Vertical Zoom
Selection When selected, zoom toggling in zooms vertically to the current Edit Selection.
Last Used When selected, zoom toggling in zooms vertically to the last stored Zoom Toggle state for MIDI notes in Notes view only.
Horizontal Zoom
Selection When selected, zoom toggling in zooms horizontally to the current selection.
This is especially useful for audio editing.
Last Used When selected, zoom toggling in zooms horizontally to the last stored Zoom Toggle state. This option can emulate a separate editor window. This is especially useful for editing
MIDI notes.
Remove Range Selection After Zooming In
When the Remove Range Selection After Zooming In option is selected, the current Edit selection collapses into an insertion point after zoom toggling in.
Track Height
Last Used When selected, zoom toggling in changes all tracks containing an Edit Selection to the last used Track Height.
Medium When selected, zoom toggling in changes all tracks containing an Edit Selection to the Medium Track Height.
Large When selected, zoom toggling in changes all tracks containing an Edit Selection to the
Large Track Height.
Jumbo When selected, zoom toggling in changes all tracks containing an Edit Selection to the
Jumbo Track Height.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 371
Extreme When selected, zoom toggling in changes all tracks containing an Edit Selection to the Extreme Track Height.
Fit To Window When selected, zoom toggling in changes all tracks containing an Edit Selection to the Fit To Window Track Height.
Track View
Waveform/Notes When selected, zoom toggling in changes the Track View for audio tracks to
Waveform view, and changes the Track View for
Instrument and MIDI tracks to Notes view.
Last Used When selected, zoom toggling in changes the Track View to the last used Track
View that was stored with Zoom Toggle.
No Change When selected, the track view does not change when zoom toggling in or out.
Separate Grid Settings When Zoomed In When selected, this option retains the same (current) grid setting when zoom toggling in or out.
When this option is deselected, the grid setting stored with Zoom toggle is recalled when zoom toggling in.
Using Zoom Toggle
Depending on the Zoom Toggle preferences settings, the Zoom Toggle button in the Edit window lets you define a zoom state and toggle between it and the current zoom state, or it zooms to the settings in the Zoom Toggle preferences.
When Zoom Toggle is enabled, the Edit window displays the stored zoom state. Additionally, any changes made to the view while Zoom Toggle is enabled are also stored in the zoom state.
When Zoom Toggle is disabled, the Edit window reverts to the last zoom state.
To store a zoom state using Zoom Toggle:
1 Set the Zoom Toggle preferences.
2 Make an Edit selection.
3 Click the Zoom Toggle button. It lights to indicate that Zoom Toggle is enabled and
Pro Tools zoom toggles in based on the settings of the Zoom Toggle preferences.
Zoom Toggle button
Zoom Toggle button in the Edit window
If Last Used is selected for any of the following, you can adjust the corresponding zoom, height, or view in the Edit window to update the stored zoom state:
• Vertical Zoom
• Horizontal Zoom
• Track Height
• Track View
In Commands Keyboard Focus mode (see
“Keyboard Focus” on page 16), press the E
key to enable or disable Zoom Toggle.
372 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To modify the stored Zoom Toggle state, do one of the following:
â– Change the Zoom Toggle preferences.
– or –
â– If Last Used is selected for any of the Vertical
Zoom, Horizontal Zoom, Track Height, or Track
View preferences, do the following:
• Make sure the Zoom Toggle button is lit
(enabled).
– and –
• Adjust the Track Height, Vertical Zoom,
Track View, or the Grid depending on which preferences are set to Last Used.
Changes are stored as the new Zoom Toggle state.
To clear the stored Zoom Toggle state:
1 Make sure the Zoom Toggle button is lit (enabled).
2 Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
Zoom Toggle button.
To use Zoom Toggle without changing playlist views:
1 Make a selection on one or more tracks.
2 Do one of the following:
• Press Alt+Start+E (Windows) or Option+Control+E (Mac).
– or –
• With Commands Keyboard Focus enabled
(see “Keyboard Focus” on page 16), press
Alt+E (Windows) or Option+E (Mac).
Using the Zoom Toggle
Auto-Toggle When Changing Selection
When Zoom Toggle is enabled, selecting a different range of material, or selecting material on a different track affects Zoom Toggle as follows:
• Changing the selection length does not rezoom the window, the current zoom level is maintained.
• Changing the selection to a different track sets the toggle-in state for track height and view. However, horizontal zoom remains unchanged. When moving the selection from a toggled in track, the toggled out track height and view are restored.
Auto-Toggle does not work for Edit selections across multiple tracks that are Zoomtoggled to Fit to Window.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 373
Zooming with a Scroll Wheel
If you have a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can use the scroll wheel to zoom in and out of tracks, both vertically and horizontally.
To continuously zoom in the Edit window
(horizontal zoom):
â– Hold Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) while turning the mouse scroll wheel.
To continuously zoom audio (vertical zoom) in the
Edit window:
â– Hold Alt+Shift (Windows) or Option+Shift
(Mac) while turning the mouse scroll wheel.
To continuously zoom MIDI (vertical zoom) in the
Edit window:
â– Hold Alt+Start (Windows) or Option+Control
(Mac) while turning the mouse scroll wheel.
To scroll the contents of the Edit window or Mix window horizontally:
1 Focus the window you want to scroll by clicking in it or bringing it forward.
2 Hold the Shift key while turning the mouse scroll wheel.
Using the Trim Tools
Trim tools provide region, note, and data trimming functions. The following Trim tools are available:
• Trim tool; also called Standard Trim tool
• Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool; also called TC/E Trim tool
• Scrub Trim tool (Pro Tools HD only)
• Loop Trim tool
The Trim tools are constrained by boundary regions, regardless of the current Edit mode, as follows:
• Trimming towards the left is constrained by the next region’s left-most boundary (region start).
• Trimming towards the right is constrained by the region’s right-most boundary (region end).
• The Trim tool provides special functions when used on looped regions and region
groups. For more information, see “Region
Groups” on page 452 and “Region Loop-
Trim Tool
With the Trim tool, you can quickly shorten or expand a region (up to the entire length of the source audio file). The first time you trim a region, Pro Tools automatically adds it to the Region List as a new region (with a name derived from the original) in order to differentiate it from the original.
The Trim tool is a nondestructive tool and does not actually modify the original audio or MIDI data (when working on regions). To return to the length of the original region, drag it from the Region List, or resize the edited region with the Trim tool to its original length.
374 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Use of the Trim tool is affected by the current
Edit mode: Shuffle, Slip, Spot, or Grid (see “Edit
The Trim tool can also be used to lengthen
and shorten MIDI notes (see “Trimming
Note Start and End Times” on page 566),
and also to scale automation and controller
data up or down “Drawing Automation” on page 712.
To trim a region with the Trim tool:
1 Select the Trim tool.
2 With Pro Tools HD, click the Trim tool pop-up menu and select “Standard.”
When using Shuffle mode, subsequent regions are slid as necessary to make room for the edited region. If using Grid mode, the dragged start/end times snap to the nearest Grid boundary. If using Spot mode, the Spot dialog opens, where you can enter the new location for the region’s start or end point.
Time Compression/Expansion
Trim Tool
The Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool is a convenient tool for matching an audio region to the length of another region, a tempo grid, a video scene, or to practically any other reference point you want.
Trim tool
3 Move the cursor near the start or end of the region, so the Trim tool appears.
Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool over a region
Trim tool
To reverse the direction of the Trim tool, press
Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac).
4 Do one of the following:
• If trimming the end, drag left to shorten the region, right to lengthen.
– or –
• If trimming the start, drag right to shorten the region, left to lengthen.
When working with audio, you cannot trim past the boundaries of adjacent regions.
When trimming regions in a stereo or multichannel track, all channels are trimmed.
The TC/E Trim tool unloops and consolidates the looped region.
The Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool works by using the Time Compression/Expansion (TC/E) AudioSuite plug-in (or a third party plug-in) to create a new audio file. You use this tool by dragging the region’s start or end point to expand or compress the region.
With Pro Tools HD or LE with DV Toolkit
2, you can match an Edit selection to the length of a Timeline selection by selecting
Edit > TCE Edit to Timeline Selection com-
mand (see “TCE (Time Compression and
Expansion) Edit To Timeline Selection” on page 411.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 375
Time Compression/Expansion Plug-in
Preferences
You can select which AudioSuite plug-in is used for trimming with the TCE Trim tool.
To set the AudioSuite plug-in for use with the Time
Compression/Expansion Trim tool:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences.
2 Click the Processing tab.
3 From the TC/E Plug-in pop-up menu, select the AudioSuite plug-in to be used with the Time
Compression/Expansion Trim tool.
Using the Time Compression/Expansion Trim
Tool in Grid Mode
The Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool can be used in Grid mode to match a region to the tempo of a session or a section of a session.
For example, you might import a one-bar drum loop with a tempo of 90 BPM into a session with a tempo of 120 BPM. In Grid mode, you can use this tool to simply and quickly “time compress” the drum loop to the length of one measure, with minimal loss of audio fidelity.
Trimming regions while in Relative Grid mode will trim the regions in grid increments while maintaining their relative offset (if any) from the grid.
To use the Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool in Grid mode:
1 Set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Click the Trim tool pop-up menu and select
TCE.
TC/E Preferences
4 From the Default Settings pop-up menu, select the plug-in setting.
5 Click OK.
Refer to the DigiRack Plug-ins Guide for more information about AudioSuite plugins.
Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool
3 With the Time Compression/Expansion tool, drag the audio region’s start or end point to compress or expand the region to the Grid (for example, by quarter notes). The audio region is automatically processed using the Time Compression/Expansion AudioSuite plug-in. The new audio region appears in the playlist and in the Region List.
376 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Using the Time Compression/Expansion Tool in
Slip Mode
To use the Time Compression/Expansion tool in
Slip mode:
1 Set the Edit mode to Slip.
2 Click the Trim tool pop-up menu and select
TCE.
3 With the Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool, drag the region’s start or end point to compress or expand the region freely. A new region is automatically processed using the Time Compression/Expansion AudioSuite plug-in. The new region appears in the playlist and in the Region List.
Using the Time Compression/Expansion Trim
Tool in Spot Mode
In Spot mode, clicking with the Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool in a region opens the
Spot Dialog. You can specify the location you want the region to start or end at, or the duration of the region, and the region is automatically compressed or expanded as specified.
To use the Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool in Spot mode:
1 Set the Edit mode to Spot.
2 Click the Trim tool pop-up menu and select
TCE.
3 Click the region near its start or end point.
The Spot Dialog opens. Using any Time Scale, enter a new start or end time (or duration) for the region, then click OK. A new region is automatically processed using the Time Compression/Expansion AudioSuite plug-in. The new region appears in the playlist and in the Region
List.
Scrub Trim Tool
(Pro Tools HD Only)
The Scrub Trim tool is a convenient tool for auditioning material (on up to two tracks) to find a trim point. You can drag in a track to hear the audio information, then trim at a specific location by releasing the mouse button.
This action creates a new region. Note that the
Scrub Trim tool changes into a “right trim” or
“left trim” shape as it is placed over the right or left side of a region. To reverse the direction of the Scrub Trim tool, press Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) before you click the region.
Scrub Trim tool over a region
Scrub playback speed and direction vary with controller movement. Scrubbed audio is routed through the track signal path, so you hear any effects in the signal path.
To scrub trim a track:
1 Click the Trim tool pop-up menu and select
Scrub. The tool changes to a speaker with a bracket.
2 Drag within a track to the left or right. Audio from a scrubbed track is routed through the track signal path, including any TDM effects.
When you locate the trim point, release the mouse button to trim the region.
To scrub trim two tracks, click with the Scrub
Trim tool between two adjacent tracks and drag.
To scrub with finer resolution (without having to zoom in), press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) while scrubbing.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 377
Loop Trim Tool
Use the Loop Trim tool to create or trim looped regions.
Loop Trim tool
4 Do one of the following:
• Click at the end of the region, and drag left or right to the point you want the loop to stop.
– or –
• Click at the beginning of the region, and drag left or right to the point you want the loop to start.
Loop Trim tool
For more information on looping regions,
see “Region Looping” on page 461.
Creating Loops with the Loop Trim Tool
To create loop regions using the Loop Trim tool:
1 Click the Trim tool icon in the Edit window to access the Trim Tool Selector pop-up menu.
2 Select Loop.
3 Position the cursor over the top half of an unlooped audio or MIDI region, or region group.
The cursor changes to indicate that you can loop trim the region. (Positioning the cursor over the bottom half of the region results in the
Standard Trim cursor.)
Loop Trim cursor
Loop icon
Looped region
Trimming Looped Regions
You can trim looped regions in two ways:
• Loop Trim a looped region to change how long the region is looped. For example, Loop
Trim a looped region from 2 bars to four bars.
With a 1 bar region, the number of loops changes from 2 to 4. Each loop iteration remains the same length, but the length of the entire looped region changes.
• Trim the source region (loop iteration) while keeping the overall loop length unchanged.
The number of loop iterations within the looped region changes accordingly. For example, trim a 2 bar loop iteration of a 4 bar looped region to 1 bar. The 4 bar looped region remains constant, but the number of loop iterations changes from 2 to 4. Each loop iteration’s length changes, but how long the region is looped does not.
378 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To Loop Trim a looped region:
1 Select the Loop Trim tool.
2 Move the cursor over the top half of the looped region (not over a Loop icon). The cursor indicates the Loop Trim tool.
Loop Trim tool
To trim the source region (loop iteration) of a looped region:
1 Select the Loop Trim tool.
2 Move the cursor over a Loop icon in the looped region, or anywhere along the bottom of the region. The cursor indicates the Trim tool icon.
Loop icon
Looped region
3 Trim the looped region.
Trim tool Loop icon
Looped region
3 Trim the start or end of the loop iteration.
Loop trimming a looped region
The number of loops increases or decreases to fill the new length of the entire looped region.
Hold down the Start key on Windows, or the Control key on Mac, while trimming to trim in loop iteration increments.
Trimming a looped region does not trim any underlying Fades.
Trimming a looped region
The number of trimmed loop iterations increases or decreases to fill the original length of the entire looped region.
Trimmed looped region
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 379
Using the Selector Tool
Use the Selector tool to place the edit cursor in a track or Timebase ruler, or to make Timeline selections or Edit selections on tracks. For more in-
formation on selecting, see “Selecting Track Material” on page 398.
Placing the Edit Cursor
To place the edit cursor with the Selector tool:
1 Select the Selector tool in the Edit window.
2 Click the desired location in a track or on a
Timebase ruler.
To select an entire region with the Selector tool:
1 Select the Selector tool in the Edit window.
2 Double-click the desired region on a track.
To select an entire track with the Selector tool:
1 Select the Selector tool in the Edit window.
2 Triple-click the desired track.
Making a Timeline Selection with the
Selector Tool
To make a Timeline selection with the Selector tool:
1 Select the Selector tool in the Edit window.
2 Click and drag in a on Timebase ruler or in a track (if Link Timeline and Edit Selection is enabled).
Placing the edit cursor with the Selector tool
Making an Edit Selection with the
Selector Tool
To make an Edit selection with the Selector tool:
1 Select the Selector tool in the Edit window.
2 Click and drag in a track, across multiple tracks, or on Timebase ruler (if Link Timeline and Edit Selection is enabled).
Using the Grabber Tools
Use the Grabber tools to select, move, separate, and arrange regions on tracks. There are three modes for the Grabber tool: Time Grabber, Separation Grabber, and Object Grabber.
Time Grabber Selects an entire region on a track with a single click. For more information on se-
lecting, see “Selecting Track Material” on page 398.
Time Grabber tool
Making a selection with the Selector tool
380 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Separation Grabber Cuts and pastes an Edit selection from one location to another by clicking
and dragging. For more information, see “Separation Grabber Tool” on page 419.
Using the Smart Tool
With the Smart Tool you can instantly access the Selector, Grabber, and Trim tools, and you can also perform fades and crossfades. The position of the cursor in relation to a region or note, or within an automation playlist, determines how the Smart Tool functions.
Separation Grabber tool
Object Grabber Lets you select multiple, noncontiguous regions. For more information, see
“Object Selections” on page 400.
Object Grabber tool
To select one of the Grabber tools:
1 Click and hold the Grabber tool in the Edit window.
2 From the Grabber tool pop-up menu, select the desired Grabber tool.
Smart Tool in Edit window
To select the Smart Tool, click its icon in the upper left of the Edit window, or press F6+F7 (or
F7+F8) simultaneously.
The Smart Tool in Waveform View (or
MIDI Track Regions View)
Fade-In
Selector tool
Fade-Out
Selecting a Grabber tool
Trim tool
(start)
Trim tool
(end)
Grabber tool
Smart Tool in Waveform View
Crossfade
The following capabilities are available with the
Smart Tool when working with audio tracks in
Waveform or Blocks View, or MIDI or Instrument tracks in Regions View:
â—† For the Selector tool, position the cursor over the middle of the region, in the upper half.
â—† For the Grabber tools, position the cursor over the middle of a region, in the lower half.
â—† For the Trim tools, position the cursor near the region’s start or end point.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 381
â—† For a fade-in or fade-out, position the cursor near an audio region’s start or end point, near the top. Once the Fade cursor appears, drag into the region to set the fade length. The fade is created automatically with the Default Fade Settings (in the Editing Preferences page).
â—† For a crossfade, position the cursor between two adjacent audio regions, near the bottom.
Once the Crossfade cursor appears drag left or right to set the crossfade length. The crossfade is created automatically with the Default Fade Settings (in the Editing Preferences page).
To temporarily switch the Smart Tool to the
Scrubber, place the cursor over the region so that the Selector tool is enabled, then press
Start (Windows) or Control (Mac).
The Smart Tool in Notes View
Selector tool
Trim note start
Grabber tool
Smart Tool in Notes View
Trim note end
The following capabilities are available with the
Smart Tool when working with MIDI and Instrument tracks in Notes View:
â—† For the Selector tool, position the cursor so it does not cover any notes.
â—† To get the Selector tool while positioning the cursor over notes, press Control (Windows) or
Command (Mac).
â—† For the Grabber tools, position the cursor over the note, near its middle.
â—† To get the Marquee so you can select a group of notes, position the cursor so it does not cover any notes and press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac).
382 Pro Tools Reference Guide
â—† For the Trim tools, position the cursor near the note’s start or end point.
To temporarily switch the Smart Tool to the
Eraser, place the cursor over the region so that the Selector tool is enabled, then press
Alt+Start (Windows) or Option+Control
(Mac).
The Smart Tool in Automation and
Controller Views
The following capabilities are available with the
Smart Tool when working in both automation and controller views:
â—† For the Selector tool, position the cursor anywhere in the bottom 75% of the playlist for the
Selector tool. Drag with the Selector tool to select breakpoints.
â—† For Trim tools, position the cursor in the top
25% of the playlist for the Trim tool. Drag with the Trim tool to trim breakpoints. Press Control
(Windows) or Command (Mac) while trimming for fine control.
â—† For Grabber tools, Control (Windows) or
Command (Mac) for the Grabber tool, then click in on the automation line to create breakpoints
To edit existing breakpoints, move the cursor near a breakpoint for the Grabber tool.
For fine control with the Grabber tool, press
Control (Windows) or Command (Mac)—or continue to hold the key if you are creating a new breakpoint.
To vertically constrain Grabber tool movement, press Shift.
To vertically constrain Grabber tool movement with fine control, press Control+Shift (Windows) or Command+Shift (Mac).
The Smart Tool with Stereo and
Multichannel Tracks
When using the Smart Tool on stereo and multichannel tracks, individual channels cannot be independently edited. All edits affects all channels as a whole.
Tool switching for the Smart Tool in stereo and multichannel tracks is determined by the position within the entire track, and not within individual channels.
Edit window around that point, and moves the
Playhead there. With these Scrolling Options, scrubbed material moves past the Playhead, which remains stationary and centered.
Scrubbing is only supported for audio tracks. MIDI and Instrument tracks cannot be scrubbed.
To scrub a single audio track:
1 Select the Scrubber tool.
2 Drag within the track: left for reverse or right for forward.
Using the Scrubber Tool
The Scrubber tool lets you “scrub” up to two tracks of audio in the Edit Window. Scrubbing is a technique that originated in tape editing, where the tape was rocked back and forth past the playhead at slower than normal speeds to find a particular location (usually for cutting and splicing).
While viewing an audio waveform in Pro Tools can be helpful in visually finding an edit point, sometimes a waveform display (because of its sonic characteristics) may not reveal the desired spot in the audio material. By scrubbing back and forth in Pro Tools, you can listen and locate an exact edit point.
When the Operation preference for “Edit Insertion Follows Scrub/Shuttle” is enabled, the edit cursor automatically locates to the point where scrubbing stops.
When the Scrolling option is set to Continuous
(Pro Tools HD and LE with DV Toolkit 2 only) or
Center Playhead (Pro Tools HD only), clicking with the Scrubber in a track’s playlist centers the
Scrubbing an audio track with the Scrubber
The distance and speed with which you drag
(with either the mouse, or the scrub wheel on a control surface) determine the length and speed of the scrubbed audio. Audio from the scrubbed track is routed to its output, along with any effects assigned to the track.
The resolution for the Scrubber is dependent on the zoom factor for the scrubbed track.
You can temporarily switch the Selector tool to the Scrubber tool by Start-clicking (Windows) or Control-clicking (Mac). For finer resolution, Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-Control-click (Mac).
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 383
To scrub multiple audio tracks, do one of the following:
â– With the Scrubber selected, drag between two adjacent tracks.
Scrubbing between two audio tracks
– or –
â– Scrub within a selection that contains multiple tracks.
When scrubbing multiple tracks, only the first two tracks are heard.
The maximum number of channels scrubbed in Pro Tools is eight, which lets you scrub a 7.1 track, two stereo tracks
(four channels), but not two 5.1 surround tracks (12 channels).
Scrub/Shuttle Mode
When scrubbing normally, you can scrub at normal playback speeds or slower. Scrub/Shuttle mode, however, lets you scrub at several times normal speed, which is helpful in playing through large ranges and locating material.
To scrub in Shuttle mode (at several times normal speed):
1 Select the Scrubber tool.
2 While pressing Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac), drag within the track—left for reverse, right for forward. The Fast Forward and Rewind buttons in the Transport window engage.
The distance and speed dragged determine the speed for the scrubbed audio.
Shuttle Lock Mode
Shuttle Lock mode lets you use the numeric keypad to shuttle up to two tracks forward or backwards at specific speeds: 5 is normal speed, numbers from 6 up to 9 provide increasingly faster fast-forward speeds, and numbers from 4 down to 1 provide progressively faster rewind speeds
(4 is the slowest rewind Shuttle Lock speed, 1 is the fastest). If multiple tracks are selected, only the first two tracks are shuttled.
To play one or two tracks with the shuttle lock:
1 With Pro Tools HD, make sure the Operation preference for Numeric Keypad mode is not set
to Shuttle (see “Operation Preferences” on page 66).
2 With the Selector tool, click in the track where you want playback to begin. To shuttle on two tracks, Shift-click in a second track.
3 Press the Start key (Windows) or Control
(Mac) and a number on the numeric keypad:
0–9 (9 is fastest, 5 is normal speed, and 0 stops shuttling).
Once Shuttle Lock mode is initiated, Fast Forward and Rewind become highlighted in the
Transport window.
4 Press additional keys to change the playback speed, or press Plus (+) or Minus (–) to switch the playback direction (plus for forward, minus for backward).
5 To stop playback, press Start+0 (Windows) or
Control+0 (Mac).
384 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To exit Shuttle Lock mode, do one of the following:
â–
Press Stop in the Transport window.
– or –
â–
Press the Spacebar.
Custom Shuttle Lock Speed
Use the Custom Shuttle Lock Speed preference to customize the highest fast-forward Shuttle
Lock speed (key 9) to better match your editing and auditioning needs.
To configure Custom Shuttle Lock Speed:
1 In Pro Tools, select Setup > Preferences and click the Operation tab.
2 Be sure that the Numeric Keypad mode is set
to Transport or Classic (see “Operation Preferences” on page 66).
3 Enter a desired percentage for the Custom
Shuttle Lock Speed setting. The range for this setting is 50–800%. You can use the Up and
Down Arrow keys to increase or decrease the setting.
4 Click OK.
The Custom Shuttle Lock Speed will be saved with your Pro Tools preferences (not with the session).
To enable Custom Shuttle Lock Speed:
â–
Press Start+9 (Windows) or Control+ 9 (Mac) on the numeric keypad.
Numeric Keypad Set to Shuttle
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Pro Tools offers another form of shuttling, different from that of Shuttle Lock mode. With the
Numeric Keypad mode set to Shuttle, playback of the current Edit selection is triggered by pressing and holding the keys on the numeric keypad—playback stops once the keys are released.
Various playback speeds are available in both forward and reverse. In this mode, pre- and post-roll are ignored.
To shuttle with the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Shuttle:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the Operation tab.
2 Set the Numeric Keypad mode to Shuttle and click OK.
3 With the Selector tool, click in the track where you want playback to begin. To shuttle on two tracks, Shift-click in a second track.
4 Press and hold any of the following keys (or key combinations) on the numeric keypad to trigger playback.
Shuttle Speed
1 X Speed
4 X Speed
1/4 X Speed
1/2 X Speed
2 X Speed
Rewind Key Forward Key
4
7
1
4+5
7+8
6
9
3
5+6
8+9
5 Press a different key to switch the playback direction or speed. Release to stop.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 385
Using the Pencil Tool
The Pencil tool lets you draw audio waveforms
(at the sample level), tempo changes, MIDI data, and automation.
For information on drawing on the audio
waveform, see “Waveform Repair with the
For information on drawing tempo changes,
see “Editing Tempo Events in the Tempo
For information on drawing MIDI data, see
“The Pencil Tool” on page 560.
The Universe Window
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
The Universe window displays an overview of the entire session, representing audio and MIDI material on all tracks that are not hidden (including tracks that are inactive, or that contain offline regions). The order in which material is displayed in the Universe window corresponds to the track order in the Edit window.
To open the Universe window:
â– Choose Window > Universe.
shaded area indicates what’s visible in the Edit window
For information on drawing automation,
see “Drawing Automation” on page 712.
Universe window
Audio material residing in audio tracks is represented by a single, horizontal line in the Universe window. Each channel in a stereo or multichannel track is represented individually.
Since Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and VCA
Master tracks do not contain audio, they are displayed as blank areas in the Universe window.
MIDI and Instrument tracks containing MIDI data are represented by single, horizontal lines.
Resizing the Universe Window
Even though the Universe window can be resized horizontally and vertically, the length of the entire session is always displayed in the Universe window. If the Universe window is resized so some of the session’s track are not displayed, a vertical scroll bar becomes available.
386 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Shaded Area in the Universe Window
The shaded area in the Universe window represents what is visible in the Edit window. If you change what is displayed in the Edit window— by zooming, scrolling horizontally or vertically, hiding or showing tracks, or changing track heights—the highlighted area in the Universe window updates.
During playback, if the Edit window is set to scroll, the highlighted area in the Universe window also scrolls.
Scrolling in the Universe Window
By clicking in the Universe window, you can automatically scroll, either horizontally or vertically, the material displayed in the Edit window.
This provides a convenient method of locating anywhere in the session, or adjusting which shown tracks are visible in the Edit window.
To move the highlighted area in the Universe window:
1 Choose Window > Universe.
2 Drag the highlighted area to a different position in the Universe window to affect which tracks are displayed in the Edit window.
Video Universe Window
The Universe window also provides a Right-click pop-up menu for displaying the Video Universe window, which lets you view, navigate, zoom, and select video regions on the main video track
For information on the Video Universe win-
dow, see “Browsing Video in the Video Universe Window” on page 835.
When all tracks are visible in the Edit window and the session is zoomed all the way out, with all regions visible, the entire Universe window is shaded.
Chapter 18: Editing Basics 387
388 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting
Track Material
Playing Tracks
After recording or importing audio or MIDI to tracks, you will want to listen to the material for editing and mixing.
To set where playback begins, you can click anywhere in a track with the Selector tool (as long as the Timeline and Edit selections are linked). See
“Linking or Unlinking Timeline and Edit Selections” on page 396).
Playback Location
The playback location is displayed in the counters at the top of the Edit window and in the Transport window, and in the Big Counter window.
To display the Counters in the Transport window:
â–
Choose View > Transport > Counters.
Setting a playback point with the Selector tool
Playback Cursor
The playback cursor is a solid unblinking line that moves across the Edit window to indicate the current playback location.
The selected Scrolling Option determines how the Edit window scrolls during playback, and
how the playback cursor functions. See “Scrolling Options” on page 395 for details.
Transport with Counters displayed
Start-click (Windows) or Control-click
(Mac) the Expand/Collapse button in the
Transport window to show or hide counters.
Control-click (Windows) or Commandclick (Mac) the Expand/Collapse button in the Transport window to show or hide MIDI controls.
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the Expand/Collapse button in the Transport window to show or hide counters and
MIDI controls.
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 389
To display the Big Counter:
â–
Choose Window > Big Counter.
With the Timeline and Edit selections linked, you can click a region or MIDI note with the
Time Grabber tool to automatically update the
Timeline with the selection’s start time, letting you play from that point.
Big Counter window
Edit Cursor
The edit cursor is a flashing line that appears when you click with the Selector tool in a track’s playlist. The blinking edit cursor indicates the start point for any editing tasks performed. If you make a selection and perform an edit, the selection is the target of the edit.
Basic Playback from a Specific
Point
To begin playing from a specific point within a track:
1 Make sure that Options > Link Timeline and
Edit Selection is enabled.
2 With the Selector tool, click in the track where you want playback to begin.
3 Click Play in the Transport window to begin playback.
4 Click Stop in the Transport window to stop playback.
To jump to a different location and begin playing from there, do one of the following:
â–
When playback is stopped, click with the Selector tool at that point and click Play in the
Transport window.
– or –
â–
Click the desired location in a Timebase Ruler during playback.
Page Scrolling During Playback
You can set Pro Tools to scroll the track display while playing, and also have the edit cursor appear wherever playback stops.
To make the track display and the edit cursor follow playback:
1 Select Options > Scrolling > Page.
2 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Operation tab.
3 Select the option for “Timeline Insertion/Play
Start Marker Follows Playback,” then click OK.
Pressing Start+N (Windows) or Control+N
(Mac) toggles Timeline Insertion/Play Start
Marker Follows Playback.
4 Make sure to select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
5 With the Selector tool, click in the track where you want playback to begin.
6 Click Play in the Transport window to begin playback. The playback cursor scrolls across the
Edit window, indicating the current playback location.
7 Click Stop in the Transport window to stop playback. The edit cursor appears at the location where playback stops.
390 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Locating and Auditioning with Fast
Forward/Rewind
You can use the Fast Forward and Rewind buttons in the Transport window to locate material on tracks. If the Operation preference for “Audio
During Fast Forward/Rewind” is selected, the scanned audio is heard (similar to a CD player) when clicking the Fast Forward and Rewind buttons.
You can also fast forward or rewind incrementally by repeatedly clicking the appropriate button. The size of these increments is determined by the Main Time Scale:
Bars:Beats Moves to the beginning of the previous or next bar.
Min:Sec Moves back or forward in one-second steps.
Time Code Moves back or forward in one-second steps (while adjusting for current SMPTE format).
Feet+Frames Moves back or forward in one-foot steps.
Samples Moves back or forward in one-second steps.
Locating with Back and Forward
Commands
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Pro Tools provides four Back/Forward commands (sometimes called “rollback”) for moving the playback location in the Edit window.
You can also move the playback location in multiple increments by repeating the command
(See “Repeating Back/Forward Commands” on page 392).
Back/Forward commands also work when controlling a 9-pin device. See the Machine-
Control Guide for details.
Back Moves the playback location backward by the Back/Forward Amount.
Back and Play Moves the current playback location backward by the Back/Forward Amount and automatically begins playback.
Forward Moves the playback location forward by the Back/Forward Amount.
Forward and Play Moves the current playback location forward by the Back/Forward Amount and automatically begins playback.
Setting the Back/Forward Amount
The length of the Back/Forward move is determined by the Back/Forward Amount preference in the Operation page (Setup > Preferences).
To configure the Back/Forward Amount:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the Operation tab.
The timebase of the Back/Forward Amount settings follows the Main Time Scale by default, or you can deselect Follow Main Time and select any of the following timebase formats:
• Bars:Beats
• Min:Sec
• Time Code
• Feet+Frames
• Samples
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 391
2 Do one of the following:
• Select a preset amount in the Back/Forward
Amount pop-up menu.
– or –
• In the Back/Forward Amount field, enter a custom amount.
Using Back or Forward Commands
To move the playback location backward by the
Back/Forward Amount:
â– Press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac), and click Rewind in the Transport window.
To move the playback location forward by the
Back/Forward Amount:
â– Press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac), and click Fast Forward in the Transport window.
To move the playback location backward by the
Back/Forward Amount and then begin playback:
â–
Press Control+Alt (Windows) or Command+Option (Mac), and click Rewind in the
Transport window.
To move the playback location forward by the
Back/Forward Amount and then begin playback:
â– Press Control+Alt (Windows) or Command+Option (Mac), and click Fast Forward in the Transport window.
Repeating Back/Forward Commands
All the Back/Forward commands can be repeated in order to increase the amount of the total Back or Forward move.
To repeat Back/Forward moves:
1 Press and hold Control (Windows) or Command (Mac).
2 Click Rewind or Fast Forward the number of times you want to repeat moving the playback location backwards or forwards by the Back/Forward Amount.
Extending Selections with Back or Back and
Play Commands
The Back or Back and Play commands can be used to extend a selection backwards by the length of the Back/Forward Amount.
Although you cannot extend a selection with the Forward or Forward and Play commands, you can use the following procedures with Forward or Forward and Play to move the start point of a current selection.
To extend a selection with Back or Back and Play commands:
1 Configure the Back/Forward Amount.
(See“Setting the Back/Forward Amount” on page 391.)
2 With the Selector tool, drag within a track to make a selection.
3 Do one of the following:
• To extend the selection backwards by the
Back/Forward Amount, press Shift+Control
(Windows) or Shift+Command (Mac) and click Rewind in the Transport window.
– or –
• To extend the selection backwards by the
Back/Forward Amount and then begin playback, press Shift+Control+Alt (Windows) or Shift+Command+Option (Mac) and click Rewind in the Transport window.
392 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Edit Window Counters and
Indicators
The counters and indicators at the top of the
Edit window display the current playback location and Edit selection. These include the Main and Sub Counters, and the Edit Selection Start,
End, and Length indicators.
All Edit window counters and indicators (except the Sub Counter) let you enter a location in their counter display to navigate to a specific time location.
Main and Sub Counters, Edit Selection indicators
The Main Counter displays the playback location in the time format for the Main Time Scale.
The Sub Counter can be set to any of the other
Time Scale formats for another timing reference.
The Edit Selection indicators (to the right of the
Main and Sub counters) display the Start and
End times, and Length of the current Edit selection according to the Main Timebase.
The Main and Sub Counters, as well as the Edit
Selection indicators, also appear in the Transport window when it is set to display Counters.
To navigate with the Edit window Main Counter (or one of the Edit Selection indicators):
1 Do one of the following:
• Click in one of the counters.
– or –
• Press asterisk (*) on the numeric keypad to highlight the Main Counter in the Edit window (or the Main Counter in the Transport window or Big Counter window, if either are displayed).
2 Type in the new location. Press Period (.) to cycle through to the different time fields.
3 Press Enter to accept the new value and automatically locate there.
Scrolling in a Timebase Ruler
You can scroll the contents of the Edit window by clicking and dragging in a ruler. While this does not actually update the session’s Current
Location, it does let you conveniently shift the display left or right for the sake of finding and editing material.
This method of scrolling is especially useful when using the Continuous Scrolling option
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit
2 only), which does not update or follow Timeline selections.
To scroll the entire contents of the Edit window from a ruler:
â– While pressing Control+Alt+Start (Windows) or Command+Option+Control (Mac), drag left or right in any of the Timebase rulers.
Scrolling in a ruler
Scrolling with a Scroll Wheel
If you have a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can use the scroll wheel to scroll vertically or horizontally in any Pro Tools window that has a scroll bar (such as the MIDI Event List).
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 393
To scroll a Pro Tools window vertically:
1 Place the mouse over the window you want to scroll (for example, in the Edit window you might want to scroll either the track display or the Region List).
2 Scroll the scroll wheel up or down to scroll the window up or down.
To scroll a Pro Tools window horizontally:
1 Place the mouse over the window you want to scroll (for example, in the Edit window you might want to scroll either the track display or the Region List).
2 Shift-scroll the scroll wheel up or down to scroll the window to the left or right.
The Playback Cursor locator is red when a track is record-enabled and blue when no track is record-enabled.
To locate the playback cursor when it is off-screen:
â– Click the Playback Cursor locator in the Main
Timebase ruler.
The Edit window changes to center the playback cursor on-screen.
Locating the Playback Cursor
Use the Playback Cursor locator to locate the playback cursor when it is off-screen. The Playback Cursor locator appears on the right edge of the Main Timebase ruler if the playback cursor is located beyond the time visible in the Edit window. If the playback cursor is located before the time visible in the Edit window, the Playback
Cursor locator appears on the left edge of the
Main Timebase ruler.
Playback Cursor locator
Playback Cursor locator, recording enabled (playback cursor located after currently viewed audio)
For example, if the Scrolling option is set to
None, the playback cursor will move off-screen after it has played past the time currently visible in the Edit window. The Playback Cursor locator will appear on the right edge of the Main Timebase ruler after the playback cursor moves beyond the time visible in the Edit window.
394 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Auto-Scrolling Tracks in the
Mix and Edit Windows
(Pro Tools HD Only)
If you are working with more tracks than can be displayed at one time in the Mix or Edit windows, you can select a track in one window and
Pro Tools will automatically scroll to that track in the other window.
To auto-scroll the Mix window to show a selected track in the Edit window:
â– In the Edit window, Start-click (Windows) or
Control-click (Mac) the track name.
The track becomes selected, and the Mix window scrolls to display the selected track.
To auto-scroll the Edit window to show a selected track in the Mix window:
â–
In the Mix window, Start-click (Windows) or
Control-click (Mac) the track name.
The track becomes selected, and the Edit window scrolls to display the selected track.
Navigating to Tracks Using Track
Position Numbers
With Track Number View enabled, each track is assigned a number corresponding to its position in the Mix and Edit Windows. You can scroll directly to any track by its positional number.
When tracks are reordered, Track Position
Numbers are reassigned to keep them in numerical sequence.
To navigate directly to any track using Track
Position Numbers:
1 Choose View > Track Number.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Track > Scroll to Track.
– or –
• Press Control+Alt+F (Windows) or Command+Option+F (Mac).
Scroll To Track dialog
3 In the Scroll To Track dialog, enter the Track
Position Number.
4 Click OK.
The track is selected, and the windows scroll as follows:
• The Edit window tracks scroll to bring the selected track as close to the top as possible.
• The Mix window tracks scroll to bring the selected track as close to the left as possible.
Scrolling Options
You can configure how contents of the Edit window scroll during playback and recording.
To configure Scrolling options:
â– Choose Options > Scrolling and select one of the following options:
None The Edit window does not scroll during or after playback. The playback cursor moves across the Edit window, indicating the playback location.
After Playback The playback cursor moves across the Edit window, indicating the playback location. When playback has stopped, the Edit window scrolls to the final playback location.
Page The playback cursor moves across the Edit window, indicating the playback location.
When the right edge of the Edit window is reached, its entire contents are scrolled, and the playback cursor continues moving from the left edge of the window.
Continuous (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
Center Playhead (Pro Tools HD Only)
See “Center Playhead Scrolling” on page 396.
Making a selection in the Timeline or a playlist, or manually scrolling the Timeline while in Page Scroll or Continuous Scroll mode suspends page scrolling. To resume page scrolling and jump to the current playback location, click the Playback Cursor lo-
cator in the Main Timebase ruler (see “Locating the Playback Cursor” on page 394).
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 395
Continuous Scrolling During Playback
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
When this scrolling option is selected, the Edit window’s contents scroll continuously past the playback cursor, which remains in the center of the window. With this option, playback is always based on the Timeline selection (unlike the Center Playhead Scrolling option). Continuous Scrolling During Playback uses host processing power, so use this option with Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 only when absolutely necessary.
Center Playhead Scrolling
(Pro Tools HD Only)
When this scrolling option is selected, the Edit window’s contents scroll continuously past the
Playhead , which is a blue line in the center of the window (red when recording).
The Playhead indicates where playback begins when clicking Play in the Transport window.
With the Playhead enabled, you can jump to and play an Edit or Timeline selection. For de-
tails, see “Playing Timeline and Edit Selections with the Playhead” on page 412.
Half-Screen Edit Window
When the Scrolling option is set to Continuous or Center Playhead, a half-screen appears at the far left of the Edit window (before the beginning of the session).
Half-screen for Center Playhead Scrolling option
Linking or Unlinking Timeline and Edit Selections
Pro Tools lets you link or unlink the Timeline and Edit selections.
When the Timeline and Edit selections are linked, selecting in a track’s playlist (making an
Edit selection) also defines the play and record range (the Timeline selection).
Unlinking Timeline and Edit selections lets you make a selection within a track for editing purposes that is distinct from the selection in the
Timeline (which determines the playback and recording range).
Center Playhead Scrolling option
To move the Playhead to a particular location for playback, you can scroll there in a ruler (see
“Scrolling in a Timebase Ruler” on page 393),
use the Edit window’s horizontal scroll bar, or type the location into one of the Edit Selection indicators or one of the Counters.
Moving the Playhead with these methods does not update the Timeline selection. However, updating the Timeline selection automatically moves the Playhead to the Timeline insertion point.
396 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To link or unlink the Timeline and Edit selections, do one of the following:
â– Select or deselect Options > Link Timeline and
Edit Selection.
– or –
â– In the upper left of the Edit window, click the
Link Timeline and Edit Selection button so it becomes highlighted (selected) or un-highlighted
(not selected).
lected for editing purposes. During playback, the Edit selection can be nudged, quantized, or transposed while the loop plays back completely independent and uninterrupted.
Link Timeline and Edit Selection enabled
Press Shift+Forward Slash (/) to toggle Link
Timeline and Edit Selection on and off.
If you are working on a film or video scene, you may want to unlink the Timeline and Edit selections to find or audition material that is at a different location than the current Timeline selection. Edit selections can be played (choose Edit >
Selection > Play Edit) without disrupting the current Timeline selection. Once you find the material, you can then go back to the Timeline selection and place it within the context of the scene.
Figure 19 illustrates another reason why you
might want to unlink the Timeline and Edit selections. In this example, the Timeline selection sets a range to be looped on playback, while a
MIDI region (residing within the loop) is se-
Figure 19. Timeline and Edit selections unlinked
While you could theoretically do this with the
Timeline and Edit selections linked, as soon as playback is stopped, the playback range would then be updated to that of the more recent edit range, or to a single note when editing MIDI.
Timeline and Edit Selection Markers
Timeline selections are displayed in the Main
Timebase ruler with Timeline Selection Markers , which appear as blue arrows (red when recording). In addition, there are Pre- and Post-Roll
Flags (which are green when enabled) indicating the location for pre- and post-roll.
Timeline Selection Markers with Pre- and Post-Roll
Flags
When the Timeline and Edit selections are unlinked, Edit selections are displayed in the ruler with Edit Markers , which appear as black brackets.
Figure 20. Edit Markers
If the Timeline and Edit selections are linked,
Edit selections are represented by the blue Timeline Selection Markers.
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 397
See the following sections for more information on working with Timeline and Edit selections:
• “Selecting Track Material” on page 398
• “Timeline Selections” on page 410
• “Setting Punch/Loop Points” on page 288
• “Setting Pre- and Post-Roll” on page 291
Selecting Track Material
Before audio and MIDI material can be edited, it must first be selected. The Track View determines how the material is viewed and selected.
When you make a selection, it appears as a highlighted area of the tracks, and is also indicated by blue start and end arrows ( Timeline Selection
Markers ) in the Main Timebase ruler. If any track
(audio or MIDI) in the session is record-enabled, even if it is hidden, these markers appear red.
Linking or Unlinking Track and
Edit Selections
Pro Tools lets you link or unlink Track selection with Edit selections.
When Track and Edit selections are linked, you can make a selection within a track or across multiple tracks for editing and each associated track is selected (track names automatically highlight). This lets you quickly apply tracklevel commands (such as Track View toggle, change track heights) and have the command apply to all tracks you are working on.
When Track and Edit selections are unlinked, making an Edit selection does not automatically select all associated tracks.
To link or unlink Track and Edit selection, do one of the following:
â– Select or deselect Options > Link Track and
Edit Selection.
– or –
â– In the upper left of the Edit window, click the
Link Track and Edit Selection button so it becomes highlighted (selected) or un-highlighted
(not selected).
Timeline Selection Markers indicating Edit selection
If the Timeline and Edit selections are unlinked, the Edit selection range is indicated by Edit
Selections and Edit Groups
When making selections on tracks that are part of an Edit Group, all tracks within the group become selected.
Selections and Hidden Tracks
When editing tracks that are part of an active
Edit Group, any tracks within the group that are hidden are not affected by the edits. To edit all members of a group, make sure they are visible by highlighting their names in the Track List.
Link Track and Edit Selection enabled
398 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Selections in Multiple Tracks
To make a selection in multiple tracks:
â– With the Selector tool, click and drag horizontally to include adjacent tracks in a selection
(drag vertically to define the time range).
Selecting Regions
To select a portion of a region:
â– With the Selector tool, drag within a region
(left or right) to select the material on a single track. (You can also use the Selector tool across multiple, adjacent tracks to make multitrack selections.)
Selecting a portion of a region
To select an entire region, do one of the following:
â– Click the region with the Time Grabber tool.
– or –
â– Double-click the region with the Selector tool.
To select two regions and the time range between them:
1 With the Time Grabber, click the first region.
2 Shift-click the second region. Both regions are selected, along with the time range between them (including any other regions).
To select an entire track, do one of the following:
â– Click in the track with the Selector tool and then choose Edit > Select All.
– or –
â– Triple-click with the Selector tool in the track.
To select all regions in all tracks:
1 Select the “All” Edit Group in the Group List pop-up menu.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click in any track with the Selector tool and choose Edit > Select All.
– or –
• Triple-click with the Selector tool in any track.
Another way to select all regions in all tracks, without having to select the “All”
Edit Group, is to press Enter (Windows) or
Return (Mac), then press Control+A (Windows) or Command+A (Mac). The Link
Timeline and Edit Selection option must be enabled.
Region List Selection Follows Edit
Selection
When the Editing preference for “Region List Selection Follows Edit Selection” is enabled, selecting a region in a track also causes the region to become selected in the Region List.
Conversely, if the Editing preference for “Edit
Selection Follows Region List Selection” is enabled, selecting a region in the Region List causes the initial occurrence of that region to become selected within the track.
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 399
Selecting All from Timebase Rulers
To select all material in all displayed audio and
MIDI tracks:
1 Enable Link Timeline and Edit Selection (Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection).
2 Double-click in any Timebase ruler. All regions in all displayed audio and MIDI tracks are selected. Tracks that are hidden are not selected.
To select all material in all tracks, including
Conductor events:
1 Enable Link Timeline and Edit Selection (Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection).
2 While pressing Control (Windows) or Option
(Mac), double-click in any Timebase ruler. All regions in all displayed audio and MIDI tracks are selected, including all events in each of the Conductor tracks.
Making Selections While Playing
Pro Tools lets you make on-the-fly selections with the Up and Down Arrow keys.
To make a selection while playing:
1 Enable Link Timeline and Edit Selection (Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection).
2 With the Selector tool, click somewhere near the beginning of the track in which you want to make the selection.
3 Click Play in the Transport window to begin playback.
4 When playback reaches the point where you want the selection to begin, press the Down Arrow key.
5 Press the Up Arrow key at the point where you want the selection to end. The selected range becomes highlighted.
6 To stop playback, click Stop in the Transport window.
To automatically scroll to the beginning of the selection (or to the location of the on-screen cursor), press the Left Arrow key. To scroll to the end of the selection, press the Right Arrow key.
While in Page Scroll or Continuous Scroll mode, making a selection in the Timeline or a playlist during playback as the playback cursor moves off-screen suspends page scrolling. To resume page scrolling and jump to the current playback location, click the Playback Cursor locator in
the Main Timebase ruler (see “Locating the Playback Cursor” on page 394).
Object Selections
Use the Object Grabber tool to select noncontiguous regions on one or more tracks. Noncontiguous selections must encompass entire regions.
If you want a noncontiguous selection to include a portion of a region, first turn the portion into a new region with the Separate Region com-
mand (see “Separate Region Commands” on page 418).
The Object Grabber is not available when the Edit mode is set to Shuffle or Spot.
To select noncontiguous regions:
1 Set the Edit mode to either Slip or Grid.
2 Click the Grabber tools pop-up menu and select “Object.”
Object Grabber tool
400 Pro Tools Reference Guide
3 Shift-click each region you want to include in the selection. The regions can even reside on different tracks.
To change a Time selection to an Object selection:
1 Drag with the Selector tool in any track to define a selection, or select in a Timebase ruler to select across all tracks.
Noncontiguous selection
Each clicked region is surrounded by a dark border, indicating it is selected.
The Object Grabber tool ignores Edit Groups when making selections. For instance, selecting a region on a grouped track does not cause regions in the other tracks in the group to become selected.
Object to Time Selection
You can convert between Time- and Objectbased selections. Time selections are made with the Selector and Time Grabber tools. Object selections are made with the Object Grabber tool.
Converting to an Object selection is useful when you are working with large selections, especially across multiple tracks, and you want to remove certain regions from the selection.
Converting to a Time selection is useful if you want to select all regions between a noncontiguous Object selection.
Selected regions
2 With the Object Grabber tool selected, double-click the Grabber icon in the toolbar. Regions falling within the selection range become selected as objects. Regions that were partially selected become deselected.
Regions selected as objects
To select regions that were partially selected, press Start (Windows) or Control (Mac) while double-clicking the Grabber icon.
To change an Object selection to a Time selection:
1 Select any number of regions with the Object
Grabber tool.
2 Double-click the Selector tool in the toolbar.
The time range between the first and last region becomes selected.
When using the Object Grabber tool on tracks that belong to an Edit Group, regions in the other grouped tracks are selected if they fall within the range of the selected region.
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 401
Changing a Selection Length
The selection range can be shortened or lengthened. This does not affect the material within the selection.
To change the length of a selection, do one of the following:
â– With the Selector tool, position the cursor over one end of the current selection and Shiftclick or Shift-click and drag left or right.
â– In the Main Timebase ruler, drag the Timeline
Selection Marker for the selection’s start or end point.
Dragging a Timeline Selection Marker
â– If Link Timeline and Edit Selection is disabled,
drag the Edit Markers (see Figure 20 on page 397) to change the selection length.
To make a long-length selection:
1 With the Selector tool, click at where you want the selection to start.
2 Scroll to the end point and Shift-click at the point where you want the selection to end.
To verify the start and end points of a long selection, press the Left Arrow key to scroll to the beginning of the selection, or press the Right Arrow key to scroll to the end.
Nudging a Selection Range
The selection range (not the material within the selection) can be moved by the Nudge value.
To nudge a selection range:
1 Configure the Nudge value. For details, see
“Defining the Nudge Value” on page 435.
2 Make the initial selection with the Selector tool.
3 While pressing Shift, press Plus (+) or
Minus (–) on the numeric keypad to move the selection range by the Nudge value.
Nudging Selection Start/End Points
Start and end points for selections can be moved by nudging them.
To move a selection start or end point by the
Nudge value:
1 Configure the Nudge value. For details, see
“Defining the Nudge Value” on page 435.
2 Make the initial selection with the Selector tool.
3 Do one of the following:
• While pressing Alt+Shift (Windows) or Option+Shift (Mac), press Plus (+) or Minus (–) on the numeric keypad to move the selection’s start point by the Nudge value.
– or –
• While pressing Control+Shift (Windows) or Command+Shift (Mac), press Plus (+) or
Minus (–) on the numeric keypad to move the selection’s end point by the Nudge value.
402 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Extending Selections
You can extend selections to region start and end points, to include an adjacent region, or to
Markers and Memory Locations.
To extend a selection to a region start or end point:
1 With the Selector tool, select a portion of a region, or click anywhere in the region.
2 Do one of the following:
• Press Shift+Tab to extend the selection to the region’s end point.
– or –
• Press Control+Shift+Tab (Windows) or Option+Shift+Tab (Mac) to extend the selection to the region’s start point.
To extend a selection to include an adjacent region:
1 Select the first region with the Time Grabber tool.
2 Do one of the following:
• With Tab to Transients disabled, press
Start+Shift+Tab (Windows) or Control+Shift+Tab (Mac) to extend the selection to the next region boundary.
– or –
• Press Control+Start+Shift+Tab (Windows) or Option+Control+Shift+Tab (Mac) to extend the selection to include the previous region boundary.
To extend a selection to a Marker or Memory
Location:
1 Do one of the following:
• Click in a track with the Selector tool at the desired start or end point.
– or –
• Make a selection with the Selector or Time
Grabber tool.
2 Do one of the following:
• Shift-click a Marker in the Markers ruler.
– or –
• Shift-click a Memory Location in the Memory Locations window.
The selection is extended from the original Insertion point to the Marker or Memory Location.
Using the Edit Selection
Indicators (Start, End, and Length)
The Edit Selection indicators at the top of the
Edit window can define precise Edit selections.
Time values for the Edit Selection indicators use the time format for the Main Time Scale.
Edit Selection indicators
To make a selection with the Edit Selection indicators:
1 Click with the Selector tool in the track you want to select.
2 Click in the Start field at the top of the Edit window.
3 Type in the start point for the selection and press the Forward Slash key (/) to enter the value and automatically move to the end field.
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 403
4 Type in the end point for the selection and press Enter to accept the value.
Numeric Entry Shortcuts for Selection
Indicators
You can use the following shortcuts for entering values in the Edit Selection indicators:
• Press the Forward Slash (/) key to cycle through the three Edit Selection indicators.
• Use Period (.) or the Left and Right Arrow keys to move through the different time fields in each Edit Selection indicator.
• Press the Up or Down Arrow keys to increase or decrease the numerical values.
• Control-drag (Windows) or Command-drag
(Mac) in a field to scroll to a new value.
• Press Plus (+) or Minus (–), along with an accompanying number, to add or subtract from the current field value. For example, to add 10 to a current field value, cycle to the field, press the Plus (+) key, type “10” and then press Enter.
â– Press Escape to exit the Edit Selection indicators without entering any values.
These shortcuts can also be used to enter start and end values in the Transport window.
Calculator Entry Mode
You can perform calculator-style editing of values in the Edit Selection indicators.
To subtract time values:
1 In the Edit Selection indicator, highlight the time field you want to change.
2 Press Minus (–) on the numeric keypad.
3 Type the amount you want to subtract from the current time value, then press Enter.
4 Press Enter again to apply the change.
To add time values:
1 In the Edit Selection indicator, highlight the time field you want to change.
2 Press Plus (+) on the numeric keypad.
3 Type the amount you want to add to the current time value, then press Enter.
4 Press Enter again to apply the change.
Selecting Across Multiple Tracks
To perform edits across multiple tracks or all tracks, you must first select the tracks. Do this by including other tracks in the selection, or by selecting in a Timebase ruler (for all tracks).
To make a selection in multiple tracks:
â–
With the Selector tool, click and drag vertically to include adjacent tracks in a selection
(drag horizontally to define the time range).
To extend a selection to another track:
1 Using the Selector or Time Grabber tool, make a selection in the first track or tracks.
2 Shift-click in additional tracks with the Selector tool. An identical range is selected for each additional track.
To shorten or lengthen the selection across each of the tracks, press Shift while dragging to change the range of the selection.
404 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To select across all tracks, do one of the following:
â–
Enable the All Edit Group and make a selection in any track.
– or –
â–
Drag with the Selector tool in any Timebase ruler (make sure the Timeline and Edit Selections are linked).
These selections include all tracks in the Edit window, but do not include the Conductor tracks (for Tempo, Meter, and Markers).
To select across all tracks, including the
Conductor tracks (for Tempo, Meter, and
Markers):
â–
Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac) with the Selector tool in any Timebase ruler.
Moving and Extending Selections
Between Tracks
With Commands Keyboard Focus enabled, Edit selections can be moved or extended to adjacent tracks.
To move a selection to an adjacent track:
1
Enable Commands Keyboard Focus (see “Keyboard Focus” on page 16).
Commands Keyboard Focus button enabled
2 With the Selector or Time Grabber tool, make a selection.
3 Do one of the following:
• Press P on your computer keyboard to move the selection to the previous track.
– or –
• Press semicolon (;) to move the selection to the next track.
In either instance, the original Edit selection becomes deselected.
With Commands Keyboard Focus disabled, press Start+P (Windows) or Control+P
(Mac) to move the selection to the previous track, or Start+Semicolon (;) (Windows) or
Control+Semicolon (;) (Mac) to move the selection to the next track.
To extend a selection to an adjacent track:
1
Enable Commands Keyboard Focus (see “Keyboard Focus” on page 16).
2 With the Selector or Time Grabber tool, make a selection.
3 Do one of the following:
• Press Shift+P to extend the selection to the previous track.
– or –
• Press Shift+Semicolon (;) to extend the selection to the next track.
In either instance, the original Edit selection remains selected.
With Commands Keyboard Focus disabled, press Start+Shift+P (Windows) or Control+Shift+P (Mac) to extend the selection to the previous track, or Start+Shift+Semicolon (;) (Windows) or Control+Shift+Semicolon (;) (Mac) to extend the selection to the next track.
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 405
To remove the bottom track from a selection:
â–
Press Alt+Start+Semicolon (;) (Windows) or
Option+Control+Semicolon (;) (Mac) to remove the bottom track.
Other Useful Selection Techniques
Following are some additional selection techniques.
To position the edit cursor precisely at a region start, end, or sync point:
1 Make sure the Tab to Transients button is not
enabled. (See “Tabbing to Transients” on page 407.)
2 Click with the Selector tool in the track.
3 Do one of the following:
• Press Tab to move the cursor to the next region or region group start, end, or sync point.
– or –
• Press Control+Tab (Windows) or Option+Tab (Mac) to move the cursor to the previous region or region group start, end, or sync point.
To make a selection with the Scrubber:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Operation tab.
2 Select the option for “Edit Insertion Follows
Scrub/Shuttle,” then click OK.
3 Scrub with the Scrubber to find an appropriate start point for the selection, then release.
4 While pressing Shift, scrub to an appropriate end point for the selection, then release. The range between the initial and final scrub becomes selected.
To move a selection to an adjacent region on the same track:
1 Select a region with the Time Grabber.
2 Do one of the following:
• Press Start+Tab (Windows) or Control+Tab
(Mac) to move the selection to the next region.
– or –
• Press Control+Start+Tab (Windows) or Option+Control+Tab (Mac) to move the selection to the previous region.
In either instance, the original region becomes deselected.
To slide an Edit selection in the Main Timebase ruler:
1 With the Selector or Time Grabber tool, make a selection.
2 While pressing Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac), move the cursor over either of the Timeline Selection Markers in the ruler (the Time
Grabber appears).
Sliding an Edit selection in the Main Timebase ruler
3 Drag left or right to move the Edit selection back or forward in time while preserving its length.
If Link Timeline and Edit Selection is disabled
(Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection),
Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac) the
Edit Markers instead.
406 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Right-Click Commands and Selection
Preservation
You can use Right-click commands with key combinations to perform operations on objects while maintaining selections in the Edit and
Mix windows. For example, you can maintain selections in the following areas while carrying out certain commands:
• Region selections in the Timeline
• Region name selections in the Region List
• Track selections
To apply a command to an object while keeping the current selection:
â– Control-Right-click (Windows) or Command-
Right-click (Mac) the object and choose a command from the pop-up menu.
Tabbing to Transients
With the Tab to Transients button enabled, you can automatically navigate to transients in audio waveforms, placing the cursor just before the detected transient peak. This lets you define selections and play ranges, as well as start and end points for new regions, without having to zoom in on the waveform.
To set the start and end points of a selection with
Tab to Transients:
1 In the upper left of the Edit window, click the
Tab to Transients button so it becomes selected.
2 If you will be setting the play range with this selection, enable Options > Link Timeline and
Edit Selection.
3 Click in the audio track just before the beginning of the material you want to select.
4 Press Tab repeatedly until the cursor locates to the transient where you want to start the selection.
If necessary, you can move to the previous transient by pressing Control+Tab (Windows) or
Option+Tab (Mac).
5 Press Shift+Tab until the cursor locates to the end of the material you want to select.
To move the selection end point to the previous transient, press Control+Shift+Tab (Windows) or Option+Shift+Tab (Mac).
Once selected, the material can be looped for recording or playback, or it can be turned into a new region with the Separate or Capture command.
Peak transients are usually visible in the waveform. However, some low-frequency transients may not appear as visible peaks in the waveform.
Tab to Transients button enabled
When Tab to Transients is enabled, the Tabbing function also locates the cursor to region start and end points, but not to sync points.
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 407
Playing Selections
Once an Edit selection is made, you can audition it by clicking Play in the Transport window.
If enabled, the pre- and post-roll amounts play as well.
To play a selection:
1 Enable Link Timeline and Edit Selection (Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection).
2 With the Selector or Time Grabber tool, make a track selection.
3 If you want to use pre-roll or post-roll, enable and set the pre-roll and post-roll amounts. For
details, see “Setting Pre- and Post-Roll” on page 291.
4 Click Play in the Transport window, or press the Spacebar.
All tracks play for the range of the selection, including pre-roll and post-roll if enabled.
To play an Edit selection with Link Timeline and
Edit Selection disabled, do one of the following:
â– Choose Edit > Selection > Play Edit.
To play a Timeline selection with Link Timeline and
Edit Selection disabled:
â–
Choose Edit > Selection > Play Timeline.
Auditioning Pre-Roll and Post-Roll
You can audition and play just the pre-roll or post-roll material for a selection.
To play from the pre-roll point to the start of a selection, or to the current Cursor location:
â– Press Alt+Left Arrow (Windows) or Option+Left Arrow (Mac).
To play to the post-roll point from the end of a selection, or from the current Cursor location:
â– Press Control+Right Arrow (Windows) or
Command+Right Arrow (Mac).
Auditioning Start and End Points for
Selections
There may be times when you want to audition the start or end of an audio selection without hearing the entire selection. This allows you to check, for instance, whether the beginning or end of a selection includes any unwanted clicks or pops.
plays start
(for post amount) plays end
(for pre amount) plays pre-roll + start plays end + post-roll
Playback ranges for auditioning start/end points
To audition a selection start point:
â– Press Control+Left Arrow (Windows) or Command+Left Arrow (Mac).
When auditioning the beginning of a selection, the selection plays from the start point for a duration equal to the post-roll amount.
To audition a selection start point with pre-roll:
â– Press Control+Alt+Left Arrow (Windows) or
Command+Option+Left Arrow (Mac).
408 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To audition a selection end point:
â–
Press Alt+Right Arrow (Windows) or Option+Right Arrow (Mac).
When auditioning the end of a selection, playback begins before the end point by the pre-roll amount.
To audition a selection end point with post-roll:
â– Press Control+Alt+Right Arrow (Windows) or
Command+Option+Right Arrow (Mac).
3 Enable Loop Playback by doing one of the following:
• Select Options > Loop Playback.
• Right-click the Play button in the Transport window and select Loop from the pop-up menu.
• Start-click (Windows) or Control-click
(Mac) the Play button in the Transport window.
• Press Control+Shift+L (Windows) or Command+Shift+L (Mac).
• With the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Transport, press 4 on the numeric keypad.
When enabled, a loop symbol appears in the
Play button in the Transport window.
Looping Playback
When Loop Playback is enabled, the selected track range repeats on playback. If there is no selection, playback occurs normally from the current Cursor location.
A selection must be at least 500 ms in length for it to loop on playback.
Looping playback is a useful way to check the rhythmic continuity of a selection when working with musical material. If you’re working with one-bar selections, you can loop playback to see if the material loops cleanly. If it seems to skip, you should then adjust the length of the selection until it works “musically” within the context of the playlist and the other tracks.
To loop playback of a selection:
1 Enable Link Timeline and Edit Selection (Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection).
2 With the Selector tool, select the track range you want to loop.
Loop Playback enabled
4 Click Play in the Transport window.
Playback begins from the pre-roll point (if enabled) and continues to the selection’s end point, where it loops back to the selection’s start point.
5 Click Stop in the Transport window to stop playback.
Loop Playback and Audio Recording
When Loop Playback is enabled, Pro Tools will not loop when attempting to record audio tracks with QuickPunch, Destructive Record, or
Nondestructive Record mode.
To loop record audio tracks in Pro Tools, you
must enable Loop Record mode (see “Loop Recording Audio” on page 284).
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 409
Timeline Selections
With the Link Timeline and Edit Selection option disabled, selections can be made in the
Timeline that are distinct and separate from Edit selections.
With the Timeline and Edit selections linked, any Edit selections that are made are mirrored in the Timeline, and any Timeline selection is mirrored as an Edit selection across all tracks.
Whether the Timeline and Edit selections are linked or not, the range indicated by the Timeline Selection Markers always determines the range for playback and recording (except when
in Dynamic Transport mode, see “Dynamic
With Pro Tools HD, when the Scrolling option is set to Center Playhead, it determines where
playback begins (see “Playing Timeline and Edit
Selections with the Playhead” on page 412).
To make a Timeline selection with the Selector tool:
1 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Click and drag with the Selector tool in any
Timebase ruler.
Making a Timeline selection with the Selector tool
The Timeline selection is indicated in the Main
Timebase ruler by the blue Timeline Selection
Markers (or if a track is record-enabled, the
Timeline Selection Markers are red). The start, end, and length for the Timeline selection is displayed in the corresponding fields in the Transport window.
To select all tracks, including Conductor tracks, press Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac) while clicking and dragging in a
Timebase ruler with the Selector tool.
To set the Timeline selection by dragging the
Timeline Selection Markers:
1 If you want to constrain movement to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 With the Time Grabber, drag the first Timeline
Selection Marker (down arrow) to set the start point.
3 Drag the other Timeline Selection Marker (up arrow) to set the end point.
Dragging a Timeline Selection Marker
To set the Timeline selection by typing into the
Transport window:
1 If necessary, resize the Transport window to
Expanded View so the start and end times are displayed (View > Transport > Expanded).
2 Do one of the following:
• In the Transport window, click in the start field.
– or –
• Press Alt+Forward Slash (/) (Windows) or
Option+Forward Slash (/) (Mac) on the numeric keypad to select the start field in the
Transport window.
410 Pro Tools Reference Guide
3 Type in the new start location and press Forward Slash (/) to enter the value and automatically move to the end field.
4 Type in the new end location and press Enter to accept the value.
Shortcuts for entering start and end values
Sliding a Timeline Selection
Like Edit selections, Timeline selections can be slid in the Main Timebase ruler.
To move a Timeline selection in the Main
Timebase ruler:
1 While pressing Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac), move the cursor over either of the Timeline Selection Markers (the Time Grabber appears).
2 Drag left or right to move the Timeline selection back or forward in time, while preserving its length.
Timeline Selections to/from Edit
Selections
When the Timeline and Edit selections are unlinked, you can copy selections between them.
To copy the current Edit selection to the Timeline:
â– Choose Edit > Selection > Change Edit to
Match Timeline.
To copy the current Timeline selection to an Edit selection:
â– Choose Edit > Selection > Change Timeline to
Match Edit.
TCE (Time Compression and
Expansion) Edit To Timeline
Selection
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
When the Edit and Timeline selections are unlinked, you can compress or expand an audio selection to fit the Timeline selection. This feature works by using a Time Compression/Expansion plug-in to expand or compress the selected audio material.
For information on TCE processing prefer-
ences, see “Processing Preferences” on page 76.
To fit an Edit selection to the Timeline:
1 Deselect Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selections.
2 With the Selector tool, select the audio material to be compressed or expanded.
3 In any Timebase ruler, select the time range where you want to fit the audio material.
4 Choose Edit > TCE Edit to Timeline Selection.
The Edit selection is compressed or expanded to the length of the Timeline selection.
TCE Edit to Timeline Selection on
Multiple Tracks and Channels
The TCE Edit to Timeline command can be used on multichannel selections, and selections across multiple tracks. All regions are compressed or expanded equally by the same percentage value, based on Edit selection range.
This ensures that the rhythmic relationship between the different channels or tracks is retained.
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 411
Fitting an Audio Region to an Edit
Selection
Regions can be dragged from the Region List to fit within an Edit selection. The dragged region is compressed or expanded to fit within the selection. This feature uses the Time Compression/Expansion plug-in to expand or compress the audio region.
To fit an audio region to an Edit selection:
1 With the Selector tool, select a time range in an audio track.
2 Control-Alt-drag (Windows) or Command-
Option-drag (Mac) the region from the Region
List to the track with the selection. The start of the region is positioned at the selection start, and the region is compressed or expanded to match the length of the selection.
Fit to Selection on Multiple Tracks and
Channels
The Fit to Selection command supports dragging multiple regions from the Region List to multiple tracks, or multichannel tracks.
However, all dragged regions are compressed or expanded equally by the same percentage value, based on length of the region last clicked before dragging.
Playing Timeline and Edit
Selections with the Playhead
(Pro Tools HD Only)
When the Scrolling option is set to Center Playhead, selections in the Timeline do not determine when playback begins. The Playhead, itself, denotes where playback begins when clicking Play in the Transport.
The Timeline and Edit selections, however, can still be played when the Playhead is enabled.
To play an Edit selection with the Playhead enabled:
1 Deselect Options > Linked Timeline and Edit
Selections.
2 Select Options > Scrolling > Center Playhead.
3 With the Selector or Time Grabber tool, make a track selection.
4 Choose Edit > Selection > Play Edit.
The Playhead jumps to the Edit selection and plays it from beginning to end, and then stops.
To play a Timeline selection with the Playhead enabled:
1 Deselect Options > Linked Timeline and Edit
Selections.
2 Select Options > Scrolling > Center Playhead.
3 Drag with the Selector tool in any Timebase ruler to set the play range.
4 Choose Edit > Selection > Play Timeline.
The Playhead jumps to the Timeline selection and plays it from beginning to end, and then stops.
412 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Moving the Playhead
When the Scrolling option is set to Center Playhead, the Playhead can be moved forward or back to the next region boundary in the selected track.
To move the Playhead through a track’s region boundaries:
1 Make sure the Tab to Transients button is not
enabled (see “Tabbing to Transients” on page 407).
2 Click in the track with the Selector tool.
3 Do one of the following:
• Press Tab to move the Playhead forward to the next region boundary.
– or –
• Press Control+Tab (Windows) or Option+Tab (Mac) to move the Playhead back to the previous region boundary.
To enable or disable Dynamic Transport mode:
â–
Select or deselect Options > Dynamic Transport.
Press Control+Start+P (Windows) or Command+Control+P (Mac) to toggle Dynamic
Transport mode on or off.
Enabling Dynamic Transport mode automatically disables Link Timeline and Edit
Selection, and automatically enables Loop
Playback mode.
Play Start Marker strip
Play Start Marker Timeline selection
Dynamic Transport Mode
Dynamic Transport mode lets you decouple the playback location from the Timeline selection.
This means that you can start playback from anywhere on the Timeline without losing your
Timeline or Edit selections. For example, you can use Dynamic Transport mode in conjunction with Loop Playback mode to quickly audition loop transitions.
When Dynamic Transport mode is enabled, the
Main Timebase ruler expands to double-height and reveals the new Play Start Marker. The Play
Start Marker determines where playback starts when the Transport is engaged. You can position the Play Start Marker independently of the
Timeline Selection. You can reposition the Play
Start Marker during playback and playback continues from the new location.
Dynamic Transport mode, Play Start Marker shown in expanded Main Timebase ruler
To reposition the Play Start Marker, do one of the following:
â– With any Edit tool selected, click in the Play
Start Marker strip in the Main Timebase ruler.
â– With any Edit tool selected, click and drag the
Play Start Marker to a new location.
â– Click Fast Forward or Rewind in the Transport to relocate the Play Start Marker forward or backward by the standard Fast Forward and Rewind increment amount.
Double-click anywhere in the Play Start
Marker strip in the Main Timebase ruler to move the Play Start Marker to that location and start playback.
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 413
To change the Timeline Selection Start or End
Markers:
1 Make a Timeline selection with the Selector tool by clicking and dragging in the Main Timebase ruler. If Link Timeline and Edit Selection is enabled (Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection), you can make an Edit selection with the Selector or any of the Grabber tools.
2 With any Edit tool selected, click and drag either the Timeline Selection Start or End Markers left or right, extending or constricting the Timeline selection.
Changes to the Timeline selection during playback temporarily interrupts playback.
To minimize this interruption, reduce the
DAE Playback Buffer size in the Playback
Engine dialog.
To move the Timeline selection:
â– With any Edit tool selected, click and drag the selection on the Main Timeline ruler to another location.
When the Link Timeline and Edit Selection option is disabled, press Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) and drag the
Timeline selection to snap the Edit selection to the Timeline selection and move both in tandem.
Play Start Marker Follows Timeline
Selection
When enabled, the Play Start Marker snaps to the Timeline Selection Start Marker when you move the Timeline Selection, draw a new Timeline Selection, or adjust the Timeline Selection
Start. When disabled, the Play Start Marker doesn’t move with the Timeline selection.
To have the Play Start Marker always snap to the
Timeline Selection Start Marker:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences.
2 Click the Operation tab.
3 Select Play Start Marker Follows Timeline Selection.
4 Click OK.
Dynamic Transport mode, moving the Edit selection
414 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Timeline Insertion/Play Start Marker
Follows Playback
When enabled, the Play Start Marker moves to the point in the Timeline when playback stops.
When disabled, the Play Start Marker does not follow playback.
When not in Dynamic Transport mode, the
Timeline Insertion follows playback.
To have the Timeline Insertion and the Play Start
Marker follow playback:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences.
2 Click the Operation tab.
3 Select Timeline Insertion/Play Start Marker
Follows Playback.
4 Click OK.
To audition a loop transition:
1 Enable Dynamic Transport mode (Options >
Dynamic Transport).
2 Ensure that Loop Playback mode is enabled
(Options > Loop Playback).
3 Make a Timeline selection to loop. If Link
Timeline and Edit Selection is enabled (Options
> Link Timeline and Edit Selection), you can make an Edit selection instead.
4 Reposition the Play Start Marker before the
Timeline Selection End Marker.
Using Dynamic Transport Mode with Loop Playback
Use Dynamic Transport mode in conjunction with Loop Playback to specify the loop start and end points with the Timeline selection while using the Play Start Marker to specify where playback begins. This is especially useful for auditioning loop transitions.
Enabling Dynamic Transport mode automatically enables Loop Playback mode.
Dynamic Transport mode, auditioning the loop transition
5 Start playback.
Playback starts before the loop end point and continues across the loop point through the loop start. You can reposition the Timeline Selection Start and End Markers by clicking and dragging them left or right, even during playback.
Chapter 19: Playing and Selecting Track Material 415
Using Separate Play and Stop Keys
When enabled, the Use Separate Play and Stop
Keys option lets you start playback with the Enter key and stop playback with the 0 key on the numeric keypad. This is useful for quickly starting and stopping playback when auditioning loop transitions.
To use separate play and stop keys on the numeric keypad:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences.
2 Click the Operation tab.
3 Select Transport for the Numeric Keypad.
4 Select Use Separate Play and Stop Keys.
When this option is enabled, it overrides using the Enter key to add Memory Location markers. Press Period (.) and then Enter on the numeric keypad to add a Memory Location marker. The new marker is created when you press Enter.
5 Click OK.
The Enter key starts playback. The Zero key stops playback. Pressing Zero twice locates the
Play Start Marker to the Timeline Selection start.
Keyboard Shortcuts for Relocating the
Play Start Marker
In Dynamic Transport mode, you can use keyboard shortcuts to quickly relocate the Play Start
Marker either during playback or when the
Transport is stopped.
To move the Play Start Marker to the Timeline
Selection Start:
â– Press Period (.) on the numeric keypad and then the Left Arrow.
To move the Play Start Marker to the Timeline
Selection End:
â– Press Period (.) on the numeric keypad and then the Right Arrow.
To move the Play Start Marker to the Edit
Selection Start:
â–
Press Period (.) on the numeric keypad and then the Down Arrow.
To move the Play Start Marker to location of the
Playhead:
â– Press Period (.) on the numeric keypad and then the Up Arrow.
To nudge the Play Start Marker backward
(rewind):
â– Press 1 on the numeric keypad.
To nudge the Play Start Marker forward (fast forward):
â– Press 2 on the numeric keypad.
To move the Play Start to a specific bar:
â– With Bars:Beats selected as the Main Timebase ruler, do the following on the numeric keypad:
• Press Asterisk (*).
• Type the bar number.
• Press Enter.
Recording in Dynamic Transport
Mode
Recording in Dynamic Transport mode lets you start playback independently of the Timeline selection. Recording punches in and out based on the Timeline selection.
416 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and
Selections
Regions are the basic building blocks for arranging audio and MIDI in Pro Tools. Understanding how regions are created, edited, and arranged is essential to taking full advantage of the editing capabilities of Pro Tools.
This chapter covers basic editing functions as they apply to regions and region groups, and selections, which for the most part apply to both
MIDI and audio data.
For editing procedures more specific to
MIDI, see Chapter 25, “MIDI Editing.”
Capture Region Command
The Capture Region command defines a selection as a new region and adds it to the Region
List. From there, the new region can be dragged to any existing tracks.
To capture a new region:
1 With the Selector tool, click and drag within an existing region to select the material for the new region.
For editing procedures specific to video, see
Creating New Regions
Pro Tools provides several commands for creating regions and region groups, each of them having a slightly different effect on the selection. When you create a new region or region group, it appears in the Region List and in the track’s playlist. For details on how these new re-
gions are automatically named, see “Auto-Naming Options” on page 489.
When creating a new region from an existing region, the original region remains in the Region
List.
Selecting a region portion
2 Choose Region > Capture.
3 Enter a name for the new region and click OK.
The new region appears in the Region List. The original region remains intact and unchanged.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 417
Separate Region Commands
The Separate Region commands define a selection within an existing region, or a partially selected region, as a new region and separate it from surrounding material.
New regions appear in the tracks in which they are created, separate from the data surrounding them. They also appear in the Region List.
There are three different Separate Region commands:
At Selection (or Edit Cursor) Creates new region boundaries at the selection start and end points.
If there is no selection and the edit cursor is placed within the region, the region is split into two new regions at the insertion point.
On Grid Creates new regions according to the current grid resolution.
At Transients Automatically creates region boundaries on detected transients within a selection. This uses the same algorithm for transient detection as the Tab To Transients feature.
To separate one or more regions at the selection
(or at the edit cursor):
1 Do one of the following:
• With the Selector tool, make an Edit selection.
• With the Selector tool, click at the point where you want to separate the region.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Separate Region > At Selection.
• Press Control+E (Windows) or Command+E (Mac).
• With an Edit selection, Right-click near the cursor position or selection and choose
Separate from the pop-up menu.
3 If the Editing preference for Auto-Name Separated Regions is disabled, enter a name for the new region when prompted, then click OK.
To separate regions according to the current grid resolution:
1 Make an Edit selection.
2 Choose Edit > Separate Region > On Grid.
To separate regions at transients:
1 Make an Edit selection.
2 Choose Edit > Separate Region > At Transients.
Auto-Name Separated Regions Option
With the Auto-Name Separated Regions option in the Editing Preferences page selected,
Pro Tools automatically names separated regions for you. The name is a numbered variation of the original region’s name.
By separating a region, additional regions are auto-created from data on either side of the separation, which have new numbers assigned to their names. The original region remains intact and unchanged on the Region List.
If the Separate Region Operates On All Related Takes option (Editing Preferences page) is selected and you are editing a region that is one of a number of related takes with the same User Time Stamp (for example, as created with loop recording), the Separate Region command affects each take.
For more information see, “Editing Preferences for Takes” on page 287.
The Region List can quickly fill up with auto-created regions. For easier region management, click the Region List pop-up menu, deselect Show > Auto-Created to hide all auto-created regions in the Region List.
418 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Separating Multiple Tracks
Figure 21 illustrates a separation across three
mono audio tracks and one stereo track. For some tracks, the selection resides within a region, while others reside at the start or end of a region.
Separation Grabber Tool
You can use the Separation Grabber tool to automatically separate an Edit selection and move it to another location or another track.
To separate a selection with the Separation
Grabber tool:
1 With the Selector tool, make an Edit selection.
The selection can reside within a single region, across adjacent regions within the same track, or across multiple tracks.
2 From the Grabber tools pop-up menu, choose the Separation Grabber tool.
Separation Grabber tool
3 Click and drag the selection to the new location, or to another track.
Figure 21. Separating across multiple tracks
Once separated, this material can be moved or copied to another location.
before after
Dragging later in track with Separation Grabber tool
A new region (or regions) containing the previous selection is created, separate from the original selection. New regions are also created from the material outside the original selection.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 419
To separate a selection without affecting the original regions:
1 With the Selector tool, make an Edit selection.
The selection can reside within a single region, across adjacent regions within the same track, or across multiple tracks.
2 From the Grabber tools pop-up menu, choose the Separation Grabber tool.
3 While pressing Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac), click and drag the selection to the new location, or to another track.
Dragging to another track with the Separation Grabber tool
New regions containing the previous selection are created and placed at the new location. The original selection and regions remain intact.
To toggle the display of overlap and underlap region boundaries:
â– Choose View > Region > Overlap.
Changing Region Overlap/Underlap
After tempo changes with tick-based audio, and other edits, regions may overlap in undesired ways. To correct this, a region can be brought to the front, or sent behind neighboring regions as needed.
To change the region overlap or underlap:
1 In the Edit window, choose the region or regions you want to re-order.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Region > Bring to Front to make the region overlap the neighboring regions.
– or –
• Choose Region > Send to Back to make the region underlap the neighboring regions.
If multiple overlapping regions are selected,
Pro Tools will apply the command to each region as that region relates to the neighboring region on the right.
Region Overlap and Underlap
When a tick-based audio track has multiple regions, an increase in tempo can cause neighboring regions to overlap. Audio regions can be set to display a small “dog-ear” corner to indicate overlapping region boundaries.
Overlap region
Underlap region
Region overlap and underlap
420 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Trimming Regions
In addition to the Trim tools, Pro Tools provides several options for editing region and region group boundaries.
For information on using the Trim tools, see
“Using the Trim Tools” on page 374.
Trim Region to Selection
Command
The Trim Region to Selection command removes data before and after a region or MIDI note selection, leaving only the selection. This command lets you quickly remove all data in a region (and in some instances the entire track) except for the current selection.
To trim unwanted data from a region or note:
1 With the Selector tool, select a portion of a region or note (or a range of notes).
2 Choose Edit > Trim Region > To Selection to remove material outside of the selection.
To trim from an end point to insertion:
1 With the Selector tool, click inside the region or note where you want the new end point.
2 Choose Edit > Trim Region > End To Insertion.
The region’s end point is automatically trimmed to the insertion point.
Trim Region to Insertion
Commands
You can trim a region or MIDI note by automatically removing the material between the Edit insertion point and the start or end point of the region.
To trim from a start point to insertion:
1 With the Selector tool, click inside the region or note where you want the new start point to be.
2 Choose Edit > Trim Region > Start To Insertion. The region’s start point is automatically trimmed to the insertion point.
Region end trimmed to insertion
Trim to Fill Selection Commands
The Trim to Fill Selection commands let you automatically reveal underlying material in the gaps between regions, as follow:
To trim from a start point to fill gaps:
1 With the Selector tool, select across at least one gap between regions.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 421
2 Choose Edit > Trim Region > Start to Fill Selection.
The start point of the region behind the gap is automatically trimmed (expanded) to the previous region, or as far as possible if there is not enough underlying material to cover the gap.
To trim from a region’s start and end points to fill gaps:
1 With the Selector tool, select across at least one gap between regions.
2 Choose Edit > Trim Region > To Fill Selection.
The start point of the region behind the gap is automatically trimmed (expanded) to the previous region, or as far as possible if there is not enough underlying material to cover the gap; and the end point of the region in front of the gap is automatically trimmed (expanded) to the next region, or as far as possible if there is not enough underlying material to cover the gap.
Region start trimmed to fill gap
To trim from an end point to fill gaps:
1 With the Selector tool, select across at least one gap between regions.
2 Choose Edit > Trim Region > End To Fill Selection.
The end point of the region in front of the gap is automatically trimmed (expanded) to the next region, or as far as possible if there is not enough underlying material to cover the gap.
Trimming with Nudge
You can trim the start and end points of a region by nudging them.
To trim a region’s start or end point by the Nudge value:
1
Configure the Nudge value (see “Defining the
2 With the Time Grabber tool, select the region you want to trim.
3 Do one of the following:
• While pressing Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac), press Plus (+) or Minus (–) on the numeric keypad to trim the region’s start point by the Nudge value.
– or –
• While pressing Control (Windows) or
Command (Mac), press Plus (+) or Minus
(–) on the numeric keypad to trim the region’s end point by the Nudge value.
Region end trimmed to fill gap
422 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Healing Separated Regions
The Heal Separation command returns separated regions to their original state—provided the regions are still next to each other and their relative start/end points haven’t changed since the separation.
If you have trimmed or otherwise changed the start or end points of the two regions, or moved them further away from each other, you will not be able to repair them with the Heal Separation command. It is not possible to heal two regions created from different audio files.
To heal a separation between two regions:
1 With the Selector tool, make a selection that includes part of the first region, the entire separation between the regions, and part of the second region.
2 Choose Edit > Heal Separation.
If the regions do not heal with Heal Separation, do one of the following to return the separated regions to a single region:
â– Delete one of the two separated regions (verify that Slip mode is enabled so the gap does not close) and use the Trim tool to expand the re-
maining region to its original length (see “Using the Trim Tools” on page 374).
– or –
â– Delete both of the separated regions and drag the original region from the Region List to the
original location (see “Placing Regions in
Placing Regions in Tracks
Once you have created a region, it appears in the
Region List. From the Region List you can drag it to a track to add to an existing arrangement of regions, or you can create a new track and start adding regions from scratch. The exact placement of regions in a track depends on whether the Edit mode is set to Shuffle, Slip, Spot, or Grid
(see “Edit Modes” on page 363).
For information on locating regions in the
Region List by typing the first few letters of
their name, see “Keyboard Selection of Regions” on page 361.
To place a region in a track:
1 In the Region List, select the region or regions you want to place.
2 Drag the selected regions from the Region List to a location in a track.
If dragging multiple regions, the regions are placed on adjacent tracks left to right or on multiple tracks from top to bottom depending on the selected Region List Timeline Drop Order
(see “Timeline Drop Order” on page 424). If dragging a stereo region, it must be placed in a stereo track or in two mono tracks.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 423
Regions are placed according to the current Edit mode:
• In Shuffle mode, existing track regions are slid as necessary to make room for the new region.
• In Spot mode, you are prompted by the Spot dialog to enter a location for the dragged re-
gion (see “Spotting Regions” on page 431).
• In Grid mode, the dragged region snaps to the nearest Grid boundary.
You can temporarily disable Grid mode while dragging a region by holding down the
Control key (Windows) or Command key
(Mac) after clicking with the mouse.
• In Slip mode, the regions are placed exactly where they are dropped in the destination track.
Timeline Drop Order
The Timeline Drop Order command in the Region List pop-up menu sets whether tracks dragged from the Region List are dropped sequentially in a single track or spread across multiple tracks, as follows:
Top to Bottom When enabled, regions spread across multiple destination (drop) tracks or on new tracks (when dragging to the area below the last track or to the Track List).
Left to Right When enabled, regions are placed sequentially in a single destination (drop) track or on a new track (when dragging to the area below the last track or on to the Track List).
To set the Region List Drop Order:
â– Choose Region List > Timeline Drop Order, and then Top to Bottom or Left to Right.
To drag and drop multiple items from the Region
List to multiple new tracks:
1 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose
Timeline Drop Order > Top to Bottom.
2 Search and sort the Region List if desired to configure the order in which items will be placed.
3 Select multiple items in the Region List and do one of the following:
• To create new tracks and place items to a specific location, drop items at the desired location along the area below the last track.
• To create new tracks and have items placed at the start of the session, drop the items on the Track List.
New tracks after dropping multiple Region List items, with Timeline Drop Order set to Top to Bottom mode
To place multiple items across multiple existing tracks:
1 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose
Timeline Drop Order > Top to Bottom.
2 Select multiple items in the Region List and drop them in the playlist of a compatible track at the desired location. When the cursor is over a compatible destination, the region outlines appear at the location.
424 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To drag and drop multiple items from the Region
List to a single track:
1 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose
Timeline Drop Order > Left to Right.
2 Search and sort the Region List if desired to configure the order in which items will be placed.
3 Select multiple items in the Region List and do one of the following:
• To create a new track and spot the first item to a specific location, drop at the desired location in the area below the last track shown in the Edit window.
• To create a new track and have the first item placed at the start of the session, drop the items on the Track List.
• To place items in an existing track, drop the items in the Edit playlist for the desired track.
New tracks created by dropping multiple Region List items with Timeline Drop Order set to Left to Right mode
If the selected items include mixed types of regions (such as audio and MIDI, or region groups and MIDI) the appropriate track types will be created and each corresponding item will be placed in them. Similarly, if the selected items include multiple formats (mono, stereo, or other) new tracks of each format will be created and those regions placed in them.
Placing Regions at the Edit
Insertion Point
You can drag a region from the same track, from another track, or from the Region List, and align its start, end, or sync point to the Edit insertion point. This technique is useful in post production since it lets you set an Edit selection point during playback or while stopped and then quickly place sound effects at the edit insertion point.
With Pro Tools HD, when the Scrolling option is set to Center Playhead, regions snap to the playhead, instead of the Edit insertion point.
To place the start of a region at the Edit insertion point:
1 With the Selector tool, click in the track at the time location where you want to place the start of the region.
2 Do one of the following:
• While pressing the Start key (Windows) or
Control (Mac), drag the region from the Region List, or from another track, to the destination track.
– or –
• If the region is already in the track, Startclick (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the region with the Time Grabber tool.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 425
To place the end of a region at the Edit inser tion point:
1 With the Selector tool, click in the track at the time location where you want to place the end of the region.
2 Do one of the following:
• While pressing Control+Start (Windows) or Command+Control (Mac), drag the region from the Region List, or from another track, to the destination track.
– or –
• If the region is already in the track, Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the region with the
Time Grabber tool.
To place the sync point of a region at the Edit insertion point:
1 With the Selector tool, click in the track at the time location where you want to place the sync point of the region.
2 Do one of the following:
• While pressing Start+Shift (Windows) or
Control+Shift (Mac), drag the region from the Region List, or from another track, to the destination track.
– or –
• If the region is already in the track, Shift-
Start-click (Windows) or Shift-Controlclick (Mac) the region with the Time Grabber tool.
Aligning to Region Start Points
The start, end, and sync point of one region can be aligned to the start of a different region on another track.
With Pro Tools HD, when the Scrolling option is set to Center Playhead, region start, end, and sync points align to the playhead.
To align the start points of regions on different tracks:
1 With the Time Grabber tool, select the region you want to align to by clicking it.
2 If the Scrolling option is set to Center Playhead (Pro Tools HD only), move the playhead to the start of the selected region. For details, see
“Moving the Playhead” on page 413.
3 Do one of the following:
• Start-drag (Windows) or Control-drag
(Mac) a region from the Region List to another track.
– or –
• If the region is already in the track, Startclick (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the region you want to move with the Time
Grabber tool.
The start point of the second region is aligned to the start of the first region.
To align the end point of a region to the start of another region (on a different track):
1 With the Time Grabber tool, select the region you want to align to by clicking it.
2 If the Scrolling option is set to Center Playhead (Pro Tools HD only), move the playhead to
the start of the selected region (see “Moving the
426 Pro Tools Reference Guide
3 Do one of the following:
• Control-Start-drag (Windows) or Command-Control-drag (Mac) a region from the Region List to another track.
– or –
• If the region is already in the track, Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the region you want to move with the Time Grabber tool.
The end point of the second region is aligned to the start of the first region.
To align the sync point of a region to the star t of another region (on a different track):
1 With the Time Grabber tool, select the region you want to align.
2 If the Scrolling option is set to Center Playhead (Pro Tools HD only), move the playhead to
the start of the selected region (see “Moving the
3 Do one of the following:
• Start-Shift-drag (Windows) or Control-
Shift-drag (Mac) a region from the Region
List to another track.
– or –
• If the region is already in the track, Start-
Shift-click (Windows) or Control-Shiftclick (Mac) the region you want to move with the Time Grabber tool.
The sync point of the second region is aligned to the start of the first region.
Sliding Regions
A region or group of selected regions (on the same track or on multiple tracks) can be slid with the Time Grabber tool to new locations or to other tracks. This feature is useful in post production applications where the timing of audio events such as sound effects and dialog need to be spotted to music, film, or video.
Sliding regions is affected by whether the current Edit mode is set to Shuffle, Slip, Spot, or
Grid (see “Edit Modes” on page 363).
You can slide a copy of a region to another location or track by pressing Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) while dragging.
To retain a region’s time location when dragging to another track, press the Start key
(Windows) or Control (Mac) while dragging.
Shuffling Regions
In Shuffle mode, you can move regions freely within a track or onto another track, but their movement is constrained by other regions. That is, if you place several regions in a track, their start and end points automatically snap to each other. You can then “shuffle” their order, but you cannot separate them from each other and you cannot make them overlap as in Slip mode.
In Shuffle mode, adding another region to the beginning of a track moves all subsequent regions to the right by the length of the region added.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 427
To shuffle regions:
1 Set the Edit mode to Shuffle by clicking its button in the upper left of the Edit window.
2 Drag a mono region from the Region List to an empty track. The region snaps to the beginning of the track.
3 Drag a second region from the Region List to the same track, somewhere in the middle. The start point for the second region snaps to the end of the first region.
4 With the Time Grabber tool, drag the second region to the beginning of the track.
Pro Tools “shuffles” the position of the two regions. The second region now occurs first, yet the two still cling together.
5 Experiment more with Shuffle mode by dragging additional regions to the track and rearranging them.
Locked regions (see “Locking Regions” on page 438), and all regions occurring after the
locked region, are not displaced when other neighboring regions are moved in Shuffle mode.
If there is not enough room to place or duplicate a region in front of a locked region, the insertion area is disabled.
If you place a region while in Slip mode and switch to Shuffle mode, Pro Tools preserves the relative timing and position of the slipped region, and any space between it and other regions.
With certain workflows, it is important to exclude Shuffle mode in order to ensure that regions stay time-aligned while editing.
Shuffle Lock prevents you from inadvertently entering Shuffle mode by disabling all key commands and control surface switches for Shuffle mode. For more information, see
428 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Shuffling Multiple Tracks and
Multichannel Regions
Selections across multiple tracks or on multichannel tracks can be shuffled. Unlike shuffling regions on a single track, any partially selected regions are cut and moved along with the dragged region. This lets you retain only the material that corresponds to the dragged region.
Shuffling this region cuts this channel
Shuffling multichannel regions
Moving Regions with the Grabber
Tools
Use the Grabber tools to move one or more regions, or the Edit selection, to another location.
The Grabber tools cut the selection and paste it to the new location.
Hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) when clicking and dragging the selection with a Grabber tool to copy the selection rather than cut it.
To move one or more regions, or the Edit selection, with one of the Grabber tools:
1 Make a selection.
2 With of the Grabber tools (Time, Separation, or Object), click and drag the selection to the new location.
Time Grabber and Object Grabber
If you are moving audio data, the Time Grabber and Object Grabber tools overlay only the audio data on the destination track.
Moving a selection with the Time Grabber
Separation Grabber
The Separation Grabber replaces the entire selected range on the destination track timeline.
Snapping to the Preceding or Next
Region on a Track
A region—or an Edit selection including one or more regions on the same track or on multiple tracks)—can snap to the end of the preceding region or to the beginning of the following region using the Snap To Next or Snap To Previous commands. This is useful for “butt splicing” adjacent regions on a track.
To snap to the preceding region on a track:
1 Do one of the following:
• With the Time Grabber, select a region.
– or –
• With the Selector, select an area in a track that contains whole regions. The regions do not need to be adjacent.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Snap To > Previous.
– or –
• Right-click the region or Edit selection and choose Snap to Previous in the pop-up menu.
The selected region snaps to the preceding region on the track so that the two regions are
“butt-spliced.”
Moving a selection with the Separation Grabber
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 429
To snap to the next region on a track:
1 Do one of the following:
• With the Time Grabber, select a region.
– or –
• With the Selector, select an area in a track that contains whole regions. The regions do not need to be adjacent.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Snap To > Next.
– or –
• Right-click the region or Edit selection and choose Snap to Next in the pop-up menu.
The selected region snaps to the following region on the track so that the two regions are
“butt-spliced.”
Slipping Regions
In Slip mode, regions can be moved with the
Time Grabber tool freely within a track, or onto other tracks. In this mode, it is possible to place a region so that there is space between it and other regions in a track. When the track is played back, this space is silent. It is also possible to move a region so that it overlaps or completely covers another region.
To slip regions:
1
Enable Slip mode (see “Edit Modes” on page 363).
2 Drag a region from the Region List to an empty track.
3 Drag a second region from the Region List to the same track, somewhere in the middle. The second region is placed wherever you release it.
It doesn’t snap to the first region as in Shuffle mode.
4 Drag the regions to different locations within the track to get a feel for moving them in Slip mode. Try placing the second region so that it slightly overlaps the first region. Play back the results.
Snapping a region to the next region in a track
You can also use the Snap To commands with an Edit selection that includes multiple regions on one or more tracks.
430 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Spotting Regions
Spot mode is useful for sessions in which you want to spot regions to precise locations based on any of the Time Scales. This is useful when performing post production tasks. In Spot mode you can spot a region by specifying a SMPTE frame (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with DV
Toolkit 2 only) or bar and beat location, by capturing an incoming time code address, or by using the region’s time stamps.
For even quicker spotting, if you are using
VITC, use the Auto-Spot Regions command to spot a region to the current SMPTE frame location with the Time Grabber tool. For
more information, see “Auto-Spotting Regions” on page 814.
To spot a region:
1 Set the Edit mode to Spot by clicking its button in the upper left of the Edit window.
2 Do one of the following:
• Drag a region from the Region List, or drag audio files or sessions from a DigiBase browser, to an existing track.
– or –
• Click a region already in a track with the
Time Grabber tool.
3 In the Spot dialog, select a time format from the Time Scale pop-up menu.
Each of the fields in the Spot dialog are displayed in the chosen Time Scale.
Spot dialog
4 With Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with DV
Toolkit 2, if the Time Scale is set to Time Code, select the Use Subframes option to display subframes in the fields for improved accuracy.
5 Do one of the following:
• Click in the field for Start, Sync Point, or
End and type in a new location. Changing one of these locate points automatically updates the other locate points.
• Click one of the up arrows next to Original
Time Stamp or User Time Stamp to enter the associated values into the currently selected field.
• If you are using an external SMPTE time code source, click the down arrow next to the Current Time Code display—or press
Equal (=) on the numeric keypad—to capture an incoming time code address.
6 Click OK. The region is moved to the new location specified for its start, end, or sync point.
If a region does not have a sync point defined, the Sync Point field in the Spot dialog functions the same as the Start field.
For more information on using SMPTE with
Pro Tools, see Chapter 35, “Working with
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 431
Right-Click Commands for Spotting Regions
You can use Right-click commands with a key combination to spot regions in a track.
In previous versions of Pro Tools, Rightclicking in a region with the Grabber tool would spot the region to a selection.
To spot a region to a selection:
1 Click or drag with the Selector tool to locate the cursor or make a selection in the track where you want to spot the region.
2 Control-Right-click (Windows) or Command-
Right-click (Mac) the region and choose any of the following from the pop-up menu:
• Move Region Start to Selection Start
• Move Region Sync to Selection Start
• Move Region End to Selection Start
Region Time Stamps
When a region is created, it is time stamped relative to the SMPTE start time specified for the session. This Original Time Stamp is permanently stored with the region and cannot be changed. If a region is ever moved, it can easily be placed at its original position from the Spot dialog.
When the Original Time Stamp for a region is initially set, this same location is also used to define the region’s User Time Stamp.
Unlike the Original Time Stamp, the User Time
Stamp can be redefined with the Time Stamp command in the Region List pop-up menu (see
Time Stamps in DigiBase
Columns are provided in DigiBase browsers for both the Original and User Time Stamps.
Time Stamps and Matches
Regions with identical User Time Stamps appear together in the Matches submenu in the Rightclick pop-up menu when auditioning takes (see
“Selecting an Alternate Take on a Track” on page 286).
Sliding Regions in Grid Mode
Grid mode provides several useful capabilities for sliding and moving regions in track playlists.
This mode is especially useful for lining up regions at precise intervals, as when working with a session that is bar- and beat-based. Grid boundaries, depending on the Main Time Scale, can be based on frames, bar and beat values, minutes or seconds, or a number of samples.
Grid mode also provides two operational modes, Absolute and Relative. These modes control how the Grid is applied (see “Absolute and
Relative Grid Mode” on page 433).
To temporarily suspend Grid mode and switch to Slip mode while dragging a region, hold down the Control key (Windows) or
Command key (Mac).
Setting Up the Grid
When the Draw Grid in Edit Window option is enabled in the Display Preferences page, vertical
Grid lines appear in the Edit window.
Grid lines in the Edit window can also be enabled and disabled by clicking the Timebase ruler name after it becomes highlighted.
432 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Defining the Grid Value
In addition to affecting the placement of regions, the Grid value also constrains Timeline and Edit selections, and determines how the Region > Quantize to Grid command works.
To set the Grid value:
1 Do one of the following:
• From the View > Main Counter menu, select the Time Scale for the Grid value.
– or –
• To keep the Main Time Scale and use a different time format for the Grid, deselect
Follow Main Timebase in the Grid value pop-up menu in the Edit window.
2 Do one of the following:
• From the Grid value pop-up menu in the
Edit window, select the time value for defining the Grid boundaries.
Grid value pop-up menu showing Bars:Beats
– or –
• To define a Grid based on the session’s
Markers, selections, and region boundaries, select Regions/Markers from the Grid value pop-up menu.
Absolute and Relative Grid Mode
Grid mode can be applied in Absolute or Relative mode.
â—† In Absolute Grid mode, moving any region snaps the region start to Grid boundaries . If a region’s start point falls between beats, and the
Grid is set to 1/4 notes, dragging the region will snap its start time to the nearest 1/4 note (the current absolute Grid value).
â—† In Relative Grid mode, regions can be moved by Grid (or Nudge) units . If a region’s start point falls between beats and the Grid is set to 1/4 notes, dragging the region will be constrained to
1/4 notes, preserving the region’s relative position to the nearest beat.
To select Absolute or Relative Grid mode:
â– Click the Grid mode selector and choose Absolute or Relative.
To temporarily suspend Grid mode and switch to Slip mode while dragging a region, hold down the Control key (Windows) or
Command key (Mac).
To place or move a region while in Grid mode:
1 Configure the Grid value (see “Defining the
Grid Value” on page 433).
2 Do one of the following:
• Drag a region from the Region List to an existing track.
– or –
• With the Time Grabber tool, drag a region already in a track to a new location.
The region’s start point snaps to the closest Grid boundary. If the region has a sync point defined, the sync point snaps to the Grid boundary.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 433
Sync Points
The placement of regions in Grid and Spot mode can be based on the definition of a region sync point. Sync points are used when a specific point within a region must be aligned to the
Grid or to a particular SMPTE or bar/beat location. This capability is important in placing music and sound effects for film and video work.
For example, suppose you had an audio region for a door slam that included the creak of the door closing, the actual slam, and the reverb of the slam. Using a sync point for the slam lets you spot the slam to a specific time in the session.
To define a region sync point:
1
Enable Slip mode (see “Edit Modes” on page 363).
2 Do one of the following:
• With the Selector tool, click at the point in the region where you want the sync point.
– or –
• Press the Down Arrow key while playing back.
3 Choose Region > Identify Sync Point. A small down arrow appears at the bottom of the region, with a vertical, light grey line indicating the location of the sync point.
To change the location of a sync point:
â–
With the Selector tool, click at a point in a region and choose Region > Identify Sync Point.
The new location is identified as the sync point for the region.
You can also move the location of a sync point by clicking and dragging it. See
“Dragging Sync Points” on page 435.
Removing Sync Points
To remove a sync point, do one of the following:
â– Select the entire region and choose Region >
Remove Sync Point.
– or –
â– Choose the Time Grabber tool, then Alt-click
(Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the sync point to delete it.
Displaying Sync Points
Sync points in audio regions may displayed or hidden.
To disable the display of sync points in audio regions:
â– Deselect View > Region > Sync Point.
To enable the display of sync points in audio regions:
â– Choose View > Region > Sync Point.
Sync points
Sync Points
434 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Dragging Sync Points
You can click and drag a sync point to another position in the audio region.
To set the sync point by dragging:
1 If you want the sync point to snap to the cur-
rent Grid value, enable Grid mode (see “Edit
2 Select the Time Grabber tool.
3 Click and drag the sync point to a new location.
Scrubbing Sync Points
While viewing an audio waveform can be a good way to set a sync point, a waveform display may not always reveal the desired spot in the audio material. By scrubbing while moving the sync point over an audio waveform, you can listen for the exact location to place the sync point.
Sync Point Scrub cursor
Scrubbing a Sync Point
To scrub while dragging the sync point:
1 If you want the sync point to snap to the current Grid value when you finish scrubbing, set
the Edit mode to Grid (see “Edit Modes” on page 363).
2 Select the Scrubber tool.
3 Click and drag the sync point to a new location. The sync point scrubs the audio as you move it.
Nudging
Pro Tools can nudge regions (or MIDI notes) by precise increments with the Plus (+) and Minus
(–) keys on the numeric keypad. The amount of the nudge is determined by the value specified in the Nudge Value pop-up menu. The Nudge function can be used in any of the Edit modes.
Nudging can be invaluable for adjusting the
“groove” of a musical phrase or a sound effect relative to other elements in the session. Since
Pro Tools can nudge material during playback, you can nudge continuously in real time to adjust the timing relationship between tracks.
Nudge can also be used to adjust the placement of automation breakpoints. For more informa-
tion, see “Editing Automation” on page 713.
Defining the Nudge Value
The Nudge value determines how far regions and selections are moved when nudging.
Start and end points for selections can also be
moved by the Nudge value (see “Nudging Selection Start/End Points” on page 402). In addi-
tion, regions can be trimmed by the Nudge
value (see “Trimming with Nudge” on page 422).
To set the Nudge value:
1 Do one of the following:
• From the View > Main Counter menu, select the Time Scale for the Nudge value.
– or –
• To keep the Main Time Scale and use a different time format for the Nudge value, deselect Follow Main Timebase in the Nudge
Value pop-up menu.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 435
2 Specify a Nudge value by doing one of the following:
• From the Nudge value pop-up menu in the
Edit window, select the Nudge value.
– or –
• To specify a Nudge value not listed in the
Nudge Value pop-up menu, click the
Nudge Value indicator and type in the value.
Nudge Value pop-up menu showing Time Code
Nudging Regions
To nudge one or more region:
1 Configure the Nudge value. For details, see
“Defining the Nudge Value” on page 435.
2 With the Time Grabber or Selector tool, select the region, regions, or region groups you want to nudge. The regions can reside on multiple tracks. Only regions that are completely selected are nudged.
3 Do one of the following:
• On the numeric keypad, press Plus (+) to move the selection forward by the Nudge value.
– or –
• Press Minus (–) to move the selection back by the Nudge value.
The Nudge command works the same regardless of the Edit mode. Adjacent regions are overlapped in Shuffle mode, the Spot dialog does not appear when in Spot mode, and shifted material does not snap to the Grid when in Grid mode.
Nudging Regions on Multiple Tracks and in Multichannel Tracks
When nudging a selection of multiple regions within a single track or across multiple tracks, that also contains silence, any automation data residing within the silence is also nudged.
Nudging by Next Nudge Value
In addition to nudging by the current Nudge value, you can also nudge by the next, larger value in the Nudge pop-up menu.
For example, if the Nudge value is set to 1 frame and you want to nudge by a larger valuer, you can nudge by the next, larger Nudge value of 10 frames.
To nudge forward or back by the next, larger Nudge value:
1
Enable Commands Keyboard Focus (see “Keyboard Focus” on page 16).
2 With the Selector or Time Grabber tool, select the regions or notes you want to nudge.
3 Press Forward Slash (/) to nudge the selected material forward by the next Nudge value. Press
M to nudge the selection back.
You can also nudge by the next Nudge value without enabling the Commands Keyboard
Focus. While pressing the Start key (Windows) or Control (Mac), press Forward
Slash (/) or M.
436 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Nudging a Region’s Contents
Often a region’s start point will reside at the correct location, perhaps at a SMPTE frame or bar, but the material within the region starts too late or early. You can, in effect, nudge a region’s audio waveform or MIDI notes without displacing the region’s start and end points.
before
Region contents are slid, moving waveform material into and out of the current region boundaries
Shift Command
Use the Shift command to move track material forward or back in time by a specified amount.
The Shift command can operate on selections, regions, MIDI notes, MIDI controller data, and automation breakpoints.
To shift a selection or region:
1 With the Selector or Time Grabber tool, select the track material you want to shift. The selected material can reside on multiple tracks.
2 Choose Edit > Shift. In the Shift dialog, select whether the data will be moved Earlier or Later.
3 Click in one of the Timebase fields to specify the amount by which the material will be shifted. Entering a value in one Timebase field automatically updates the others.
after
Nudging region content
This “sliding” of region contents is only possible if there is material residing outside the region’s start and end points—from the region having been trimmed, or perhaps captured from a larger region.
To nudge the contents of a region without changing the region start and end points:
1
Configure the Nudge value (see “Defining the
2 With the Time Grabber tool, select the region whose contents you want to nudge.
3 While pressing the Start key (Windows) or
Control (Mac), press Plus (+) or Minus (–) on the numeric keypad to move the material by the
Nudge value.
Shift dialog
4 If you want to shift material with greater precision, select the Use Subframes option.
5 Click OK. The material is shifted earlier or later by the specified amount.
If a portion of a region was selected, new regions are created from the selection and from any material outside of the selection.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 437
The Shift command works the same regardless of the Edit mode. For example, adjacent regions are overlapped in Shuffle mode, the Spot dialog does not appear when in Spot mode, and shifted material does not snap to the Grid when in Grid mode.
Quantizing Regions to Grid
The Quantize to Grid command adjusts the placement of selected audio and MIDI regions so that their start points (or sync points, if present) precisely align to the nearest Grid boundary.
To quantize one or more regions:
1 Configure the Grid value (see “Defining the
Grid Value” on page 433).
2 With the Selector or Time Grabber tool, select the region or regions you want to quantize. The regions can be on multiple tracks. Only regions that are entirely selected will be quantized.
3 Choose Region > Quantize to Grid. Region start times (or sync points) are aligned to the nearest boundaries for the defined Grid.
For MIDI regions, only the regions are quantized and all MIDI data contained within the regions
(such as notes) are moved equally, thereby retaining their rhythmic relationships. To quantize individual MIDI notes, choose Event > MIDI
Grid/Groove Quantize (see “Grid/Groove Quantize” on page 584).
Locking Regions
If you have a region or group of regions that you want to permanently associate with a particular location in a track (a beat, SMPTE frame, or sample location), you can lock it in place so it cannot be moved accidentally. Locked regions cannot be moved or deleted.
To lock (or unlock) a region:
1 With the Time Grabber, select the region or regions to lock (or unlock). The regions can reside on multiple tracks.
2 Choose Region > Lock (or Region > Unlock).
Locked audio region
When locked, a small lock appears in the region and it cannot be moved or deleted. If you attempt to perform edits that would move a locked region, Pro Tools alerts you.
In Shuffle mode, locked regions, and all regions occurring after the locked region, are not displaced when other neighboring regions are moved.
438 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Muting/Unmuting Regions
Choosing the Mute/Unmute Region command mutes playback of a selected region. Choosing the command a second time unmutes the region. Regions that are muted become dimmed to indicate their status.
The Replace Region Dialog
Muted audio region (middle)
To mute or unmute a region or regions:
1 With the Time Grabber, select the region or regions you want to mute or unmute. The regions can even reside on multiple tracks.
2 Choose Region > Mute/Unmute. When muted, regions are dimmed.
Replacing Audio Regions
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
Use the Replace Region function to replace multiple instances of an audio region in a playlist with another region. This is useful in post production if you use a sound effect, room noise, or atmosphere region many times in a session, and later decide to replace one or all of the original regions with a different region.
This is also useful in music production if you want to replace a certain loop or sample (for example, a drum beat) with a new one. You can use this compositionally, if you know the tempo of a section or session, to create a scratch piece with “rough” regions of the correct length, and later replace them with “final” regions of the same length.
Replace Region dialog
The following options are available in the Replace Region dialog:
Replace: Original Region Only Replaces only the selected region with the replacement region dragged from the Region List.
Replace: All Instances of the Original Region Replaces all instances of the selected region that fit the On criteria with the replacement region from the Region List.
• On This Track: replaces regions that fit the
Match criteria and are on the same track as the original region.
• On All Tracks: replaces regions that fit the
Match criteria for all tracks in the session.
• On Within the Selection: replaces regions that fit the Match criteria within the current selection.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 439
Replace: All Regions That Match Original Region’s Replaces all regions that fit the Match criteria and the On criteria with the replacement region from the Region List.
• Start Position: replaces all regions that have the same original start time as the selected region. This includes regions that may have been auto-created when trimming end points.
• End Position: replaces all regions that have the same original end time as the selected region. This includes regions that may have been auto-created when trimming start points.
• Name: replaces all regions that come from the same audio file and have been renamed to the same name
• On This Track: replaces regions that fit the
Match criteria and are on the same track as the original region.
• On All Tracks: replaces regions that fit the
Match criteria for all tracks in the session.
• On Within the Selection: replaces regions that fit the Match criteria within the current selection.
Region matching uses all specified Match criteria. For example, if you select Start Position and
End Position, all regions from the same original audio file as your selection with the same original start and end times will be replaced.
Fit Region Using The: Original Region Length If the replacement region is smaller than the original region, the region is placed in the playlist and any remaining audio from the original region is removed.
If the replacement region is larger than the selection, it is placed in the playlist and trimmed to fit within the length of the original region.
Fit Region Using The: Original Selection
Length When the playlist selection extends beyond the original region, the replacement region (if larger than the original region) is trimmed to fit within the selection.
Fit Region Using The: Replacement Region
Length The replacement region is placed in its entirety, regardless of the length of the original region or selection.
To replace regions:
1 Select a region in a track’s playlist that you want to replace. The selection can extend beyond the region’s end point, to include material from the replacement region that is longer than the original region.
Control-Shift-drag (Windows) or Command-Shift-drag (Mac) any region from the
Region List to any unselected region on a track to open the Replace Region dialog without first making a selection.
2 Control-Shift-drag (Windows) or Command-
Shift-drag (Mac) the replacement region from the Region List to the selected region. The Replace Region dialog opens.
3
Configure the Replace Region dialog (see “The
Replace Region Dialog” on page 439).
4 Click OK.
Replacing Regions from the Region List
The Replace Regions command is also available in the Region List pop-up menu. To use this command, make sure there is a region selected in a track and a different (replacement) region selected in the Region List.
440 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To Replace Regions using the Region List pop-up menu:
1 Select a region in a track to be replaced.
2 Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the desired replacement region in the Region List. (The Control key is only required if the Region List Selection Follows Edit Selection option is enabled in the Editing Preferences page.)
3 Choose Replace Regions from the Region List pop-up menu.
4
Configure the Replace Region dialog (see “The
Replace Region Dialog” on page 439).
5 Click OK.
Replace Region and Multichannel
Tracks
The Replace Region command supports dragging multichannel regions from the Region List to multichannel tracks, provided they are the same channel format. For example, you can replace a selected stereo region in a stereo audio track with another stereo region from the Region List. However, you cannot replace it with two mono audio regions. Additionally, you cannot replace regions in multiple mono tracks with multichannel regions.
Audio Regions from Field
Recorders
Pro Tools provides region replacement tools specifically for field recording workflows. For audio imported from a field recorder, you can replace regions on tracks with alternate channels and you can expand multiple channels to new tracks.
Replacing a Region with an
Alternate Channel
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
Pro Tools provides region replacement tools specifically for field recording workflows. You can replace a mono region (or selected portion of a mono region) with a matching segment of an alternate channel that was recorded simultaneously. Any fades performed on the original region are automatically recalculated against the replacement region, and any pre-existing automation on that track is unchanged.
For detailed information on working with multichannel recordings made with field recorders, see the Field Recorder Workflow
Guide.
To replace a region with a matching alternate channel:
1 In the Timeline, make a selection that includes or overlaps the region or portion of the region you want to replace.
2 Do one of the following:
• With any Edit tool, Right-click (Windows or Mac) or Control-click (Mac) the selection you want to replace, then select
Matches from the pop-up menu.
– or –
• With the Selector tool, Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac) the selection you want to replace.
The Matches submenu displays matching alternate channels under the Channels header. (This submenu also displays any available alternate takes under the Alternates header.)
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 441
3 From the Matches submenu, select the name of the alternate region that you want to use to replace the original region.
Selecting an alternate channel from a channel group to replace a region
4 Repeat this procedure for every region you want to replace on each track.
Conditions for Alternate Channel
Availability
An alternate channel is available to replace the original channel (represented by the region or portion of a region selected on the Timeline) if all of the following are true:
• Both channels are part of a multichannel part of a recording made simultaneously on one or more field recorders.
• Certain metadata matches between the original channel and the alternate channel.
• The metadata embedded during shooting and recording has been preserved prior to import into Pro Tools.
With multichannel recordings from one or more field recorders, both channels must overlap at least once between their start time code and end time code positions, and must also meet one of the following conditions:
• Matching Scene and Take
• Matching Shoot Date (applies only if Scene and Take contain any information for both channels)
• Matching Tape name
• Matching Sound Roll name
• Alternate channel Sound Roll name matches current channel Tape name
• Alternate channel Tape name matches current channel Sound Roll name
Expanding Alternate Channels to
New Tracks
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
When working with a mono region that is part of a multichannel recording, you can expand that region (or a selected portion of it) to new tracks that reflect its matching alternate channels while preserving any edits or fades.
For example, you can use this feature to easily create different versions of an edited dialogue track corresponding to multiple channel inputs
(microphones) that were recorded simultaneously.
Matching alternate channels are mono channels that were recorded simultaneously with the original region (such as multichannel recordings made by one or more field recorders). For detailed criteria that alternate matching channels must meet, see the Field
Recorder Workflow Guide.
442 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To expand alternate channels to new tracks:
1 In the Timeline, do one of the following:
• To expand only a portion of the regions on the track, make a selection that includes or overlaps any number of regions on a track, and Right-click (Windows or Mac) or Control-click (Mac) the selection.
– or –
• To expand all of the regions on the track,
Right-click (Windows or Mac) or Controlclick (Mac) the track name.
2 Choose the Expand to New Tracks pop-up menu, and select one of the following methods by which to expand alternate channels for the selection to new tracks:
• By Channel Name
• By Channel Number
• By Channel Name and Number
Result of expanding a selection to new tracks
Edit Commands
Pro Tools provides many standard edit commands (such as cut, copy, and paste). Pro Tools also many specialized edit commands that are optimized for audio and MIDI production (such as Repeat Paste to Fill).
Expanding a selection to new tracks
For detailed information on how each of these options expand to new tracks, see the
Field Recorder Workflow Guide.
If alternate channels are available, Pro Tools expands them to new tracks (including the channel represented in the original track) according to the chosen parameters.
Cut, Copy, Paste, and Clear
Use the Cut, Copy, Paste, and Clear commands to rearrange and edit track material. Edits can operate on entire regions selected with the Time
Grabber tool, or on track ranges selected with the Selector tool. Edits can also work across mul-
tiple tracks (see “Editing Across Multiple Tracks” on page 448).
You can cut, copy, and paste noncontiguous regions by selecting them with the Object
Grabber tool.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 443
Track View and Edit Content
When cutting or copying track material, the
Track View determines the type of data placed on the Clipboard. When displaying waveforms for audio tracks, or when viewing MIDI or Instrument tracks in Notes or Regions Views, selections include all underlying automation and controller data. Thus, cutting an audio region also cuts any volume, pan, mute, send, or plugin automation that is also on the track. This saves you from having to individually cut from each automation playlist on the track.
When a track is displaying automation data or controller data, only that data is placed on the
Clipboard. Also, whenever you cut or copy automation data, bounding breakpoints are created at each end of the selected area, in order to preserve the slope of the automation both inside and outside the selection.
Audio waveform data
However, when selecting groups of MIDI notes with any of the Grabber tools (by drawing a rectangle around them), only the note data is placed on the Clipboard. When selecting a time range of MIDI notes with the Selector tool, all controller data in the track is selected (similar to selecting with the Selector tool for audio tracks in
Waveform View).
Automation data (breakpoint-type data) with Cut and
Pasted audio region
If tracks are grouped, copying and pasting on any of the tracks affects each of the other tracks in the group. Tracks that are hidden—even if they are part of a group being edited—are not affected by edits.
The Edit mode affects how material is selected, copied, and pasted:
• In Slip mode, the Cut command leaves an empty space corresponding to the data removed from the track.
• In Slip mode, pasted data can overlap an adjacent region.
• In Shuffle mode, the Cut command leaves no empty space, since the regions to the right of the cut slide over, closing the gap.
• In Shuffle mode, pasted data causes all regions to slide over to make room for the pasted material.
New regions are often auto-created when performing edits. For instance, when clearing a selection from a region, new regions are auto-created from the material residing outside of the selection.
444 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Cut and Copy Commands
Use the Cut command to remove the selection from the track and place it on the Clipboard.
Use the Copy command to place a copy of the selection on the Clipboard so it can be pasted to another track, or to the same track at a different location, while leaving the original intact and in place.
To cut or copy a selection or region:
1 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Set the Track View for the tracks you want to edit.
When displaying waveforms for audio tracks, or notes or regions for MIDI tracks, selections include underlying automation and controller data. If the track is displaying automation data, only the automation data is affected by the edits.
3 Make an Edit selection of the material you want to cut or copy.
4 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Cut to remove the selection and place it on the Clipboard.
– or –
• Choose Edit > Copy to place the selection on the Clipboard, without removing it.
If a portion of a region was cut or copied, the material on the Clipboard appears as a new region in the Region List. If a portion of a region was cut, new regions are auto-created from the material residing outside of the selection.
When working in Shuffle mode, any subsequent regions slide over to fill any empty space.
Deleting Underlying Region Data
When removing a region or selection, you can choose to remove or keep the underlying region data.
To delete a region or selection along with the underlying region data:
â–
Choose Edit > Cut.
To delete a region or selection without removing the underlying region data:
â– Choose Edit > Clear.
Paste Command
Use the Paste command to place the contents of the Clipboard at the Edit insertion point, and overwrite any material already there.
To paste a selection or region:
1 If you want to constrain the insertion point or the selection to the current Grid value, set the
Edit mode to Grid.
2 Do one of the following:
• With the Selector tool, click in a track at the point where you want to paste the material.
– or –
• Use the Selector or Time Grabber tool to make a selection where the material will be placed.
3 Choose Edit > Paste.
If pasting at an insertion point in Shuffle mode, material to the right of the paste point is shifted to the right. In Slip mode, the material is overwritten.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 445
If pasting into a selection in Shuffle mode, the selection is replaced by the Clipboard’s contents with the adjacent material slid left or right as necessary. In Slip mode, the selection is also replaced but with the surrounding material remaining unchanged.
When working with MIDI, you can merge the contents of the Clipboard with material in the destination track. For more informa-
tion, see “Merge” on page 447.
Clear Command
Use the Clear command to remove a selection from a track without placing it on the Clipboard.
To clear a selection or region:
1 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Set the Track View for the tracks you want to edit.
When displaying waveforms for audio tracks, or notes or regions for MIDI tracks, selections include underlying automation and controller data. If the track is displaying automation data, only the automation data is affected by the edits.
3 Make an Edit selection.
4 Choose Edit > Clear to remove the selection.
If a portion of a region was cleared, new regions are auto-created from the material residing outside of the selection. If working in Shuffle mode, any subsequent regions slide over to fill any empty space.
Special Cut, Copy, Paste, and
Clear Commands
Use the four “special” Edit menu commands
(Cut Special, Copy Special, Paste Special, and
Clear Special) for cutting, copying, pasting, and clearing automation (volume, pan, mute, and plug-in automation) on audio, Auxiliary Input,
Master Fader, VCA Master, and Instrument tracks. These commands can also be used for
MIDI controller data on MIDI and Instrument tracks.
You cannot paste MIDI controller data to automation data nor automation to MIDI.
Cut Special
The Cut Special commands let you cut just automation data from the current selection (without associated audio, video, or MIDI notes) and place it in memory to paste elsewhere. Choices include:
All Automation Cuts all automation or MIDI controller data whether it is shown or not.
Pan Automation Cuts only pan automation or
MIDI pan data whether it is shown or not.
Plug-in Automation Cuts only plug-in automation that is shown.
Copy Special
The Copy Special commands let you copy just automation data from the current selection
(without associated audio, video, or MIDI notes) and place a copy of it in memory to paste elsewhere.
All Automation Copies all automation or MIDI controller data whether it is shown or not.
Pan Automation Copies only pan automation or
MIDI pan data whether it is shown or not.
446 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Plug-in Automation Copies only the plug-in automation that it is shown.
Paste Special
The Paste Special commands let you paste automation data into another region (without affecting associated audio, video, or MIDI notes) in the following ways:
Merge Pastes MIDI controller data from the clipboard to the selection and merges it with any current MIDI controller data in the selection, or at the insertion point. This can be useful for consolidating MIDI data from several tracks into a single MIDI track.
Repeat to Fill Selection Pastes multiple iterations of audio, video, or MIDI data from the
Clipboard to fill the selection. If you select an area that is not an exact multiple of the copied region size, the remaining selection area is filled with a trimmed version of the original selection.
This allows you to easily create drum loops and other repetitive effects. Before the data is pasted,
Pro Tools prompts you to specify a crossfade to smooth transitions between regions.
To Current Automation Type Pastes the automation or MIDI controller data from the clipboard to the selection, or at the insertion point, as the current type of automation or continuous MIDI data. This lets you copy one type of automation data to another, or one type of continuous MIDI date to another type of contiguous MIDI data.
Clear Special
The Clear Special commands let you clear just automation data from the current region.
Choices are:
All Automation Clears all automation or MIDI controller data whether it is shown or not.
Pan Automation Clears only pan automation or
MIDI pan data whether it is shown or not.
Plug-in Automation Clears only plug-in automation that is shown.
For more information on working with au-
tomation data, see Chapter 30, “Automation.”
Repeat To Fill Selection
The Repeat to Fill Selection command lets you automatically fill a selection with audio or MIDI regions or data without requiring that you manually duplicate the regions. To use Repeat to Fill
Selection, cut or copy a region, then make a selection and use the command to fill the selection. When pasting audio regions, you are prompted to specify a crossfade to be used for the pasted regions.
If you fill an area that is an exact multiple of the copied region size (for example, filling 16 bars with a 4-bar region), the copied selection is pasted as many times as it takes to fill the selection. If you fill an area that is not an exact multiple of the copied region size (for example, filling 15 seconds of a track with a 2-second region of room noise), the remaining selection area is filled with an automatically trimmed version of the original selection.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 447
To fill a selection with Repeat to Fill Selection:
1 Select the region you want to copy.
2 Choose Edit > Copy.
3 Select the area you want to fill using the Selector tool and choose Edit > Paste Special > Repeat to Fill Selection.
4 Do one of the following:
• If pasting audio regions to larger areas, the
Batch Fades dialog opens. Configure the dialog to create crossfades between each pasted region, then click OK.
– or –
• If you do not want crossfades for the pasted audio, click Cancel in the Batch Fades dialog.
Editing Across Multiple Tracks
When working with data from multiple tracks, there are some important points to remember.
For example, if any selected tracks are set to
their master view (see “Master Views for Tracks” on page 338), edits affect not only audio and
MIDI for the selected tracks, but all automation and controller data as well.
If all selected tracks are displayed as automation data, edits only affect the type of automation data displayed in each track. Furthermore, if track 1 displays Pan automation, track 2 displays
Volume automation, and track 3 displays Mute automation, the Cut command cuts only pan data from track 1, volume data from track 2, and mute data from track 3.
For more information on selecting data on
multiple tracks, see “Selecting Across Multiple Tracks” on page 404.
To copy all types of automation on all selected tracks when copying only automation or controller data:
â– Press and hold the Start key (Windows) or
Control (Mac), and choose Edit > Copy Special >
All Automation.
To paste to multiple tracks:
1 Do one of the following:
• Place the insertion point in each of the destination tracks by Shift-clicking in them
• Alt-Shift-click (Windows) or Option-Shiftclick (Mac) in a track to select all tracks
• Make a selection in one of the Timebase rulers.
2 Choose Edit > Paste.
When you paste multiple types of data, whatever data has been copied is pasted into the correct type of playlist. Automation data is pasted into the corresponding automation playlist. Audio or MIDI data is pasted into the audio or
MIDI playlist. You do not need to set target tracks to the specific type of data being pasted for the paste to work correctly.
If all destination tracks in a multitrack paste are displayed as automation, the paste replaces any previous data on the target track without shuffling—regardless of whether you are in Slip or
Shuffle mode.
448 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Duplicate Command
The Duplicate command copies a selection and places it immediately after the end of the selection. Though this is similar to using Copy and
Paste, Duplicate is more convenient and faster, particularly when working with data on multiple tracks.
To make more than one copy of a selection, use
the Repeat command (see “Repeat Command” on page 449). You can also loop regions (see
“Region Looping” on page 461).
As with the Copy and Paste commands, certain rules apply when duplicating material on multi-
ple tracks (see “Editing Across Multiple Tracks” on page 448).
To duplicate a selection or region:
1 If working with material that is bar- and beatbased, such as loops, set the Main Time Scale to
Bars:Beats.
2 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
3 Make an Edit selection.
4 Choose Edit > Duplicate. The material is placed immediately after the selection’s end point.
In Shuffle mode, the duplicated data is placed directly after the end of the selection. Regions occurring after it slide to accommodate the duplicated material. In Slip mode, the duplicated material overlaps any adjacent data.
When using Duplicate (or Repeat) with MIDI notes that were selected with the Time Grabber tool, material is always duplicated one measure later, and is merged with existing track material
(instead of replacing it).
Duplicating Audio
When using Duplicate (or Repeat) for audio that must fall cleanly on the beat (such as rhythmic loops), it is important that you select the audio material with the Selector tool, or by typing in the start and end points in the Event Edit area. If you select an audio region with the Time Grabber tool (or by double-clicking it with the Selector tool), the material may drift by several ticks because of sample-rounding.
If, on the other hand, you want to Duplicate (or
Repeat) audio that is not bar- and beat-based, set the Time Scale to any format except Bars:Beats.
This ensures that the duplicated audio material has the correct number of samples and is accurately placed.
Repeat Command
The Repeat command is similar to Duplicate, but lets you specify the number of times the selected material is duplicated.
As with the Copy and Paste commands, certain rules apply when repeating material on multiple
tracks (see “Editing Across Multiple Tracks” on page 448).
You can repeatedly paste copied data until it
completely fills a selection (see “Repeat To Fill
You can also loop regions (see “Region Looping” on page 461).
To repeat a selection or region:
1 If working with material that is bar- and beatbased, such as loops, set the Main Time Scale to
Bars:Beats.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 449
2 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
3 Make an Edit selection.
4 Choose Edit > Repeat. In the Repeat dialog, enter the number of times you want the material to repeat, then click OK.
Repeat dialog
The material is placed immediately after the selection’s end point, and duplicated the specified number of times.
In Shuffle mode, the repeated data is placed directly after the end of the selection. Regions occurring after it slide to accommodate the repeated material. In Slip mode, the repeated material overlaps any subsequent data.
Editing Stereo and
Multichannel Tracks
Regions on individual channels within stereo and multichannel tracks cannot be independently selected. All selections for these tracks are time-based, which means that selections made with the Selector or Time Grabber tool extend to each and every channel in the track.
When regions in multichannel tracks are edited with any of the Trim tools or dragged with the
Time Grabber tool, material on all channels is affected equally as a group.
Split Selected Tracks
To edit a specific channel within a stereo or multichannel track without affecting the other channels, you can split the track into separate mono tracks. Once the edits have been made to the separated material, you can then drag or copy it back to the original multichannel track.
To split a stereo or multichannel track:
1 Select one or more stereo or multichannel
tracks (see “Selecting Tracks” on page 127).
2 Choose Track > Split Into Mono. Regions from the channels on the selected tracks are placed on new, mono audio tracks.
Names for the new tracks are based on the source track name and channel suffix. For example, if a stereo track called “Funkit” is split, two new tracks called “Funkit.L” and “Funkit.R” are created.
Output and send assignments and volume and pan settings are retained in the new tracks.
Mono equivalents of stereo and multi-mono plug-in assignments are assigned in the new tracks. However, multichannel plug-in assignments are not assigned in the new tracks.
450 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Dragging Regions to and from Stereo and Multichannel Tracks
Dragging a stereo region to two mono audio tracks
When dragging regions to or from stereo or multichannel tracks, the following rules apply:
â—† Provided the number of tracks and channels are the same for the source and destination, you can drag regions between multichannel tracks and mono tracks.
â—† The source and destination for dragged regions can be mixed. For example, you can drag regions from a 5.0 track (containing five channels) to a stereo track and three mono audio tracks.
â—† When dragging multichannel regions to mono tracks, the destination tracks must be adjacent.
â—† When dragging regions from mono tracks to a multichannel track, the source tracks need not be adjacent.
Multichannel regions can also be dragged from the Region List, to multichannel tracks of the same format, groups of mono audio tracks, or a combination of both.
Conversely, a collection of single, mono regions can be dragged from the Region List to multichannel tracks—provided the dragged number of regions matches the number of channels in the destination track.
Processing Audio with
AudioSuite Plug-ins
The AudioSuite plug-ins included with your
Pro Tools system can be used to process and modify audio regions or even entire audio files.
Do this in order to apply a specific AudioSuite process (such as Normalization or DC Offset Removal) any number of audio regions in your session.
Refer to the DigiRack Plug-ins Guide for more information about AudioSuite plugins.
Waveform Repair with the
Pencil Tool
The Pencil tool lets you destructively “redraw” waveform data. This tool is most commonly used to repair a pop or click in an audio file. A pop or click appears as a sudden sharp spike in a waveform. This tool only becomes active when the Edit window is zoomed in to the sample level.
The Pencil tool is a destructive editing tool that permanently modifies the audio file on disk and should be used with caution.
Although you can Undo a Pencil tool edit, it is recommended that you create a backup copy of the target audio, before using the Pencil tool.
You can do this by using the AudioSuite Duplicate plug-in.
Refer to the DigiRack Plug-ins Guide for information about the AudioSuite Duplicate plug-in.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 451
To destructively edit an audio waveform with the
Pencil tool:
1 Locate the area you want to edit.
2 Using the Zoomer tool or the Zoom buttons, zoom down to the sample level so the waveform appears as a continuous thin line. Adjust the
Track Height, as necessary, to edit the waveform with greater precision. You can also use vertical zoom for greater visual resolution.
You can recall zoom levels with the Zoom
Preset buttons (see “Using the Zoomer
Tools” on page 367), or with Memory Loca-
tions (see “Memory Locations and Markers” on page 524).
3 Select the Pencil tool.
Pencil tool
4 Carefully draw with the Pencil tool by dragging over the area of the waveform.
Do not over-edit or the results may be undesirable. However, you can use the Undo command to undo your previous edit.
Repairing a “pop” with the Pencil tool
Try to limit editing to smoothing over a very small problem area, and keep the “fixes” in character with the shape of the surrounding waveform.
If you have trouble zooming in far enough to perform Pencil tool editing, check the Edit window (session) length. Shorten the overall
Edit window (session) length, if possible, until the Pencil tool becomes usable.
Region Groups
A region group is a collection of any combination of audio and MIDI regions that looks and acts like a single region. Region groups are essentially containers holding one or more regions.
Region groups can be created on a single or on multiple adjacent audio, MIDI, and Instrument tracks. Region groups let you “nest” multiple regions into “macro” regions for groove and tempo manipulation, editing, and arranging.
Region groups can be placed on tracks alongside standard regions, and edited using many of the same Pro Tools editing techniques. Certain edits to a region group will apply to all regions contained by the region group, such as Cut or Delete. Other edits only apply to the boundaries of the region group and do not affect the underlining regions, such as Trim.
Each region group is saved with the session as a
Region Group file (.rgrp). Region Group files can be exported from and imported into different
Pro Tools sessions.
452 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Region groups are especially useful for:
• Grouping tick-based audio regions that have been separated into many small regions, such as with individual hits of a drum pattern.
Many such small regions can easily be created with Beat Detective or the Separate Region At
Transients command, or imported as REX or
ACID files.
• Grouping parts and sections of your session to facilitate composition and arranging. For example, grouping the regions of a brass section during the chorus to copy it to the next chorus.
Region groups are completely independent of Mix and Edit Groups.
Creating Region Groups
To create a region group:
1 Select one or more regions on one or more tracks. (For more information on multitrack re-
gion groups, see “Multitrack Region Groups” on page 454).
The region group appears as one region with the region groups icon in the lower left corner. Region groups also appear in the Region List.
Region Group icon
A region group on an audio track and in the Region List
Region Group Timebase Format
Region groups are created in the same timebase format (samples or ticks) as the tracks on which they are created. Multitrack region groups can include both sample-based and tick-based tracks.
Audio Region Group icon
A region group on an audio track
Selecting regions to be grouped on a single audio track
The size of the selection determines the size of the region group. The selection can start and end on any region boundary, empty space, or even in the middle of a region. Selections starting or ending within a region will separate the region at the selection boundary when you create a region group. Region groups created from object-based selections include all selected and unselected regions between the first and last selected region on the track.
2 Choose Region > Group.
MIDI Region Group icon
A region group on a MIDI track
Region groups can be created from empty selections. This can be useful when working in Shuffle mode to preserve the gaps between regions.
The Group and Ungroup Region menu commands apply to any Edit selection regardless of the current Track View.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 453
Ungrouping Regions
To ungroup a region group:
1 Select a region group.
2 Choose Region > Ungroup.
The region group disappears, revealing all underlying regions and any nested region groups.
When there are multiple nested region groups, the Ungroup command will ungroup the frontmost top-layer region group only, preserving any underlying region groups.
To ungroup a region group (and include all of its nested region groups):
1 Select a region group.
2 Choose Region > Ungroup All.
Regrouping Regions
The Regroup menu command undoes the last
Ungroup command and regroups all the individual regions as a region group. This lets you ungroup a grouped region, edit its underlying regions in any way desired, and regroup it to continue working on higher-level composition and arranging.
To regroup a region group:
1 Select any region from the ungrouped region group.
2 Choose Region > Regroup.
If you used the Ungroup All command, the Regroup command recreates all previous nested region groups.
3 If you regrouped an ungrouped region group that was used more than once in the session, do one of the following when the Change All dialog opens.
• Choose Modify to apply your changes to all other instances of the same region group.
– or –
• Choose Copy to create a copy and apply your changes only to the copied region group.
Multitrack Region Groups
Multitrack region groups (region groups created across multiple tracks) are useful for grouping parts (such as multi-miked drum tracks), and for composing and arranging. Multitrack region groups can be created across any combination of audio, MIDI, and Instrument tracks, and can include either or both tick-based or sample-based tracks.
Multitrack region groups work much like singletrack region groups. Multitrack region groups appear as a single object across adjacent tracks.
454 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To create a multitrack region group:
1 Select regions across multiple adjacent tracks.
Selecting regions to be grouped across multiple tracks
2 Choose Region > Group.
Mixed Region Group icon
Mixed multitrack region group (sample- and tick-based audio, and tick-based MIDI)
Multitrack region groups create nested region groups of multiple regions by track before grouping them across tracks.
The Regroup command supports multitrack region groups.
Region Group icon
Multitrack region group
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 455
Separated Multitrack Region Groups
You can insert, move, hide, or delete tracks in multitrack region groups, but it may break the region group. A separated region group displays a break in the Region Group icon. Separated region groups will continue to function as a single region group, but the separated icon indicates that the region group displayed is somehow incomplete or separated across nonadjacent tracks.
There may be situations where you want separated region groups. For example, if you use the same accompaniment on verses one and two of a song, you can group the parts of verse one and copy them as a region group for verse two, but still have a continuous vocal track in the middle of those region groups.
If you want to delete a track and keep the region group intact, first ungroup the region group, then delete the desired track, and then Regroup the region group. The region group will be recreated intact, but without the deleted track.
Region Groups on Tick-Based
Tracks
When changing tempos, region groups on tickbased tracks adjust their length by adjusting the position of all enclosed regions accordingly.
This is useful for arranging rhythmic material and for playing back region groups imported from REX and ACID files.
Separated Region Group icon
Region group separated by deleting a track
A region group is separated when you do any of the following:
• Insert a track within a multitrack region group.
• Move a track that is part of a multitrack region group so that it is no longer adjacent with the other tracks of the region group.
• Hide a track that is part of a multitrack region group.
• Delete a track that is part of a multitrack region group.
• Change the tempo of a mixed sample-based and tick-based region group.
• Record into a region group.
• Change playlists on a track that is part of a multitrack region group.
A region group on a tick-based audio track 120 BPM and at 160 BPM
456 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Changing Region Group Timebase
The timebase format of a region group can be changed by:
• Changing the track’s timebase.
• Dragging the region group to a track with a different timebase.
Changing the timebase creates a copy of the original region group. Both region groups (the original and the copy) appear in the Region List, but they have different timebases.
Converting Samples to Ticks
When dragging a region group from a samplebased track to a tick-based track, the length of the region group does not change. This is because region groups are converted from samples to ticks after they are moved into tick-based tracks. The length of the region group only changes with subsequent tempo changes. If appropriate, change the local tempo on the tickbased track to match the tempo of the samplebased region group before moving a samplebased region group to a tick-based track.
Converting Ticks to Samples
When dragging a region group from a tick-based track to a sample-based track, the length of the region group does not change unless it is moved to another time location with a different tempo.
This is because region groups are converted from ticks to samples after they are moved into the sample-based tracks.
Multitrack Region Groups with Sample- and
Tick-Based Tracks
Multitrack region groups can include both sample-based and tick-based tracks. However, changing the tempo separates the region group between sample-based tracks and tick-based tracks.
A multitrack region group separated across samplebased and tick-based tracks after changing tempo
Editing Region Groups
Region groups are edited in much the same way as regular regions: They can be named, moved, cut, copied, pasted, trimmed, muted, locked, and so on. However, there are a few significant differences between editing regular regions and region groups.
Editing MIDI Region Groups
If a MIDI region within a region group is modified in any way, a new region copy is created and placed over of the region group. For example, if you record, draw in a new note, edit MIDI controller data, or Quantize a Timeline selection, a new region is created over the region group.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 457
Editing Audio Region Groups
Certain audio editing commands create new regions over region groups. To use these commands and maintain the region group, ungroup the region group, perform the edit, and then regroup the region group.
The following edit commands create new regions over region groups:
• AudioSuite processing of a grouped region results in a new region over the region group.
• Consolidating a selection of a grouped region creates a new audio file and region over the region group.
• Recording into a region group creates a new audio file and region over the region group.
• Pencil tool waveform redraw results in a new region over the region group.
Tabbing to Transients and Region Boundaries
With Tab to Transients enabled, the Tab key moves the Location Cursor to transients and region boundaries within a region group.
With Tab to Transients disabled, the Tab key moves the Location Cursor to region group boundaries only (and the sync point, if present).
For more information, see “Tabbing to
Trimming Region Groups
Trimming region groups with the Standard Trim tool works the same way as trimming regular regions, regardless of whether you are trimming a single-track region group or a multitrack region group.
Trimming a region group does not trim the underlying regions, but rather trims the region group boundaries. All underlying regions retain their original length and location. This is true for all underlying audio and MIDI regions, and nested region groups. If you trim the region group shorter, underlying regions may not be heard on playback because they are outside the region boundaries of the trimmed region group.
When trimming region groups with the TC/E
Trim tool, it applies only to audio regions, and creates a new region over the region group.
If you Ungroup after trimming a region group in
(shorter), audio regions falling outside of the bounds of the current region group are trimmed to fit the region group boundary or removed.
Recording
When recording audio or MIDI, new regions are created over (in front) of region groups instead of being included in the region group. To record into a region group, first ungroup the region group, then record, and then regroup the region group. The region group will be recreated intact with the newly recorded material.
458 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Fades and Crossfades on Region
Groups
Region groups can have fades and crossfades just like regular regions. Fades only apply to audio regions. In addition to crossfading between region groups, you can also crossfade between region groups and regular audio regions.
Two multitrack region groups with crossfades on the audio tracks, but not on the MIDI track
Ungrouping a region group removes any region group level fades or crossfades. Fades and crossfades are restored by the Regroup command.
When changing tempo with region groups on tick-based tracks, you may need to Ungroup, redo or create new fades, and then
Regroup in order to maintain the desired fades.
For information on working with fades and
crossfades in Pro Tools, see Chapter 21,
Importing and Exporting Region
Group Files
Pro Tools can export and import region groups as region group files (.rgrp) to do any of the following:
• Separate region group metadata from audio files to avoid unnecessary file copy operations when exporting audio region groups composed from multiple source files
• Export MIDI data as part of a region group
• Create multitrack loops
Region group files store the following metadata:
• References to all audio files within the region group
• Region names and relative location in tracks
• Fades and crossfades
• Region group names and format (single or multitrack)
• All MIDI data present in the region group
(such as notes, controllers, Sysex, and so on)
• Track names
Region group files do not store the following:
• Automation
• Plug-ins
• Track routing
• Tempo and Meter map
• Region List information
Importing Region Groups
To import a region group:
â– Drag and drop the region group file from a
DigiBase browser, Windows Explorer, or Mac
Finder to the Timeline, a track, the Track List, or the Region List.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 459
Dropping a region group has the following different results depending on where you drop it:
• When dropping a region group in a track,
Pro Tools checks for the matching track format, number of channels, and (in the case of multitrack region groups) if there are enough matching adjacent tracks to import the region group file. If these criteria match, the region group is imported and spotted to the drop location in the track or tracks.
• Dropping a region group on the Timeline or on the Track List creates new tracks for the imported region group.
• Dropping a region group in the Region List adds a new region group in the Region List.
All audio and MIDI regions, and even other region groups, contained within the dropped region group also appear in the Region List.
Exporting Region Groups
To export a region group, excluding its audio files:
1 Select one or more region groups in the Region List.
2 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose
Export Region Groups. The Export Region
Groups dialog opens.
Export Region Groups dialog
3 If you want to change the Destination Directory from the default auto-created Region
Groups folder to another location, do the following:
• Click the Choose button.
• Navigate to the desired location.
• Clicking Choose.
4 To reset the Destination Directory to the default location, click Reset.
5 Enable one of the following options for resolving duplicate region group file names:
• Prompting for Each Duplicate
• Auto Renaming
• Replacing with New Files
6 Click OK.
Generally, if you are exporting region groups to another hard drive, you should copy any referenced audio files. This way you can move region groups not only from one session to another, but from one system to another.
To export a region group and include its audio files:
1 Export one or more region groups to the desired drive.
2 Create a new session on the new drive.
3 Choose Setup > Preferences.
4 In the Preferences dialog, click the Processing tab and select Automatically Copy Files on Import.
5 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
6 Import all previously exported region groups by dragging and dropping them into the session.
The audio files folder of the new session now contains all files referenced by the region groups.
460 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Region Looping
Pro Tools lets you loop audio regions, MIDI regions, and region groups. Looping regions is an easy and powerful way to repeat a single region on a track or regions across tracks for composing and arranging. Looping regions provides more flexibility than the Repeat and Duplicate commands.
Looped regions repeat the source region as many times as specified in the Region Looping dialog, or enough to fill the specified Loop
Length (such as 30 seconds or until the next region on the track). The source region is the original region selected for looping. Loop iterations are all looped regions following the source region. In cases where a specific number of repetitions has not been indicated, the last loop iteration is truncated to fill to the end of the selection or specified Loop Length.
Once looped, the looped region can be edited much like a region group. For example, selecting and moving a looped region selects and moves the source region and all its loop iterations together.
Looped regions (all iterations) display a Loop icon in the lower, right corner or each loop iteration.
Looped region
Source region Loop iterations
Looped region
Loop icons
Looping a region does not loop any automation associated with the source region. Use the Copy Special and Paste Special Repeat
To Fill Selection commands to copy automation for the source loop to all loop itera-
tions (see “Automation and Looped Regions” on page 464).
Creating Looped Regions
You can create looped regions using the Loop command or using the Loop Trim tool.
For information on using the Loop Trim
tool, see “Loop Trim Tool” on page 378.
To loop a region:
1 Select an audio or MIDI region, or region group.
You can also select regions across tracks for looping.
Selecting and looping more than one region on a track only loops the first region in the selection.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 461
2 Choose Region > Loop. The Region Looping dialog opens.
4 If desired, select the Enable Crossfade option.
This will create a crossfade at the loop point. To edit the loop crossfade, do the following:
• Click the Settings button.
• Configure the Loop Crossfades.
• Click OK.
Region Looping dialog
3 Do one of the following:
• Select the Number of Loops option and enter the number of times to loop the region.
• Select the Loop Length option and enter the duration according to the main timebase. If the duration is not an exact multiple of the source loop’s duration, the last loop iteration will be truncated.
• Select the Loop Until End of Session or
Next Region option. The looped region will be repeated until the end of the session, or until the next region on the track. If necessary, the last loop iteration will be truncated to fit.
Loop Crossfade dialog
For information on working with crossfades
in Pro Tools, see Chapter 21, “Fades and
5 In the Region Looping dialog, click OK.
To rename the looped region name only (or the region name and disk file name):
1 Double-click the loop icon with the Grabber.
2 Type in a new name.
3 Choose to name region name only, or rename region name and disk file name.
4 Click OK.
462 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To unloop a looped region:
1 Select the looped region.
2 Choose Region > Unloop. The Unloop Regions dialog opens.
Unloop Regions dialog
3 Do one of the following:
• Click Remove to unloop and remove all loop iterations except the first full loop iteration (source region).
– or –
• Click Flatten to unloop and create individual regions from each loop iteration.
Region Ungroup functions on loops the same as using the Unloop command and choosing Flatten.
To unloop and ungroup a selection down to its individual regions:
1 Select a looped region that contains one or more region groups.
2 Choose Region > Ungroup All.
Unlooping and Flattening Looped Regions with
Separate Regions Menu Commands
The Separate Regions commands (At Selection,
On Grid, and At Transients) will automatically unloop and flatten looped regions before separating.
Editing Looped Regions
Looped regions can be edited as a group (all loop iterations together) or as individual regions
(each loop iteration). For example, selecting a looped region with the Grabber tool selects the entire loop (the source region and all its loop iterations), but clicking the Loop icon of one of the loop iterations selects only that one iteration.
Moving a looped region moves the source region and all its loop iterations together as a group. Loop iterations cannot be moved independently of their source region. If you move or paste another shorter region over a looped region the loop is continued after the new region.
The parts of a separated looped region can be adjusted independently.
To select a looped region as a group (all loop iterations), do one of the following:
â– With the Grabber tool or Smart Tool, singleclick the looped region.
– or –
â– With the Selector tool, double-click the looped region.
The source region and all its loop iterations are selected.
To select an individual source region or loop iteration, do one of the following:
â– With the Grabber tool or Smart Tool, singleclick the Loop icon of the source region or loop iteration.
– or –
â– With the Selector tool, single click the Looped
Region icon and drag to the left until the region is selected.
Chapter 20: Working with Regions and Selections 463
Tabbing to Transients and Region Boundaries
Tab to Transients tabs to transients and region boundaries in a looped region. Normal Tab (Tab to Transients disabled) tabs to the start and end boundaries of the entire looped region.
Trimming Looped Regions
Trimming looped regions can be done using the
Trim tool, the Loop Trim tool, or one of the
Trim Region commands. The Loop Trim tool trims the entire looped region. The Trim tool trims only the individual loop iteration while increasing or decreasing the number of loop iterations to fill the total length of the looped region.
For information on trimming looped regions
using the Loop Trim tool, see “Loop Trim
If the source region is extended to the left by using the Trim tool to change the total length of the looped region, the source region is moved earlier in the Timeline and loop iterations fill in up to the point where the last original loop iteration ended. If the trim to the left is part of the source region’s length, the source region is not moved and a partial loop iteration is created to the left of the source region. This is a powerful feature that lets you make quick changes to your arrangement by using partial loops as upbeats, or by extending looped sound effects or ambience earlier in a film score.
To trim a looped region to the selection:
1 Use the Selector tool to make an Edit selection including some or all of the looped region.
2 Choose Edit > Trim Region and one of the
Trim Region commands (To Selection, To Fill Selection, Start to Fill Selection, End to Fill Selection).
Automation and Looped Regions
Looping an audio region does not loop any automation associated with the source region.
This lets you apply automation across an entire looped region. For example, you may want to have a long fade across part or all of a looped region that is independent of any one loop iteration.
You can also repeat automation on each loop iteration. For looped audio regions, use the Copy
Special and Paste Special Repeat to Fill Selection commands to copy and paste any or all automation data from the source region to some or all of its loop iterations.
To copy and paste automation from the source region to loop iterations:
1 Select the source region.
2 Choose Edit > Copy Special and one of the
Copy Special commands (All Automation, Pan
Automation, or Plug-in Automation), depending on what automation you want to copy.
Selected Pan automation for Special Copy
3 Select the entire looped region.
4 Choose Edit > Paste Special > Repeat to Fill Selection.
Pan automation Special Paste to Fill Selection
464 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 21: Fades and Crossfades
Using Fades
You can quickly and easily fade-ins or fade-outs on a region, or crossfades between adjacent audio regions. Crossfading is the process of fading between two regions of audio to prevent pops, clicks, or sudden changes in sound. Crossfades have many applications, from smoothing transitions between regions to creating special audio effects. The crossfade duration, position, and shape are all user-definable.
Fades are computed and written to disk. Crossfades that are written to disk are stored in a folder named “Fade Files” within the session folder. When you play back your track,
Pro Tools reads and plays back the fade file from disk.
Pro Tools does not let you replace fade-ins and fade-outs with crossfades. To add a crossfade between regions, any existing fade-ins and fadeouts between the regions must first be deleted.
Pro Tools HD includes an AutoFade feature that provides real-time fades without pro-
cessing them to disk (see “Using AutoFades” on page 475).
About Crossfades and Curves
To create a crossfade between two regions, use the Selector tool to select across the end point of the first region and the start point of the second.
The length of the selection determines the length of the crossfade. Though fades may appear to be discrete regions, they cannot actually be separated from the regions in which they were created. You can, however, create fade-ins
Use the Fades dialog to select, view, and manipulate the curves used to perform fades and crossfades. Different volume curves can be assigned to the fade-out and fade-in portions of crossfades. The Fades dialog can also render a preview of the fade.
The following examples illustrate common types of crossfades, and explain how the type of selection you make determines the character of the crossfade.
Since crossfades are created by fading between overlapping audio material, a crossfade cannot be performed on regions that do not contain audio material beyond their region boundaries.
Chapter 21: Fades and Crossfades 465
Standard Crossfade (Centered)
region 1 splice point fade out curve fade in curve region 2
This crossfade type requires that region 2 contain audio material before its start point.
Post Crossfade
border of region 1 and 2 region 1 region 2 crossfade selection
Centered crossfade
This type of selection creates a crossfade on both sides of the splice point, which affects the volume of region 1 and region 2. It is the most common type of crossfade.
This crossfade type requires that region 1 contain audio material beyond its end point, and region 2 contain audio material before its start point.
Pre Crossfade
selection range begins just after end of region 1
Post crossfade
This type of selection creates a crossfade after the splice point. It is useful if you want to maintain the amplitude of region 1 until its very end.
When making selections for crossfades that occur on the border of two regions, you can use the Tab key to move the cursor to the exact beginning or end of a region.
This crossfade type requires that region 1 contain audio material beyond its end point.
border of region 1 and 2 region 1 region 2 selection range extends just up to beginning of region 2
Pre crossfade
This type of selection creates a crossfade before the splice point. This lets you maintain the volume of the very beginning of region 2 instead of fading across it, which is useful if there is a strong attack at the beginning of region 2 that you want to preserve. When making selections for crossfades that occur on the border of two regions, you can use the Tab key to move the cursor to the exact beginning or end of a region.
466 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Fades Dialog
When choosing the Edit > Fades command you can use the Fades dialog to select, view, and preview fades and crossfades, and to edit the curves used to perform fades and crossfades. A fade-in shows the In Shape settings, but not the Out
Shape settings, and likewise a fade-out shows the Out Shape settings, but not the In Shape settings.
The controls in the Fades dialog include:
Audition
Click this button to audition fades. Pro Tools supports fade auditioning directly from your audio interface outputs.
View First Track (Crossfades Only)
If you are cross-fading between more than one track, this button allows you to view and preview the audio of the first in a pair of adjacent tracks.
View Second Track (Crossfades Only)
Fades dialog, fade-out
If you are cross-fading between more than one track this button allows you to view and preview the audio of the second in a pair of adjacent tracks.
View Both Tracks (Crossfades Only)
Click this button to display the waveforms of the first two adjacent tracks in a multitrack crossfade.
Fade Curves Only
Click this button to display the specified fade curves without showing the actual audio waveforms. This is the default view when you open the Fades dialog.
Fades dialog, crossfade
Chapter 21: Fades and Crossfades 467
Fade Curves and Separate Waveforms
Fade-Out Shape Settings
Click this button to display the specified fade curves along with separate views of the fade-in and fade-out waveforms.
Fade Curves and Superimposed Waveforms
Click this button to display the specified fade curves along with superimposed views of the fade-in and fade-out waveforms.
Fade Curves and Summed Waveform
Click this button to display the specified fade curves along with a single waveform representing the summation of the any crossfaded audio.
Zoom In
Click this button to scale the view of the waveform’s amplitude upwards. Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac) for the default view scale.
Zoom Out
Fade-Out Shape
The Out Shape setting lets you define the shape of the fade-out from a region for a fade, or from region 1 for a crossfade.
Standard Selects a single continuous fade curve.
This creates a general-purpose fade that can be edited by dragging the curve itself.
S-Curve Selects an S-shaped curve, which inverts its beginning and end characteristics. This makes it possible to fade out faster at the curve’s start and slower at its end, for example. S-shaped curves can be useful with material that is difficult to crossfade effectively. S-curves can be edited by dragging the curve in the curve editor.
Preset Curves Seven commonly used preset curves are provided for fast crossfade creation.
These can be edited by dragging the end points of the curve in the curve editor portion of this dialog. The seven presets are as follows:
â—† Preset Curve 1 stays at full volume throughout the fade, then immediately drops the volume at the end of the fade.
Click this button to scale the view of the waveform’s amplitude downwards. Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Mac) for the default view scale.
Preset Curve 1
468 Pro Tools Reference Guide
â—† Preset Curve 2 fades out relatively slowly, keeping the volume fairly high throughout the duration of the fade.
Link Settings
(Crossfades Only)
Preset Curve 2
â—† Preset Curve 3 fades out slightly faster, keeping the volume slightly lower during the fade.
Preset Curve 3
â—† Preset Curve 4 fades out with a linear fade.
This is the default curve.
Preset Curve 4
â—† Preset Curve 5 fades out quickly at the beginning of the crossfade.
Preset Curve 5
â—† Preset Curve 6 drops the volume even more quickly at the beginning of the fade.
Preset Curve 6
â—† Preset Curve 7 silences any audio at the beginning of the fade.
Fade Link
The Link setting links the selected fade-out and fade-in curves of a crossfade. If you adjust one curve, the corresponding curve is also adjusted.
This ensures that the resulting crossfade is an equal power or equal gain crossfade, depending on which one you select.
Equal Power Recommended for material that is not phase coherent, as in the case of a crossfade between two completely different types of material. Use this option to avoid the volume drop that can occur with an Equal Gain crossfade.
With this fade, you can Alt-click (Windows) or
Option-click (Mac) the fade curve to reset it to its default shape.
Equal Gain Recommended for material that is phase-coherent or nearly phase-coherent, as in the case of a crossfade between identical regions/instruments (for example, a repeated drum loop). Use this option to avoid clipping that can occur when using an Equal Power crossfade. With this fade, you can Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the fade curve to reset it to its default shape.
Preset Curve 7
Chapter 21: Fades and Crossfades 469
None Disables linking between the fade-out and fade-in curves, and lets you freely adjust them separately, including start and end points. This option also allows you to create custom crossfade shapes.
Use Dither
Dither option for Fades
The Use Dither option turns on a preset, noiseshaped dither function that improves audio performance when fading in or fading out of silence, and crossfading between low amplitude regions. Dithering is usually not necessary when applying fades to regions with audio at high amplitudes. You can disable Dither while editing fades in the Fades dialog to speed up previews and fade recalculation, then re-enable Dither to create the final fade or crossfade.
Fade-In Shape Settings
Adjusting the end point of a fade curve
When Link is set to Equal Power or Equal Gain, you can edit only the fade-in portion of the curve, by pressing Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac) while dragging. To edit only the fade-out portion of the curve, press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) while dragging.
Slope Settings
(Fade-In or Fade-Out Only)
Fade Link
The Slope settings affect the slope of the fade-in or fade-out. Select either equal power or equal gain. For more information on equal power and
equal gain fades, see “Link Settings” on page 469.
Fade-in Shape
The In Shape setting lets you define the shape of the fade-in to a region for a fade, or to region 2 for a crossfade.
Standard Selects a single continuous fade curve.
This creates a general-purpose fade that can be edited by dragging the curve itself.
S-Curve Selects an S-shaped curve, which inverts its beginning and end characteristics. This makes it possible to fade in faster at the start of the curve, and slower at the end. S-shaped curves are useful with material that is difficult to fade effectively. S-curves can be edited by dragging the curve in the curve editor.
470 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Preset Curves Seven commonly used preset curves are provided for fast creation. These can be edited by dragging the end points of the curve in the curve editor portion of this dialog.
The seven presets are as follows:
â—† Preset Curve 1 fades in at full volume immediately at the beginning of the fade and keeps it there throughout the fade.
Preset Curve 1
â—† Preset Curve 2 fades in quickly in the beginning, reaching full amplitude fairly early in the fade.
â—† Preset Curve 7 silences any audio until the end of the fade.
Preset Curve 7
Typical Curve Combinations
Following are the available combinations of fade-out and fade-in curves.
Linear Crossfade This is a good general purpose crossfade with a smooth, even transition between region 1 and region 2.
1-out 2-in
Preset Curve 2
â—† Preset Curve 3 fades in moderately fast.
Preset Curve 3
â—† Preset Curve 4 fades in with a linear fade curve. This is the default curve.
Linear Crossfade
Equal Power Crossfade This is a good general purpose crossfade useful in cases where a linear crossfade seems to create a noticeable drop in volume across the splice point.
1-out 2-in
Preset Curve 4
â—† Preset Curve 5 fades in slowly at the beginning of the fade.
Preset Curve 5
â—† Preset Curve 6 fades in even more slowly than the previous curve.
Equal Power Crossfade
Overlap Fade This combination of curves keeps both regions at full amplitude throughout the crossfade: region 2 “jumps in” at the beginning and region 1 “jumps out” at the end.
1-out
2-in
Overlap Crossfade
Preset Curve 6
Chapter 21: Fades and Crossfades 471
Fade and Crossfade Preferences
You can set default fade and crossfade settings.
These settings load as your “base” settings when you use the Create Fades command, and the
Fade to Start and Fade to End commands.
To set the fade and crossfade preferences:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Editing tab.
2 Set the Pre-Roll and Post-Roll times for Fade previews.
Creating Fades at the
Beginnings and Ends of
Regions
Pro Tools lets you create fade-ins and fade-outs at the beginnings and ends of regions.
With Pro Tools HD, you can also use an automatic fade-in/out option, which applies real time fade-ins/outs to all regions during playback. These fades are not written to disk, but are automatically applied during playback. For
more information, see “Using AutoFades” on page 475.
Fade preferences
3 Click Fade In and set the default shape for fade-ins, then click OK.
4 Click Fade Out and set the default shape for fade-outs, then click OK.
5 Click Crossfade and set the default shape for crossfades, then click OK.
6 Click OK.
Region with a fade-in
Creating Fade-Ins and Fade-Outs
Depending on how you make the selection, you can position a fade-in or fade-out at the exact beginning or end of a region, or position it so it extends into a blank area of the track. The length of the selection in the region determines the length of the fade-in or fade-out.
You can also fade to the beginning or end of a region from an insertion point.
Although fades appear to be discrete regions, they cannot be separated from the regions in which they were created.
When changing tempo in a tick-based audio track, fade-ins and fade-outs remain with their parent regions. Fades maintain their absolute duration and are consequently recalculated after any tempo changes.
472 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To create a fade-in:
1 Select the beginning of the region that you want to fade in. The selection must extend to the exact beginning of the region or a blank area prior to the region in the track.
Selecting the beginning of a region for a fade-in
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Fades > Create.
– or –
• Press Control+F (Windows) or Command+F (Mac).
3 Select the fade-in curve and configure the other Fade settings.
4 Click the Audition button to audition the fade.
5 Adjust the curve by dragging it or by selecting a different shape from the In Shape pop-up menu.
6 Click OK.
Pro Tools calculates the fade and writes it to disk. The selected fade curve appears in the region.
To create a fade-out:
1 Select the end of the region that you want to fade out. The selection must extend to the exact end of the region or a blank area after the region in the track.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Fades > Create.
– or –
• Press Control+F (Windows) or Command+F (Mac).
3 Select the fade-out curve and configure the other Fade settings.
4 Click the Audition button to audition the fade.
5 Adjust the curve by dragging it or by selecting a different shape from the Out Shape pop-up menu.
6 Click OK.
Pro Tools calculates the fade and writes it to disk. The chosen fade curve appears in the region.
Fade lengths can later be resized with any of the Trim tools.
To fade from the insertion point to a region start point:
1 Place the cursor at a location in the region.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Fades > Fade To Start.
– or –
• Press Alt+D (Windows) or Control+D
(Mac).
The fade is applied based on the Fade In prefer-
ences (see “Fade and Crossfade Preferences” on page 472).
Selecting the end of a region for a fade-out
Chapter 21: Fades and Crossfades 473
To fade from the insertion point to a region end point:
1 Place the cursor at a location in the region.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Fades > Fade To End.
– or –
• Press Alt+G (Windows) or Control+G
(Mac).
The fade is applied based on the Fade Out pref-
erences (see “Fade and Crossfade Preferences” on page 472).
Creating a Crossfade
To create a crossfade between two regions:
1 With the Selector tool, click at the point where you want the crossfade to begin in the first region and drag to where you want it to end in the second region. Crossfade selections can begin and end anywhere in their respective regions.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Fades > Create.
– or –
• Press Control+F (Windows) or Command+F (Mac).
3 Use the view buttons to adjust the view of the crossfade. It may take a few moments to calculate the waveform display for long selections.
4 Select an Out Shape and an In Shape.
5 Select a Linking option.
6 Click the Audition button to audition the crossfade. For long crossfades, it may take
Pro Tools a few moments to calculate and load the audio into playback RAM.
7 Do one of the following:
• Adjust the curves by selecting different preset shapes with the Out Shape and In Shape pop-up menus.
– or –
• Drag the Fade-In and Fade-Out curves to a custom shape. By choosing None as the
Linking option, you can drag the beginning or end points of a fade curve to adjust its beginning or end point.
8 Click the Audition button to audition the crossfade again.
9 When the crossfade sounds right, click OK.
The fade is calculated and written to disk, but the audio files and regions remain unchanged.
Crossfades are stored in the Fade Files folder in the session folder.
Crossfade lengths can later be resized with any of the Trim tools.
To remove a crossfade, do one of the following:
â– Select the area of the track containing any crossfades you want to delete and choose Edit >
Fades > Delete.
â– Select the crossfade with the Time Grabber tool and press Backspace (Windows) or Delete
(Mac).
â– Right-click the crossfade with any of the edit tools and select Delete Fades from the pop-up menu.
To trim a crossfade:
1 Select the crossfade with the Time Grabber tool, or double-click it with the Selector tool.
2 With any of the Trim tools, trim either side of the crossfade. The crossfade is recalculated to reflect the newly trimmed length.
474 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Crossfades On Tick-Based Audio Tracks
Crossfades are re-rendered after changing tempo in a tick-based audio track. The new crossfade is the same duration as the crossfade prior to the tempo change.
If there is not enough audio material to complete the crossfade, or if the new crossfade area falls outside of valid region boundaries, the crossfade is removed.
Pre and Post Crossfade Selections
By making a selection that begins or ends precisely on the border of two regions, you can create “pre” or “post” crossfades. Use the Tab key to place the insertion point at the exact beginning or end of a region.
To create a pre- or post-crossfade:
1 With the Selector tool, click in the track that contains the regions you want to crossfade.
2 Do one of the following:
• Press Tab to move forward to the next region boundary.
– or –
• Press Control+Tab (Windows) or Option+Tab (Mac) to move back to the previous region boundary.
3 Extend the selection as follows:
• Shift-drag to adjust your selection, or press
Shift+Tab to extend the selection forward to the next region boundary.
– or –
• Press Control+Shift+Tab (Windows) or Option+Shift+Tab (Mac) to extend the selection back to the previous region boundary.
4 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Fades > Create.
– or –
• Press Control+F (Windows) or Command+F (Mac).
5 Select a fade type and click OK.
Using AutoFades
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Pro Tools HD can automatically apply real-time fade-ins and fade-outs to all region boundaries in the session. Specify the duration (0 to 10 ms) for automatic real-time fades with the Auto Region Fade In/Out Length preference in the Operation Preferences page). These fade-ins and fade-outs are performed during playback and do not appear in the Edit window, and are not written to disk.
The automatic fade-in/out option also has an effect on Voice borrowing in a session. Whenever a lower-priority virtual track “pops thru” a silence in a higher-priority track on the same voice, a fade-in and fade-out is applied to the transition.
This feature is especially useful in post production situations such as dialogue tracking. For example, you could assign both a dialogue track and a “room tone” track with matching background to the same voice. You could then set the AutoFade option to a moderate length (4 ms or so) so that whenever a silence occurred in the dialog, playback would switch smoothly to and from the background track without clicks or pops.
Chapter 21: Fades and Crossfades 475
Using automatic fade-ins/outs saves you the trouble of editing to zero-crossings or creating numerous rendered fades in order to eliminate clicks or pops in playback. However, since these autofades are not written to disk, those clicks or pops still exist in the underlying sound file.
Consequently, those anomalies still appear if the Duplicate AudioSuite plug-in or the Export
Selected as Sound Files command (from the Region List) are used to duplicate multiple regions as a continuous file. To render these real-time auto fades to disk, choose File > Bounce to >
Disk.
To set the length of automatic fade-ins/outs:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Operation tab.
2 Enter a value between 0 and 10 ms for the
Auto Region Fade In/Out Length. A value of zero
(the default) means that no auto-fading will occur.
3 Click OK. The AutoFade value is saved with the session, and is automatically applied to all free-standing region boundaries until you change it.
Creating Fades and
Crossfades in Batches
Using Batch Fades, you can create many fades at once. Select across several regions and use the
Create Fades command to create crossfades for each region transition. If your selection includes regions that already have crossfades, this feature lets you modify them.
To apply crossfades between multiple regions:
1 With the Selector tool, click in the first region in which you want to create a crossfade. Make sure that the selection includes the entire region.
2 Drag to extend the selection to include the last region you want to crossfade. Make sure that the selection includes the entire region.
Selected regions for Batch Fades
3 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Fades > Create.
– or –
• Press Control+F (Windows) or Command+F (Mac).
476 Pro Tools Reference Guide
4 In the Batch Fades dialog, select whether you want to Create New Fades, Create New Fade-Ins
& Outs, Adjust Existing Fades, or a combination of these options.
If you select to create new fades and new fadeins and outs, new crossfades are created at each region boundary that is bordered by another selected region, a fade-in is created at the start of the first region, and a fade-out is created at the end of the last region.
Moving and Nudging Fades and Crossfades
Fades and crossfades can be moved or nudged in tracks, independently of their contributing regions. Moving or nudging fade-ins or fade-outs reveals or hides audio as the fade is moved from the edge of a contributing region. Moving or nudging crossfades changes the overlap point of the contributing regions. Moving or nudging fades is also constrained by underlying region boundaries.
Moving or Nudging Fades or
Crossfades within Regions
To move or nudge a fade or crossfade within its contributing regions:
1 Select the fade or crossfade by doing one of the following:
• Use the Time Grabber tool to select the fade.
– or –
• Use the Selector tool to select a range that includes the fade.
Batch Fades dialog
5 Select the placement of the Fades: Pre-Splice,
Centered, or Post-Splice (see “About Crossfades and Curves” on page 465).
6 Enter a crossfade length in milliseconds.
7 Click OK.
Pro Tools creates the fades for all selected regions.
Fade lengths can later be resized with any of the Trim tools.
Selecting a fade with the Time Grabber
Chapter 21: Fades and Crossfades 477
2 Move the fade by doing one of the following:
• Drag the fade with the Time Grabber tool to a new location on the track.
– or –
• Nudge the fade by pressing Plus (+) or Minus (–) on the numeric keypad to move the fade forward or backward on the track.
2 Move the region selection by doing one of the following:
• Drag the region selection with the Grabber tool to a new location on the track.
– or –
• Nudge the region selection by pressing Plus
(+) or Minus (–) on the numeric keypad to move the region forward or backward on the track.
Dragging the fade with the Time Grabber
Result of moved fade
Moving and Nudging Regions with
Fades or Crossfades
Moving Regions Containing Fades or
Crossfades
When you move or nudge a region selection that contains a fade-in, fade-out, or crossfade, the fade moves with the selection.
To move a region selection with fades or crossfades:
1 Do one of the following:
• Click a region with the Time Grabber tool
(or double-click with the Selector tool) to select the region along with the fade (in or out).
– or –
• Select multiple regions that include the fades and crossfades you want to move.
478 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Dragging a region with its fade
Nudging Regions Adjacent to Fade-Ins or Fade-Outs
When you nudge a region selection adjacent to a fade-in or fade-out, but do not select the fade, the adjacent fade stretches or shrinks to maintain the fade start or end point. The amount of change depends on the amount of audio material outside the fade start or end point.
To a nudge region without its fade:
1 Select the region, but not the fade.
Selecting a region without its fade
2 Nudge the region by pressing Plus (+) or Minus (–) on the numeric keypad.
Nudging a region without its fade
Moving Regions Adjacent to Crossfades
When you move either of the regions that contributes to a crossfade, the regions separate. The status of the fade depends on the Preserve Fades when Editing preference (in the Editing Preferences page).
To separate crossfaded regions and retain the corresponding fades:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the Editing tab.
2 Select Preserve Fades when Editing.
3 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
4 Use the Time Grabber or Separation Grabber tool to select one of the contributing regions to a crossfade.
Selecting a region with a crossfade
5 Drag the selected region with the Grabber.
To separate crossfaded regions and remove the fade:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the Editing tab.
2 Deselect Preserve Fades when Editing.
3 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
4 Use the Time Grabber or Separation Grabber tool to select one of the contributing regions to a crossfade.
Selecting a region with a crossfade
5 Drag the selected region with the Grabber.
Separating regions while removing fades
Nudging Regions Adjacent to
Crossfades
When you nudge either of the regions that contributes to a crossfade, the fade stretches to preserve the relative position of the crossfade start and end points. The amount of stretch depends on the amount of overlap between the contributing regions.
If you nudge a region beyond the boundary of available audio for the crossfade, the fade is removed.
Separating regions while preserving fades
Chapter 21: Fades and Crossfades 479
To nudge a region and stretch its crossfade:
1 Use the Time Grabber tool to select one of the contributing regions to the crossfade.
Where your selection overlaps any fade-ins or fade-outs, the fade is trimmed to fit the selection.
Selecting a region with a crossfade
2 Nudge the region by pressing Plus (+) or Minus (–) on the numeric keypad.
Selecting material that overlaps a fade-in
Stretching the crossfade by nudging
Result of Separate Region command on fade-in
Where your selection overlaps a crossfade, the crossfade is separated into a fade-out and fade-in at the selection boundary.
Separating Regions That
Include Fades or Crossfades
You can create regions from track material that overlaps with fades or crossfades. The fades from the source region are adjusted to the new region.
To separate a region that overlaps with a fade or crossfade:
1 With the Selector tool, drag to select the material for the new region.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Separate Region > At Selection
– or –
• Press Control+E (Windows) or Command+E (Mac).
Selecting material that overlaps a crossfade
Result of Separate Region command on crossfade
480 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Trimming Regions That
Include Fades or Crossfades
Trimming a Region to a Fade Boundary
You can trim regions that are adjacent to fade and crossfade boundaries.
To trim a region on a fade boundary:
â–
With the Trim tool, click the region boundary and drag to trim the region. The fade remains constant and follows the new region boundary.
Trimming to a selection across multiple fades
Dragging a region boundary with the Trim tool
Trimming to a Selection Across Fades or
Crossfades
You can trim regions to selections that include fades or crossfades.
To trim a region to a selection that includes fades, do one of the following:
â–
Make a selection in the track and choose Edit
> Trim Region > To Selection. You can Trim across multiple regions and fades. Affected fades are adjusted to the new region boundaries.
â–
Click with the Selector in the region and choose Edit > Trim Regions > Start to Insertion or End to Insertion. You can trim to region or fade boundary in the track.
Fade Boundaries and Shapes in Displayed Automation View
Fade boundaries and fade shapes are shown and can be edited in Automation views, allowing for more precise viewing and editing of automation data. For more information on Automation and
Automation views, see Chapter 30, “Automation.”
Fade information in Automation view
Chapter 21: Fades and Crossfades 481
482 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 22: Managing Regions
Managing the regions in a session lets you keep system and storage requirements to a minimum, and simplify archiving requirements. This chapter describes several tools for managing files and regions in Pro Tools sessions.
For additional information on file manage-
ment see Chapter 13, “File and Session
Management and Compatibility.”
The Strip Silence Window
The Strip Silence window contains the following controls that let you set the parameters by which silence is defined when using the Strip Silence command. Adjusting these controls causes rectangles to temporarily appear in the selection
(see Figure 22 on page 485), indicating areas of
silence that will be affected by the Strip, Extract, or Separate commands.
Stripping Silence from
Regions
The Strip Silence commands analyze audio selections—across multiple tracks—and removes
(or extracts) any areas of silence, dividing the selection into smaller regions and removing the silent areas.
You can use Strip Silence commands to strip (remove) silence from a region, or instead, extract the audio and keep the silence. Getting rid of silent areas is useful when preparing to compact
audio (see “Compacting an Audio File” on page 488). Strip Silence automatically separates
the selection into separate regions, which is useful if you want to quantize audio to musical values, or locate sound effects to SMPTE locations.
Strip Silence window
Strip Threshold Sets the amplitude threshold
(from –48 dB to 0 dB) for Strip Silence. Audio falling below this threshold is considered silence and removed. Audio above the threshold is retained and defined as new regions.
Minimum Strip Duration Sets the minimum duration (from 0 to 10,000 ms) that the material below the threshold must last to be considered silence. Use this control to avoid countless small regions that may occur within a selection.
Chapter 22: Managing Regions 483
Region Start Pad Specifies a time value to be added to the beginning of each new region created with Strip Silence. This is useful for preserving musical material that falls below the threshold, such as the breath before a vocal phrase, or the finger slide before a guitar chord.
Region End Pad Specifies a time value to be appended to the end of each new region created with Strip Silence, thereby preserving the nuances in the decay of the material.
Strip Clears the detected silence, but leaves the regions containing audio on the track.
Extract Clears the audio and leaves the silent portions of the track (in other words, an “inverse” strip silence feature that is ideal for generating room tone or ambience to use elsewhere).
Rename Opens the Rename Selected Regions di-
alog (see “Auto-Naming for Strip Silence” on page 484).
Separate Separates regions based on the boundaries detected by Strip Silence.
Auto-Naming for Strip Silence
The Rename button in the Strip Silence window opens the Rename Selected Regions dialog, which determines how regions are named with the Strip Silence command. The dialog remembers your previous settings, which can be cleared by clicking the Clear button.
Rename Selected Regions dialog
Name Specifies the base name for regions created with Strip Silence.
Number Specifies the number at which sequential auto-numbering starts.
Zeros Specifies the number of zeroes that occur before the appended auto numbers.
Suffix Specifies text appended to the end of the name, after the auto numbering.
For example, if you set these naming options to:
• Name = SFX
• Auto Number Start = 23
• Leading Zeros = 1
• Suffix = .Reel1
484 Pro Tools Reference Guide
The names generated for regions created by Strip
Silence would be:
• SFX023.Reel1
• SFX024.Reel1
• SFX025.Reel1
• SFX026.Reel1
• SFX027.Reel1
• SFX028.Reel1
5 To retain material before and after the new regions, adjust the sliders for Region Start Pad and
Region End Pad.
Attack to be padded
Decay to be padded
Using Strip Silence
To strip silence from an audio selection:
1 Select one or more audio regions.
2 Choose Edit > Strip Silence.
3 To set the naming scheme for regions created with Strip Silence, click Rename to open the Re-
naming dialog. For details, see “Auto-Naming for Strip Silence” on page 484.
4 In the Strip Silence window, adjust the sliders for Strip Threshold and Minimum Strip Duration until the Strip Silence rectangles appear in the selection.
Figure 22. Strip Silence rectangles
For finer resolution on these sliders, press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) while adjusting them.
Strip Silence, padding region start and end points
6 Once the Strip Silence rectangles encompass the audio that you want to keep, press the Strip button.
The material defined as silence is removed from the selection and new regions are created, which also appear in the Region List.
The Strip Silence command is nondestructive and does not remove audio data from parent audio files. In addition to the Undo command, you can use the Heal Separation command to restore stripped material.
Strip Silence works with stereo and multichannel tracks, and keeps their audio regions phase-coherent.
Chapter 22: Managing Regions 485
To extract audio from an audio selection using
Strip Silence:
1 Make an Edit selection.
2 Choose Edit > Strip Silence.
3 To set the naming scheme for regions created with Strip Silence, click Rename to open the Re-
naming dialog (see “Auto-Naming for Strip Silence” on page 484).
4 In the Strip Silence window, adjust the sliders for Strip Threshold and Minimum Strip Duration until the Strip Silence rectangles appear in the selection.
5 Click the Extract button.
All audio above the designated threshold is deleted and the “silent” portions of the track are left.
To separate regions using Strip Silence:
1 Make an Edit or Time selection.
2 Choose Edit > Strip Silence.
3 To set the naming scheme for regions created with Strip Silence, click Rename to open the Re-
naming dialog (see “Auto-Naming for Strip Silence” on page 484).
4 In the Strip Silence window, adjust the sliders for Strip Threshold and Minimum Strip Duration until the Strip Silence rectangles appear in the selection.
5 Click the Separate button.
New regions are created based on the boundaries detected by Strip Silence.
Inserting Silence
The Insert Silence command is a simple and convenient way to insert silence on audio,
MIDI, and Instrument tracks. This command lets you make a selection on a track (or tracks) and insert precisely that amount of silence.
In Shuffle mode, all data on the track is shuffled later in the track by an amount equal to the selection.
In Grid mode, the Insert Silence command works just like the Clear command.
Shuffle Mode When inserting silence on multiple tracks in Shuffle mode, the following conditions apply:
â—† If any track is displayed as audio or MIDI data, the selected duration of silence is inserted into the audio or MIDI data and all underlying automation data on all selected tracks. All subsequent regions are shuffled by the amount of silence inserted. On MIDI tracks, only notes that are selected from the beginning are affected, so if you have selected the tail of a note and you Insert Silence, the note will remain unchanged.
â—† If all selected tracks are displayed as automation data, the selected range is cleared of automation data only of the type visible on each track. Regions are not shuffled. Instead, a blank gap appears equal to the length of the selection.
â—† If all selected tracks are displayed as automation data, press the Start key (Windows) or Control (Mac) while choosing the Insert Silence command to inserts silence on all automation playlists for all selected tracks. Regions are not shuffled.
486 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Slip Mode When inserting silence on multiple tracks in Slip mode, the following conditions apply:
â—† If any track is displayed as audio or MIDI data, the selected range is cleared of audio or MIDI data and all underlying automation data on all selected tracks.
â—† If all selected tracks are displayed as automation data, silence is inserted only into the automation type visible on each track.
â—† If all selected tracks are displayed as automation data, press the Start key (Windows) or Control (Mac) while choosing the Insert Silence command to insert silence on all automation playlists for all selected tracks.
To insert silence into a track:
1 Make a selection in a track or tracks. The length of the selection determines the duration of the silence inserted.
2 Choose Edit > Insert Silence.
For Shuffle mode, Pro Tools inserts the selected amount of silence. In the process, it splits the regions at the beginning of the insertion point, and moves the new regions later in the track by an amount equal to the length of the selection.
Consolidate Command
During the course of normal edit operations, any track can accumulate many regions. However, once a track or track range (such as a verse or chorus) reaches a satisfactory state, you may want to consolidate multiple regions into a single region.
When consolidating an entire audio track or just an Edit selection, a new audio file is written that consists of the entire selection, including any blank space.
When consolidating, muted regions are treated as silence. Otherwise, whether or not a track is muted, or contains Mute automation, does not affect the Consolidate command.
Consolidating an audio track does not consolidate underlying automation data. To create a single file with automation data applied to the audio, use Bounce to Disk
(see “Bounce to Disk” on page 746).
To consolidate regions within a track:
1 Do one of the following:
• Using the Time Grabber or Selector tool, select the regions you want to consolidate.
– or –
• To select all regions in a track, triple-click in its playlist with the Selector tool.
2 Choose Edit > Consolidate.
Chapter 22: Managing Regions 487
Compacting an Audio File
The Compact Selected command deletes unused portions of audio files to conserve disk space, and to prepare for cleaner hard drive back-ups.
The Compact Selected command also deletes any audio files for which there are no regions on tracks referencing those files.
Because it permanently deletes audio data, the
Compact Selected command should be used only after you have completely finished your editing and are sure that you have no further use for the unused audio data.
The Compact Selected command can pad the regions of the compacted file by a selectable amount. If regions in your session use crossfades, or if you want to pad the regions for the sake of any future trimming, you should enter an appropriate amount of padding (in milliseconds).
The Compact Selected command is destructive and cannot be undone. It permanently alters the original audio files. There is no way to recover data deleted by this command.
To compact an audio file:
1 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose Select > Unused. All regions that have not been placed in a track in the current session are highlighted in the Region List.
2 To remove all of these unused audio regions, choose Clear Selected from the Region List popup menu. When the dialog appears, choose Remove.
3 In the Region List, select the region or regions you want to compact.
4 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose
Compact Selected.
488 Pro Tools Reference Guide
5 Enter the amount of padding in milliseconds that you want for each region in the file.
6 Click Compact to compact the file or Cancel to cancel the command.
Once the Compact operation has been completed, the session is saved automatically.
Naming and Displaying
Regions
A typical session can become cluttered with dozens of tracks and hundreds of regions. There are a number of things you can do, however, to keep track of and manage a session’s regions, including:
• Renaming existing regions
• Specifying how auto-created regions are named
• Hiding auto-created regions
• Removing unused regions
Renaming Regions
In the course of a session you can rename regions to give them more descriptive names, or merely to shorten or simplify existing names.
When renaming a region that was auto-created during editing, the region becomes a user-defined region and is displayed in the Region List even when auto-created regions are hidden.
One of the easiest ways to rename a region, if it resides in a track, is to double-click it with one of the Grabber tools. However, if the region does not reside in a track, or if you want to rename several regions, use the Rename command in the Region List.
You can also rename a region in a track using the Rename command in the Region List popup menu.
To rename one or more regions:
1 If you will be renaming an auto-created region, select Show > Auto-Created in the Region
List.
2 Select one or more regions to be renamed in the Region List.
If the Region List Selection Follows Edit Selection option in the Editing Preferences page is enabled, you can highlight a region in the Region List by selecting it in a track.
3 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose
Rename.
4 In the Rename Selected dialog, enter a new name for the region. If a whole-file audio region was selected, specify whether to rename just the region, or both the region and the disk file.
Rename Selected dialog
5 Click OK to rename the region. If renaming multiple regions, you are prompted, successively, to rename each region.
To set auto-naming options for a region:
1 Select a region in the Region List.
2 Choose Auto Rename from the Region List pop-up menu.
3 In the Rename Regions dialog, enter the text to be used when naming regions created from the selected region.
Rename Regions Selected dialog
Name Determines the root name for the autocreated regions.
Number Sets the start number for the sequentially numbered new regions.
Zeros Determines the number of zeros that occur before the auto numbers.
Suffix Specifies text to be appended to the end of the name, following the auto numbering.
4 Click OK.
Auto-Naming Options
You can specify the auto-naming options for a region when new regions are created from it in the course of editing.
Auto-naming of regions does not affect the names of parent audio files. Instead, it stores pointers to the regions within the parent source file.
Hiding and Removing Unwanted
Regions
In the course of editing a session, the Region List can quickly fill up with many regions—with ones you have created intentionally and also with those that are automatically created by cutting, pasting, and separating other regions, or importing REX, ACID, or Region Group files.
Pro Tools lets you hide or remove regions in your session so you do not have to scroll through a long Region List.
Chapter 22: Managing Regions 489
Hiding Auto-Created Regions
You can hide regions that were automatically created during the course of editing.
To hide auto-created regions:
â– In the Region List, deselect Show > Auto-Created. With this option deselected, only user-defined regions appear in the Region List.
User-defined regions include:
• Whole-file regions
• Regions created during recording
• Imported regions
• Renamed regions
• Regions created as a result of AudioSuite processing
• New regions created with the Region >
Capture command or the Edit > Separate
Region commands
• Regions created by trimming whole-file audio regions
When auto-created regions are hidden,
Pro Tools warns you if the number of auto-created regions exceeds a certain threshold, and gives you the option of deleting them. If you choose to delete them, all auto-created regions are deleted at the same time.
To ensure that you keep any specific auto-cre-
ated regions, renaming them (see “Renaming
Removing Unwanted Regions
In the Region List, you can select unwanted regions and then use the Clear command to remove them from the session, whole-file regions can also be permanently removed from the hard drive on which they are stored.
The Clear command cannot be undone.
To find and remove unused regions in a session:
1 Do any of the following:
• For MIDI regions, from the Region List pop-up menu, choose Select > Unused.
– or –
• For audio regions, from the Region List pop-up menu, choose Select, then choose
Unused, Unused Except Whole Files, or
Offline (as appropriate).
2 After all unused regions are selected, choose
Clear from the Region List pop-up menu.
3 In the Clear Audio dialog, do one of the following:
• Click Remove to remove the unused regions from the session.
– or –
• If clearing a whole-file audio region and you want to permanently remove the audio file from your hard drive, click Delete.
Clear Selected dialog (audio regions)
When deleting audio files for multiple regions,
Pro Tools presents a warning dialog for each audio file.
To bypass repeated warning dialogs:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
Delete button in the Clear dialog. This permanently deletes each successive audio file from your hard drive (for each of the unused regions) without any further warning.
Use this “power delete mode” with caution:
Deletion of these files cannot be undone.
490 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and
Memory Locations
In Pro Tools, tempo, meter, and key changes reside in Conductor tracks. Tempo and meter events affect the timing of tick-based tracks, and also provide the tempo and meter map for the
Bar|Beat grid and Click. Key changes can affect
MIDI notes when applying transposition.
You can edit tempo events in the Tempo ruler or
Tempo Editor, meter events in the Meter ruler, and key changes in the Key Signature ruler.
Memory locations provide a powerful way to navigate your session while editing and arranging. These can be markers to specific points in the Timeline, Edit selections, or even a set of track display settings that can be recalled.
Song Start Marker
The Song Start Marker defines the initial tempo for Bar|Beat-based material. New sessions open with a default tempo of 120 BPM.
When a new session is created, the Song Start
Marker has no associated meter event. A meter event is added automatically at the Song Start if you add another meter event anywhere else on the Meter ruler.
Song Start Marker
The Song Start Marker can be moved, but not deleted.
The position of the Song Start Marker can also be changed in the Time Operations
window, see “Move Song Start” on page 520.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 491
To move the Song Start Marker by dragging:
â–
In the Tempo ruler, drag the Song Start Marker left or right.
Tempo
The Tempo ruler lets you edit tempo events one at a time. You can edit tempo visually in the
Tempo Editor, or make precise changes in tempo in the Tempo Operations window.
To set the default session tempo, see “Setting the Default Meter and Tempo” on page 274.
Dragging the Song Start Marker
If the Edit mode is set to Grid, the Song Start
Marker moves in increments of the current Grid value.
To move the Song Start Marker only, without moving the tick-based data, press
Start+Shift (Windows) or Control+Shift
(Mac) while dragging. When dragging the
Song Start Marker only, dragging is constrained to whole bar increments only.
To edit the initial tempo in the Song Start Marker:
1 In the Tempo ruler, double-click the Song Start
Marker.
2 In the Change Tempo dialog, enter a new BPM value.
3 Click OK.
You can use Beat Detective to generate
Bar|Beat markers (tempo map). For more in-
formation, see “Generating Bar|Beat Markers with Beat Detective” on page 545.
Tempo Events
Tempo events can be assigned to the Song Start
Marker to replace the default tempo (of 120
BPM), and they can be inserted anywhere else within the session to change tempo.
In Manual Tempo mode, the Tempo track is ignored and the session plays at the tempo
defined in the Transport window, see “Using Manual Tempo Mode” on page 275.
To display the Tempo ruler:
â– Select View > Rulers > Tempo.
Current Tempo
As tempo events are encountered during playback, the session’s current tempo is displayed in the Transport window.
Current Tempo indicator
Current Tempo displayed in Transport window
492 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Inserting Tempo Events
To insert a tempo event:
1 Click in the Tempo ruler where you want to insert the tempo event.
2 Click the Add Tempo Change button at the left of the Tempo ruler.
Add Tempo Change button
3 In the Tempo Change window, enter the Location and BPM value for the tempo change.
5 Click Ok. The new tempo event is inserted and appears in the Tempo ruler.
Inserted tempo event
Each tempo event has a small green triangle next to it that indicates its location. These triangles can be dragged to move the tempo event, and they can be double-clicked to edit the tempo event.
Editing and Moving Tempo Events
Existing tempo events can be moved, edited, deleted, and copied and pasted.
To move a tempo event by dragging:
â– In the Tempo ruler, drag the triangle for the tempo event left or right.
Tempo Change dialog
Select the Snap To Bar option to place the inserted tempo event cleanly on the first beat of the nearest measure.
4 To base the BPM value on something other than the default quarter note, select a different note value.
Dragging a tempo event
If the Edit mode is set to Grid, the dragged event snaps to the current Grid value.
To edit a tempo event:
1 In the Tempo ruler, double-click the tempo event.
2 In the Tempo Change window, enter a new
Location or BPM value for the tempo event.
3 Click OK.
To delete a tempo event:
â– While pressing Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac), move the cursor over the tempo event
(where the cursor changes to a Grabber with a
“–”) and click to remove it.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 493
To copy and paste several tempo events:
1 With the Selector tool, click and drag in the
Tempo ruler to select the range of measures that includes the tempo events.
Tempo events selected
Press Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) while dragging to select across all Conductor tracks.
2 Choose Edit > Copy.
3 Click in the Tempo ruler at the point where you want to paste the tempo events.
4 Choose Edit > Paste. The contents of the Clipboard are pasted from the insertion point, replacing any existing tempo events.
To extend an Edit selection in a track to the Tempo ruler:
1 With the Selector or Time Grabber tool, select a time range.
2 Shift-click in the Tempo ruler.
To select all tempo events:
â– Double-click with the Selector tool in the
Tempo ruler.
To clear a range of selected tempo events:
1 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Drag with the Selector tool in the Tempo ruler to select the tempo events you want to remove.
3 Choose Edit > Clear to delete the selected tempo events.
Tap Tempo
You can manually set the tempo for a Pro Tools session by tapping on your computer keyboard.
You can also use a connected MIDI keyboard to tap tempo.
To set the Manual Tempo by tapping on a computer keyboard:
1 To view the MIDI controls in the Transport window, select View > Transport > MIDI Controls.
2 In the Transport window, click the Tempo
Ruler Enable (Conductor) button so it becomes unhighlighted. Pro Tools switches to Manual
Tempo mode. In this mode, any tempo events in the Tempo track are ignored.
Tempo Ruler
Enable button
Manual Tempo mode enabled
Tempo field
3 Click in the Tempo field so it becomes highlighted and tap the “T” key on your computer keyboard repeatedly at the new tempo.
You can apply the new tempo to the entire session by changing the default tempo of the
Song Start Marker. See “Song Start Marker” on page 491.
494 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To set the Manual Tempo by tapping on an external MIDI keyboard:
1 To view the MIDI controls in the Transport window, select View > Transport > MIDI Controls.
2 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the MIDI tab.
3 Select Use MIDI To Tap Tempo
4 In the Transport window, click the Tempo
Ruler Enable (Conductor) button so it becomes unhighlighted. Pro Tools switches to Manual
Tempo mode. In this mode, any tempo events in the Tempo track are ignored.
5 Click in the Tempo field so it becomes highlighted and tap in the tempo by playing a note repeatedly at the new tempo on your MIDI keyboard controller.
To compute the new tempo, Pro Tools averages the last eight (or fewer) taps to determine the correct tempo. The computed BPM value appears in the Transport’s Tempo field.
Tempo Changes and Automation
Drift
When a track is sample-based, the track’s automation playlist is unaffected by changes in tempo. This means that automation is always aligned with the audio on the track with sample accuracy.
When a track is tick-based, however, the automation breakpoints change to match the changes in tempo.
Since the length of each audio region in a track is unaffected by changes in tempo, existing automation data is out of sync with the audio after a tempo change is made to a tick-based audio track.
When tempo changes on a tick-based audio track...
...automation gets out of sync with audio.
Tempo changes applied to larger regions
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 495
Minimizing Automation Drift
In general, automation drift is more pronounced with larger audio regions. By creating many small audio regions, the effects of automation drift can be minimized, because the start points of each subsequent region changes as the tempo changes. When tempo is decreased, automation expands. When tempo is increased, automation contracts.
Graphic Tempo Editor
The Tempo Editor, a resizeable window beneath the Tempo ruler in the Edit Window, lets you view and edit tempo information graphically.
Tempo Editor
The Tempo Editor is an expansion of the Tempo ruler, opening in the rulers section of the Edit
Window.
Tempo Editor expand/collapse triangle
Using many smaller regions...
...keeps audio aligned with automation changes.
Tempo changes applied to small regions
To break an audio region into smaller regions, use Beat Detective. For more informa-
tion, see Chapter 24, “Beat Detective.”
You can also separate regions at transients or based on the current grid resolution. For
more information, see “Separate Region
Tempo Edit Density
Tempo Editor
Tempo Resolution
Tempo events
To display the Tempo Editor, do one of the following:
â– Select View > Rulers > Tempo, then View >
Rulers > Tempo > Tempo Editor.
– or –
â– Click the Tempo Editor expand/collapse triangle.
496 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Editing Tempo Events in the Tempo
Editor
Tempo events in the Tempo Editor can be edited with any of the following methods:
â—† Individual tempo events can be dragged with any of the Grabber tools to adjust their location or value.
â—† A group of selected tempos can be scaled up or down with the Trim tool.
â—† New tempo events can be drawn in with the
Pencil tool to replace existing ones.
â—† Tempo events can be copied and pasted, nudged, and shifted.
Drawing Tempo Events
Tempo events can be drawn in the Tempo Editor using the Pencil tool.
These tool shapes are not functional in the Tempo
Editor.
Freehand The Freehand shape draws freely according to the movement of the mouse. The shape is reproduced as a series of steps according to the Tempo Edit Density setting. (For more information, see “Selecting Tempo Edit Density” on page 498.)
Line The Line shape draws in a straight line from click to release. Tempo values change in steps according to the Tempo Edit Density and Resolution. (For more information, see “Selecting
Tempo Edit Density” on page 498.)
Parabolic The Parabolic shape draws the best possible curve to fit your freehand drawing. The shape is reproduced as a series of steps according to the Tempo Edit Density setting.
S-Curve The S-Curve shape draws a best possible fit of an S-Curve to your freehand drawing. The shape is reproduced as a series of steps according to the Tempo Edit Density setting.
The Triangle, Square, and Random Pencil tool shapes do not apply to tempo events.
Selecting Tempo Resolution (BPM Rate)
The Tempo Editor lets you specify the note value that the BPM rate is based on for all tempo events created when you draw a tempo curve with the Pencil tool. This note value is the
Tempo Resolution.
Pencil tool shape pop-up menu
Tempo Resolution selector and pop-up menu
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 497
To select the Tempo Resolution (BPM rate) for
Pencil tool edits, do one of the following:
â– Click the Tempo Resolution selector and select a note value from the pop-up menu. Tempo events created by drawing with the Pencil tool are set to the specified note value for the BPM rate.
– or –
â– Select Follow Metronome Click. Tempo events created by drawing with the Pencil tool will have their BPM set to mirror the click values set by meter events in the Meter ruler.
A tempo curve can have different BPM values if there are meter click changes within the selected range.
Because it can be unnecessarily complicated to set meter events separately for each
Tempo event, Digidesign recommends choosing Follow Metronome Click in most cases.
Quarter note click Dotted quarter note click
Selecting Tempo Edit Density
The Tempo Editor lets you specify the density of tempo events created in the Tempo ruler when you draw a tempo curve with the Pencil tool.
Tempo Edit Density selector and pop-up menu
To select the Tempo Edit Density for Pencil tool edits:
â– Click the Tempo Edit Density selector and select a time value from the pop-up menu. Tempo events created by drawing with the Pencil tool are placed in the Tempo ruler at the specified density.
Pressing Start (Windows) or Control (Mac) before drawing a pencil line conforms already created tempo events to the drawn line rather than creating new tempo events.
Tempo curve with different click values
498 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Curve Adjustment Mode
Immediately after you draw new tempos using the Pencil tool, a tempo curve appears in blue, outlining the newly created tempo graph. Blue adjustment handles on the curve let you adjust the shape and size of the new tempo graph.
Tempo Curve Adjustment Handles
Grabbing Tempo Events
The Grabber tools let you create new tempo settings by dragging tempo events in the Tempo
Editor. To remove a tempo event, Alt-click
(Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the tempo event with any of the Grabber tools.
Tempo curve adjustment
All the new tempo events under the curve will change as you move the Tempo Curve
Adjustment Handles. To adjust the curve shape without the track data adjusting immediately, press Start (Windows) or Control
(Mac) while adjusting the curve. Tempo events will change to fit the new curve when you release the mouse button.
The blue adjustment handles are only active until a new tool is selected or a new command is executed.
Using a Grabber tool to change a tempo event
Drag a tempo event to the left or right to adjust the location of the tempo change.
Selecting Tempo Events
You can easily select a single tempo event, or an entire tempo curve within the Tempo Editor.
To Select a tempo event in the Tempo Editor:
Using the Selector tool or any Grabber tool, double-click on the horizontal tempo line.
Selecting a single tempo event
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 499
To Select a tempo curve in the Tempo Editor:
â–
Using the Selector tool or any Grabber tool, triple-click on a horizontal tempo line in the curve that you wish to select.
Using the Trim Tool
The Trim tool lets you scale all the tempo events of the session, or within a time selection. The
Trim tool also lets you stretch a region of tempo events to cover a longer or shorter area in the timeline.
To scale all the session’s tempo events with the
Trim tool:
1 Open the Tempo Editor.
2 Select the Trim tool.
3 Click above the tempo events and drag up or down. Dragging up increases the tempo values; dragging down decreases them.
Selecting a tempo curve
Extending Tempo Selections
You can extend Tempo selections to the next or the previous tempo event.
To extend a tempo selection:
1 Select a portion of a region, or click anywhere in the region.
2 Do one of the following:
• Press Shift+Tab to extend the selection to the next tempo event.
– or –
• Press Shift+Control+Tab (Windows) or
Shift+Option+Tab (Mac) to extend the selection to the previous tempo event.
Changing tempos with the Trim tool
To scale selected tempo events with the Trim tool:
1 Open the Tempo Editor.
2 Using the Selector tool, select the area you wish to edit.
3 Select the Trim tool.
4 Click within the selected area, and drag up or down. Dragging up increases the tempo values of the selection; dragging down decreases them.
Changing selected tempos with the Trim tool
500 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To change the rate of tempo change with the Trim tool:
1 Open the Tempo Editor.
2 Using the Selector tool, select the area you wish to edit.
3 Select the Trim tool.
4 Click either the start or end handle for the selected range, and drag up or down.
Changing the rate of tempo change with the Trim tool
To stretch or shrink the tempo change range with the Trim tool:
1 Open the Tempo Editor.
2 Using the Selector tool, select the area you wish to edit.
3 Select the Trim tool.
4 Click at the start or end of the selection, and drag horizontally. Tempo events will maintain their relative spacing to each other but will be spaced over a larger or smaller area.
Moving, Cutting, Pasting and Nudging in the
Tempo Editor
To move a selected group of tempo events in the
Tempo Editor:
1 Open the Tempo Editor.
2 Using the Selector tool, select the area you wish to move.
3 Click on any selected tempo event with any
Grabber tool, and drag horizontally to move the tempo events to a new location.
Press Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) while dragging to move a copy of the tempo events.
To copy and Paste tempo events in the Tempo
Editor:
1 Open the Tempo Editor.
2 Using the Selector tool, select the area you wish to copy.
3 Choose Edit > Copy.
4 Click in the Tempo Editor at the point where you want to paste the tempo events.
5 Choose Edit > Paste. Your copied selection is pasted from the insertion point, replacing any existing tempo events.
To nudge a selection in the Tempo Editor:
1 Open the Tempo Editor.
2 Using the Selector tool, select the area you wish to nudge.
Changing the tempo change range with the Trim tool
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 501
3 Do one of the following:
• On the numeric keypad, press Plus (+) to move the selected tempo events forward by the Nudge value.
– or –
• Press Minus (–) to move the selection back by the Nudge value.
Changing the Linearity
Display Mode
You can choose to view the Edit Window in either a Linear Tick (Bars|Beats) scale or a Linear
Sample (absolute) Time Scale. MIDI and Instrument tracks, audio tracks, and Tempo curves can appear and function very differently depending on the timebase display settings.
Linearity Display Mode selector and pop-up menu
The Linearity Display Mode pop-up menu determines whether the Tempo Editor displays tempo events in an Absolute timebase or
Bars|Beats.
When set to Linear Sample Display, the display of tempo events is sample-based and their bar and beat locations can shift after the tempo curve is drawn.
When set to Linear Tick Display, the display of tempo events is tick-based and tempo event
Bar|Beat locations remain constant after the tempo curve is drawn—though their relation to audio is scaled, resulting in a new sample locations.
Drawing tempo events using the Linear
Sample Display can cause Bar|Beat based material to move in non-intuitive ways.
Digidesign recommends that you use Linear
Tick Display when you draw tempo changes.
To change the timebase display:
â– Click the Linearity Display Mode selector and select a timebase from pop-up menu.
Tempo Edit Density and Linearity Display Mode
When both the Tempo Edit Density setting (in the Tempo Editor) and the Linearity Display
Mode setting are set to either a Bars|Beats Time
Scale or to an absolute Time Scale, Tempo edits will appear evenly spaced. When the Tempo
Edit Density setting and the Linearity Display
Mode setting are set so that one is set to an absolute Time Scale and the other is set to a
Bars|Beats Time Scale, the number of Tempo edits will appear to increase or decrease over time.
502 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Tempo Operations Window
The Tempo Operations window lets you define tempo events over a range of time (or measures).
The time range is specified in the time format chosen for your Main Time Scale. In addition, the Tempo Operations window lets you:
• Fit a specific number of Bars|Beats into a precise time range.
• Create tempos that speed up or slow down, both linearly and over various curves.
• Scale and stretch existing tempos.
The Tempo Operations window is not available in Manual Tempo mode.
The Tempo Operations window has six pages, one for each type of tempo operation.
Constant Lets you create a constant tempo over a selected range of time.
Linear Lets you create tempos that change evenly over a selected range of time.
Parabolic Lets you create tempos that accelerate or decelerate following a tempo curve that changes the tempo more rapidly or less rapidly over the selection time.
S-Curve Lets you create tempos that accelerate or decelerate following a tempo curve with a definable breakpoint that determines mid-curve times and tempo values.
Scale Lets you scale tempos within the selection by a percentage amount.
Stretch Lets you select a region of tempo events and apply them to a larger or smaller selection area.
To open a specific Tempo Operations window page:
â– Choose Event > Tempo, followed by one of the Tempo Operations page commands (such as
Constant).
If the Tempo Operations window is already open, you can select any of the pages from the pop-up menu at the top of the window.
To open the last active Tempo Operations window page:
â– Choose Event > Tempo > Operations Window.
Press Alt+2 (Windows) or Option+2
(Mac) on the number keypad to open the
Tempo Operations window and display the last active Tempo Operations page.
To define tempo events over a range of time:
1 Make a selection in the Timebase or in a track.
2 Choose Event > Tempo > Operations Window.
3 Select a Tempo Operation page from the popup menu at the top of the Tempo Operation window.
4 Change the settings for the page you have chosen, as necessary.
5 Do one of the following:
• Click Apply.
– or –
• Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac) to automatically apply the values and close the window.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 503
Constant
The Constant page lets you create a constant tempo over a selected range of time.
Resolution (Advanced Option) Lets you select the
BPM note value for your tempo setting.
Selecting “Follow Metronome Click” will set the tempo BPM note value to mirror the click value set in the meter markers.
Density (Advanced Option) Lets you specify the density of the tempo change events written to the Tempo ruler.
Preserve Tempo after Selection If selected, the previous tempo setting that was in effect at the selection end point is preserved after the selection. If unselected, the last tempo event created by the tempo operation continues to the end of the session, or until the next tempo event beyond the selected range.
Constant page (Advanced Option)
Advanced When the Advanced checkbox is selected, the selection range changes to the Main
Time Scale format, and additional and modified options become available.
Calculate (Advanced Option) Calculates either the tempo, or the selection end time.
Selection Start and End Specifies the start and end point for the tempo change in Bars|Beats.
When an Edit selection is made, the Start and
End fields will display the selection boundaries.
End Time (Advanced Option) Displays the selection end time. When the Main Time Scale is set to Bars|Beats, the end time is displayed in the
Sub Time Scale. When the Main Time Scale is set to any absolute timebase, the end time is calculated and displayed in Bars|Beats. Changing the end time value causes the tempo to change.
Tempo Specifies the tempo, in beats per minute
(BPM), to apply to the selected range.
Linear
The Linear page lets you create tempos that change evenly over a selected range of time.
Linear page (Advanced Option)
Advanced When the Advanced checkbox is selected, the selection range changes to the Main
Time Scale format, and additional and modified options become available.
504 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Calculate (Advanced Option) Calculates either the selection end time, the start tempo, or the end tempo.
Selection Start and End Displays the start and end points for the tempo change in the currently selected Main timebase. When an Edit selection is made, the Start and End fields will display the selection boundaries. Changing start or end values changes the selection range.
End Time (Advanced Option) Displays the absolute time for the selection end. When the Main
Time Scale is set to Bars|Beats, the end time is displayed in the Sub Time Scale. When the Main
Time Scale is set to any absolute timebase, the end time is calculated and displayed in
Bars|Beats. Changing the end time value causes the tempo to change.
Tempo Start and End Displays the tempo, in beats per minute (BPM), for the start and end points of the selected range. Changing the tempo causes the end time value to change.
Resolution (Advanced Option) Lets you select the
BPM note value for your tempo setting.
Selecting “Follow Metronome Click” will set the tempo BPM note value to mirror the click value set in the meter markers.
Density (Advanced Option) Lets you specify the density of the tempo change events written to the Tempo ruler.
Preserve Tempo after Selection If selected, the previous tempo setting that was in effect at the selection end point is preserved after the selection. If unselected, the last tempo event created by the tempo operation continues to the end of the session, or until the next tempo event beyond the selected range.
Parabolic
The Parabolic page lets you create tempos that accelerate or decelerate by following a tempo curve, which changes the tempo more rapidly or less rapidly over the selection time.
Parabolic page (Advanced Option)
Advanced When the Advanced checkbox is selected, the selection range changes to the Main
Time Scale format, and additional and modified options become available.
Calculate (Advanced Option) Calculates the selection end time, the start tempo, the end tempo, or the curvature of the tempo change.
Selection Start and End Displays the start and end points for the tempo change in the currently selected Main timebase. When an Edit selection is made, the Start and End fields will display the selection boundaries. Changing start or end values changes the selection range.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 505
End Time (Advanced Option) Displays the absolute time for the selection end. When the Main
Time Scale is set to Bars|Beats, the end time is displayed in the Sub Time Scale. When the Main
Time Scale is set to any absolute timebase, the end time is calculated and displayed in
Bars|Beats. Changing the end time value causes the tempo to change.
Tempo Start and End Displays the tempo, in beats per minute (BPM), for the start and end points of the selected range. Changing the tempo causes the end time value to change.
Curvature Specifies and displays a numerical and graphic representation of the tempo curve.
Negative numbers indicate a more rapid tempo change at the beginning of the time range, and positive numbers indicate a more rapid tempo change at the end of the time range. This value can be set with the Curvature slider.
Resolution (Advanced Option) Lets you select the
BPM note value for your tempo setting.
Selecting “Follow Metronome Click” will set the tempo BPM note value to mirror the click value set in the meter markers.
Density (Advanced Option) Lets you specify the density of the tempo change events written to the Tempo ruler.
Preserve Tempo after Selection If selected, the previous tempo setting that was in effect at the selection end point is preserved after the selection. If unselected, the last tempo event created by the tempo operation continues to the end of the session, or until the next tempo event beyond the selected range.
S-Curve
The S-Curve page lets you create tempos that accelerate or decelerate by following a tempo curve with a definable breakpoint that determines mid-curve times and tempo values.
S-Curve page (Advanced Option)
Advanced When the Advanced checkbox is selected, the selection range changes to the Main
Time Scale format, and additional and modified options become available.
Calculate (Advanced Option) Calculates either the selection end time, the start tempo, the end tempo or the curvature of the tempo change.
Selection Start and End Displays the start and end points for the tempo change in the currently selected Main timebase. When an Edit selection is made, the Start and End fields will display the selection boundaries. Changing start or end values changes the selection range.
506 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Start and End Time (Advanced Option) Displays the absolute time for the selection end. When the Main Time Scale is set to Bars|Beats, the end time is displayed in the Sub Time Scale. When the Main Time Scale is set to any absolute timebase, the end time is calculated and displayed in
Bars|Beats.
Tempo Start and End Displays the tempo, in beats per minute (BPM), for the start and end points of the selected range. Changing the tempo causes the end time value to change.
Curvature Specifies and displays a numerical and graphic representation of the tempo curve.
Negative numbers indicate a more rapid tempo change at the start and end of the of the time range, with a low rate of change around the midpoint. Positive numbers indicate a low rate of change near the start and end of the selected range, with rapid tempo change around the midpoint. This value can be set with the Curvature slider.
Mid Point Specifies the Main Time Scale location for the curve mid point. This value can be set with the Mid Point slider.
Mid Tempo Specifies the tempo at the mid point.
This value can be set with the Mid Tempo slider.
Resolution (Advanced Option) Lets you select the
BPM note value for your tempo setting.
Select “Follow Metronome Click” will set the tempo BPM note value to mirror the click value set in the meter markers.
Density (Advanced Option) Lets you specify the density of the tempo change events written to the Tempo ruler.
Preserve Tempo after Selection If selected, the previous tempo setting that was in effect at the selection end point is preserved after the selection. If unselected, the last tempo event created by the tempo operation continues to the end of the session, or until the next tempo event beyond the selected range.
Scale
The Scale page lets you scale tempos within the selection by a percentage amount.
Scale page
Scale page (Advanced Option)
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 507
Advanced When the Advanced checkbox is selected, the selection range changes to the Main
Time Scale format, and additional and modified options become available.
Calculate (Advanced Option) In combination with settings chosen in the Scale pop-up menu, the Calculate pop-up menu lets you calculate the selection end time, the average tempo, the start tempo, or the end tempo.
Scale (Advanced Option) In combination with settings chosen in the Calculate pop-up menu, the Scale pop-up menu lets you scale all tempos, the start tempo, or the end tempo.
Scaling all tempos scales each tempo in the selected range equally. Scaling the start tempo scales the tempos unevenly, scaling the first tempo event the most, scaling each consecutive tempo event less until the end tempo which is not scaled. Scaling the end tempo scales the tempos unevenly, scaling the last tempo the most, scaling each previous tempo event less until the start tempo which is not scaled.
Selection Start and End Displays the start and end points for the tempo operation in the currently selected Main timebase. When an Edit selection is made, the Start and End fields will display the selection boundaries. Changing start or end values changes the selection range.
Start and End Time Displays the absolute time for the selection start and end points. When the
Main Time Scale is set to Bars|Beats, times are displayed in the Sub Time Scale. When the Main
Time Scale is set to any absolute timebase, times are calculated and displayed in Bars|Beats.
Average Tempo Displays the Average Tempo, in beats per minute (BPM), across the selected range. Changing the Average Tempo changes the Scale percentage.
Scale Displays the percentage by which the tempo is scaled, in beats per minute (BPM), across the selected range. Changing Scale changes Average Tempo.
Preserve Tempo after Selection If selected, the previous tempo setting that was in effect at the selection end point is preserved after the selection. If unselected, the last tempo event created by the tempo operation continues to the end of the session, or until the next tempo event beyond the selected range.
Stretch
The Stretch page lets you select a region of tempo events and apply them to a larger or smaller selection area.
Stretch page
Advanced When the Advanced checkbox is selected, the selection range changes to the Main
Time Scale format, and additional and modified options become available.
Selection Start and End Specifies the range of tempo events that you wish to modify. When an
Edit selection is made, the Start and End fields will display the selection boundaries.
508 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Stretch To End Specifies a new end point for the region to which you want to apply the selected tempo events. Changing the end point causes the Stretch percentage to change.
Stretch To Start (Advanced Option) Specifies a new start point for the region to which you want to apply the selected tempo events.
Changing the end point causes the Stretch percentage to change.
Stretch Specifies the percentage of time for the the selected tempo events to cover.
Preserve Tempo after Selection If selected, the previous tempo setting that was in effect at the selection end point is preserved after the selection. If unselected, the last tempo event created by the tempo operation continues to the end of the session, or until the next tempo event beyond the selected range.
Identify Beat Command
The Identify Beat command lets you establish a tempo/meter map for audio that was recorded without a click, or for imported audio with unknown tempos.
The Identify Beat command analyzes a selection range (usually with a distinct number of beats or measures) and calculates its tempo based on the specified meter. In doing this, Bar|Beat Markers for the calculated tempo are inserted and appear in the Tempo ruler at the beginning and end of the selection; in addition, meter events are inserted into the Meter ruler.
Use Beat Detective to generate Bar|Beat
Markers within a selection that includes rhythmic changes on beats or sub-beats. For
more information, see Chapter 24, “Beat
Bar|Beat Markers
Bar|Beat Markers look similar to tempo events, but instead have small blue triangles to indicate their location.
Bar|Beat Marker
Choosing Bar|Beat Markers or Tempo
Events
Because tempo events are tick-based, and
Bar|Beat Markers are sample-based, they cannot be mixed. If a session contains tempo events and you attempt to insert Bar|Beat Markers, existing tempo events are converted to Bar|Beat
Markers (and vice versa).
Tempo events can also be manually converted to Bar|Beat Markers and vice versa. When converting between Tempo events and Bar|Beat
Markers, some amount of sample rounding may occur.
To use either tempo events or Bar|Beat Markers:
1 Press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) and click the Add Tempo Change button.
2 Select either Tempo Events or Bar|Beat Markers from the pop-up menu.
Tempo ruler pop-up menu
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 509
Identifying Beats
Identifying the beat of a one-bar drum loop and creating Bar|Beat Markers for it:
1 Place a one-bar drum loop at the beginning of an audio track.
2 Select View > Rulers > Samples. This ensures that the selected audio material will be sampleaccurate.
3 Select the audio region with the Time Grabber tool and choose Event > Identify Beat.
4 In the Bar|Beat Markers dialog, specify the start and end locations for the inserted Bar|Beat
Markers. Since this example deals with a one-bar loop, enter 1|1|000 and 2|1|000.
Identify Beat dialog
5 If necessary, specify a time signature for the start and end range.
6 Click OK to automatically calculate the new tempo and insert the necessary Bar|Beat Markers and meter events. Any existing tempo and meter events residing within the selection are deleted.
Bar|Beat Markers inserted
Once the tempo has been determined for the audio, you can duplicate the original audio region with the Repeat command.
When working with a selection, the Identify
Beat command only calculates a single tempo for the selected range. If the tempo varies from measure to measure, or beat to beat, you’ll need to use the Identify Beat command for each tempo variance (making sure to accurately define a precise selection range or beat location for the tempo change).
To accurately define tempos for a range of audio with the Identify Beat command, make certain that the initial selection represents an accurate length of beats or measures. You may want to
first loop the selection on playback (see “Looping Playback” on page 409) to see if it plays
cleanly without skipping. To avoid drift, and remain sample-accurate, select the audio material with the Time Scale set to Samples rather than
Bars|Beats.
When identifying beats, select as large an area as possible. For example, if you have a four bar long audio file you want to identify, select the entire four bars instead of just one bar, in order to minimize rounding errors.
510 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Dragging Bar|Beat Markers
Bar|Beat Markers can be dragged to new locations so they can align with audio regions that have been moved, or so that they can align to a slightly different point within an audio region.
This results in neighboring MIDI data being adjusted to align with the new tempo map.
When dragging a Bar|Beat Marker:
• Its BPM value is recalculated along with the
Bar|Beat Marker to its immediate left. Bar|Beat
Markers to the right of the dragged marker remain unchanged.
• Its bar and beat location is dragged with the
Bar|Beat Marker. If the Bar|Beat Marker was originally placed at 3|1|000, it remains there
(unless it is edited).
• Its sample and SMPTE locations change, as calculated for by the new tempo for the
Bar|Beat Marker.
• Neighboring MIDI events, along with the
Bars:Beats ruler, shrink or expand as necessary to adjust for the new tempo.
Editing Bar|Beat Markers
A Bar|Beat Marker can be edited to redefine its bar and beat location, which also redefines the start or end point of the range being analyzed for tempo. This is different from dragging a
Bar|Beat Marker.
Dragging a Bar|Beat Marker
Because Bar|Beat Markers are sample-based and tempo events are tick-based, they behave differently when you drag them in the Tempo ruler.
When dragging a tempo event:
• The tempo event is placed at a new bar and beat location. The sample and SMPTE locations for the event are updated as well.
• The BPM value for the dragged tempo event remains constant, as do any other tempo events in the session.
• Neighboring MIDI events and audio regions on tick-based tracks, along with the ruler, shrink or expand as necessary to adjust for the new tempo location.
Edit Bar|Beat dialog
To edit a Bar|Beat Marker:
1 In the Tempo ruler, double-click the Bar|Beat
Marker.
2 In the Edit Bar|Beat dialog, enter a new Location for the Bar|Beat Marker.
3 Enter a new Time Signature if desired.
4 Click OK.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 511
To delete a Bar|Beat Marker:
While pressing Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac), move the cursor over the Bar|Beat Marker
(where the cursor changes to the Grabber with a
“–”) and click to remove it.
Inserting Bar|Beat Markers One at a Time
Sample-Based Material with Varying Tempos
You can insert Bar|Beat Markers one at a time by setting an Edit insertion point (instead of making a selection) before using the Identify Beat command. The ability to identify each beat, one at a time, is especially useful when working with sample-based material with varying tempos.
For instance, if you have a measure that accelerates slightly, you could insert a Bar|Beat Marker
on each beat (see Figure 23) so the tempo is ac-
curately reflected.
Meter Events
You can change meter in the Meter ruler, or make precise meter changes in the Time Operations window.
Meter events can be inserted at the beginning of a session to replace the default meter (of 4/4), and they can be inserted anywhere within the session for additional meter changes.
To display the Meter ruler:
â– Select View > Rulers > Meter.
Current Meter
As meter events are encountered during playback, the session’s current meter is displayed in the Transport window.
current meter
Current meter displayed in Transport window
Figure 23. Bar|Beat Markers on each beat
After the Bar|Beat Markers are inserted, further adjustments in the tempo map are possible by dragging each of the Markers, as necessary, to align with the associated beat within the audio.
512 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Inserting Meter Events
To insert a meter event:
1 Do one of the following:
• Choose Event > Time > Change Meter.
• Click the Add Meter Change button at the right of the Meter ruler.
2 In the Meter Change window, do the following:
• Enter the Location and Meter for the meter change.
Add Meter Change button
• While pressing the Start key (Windows) or
Control (Mac), move the cursor into the
Meter ruler (where the cursor changes to the Grabber with a “+”) and click at the location where you want to insert the event.
Manually inserting a meter event
• Double click the meter display in the Transport window.
Meter Change window
– and –
• If you want the inserted meter event to fall cleanly on the first beat of the nearest measure, select the Snap To Bar option.
3 Select a note value for the number of clicks to sound in each measure. For a dotted-note click value, select the dot (.) option.
For some meters, it may be desirable to use a dotted value for the click. For instance, if using a meter of 6/8, a dotted quarter note click (yielding two clicks per measure) is generally more suitable than a straight eighth note click (six clicks per measure).
Current Meter display in the Transport window
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 513
4 Click Apply to insert the new meter event. The new meter event is inserted and appears in the
Meter ruler.
To copy and paste several meter events:
1 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Drag in the Meter ruler to select the range that includes the meter events.
Inserted meter event
Each meter event has a small yellow triangle next to it that indicates its location. These triangles can be selected for copying and pasting, and they can be double-clicked to edit the meter event.
Editing Meter Events
Existing meter events can be edited, deleted, and copied and pasted.
To edit a meter event:
1 In the Meter ruler, double-click the meter event.
2 In the Meter Change dialog, enter a new Location or Meter for the event.
3 Click OK.
To delete a meter event:
â– While pressing Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac), move the cursor over the meter event
(where the cursor changes to the Grabber with a
“–”) and click to remove it.
Meter events selected
If the beginning of the selection includes a meter event, press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) so the Selector tool appears.
Press Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) while dragging to select across all Conductor tracks.
3 Choose Edit > Copy.
4 Click in the Meter ruler at the point where you want to paste the meter events.
5 Choose Edit > Paste. The contents of the Clipboard are pasted from the insertion point, replacing any existing meter events.
To extend an Edit selection in a track to the Meter ruler:
1 Using the Selector tool or any Time Grabber tool, select a track range.
2 Shift-click in the Meter ruler.
Shift-click again in the Meter ruler to remove it from the selection.
To select all meter events:
â–
Double-click with the Selector tool in the
Meter ruler.
514 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To clear a range of selected meter events:
1 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Drag in the Meter ruler to select the meter events you want to remove.
3 Choose Edit > Clear to delete the selected meter events.
Partial Measures
As necessary, Pro Tools will create a partial measure to accommodate the inserted meter event.
When a meter event is preceded by a partial measure, the meter event is displayed in italics in the Meter ruler.
Partial measure of 4/4
Partial measures can also occur when pasting meter events to locations other than the first beat of a measure.
To insert meter events while avoiding partial bars, use the Change Meter command in
the Time Operations window. See “Change
Time Operations
The Time Operations window lets you:
• Change Meter
• Insert Time
• Cut Time
• Move Song Start
To open a specific Time Operations window:
â– Choose Event > Time, followed by one of the
Time Operations commands (such as Change
Meter).
If the Time Operations window is already open, you can select any Time Operation from the pop-up menu at the top of the window.
To open the last active Time Operations window:
â– Choose Event > Time > Operations Window.
Press Alt+1 (Windows) or Option+1
(Mac) on the number keypad to open the
Time Operations window and display the last active Time Operations window.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 515
Change Meter
Change Meter lets you specify complex meter changes for Bar|Beat-based material. You can enter meter changes at a particular bar, make a meter change over a selected area of time, or add meter changes sequentially one bar at a time.
Change Meter window
Options for the Change Meter command include:
New Meter Lets you specify a new time signature. The first field lets you enter the number of beats (up to 99) in a measure, and the second field lets you enter the note length that counts as one beat.
Click Lets you specify the note value that will trigger the metronome click. For example, if an eighth note is chosen, a click is played for every eighth note, regardless of tempo.
Starting at Bar Sets the bar where the meter change is added. Meter changes made in the
Change Meter page can only be made at the beginning of a bar.
Apply Change To Lets you apply the meter change to the selected range, to the end of the session, or until the next bar.
Change The Change fields let you specify the number of bars of the new meter that you wish to have replace the selected range.
Pro Tools automatically calculates the nearest whole bar number, or you can specify a number of bars to be affected. Time is inserted or deleted, in whole bar increments, at the end of the selection, as necessary on all affected tracks when you override the calculated range.
Realign
The Realign controls let you choose which items to realign after meter changes have been made.
You can choose to realign meter events, or choose to realign meter and tempo events, tickbased markers and tracks, and all or none of the sample-based tracks.
Meter Ruler Only Applies meter changes to the
Meter ruler only. All other rulers and tracks are unaffected.
Meter and Tempo Rulers, All Tick-Based Markers and Tracks, and Sample-Based Markers and
Tracks Applies meter changes to all rulers, tickbased tracks, and your choice of sample-based tracks. Time is inserted or deleted as needed at the end of the selection to preserve the alignment of material following the selection.
516 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Change Meter Examples
To change the meter over a range of bars:
1 Do one of the following:
• Drag with the Selector tool to select a range of bars to change.
– or –
• To have the meter change apply until the next meter event, click where you want the meter change to begin with the Selector tool. The meter change will be made at the beginning of the nearest bar.
2 Choose Event > Time > Change Meter.
3 Specify a new meter and click setting.
Pro Tools will automatically set the selection options to fit the new meter to the selected range as closely as possible, adding or subtracting beats a necessary.
4 Select To Selected Range in the Apply Change pop-up menu.
5 Select which rulers and tracks you want to realign after meter changes have been made.
6 Click Apply.
To add a series of meter changes, one measure at a time:
1 Do one of the following:
• With the Selector tool, click where you want the meter change to begin. The meter change will be made at the beginning the nearest bar.
– or –
• Enter the first measure number in the Starting At Bar field.
2 Choose Event > Time > Change Meter.
3 Specify a new meter and click setting.
4 Select “Until the Next Bar” from the Apply
Change To pop-up menu.
5 Click Apply to enter the new meter and to move the insertion point to the end of the new measure.
6 Specify a new meter and click setting for the next measure.
7 Repeat steps 5–6 for every additional meter change you wish to insert.
Insert Time
Insert Time lets you insert an amount of blank time (silence) into Conductor rulers, MIDI tracks, and audio tracks.
Insert Time window
Options for the Insert Time command include:
Start, End and Length Sets the start and end points for the selection, and the selection length.
Set Meter If your Main Time Scale is Bars|Beats,
Set Meter lets you specify a new meter for the inserted time. The selection is quantized to the nearest bars, and the previous meter is inserted after the selection. If your Main Time Scale is sample-based, Set Meter is not available.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 517
Realign
The Realign controls let you choose which items shift (occur later) when time is inserted, as follows:
• If your Main Time Scale is set to Bars|Beats, you can choose to realign meter events only , or choose to realign a combination of Meter and Tempo rulers, all tick-based markers and tracks, and your choice of sample-based tracks.
• If your Main Time Scale is set to an absolute timebase (such as Min:Secs), you can choose to independently realign conductor events, tick-based markers and tracks, and your choice of sample-based tracks.
Meter Ruler Only If your Main Time Scale is
Bars|Beats, you have the option to insert time into the Meter ruler only. Meter events after the start point of the selection are shifted past the end point by the length of time selection.
If your Main Time Scale is sample-based, Realign
Meter Ruler Only is not available.
Meter and Tempo Rulers Lets you insert time into the Meter and Tempo rulers. Meter and
Tempo events after the start point of the selection are shifted past the end point by the length of time inserted.
Tick-Based Markers and Tracks Lets you shift
Bar|Beat-based markers, and insert time into tick-based tracks. Marker events and tick-based tracks after the start point of the selection are shifted past the end point by the length of time inserted.
If the time selection includes any audio regions on tick-based tracks, the audio regions are separated at the Start point, and the new region containing the previous selection is shifted to the end point.
Sample-Based Markers and Tracks Lets you shift absolute time-based markers, and insert time into sample-based tracks. Marker events and sample-based tracks after the start point of the selection are shifted past the end point by the length of time inserted.
If the selection includes any audio regions on sample-based tracks, the selected portions of the audio regions are separated at the Start point, and the new region containing the previous selection is shifted to the end point.
Insert Time Example
To insert four empty measures of 4/4 time into a session:
1 Set the Main Time Scale to Bars|Beats.
2 Choose Event > Time > Insert Time.
3 Enter the measure where you want to insert the measures in the Start field.
4 Enter four measures in the Length field.
5 Select the Realign option to Meter and Tempo
Rulers, All Tick-Based Markers & Tracks, and All
Sample-Based Markers and Tracks.
6 Click Apply.
518 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Cut Time
Cut Time lets you cut a specified amount of time
(both Timebase and track data) from Conductor rulers, MIDI tracks, and audio tracks.
Cut Time window
Options for the Cut Time command include:
Start, End and Length Sets the start and end points for the selection, and the selection length.
Realign
The Realign controls let you choose which items shift when time is cut, as follows:
• If your Main Time Scale is set to Bars|Beats, you can choose to realign meter events only , or choose to realign a combination of Meter and Tempo rulers together, all tick-based markers and tracks, and your choice of sample-based tracks.
• If your Main Time Scale is set to an absolute timebase (such as Min:Secs), you can choose to independently realign conductor events, tick-based markers and tracks, and your choice of sample-based tracks.
Meter Ruler Only If your Main Time Scale is
Bars|Beats, you have the option to remove time from the Meter ruler only. Meter events within the selection are removed, and meter events that occur after the end point of the selection are shifted to the selection start point.
If your Main Time Scale is sample-based, Realign
Meter Ruler Only is not available.
Meter and Tempo Rulers Lets you cut time from the Meter and Tempo rulers. Meter and tempo events within the selection are removed, and the meter and tempo events that occur after the end point of the selection are shifted to the selection start point.
Tick-Based Markers and Tracks Lets you shift
Bar|Beat-based markers, and delete time from tick-based tracks. Marker events and tick-based tracks within the selection are removed, and the marker events and tick-based tracks that occur after the end point of the selection are shifted forward.
If the time selection includes any tick-based audio regions, the selected area of the audio region is deleted, and the region following the selection is shifted forward.
Sample-Based Markers and Tracks Lets you shift absolute time-based markers, and cut time from sample-based tracks. Marker events and samplebased tracks within the selection are removed, and the marker events and sample-based tracks that occur after the end point of the selection are shifted forward.
If the time selection includes any sample-based audio regions, the selected area of the audio region is deleted, and the region following the selection is shifted forward.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 519
Cut Time Example
To cut thirty seconds of time from a session:
1 Set the Main Time Scale to Minutes:Seconds.
2 Choose Event > Time > Cut Time.
3 With the Selector tool, click at the beginning of the area that you want to cut.
4 Enter thirty seconds (0:30.000) in the Length field.
5 Select the options to Realign both Meter and
Tempo rulers, all tick-based tracks, and all sample-based markers and tracks.
6 Click Apply.
Move Song Start
Move Song Start lets you redefine the location of the Song Start Marker.
Move Song Start window
Options for the Move Song Start command include:
Timebase Lets you precisely redefine the position of the Song Start Marker measured by any supported timebase.
Move Start To Sets the location for the Song
Start Marker in the chosen timebase.
Renumber Song Start To When enabled, this lets you set the Song Start Marker to any bar number.
Move
The Move controls let you choose which items shift when the Song Start is moved, as follows:
Song Start Only Moves the Song Start Marker only.
Meter and Tempo Rulers, Tick-Based Markers and
Tracks, and Sample-based Markers and
Tracks Moves the Song Start Marker, Meter and
Tempo rulers, tick-based tracks, and your choice of sample-based tracks.
Move Song Start Example
To move the Song Start Marker to 15 seconds on the timeline:
1 Choose Event > Time > Move Song Start.
2 Select Minutes:Seconds from the Timebase pop-up menu.
3 In the Move Song Start To field, enter
“0:15:000” to move the song start forward by 15 seconds.
4 If you wish to renumber the bars so that the
Song Start Marker sits at a different bar, select the Renumber Song Start option, and enter the bar number in the Renumber 1st Bar to field.
5 Select whether you want to move all samplebased markers and tracks or none of them.
6 Click Apply.
520 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Renumbering Bars
You can use the Renumber Bars command to renumber all bars in the session, effectively changing the bar locations for all regions, meter and tempo events while leaving their position intact. In doing so, however, the SMPTE and sample locations of the session data are not changed.
To renumber bars:
1 Choose Event > Renumber Bars.
2 Specify the bar you want to renumber, along with the new bar number, then click Renumber.
Key Signature Ruler
The Key Signature ruler lets you add, edit, and delete key signatures. You can use key signatures to indicate key and key changes in your
Pro Tools session. Key signatures can also be used for certain diatonic functions, such as transposing in key or constraining pitches to the specified key.
Renumber Bars dialog
Key Signatures
The Key Signature ruler lets you add key signatures to Pro Tools sessions. Key signatures can be imported and exported with MIDI data. This is especially useful when exporting MIDI sequences for use in notation programs like Sibelius. The default key signature is C major.
For information on exporting MIDI to Sibe-
lius, see “Send to Sibelius” on page 237.
Key Signature ruler
To view the Key Signature ruler, do one of the following:
â– Select View > Rulers > Key Signature.
– or –
â– From the View selector in the Edit window, select Key Signatures.
You can also show or hide the Key Signature
Staff for the Key Signatures ruler.
To view the staff for the Key Signature ruler:
1 Show the Key Signature ruler.
2 Do one of the following:
• Select View > Rulers > Key Signature Staff.
– or –
• Click the Show/Hide triangle on the Key
Signature ruler.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 521
Changing Key Signatures
You can add, edit, or delete key signatures.
To add a key signature:
1 Place the cursor in the Timeline where you want to add a key signature.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Event > Add Key Change.
– or –
• Click the Plus (+) button in the Key Signature ruler.
3 In the Key Change dialog, select the mode
(major or minor), the key, its location and range, and how you want it to affect pitched tracks.
4 Click OK.
To edit a key signature:
1 Double-click the Key Signature marker in the
Key Signature ruler.
2 In the Key Change dialog, make the desired changes.
3 Click OK.
To delete a key signature, do one of the following:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
Key Signature marker in the Key Signature ruler.
– or –
â– Make a selection in the Key Signature ruler that includes the key signature you want to delete and choose Edit > Clear or press Delete.
Key Change Dialog
The Key Change dialog lets you specify the mode (major or minor), the key (from seven flats to seven sharps), the range affected (for example, from Bar 1 to the next key change), and whether or not MIDI notes on pitched tracks are
transposed or constrained to key (see “Pitched
Tracks” on page 523). The Key Change dialog
opens whenever you add or edit a Key Signature marker.
Key Change dialog
Major Keys Displays the major keys from seven flats to seven sharps.
Minor Keys Displays the minor keys from seven flats to seven sharps. Pro Tools only applies the natural minor mode.
Sharps Lets you select any of the sharp keys to seven sharps and C major (or A minor).
Flats Lets you select any of the flat keys to seven flats and C major (or A minor).
From Lets you specify where to place the Key Signature marker in Bars|Beats.
To Lets you specify to where you want the key change to take effect: to the next Key Signature marker, to a selection, or to the end of the session.
Snap To Bar Snaps the Key Signature marker to the bar line.
522 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Edit Pitched Tracks Enabling the Edit Pitched
Tracks option lets you transpose existing MIDI notes on Pitched tracks up or down, either diatonically or chromatically based on the key change, or constrain pitches to the new key. For more information on Pitched tracks, see
Transpose When the Edit Pitched Tracks option is enabled, lets you transpose existing MIDI notes on Pitched tracks up or down, diatonically or chromatically. For example, if the session is in C major and you are adding a key change to D minor, select Edit Pitched Tracks, Transpose,
Up, and Diatonically to transpose notes on
Pitched tracks up a whole step and then lower the third, sixth, and seventh scale degrees by a half step. The sequence C, D, E is transposed to
D, E, F (natural, rather than sharp as happens when transposing chromatically).
When transposing diatonically, chromatic notes are maintained when changing key. For example, when changing key from C major to E major, the note B-flat is transposed to D-natural.
This lets you maintain “blue-notes” when changing keys and applying diatonic transposition.
Constrain Pitches To Key When the Edit Pitched
Tracks option is enabled, lets you constrain pitches to the notes of the new key. This means that any diatonic pitches of the old key on
Pitched tracks that are not in the new key are individually transposed to the nearest diatonic pitch of the new key. For example, when changing from C major to D major, the sequence C, D,
E, F, G changes to C-sharp, D, E, F-sharp, G.
Constraining pitches to key also constrains any chromatic pitches to the new diatonic scale. For example, when changing from C major to D major, the sequence C, D, D-sharp, E changes to Csharp, D, D, E.
Pitched Tracks
Pitched tracks are MIDI or Instrument tracks that can be affected by transpositions due to key changes (including constrain to key). MIDI and
Instrument tracks are “pitched” by default.
However, if you have MIDI or Instrument tracks assigned to drum machines or samplers, you do not want those tracks to be affected by key changes because of key mappings. You can deselect the Pitched option for specific MIDI and Instrument tracks so that they will not be affected by key changes.
To deselect Pitched tracks:
â– Click the track’s Playlist selector and deselect the Pitched option.
Pitched enabled in Playlist selector
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 523
Importing Key Signatures
When importing MIDI (or session data with
MIDI), you can select whether or not to import any key signatures stored in MIDI files.
Import MIDI
The Import MIDI dialog includes the Import Key
Signature from MIDI File option. When selected, key signatures (if present) are imported into Pro Tools with any other MIDI data.
Memory Locations and
Markers
Each session can save up to 999 Memory Locations that can be used to recall:
• Markers to important locations in the session
• Edit selections across one or more tracks
• Record and play ranges, along with pre- and post-roll times
• Track settings that include Show/Hide status, Track Heights, and zoom values
• Edit and Mix Groups enables
Memory Locations are viewed and sorted in the
Memory Locations window, where they can be recalled by clicking the Memory Location.
Import MIDI dialog
Import Session Data
The Import Session Data dialog includes the Import Key Signature Map option. When selected, key signatures (if present) are imported into
Pro Tools with the imported session data.
Import Session Data
524 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Properties of Memory Locations
When creating a new Memory Location (see
“Creating Memory Locations” on page 526) you
are prompted to define its Time Properties and
General Properties .
Markers appear in the Markers ruler with a thin yellow line extending down through all tracks in the Edit window (to assist in arranging and aligning track material). You can click a Marker in the Markers ruler to recall its location along with its stored General Properties.
Memory Locations window
Time Properties
Under Time Properties, a Memory Location can be set to Marker, Selection, or None. This determines the type of Memory Location that is created. Each of these three Memory Location types can also save any combination of General
Properties.
Marker Recalls a Timeline location whose reference can be either Bar|Beat (tick-based) or Absolute (sample-based). When recalling a Marker
Memory Location , the playback cursor moves to the Marker’s location and the start and end times in the Transport window are also updated.
If the Timeline and Edit Selections are linked, the edit cursor also moves to the Marker location.
Markers in the Markers ruler
Selection Recalls an Edit selection or edit cursor location whose reference can be either Bar|Beat
(tick-based) or Absolute (sample-based). A Selection Memory Location lets you store Edit selections, for one or more tracks, that you return to often within a session. If the Timeline and Edit
Selections are linked, a Selection Memory Location can recall record and play ranges.
Only contiguous selections can be saved with Memory Locations. Noncontiguous selections, made with the Object Grabber tool, will be recalled as if the selections were made with the Time Grabber tool.
None Recalls no Time Properties and is therefore referred to as a General Properties Memory Location .
Bar|Beat and Absolute Reference
The Reference pop-up determines whether the
Marker or Selection Memory Location is
Bar|Beat or Absolute. When set to Bar|Beat, the
Memory Location is tick-based and its bar and beat location remains constant if the tempo is changed—though its relation to audio is scaled, resulting in a new sample location.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 525
When set to Absolute, the Memory Location is sample-based and its bar and beat location shifts if the tempo is changed—though its sample location remains constant, along with its relation to audio material.
Bar|Beat Marker (left) and Absolute Marker (right)
In the Markers ruler, Markers that are Bar|Beat appear as yellow chevrons, and Markers that are
Absolute appear as yellow diamonds.
General Properties
All three types of Memory Locations (Marker,
Selection, and None) can store and recall any combination of the following General Properties:
Number Change the number to overwrite an existing Memory Location, or to reorder Memory
Locations in the Memory Locations window.
Zoom Settings Recalls the horizontal, audio, and MIDI zoom values for audio, MIDI, and Instrument tracks.
Pre- and Post-Roll Times Recalls pre- and postroll times (but not whether they are enabled).
This property can be stored with a Selection
Memory Location to recall record and play ranges along with pre- and post-roll.
Track Show/Hide Recalls which tracks are hidden. Use this property to display groups of tracks for editing and mixing.
Track Heights Recalls all Track Heights. Use this option along with Zoom Settings to recall edit environments that are suited for particular tasks, such as editing down to the sample level or trimming MIDI notes.
Group Enables Recalls which Edit and Mix
Groups are enabled. This option is helpful in recalling groups for particular edit and mixing operations, such as muting all drum tracks or fading a stereo pair.
Window Configuration Recalls a specific Window
Configuration. This option is helpful in recalling specific Window Configurations to facilitate editing or mixing tasks.
Comments
All three types of Memory Locations (Marker,
Selection, and None) can store and recall comments. You can enter a maximum of 255 characters to describe the Memory Location. You can also edit comments previously entered.
See “Creating Memory Locations” on page 526 and “Editing Memory Locations”
on page 529 for more information.
Creating Memory Locations
Memory Locations can be created in different ways, based on the type of Memory Location.
When creating Memory Locations, the next available number is assigned to it (1–999). This number is used in recalling the Memory Location from the numeric keypad.
To create a Marker Memory Location:
1 Configure any session settings you will save with the Marker Memory Location, such as zoom settings, pre- and post-roll times,
Show/Hide status for tracks, Track Heights, and
Edit and Mix Group enables.
2 Make sure to select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
3 If the Markers ruler is not displayed, select
View > Rulers > Markers.
526 Pro Tools Reference Guide
4 Do one of the following:
• Click with the Selector tool in any track or ruler at the location where you want to place the Marker. To place a Marker at the beginning of a region, select the region with the Time Grabber tool. Click the Add
Marker/Memory Location button (or press
Enter on the numeric keypad).
Marker/Memory Location button
– or –
• While pressing the Start key (Windows) or
Control (Mac), move the cursor into the
Markers ruler (where the cursor changes to the Grabber with a “+”) and click at the location where you want to place the Marker.
Manually inserting a Marker
5 In the New Memory Location dialog, select the Marker option and specify the Reference as either Bar|Beat or Absolute.
6 Enter a name for the new Marker and select any General Properties you want to save with the Marker.
7 Click OK. The Marker is created and appears in the Markers ruler, and in the Memory Locations window.
To create a Selection Memory Location:
1 Configure any session settings you will save with the Selection Memory Location, such as zoom settings, pre- and post-roll times,
Show/Hide status for tracks, Track Heights, and
Edit and Mix Group enables.
2 Select a range of material in one or more tracks.
3 Do one of the following:
• Press Enter on the numeric keypad.
– or –
• From the pop-up menu in the Memory Locations window (click the Name button), choose Add Memory Location.
4 In the New Memory Location dialog, select the Selection option and specify the Reference as either Bar|Beat or Absolute.
5 Enter a name for the new Memory Location and select any General Properties you want to save with it.
6 Click OK. The Selection Memory Location is created and appears in the Memory Locations window.
To create a General Properties Memory Location:
1 Configure any session settings you will save with the Selection Memory Location, such as zoom settings, pre- and post-roll times,
Show/Hide status for tracks, Track Heights, and
Edit and Mix Group enables.
2 Press Enter on the numeric keypad.
3 In the Memory Location dialog, select the
None option.
4 Enter a name for the new Memory Location and select any General Properties you want to save with it.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 527
5 Click OK. The General Properties Memory Location is created and appears in the Memory Locations window.
In the New Memory Location dialog, you can Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click
(Mac) any General Property to enable or disable all properties. You can also Controlclick (Windows) or Command-click (Mac) any property to toggle its state and the state of all other General Properties.
Creating Memory Locations On-the-Fly
When the Editing preference for “Auto-Name
Memory Locations When Playing” is enabled,
Memory Locations can be created during playback, without raising the New Memory Location dialog. This option can also be selected from the pop-up menu in the Memory Locations window.
This capability is useful if you want to mark certain locations while listening during a record pass, or if you want to mark frame locations while viewing a video scene.
To create a Marker during playback:
1 From the pop-up menu in the Memory Locations window, select Default To Marker. This ensures that new Memory Locations default to being Markers.
2 From the pop-up menu in the Memory Locations window, select Auto-Name Memory Locations.
3 For inserted Markers to have a Bar|Beat reference, make sure to set the Main Time Scale to
Bars:Beats.
4 Click Play in the Transport window.
5 When the location is reached, press Enter on the numeric keypad. A Marker is automatically created and appears in the Markers ruler.
Auto-created Markers are named with increasing numbers, as in “Marker 1,” “Marker 2,” and
“Marker 3.”
When the option for Default To Marker is deselected, new Memory Locations default to whatever type was last created. Therefore, if a Selection Memory Location was created last, it will be the type that is created on-the-fly. In this case, the name for the created Memory Location is based on the start of the Edit selection using the time format for the Main Time Scale (such as
“2|2|305” or “0:02.658”).
When Use Separate Play and Stop Keys option is enabled in the Operation Preferences page, it overrides using the Enter key to add
Memory Location markers. When this option is enabled, press Period (.) and then Enter on the numeric keypad to add a Memory
Location marker. The new marker is created when you press Enter.
528 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Recalling Memory Locations
Memory Locations can be recalled from the
Memory Locations window and from the numeric keypad. In addition, Marker Memory Selections can be recalled by clicking them in the
Markers ruler.
To recall a Memory Location:
1 If the Memory Locations window is not already open, choose Window > Memory Locations to display it.
2 If recalling a Selection Memory Location that will define a record or play range, make sure to select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
3 Do one of the following:
• In the Memory Locations window, click the
Memory Location to recall it.
• With the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Classic, press the Memory Location number followed by Period (.).
• With the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Transport or Shuttle, press Period (.), the
Memory Location number, and Period (.) again.
When recalling a Memory Location from the numeric keypad, the Memory Locations window does not need to be open.
To recall a Marker from the Markers ruler:
1 If the Markers ruler is not displayed, select
View > Rulers > Markers.
2 Click the Marker. The playback cursor locates to the Marker and any General Properties stored with the Marker are recalled.
Even if the Markers ruler is not displayed,
Markers can be recalled from the Memory Locations window, or from the numeric keypad.
Editing Memory Locations
Memory Locations can be renamed, edited, deleted, and copied and pasted.
To rename a Memory Location:
1 Do one of the following:
• In the Memory Locations window, doubleclick the Memory Location you want to rename.
– or –
• If renaming a Marker Memory Location, double-click the Marker in the Markers ruler.
2 Enter the new name for the Memory Location, and click OK.
To redefine the General Properties stored with a
Memory Location:
1 Make changes to the session’s zoom settings, pre- and post-roll times, Show/Hide status of tracks, Track Heights, or Group Enables.
2 Do one of the following:
• In the Memory Locations window, Rightclick (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the
Memory Location you want to redefine.
– or –
• If changing a Marker Memory Location,
Right-click (Windows) or Control-click
(Mac) the Marker in the Markers ruler.
3 In the Memory Location dialog, select the
General Properties you want to save with the
Memory Location.
4 Enter a new name for the Memory Location, if desired, and click OK.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 529
To change a Memory Location from one type to another:
1 Do one of the following:
• In the Memory Locations window, doubleclick the Memory Location you want to change.
– or –
• If changing a Marker Memory Location, double-click the Marker in the Markers ruler.
2 In the Memory Location dialog, select either
Marker, Selection, or None as the Memory Location type.
3 Enter a new name for the Memory Location, if desired, and click OK.
To change the Selection stored with a Memor y
Location:
1 If the Memory Locations window is not already open, choose Window > Memory Locations to display it.
2 Select a range of material in one or more tracks.
3 In the Memory Locations window, Right-click
(Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the Memory
Location that you want to redefine.
4 Enter a new name for the Memory Location, if desired, and click OK.
To move a Marker by dragging:
â– In the Markers ruler, click and drag the Marker left or right.
If the Edit mode is set to Grid, the dragged event snaps to the current Grid value. If using Spot mode, the Spot dialog opens.
To align a Marker to a different location:
1 Make sure to select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
2 Do one of the following:
• In any of the Timebase rulers, click with the Selector tool at the new location.
– or –
• Click in the playlist for any track. To align the Marker to the start of a region, select the region with the Time Grabber tool.
3 In the Memory Locations window or the
Markers ruler, Start-click (Windows) or Controlclick (Mac) the Marker Memory Location that you want to redefine.
4 Enter a new name for the Marker, if desired, and click OK.
Deleting Memory Locations
To delete a Memory Location, do one of the following:
â– In the Memory Locations window, select the
Memory Location and choose Delete Memory
Location from the pop-up menu.
– or –
â– In the Memory Locations window, Alt-click
(Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the Memory
Location .
Dragging a Marker
530 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To delete all Memory Locations, do one of the following:
â– In the Memory Locations Window, choose
Delete All from the pop-up menu.
– or –
â– Alt-Shift-click (Windows) or Option-Shiftclick (Mac) any Memory Location in the Memory Locations window.
To delete a Marker from the Markers ruler:
â– While pressing Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac), move the cursor over the Marker (where the cursor changes to the Grabber with a “–”) and click to remove it.
Copying Marker Memory Locations
To copy and paste a range of Markers:
1 If you want to constrain the selection to the current Grid value, set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Drag in the Tempo ruler to select the range of measures that includes the Markers.
If the beginning of the selection includes a
Marker, press Control (Windows) or Command
(Mac) so the Selector tool appears.
Press Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac) while dragging to select across all Conductor tracks.
3 Choose Edit > Copy.
4 Click in the Markers ruler at the point where you want to paste the tempo events.
5 Choose Edit > Paste. The contents of the Clipboard are pasted from the insertion point, replacing any existing Markers.
To extend an Edit selection in a track to the
Markers ruler:
1 Using the Selector or Time Grabber tool, select a track range.
2 Shift-click in the Markers ruler.
Shift-click again in the Tempo ruler to remove it from the selection.
To select all Markers in the Markers ruler:
â– Double-click with the Selector tool in the
Tempo ruler.
Memory Locations Window
In the Memory Locations windows, Memory Locations are listed with assigned number, name, and View Filter icons. Locations can be recalled or edited from this window.
Memory Locations window with View Filter icons
To recall a Memory Location from the Memory
Location window:
â– Click the Memory Location.
With the Numeric Keypad mode set to
Classic, press the Memory Location number followed by Period (.). With the Numeric
Keypad mode set to Transport or Shuttle, press Period (.), the Memory Location number, and Period (.) again.
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 531
Memory Locations Commands and
Options
You can select viewing and sorting options, along with commands for creating and removing Memory Locations, from the pop-up menu in the Memory Locations window.
Show Main Counter When selected, a column appears in the Memory Locations window that displays the locations based on the Main Timescale for Markers, and the start times for Selection Memory Locations. General Property Memory Locations display nothing in this column.
Main
Time Scale
Sub
Time Scale
Memory Locations window pop-up menu
View Filter Sub-menu Provides commands to show or hide specific memory location properties:
• Show Icons
• Markers
• Selections
• Zoom
• Pre/Post Roll
• Track Show/Hide
• Track Height
• Group Enables
• Window Configuration
• Show Markers Only
• All
Main/Sub Counters in the Memory Locations window
You can click at the top of the Main Time Scale column for a pop-up menu that lets you change the Main Time Scale.
Show Sub Counter When selected, a column appears in the Memory Locations window that displays the locations based on the Sub Timescale for Markers, and the start times for Selection
Memory Locations. General Property Memory
Locations display nothing in this column.
You can click at the top of the Sub Timescale column for a pop-up menu that lets you change the Sub Timescale.
Show Comments When selected, a column appears in the Memory Locations window that displays the comments for each of the Markers.
Comments in the Memory Locations window
532 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Sort by Time When selected, Markers are sorted by their order in the Timeline, followed by Selection and General Properties Memory Locations, which are listed in the order in which they were created.
When Sort by Time is deselected, all Memory
Locations are listed in the order of their assigned numbers.
New Memory Location Choose this command to create a new Memory Location.
Edit <Name> Opens the Edit Memory Location dialog for the selected Memory Location. You can also double-click a Memory Location in the
Memory Locations window to edit it.
Clear <Name> Clears the selected Memory Location, but does not remove its slot. Subsequent
Memory Locations are not renumbered.
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) a Memory Location in the Memory Locations window to clear it.
Delete All Deletes all Memory Locations. The next Memory Location you add starts at slot number 1.
Insert Slot Before <Name> Adds a new, empty
Memory Location slot above the selected Memory Location, and renumbers all subsequent
Memory Locations.
Delete <Name> Slot Deletes the selected Memory Location, and renumbers all subsequent
Memory Locations.
Default To Marker When selected, new Memory
Locations default to Markers, though in the New
Memory Location dialog you can still define the new Memory Location as one of the other types.
Auto-Name Memory Location When selected,
Memory Locations are created automatically without encountering the New Memory Location dialog. If the Default To Marker option is selected, a Marker Memory Location is auto-created. Otherwise, the Memory Location type is determined by whatever type (Marker, Selection, or None) was created last.
View Filter Icons
When Show Icons is selected in the Memory Locations pop-up menu, the Memory Locations window provides an icon-based “View Filter” that lets you show or hide Memory Locations based on the properties they contain. To show or hide Memory Locations containing a specific property, click the appropriate icon.
Marker
Zoom
Settings
Show/Hide
Window Configuration
Track Heights
Selection
Pre- and Post-Roll
Active Groups
Memory Location
Memory Locations View Filter icons
If an icon is disabled (grayed out), all Memory
Locations associated with that property are hidden. However, if a Memory Location contains other properties for an icon that is enabled, it is still displayed. When a view icon is enabled, it appears in color. When it is disabled, it appears gray.
In addition, the View Filter provides a handy reference for which properties are stored in each
Memory Location (indicated by a row of icons for each Memory Location).
Chapter 23: Conductor Tracks and Memory Locations 533
534 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 24: Beat Detective
Beat Detective is a powerful tool for analyzing, editing, and manipulating audio or MIDI tracks that have an inherent rhythmic character.
Beat Detective analyzes an audio or MIDI selection, identifies its peak transients or accented notes, and generates beat triggers based on the detected peak transients or MIDI notes. From these beat triggers, Beat Detective can:
• Extract tempo and beat information to create
Bar|Beat Markers that can be used to define
the session’s tempo map. See “Generating
Bar|Beat Markers with Beat Detective” on page 545.
• Extract tempo and groove information as groove templates, called DigiGrooves. These templates can be applied to audio or MIDI using Beat Detective or Groove Quantize (see
“DigiGroove Templates” on page 546.
• Separate an audio selection into discrete regions, and then conform (or “quantize”) separated regions to the session’s tempo map, or
to groove templates. See “Separating Regions with Beat Detective” on page 548 and “Con-
forming Regions with Beat Detective” on page 550.
Beat Detective and Source Material
Beat Detective is most effective with audio or
MIDI that has clear attack transients or accent patterns (including most instruments used in popular music, such as drums, guitar, or bass).
Beat Detective will be less successful with audio material with soft attacks, or legato phrasing
(such as strings and vocals).
Uses for Beat Detective
Beat Detective can be useful in many situations, including:
Extracting Tempo from Audio Beat Detective can generate Bar|Beat Markers, from which it can extract the tempo—even if the audio contains varying tempos, or material with a swing feel.
Additionally, once Bar|Beat Markers have been generated, other audio and MIDI regions can be quantized to them.
Creating DigiGrooves Beat Detective can extract groove templates, called DigiGrooves, from an audio selection. DigiGrooves can be used to apply the groove, or feel of the captured passage to other audio selections (using Groove Conform) or MIDI data (using Groove Quantize).
Conforming Audio Regions Beat Detective can conform (“quantize”) audio with a different tempo, or with varying tempos, to the session’s current tempo map, or to a groove template.
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 535
“Tighten Up” Performances Beat Detective can be used to improve the timing of some audio material by calculating and extracting its average tempo, and then conforming its rhythmic components—regions separated with Beat Detective—to the session’s tempo map.
Loop Matching Since Beat Detective can extract tempo and beat information from audio, and conform audio to an existing tempo map or groove template, this makes it very useful for aligning loops with different tempos or grooves.
If a loop is at a different tempo than the current session, Beat Detective lets you quickly separate each beat in the loop and conform them to the tempo map (as an alternative to time compressing or expanding the loop, which can alter the pitch and tone of the audio).
Remixes Beat Detective can be used for remixes or creating new rhythms. It can extract tempo from the original drum tracks, or in some instances the original stereo mix. New audio or
MIDI tracks can then be conformed to the original material, or the original material can be conformed to new drum tracks, achieving an entirely new feel.
When working with tick-based audio, use
Beat Detective’s Region Separation command to quickly separate audio regions into individual “hits” (or slices). You can also create a region group of the separated regions to facilitate editing and arranging.
Smoothing Post Production Edits (Audio
Only) Beat Detective’s Edit Smoothing can be used to automatically clean up foley tracks that contain many regions requiring trimming and crossfading, effectively removing the gaps of silence between the regions (thus retaining the room tone throughout the track).
Beat Detective Requirements
Beat Detective is available with all Pro Tools systems.
Pro Tools LE does not support using Beat
Detective across multiple tracks. When
Beat Detective is applied to multiple tracks, only the top track is edited.
RAM Requirements for Beat Detective
Beat Detective operations can require a large amount of RAM, especially when working with multiple tracks and lengthy selections.
To avoid low memory situations with Beat Detective, do the following:
• If you begin to experience slower Beat Detective response, add more RAM to your computer.
• If your computer does not have the extra
RAM, work with shorter selections, or individual tracks.
• Set the Editing preference for Levels of Undo
to a smaller value (see “Levels of Undo and
Memory” on page 357). Memory-intensive
editing operations, such as Edit Smoothing
(audio only) with Beat Detective, can use up a large amount of memory when in the Undo queue.
536 Pro Tools Reference Guide
The Beat Detective Window
The Beat Detective window appears as shown in Figure 24, below.
Figure 24. Beat Detective (Pro Tools HD shown)
To open the Beat Detective window, do one of the following:
â–
Choose Event > Beat Detective.
– or –
â–
Press Control+8 (Windows) or Command+8
(Mac) on the numeric keypad.
Beat Detective is a floating window that can be left open while working. This lets you adjust the controls in real time during playback, while viewing the beat triggers that appear in your selection in the Edit window.
Beat Detective Modes
The Beat Detective window is divided into three sections: Operation, Selection, and Detection.
Depending on the Operation mode, the controls in the Action section change. The Selection options for Beat Detective are available in each of the Operation modes.
The Beat Detective modes include the following:
Operation Lets you choose to analyze either
MIDI or audio material.
Bar|Beat Marker Generation Generates Bar|Beat
Markers corresponding to transients detected in the audio selection.
Groove Template Extraction Extracts the rhythmic and dynamic information from audio, and saves this information to the Groove Clipboard, or as a DigiGroove template.
Region Separation (Audio Only) Separates and creates new regions based on transients detected in the audio selection.
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 537
Region Conform (Audio Only) Conforms all separated regions within the selection to the current tempo map. Beat Detective can conform audio regions to groove templates (such as DigiGroove templates) in addition to standard quantization.
Edit Smoothing (Audio Only) Fills the gaps between conformed regions by automatically trimming them, and if you choose, inserts crossfades.
To define a selection for Beat Detective:
1 In the Edit window, select a range of audio or
MIDI material in a single track or in multiple tracks.
Pro Tools LE does not support using Beat
Detective across multiple tracks. When
Beat Detective is applied to multiple tracks, only the top track is edited.
To keep the Edit selection intact while playing or looping from any location, deselect
Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
Defining a Beat Detective
Selection
Whether you will be generating Bar|Beat Markers, extracting a DigiGroove template, or separating regions to be conformed, you must always define the audio or MIDI selection to be analyzed. The Beat Detective window provides tools to define and capture the selection range, time signature, and swing (sub-division) content for the selected audio.
To ensure the best possible results with Beat
Detective, make sure the selected passage starts exactly on the attack of the first beat.
For Beat Detective to generate beat triggers that are metrically accurate, the length and meter of the selection must be correctly defined. In addition, the selection should not contain any meter or tempo changes.
Use Loop playback to check the accuracy of your selection.
Making an audio selection for Beat Detective
Make sure the selection’s start and end points fall cleanly on the beat. To zero in on an audio region’s start and end points, zoom to the sample level and use the Tab to Transients option
(see “Tabbing to Transients” on page 407).
To avoid losing an existing selection, save and recall an Edit selection by saving it as a
Memory Location. See “Memory Locations and Markers” on page 524.
2 Choose Event > Beat Detective.
3 You must define or capture the selection every time you make a new selection or change the tempo map. To define the selection range, do one of the following:
• If the tempo and meter of the audio selection do not match the session’s default tempo and meter, enter the Time Signature, and Start Bar|Beat and End Bar|Beat locations. For a four-bar selection that starts on beat 1, enter 1|1 and 5|1.
538 Pro Tools Reference Guide
• If the tempo and meter of the audio selection do not match the session’s default tempo and meter, and you are unsure of the length of the material, enter the Time
Signature and the Start Bar|Beat location; then start playback, and click the Tap button repeatedly to automatically calculate the End Bar|Beat. When using Tap with long selections, continue to tap until the
End Bar|Beat stabilizes. Once stabilized, you may need to manually adjust the number to the nearest bar boundary.
• If the selection’s tempo and meter match
session’s bars and beats, click the Capture
Selection button. The correct Time Signature, and Start Bar|Beat and End Bar|Beat values will be filled in automatically.
Beat Detective, Selection options
4 To improve Beat Detective’s accuracy in analyzing swung notes, select the Contains option that indicates the smallest sub-division of the beat contained in the selection. The Contains option includes quarter-notes, eighth-notes, sixteenth-notes (the default setting), thirty-second-notes, and a triplet modifier. The selected
Contains option determines the groove template grid locations for DigiGroove templates.
Calculating Tempo with Beat
Detective
If you know the meter, and start and end points of the audio selection, use Beat Detective to calculate its tempo.
To calculate a selection’s tempo with Beat
Detective:
1 Make an audio selection in the Edit window and define the selection in the Beat Detective
window as described in “Defining a Beat Detective Selection” on page 538.
2 Select Bar|Beat Marker Generation mode.
3 In the Detection section (Normal mode), click
Analyze.
4 Set the Sensitivity slider set to 0%
As long as the audio material is correctly aligned with the session’s tempo map, use
Capture Selection each time you make a new selection or make any changes to the tempo map (such as changing tempo or meter).
Beat Detective, Detection mode
The Selection definition is not retained when a session is closed and re-opened
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 539
5 Click Generate.
Bar|Beat Markers are automatically generated at the beginning and end of the selection, indicating the material’s tempo and meter.
Beat Detective generated Bar|Beat Markers identifying tempo and meter
Generating Beat Triggers
Once you have accurately defined the selection range, Beat Detective can generate beat triggers based on detected MIDI notes or audio peak transients. The range and type of transients found can be adjusted with the Detection settings, allowing you to zero in on the bars, beats, and sub-beats in the material, while avoiding the non-rhythmic content.
To generate beat triggers from an audio selection:
1 In the Edit window, make an audio selection.
2 Select Audio from the operation pop-up menu.
3 In the Beat Detective window, select one of the following modes:
• Bar|Beat Marker Generation
• Groove Template Extraction
• Region Separation (audio only)
4 Define or capture the selection as described in
“Defining a Beat Detective Selection” on page 538.
5 From the Analysis pop-up menu, choose one of the following detection algorithms:
• High Emphasis, works well with high frequency, inharmonic material, such as cymbals and hi-hats, while avoiding low frequency material.
• Low Emphasis, works well with low frequency material, such as bass guitar and kick drum, as well as with most harmonic material, such as piano or rhythm guitar.
6 Click the Analyze button.
7 Depending on the rhythmic content of the selection, set the Resolution to Bars, Beats, or Sub-
Beats.
8 Adjust the Sensitivity slider until beat triggers appear on the beats and sub-beats in the selection.
Bar triggers are indicated with thick lines, beat triggers with medium lines, and sub-beat triggers with thin lines.
Beat
Beat triggers
Sub-Beats Bar
9 You can zoom to the sample level and click the Scroll Next button to scroll to the next trigger within the selection. To scroll to the previous trigger, Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click
(Mac) the Scroll Next button (see “Navigating
Consecutive Beat Triggers” on page 545). This is
useful to confirm that the beat triggers are appearing in the appropriate locations. If false triggers appear between the beats or sub-beats
(representing non-rhythmic material) delete
them (see “Deleting Beat Triggers” on page 543),
or reduce the Sensitivity value.
540 Pro Tools Reference Guide
10 To display the metric locations for the triggers, select the Show Trigger Time option.
11 If you cannot get the beat triggers to appear
at the right locations, repeat steps 5–10 trying
the other Analysis algorithm (High or Low Emphasis).
To generate beat triggers from a MIDI selection:
1 In the Edit window, set the MIDI track you wish to use to Notes View.
2 Make a selection across a range of MIDI data.
Make certain that the selection start and end points are at musically relevant locations, such as barlines.
3 Choose Event > Beat Detective.
4 Select MIDI from the operation pop-up menu.
5 In the Beat Detective window, select one of the following modes:
• Bar|Beat Marker Generation
• Groove Template Extraction
6 Define the selection range. If the tempo and meter of the audio selection do not match the session’s default tempo and meter, enter the
Time Signature, and Start Bar|Beat and End
Bar|Beat locations. For a four-bar selection that starts on beat 1, enter 1|1 and 5|1.
7 If your MIDI track contains chords, choose one of the following MIDI chord recognition algorithms from the Analysis pop-up menu:
• Last Note
• First Note
• Loudest Note
• Average Location
• Highest Note
• Lowest Note
8 Click the Analyze button.
MIDI Chord Recognition
Since MIDI notes in a chord may be played at slightly different moments, Beat Detective interprets notes that are close together (closer than half the time value that is set in the Selection
Contains field) as a chord.
First
Note
Highest Note
Last
Note
Lowest Note
MIDI chord analysis
Beat Detective will use the criteria you set in the
Analysis pop-up menu to interpret the location of the beat in relation to the chord.
Last Note Sets the beat trigger to the start of the last note played in the chord.
First Note Sets the beat trigger to the start of the first note played in the chord.
Loudest Note Sets the beat trigger to the start of the note in the chord played with the highest velocity.
Average Location Sets the beat trigger to a point that represents the average between the start of the first note played in the chord, and the last note played in the chord.
Highest Note Sets the beat trigger to the start of the highest note played in the chord.
Lowest Note Sets the beat trigger to the start of the lowest note played in the chord.
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 541
Realign Session
Beat Detective’s Realign Session function lets you generate Bar|Beat markers without tick-based material shifting. This is useful if you want to extrapolate Bar|Beat markers from tick-based material to align the tempo map and Bar|Beat grid to the tick-based material.
You can also switch tick-based material, such as a MIDI performance, to be samplebased and then manually insert Bar|Beat markers.
Generating Bar|Beat markers in sessions with tick-based material, such as MIDI tracks and tick-based audio tracks, can cause the tick-based material to shift in absolute time. This can be useful if you want to align the tick-based material to Bar|Beat markers generated from samplebased material.
When you generate Bar|Beat Markers in a session that contains tick-based audio or MIDI,
Beat Detective gives you the option to preserve the position of the session’s tick-based material, or to allow the material to shift.
Realign Session dialog
To generate Bar|Beat Markers with Beat
Detective in a session with tick-based tracks:
1 In the Edit window, make an audio or MIDI selection.
2 In the Beat Detective window, select Bar|Beat
Marker Generation mode.
542 Pro Tools Reference Guide
3 Define or capture the selection as described
in“Defining a Beat Detective Selection” on page 538.
4 Set the Detection resolution to Bars or Beats.
5 Click the Generate button.
6 Do one of the following:
• In the Realign Session dialog, choose Preserve Tick Position if you wish to let the tick-based material shift in absolute time.
This option maintains prior Beat Detective functionality.
– or –
• Choose Preserve Sample Position if you wish to have the tick-based material maintain its absolute position. This option can be useful when adding a meter and tempo map to a freely played performance.
7 Click OK.
Tips for Getting Useful Beat Triggers
Use the following tips to verify beat triggers:
â—† To focus on a particular area in the selection, unlink the Timeline and Edit Selections and set the playback range by clicking or dragging in any Timebase ruler.
â—† Check the thickness of the beat triggers to see if they align properly with the audio material.
Thick triggers fall on barlines, medium triggers fall on beats, and thin triggers fall on sub-beats.
â—† Select the option for Show Trigger Time and see if the (assumed) metric locations of the triggers align with the material. A false trigger should be moved or deleted because it can cause subsequent triggers to appear in the wrong loca-
tions (see “Editing Beat Triggers” on page 543).
â—† Consider whether lengthy selections should first be broken down into smaller selections, which could be more easily managed. For example, working in 8- or 4-bar sections might yield better results more quickly.
â—† Beat triggers are preserved when switching between audio and MIDI modes. This allows using
MIDI triggers for editing audio, or collecting triggers from combinations of MIDI and audio tracks (Pro Tools HD only).
â—† For selections across multiple tracks, consider whether it may be easier to work with them individually, or in Collection mode (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with Music Production Toolkit
only). See “Detection (Normal) and Collection
Beat Detective LE does cannot be used across multiple tracks. When Beat Detective LE is applied to multiple tracks, only the top track is edited.
Editing Beat Triggers
Even though Beat Detective offers a great deal of flexibility in how transients are detected, there may be times when beat triggers must be deleted, moved, or manually inserted. Additionally, triggers can be promoted so they are retained at lower sensitivity settings.
Deleting Beat Triggers
False triggers, which do not represent an actual beat or sub-beat in the source material, may appear when raising the Sensitivity slider to detect quiet material. In these instances you can locate and manually delete any false triggers.
To delete a beat trigger:
1 With the Beat Detective window open, select any Grabber tool in the Edit window.
2 Locate the false trigger you want to delete.
Transients for false triggers usually have smaller peaks than the other trigger points, and typically fall between the sub-beats.
Deleting a beat trigger
3 Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the trigger to delete it.
Moving Beat Triggers
You can adjust the placement of triggers to allow for the attack of their transients, or to compensate for an individual transient that is slightly ahead of or behind the beat.
To move a beat trigger:
1 With the Beat Detective window open, select any Grabber tool in the Edit window.
2 Locate the beat trigger you want to move and drag it left or right.
Moving a beat trigger
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 543
Inserting Beat Triggers
If an important beat or sub-beat is not detected, because it is too quiet, you can manually insert a beat trigger.
To insert a beat trigger:
1 With the Beat Detective window open, select any Grabber tool in the Edit window.
2 Click in the selection where you want to insert the new trigger. After inserting a beat trigger, you can drag it left or right to adjust its place-
ment (see “Moving Beat Triggers” on page 543).
If you click too close to an existing trigger, the existing trigger will be moved to the new location.
Promoting Beat Triggers
To ensure that important beat triggers do not disappear when lowering the Sensitivity value, you can promote them. This is useful if a selection has numerous false triggers (too many to bother deleting) at a Sensitivity level where crucial, necessary beat triggers are also displayed. If lowering the Sensitivity slider causes the needed triggers to disappear, simply promote them first.
To promote a beat trigger:
1 Raise the Sensitivity slider until the desired transient is detected and a beat trigger appears.
2 Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the beat trigger to promote it.
3
If necessary, repeat steps 1–2 to promote addi-
tional beat triggers.
4 Lower the Sensitivity slider to a value where the false triggers disappear.
Once beat triggers are promoted, they will only disappear if the Sensitivity value is set to 0%. To demote all beat triggers in the selection—returning them to their original state—click the Analyze button.
Redefining a Beat Trigger’s Metric
Location
It is vital that beat triggers are accurately placed at the correct metric location. If a detected transient is slightly off the beat, Beat Detective may assign it, as well as other transients in the selection, to the wrong metric location.
For example, if you have a bass track where a note was intended to be a downbeat, but was played too early, Beat Detective may define its location as occurring a little before the downbeat. If you then separate and conform the region containing this note, it will be moved to the wrong location. Subsequent regions may be moved to the wrong locations as well.
If a beat trigger is not assigned the correct metric location, relocate it using Identify Trigger.
To change the metric location of a beat trigger:
1 Double-click the beat trigger you want to relocate. The Identify Trigger dialog opens.
2 In the Identify Trigger dialog, enter the correct location for the trigger, then click OK.
Identify Trigger dialog
544 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Navigating Consecutive Beat Triggers
Use the Scroll Next button to move from the currently selected beat trigger to the next beat trigger. To move to the previous beat trigger,
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
Scroll Next button. This is particularly useful for editing consecutive beat triggers when zoomed in at the sample level.
Generating Bar|Beat Markers with Beat Detective
Once Beat Detective has accurately detected the peak transients in the audio selection and accurately generated beat triggers, the triggers can be converted to Bar|Beat Markers. Bar|Beat Markers generated by Beat Detective create a tempo map that can be used throughout the session.
Once a tempo map has been generated, other audio regions and MIDI notes can be conformed to the Bar|Beat Markers generated by Beat Detective.
If you want to match the audio material to the session’s existing tempo map or a groove template, do not generate Bar|Beat Markers from the material. Instead, use Beat Detective to separate
and conform the material (see “Separating Regions with Beat Detective” on page 548).
If you are simply aligning a sloppy part to the other tracks, you probably do not need to generate Bar|Beat markers.
To generate Bar|Beat Markers with Beat
Detective:
1 In the Edit window, make an audio selection.
2 In the Beat Detective window, select Bar|Beat
Marker Generation mode.
3 Define or capture the selection as described in
“Defining a Beat Detective Selection” on page 538.
4 Set the Detection resolution to Bars or Beats, and configure the Detection settings so the selection’s peak transients are accurately detected
(see “Generating Beat Triggers” on page 540).
5 Click the Generate button.
Bar|Beat Markers are generated, based on the beat triggers, and appear in the Tempo ruler.
Bar|Beat Markers generated at Bar resolution
Bar|Beat Markers generated at Beat resolution
Working with Sub-Beats
Tempo is derived from Bar|Beat Markers.
Groove, or feel, is derived from Sub-Beats—the deviation of subdivisions of the beat from the strict tempo grid determines the groove or feel.
To extract the groove from a selection, set the
Detection Resolution to Sub-Beats. This ensures that the inner rhythms within each bar (if they indeed exist) are represented when generating
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 545
Bar|Beat Markers. These Bar|Beat Markers can then be used to quantize other audio regions or
MIDI tracks, thereby conforming to the Bar|Beat
Markers generated by Beat Detective.
When quantizing regions or MIDI notes to
Bar|Beat Markers on sub-beats that represent a swing feel, make sure to use a straight quantize value (with the Swing option for Quantize disabled).
DigiGroove Templates
Beat Detective allows the fine timing nuances of a rhythmic performance to be extracted and saved as a groove template, called a DigiGroove template. DigiGrooves can be saved locally to the Groove Clipboard, or saved to disk as Digi-
Grooves.
Groove templates can be used to transfer the feel of a particular performance to:
• Selected audio regions using Groove Conform
(see “Groove Conform” on page 551).
• Selected MIDI data using Groove Quantize
(see “Groove Quantize” on page 589).
Groove templates are “quantization maps” derived from real musical performances. The rhythmic character of each performance is analyzed and stored as a groove template. Beat Detective analyzes an audio selection for transient peaks according to a defined threshold and maps the rhythmic relationships to a 960 parts per quarter note (ppq) template.
When creating DigiGroove templates, Beat Detective also analyzes the dynamics of a performance. MIDI velocity data is saved from MIDI tracks, and accents and peak levels in audio data are incorporated into the groove template as velocity data, which can be applied to change the dynamics of MIDI tracks.
546 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Beat Detective translates the amplitude of signals in audio tracks to MIDI velocity according to a linear scale. For example:
• A 0 dBFS signal equals a MIDI velocity of
127.
• A signal at –6 dBFS equals a MIDI velocity of 64.
• A signal at –12 dBFS equals a MIDI velocity of 32.
• A –48 dBFS equals a MIDI velocity of 1.
Capturing this information is very important to preserving the feel of a performance, and can add life to MIDI tracks that lack dynamics.
Beat Detective only captures duration data from MIDI tracks, not from audio tracks.
To extract a Groove Template:
1 In the Edit window, make an audio or MIDI selection. The selection should consist of one or more complete bars, starting and ending on downbeats.
When extracting Groove Templates, the captured selection must not include
Bar|Beat Markers. Otherwise, the accuracy of the Groove Template will be compromised.
2 In the Beat Detective window, select Groove
Template Extraction mode.
3 Define or capture the selection as described in
“Defining a Beat Detective Selection” on page 538.
4 Configure the Detection options so the selection’s peak transients are accurately detected
(see “Generating Beat Triggers” on page 540).
5 Click the Extract button.
6 In the Extract Groove Template dialog, enter comments about the groove. You can enter a maximum of 255 characters to describe the groove. Comments can be viewed using the
Show Info button in the Beat Detective window.
Extract Groove Template dialog
7 Do one of the following:
• To save the extracted template for use in the current session, without writing the template file to disk, click Save To Groove
Clipboard. (This template will be lost when you close the current session.)
• To save the extracted template to disk in order to use it in other sessions or share it with other Pro Tools users, click Save To
Disk. Enter a name for the template and click Save. (Do not change the location of
DigiGroove template files and folders or they will not be available in your sessions.)
• Click Cancel to cancel without saving the template.
Use folders and subdirectories to organize
DigiGroove templates. However, be sure they are always located in C:\
Program Files\Digidesign\Pro Tools\
Grooves (Windows) or Applications/
Digidesign/Pro Tools/Grooves (Mac).
Groove template files located elsewhere will not be available in either Groove Quantize or Beat Detective.
Swing Content for Generating Groove
Templates
When defining swing content of the selection, select the Contains eighth-note option if the audio selection has a heavily swung eighth-note groove. If the audio selection has relatively straight eighth-notes, use the Contains sixteenth-note option. This lets the resultant Digi-
Groove template be applied more easily elsewhere. Although a groove might be based upon non-swung eighth-note material, you might want to apply the template to material that contains sixteenth-notes. If a template only has eighth-note resolution, but the material being conformed contains sixteenth-notes, adjacent sixteenth-notes will be mapped to the same eighth-note location.
Groove Extrapolation
Beat Detective’s ability to extract tempo data from a wide range of material is enhanced by its powerful “groove extrapolation” logic. Groove extrapolation automatically generates beat triggers for inclusion in groove templates even if a peak transient is not detected. For example, a drum loop might not have a hit on beat 3, consequently no peak transient is detected and no beat trigger is generated. Beat Detective will extrapolate from other beat triggers in the selection and create a trigger for beat 3 in the groove template.
In addition, extrapolated triggers preserve the feel of triggers generated from detected peak transients. For example, if a bar of kick drum detected three beat triggers, all of which were 20 ticks ahead of the beat, any extrapolated beat triggers will also be mapped 20 ticks ahead of the beat.
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 547
Separating Regions with
Beat Detective
(Audio Only)
Once beat triggers appear in your selection, they can be used to define start and end points for new regions that can be separated automatically. The new regions can then be conformed to the session’s existing tempo map, or to a groove template.
If you want to clean up the timing for the selection, without affecting the tempo, make sure to first calculate the tempo by generating Bar|Beat
Markers (see “Calculating Tempo with Beat Detective” on page 539).
To separate regions with Beat Detective:
1 In the Edit window, make an audio selection.
2 In the Beat Detective window, select Region
Separation mode.
3 Define or capture the selection as described in
“Defining a Beat Detective Selection” on page 538.
4 Configure the Detection options so the selection’s peak transients are accurately detected
(see “Generating Beat Triggers” on page 540).
5 Click the Separate button.
Regions are separated based on the detected beat triggers.
Trigger Pad
When separating regions, the Beat Detective window displays an option called Trigger Pad.
Detection settings, Region Separation mode
Enter a value (0–50 ms) in this field to pad region start points—where the point of separation is located in relation to the beat trigger (transient). This creates a space between the region start point and the region sync point, thereby ensuring that the attack portion of the material remains intact.
Region start
(point of separation)
20
Sync point
(beat trigger)
Separated region with 20 ms Trigger Pad
When conforming separated regions, the region sync point, not the region start point, determines where the region is placed.
For more information on region sync points,
see “Sync Points” on page 434.
548 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Separating Multiple Tracks
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with Music
Production Toolkit Only)
You can use beat triggers from a single track, or subset of tracks, to separate a group of tracks.
Beat Detective LE cannot be used across multiple tracks without the Music Production Toolkit option. When Beat Detective
LE (without the Music Production Toolkit option) is applied to multiple tracks, only the top track is edited.
In the following example, the defined selection is a drum loop consisting of two bars of 5/4. The kick, snare, hi-hat, and overhead microphones are recorded to separate tracks.
Analyzing the loop’s kick drum track, with Detection Resolution set to Beats, Beat Detective places beat triggers at the transients on beats 1
Figure 25. Kick drum track
Extending the selection to the snare, hi-hat, and overhead microphones tracks, and then performing the separation, results in separated regions in each of the drum tracks at the same location, based on the beat triggers from the kick
Figure 26. Kick drum, snare, hi-hat, and overhead microphones tracks
The separated regions can then be conformed as a group.
You can also utilize Collection mode (Pro Tools
HD and Pro Tools LE with Music Production
Toolkit only) when working with multiple tracks. Collection mode lets you analyze and detect triggers on tracks individually, and if you choose, add only the unique triggers from the current track to the overall collection. For more
information, see “Detection (Normal) and Collection Mode” on page 554.
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 549
Conforming Regions with
Beat Detective
(Audio Only)
After regions have been separated with Beat Detective, the regions can then be conformed using one of two modes:
Standard Conform Uses the session’s current tempo map (Grid)
Groove Conform Uses groove templates.
Beat Detective will conform any selected region, whether or not it was separated with Beat Detective. However, in order to successfully conform regions with Beat Detective, the region start points must correspond to the start of the material that will align with the session’s bars and beats. This should generally not be a problem if the regions were separated with Beat Detective
(rather than manually separated or trimmed).
Standard Conform
This is similar to using the Region > Quantize to
Grid command, but with one important difference: With a single operation, Beat Detective can adjust the position of all regions, whether they have a straight or swing feel.
Beat Detective, Standard Conform options
To conform regions using Standard Conform:
1 In the Beat Detective window, select Region
Conform mode.
2 Make sure Standard is selected.
3 In the Edit window, if not already selected, select the separated regions you want to conform.
Make sure the selection’s start and end points fall cleanly on the beat.
4 In the Beat Detective window, define or recap-
ture the selection as described in “Defining a
Beat Detective Selection” on page 538.
5 To affect how strongly the regions are conformed to the Grid (tempo map), select the
Strength option and specify a percentage value with either the slider or by typing in a value:
• Lower percentage values preserve the original feel of the regions.
• Higher percentage values align the regions more tightly to the tempo map, with 100% aligning precisely to the tempo map.
To “tighten up” the original feel, while retaining it, set the Strength option to
85–88%.
6 To affect which regions are conformed, select the Exclude Within option and specify a percentage value with the slider or by typing in a value:
• Lower percentage values ensure that regions further away from the Grid are conformed, while those closer to the Grid are not.
• Higher percentage values ensure that regions closer to the Grid, as well as those further away, are conformed.
To “tighten up” the original feel, while retaining it, set the Exclude Within option to
10–15%.
550 Pro Tools Reference Guide
7 To achieve a swing feel for the conformed regions, select the Swing option and whether the swing is based on eighth-notes or sixteenthnotes, then specify a percentage value with the slider or by typing in a value:
• Smaller percentage values yield less swing, with 0% yielding none.
• Larger percentage values yield more swing, with 100% yielding a triplet, swing feel.
• Percentage values between 100–150 move the regions beyond a triplet, swing feel, toward the next sixteenth-note boundary
(provided the Swing note value is set to eighth-notes).
If Beat Detective has successfully captured enough of the sub-beats from a selection before separating, you can successfully conform with the Swing option to change the groove from a “straight” feel to one that is swung. You can also import a groove tem-
plate containing a swing feel (see “Groove
8 Click the Conform button to automatically conform all regions in the selection.
Groove Conform
Instead of using a grid based on the session’s tempo map, Groove Conform uses a grid based on a groove template, or DigiGroove. Digi-
Grooves can be used to apply the feel of a captured passage to the selected audio regions. For information about creating DigiGroove tem-
plates, see “DigiGroove Templates” on page 546.
To conform regions using Groove Conform:
1 In the Beat Detective window, select Region
Conform mode.
2 Select Groove.
Regions conformed with Beat Detective
9 Audition the new conformed regions by clicking Play in the Transport window.
10 Do one of the following:
• If necessary, select Edit > Undo, and repeat
steps 4–8 trying a different set of Conform
settings.
– or –
• If necessary, apply Edit Smoothing (see
“Edit Smoothing” on page 552).
Beat Detective, Groove Conform options
3 In the Edit window, if not already selected, select the separated regions you want to conform.
Make sure the selection’s start and end points fall cleanly on the beat.
4 In the Beat Detective window, define or recap-
ture the selection as described in “Defining a
Beat Detective Selection” on page 538.
When using Groove Conform, the captured selection must not include Bar|Beat Markers. Otherwise, the accuracy of the Groove
Template will be compromised.
5 From the Groove Template pop-up menu, select the Groove Clipboard or a saved groove template (for information on creating groove
templates, see “DigiGroove Templates” on page 546).
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 551
6 To see comments about the selected template, click Show Info.
7 To affect how strongly the regions are conformed to the groove template, select the Timing option and specify a percentage value with either the slider or by typing in a value:
• Lower percentage values preserve the original feel of the regions.
• Higher percentage values align the regions more tightly to the groove templates grid, with 100% aligning precisely to the template grid.
• If the slider is set to 200%, regions move to a location that is twice the difference between the original region location and the position of the referenced template event.
For example, if a note was played at Bar 1|1|060
(a 16th note), and the corresponding template event is at 1|1|073, a slider value of 100% results in the note being shifted to 1|1|073; a slider value of 200% shifts the note to 1|1|086.
8 If desired, enable the Pre-Process using Standard Conform option. With this option enabled, Beat Detective conforms regions to the current Standard Conform settings before applying the groove template. With material in which the performance was not accurate, Pre-
Process using Standard Conform can lead to better results by ensuring that the performance is accurately mapped to the correct bars, beats, and sub-beats before the groove template is applied. Experimentation is the best way to determine when it is appropriate to use this option.
When conforming an audio passage to a heavily swung groove template, enabling
Pre-Process using Standard Conform will often yield better results.
9 Click the Conform button to automatically conform all regions in the selection.
10 Audition the new conformed regions by clicking Play in the Transport window.
11 Do one of the following:
• If necessary, select Edit > Undo, and repeat
steps 4–9 trying a different groove template
or Groove Conform settings.
– or –
• If necessary, apply Edit Smoothing (see
“Edit Smoothing” on page 552).
Edit Smoothing
(Audio Only)
After regions are conformed, there may be gaps between the regions. These gaps can cause the material to sound unnatural on playback.
Beat Detective, Smoothing options
Beat Detective can automatically fill the gaps between regions, and even add crossfades if you choose. This Edit Smoothing option can be used with regions that have been conformed, or with a track that contains many regions that need to be trimmed and crossfaded (such as in a sound effects track). This automated process of smoothing region edits can save many hours of tedious editing.
552 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To use Edit Smoothing on conformed regions:
1 In the Beat Detective window, select Edit
Smoothing mode.
2 Select a Smoothing options:
Fill Gaps Select this option to trim region end points so that the gaps between regions are filled.
Fill And Crossfade Select this option to trim region end points and automatically add a prefade (in ms) directly before each region start point.
3 In the Edit window, if not already selected, select the range of conformed audio regions you want to smooth. Make sure the selection’s start and end points fall cleanly on the beat.
4 Click the Smooth button to smooth the edits for the selected regions.
Regions before and after Edit Smoothing
5 Audition the results by clicking Play in the
Transport window.
6 If necessary, select Edit > Undo, and repeat
steps 2–5 trying a different Crossfade Length.
Edit Smoothing Creates Sync Points
After smoothing edits with Beat Detective, sync points (corresponding to the material’s start point) are automatically created for the conformed regions. This allows you to later conform the regions to a different tempo map or groove template, or use different Conform settings. However, sync points are only created as they are needed: If gaps between regions are created during Region Conform, Fill Gaps in Edit
Smoothing mode will trim regions to fill the gap and a sync point will be created at each region’s original start point. If there is no gap between regions, no sync point will be created by Edit
Smoothing.
For more information on region sync points,
see “Sync Points” on page 434.
Consolidating Regions after Edit
Smoothing
The process of separating, conforming, and smoothing with Beat Detective can leave tracks with many regions and many crossfades. If you are working with multiple tracks, the density of these edits may lead to system performance problems.
If performance is not an issue, use the Region Group command for easier editing and manipulation of regions. This can be useful for arranging beats that were sliced with
Beat Detective, especially if you plan on changing tempos with tick-based audio tracks. For more information on region
groups, see “Region Groups” on page 452.
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 553
Once you are satisfied with the results from Beat
Detective, it is recommended that you flatten the tracks with the Consolidate command. For all regions selected, Consolidate creates a single, contiguous audio file to reduce the session’s edit
density. See “Consolidate Command” on page 487.
Before consolidating a large selection across multiple tracks, make sure there is enough
RAM available. See “RAM Requirements for
Drum Tracks and Collection Mode
Suppose you have drum tracks for kick, snare, hi-hat, and overhead mics. If you analyze a selection across all of the tracks, you may get many false triggers when you raise the Sensitivity slider high enough to capture the hi-hat material (coming mainly from the tracks for the overhead mics).
However, if you analyze only the track for the overhead mics, the resulting beat triggers are slightly later than the material on the other tracks (since it will take more time for the sound to reach the overhead mics). If you then extend the selection to the other drum tracks and separate them, the regions from the kick, snare, and
tom tracks will be cut slightly late (see Figure 27
below).
Detection (Normal) and
Collection Mode
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with Music
Production Toolkit Only)
In some instances, it may be difficult for Beat
Detective to successfully analyze multiple tracks with the same Detection settings. With Beat Detective’s Collection mode, you can collect a set of beat triggers from different tracks, each with different Detection settings, and use the collection of triggers to generate Bar|Beat Markers or
DigiGroove templates, or separate new regions.
Collection mode is the only way to analyze and create beat triggers on one track, and apply them to another track.
This method of selectively adding beat triggers from separate analysis passes on different tracks, until you get only the triggers you want, is potentially much more effective than manually deleting, inserting, or adjusting incorrect or false triggers.
Beat Detective LE does not support Collection Mode without the Music Production
Toolkit option.
Figure 27. Overhead mics generate late beat triggers
Using Collection mode, you can analyze each drum track separately, one at a time, optimizing the Detection settings for each track until you get the triggers you want. The triggers for each track can be added successively to the collection, or you can choose to collect only the unique triggers from a track. The collection of triggers that results can then be used to generate
Bar|Beat Markers or a DigiGroove template, or separate new regions.
554 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Using Collection Mode
Collection mode is available in Bar|Beat Marker
Generation, Groove Template Extraction, or Region Separation mode (audio only), and is accessed by clicking the Collection Mode button in the Detection section.
Beat Detective, Collection mode options
To use Collection mode:
1 In the Edit window, make an audio selection on a single track. Make sure the selection’s start and end points fall cleanly on the beat.
2 In the Beat Detective window, select one of the following modes:
• Bar|Beat Marker Generation
• Groove Template Extraction
• Region Separation (audio only)
3 Define or capture the selection as described in
“Defining a Beat Detective Selection” on page 538.
4 Configure the Detection options so the selection’s peak transients are accurately detected
(see “Generating Beat Triggers” on page 540).
5 Click the Collection Mode button.
6 In the Detection (Collection Mode) section, click Add to add all the current beat triggers to the collection.
7 Click the Normal Mode button and move the selection to the next track you want to analyze.
Make sure to keep the selection range constant for each track.
Press Start+P (Windows) or Control+P
(Mac) to move the selection up, or
Start+Semi-colon (Windows) or Control+Semi-colon (Mac) to move the selection down.
With Commands Keyboard Focus enabled, press “P” to move the selection up, or Semicolon (;) to move the selection down. Hold down the Shift key to retain and add to the current selection
8 Configure the Detection options so the selection’s peak transients are accurately detected
(see “Generating Beat Triggers” on page 540).
9 Click the Collection Mode button again.
Chapter 24: Beat Detective 555
10 Do one of the following:
• In the Detection (Collection Mode) section, click Add Unique Triggers to add only the unique triggers from the track to the collection.
• Click Add All to add all triggers to the collection.
• Click Clear All to clear all triggers from the collection.
Each new set of triggers added to the collection appears in a different color. If successive triggers in the collection are located closely together (for example, because of microphone leakage), Beat
Detective keeps only the earlier triggers (see
Figure 28).
11 Repeat steps 7–10 for each additional track you are analyzing.
The beat triggers stored in the Collection mode are saved with sessions. Therefore, when a session is opened later, the previous collection material is still there (until it is cleared).
12 Once the desired beat triggers have been added to the collection, you can use them to generate Bar|Beat Markers or groove template, or separate regions. However, this must be done from the Collection Mode section (when the triggers are displayed in multiple colors).
To separate regions across multiple tracks, make sure to extend the selection to any additional tracks before separating.
Beat triggers detected in Kick track added to collection
Unique beat triggers detected in Snare track added to collection
Unique beat triggers detected in Hi-hat track added to collection
Collected beat triggers applied to Overhead microphones track
Figure 28. Overhead mic track displaying a collection of beat triggers containing unique triggers generated from the kick, snare, and hi-hat tracks
556 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Part VI: MIDI Editing
557
558
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing
Pro Tools provides powerful MIDI editing tools.
You can create and edit individual MIDI notes and controller events with the Pencil, Trim, and
Grabber tools in the Edit window. You can use the various MIDI operations (such as Quantize,
Transpose, Change Velocity, and Change Duration) to destructively transform groups of MIDI notes in terms of pitch, timing, dynamics, and phrasing. You can also use Real-Time Properties to non-destructively affect MIDI on playback or play-through. Pro Tools also provides numerous zoom and view tools that are optimized for
MIDI editing.
For information on region-specific editing
for both MIDI and audio, see Chapter 20,
“Working with Regions and Selections.”
Mirrored MIDI Editing
Mirrored MIDI Editing lets you edit MIDI regions and have your edits apply to every MIDI region of the same name. This can be particularly useful when editing looped MIDI regions.
To enable Mirrored MIDI Editing, do one of the following:
â–
Select Options > Mirror MIDI Editing.
– or –
â–
Enable the Mirrored MIDI Editing button in the Edit window.
Mirrored MIDI Edit button
Mirrored MIDI Edit button in the Edit window
In Mirrored MIDI Editing mode, the Mirrored
MIDI Editing button blinks Red once as an edit is made to alert you that your edit is being applied to more than one region.
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 559
To disable Mirrored MIDI Editing, do one of the following:
â– Deselect Options > Mirror MIDI Editing.
– or –
â– Disable the Mirrored MIDI Editing button in the Edit window.
If Mirrored MIDI Editing mode is disabled, and you edit notes of looped regions in
Notes View, the edit flattens the loop. Similarly editing region groups separates the region groups.
To select the Pencil tool shape:
1 Click the Pencil tool icon in the Tool Bar for the Pencil tool shape pop-up menu.
2 Select a Pencil tool shape.
Pencil tool shapes available for
MIDI
The Pencil Tool
The Pencil tool is useful for creating and editing
MIDI data. The first five Pencil tool shapes (Freehand, Line, Triangle, Square, and Random) can be used to enter pitches with varying durations and velocities (note velocities are determined by the Pencil tool shape). The various Pencil tool shapes can be particularly useful for drawing and editing different types of MIDI control data—for example, try using Line for volume,
Triangle for pan, Freehand for pitch bend, and
Square or Random for velocity.
Parabolic and S-Curve Pencil shapes are used for drawing tempo events only in the
Tempo Editor. See “Drawing Tempo
Pencil tool shape pop-up menu
Freehand
When in Notes View, the Freehand shape inserts a single MIDI note whose velocity is defined by the Default Note On Velocity MIDI preference.
The pitch, location, and duration of the note are determined by where on the MIDI track you click and release with the mouse.
When editing MIDI velocities or continuous controller data, the Freehand shape draws freely according to the movement of the mouse. The shape is reproduced as a series of steps according to the Pencil Tool Resolution When Drawing
Controller Data MIDI preference.
560 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Line
When in Notes View, the Line shape inserts a series of MIDI notes on a single pitch whose velocities are defined by the Default Note On Velocity
MIDI preference. The duration of each note is determined by the current Grid value.
When editing MIDI velocities or continuous controller data, the Line shape draws in a straight line from click to release. MIDI continuous controller values change in steps according to the Pencil Tool Resolution When Drawing
Controller Data MIDI preference.
Triangle
When in Notes View, the Triangle shape inserts a series of MIDI notes on a single pitch whose velocities oscillate between the defined Default
Note On Velocity MIDI preference and 127 according to a triangle pattern. The duration of each note is determined by the current Grid value.
When editing MIDI velocities or continuous controller data, the Triangle shape draws a triangular pattern that changes direction according to the current Grid value. MIDI controller values change in steps according to the Pencil Tool Resolution When Drawing Controller Data MIDI option in the MIDI Preferences page.
Square
When in Notes View, the Square shape inserts a series of MIDI notes on a single pitch whose velocities alternate between the defined Default
Note On Velocity MIDI preference and 127. The duration of each note is determined by the current Grid value.
When editing MIDI velocities or continuous controller data, the Square shape draws a square pattern that repeats at a rate based on the current Grid value.
Random
When in Notes View, the Random shape inserts a series of MIDI notes on a single pitch whose velocities change randomly within the range between the defined Default Note On Velocity
MIDI preference and 127. The duration of each note is determined by the current Grid value.
When editing MIDI velocities or continuous controller data, the Random shape draws a series of random values that change at a rate based on the current Grid value.
Custom Note Duration
The Custom Note Duration command lets you define the default note duration for inserting notes manually.
To select a Custom Note Duration:
1 Click the Pencil tool icon in the Tool Bar for the Pencil tool shape pop-up menu.
2 Select Custom Note Duration. A note icon
(the Custom Note Duration button) will appear below the Pencil tool icon in the Tool Bar.
Pencil tool with note icon
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 561
3 Click the note icon for the Custom Note Duration pop-up menu, and select a note duration.
The note icon changes to show the selected note value.
Custom Note Duration pop-up menu
Inserting MIDI Notes
In addition to recording, step recording, and importing MIDI into Pro Tools, you can manually insert MIDI notes using the Pencil tool.
When inserting MIDI notes or other MIDI data with the Pencil tool, MIDI region boundaries are created on the nearest barlines.
To insert a MIDI note:
1 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Notes
View.
2 Select the Pencil tool and make sure it is set to
Freehand. The cursor will change to the Pencil tool when located over the playlist area of a
MIDI or Instrument track in Notes View.
Setting the Grid Value
When inserting MIDI notes with the Pencil tool, the Grid value determines the duration of each note, or other characteristics, based on the Pen-
cil tool shape (see “The Pencil Tool” on page 560).
To set the Grid value for MIDI editing:
1
Set the Main Time Scale to Bars:Beats (see “Setting the Main Time Scale” on page 349).
2 From the Grid Value pop-up menu, select a note value (such as 1/4, 1/8, or 1/16).
3 Verify the default session meter and tempo
(see “Setting the Default Meter” on page 274 and “Setting the Default Tempo” on page 274).
For more information on Grid mode, see
Pencil tool set to Freehand
3 To insert quarter notes on the beat, set the
Main Time Scale to Bars:Beats, and set the Edit mode to Grid and the Grid value to quarter notes (0|1|000).
4 Move the Pencil tool into the playlist area for the MIDI or Instrument track. Use the Edit window’s ruler and the track’s mini-keyboard to locate the pitch and time location you want.
When using the Pencil tool, the Cursor location and value are displayed in the Options Bar.
Cursor location and value
562 Pro Tools Reference Guide
5 When you reach the pitch and time location you want, click to insert the note.
The Pencil tool can be dragged after clicking
(and before releasing) to adjust the note’s pitch or duration. Click and drag right to lengthen the note without changing its start point. Click and drag left to shorten the note without changing its end point.
MIDI note inserted with the Pencil tool
With the Smart Tool active (see “Using the
Smart Tool” on page 381), Start-click
(Windows) or Control-click (Mac) to change the cursor to the Pencil tool and insert MIDI notes; Option-Control-click (Mac) or Alt-
Start-click (Mac) to delete notes.
Adjusting the duration for an inserted note
With the Grid mode enabled, the start point of the MIDI note snaps to the nearest Grid boundary by default. Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac) with the
Pencil tool to temporarily disable snap to grid.
The velocity for inserted notes is determined by the Default Note On Velocity MIDI option in the MIDI Preferences page. When in Grid mode, the duration of the note is determined by the
Edit window’s Grid value. The duration of the note can also be determined by the Custom
Note Duration value (see “Custom Note Duration” on page 561).
If the Play MIDI Notes when Editing option in the MIDI Preferences page is enabled, each note sounds as it is inserted.
With the Grid mode enabled, the end point of the MIDI note snaps to the nearest Grid boundary by default. Control-drag (Windows) or Command-drag (Mac) with the
Pencil tool to temporarily disable snap to grid.
The Line, Triangle, Square, and Random Pencil tool shapes can be used to enter a series of identical pitches with varying velocities. The length and spacing for the inserted notes are determined by the current Grid value, or by the Custom Note Duration value. The note velocities are determined by the Pencil tool shape.
Use the Square shape for alternating velocities of loud and soft. Use the Triangle shape for a ramp up and down of velocities. The Line shape enters notes with identical velocities.
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 563
To insert a series of notes with random velocities:
1 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Notes
View.
2 Select the Pencil tool and make sure it is set to
Random.
To select MIDI notes, do one of the following:
â–
With the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool,
Shift-click each note.
â–
With any Grabber tool, move the cursor to where there are no notes (the Marquee appears) and click and draw a rectangle around the group of notes you want to edit.
Pencil tool set to Random
3 Set the Main Time Scale to Bars:Beats. In addition, set the Edit mode to Grid and the Grid value to quarter notes (0|1|000).
With these settings, the notes are inserted spaced one quarter note apart.
4 Click at the point to insert the first note and drag to the right until the number of notes you want have been inserted.
Selecting notes with a Grabber tool
When using a Grabber tool, if any portion of the rectangle touches a note (either its start or end point), the note is included in the selection.
However, selections made with a Grabber tool do not include underlying controller and automation data for the MIDI track.
â– With the Selector tool, drag across a range of notes.
Inserting a series of notes with the Pencil tool
Manually Editing MIDI Notes
All aspects of a MIDI note can be edited from the
Edit window, including start and end points, duration, pitch, and velocity. The Selector,
Grabber, and Pencil tools can operate on individual notes or groups of notes.
Selecting MIDI Notes
MIDI notes must be selected, before they can be edited.
Selecting notes with the Selector tool
When using the Selector tool, a note’s start point must be included in order for it to be selected. When a MIDI or Instrument track is in
Notes or Regions View, selections made with the
Selector tool include all underlying controller and automation data.
564 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To deselect one or more notes from a selection:
â–
With the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool,
Shift-click the notes so they become deselected.
You can also select notes in the Select/Split
Notes window. See “Select/Split Notes” on page 601.
Selecting and Auditioning MIDI Notes with the
Mini-Keyboard
Use the mini-keyboard on MIDI and Instrument tracks to select and play notes on that track. You can click on the mini-keyboard with any Edit tool.
To play a note on a MIDI or Instrument track, and select all notes of that pitch on the track (if present):
â– With any Edit tool selected, click a key on the mini-keyboard.
Playing a note with the mini-keyboard and selecting all notes of that pitch
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) to play notes without making a selection.
To select and play a range of notes on a MIDI or
Instrument track:
â– With any Edit tool selected, click a key and drag up or down on the mini-keyboard.
Playing a note with the mini-keyboard and selecting all notes of that pitch
You can also Shift-click on the mini-keyboard to extend or contract the range of notes.
Transposing Notes
MIDI notes can be transposed by dragging up or down with the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool.
If several notes are selected before dragging, each is transposed.
To transpose a MIDI note:
1 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Notes
View.
2 Select the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool.
3 While pressing Shift, drag the note up or down.
Control-click (Windows) or Commandclick (Mac) to select or deselect notes, and to make noncontiguous selections.
Transposing with a Grabber tool
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 565
The Shift key ensures that the transposed note retains its start point. While dragging, each new note sounds and the Cursor Location Value indicator (in the Edit window) indicates the number of semitones and direction (+/–) for the transposition.
To transpose a copy of the note, leaving the original unchanged, press Alt (Windows) or
Option (Mac) while dragging.
If the Edit mode is set to Grid, the dragged note snaps to the nearest Grid boundary. If the Edit mode is set to Spot, the Spot dialog opens.
To copy the selected notes, leaving the originals intact, press Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac) while dragging.
MIDI notes can also be transposed using
the Transpose MIDI Operation (see “Transpose” on page 600) or MIDI Real-Time
Properties (see “MIDI Real-Time Properties” on page 607).
Moving Notes
Like regions, MIDI notes can be dragged left or right with the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool to change their start point. If several notes are selected before dragging, they are all moved together.
To move a MIDI note:
1 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Notes
View.
2 With the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool, drag the note left or right (press Shift while dragging to preserve the note’s pitch).
As the note is dragged, the Cursor Location
Value indicator (in the Edit window) displays the new start point.
The placement of MIDI notes can also be
adjusted with Shift (see “Shift Command” on page 437) or Nudge (see “Nudging” on
Trimming Note Start and End Times
Like regions, start and end points for MIDI notes can be adjusted with the Trim tool. If several notes are selected when performing the trim, each note is changed.
The Trim tool can also be used on MIDI re-
gions. For more informations, see “Time
Compression/Expansion Trim Tool Functionality on MIDI Regions” on page 570.
To change the start or end points for a group of
MIDI notes:
1 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Notes
View.
2 Using the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool,
Shift-click each note you want to trim.
3 Do one of the following:
• Select the Trim tool.
Trim tool
– or –
• Use the Pencil tool.
566 Pro Tools Reference Guide
4 Move the cursor near the beginning of any of the highlighted notes, so the Trim tool appears.
Drag right to shorten the notes, or drag left to lengthen them.
Manually Editing Note Velocities
When a MIDI or Instrument track is set to Velocity View, each note’s attack velocity is represented with a velocity stalk. The taller the velocity stalk, the higher the velocity value (0–127).
To edit MIDI velocity:
1 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Velocity
View.
2 Select any Grabber tool.
3 Do one of the following:
• Drag the top (diamond) of the velocity stalk up or down.
Changing note end times with the Trim tool
If using Grid mode, the dragged start or end point snaps to the nearest Grid boundary. If using Spot mode, the Spot dialog opens, where you can enter the new location for the note’s start or end point.
When in Grid mode, use the Control key
(Windows) or the Command key (Mac) to temporarily disable Grid mode.
Notes can also be trimmed with the Trim Region
to Selection command (see “Trim Region to Selection Command” on page 421) and the Trim
To Insertion command (see “Trimming with
Dragging a velocity stalk
– or –
• If two notes have the same start time (with velocity stalks on top of each other), Control-drag (Windows) or Command-drag
(Mac) the actual note up or down.
Editing simultaneous velocities
Drag up to increase the velocity value, or down to decrease it. While dragging, the diamond turns blue and the associated note becomes selected. The dragged velocity values are reflected in the Cursor Location Value indicator (in the
Edit window).
The velocities for a range of notes can be edited with any Pencil tool.
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 567
To draw velocity values for a crescendo:
1 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Velocity
View.
2 Select the Pencil tool with the shape set to
Line.
3 Click at the beginning of the note range, near the bottom of the velocity range, and drag to the right and up until the line encompasses the range of notes you want to include in the fade.
Changing velocities with the Line shape
You can also use the Trim tool to scale the velocities for all selected notes. This is useful if you like the velocity relationship between the notes, but want them all to be louder or softer.
When in Velocity View, the Trim tool can be used to trim note durations in addition to changing velocities.
To scale velocities with the Trim tool:
1 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Velocity
View.
2 Using the Selector tool or any Grabber tool, select the range of notes to be edited.
3 With the Trim tool, click near the range of selected notes and drag up or down. Dragging up increases the velocities for each note and dragging down decreases them.
Typing in Note Attributes
When an individual note is selected with the
Pencil tool or any Grabber tool, its attributes are displayed in the Event Edit area.
Pitch
Attack Velocity
Release Velocity
Event Edit Area showing MIDI track information
Pitch is listed by note name and octave number.
Attack and release velocities are listed with their
MIDI values (0–127). Edit Selection Start, End, and Length times are displayed in the Main
Time Scale.
To change an attribute for a MIDI note:
1 In the MIDI or Instrument track’s playlist area, select the note with the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool.
2 Click in the Attributes text box and do one of the following:
• Enter the new value on the numeric keypad.
• Press the Up or Down Arrow to increment or decrement to the new value.
• Drag up or down to scroll to the new value.
• Play the new note value on your MIDI keyboard controller.
Press Forward Slash (/) to move between the fields in the Event Edit area.
You can also change attributes of MIDI notes in the MIDI Event List (see
Chapter 27, “MIDI Event List”).
Changing velocities with the Trim tool
568 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Multiple Notes and Event Edit Area
When multiple notes are selected, you can enter values in the Event Edit area fields to affect all selected notes. A triangle (delta symbol) to the left of the displayed note indicates that multiple notes are selected.
A new value in the Start field moves the first note in the selection to that location, with all other notes moving with it.
Multiple notes in the Event Edit area
Values entered in the pitch and velocity fields add to or subtract from the values for all selected notes. For example, to transpose all selected notes down an octave, enter a value of –12 for pitch.
Deleting MIDI Notes
In addition to deleting selected notes with the
Clear command in the Edit menu, individual notes can also be deleted with the Pencil tool.
To delete a group of MIDI notes with the Clear command:
1 Using the Grabber or Selector tool, select the
notes to be deleted (see “Selecting MIDI Notes” on page 564).
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Clear to delete the selected notes. The track’s underlying controller data remains intact.
– or –
• Press the Backspace (Windows) or Delete
(Mac) key.
When deleting MIDI notes within a time range selection, all underlying controller and automation data is also deleted.
To delete a single MIDI note with the Pencil tool:
â– With the Pencil tool selected, Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the note. The Pencil tool changes to an Eraser when Alt
(Windows) or Option (Mac) is pressed.
Deleting a note with Pencil tool
Program change events and Sysex events can also be deleted by Alt-clicking (Windows) or Option-clicking (Mac) them with the Pencil tool.
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 569
Time Compression/Expansion
Trim Tool Functionality on
MIDI Regions
The Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool is useful for matching a MIDI region to the length of another region, a tempo grid, or any other reference point.
Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool
With the Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool, you can move the MIDI region’s start or end point to expand or compress the region, scaling the MIDI data accordingly regardless of the track’s timebase (ticks or samples).
Before trimming
Using the Time Compression/
Expansion Trim Tool in Grid Mode
The Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool
(TCE Trim tool) can be used in Grid mode to match a region to the tempo of a session or a section of a session, or to create “double time” or “half time” performances.
To compress or expand MIDI regions in Grid mode:
1 Set the Edit mode to Grid.
2 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Regions
View.
3 Select the TCE Trim tool.
4 With the TCE Trim tool, drag the MIDI region’s start or end point to compress or expand the region to the Grid (for example, by quarter notes). A new MIDI region is automatically created, and appears both in the playlist and in the
Region List.
Using the Time Compression/
Expansion Trim Tool in Slip Mode
To compress or expand MIDI regions in Slip mode:
1 Set the Edit mode to Slip.
2 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Regions
View.
3 Select the TCE Trim tool.
4 With the TCE Trim tool, drag the MIDI region’s start or end point to compress or expand the region freely A new MIDI region is automatically created, and appears both in the playlist and in the Region List.
After trimming
Scaling a MIDI region with the Time
Compression/Expansion Trim tool
570 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Using the Time Compression/
Expansion Trim Tool in Spot Mode
In Spot mode, clicking with the TCE Trim tool in a region opens the Spot Dialog. You can specify the location where you want the region to start or end, or the duration of the region, and the region is automatically compressed or expanded as specified.
To compress or expand MIDI regions in Spot mode:
1 Set the Edit mode to Spot.
2 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Regions
View.
3 Select the TCE Trim tool.
4 Click the MIDI region near its start or end point. The Spot Dialog opens. Using any Time
Scale, enter a new start or end time (or duration) for the region, and then click OK. A new MIDI region is automatically created, and appears both in the playlist and in the Region List.
Using the Time Compression/
Expansion Trim Tool in Shuffle Mode
In Shuffle mode, the trimmed region will always begin at the original region’s start point regardless of whether you trim from the front to the rear or from the rear to the front.
To compress or expand MIDI regions in Shuffle mode:
1 Set the Edit mode to Shuffle.
2 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Regions
View.
3 Select TCE Trim tool.
4 With the Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool, drag the MIDI region’s start or end point to compress or expand the region freely.A new
MIDI region is automatically created, and appears both in the playlist and in the Region List.
Continuous Controller Events
Continuous controller events for MIDI and Instrument tracks are displayed in the form of a line graph with a series of editable breakpoints.
Controller events for MIDI and Instrument tracks differ from automation data for audio tracks in that the breakpoints are stepped (instead of vector-based), where each breakpoint represents a single controller event.
MIDI track displaying volume events
Continuous controller events that can be inserted and edited in Pro Tools include:
• volume
• pan
• pitch bend
• aftertouch (mono)
• MIDI controllers, 0–127
Polyphonic aftertouch cannot be viewed in the Edit window. To view polyphonic aftertouch in Pro Tools, use the MIDI Event List
(see Chapter 27, “MIDI Event List”).
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 571
MIDI controller #7 (volume) and #10 (pan) are treated by Pro Tools as automation data. This means that these controller events (along with
Mutes) can be recorded and automated from the
Mix window; in addition, each MIDI or Instrument track’s automation mode affects how these events are played back and recorded.
While a MIDI track’s volume, pan, and mute events can be suspended, all other controller events in the track always play. Instrument tracks support both MIDI volume, pan, and mute, and audio volume, pan, and mute.
To avoid overwriting existing MIDI volume and pan automation data, record in MIDI Merge mode. When recording in MIDI Merge mode, existing volume and pan data play back while recording new MIDI data.
Continuous controller events (including volume and pan) can be recorded from an external
MIDI controller (such as a keyboard or control surface), and they can be inserted in a MIDI track’s playlist using the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool.
Inserting and Editing Controller
Events
Continuous controller events can be edited with any of the following methods:
â—† Individual breakpoints can be dragged with any Grabber tool to adjust their location or value.
â—† A group of selected breakpoints can be scaled up or down with any of the Trim tools.
â—† New controller events can be drawn in with the Pencil tool to replace existing events. Events can be drawn with the Pencil tool (set to Freehand, Line, Triangle, Square, or Random).
â—† Controller events can be cut or copied and pasted, as well as nudged or shifted.
To copy continuous MIDI controller events and paste to a different MIDI controller, use
Special Paste (Edit > Paste Special > To Current Automation Type). For example, you might want to use the same control data for volume and a cut-off filter, or for pan and
pitch bend. For more information, see “Special Paste Function for Automation Data” on page 720.
Edits to volume data affect all tracks within an enabled Edit Group. This is not the case, however, for other controller playlists (such as pan). To insert and edit other controller types across all tracks in an Edit Group, press the Start key (Windows) or Control
(Mac) while performing the edits.
572 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Resolution for Inserted Controller
Events
When inserting controller events with the Pencil tool, the density of the events is determined by the Pencil Tool Resolution When Drawing
Controller Data preference in the MIDI Preferences page.
To set the Pencil tool resolution:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences, then click the
MIDI tab.
2 Enter a value (1 to 100 milliseconds) for Pencil
Tool Resolution When Drawing Controller
Data.
3 Click OK.
To edit a continuous controller event with the
Pencil tool, the controller first has to be added to the Automated MIDI Controllers list.
The controller is automatically added to the
Automated MIDI Controllers list when you record controller information from an external device.
To manually enable a continuous controller for automation:
1 Click the Track View selector for the MIDI or
Instrument track you want to edit, and select
Add/Remove Controller from the controllers pop-up.
MIDI Controllers pop-up
2 Select the MIDI controller range for the controller you want to automate.
3 Select the continuous controllers that to automate from the list on the left, and click Add.
Automated MIDI Controllers dialog
4 Click OK to close the Automated MIDI Controller dialog.
When you record continuous controller information from an external MIDI device, the controller is automatically added to the
MIDI Controllers list.
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 573
Patch Select (Program and
Bank Changes)
Each MIDI and Instrument track can have a default program change that is sent each time the track plays. Additional program changes can be inserted at any point within the track.
About Program and Bank Changes
The MIDI protocol lets you choose from a range of 128 programs (0–127). However, most MIDI instruments have several banks of 128 programs. To specify a bank, a bank select message must be sent. Some instruments use Controller
0 to switch the bank while others use Controller
32; some use a combination of the two. The
Patch Select dialog in Pro Tools lets you use either of these bank select messages when inserting a program change event. Check the manufacturer’s documentation for your MIDI device to see which Controller value it uses.
If you do not know what bank select command your instrument uses, you can record
MIDI to Pro Tools while making a bank change from the instrument. Then review the bank select information your instrument has recorded into Pro Tools in the MIDI
Event List.
Default Program Change
The default program change for each MIDI track is specified by clicking on the Patch Select button, from either the Mix or Edit window. Once specified, the default program change message is sent to your instrument when playing the track.
To set the default program change for a MIDI or
Instrument track:
1 From the Mix or Edit window, click the Patch
Select button.
Patch Select button,
(Edit window)
Patch Select button
Patch Select button,
(Mix window)
2 Do one of the following:
• In the Patch Select dialog, select a program number.
Some older MIDI devices (such as the Kurzweil K1000) use a program change instead of a Bank Select message to switch banks.
For these devices you may find it necessary to send two program change messages to access a particular program, where the first sets the bank and the second sets the program.
Patch Select dialog
– or –
• If you are using patch name files, choose a bank from the pop-up menu in the upper left of the Patch Select dialog and select a
patch name. See “Patch Names” on page 575.
574 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Choosing a bank in Patch Select dialog
3 Click Done.
Once selected, the program number (or patch name) appears in the Patch Select button in the
Edit window.
patch name
Patch Select button, Edit window
Unlike recorded and inserted program change events, the default program change does not appear in the track’s playlist.
To clear the default program change, select
None in the Patch Select dialog.
Patch Names
Pro Tools supports XML (Extensible Markup
Language) for storing and importing patch names for external MIDI devices (such as MIDI instruments). Pro Tools installs MIDI patch name files (.midnam) for the factory default patch names of many common MIDI devices.
MIDI patch name files (.midnam) can be edited in any text editor, or you can use third party patch librarian and editor software to create your own custom patch names.
Patch name files are sorted by manufacturer and are located:
• On Windows, in Program Files\Common
Files\Digidesign\MIDI Patch Names\
Digidesign
• On Mac, in /Library/Audio/ MIDI Patch
Names/Digidesign
To import MIDI patch names into Pro Tools:
1 Choose Setup > MIDI > MIDI Studio, and verify the MIDI Device definition in the MIDI Studio Setup window (Windows) or Audio MIDI
Setup (Mac).
See your Getting Started Guide for information on configuring MIDI on Windows and
Mac systems.
2 Verify the MIDI track’s output is correctly assigned to the MIDI device.
3 Click the MIDI track’s Patch Select button.
4 In the Patch Select dialog, click the Change button.
Change button
Patch Select dialog
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 575
5 In the Open dialog, navigate to one of the following:
• On Windows, Program Files\Common
Files\Digidesign\MIDI Patch
Names\Digidesign\<name of manufacturer>
– or –
• On Mac, /Library/Audio/MIDI Patch
Names/Digidesign/<name of manufacturer>
6 Select the MIDI Patch Name file (.midnam) for the MIDI device.
7 Click Open.
8 The Patch Select dialog is populated by patch names from the selected file, and the Patch
Name Bank pop-up menu appears in the upper left hand corner of the window.
To clear patch names:
1 In the Patch Select dialog, click the Clear button.
2 Click Done.
Inserting and Editing Program
Changes
Program changes can be inserted into a track’s playlist with the Pencil tool. Existing program changes can be edited, moved, and copied and pasted.
On some instruments, changing programs during playback can interrupt playback. To avoid this, place program change events in the track where there are no notes sounding.
To insert a program change with the Pencil tool:
1 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Program
Change view.
2 If you want the inserted event to snap to a
Grid value, enable Grid mode.
3 Click with the Pencil tool in the track’s playlist at the point where you want to insert the program change.
4 In the Patch Select dialog, select a program number (or name) and, if necessary, specify a bank change value.
5 Click Done to insert the program change event in the track’s playlist.
Patch Select dialog with patch names
Once patch names have been imported into
Pro Tools, they are available for that MIDI device in all subsequent sessions.
Pro Tools does not let you import a patch name file that does not match the model and manufacturer information selected in the MIDI Studio Setup window (Windows) or in the Audio MIDI Setup (Mac).
Program change event
576 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To edit a program change event:
1 With the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool, double-click the program change event you want to edit.
2 In the Patch Select dialog, select the new program number (or name) and, if necessary, specify a bank change value.
3 Click Done.
To move a program change event:
â– With the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool, drag the program change event left or right.
If the Edit mode is set to Grid, the dragged event snaps to the nearest Grid boundary. If the Edit mode is set to Spot, the Spot dialog opens.
The placement of program changes can also
be adjusted with Shift (see “Shift Com-
mand” on page 437) or Nudge (see “Nudging” on page 435).
To delete a program change event:
1 Do one of the following:
• With the track set to Program Change
View, click the program change event with any Grabber tool to select it.
– or –
• If the region contains other events you want to delete, select the entire region with any Grabber tool (when the track is displaying regions).
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Clear to remove the selected events from the track.
– or –
• Press the Backspace (Windows) or Delete
(Mac).
Individual program change events can also be deleted by Alt-clicking (Windows) or Option-clicking (Mac) them with the Pencil tool.
Auditioning Programs
When the Patch Select dialog is open, Pro Tools can automatically scroll through the different patches for a track’s assigned MIDI device.
To audition patches:
1 If you want to audition patches for a MIDI track or Instrument during playback, click Play in the Transport window.
2 Open the Patch Select dialog by clicking the
Patch Select button, or by inserting or editing a program change event in a MIDI or Instrument track.
3 Click a program number—the starting point from which you will scroll through the patches.
4 Enter a value for the number of seconds that will elapse between each program change.
5 Select the option for Increment Patch.
After the specified number of seconds, Pro Tools selects the next patch and transmits the program change to the track’s assigned MIDI device.
6 When you are finished auditioning settings, click Done to stop incrementing patches, and to close the Patch Select dialog.
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 577
System Exclusive Events
System Exclusive (Sysex) events can be recorded to MIDI or Instrument tracks in Pro Tools (see
“MIDI Step Input” on page 310). Once the
events are recorded, they appear in the track’s playlist as blocks when the Track View is set to
Sysex.
Sysex event block
While the contents of recorded System Exclusive events cannot be directly edited in
Pro Tools, the events can be moved or nudged, copied and pasted, or deleted.
To move a Sysex event:
1 Set the MIDI or Instrument track to Sysex
View.
2 With any Grabber tool, drag the Sysex event left or right.
If the Edit mode is set to Grid, the dragged event snaps to the nearest Grid boundary. If the Edit mode is set to Spot, the Spot dialog opens.
The placement of Sysex event blocks can
also be adjusted with Shift (see “Shift Com-
mand” on page 437) or Nudge (see “Nudging” on page 435).
To delete one or more Sysex events:
1 Do one of the following:
• With the track to Sysex View, click the Sysex event with any Grabber tool to select it.
– or –
• If the region contains other Sysex events you want to delete, select the entire region with any Grabber tool (when the track is displaying regions).
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Clear to remove the selected events from the track.
– or –
• Press the Backspace (Windows) or Delete
(Mac).
Individual Sysex event blocks can also be deleted by Alt-clicking (Windows) or Option-clicking (Mac) them with the Pencil tool.
Note and Controller Chasing
Note Chasing
Note Chasing allows long, sustained MIDI notes to be heard when playing from a point after their start time. For example, if a note’s start time is at 1|1|000 and lasts for 8 measures (until
9|1|000), note chasing lets you begin playing from bar 5 and still hear the note that started at
1|1|000 as it continues to sustain until 9|1|000.
Note Chasing is something that can turned on and off individually for each MIDI or Instrument track. By default, new MIDI and Instrument tracks have Note Chasing enabled.
578 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To enable Note Chasing for a MIDI track:
â–
Click the track’s Playlist selector and select the option for Note Chasing.
Note Chasing enabled in Playlist selector
Make sure to disable Note Chasing when working with samplers that are playing loops. If a
MIDI track, for example, is triggering a 4-bar drum loop and you begin playing at bar 3, the loop will begin playing at the wrong time and be out of synchronization with the other tracks.
Controller and Program Chasing
Pro Tools always chases continuous controller events and program changes for MIDI tracks.
This ensures that controller values and patches for MIDI devices are always appropriately set.
For example, suppose a MIDI track lasting 32 measures starts with a volume of 127 and in the last bar fades the volume down to 0. If after playing the track in its entirety you attempt to play from bar 8, the initial volume of 127 is chased and sent to the track’s assigned device— otherwise the track would not be heard since the most recent volume event sent would have been 0.
Chasing also occurs for a MIDI track’s default program change, along with any program change events residing within the track. Therefore, if you have chosen a default program change for a track, when playing from any point within the track, the program change event is sent to the track’s assigned device.
Default Controller Values and Chasing
Though new MIDI tracks appear to have default values for continuous controller playlists, this is actually not the case. For example, when viewing a MIDI track’s Mod Wheel playlist, you’ll see that the breakpoint line is set to a default of zero. However, since the modulation wheel on your synth may purposely be set to a different value, the default value in the track is not transmitted when playing.
For example, if you insert a Mod Wheel change from 0–90 towards the end of the track, and you then play from the beginning of the track, or from anywhere before the change, the Mod
Wheel value remains at 90 until the 0 value is reached, which is likely not what you want.
To ensure that the default controller value for a playlist is sent (and chased), click the initial breakpoint at the beginning of the track, move it slightly, and set it back to the default value.
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 579
Offsetting MIDI Tracks
Pro Tools can offset MIDI tracks globally or individually.
With Pro Tools HD, when Delay Compensation is active, MIDI and Instrument tracks are automatically delay-compensated to provide low latency monitoring. For
more information, see “Delay Compensation for MIDI” on page 659.
Global MIDI Playback Offset
Pro Tools offers a MIDI offset preference that allows MIDI and Instrument tracks to play back earlier or later (than audio tracks) by a specified number of samples. The offset affects playback only and does not alter in any way how MIDI data is displayed in the Edit window.
This capability is provided in large part to compensate for the audio monitoring latency in
Pro Tools LE. If you are monitoring the output of external MIDI instruments with an external mixer or sound system (or headphones), there is no latency. If, however, you are monitoring the output of your MIDI devices through a
Pro Tools LE interface (such as Mbox 2), your
MIDI tracks sound slightly later than your audio tracks. The larger the setting for the H/W Buffer
Size (128, 256, 512, or 1024 samples), the larger the latency.
By configuring the Global MIDI Playback Offset, you can align your MIDI tracks to play back slightly earlier (by a specified number of samples), thereby compensating for any latency when monitoring audio in Pro Tools LE.
To configure the Global MIDI Playback Offset:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the MIDI tab.
2 For the Global MIDI Playback Offset option, enter the number of samples (–10,000 to
10,000) for the offset. A negative value causes the MIDI tracks to play back earlier than the audio tracks; a positive value causes the MIDI tracks to play back later.
To allow for monitoring latency in Pro Tools LE, set the offset to a value that is roughly equivalent to the H/W Buffer Size.
3 Click OK.
The Global MIDI Playback Offset can also be set from the MIDI Track Offsets window.
You can also apply MIDI Real-Time Proper-
ties delay to offset MIDI (see “MIDI Real-
Time Properties” on page 607).
Individual MIDI and Instrument Track
Offsets
You can offset individual MIDI and Instrument track offsets in Pro Tools to compensate for delays in MIDI devices (the time it takes to trigger events on a sampler or synth).
For example, if you have some kick drums that are being played by an audio track in Pro Tools and want them to be exactly synchronized with kick drums that are being played by a MIDI device, you may need to use a MIDI offset. In this example, it will usually take at least 5 ms to trigger the MIDI notes, and it could take even longer, depending on the MIDI device.
You can measure the latency for a MIDI device assigned to a MIDI track by recording its audio output back into Pro Tools. Compare the sample locations for the recorded audio events against the original MIDI notes to calculate the latency.
580 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To configure a MIDI or Instrument track offset for a track:
1 Choose Event > MIDI Track Offsets.
Stuck Notes
If you encounter stuck notes with any of your
MIDI devices, you can silence them with the All
MIDI Notes Off command.
To turn off all stuck notes:
â– Choose Event > All MIDI Notes Off.
Press Control+Shift+Period (.) (Windows) or Command+Shift+Period (.) (Mac) for the
All MIDI Notes Off command.
MIDI Track Offsets window
2 Click in the Sample Offset column for the
MIDI track and enter the number of samples
(–10,000 to 10,000) for the offset. A negative value causes the MIDI or Instrument tracks to play back earlier than the audio tracks; a positive value causes the MIDI or Instrument tracks to play back later.
The equivalent offset in milliseconds is displayed in the msec Offset column. This value cannot be edited, but updates when a new value is entered in the SMPTE Offset column.
3 Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac) to accept the entered offset value.
To reset all offsets for all MIDI and Instrument tracks, click the Reset button in the upper left of the window.
Remove Duplicate Notes
The Remove Duplicate Notes command is useful for removing duplicate notes from a MIDI performance. If a note starts within the first 25% of the duration of a note of the same pitch which is already sounding (or within an eighth-note, whichever is shorter), it is considered a duplicate and is combined with the previous note. If it starts later than that, the first note is shortened so that it ends at the same tick at which the new one starts.
To remove duplicate notes:
1 Make an Edit selection including the duplicate notes you want to remove.
2 Choose Event > Remove Duplicate Notes.
Chapter 25: MIDI Editing 581
582 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 26:
MIDI
Operations
MIDI Operations Window
The MIDI Operations window provides commands to transform groups of MIDI notes to affect pitch, timing, and phrasing.
The MIDI Operations window has nine pages, one for each MIDI Operations command.
• Grid/Groove Quantize
• Restore Performance
• Flatten Performance
• Change Velocity
• Change Duration
• Transpose
• Select/Split Notes
• Input Quantize
• Step Input
The MIDI Operations window can be left open, revisiting it as necessary to apply a command, or to try out different options for a particular command.
You can also apply quantize, duration, delay, and transpose nondestructively using
MIDI Real-Time Properties. See “MIDI
Real-Time Properties” on page 607.
To open a specific MIDI Operations window page:
â– Choose Event > MIDI, followed by one of the
MIDI Operations (such as Grid/Groove Quantize).
MIDI Operations window (Grid/Groove Quantize page shown)
For information on configuring MIDI on
Windows and Mac systems, see your Getting Started Guide.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 583
To open the last active MIDI Operations window page:
â– Choose Event > MIDI > Operations Window.
To open the MIDI Operations window and display the last active MIDI Operations page, press Alt+3 (Windows) or Option+3 (Mac).
If the MIDI Operations window is already open, you can select any of the pages from the pop-up menu at the top of the window.
To apply the command in the MIDI Operations window, do one of the following:
â–
Click Apply or press Enter on the numeric keypad. This applies the command and leaves the window in the foreground.
– or –
â–
Press Enter on the QWERTY keyboard (Windows) or Return (Mac). This applies the command and closes the window.
When using the MIDI Operations window and MIDI Real-Time Properties at the same time, MIDI operations are applied to the actual MIDI data. MIDI Real-Time Properties continue to applied on top of the actual
MIDI data.
To undo the command in the MIDI Operations window:
â–
Choose Edit > Undo.
Using the MIDI Operations Window
Use the following methods to easily configure the various options, which vary from command to command, in the MIDI Operations window:
â—† To move forward and back through the various fields, press Tab or Shift+Tab.
â—† Increment or decrement selected fields with the Up and Down Arrow keys. Press and hold these keys to scroll quickly through the values.
â—† Click and drag up or down in a selected field to scroll to a new value.
â—† Press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) while adjusting sliders for finer resolution.
â—† For selected pitch and velocity fields, play a note on your MIDI controller keyboard to automatically enter it.
â—† Changing a value for a particular control
(such as the Swing Percentage in the Quantize window), automatically enables the control.
Grid/Groove Quantize
The Grid/Groove Quantize command adjusts
MIDI note locations and durations so that timing is improved, or so that a particular rhythmic
“feel” is achieved.
The default Grid/Groove page provides Grid
Quantize options, so that you can Quantize works by aligning notes to a Quantize Grid, the size of which is defined in the Quantize Grid pop-up menu by a standard note duration, or you can apply a groove template. The
Grid/Groove Quantize window provides slightly different options for Grid Quantize and Groove
Quantize.
You can also quantize MIDI input, see “Input Quantize” on page 604.
584 Pro Tools Reference Guide
The Grid/Groove Quantize MIDI Operation is not the same as the Quantize to Grid command
(Region > Quantize to Grid). The Quantize to
Grid command adjusts the start point for a selected region, and its contents are moved along with the region (with internal rhythmic relationships remaining intact).
The Grid/Groove Quantize MIDI Operation, on the other hand, affects MIDI notes individually.
Some notes may be moved back in time, others forward, some shortened, some lengthened, and some more drastically affected than others.
To open the Grid/Groove Quantize window:
â–
Choose Event > MIDI > Grid/Groove Quantize.
Press Alt+0 on Windows or Option+0 on
Mac to open the Grid/Groove Quantize window.
To select Grid Quantize:
â–
From the Quantize Grid pop-up menu, select a note value.
To select Groove Quantize:
â– From the Quantize Grid pop-up menu, select a groove template.
MIDI Operations window, Grid/Groove Quantize
The settings in the Quantize window are saved with each session. To store your favorite settings for use in future sessions, save them as part of a session template (see
“Creating Custom Session Templates” on page 91).
Grid Quantize
The Grid/Groove Quantize window can apply
Grid Quantize when a specific rhythmic value is selected in the Quantize Grid pop-up menu.
When a groove template is selected in the Quantize pop-up menu, Groove Quantize can be applied. For information on Groove Quantize, see
“Groove Quantize” on page 589.
What to Quantize
The options under “What to Quantize” determine what aspects of the selected MIDI notes are quantized: attacks, releases, or both.
Attacks When selected, note start points are quantized.
Releases When selected, note end points are quantized.
Preserve Note Duration When selected, note durations are preserved.
When deselected with the Attacks option selected, note end points are not moved.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 585
When deselected with the Releases option selected, note start points are not moved.
If the options for both Attacks and Releases are selected, the Don’t Change Durations option is unavailable.
Figure 29 shows how notes are adjusted by the different What To Quantize options.
before quantize
Figure 29. What To Quantize examples
Quantize Grid
Quantize Grid Pop-Up Menu Determines the beat boundaries to which notes are aligned. Any size from whole notes (1/1) to sixty-fourth notes
(1/64), including dotted and triplet values, can be selected for the Grid size.
Relative Grid mode does not affect the
Quantize Grid.
Tuplet Select the Tuplet option to quantize irregular note groupings, such as quintuplets (5 in the time of 4). The Quantize Grid for tuplets is calculated from the note size selection and the
Tuplet value. For example, if an sixteenth note equals 240 ticks, quintuplet sixteenth notes with 5 in time of 4 would yield a Grid size of 192 ticks or (240 ticks/5)*4.
Offset Grid By Offsets the Quantize Grid forward or back in time by a specified number of ticks.
Use this option to achieve a pushed feel (by using positive values) or a laid back feel (by using negative values).
To Quantize just the backbeats, set the
Quantize Grid to half-notes with an Offset of 960 ticks.
Randomize When selected, notes are moved randomly forward or back in time (after the Quantize occurs). For example, with the Quantize
Grid set to eighth notes and Randomize set to
50%, notes are placed up to a 32nd note before or after the beat boundary. The Randomize setting also affects note durations (if Releases is selected).
586 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Options
Additional Quantize options include:
Swing When selected, every other Grid boundary is shifted by the specified percentage value
(0–300) to achieve a “swing” feel. A Swing value of 0% yields no swing, while 100% yields a triplet feel. Settings above 100% progressively narrow the swing until the maximum of 300%, at which every other Grid boundary is moved to the next Grid point.
0% Swing
(480 ticks)
Every other Grid point shifted by swing
Exclude Within When selected, attacks and releases are not quantized if located within the specified percentage of the Quantize Grid. Use this option to preserve the feel of notes close to the beat, while correcting others that are drastically away from the beat.
Figure 31 shows the Quantize Grid set to quarter notes with the Exclude Within option set to
25%. Attacks and releases falling within the shaded area (equivalent to a sixteenth note area around each beat) are not quantized.
100% Swing
(640 ticks)
100% Swing, eighth note Grid
Include Within When selected, attacks and releases are only quantized if located within the specified percentage of the Quantize Grid. Use this option to clean up downbeats without affecting notes that are “swung” or wildly off the beat.
Figure 30 shows the Quantize Grid set to quarter notes with the Include Within option set to
50%. Only attacks and releases falling within the shaded area (equivalent to an eight note area around each beat) are quantized.
Figure 31. Exclude Within option
Strength When selected, notes are moved a percentage toward the Quantize Grid. Lower percentages preserve the original feel of the notes, higher percentages align the notes more tightly to the Grid.
Grid Quantize Examples
The following examples illustrate some of the more common uses for Grid Quantize.
If you intend to loop playback while quantizing, you may want to deselect Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection. This ensures that the play range does not change when selected notes are moved in the course of quantizing and undoing.
After quantizing, you can use Restore Performance to revert to the original version
(see “Restore Performance” on page 594.)
Figure 30. Include Within option
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 587
Straight Quantize
To quantize to a straight sixteenth note feel:
1 Select the range of MIDI notes to be quantized.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Grid/Groove Quantize.
3 Under What to Quantize, select the Attacks option. To quantize note durations as well, select the Releases option.
4 From the Quantize Grid pop-up menu, select sixteenth notes (1/16). Make sure that the other options for Tuplet, Offset Grid By, and Swing are not selected.
5 Ensure that the remaining Quantize options are deselected.
6 Click Apply.
Quantizing While Preserving the
Original “Feel”
You can quantize less strictly, to preserve the original feel of your recorded MIDI tracks.
To quantize while preserving the original feel:
1 Select the range of MIDI notes to be quantized.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Grid/Groove Quantize.
3 Under What to Quantize, select the Attacks option. To quantize note durations as well, select the Releases option.
4 From the Quantize Grid pop-up menu, select the note value you want to use.
5 Ensure that the other options for Tuplet, Offset Grid By, and Swing are not selected.
6 Select the Exclude Within option with a value of 10–15%.
588 Pro Tools Reference Guide
7 Select the Strength option with a value of
70–80%.
8 Ensure that the remaining Quantize options are deselected.
9 Click Apply.
10 Audition the change. If the desired effect is not achieved, undo the edit and experiment with different values for Exclude Within and
Strength.
Quantizing with Swing
If you are working with MIDI hi-hats or bass lines, you may want to apply more of a swing feel to the track.
To quantize with an eighth note swing feel:
1 Select the range of MIDI notes to be quantized.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Grid/Groove Quantize.
3 Under What to Quantize, select the Attacks option. To quantize note durations as well, select the Releases option.
4 From the Quantize Grid pop-up menu, select eighth notes (1/8).
5 Select the Swing option with the Swing percentage you want:
• For a light swing, use 12%.
• For a tighter swing-like groove, use 24%.
• For a true “triplet-like” swing feel, use
50–75%.
6 Ensure that the options for Tuplet, Offset Grid
By, and Randomize are not selected.
7 Click Apply.
8 Audition the change. If the desired effect is not achieved, undo the edit and experiment with different Swing percentages.
Quantizing with Randomize
If quantized notes sound too mechanical or “on the beat,” use the Randomize option in the
Quantize window to make them sound more natural.
To “humanize” the rhythmic feel of notes:
1 Select the range of MIDI notes to be quantized.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Grid/Groove Quantize.
3 Under What to Quantize, select the Attacks option. To quantize note durations as well, select the Releases option.
4 From the Quantize Grid pop-up menu, select the note value you want to use.
5 Select the Randomize option and enter a value of 5%.
6 Click Apply.
7 Audition the change. If the desired effect is not achieved, undo the edit and experiment with different Randomize percentages.
Groove Quantize
The Grid/Groove Quantize window can apply
Groove Quantize when a groove template is selected in the Quantize Grid pop-up menu.
Groove quantize adjusts MIDI note locations and durations according to a groove template rather than a strict quantization grid. Groove templates extract the particular rhythmic feel of a recorded performance so that is can be applied to a MIDI sequence. DigiGroove templates can be generated using Beat Detective.
Experimenting with Quantize
When using the Quantize command, you may have to experiment with many of the controls to achieve the results you want. Try different values for Include and Exclude Within, and
Strength; these controls determine which notes are affected and how drastically they are changed. Additionally, use the Randomize control, which adds a percentage of randomness to the quantize, to make tracks sound less “mechanical.”
MIDI Operations window, Grid/Groove Quantize
(groove template selected)
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 589
Groove Templates
Groove templates (such as DigiGroove templates) are “quantization maps” derived from real musical performances. The rhythmic character of each performance is analyzed and stored as a groove template. Groove templates can be used to transfer the feel of a particular performance to MIDI data (Timing, Duration, and Velocity).
DigiGroove templates can be created using Beat
Detective. Beat Detective analyzes an audio or
MIDI file for transient peaks according to a defined threshold and maps the rhythmic relationships to a 960 parts per quarter note (ppq) template. This template can then be used with
Groove Quantize, as well as with Beat Detective.
For information on Beat Detective and cre-
ating Groove Templates, see Chapter 24,
Additionally, DigiGroove templates are available from Digidesign and third party manufacturers.
Numerical Sound’s Feel Injector Templates
(960 ppq) are supported in Pro Tools, but
DNA Groove Templates (192 ppq) are not.
Quantize Grid
Quantize Grid Pop-Up Menu Determines which groove template to use for quantization. All groove template files in the Grooves folder are available in the Quantize Grid pop-up menu.
The directory path for the Grooves folder is:
• On Windows: C:\Program Files\
Digidesign\Pro Tools\Grooves
• On Mac: Applications/Digidesign/
Pro Tools/Grooves
If you organize your groove templates in subfolders in the Groove folder, they appear as submenus in the pop-up menu. Once you have selected a groove template, specific information about the template’s meter and duration (in bars) is displayed under the pop-up menu.
Show Comments The Comments field displays any comments saved with the Groove Template from Beat Detective. The Comments field cannot be edited in the Grid/Groove Quantize page, but can be edited when saving a groove template from the Groove Quantize page.
Pre-Quantize Enable to hard quantize the selected MIDI notes to a sixteenth-note grid before applying Groove Quantize.
Options
Timing Enable to apply Groove Quantize to the selected MIDI notes. Use the slider to change the amount of quantization applied to the selection. If the slider is set to 0%, there is no change in timing. A setting of 100% moves notes to the underlying template locations. If the slider is set to 200%, notes move to a tick location that is twice the difference between the original note location and the position of the referenced template event.
For example, if a note was played at Bar 1|1|060
(a 16th note), and the corresponding template event is at 1|1|073, a slider value of 100% results in the note being shifted to 1|1|073 (a slider value of 200% shifts the note to 1|1|086).
The default value for the Timing slider is 100%.
590 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Duration Enable to influence the durations of the selected MIDI notes. At a setting of 100%, durations are changed to match the current groove template. Set to 200%, durations increase and decrease based on the ratio of the original duration of the selected notes and the durations in the template.
The default value for the Duration slider is
100%.
Beat Detective does not extract duration information from audio performances. Digi-
Groove templates created using Beat Detective contain a fixed duration value that is
50% of the selected template resolution (see
“Defining a Beat Detective Selection” on page 538).
Velocity Enable to influence the velocities of the selected MIDI notes. If the slider is set to 0% there is no change to the selected velocities, a setting of 100% sets all velocities to match the current groove template. A velocity setting of
200% typically results in over-exaggerated velocities—loud notes increasing and soft notes decreasing in volume.
For example, if two adjacent notes have equal velocities of 80, and the two corresponding template velocities are 70 and 90, setting the slider to 200% changes both to velocities of 60 and
100.
The default value for the Velocity slider is 100%.
Slider Settings
To Save the groove template with the current
Options Slider Settings:
1 In the Grid/Groove Quantize window, select
Recall with Template if you want to restore all
Groove Quantize Options to the settings that are saved with the current template
2 Click the Save button.
Save User Groove Template Settings
3 Enter or edit any comments you want to save with the template.
4 Do one of the following:
• Click the Save button to save the groove template with the current Options Slider
Settings.
– or –
• Click the Save As button to make a copy of the groove template with the current Options Slider Settings. In the resulting Save dialog, enter a name for the copy and click
Save.
Slider settings can be lost if any of the following operations are performed without saving the settings first:
• Another MIDI Operations window is selected.
• The MIDI Operations window is closed.
• You switch to another groove template.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 591
Applying Groove Templates
Groove templates can be of any length and can be applied to any number of bars. Typically, you will apply groove templates to selections of the same length and meter. However, groove templates can be applied to different meters—for example, a groove template in 6/8 can be applied to a selection in 4/4. Also, it is not necessary to start on the downbeat when making a selection to apply a groove template.
To apply Grove Quantize:
1 With the Grabber or Selector tool, select the
MIDI notes you want to Groove Quantize.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Grid/Groove Quantize.
3 Select a groove template from the Grid Quantize pop-up menu.
4 Enable Timing, Duration, and Velocity as desired, and adjust their sliders to the percentages you want.
5 If desired, enable Pre-Process using Quantize.
6 Click the Apply button.
Figure 32. A DigiGroove template (derived from the audio shown) applied to a series of sixteenth-notes with Timing and Velocity both set to 100%
592 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Mapping Groove Templates
Pro Tools applies groove templates relative to the song start. For example, a two-bar groove template repeats starting at every odd-numbered bar in the session (bar 1, 3, 5, 7…).
2-Bar
Groove
Template
2-Bar
Groove
Template
2-Bar
Groove
Template
2-Bar
Groove
Template
2-bar groove template, repeating template grid
Template Mapping for Equal Meters And Odd
Numbered Bars
If a two-bar groove template is applied to a selection of one bar of the same meter, only the first bar of the template is used. If the selection does not encompass bar boundaries, for example
1|2|000 to 2|1|000, the groove template only modifies the selected notes.
4/4 1-bar selection
4/4 Bar 1 4/4 Bar 2 (not used)
(groove template)
Applying 2-bar groove template to a 1-bar selection, odd numbered bar
Template Mapping for Equal Meters And Even
Bars
If a selection starts on an even bar, only the appropriate portion of the groove template will be used. For example, if the selection is two bars long and starts on an even bar, the template applies bar 2 before bar 1.
4/4 1-bar selection
4/4 Bar 1 (not used) 4/4 Bar 2
(groove template)
Applying a 2-bar groove template to a 1-bar selection, even numbered bar
Template Mapping for Unequal Meters
In cases where the Groove Templates and track selections are based on different meters, the template will be repeated or truncated to match the number of beats in the selection.
For example, if the Groove Template contains fewer beats than the selection, such as a one-bar template in 6/8 being applied to a one-bar selection in 4/4, the template repeats to make up the difference.
4/4 1-bar selection
6/8 Bar 1 repeated
(beats 3–6 not used)
6/8 Bar 1
(groove template)
Applying a 1-bar groove template in 6/8 to a 1-bar selection in 4/4
If the Groove Template contains more beats than the selection on a track, such as a one-bar template in 6/4 being applied to a two-bar selection in 4/4, only uses the appropriate number of beats.
4/4 1-bar selection
6/4 Bar 1 (beats 5–6 not used)
(groove template)
Applying a 1-bar groove template in 6/4 to a 1-bar selection in 4/4
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 593
Behavior for Mixed Meters
If the selection contains mixed meters, the groove template will always be mapped so that the downbeats are aligned. For example, if the
Groove Template consists of one-bar of 4/4 and it is being applied to a selection of one-bar of 4/4 followed by a bar of 3/8 and one-bar of 3/4, the downbeat of the Groove Template is aligned with the downbeats in the selection and only uses the appropriate number of beats from the
Groove Template.
Restore Performance
The Restore Performance command reverts all selected MIDI notes to their original state (when first recorded or manually inserted), even after the session has been saved, or the Undo queue has been cleared.
3-bar selection of changing meters
4/4 Bar 1
(groove template)
(not used)
4/4 Bar 1
(groove template)
4/4 Bar 1
(groove template)
Applying a 1-bar groove template in 4/4 to a 3-bar selection in different meters
You can reset the groove template grid by adding a new meter marker (it can be the same meter). The groove template will restart at the meter marker regardless of the measure number or whether or not the meter has actually changed.
MIDI Operations window, Restore Performance page
The Restore Performance command can be undone.
The following MIDI note attributes can be restored:
Timing (Quantization) Restores the original start times of the selected notes. This changes the durations of selected notes if the Duration option is not enabled.
Duration Restores the original durations of the selected notes. If the Timing (Quantization) option is not enabled, the start times of selected notes are not restored and the end times are affected.
Velocity Restore the original velocities of the selected notes.
Pitch Restores the original pitches of the selected notes.
594 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To restore the original time, duration, velocity, or pitch for selected MIDI notes:
1 Select the MIDI notes you want to restore.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Restore Performance.
3 Select which note attributes to restore.
4 Click Apply.
Any changes made through the standard Quantize, Groove Quantize, Change Duration,
Change Velocity, or Change Pitch commands are undone and the original “performance” is restored. Also, any notes that were recorded with Input Quantize enabled are restored (see
“Input Quantize” on page 604).
Restore Performance does not undo cut, copied, pasted, or otherwise manually move
MIDI notes.
Flatten Performance
The Flatten Performance command “locks in” the current performance for selected notes, creating a new “restore to” state for the specified note attributes when using Restore Performance.
MIDI Operations window, Flatten Performance page
Restore Performance does not undo Duration changes made by trimming the start of a note. Trimming the start of a note essentially changes the note’s timing, and therefore is treated by Pro Tools the same as if it were manually moved.
Removing Input Quantize
Restore Performance can be used to remove quantization on input. For example, if you recorded a performance with Input Quantize on, you can still restore the performance as it was actually played.
For information on Input Quantize, see “Input Quantize” on page 604.
The Flatten Performance command can be undone.
To flatten the performance:
1 With the Grabber or Selector tool, select the
MIDI notes you want to flatten.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Flatten Performance to open the Restore Performance page.
3 Select the note attributes to flatten. (For de-
scriptions of these attributes, see “Flatten Performance” on page 595).
4 Click Apply.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 595
Change Velocity
The Change Velocity command automatically adjusts attack and release velocities for selected
MIDI notes. Use it to make notes louder or softer, or to create crescendos or decrescendos.
Velocities can also be edited manually with the
Pencil and Grabber tools (see “Manually Editing
MIDI Operations window, Change Velocity page
Velocity values usually affect the loudness of MIDI notes. Depending on how velocity is mapped with any MIDI instrument, velocities may also affect other aspects of an instrument’s sound (such as filter cutoff, envelopes, and modulations).
The settings in the Change Velocity window are saved with each session. To store your favorite settings as the default for use in future sessions, save them as part of a session
template (see “Creating Custom Session
You can also change velocity nondestructively in real-time using MIDI Real-Time
Properties. See “MIDI Real-Time Properties” on page 607.
While there are options for adjusting both the attack and release velocities for notes, most MIDI devices ignore release velocity information. To see if your instrument supports release velocities, refer to the manufacturer’s documentation.
Set All To Sets all velocities to the specified value
(1–127).
Add Adds to existing velocity values by the specified amount (1–127).
Subtract Subtracts from existing velocity values by the specified amount (1–127).
Scale By Scales all velocities by a percentage amount (1–400%).
Change Smoothly Allows velocities to change smoothly from one value to another over time.
Change Smoothly by Percentage Allows velocities to change smoothly from one percentage value to another over time.
The curve for this change can be adjusted
(+/– 99) to affect how gradually the change occurs.
596 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Limit To When selected, restricts the Change Velocity command to a minimum and maximum range.
Randomize When selected, the Change Velocity command is randomized by the specified percentage value. For example, using “Set all to” with a value of 64, along with a Randomize value of 50%, yields velocities anywhere between 48 and 80 (+/– 25% of the velocity value).
Velocity Ranges
The valid range for MIDI note velocities is
1–127. The Change Velocity command will never result in moving velocities outside this range; 1 is always the lowest and 127 is always the highest. This means that you can encounter situations where the Change Velocity command has no effect on a particular note.
For example, if a note with a velocity 64 is scaled by 200%, the new velocity would be 127. Attempting to scale or increase the velocity any further yields no further change.
Fading Velocities
To change velocities smoothly over time:
1 Select the range of MIDI notes to be edited.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Change Velocity.
3 Select the Change Smoothly option with the range set from 127 to 0.
4 Click Apply.
Preserving Existing Velocity Relationships
To partially preserve the existing velocity relationships and still achieve velocity fades, use the option for Change Smoothly by Percentage.
Figure 33 illustrates the difference between the two Change Smoothly options.
Original velocities
After Change Smoothly by Percentage, 100% to 20%
After Change Smoothly, from velocity of 100 to 10
Figure 33. Change Smoothly by Percentage
Scaling Velocities
Many times existing note velocities already have the relationship between them that you want, but are either too soft or too loud overall. In these instances, use the Scale By option.
For example, to make velocities 20% louder:
1 Select the range of MIDI notes to be edited.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Change Velocity.
3 Select the Scale By option with the percentage value set to 120.
4 Click Apply.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 597
Change Duration
The Change Duration command adjusts durations for selected MIDI notes. Use it to affect the articulation of the selected notes by making them more staccato or legato.
MIDI Operations window, Change Duration
The settings in the Change Duration page are saved with each session. To store your favorite settings as the default for use in future sessions, save them as part of a session
template (see “Creating Custom Session
You can also change note duration nondestructively in real-time using MIDI Real-
Time Properties. See “MIDI Real-Time
Set/Add/Subtract/Scale Option
Set All To Sets all durations to a length specified in quarter notes and ticks.
Add Adds to the durations by a specified number of quarter notes and ticks.
Subtract Subtracts from the durations by a specified number of quarter notes and ticks.
Scale by Shortens or lengthens durations based on a percentage value (1–400%).
Legato
Enable the legato option to add legato to the
MIDI selection. Select Gap or Overlap from the
Legato pop-up menu and enter the desired gap or overlap in beats and ticks.
Remove Overlap
The Remove Overlap option removes any note overlap for all notes of the same pitch. This command is different from Legato in that nonoverlapping notes of the same or different pitches remain unchanged. To create a gap between previously overlapping notes, enter the desired gap in beats and ticks.
Transform Sustain Pedal To Duration
The Transform Sustain Pedal To Duration option extends the length of all notes that are sounding when the sustain pedal (controller 64) is down (64 to 127) to the point when the sustain pedal goes up (0 to 63). Enable the Delete
Sustain Pedal Events option to convert sustain pedal events to note durations. Converting sustain pedal events to note duration can greatly simplify editing while maintaining the desired performance effect. For example, if a sustain pedal down event is deleted while editing, the subsequent MIDI performance looses its legato effect.
598 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Change Continuously Option
The Change Continuously option lets you change the duration of notes continuously in ticks or by percentage. Adjust the Curve slider to modify the shape of the change.
Change Continuously in Ticks Allows note lengths to change smoothly from one duration to another over time. Duration values are specified in quarter notes and ticks.
Change Continuously by Percentage Allows note lengths to change smoothly from one percentage value to another over time.
The curve for this change can be adjusted
(+/– 99) to affect how gradually the change occurs.
Limit Range When selected, restricts the Change
Duration command to a minimum and maximum range (in quarter notes and ticks).
Randomize When selected, the Change Duration command is randomized by the specified percentage value. For example, using “Set all to” with a value of 480 ticks, along with a Randomize value of 50%, yields durations anywhere between 360 and 600 (+/– 25% of the duration value).
Change Duration Examples
To make notes more staccato:
1 Select the range of MIDI notes to be edited.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Change Duration.
Press Alt+P on Windows or Option+P on
Mac to open the Change Duration window.
3 Select the option for Scale By with a percentage value of 50.
4 Click Apply. The durations for the selected notes are reduced by 50%.
With this option you may have to experiment with the percentage value to achieve the desired effect.
To make notes more legato:
1 Select the range of MIDI notes to be edited.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Change Duration.
3 Select the Legato option.
4 From the Legato pop-up menu, select Overlap.
5 Enter 0|000 for the amount of overlap.
6 Click Apply.
The end points for the selected notes are extended to the start point of the next note, thereby eliminating the space between each note.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 599
Transpose
While the Grabber tools can be used to manually transpose individual MIDI notes, or small groups of notes, the Transpose command can be used for entire MIDI tracks and regions. One of the more common uses for Transpose is to change the key for your MIDI tracks. You can define an Edit Group for MIDI tracks that you want to transpose, making sure to exclude any drum tracks from the group so they aren’t transposed. You can even transpose in key.
You can also transpose MIDI notes nondestructively in real-time using MIDI Real-
Time Properties. See “MIDI Real-Time
MIDI Operations window, Transpose
Transpose By (Octaves) Transposes selected notes by up to +/– 10 octaves.
Transpose By (Semitones) Transposes selected notes chromatically, up or down, by up to
+/–127 semitones.
Transpose (From and To) Transposes selected notes by semitones, as expressed by the difference between the source and destination pitches. Transposing from C3 to F#3, for example, transposes the notes up by an augmented fourth (six semitones).
Transpose All Notes To Transposes all selected notes to the same pitch. Use the slider or the number entry box to enter the desired pitch to which to transpose all selected notes.
Transpose In Key Transposes selected notes in key up or down by scale steps (based on the Key
Signature ruler).
To transpose MIDI notes:
1 If you will be transposing a group of tracks, enable the Edit Group.
2 Select the notes you want to transpose.
3 Choose Event > MIDI > Transpose.
Press Alt+T (Windows) or Option+T (Mac) to open the Transpose window.
4 Select the option for Transpose (By, From and
To, All Notes To, or In Key).
5 Set the corresponding pitch fields.
With any pitch field selected, play a note on your MIDI controller to automatically enter it as the pitch value.
6 Click Apply.
600 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To transpose all notes on a track down by an octave:
1 With the Selector tool, double-click in the track to select all of its notes.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Transpose.
3 Select the Transpose By option.
4 Enter a value of –1 octave.
5 Click Apply.
To transpose selected notes in key:
1 Select the notes you want to transpose.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Transpose.
3 Select Transpose in Key.
4 Adjust the slider (or type a number) for the number of scale steps (+ or –) by which you want to transpose the selection. For example, to transpose down a third, enter “–2.”
5 Click Apply.
Select/Split Notes
The Select/Split Notes window provides a complete set of tools to select and split notes based on a wide variety of criteria. Additional tools are provided to specify whether selected data is copied to the clipboard or to new tracks, whether the data is split to multiple new tracks or a single destination, and more.
MIDI Operations window, Select/Split Notes
Pitch Criteria
All Notes Selects all notes.
Notes Between Selects a range of notes between the specified upper and lower note. Values for the notes can be entered in pitch (C1–G8) or
MIDI note numbers (0–127).
Top Selects the highest note or notes in each chord.
Bottom Selects the lowest note or notes in each chord.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 601
Other Criteria
Velocity Enable the Velocity option to specify a range of velocities for selecting or splitting notes. Enter the desired minimum and maximum velocities.
Duration Enable the Duration option to specify a range of durations (in beats and ticks) for selecting or splitting notes. Enter the desired minimum and maximum durations.
Position Enable the Position option to select or split all notes that fall into a range of relative beat and tick locations within each bar. The minimum value determines the start of the range, the maximum value sets the end of the range.
Action
Select Notes Selects MIDI notes based on the specified criteria.
Split Notes: The Clipboard Copies the selected data to the clipboard only.
Split Notes: A New Track Copies all selected data to a single, new track. If the selection includes multiple tracks, that same number of tracks are created. The new tracks duplicate the original track type (Instrument or MIDI).
Split Notes: A New Track per Pitch Copies all selected data to multiple new tracks (one new track for each pitch). New tracks zoom to singlenote display. If the selection includes multiple tracks, each track has its data split separately.
Include MIDI Controller Data Includes all continuous MIDI data, including pitchbend and aftertouch, on the entire track, without any restriction on time selection.
Selecting and Splitting Notes
To select and split notes:
1 Do one of the following:
• With the Grabber or Selector tool, select the range of MIDI notes that contains the notes.
– or –
• To affect all the MIDI notes on a track, click in the track with the Selector tool, so that it contains a blinking edit cursor.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Select/Split Notes.
3 Configure the Pitch Criteria as desired.
4 Configure the Other Criteria (Velocity, Duration, and Position) as desired.
5 Enable the Select or Split option as desired.
6 From the Split Notes pop-up menu, select
Copy or Cut.
7 If splitting notes, select the Copy or Cut to destination.
8 If splitting notes, enable the Include MIDI
Controller Data option. Enabling this option includes all controller data associated with the split notes in newly created tracks. Leave this option unchecked to split only note data to new tracks.
9 Click Apply.
Any Real-Time Properties associated with the track or regions are copied to new tracks created by Select/Split Notes.
602 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Selecting a Pitch Range of Notes
A common use for Select/Split Notes is to select a single note for the entire length of a region or track. This is especially useful if you want to select a note in a MIDI drum track (such as a hihat), and affect it over the selected time range with the Quantize, Groove Quantize, Transpose, or Change Duration command.
To select only the hi-hats in a General MIDI drum track:
1 Do one of the following:
• With the Grabber or Selector tool, select the range of MIDI notes that contains the notes.
– or –
• To affect all the MIDI notes on a track, click in the track with the Selector tool, so that it contains a blinking edit cursor.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Select/Split Notes.
3 Select the Notes Between option with the note range set to F#1 and F#1 (if the MIDI Note Display preference is set to Standard Pitch).
For a General MIDI drum kit, the closed hi-hat is assigned to MIDI note number 42 (F#1 at Standard Pitch). If the hi-hat for your drum kit is assigned to a different note, make sure to specify it.
4 Click Apply.
You can also select all notes of a specific pitch on a track using the mini-keyboard.
For more information, see “Selecting MIDI
Selecting Notes in a Chord
Another use for Select/Split Notes is to select only the upper or lower notes in a chord. Many times you may only want to affect the upper or lower notes in a chord—for example, to increase velocities or transpose pitches.
To select only the bass notes in a chord:
1 Do one of the following:
• With the Grabber or Selector tool, select the range of MIDI notes that contains the notes.
– or –
• To affect all the MIDI notes on a track, click in the track with the Selector tool, so that it contains a blinking edit cursor.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Select/Split Notes.
3 Select the Bottom option and leave the number of notes set to 1.
4 Click Apply.
In order for notes to be considered a chord, their start times must be within thirty-two ppq ticks of each other.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 603
Input Quantize
When Input Quantize is enabled, all recorded
MIDI notes are quantized automatically.
Step Input
Step Input lets you use a MIDI controller to enter notes individually, one step at a time. This gives you precise control over note placement, duration, and velocity. With MIDI step input you can also create musical passages that might be difficult to play accurately, or at a fast tempo.
MIDI Operations window, Input Quantize
Use Input Quantize for drum machine style
loop recording (see “Loop Recording in MIDI
To enable Input Quantize:
1 Choose Event > MIDI > Input Quantize.
2 In the Input Quantize page, select Enable Input Quantize.
3 Configure the other options in the Input
Quantize page. (For more information on the
Quantize options, see “Grid/Groove Quantize” on page 584.)
4 When finished, close the MIDI Operations window.
604 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Step Input window
To enter MIDI notes with Step Input (using an external MIDI device):
1 Make certain your external MIDI device is properly connected and working with Pro Tools.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Step Input.
3 Select the Enable option.
When Step Input is enabled, each previously record-enabled MIDI or Instrument track is taken out of record enable, and if the Default Thru Instrument preference is defined, it is disabled.
4 Choose the MIDI or Instrument track for step entry from the Destination pop-up menu.
5 Choose the note value you wish to enter from the Step Increment section.
6 Play a note or chord on your MIDI instrument. This enters the note and moves to the next step of the insertion point.
To increase a note’s length while using Step Input:
1 Play and hold a note on your MIDI instrument.
When a note is being held on the MIDI keyboard, Next Step changes to read “Increment.”
2 Choose the note value that you would like to add and press the Increment button.
Release the note on your MIDI keyboard to move to the next step insertion point.
Step Increment
The options in the Step Increment section let you set the spacing and duration of MIDI events entered using the Step Input operation. You can select any size from whole notes to sixty-fourth notes (including dotted values).
Tuplet Lets you input irregular note groupings
(such as triplets or quintuplets). The tuplet length is calculated from the note spacing selection and the Tuplet values. For example, an eighth note equals 480 ticks, so tuplet eighth notes with 3 in time of 2 would yield a note spacing of 320 ticks (480 ticks / 3 * 2).
Note Length Lets you select the note length as a percentage of the spacing value. For example, an eighth note equals 480 ticks, so an eighth note with an 80% duration would be 384 ticks long.
Step Input Controls
The Step Input page has the following controls:
Enable When selected, adds MIDI events to the destination track when you play your external
MIDI keyboard. Additionally, each previously record-enabled MIDI track is taken out of record enable.
If a Default Thru Instrument is defined in the
MIDI Preferences page, it is disabled when Step
Input is enabled, and is re-enabled when Step
Input is no longer disabled.
Destination Lets you select the destination track for the Step Input from a pop-up list of all the
MIDI tracks in your session.
100% 80% 120%
Note length percentages
Options
Use Input Velocity When selected, MIDI notes are recorded using the velocity that you play on your MIDI keyboard.
Set Velocity To When selected, MIDI notes are recorded with the velocity that you specify in the Velocity field. This value can be set with the
Velocity slider.
Enable Numeric Keypad Shortcuts When selected, Step Input options can be selected from
the numeric keypad. See “Numeric Keypad
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 605
Undo Step, Next Step, and Redo Step
Use the Undo Step and Next Step buttons to do the following:
• Move the step insertion point, by either removing the previous note or by advancing the insertion point by the Step Increment value.
• Lengthen and shorten notes that are being held on the MIDI controller, by adding or removing Step Increment values. The Step
Increment value can be changed mid-note to create a note with a hybrid note length.
Use the Redo Step button to sequentially redo any previously undone steps.
Undo Step When the previous note has been released from the MIDI keyboard, and the insertion point has moved forward to the next note,
Undo Step removes the entire last note.
When a note is being held on the MIDI keyboard, Undo Step changes to read “Decrement,” and removes the last Step Increment length that was added to the held note.
Next Step (or Increment) When no note is being held on the MIDI keyboard, Next Step moves the insertion point by the Step Increment value, essentially inserting a musical rest.
When a note is being held on the MIDI keyboard, Next Step changes to read “Increment” and adds the Step Increment value to the held note, increasing its length by the Step Increment value.
While the note is being held, the Step Increment value can be changed, allowing you to create notes of any musical length.
Redo Step Reinserts the last note that was removed by the Undo Step operation.
Triggering the Undo Step, Next Step, or Redo Step
Buttons
The Undo Step, Next Step and Redo Step buttons can be set to be triggered by an external
MIDI synth, drum pad, or other controller.
To set Undo Step, Next Step and Redo Step MIDI triggers:
1 Place the Edit insertion on a track at the location where you want to enter the first MIDI note.
2 Choose Event > MIDI > Step Input.
3 Locate the button you want to assign a MIDI event to, and click in the field below the button.
Selecting the Next Step field
4 Play the MIDI event you want to use as a trigger.
If you use a continuous controller as a trigger (such as Pitch Bend), you should make certain to use an extreme controller value to avoid erroneous data input.
Next Step field triggered by pitch bend
5 Press Enter to confirm the MIDI trigger assignment.
606 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Numeric Keypad Shortcuts
:
When Enable Numeric Keypad Shortcuts is selected, you can apply many of the controls in the Step Input page, as well as several selection controls, using your computer’s numeric keypad.
Step Input Shortcuts Key
Whole note 1
1/2 note
1/4 note
1/8 note
1/16 note
1/32 note
1/64 note
Dotted note
Toggle Tuplet on/off
Next step
Undo step
Nudge forward
Nudge back
Select Main Counter
Edit Selection indicators
=
/
+
–
Enter
0
5
6
2
4
7
8
. (decimal key)
3
MIDI Real-Time Properties
MIDI Real-Time Properties let you change some
MIDI properties of MIDI and Instrument tracks
(or MIDI regions) during playback. There are five types of MIDI Real-Time Properties: Quantize, Duration, Delay, Velocity, and Transpose.
MIDI Real-Time Properties can be adjusted during playback, so you can listen for the desired results. Once you have found the settings you want, you can write the settings to the selected tracks or regions. This overwrites the corresponding MIDI properties on selected tracks or regions and resets the Real-Time Properties display to its default settings.
Real-Time Properties can be adjusted in the Real-
Time Properties View in the Edit window, or in the Real-Time Properties window.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 607
Real-Time Properties View
Real-Time Properties View in the Edit window only applies to tracks. To apply Real-Time Properties to regions, use the Real-Time Properties window (see “Real-Time Properties Window” on page 608).
To enable Real-Time Properties View in the Edit window:
â– Select View > Edit Window > Real-Time Properties.
Real-Time Properties Window
Using the Real-Time Properties window, you can apply Real-Time Properties to selected tracks or regions.
To open the Real-Time Properties window:
â– Choose Event > MIDI Real-Time Properties.
Real-Time Properties column in the Edit window
For Micro, Mini, and Small track heights, the
Real-Time Properties column only displays one or two properties, accordingly. The first one or two properties which are enabled are displayed automatically.
To select a different Real-Time Property in Mini or
Small track height view:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) on a real-time property element to select a different element from the pop-up menu.
Real-Time Properties window with properties enabled
The Real-Time Properties window can be used to apply either track-based or region-based Real-
Time Properties by making an Edit selection and selecting tracks or regions from the Apply To pop-up menu.
608 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Expanded Real-Time Properties Window
In the Real-Time Properties window, Quantize,
Duration, and Velocity each provide an expand/collapse triangle to show or hide additional settings.
Expand/collapse triangles
Real-Time Properties window, expanded view
Enabling Real-Time Properties
To enable Real-Time Properties:
1 Select a track, or make an Edit selection.
When using Real-Time Properties, enable
Link Track and Edit Selection mode to make a track selection from an Edit selection (see
“Linking or Unlinking Track and Edit Selections” on page 398).
2 In Real-Time Properties View in the Edit window, or in the Real-Time Properties window, select the desired Real-Time Properties by clicking the property name (Quantize, Duration, Delay,
Velocity, or Transpose). Enabled Real-Time Properties are highlighted and display their settings.
3 If you are using the Real-Time Properties window and Link Track and Edit Selection mode is enabled, select the track or region to affect from the Apply To pop-up menu.
4 Configure the Real-Time Properties settings
(see “Real-Time Properties Settings” on page 610).
Enabled Real-Time Properties are heard on playback and play through for the selected tracks and regions.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 609
Real-Time Properties Settings
Quantize
Quantize either can be based on a grid or a groove template. For grid quantize, additional tuplet and grid offset settings are available in addition to the standard MIDI quantize properties.
For groove quantize, additional controls are provided to set the extent to which the groove’s duration and velocities are applied. Both grid and groove quantize also let you set a strength amount, an “include” range, and a randomize amount.
Quantize Pop-Up Menu Select the desired quantize value, including all standard note rhythm values between whole notes and 64th notes, including dotted and triplet options. This pop-up menu also provides access to all standard and custom groove templates.
Offset Value Enable Offset and enter the desired offset value in Ticks between –2000 and 2000.
Offset is only available in the expanded Real-
Time Properties window.
Strength Value Enable Strength and enter the amount as a percentage between 0 and 100%.
Strength is only available in the expanded Real-
Time Properties window.
Include Enable Include and enter the range between 0 and 100%. Include is only available in the expanded Real-Time Properties window.
Random Enable Random and enter a percentage between 0 and 100%. Random is only available in the expanded Real-Time Properties window.
Duration
Duration can be used to increase or decrease the duration of MIDI notes by a fixed amount or by a percentage. This is useful for creating legato or staccato passages.
Duration Mode Pop-Up Menu
Select one of the following options from the Duration Mode pop-up menu: Set, Add, Subtract,
Scale, Legato/Gap, or Legato/Overlap.
Selecting a Grid Quantize value or a Groove Template
Swing Value Enter the desired amount of swing as a percentage between 0 and 300%.
Tuplet Value Enable Tuplet and enter the ratio for the tuplet (1–99), such as 3 to 2 or 5 to 4. Tuplet is only available in the expanded Real-Time
Properties window.
Selecting a Duration mode
Set Select to set notes to the specified duration.
610 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Add Select to add the specified duration to the current duration of each note.
Subtract Select to subtract the specified duration from the current duration of each note.
Scale Select to scale the current duration of each note by a percentage from 1 to 400%.
Legato/Gap Select to extend each note to the following note. The specified duration is the subtracted to create a consistent gap between notes.
Legato/Overlap Select to extend each note to the following note. The specified duration is then added to create a consistent amount of overlap.
Duration Amount
If the Ticks or Notes pop-up menu is set to ticks, enter a duration as a number of quarter-notes plus a number of ticks, such as 4|000. If the Ticks or Notes pop-up menu is set to a note size, enter a number to by which to multiply that note size, such as 7 16th-notes.
Ticks or Notes Pop-Up Menus
The Ticks or Notes pop-up menu lets you select either Ticks or a note size for Note Durations.
There is also a Ticks or Notes pop-up menu for the Minimum and Maximum Durations options.
Minimum and Maximum Durations
Enable either or both minimum and maximum durations and enter a value in quarter notes plus ticks or as a multiple of a note size. The Minimum and Maximum Durations options are only available in the expanded Real-Time Properties window.
Delay
Delay lets you delay or advance all MIDI data in the selected region or track. Select “+” from the
Delay pop-up menu to delay MIDI data, or select
“–” to advance MIDI data. Select Ticks or Milliseconds from the Ticks or Milliseconds pop-up menu. Enter the Delay amount in Tick or Millisecond values. Delay is limited to a maximum of value of 2000 ms or 999 ticks.
Velocity
Velocity lets you change MIDI velocity by a percentage or by constant value. Enter a percentage value in the Dynamics field to scale velocity around the median velocity of 64. You can also enter an offset by adding (+) or subtracting (–) values between 1 and 127. You can also enter
Minimum and Maximum Velocity value limits.
The Minimum and Maximum Durations options are only available in the expanded Real-
Time Properties window.
Velocity can be applied as a Real-Time Property to MIDI Input and Thru.
Transpose
Transpose lets you transpose MIDI notes up or down by a specified number of octaves and semitones, or in key by scale steps (based on the
Key Signature ruler). You can also transpose to a specified pitch. Select By, To, or In from the
Transpose pop-up menu to transpose by an interval, to a specific pitch, or in key by scale steps.
To transpose by an interval, enter the desired number of octaves and semitones as a positive or negative numbers.
To transpose to a specific pitch, enter the desired MIDI note.
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 611
To transpose in key by scale steps, enter the desired number of steps as a positive or negative numbers. For example, enter +2 to transpose up by thirds in key.
Transpose can be applied as a Real-Time Property to MIDI Input and Thru.
Real-Time Properties On Tracks and Regions
Real-Time Properties can be configured to apply to an entire track (all regions on that track), or on a region-by-region basis. Track-level properties also provide real-time MIDI input processing of velocity and transposition.
The presence of track-based Real-Time Properties are indicated by a “T” displayed in the upper right-hand corner of MIDI regions. Regionbased Real-Time Properties are indicated by an
“R” displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the region. Regions boundaries are indicated in
Notes View.
Track-Based Real-Time Properties
All track-based Real-Time Properties consistently apply to MIDI sequences throughout the entire track. However, regions with regionbased Real-Time Properties will take precedence over any track-based Real-Time Properties. You can clear region-based Real-Time Properties by selecting the region and clicking the Clear Region Properties button in the Real-Time Proper-
ties window (see “Writing Real-Time Properties to Tracks or Regions” on page 612).
For greater flexibility, when Real-Time Properties are assigned on a track basis they are actually contained in a track playlist. This lets you create multiple playlists containing different
Real-Time Property settings.
Indicates track-based
Real-Time Properties
Indicates region-based
Real-Time Properties
Track-based and region-based Real-Time Property indicators
Region-Based Real-Time Properties
Region-based Real-Time Properties can only be applied using the Real-Time Properties window
(Event > MIDI Real-Time Properties). Real-Time
Properties can be applied to multiple regions.
Once Real-Time Properties have been assigned to a region, the region can be moved or copied and pasted and retain its Real-Time Properties.
Writing Real-Time Properties to
Tracks or Regions
Once you have found the settings you want, you can write Real-Time Properties to the selected tracks or regions using the Real-Time Properties window. Real-Time Properties are applied to the current MIDI data on the track or in a region.
To write Real-Time Properties to tracks:
1 Select one or more tracks to which you want to apply Real-Time Properties.
2 Open the Real-Time Properties window (Event
> MIDI Real-Time Properties).
3 If Link Track and Edit Selection mode is enabled, select Tracks from the Real-Time Properties Apply To pop-up menu.
4 Configure the Real-Time Property settings as desired.
612 Pro Tools Reference Guide
5 Do one of the following:
• Click the Write to Track button in the Real-
Time Properties window.
– or –
• Choose Track > Write MIDI Real-Time
Properties.
To write Real-Time Properties to regions:
1 Select one or more regions to which you want to apply Real-Time Properties.
2 Open the Real-Time Properties window (Event
> MIDI Real-Time Properties).
3 If Link Track and Edit Selection mode is enabled, select Regions from the Real-Time Properties Apply To pop-up menu.
4 Configure the Real-Time Property settings as desired.
5 Click the Write to Region button.
To clear Real-Time Properties from a region:
1 Select the region for which you want to clear
Real-Time Properties.
2 Open the Real-Time Properties window (Event
> MIDI Real-Time Properties).
3 Select Regions from the Real-Time Properties
Apply To pop-up menu.
4 Click the Clear Region Properties button.
Real-Time Properties In the MIDI
Event List
In the MIDI Event List, the presence of trackbased Real-Time Properties are indicated by a
“T” displayed to the right of each event. Regionbased Real-Time Properties are indicated by an
“R.”
Track/region column
Track-based and region-based Real-Time Properties indicated in the MIDI Event List
For more information on the MIDI Event
List, see Chapter 27, “MIDI Event List.”
Chapter 26: MIDI Operations 613
Display of Real-Time Properties
Effects
The Display Events as Modified by Real-Time
Properties option determines if Pro Tools displays the effects of Real-Time Properties in both the Edit window and the MIDI Event List. The
Edit window and the MIDI Event List display the effects of Real-Time Properties when the Display Events as Modified by Real-Time Properties option is enabled. With this option disabled, the effects of Real-Time Properties are heard but not seen—you see the notes and other MIDI events with their original location, pitch, duration, or velocity, but you hear them as they are effected by the Real-Time Properties settings.
To enable or disable the Display Events as
Modified by Real-Time Properties option:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences.
2 Click the MIDI Tab.
3 Enable or disable the Display Events as Modified by Real-Time Properties option.
Real-Time Properties Effects Displayed in the MIDI Event List
The MIDI Event List takes into account the effect of Real-Time Properties whenever the Display Events as Modified by Real-Time Properties option is enabled. When editing or inserting an event in a track or region with active Real-Time
Properties, Pro Tools takes the properties into account and edits or inserts the event in a different place if necessary to match the effect of the
Real-Time Properties.
Real-Time Properties Effects Displayed in the Edit Window
In the Edit window with the Display Events as
Modified by Real-Time Properties preference enabled, MIDI events appear where they sound.
However, MIDI events are not actually written to their modified locations until you write the
Real-Time Properties to the track or region.
When moving MIDI events, the actual locations
(pitch or time) move by the amount the events are dragged, but the effect of Real-Time Properties is displayed.
When inserting an event in a track or region with active properties, Pro Tools takes the properties into account and edits or inserts the event in a different place if necessary to match the effect of the Real-Time Properties.
Display Events as Modified by Real-Time Properties option, MIDI Preferences page
4 Click OK.
614 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 27: MIDI Event List
The MIDI Event List
The MIDI Event List displays a detailed list of all events in a single MIDI or Instrument track. The events are displayed with text and numbers, allowing you to precisely edit their location, length, and event values.
Track selector
Options menu
Insert menu
Events in the MIDI Event List can be copied and pasted, selected, or deleted. Any MIDI event (except Sysex data) can be inserted and edited in the list. Certain MIDI event types can be hidden with the View Filter.
Unlike playlists in the Edit window, you can insert and display polyphonic aftertouch in the MIDI Event List.
MIDI Event List
Mute data for MIDI and Instrument tracks is not displayed in the MIDI Event List.
Opening the MIDI Event List
To open the MIDI Event List, do one of the following:
â– Choose Event > MIDI Event List.
â– Start-double-click (Windows) or Control-double-click (Mac) a MIDI or Instrument track name in the Mix or Edit window.
â– Press Alt+Equal (Windows) or Option+Equal
(Mac).
You can also use Alt+Equal (Windows) or
Option+Equal (Mac) to toggle between the
MIDI Event List and the Edit window.
Chapter 27: MIDI Event List 615
Menus in the MIDI Event List
At the top of the MIDI Event List are three popup menus:
Track Selector Indicates the MIDI or Instrument track currently displayed, and can be used to choose a different MIDI or Instrument track to be displayed.
Options Menu Contains commands and options
for the MIDI Event List (see “MIDI Event List
Insert Menu Contains a list of event types that can be inserted.
To the right of these pop-up menus, the number of displayed events is indicated.
Columns in the MIDI Event List
Information for the events in the MIDI Event
List is displayed in the following three columns:
Start Column Displays the start location, using the Main Time Scale, for each event. Locations can also be displayed in the Sub Time Scale when the Show Sub Counter option is selected in the Options pop-up menu.
The playback cursor appears as a blue arrow (red, when tracks are record-enabled) in the Start column.
When several events reside at the same location, the location is only indicated for the top event, with the others dimmed. The dimmed locations can be edited by double-clicking them.
Event Column Displays the event type, indicated by an icon, and associated event values.
Length/Info Column Displays the end point or length for notes, depending on which option is selected in the Options pop-up menu. Also displayed are the names for continuous controller events and program changes.
View Filter for MIDI Event List
You can use the View Filter to specify which event types are displayed in the MIDI Event List.
This can help you zero in on only the events you want to affect; it also protects MIDI events from being edited or deleted. Events not displayed in the MIDI Event List still play back.
The View Filter can be set to display “all” messages, “only” the specified messages, or “all except” the specified messages.
When inserting an event type that has been filtered from the MIDI Event List, that event type will no longer be filtered.
Playback cursor double-click to edit simultaneous
MIDI events
MIDI Event List columns
616 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Example: To filter the display of aftertouch and
System Exclusive Messages in the MIDI Event
List:
1 In the MIDI Event List, choose View Filter from the Options pop-up menu.
2 In the MIDI Event List View Filter dialog, select the All Except option.
MIDI Event List View Filter dialog
3 Select the options for Mono Aftertouch, Polyphonic Aftertouch, and System Exclusive. Leave all other messages deselected.
When using the All Except option, the selected events are not displayed. Conversely, when using the Only option, only the selected events are displayed.
4 Click OK.
Navigating in the MIDI Event List
You can use the Tab and Arrow keys to move through the MIDI Event List. You can also locate to the Edit start point, or any other specified location.
To move through the MIDI Event List, do any of the following:
• Double-click to edit a value.
• Press Tab or the Down Arrow to move to the next event (with or without the edit field selected).
• Press Control+Tab (Windows) or Option+Tab
(Mac) or the Up Arrow to move to the previous event (with or without the edit field selected).
• With an edit field selected, press the Right Arrow to move to the next edit field to the right.
• With an edit field selected, press the Left Arrow to move to the next edit field to the left.
To keep the last event selected, press Shift while moving to the next or previous event.
To go to the Edit start point:
â– In the MIDI Event List, choose Scroll To Edit
Selection from the Options pop-up menu.
To go to a specific location in the MIDI Event List:
1 In the MIDI Event List, choose Go To from the
Options pop-up menu.
2 In the Go To dialog, choose a format from the
Time Scale pop-up menu.
Go To dialog
Chapter 27: MIDI Event List 617
3 If using Time Code (Pro Tools HD and
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 only), you can select the Use Subframes option.
4 Enter the location you want to go to, then click OK.
The following items from the Options menu affect navigating in the MIDI Event List:
• When the Page Scroll During Playback option is selected, the MIDI Event List scrolls during playback.
• When Scroll During Edit Selection is selected, the MIDI Event List is scrolled automatically when the Edit selection changes in the Edit window.
Inserting Events in the MIDI
Event List
Insert menu, MIDI Event List
You can insert events in the MIDI Event List by choosing an event type from the Insert menu.
Following are several examples of inserting events in the MIDI Event List.
To insert a note in the MIDI Event List:
1 Do one of the following:
• Click the Insert button and choose Note from the pop-up menu.
– or –
• Press Control+N (Windows) or Command+N (Mac).
618 Pro Tools Reference Guide
2 Enter the location, pitch, attack and release velocities, and length for the new note. To move between the Event Entry fields, use the Left and
Right Arrow keys.
Pitch Release velocity
Attack velocity
Event Entry fields for note
When a field is selected, enter a value with any of the following methods:
• Enter the value on the numeric keypad.
• Drag up or down to scroll to the value.
• Play the note on your MIDI controller keyboard, then press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac) on the QWERTY keyboard to confirm the value.
With the Start field selected, you can automatically enter the location of another event already in the track by clicking that event.
3 Do one of the following:
• To insert the note and remain in Event Entry mode, press Enter on the numeric keypad.
• To insert the note and exit Event Entry mode, press Enter (Windows) or Return
(Mac) on the QWERTY keyboard.
• To exit Event Entry mode, without inserting the note event, press Escape on the
QWERTY keyboard.
To insert a controller event in the MIDI Event List:
1 Do one of the following:
• Click the Insert button and choose Controller from the pop-up menu.
– or –
• Press Control+L (Windows) or Command+L (Mac).
2 Enter the location, controller “type” number, and controller value for the new event. The controller name is displayed in the Length/Info column, to the right of the controller value. To move between the Event Entry fields, use the
Left and Right Arrow keys.
3 Do one of the following:
• To insert the controller event and remain in Event Entry mode, press Enter on the numeric keypad.
• To insert the controller event and exit
Event Entry mode, press Return on the
QWERTY keyboard.
• To exit Event Entry mode, without inserting the controller event, press Escape on the QWERTY keyboard.
To insert a program change in the MIDI Event List:
1 Do one of the following:
• Click the Insert button and choose Program Change from the pop-up menu.
– or –
• Press Control+P (Windows) or Command+P (Mac).
2 Enter the location for the new event.
3 Enter a Program Change number and Bank Select value (if necessary). The program change name is displayed in the Info column.
Controller number
Controller name
Controller value
Event Entry fields for controller event
When a field is selected, enter a value with any of the following methods:
• Enter the value on the numeric keypad.
• Press the Up or Down Arrow to scroll to the value.
• While pressing Control (Windows) or
Command (Mac), drag up or down to scroll to the value.
• Play the controller event on your MIDI controller keyboard, then press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac) on the QWERTY keyboard to confirm the value.
With the Start field selected, you can automatically enter the location of another event already in the track by clicking that event.
Program number
Program name
Controller 32 value
Controller 0 value
Event Entry fields for program change
You can click in the Info column to open the
Program Change window (for details, see “Patch
Select (Program and Bank Changes)” on page 574).
With the Start field selected, you can automatically enter the location of another event already in the track by clicking that event.
Chapter 27: MIDI Event List 619
4 Do one of the following:
• To insert the program change and remain in Event Entry mode, press Enter on the numeric keypad.
• To insert the program change and exit
Event Entry mode, press Return on the
QWERTY keyboard.
• To exit Event Entry mode, without inserting the program change, press Escape on the QWERTY keyboard.
Inserting Another Event
After inserting an event, you can easily insert another event of the same type. The event type to be inserted is indicated at the bottom of the
Insert menu.
Example: After inserting a note, to insert another, do one of the following:
â–
Click the Insert button and choose Another
Note from the pop-up menu.
– or –
â–
Press Control+M (Windows) or Command+M
(Mac).
When the option for Insert At Playback Lo-
cation is enabled (see “MIDI Event List Options” on page 622), you can use the key-
board shortcuts for inserting “another” event to insert events on-the-fly.
Editing Events in the MIDI
Event List
Events in the MIDI Event List can be edited, selected, deleted, and copied and pasted.
To edit an event in the MIDI Event List:
1 Do one of the following:
• Double-click the event field you want to edit.
– or –
• To edit a selected event, press Control+Enter (Windows) or Command+Enter (Mac).
2 Enter a new value with any of the following methods:
• Enter the new value on the numeric keypad.
• While pressing Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac), press the Up or Down Arrow to scroll to a new value.
• While pressing Control (Windows) or
Command (Mac), drag up or down to scroll to a new value.
• Play the new note or controller value on your MIDI controller keyboard, then press
Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac) on the
QWERTY keyboard to confirm.
3 Do one of the following:
• To enter the new event value and move to another field or event, use the Arrow keys.
• To enter the new value and remain in Edit
Entry mode, press Enter on the numeric keypad.
• To enter the new value and exit Edit Entry mode, press Enter (Windows) or Return
(Mac) on the QWERTY keypad.
• To exit Edit Entry mode without entering the new value, press Escape on the QW-
ERTY keyboard.
620 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Selecting Events in the MIDI Event
List
To select a range of events in the MIDI Event List, do one of the following:
â–
Click the event at the beginning of the selection and drag to the ending event.
– or –
â–
Shift-click the event at the beginning of the selection, then Shift-click the ending event.
To select noncontiguous events in the MIDI Event
List:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) each event.
To deselect an event in the MIDI Event List:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the selected event.
Notes selected in the MIDI Event List can be modified by any of the commands in the
MIDI Operations window (see Chapter 26,
Deleting Events in the MIDI Event
List
To delete an event in the MIDI Event List:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the event you want to delete.
To delete a selection of events in the MIDI Event
List:
1 Select the events you want to delete, by either dragging in the Start column, or by Shift-clicking each event.
2 To view only the events you want to delete, use the View Filter (see “View Filter for MIDI
Event List” on page 616). Events not displayed cannot be deleted.
3 Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Clear to delete all selected events.
– or –
• Press Backspace (Windows) or Delete (Mac) on the QWERTY keyboard.
Copying and Pasting Events in the
MIDI Event List
To copy and paste events in the MIDI Event List:
1 Select the events you want to copy in the
MIDI Event List.
Selecting in the MIDI Event List
2 Choose Edit > Copy.
Chapter 27: MIDI Event List 621
3 Do one of the following:
• To paste the material at an existing event’s location, click the event in the MIDI Event
List.
– or –
• To paste the material at any location, choose Go To from the Options menu in the MIDI Event List, enter the location where you want to paste, and click OK.
4 Choose Edit > Paste. The events from the Clipboard are pasted, replacing any existing events already there.
To paste events without overwriting other events, use the Merge Paste Special command.
MIDI Event List Options
MIDI Event List options
The MIDI Event List provides the following options:
Show Sub Counter Displays event times in the
Sub Time Scale.
Go To Opens the Go To dialog, where you can specify a location, based on any of the supported Time Scales, to which the Edit insertion point is moved.
Scroll To Edit Selection Scrolls the MIDI Event
List to the Edit start point or Edit insertion point.
Page Scroll During Playback Scrolls the MIDI
Event List during playback.
Scroll During Edit Selection Scrolls the MIDI
Event List automatically when the Edit selection changes in the Edit window.
Show Note Length Displays note lengths, instead of note end times, in the Length/Info column of the MIDI Event List.
Show Note End Time Displays note end times, instead of note lengths, in the Length/Info column of the MIDI Event List.
Insert At Edit Location Defaults the location for inserted events defaults to the Edit start point or
Edit insertion point.
Insert At Playback Location Lets you insert events in the MIDI Event List in real time while listening to the session playback.
Insert At Playback Location With Grid Snaps the location for events inserted in real time to the grid.
View Filter Opens the View Filter dialog, where you can specify which events are displayed in the MIDI Event List. Events that are not displayed are not affected by Cut, Copy, and Paste operations in the MIDI Event List. Events that are not displayed still play back. For more information, see “View Filter for MIDI Event List” on page 616.
622 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Part VII: Mixing
623
624
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing
In addition to the final mixdown, mixing tasks can occur any time during a recording session.
This chapter covers Pro Tools mixing, including audio signal flow, output and bus paths, sends, and signal routing for submixing and mixdown.
During mixing, real-time plug-ins and hardware inserts provide effects and signal processing (see
Chapter 29, “Plug-in and Hardware Inserts”).
Format Compatibility Monitoring Stereo mixes must often be mono-compatible. When you are mixing in multichannel surround, mixes may also need to be compatible with stereo or mono playback systems (see the Pro Tools Sync & Surround Concepts Guide ).
Mixing Concepts
Mixing involves making decisions about elements such as volume levels, panning, and effects. These mixing decisions are initially based on what you hear in your studio. While you can control many variables in your studio (such as speakers and room acoustics), you cannot control the listening environment in which your final mix will be heard. The following tips include a few ways to make sure your mix will sound as good as possible to as many listeners as possible:
Alternate Speakers and Reference
Monitoring Listen to your mixes on a variety of different speakers, to gauge how well the mix will translate. By listening to a mix through different playback systems, you are attempting to anticipate what the intended audience will hear.
Reference Mixes Tapes and discs of rough mixes let you audition mixes outside the studio in different listening environments .
Metering and Calibration
Meters provide a visual display of signal levels.
They tell whether signal is getting to a channel, and how loud or soft a signal is relative to
(above or below) “0.”
By calibrating all your equipment to standard reference levels, a consistent level can be achieved (and metered) among different recording devices in a studio, throughout a facility, or throughout an entire production chain of a feature-length film. For example, a level of
–18 dBFS coming out of a DAT deck should play and meter at –18 dBFS in Pro Tools.
Use the Calibration Reference Level option
(in the Operations Preferences page) to set a default calibration reference level when
Pro Tools is in Calibration mode.
For audio interfaces that have trims (such as the 192 I/O), see the interface’s guide for calibration instructions.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 625
Track Types
Pro Tools provides four different types tracks that can route audio:
• Audio
• Auxiliary Input
• Master Fader
• Instrument
Mono and stereo audio tracks are available on all Pro Tools systems.
Multichannel audio tracks and surround mixing formats are supported by Pro Tools HD only.
Pro Tools provides two types of tracks that include MIDI data:
• MIDI
• Instrument
Instrument tracks are listed under both audio tracks and MIDI tracks because they are a combination of Auxiliary Input and MIDI tracks.
Pro Tools HD provides VCA Master tracks, which do not pass audio or control MIDI, but do
affect controls on other tracks. See “VCA Master
Tracks can be identified in the Mix window by their Track Type icon.
Track Type icons
Audio Tracks
Audio tracks play audio from disk, record audio to disk, or monitor input signals when recordenabled, or in TrackInput monitoring mode. Inserts on audio tracks are pre-fader. Sends can be pre- or post-fader.
Source or Input
Source: any mono, stereo, or multichannel audio file, playing back from disk
Input: while record-monitoring or in TrackInput monitoring mode
Inserts
(plug-ins or hardware inserts)
Sends, pre-fader
Record
Solo/Mute
Volume
Panner
Sends, post-fader
Output
Audio signal flow, audio tracks
Main Output
+ Additional Outputs
Audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, VCA Master, MIDI, and Instrument tracks
For information on creating tracks, see
“Creating Tracks” on page 125.
626 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Auxiliary Input Tracks
Auxiliary Inputs provide the same signal routing options as audio tracks, except that their input must come from an internal bus or hardware input. Inserts on Auxiliary Inputs are pre-fader.
Input Source: bus or hardware input path
Inserts
(plug-ins or hardware inserts)
Solo/Mute
Volume
Panner
Sends, pre-fader
Sends, post-fader
Output
Main Output
+ Additional Outputs
Audio signal flow, Aux Input tracks
Auxiliary Inputs are used as inputs for audio from external MIDI instrument and other sources, as well as to submix internal bus and output paths. They can be fully automated.
When using Auxiliary Inputs as inputs for external sources, adjust the source output levels to achieve proper recording levels.
Common Uses for Auxiliary Inputs
By bussing tracks to the Auxiliary Input, you can:
• Apply real-time plug-ins or an external processor to a submix, using the Auxiliary Input as an effects return (such as reverb or bus line compression)
• Input audio from external MIDI instruments and other audio sources into the mix, to monitor or route to audio tracks for recording to disk (such as from the audio outputs of a MIDI synthesizer)
• Consolidate volume control of any submix under a single fader
• Play back audio from an instrument plug-in, even though Instrument tracks are the recommended way to integrate instrument plug-ins
(such as Digidesign’s Xpand!).
To route an Auxiliary Input:
1 Click the Input Path selector of the Auxiliary
Input and choose an input or bus path.
2 Click the Output Path selector of the Auxiliary
Input and choose an output or bus path.
3 Adjust the Auxiliary Input fader to set the return volume (it defaults to – ∞ dB).
Submix examples begin in “Signal Routing for Monitoring and Submixing” on page 650.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 627
Master Fader Tracks
Master Faders control the master output levels of output and bus paths. When assigned to an active output or bus path, they provide postfader effects processing and master level control for a main mix, headphone and cue mixes, stems, effects sends, and other signal routing applications. Master Faders support all track formats supported on your Pro Tools system.
Volume
Inserts, post-fader
(plug-ins or hardware)
Input (source) determined by output assignment (of other tracks)
Output
Main Output
+ Additional Outputs
Audio signal flow, Master Faders
Unlike inserts on audio tracks and Auxiliary Inputs, Master Fader inserts are post-fader. This lets you insert a dither plug-in, or similar plugin, on your master mix. For more information
about dithering, see “Dither” on page 660.
Master Faders provide up to five post-fader inserts and no sends. Also, Master Fader tracks do not have Pan sliders, or Mute and Solo buttons.
If you absolutely must have a pre-fader insert on your Master Fader signal, set up an
Auxiliary Input before the Master Fader.
Common Uses for Master Faders
Master Faders can be used to:
• Control and process output mixes
• Monitor and meter an output (such as a bus or hardware output) to guard against clipping
• Control submix levels
• Control effects sends levels
• Control submaster (bussed tracks) levels
• Apply dither or other inserts to an entire mix
Use Master Faders to control submix levels, send level masters, and other outputs. Master Faders can control either audio interface outputs or internal busses. A Stereo Master Fader controls the level of a pair of outputs. Master Faders do not consume any of your system’s audio processing power.
To use a Master Fader as a stereo master volume control:
1 Create a stereo Master Fader track.
2 Set the outputs of all audio tracks in the session to the main output path (for example, outputs 1–2 of your primary audio interface) and set the panning for each track.
3 Set the output of the Master Fader to the main output path.
628 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Master Fader Meters
Meters on Master faders always show post-fader levels, regardless of the Pre-Fader Metering setting in the Options menu.
Master Faders and Paths
Master Faders can be assigned to main or subpaths as defined in the I/O Setup. Multiple Master Faders cannot be assigned to the same path.
Active and Inactive Master Faders
When a Master Fader track is inactive, its associated plug-ins, I/O assignments, and their resources are made inactive.
When a Master Fader output assignment (path assignment) is made inactive, the Master Fader no longer controls the master gain of that path.
When you duplicate a Master Fader track, the duplicated track’s assignment will be inactive.
Instrument Tracks
Instrument tracks provide the same audio signal routing options as Auxiliary Input tracks, except that their input must come from an instrument plug-in inserted on that Instrument track, or from a bus or hardware input. Instrument tracks provide up to ten pre-fader inserts.
Input
Inserts
(plug-ins or hardware inserts)
Record
(MIDI only)
Solo/Mute
Volume
Instrument plug-in, internal bus, or hardware instrument
Sends, pre-fader
Sends, post-fader
Panner
Output
+ Additional Outputs
Audio signal flow, Instrument tracks
Main Output
Instrument tracks are used as inputs for instrument plug-ins, and other sources (including internal busses). They can be fully automated.
When using Instrument tracks as inputs for external sources, adjust the source output levels to achieve proper recording levels.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 629
Common Uses for Instrument Tracks
By playing back MIDI from or through an Instrument track you can control and monitor the audio from:
• Instrument plug-ins, such as software synthesizers or samplers.
• External MIDI instruments, such as synthesizers and samplers
To route audio from an external MIDI instrument to an Instrument track:
1 Click the Input Path selector of the Instrument track and choose the corresponding hardware input for your external MIDI instrument.
2 Click the Output Path selector of the Instrument track and choose an output or bus path.
3 In Instruments View, click the MIDI Input selector, and assign a device and channel from the pop-up menu to record and control the external
MIDI instrument.
4 In Instruments View, click the MIDI Output selector, and assign the port and channel for the external MIDI instrument from the pop-up menu.
5 Adjust the Instrument fader to set the volume
(it defaults to – ∞ dB).
For information on assigning MIDI input
VCA Master Tracks
(Pro Tools HD Only)
VCA Master tracks emulate the operation of voltage-controlled amplifier channels on analog consoles, where a VCA channel fader would be used to control, group, or offset the signal levels of other channels on the console.
VCA Master tracks do not pass audio, so they do not have inputs, outputs, inserts or sends. A Mix group is assigned to a VCA Master track, which appears in the VCA track’s Group Assignment selector. The controls of the tracks in that Mix group, called the slave tracks, are modified by the controls on the VCA Master.
Record
Enable
Solo
Volume
VCA Master track
Group Assignment selector
TrackInput
Mute
VCA Group ID
Level meter
VCA Track Type indicator
For information inserting Instrument plug-
ins on Instrument tracks, see “Inserting Instrument Plug-ins on Instrument Tracks” on page 141.
630 Pro Tools Reference Guide
VCA Slave Track Controls and Group Behavior
When a group is assigned to a VCA Master, the controls on its slave tracks, by default, do not follow any grouped behavior that may be set in the Attributes page of the Groups dialog. This is standard behavior for VCA operation. However, slave tracks can be set to follow group behavior.
See “Allowing Grouped Behavior of Slave Track
Controls” on page 632.
VCA Master Track Controls
The controls on a VCA Master track affect the corresponding controls on the slave tracks in its assigned Mix group. The following controls are provided:
Volume
The VCA Volume fader controls the Volume fader on audio, Auxiliary Input, Instrument,
Master Fader, and other VCA Master tracks in a
VCA-controlled group. (Volume faders on MIDI tracks are not affected.) Volume faders on slave tracks move to show the composite level , or the level on each track resulting from the contribution of the VCA Master Volume fader.
Mute
The VCA Mute button controls the mute state of audio, Auxiliary Input, Instrument, MIDI, and other VCA Master tracks in a VCA-controlled group. Muting a VCA-controlled group does not change the original mute state of slave tracks.
(Mute buttons on slave tracks that were previously unmuted show an implicit mute.)
Solo
The VCA Solo button controls the solo state of audio, Auxiliary Input, Instrument, MIDI, and other VCA Master tracks in a VCA-controlled group.
• Soloing a VCA Master will implicitly mute all tracks except its slave tracks, thereby indirectly soloing the slave tracks.
• Soloing a VCA Master will clear any explicit solos on its slave tracks, leaving them indirectly soloed, and implicitly mute all other tracks.
• Explicitly soloing a slave track while its
VCA Master track is soloed will override the
VCA Master solo.
Record Enable
The VCA Record Enable button toggles the
Record Enable status of only those audio, Instrument, and other VCA tracks that have already been record-enabled individually. You can then toggle record enable on and off for those tracks using the VCA Master Record Enable.
To temporarily force all slave tracks to toggle their record enable status:
â–
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
Record Enable button on the VCA Master.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 631
TrackInput
The VCA TrackInput button toggles the input monitor status of only those audio tracks in a
VCA-controlled group that are record-enabled.
You can toggle Input Monitor status for those tracks using the VCA Master TrackInput button.
To temporarily force all slave tracks to toggle their input monitoring status:
â–
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
VCA Master TrackInput button on the VCA Master.
Level Meter
On VCA Master tracks, Level meters indicates the highest level occurring on any of its individual tracks, not a summed level of all slave tracks.
The channel format of Level meters on the VCA
Master is set according to the channel formats of its slave tracks, as follows:
• If all slave tracks are the same channel format (mono, stereo or a multichannel format), the number of level meters on the
VCA Master track is identical to that of the slave tracks.
• If the slave tracks are different formats, the number of level meters on the VCA Master track is set to one.
Record Enable, TrackInput and Slave
Tracks
When a slave track is record-enabled (the Record
Enable button is lit) or set to Input Only mode
(the TrackInput button is lit), its automation is temporarily turned off, and its Volume fader is no longer affected by the VCA Master.
Allowing Grouped Behavior of Slave
Track Controls
When a track is a VCA slave track, its Volume,
Mute, Solo, Record Enable, and Input Monitoring controls follow VCA functions, and normally do not follow Mix group behavior.
However, these slave track controls can be set to allow Mix group behavior in addition to their
VCA functions.
To allow grouped behavior of VCA-related controls on slave tracks:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 In the Automation section, deselect the “Standard VCA Logic for Group Attributes” option.
Volume, Mute, Solo, Record Enable, and Input
Monitoring are made available as Mix group attributes in the Group dialog.
632 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Assigning Groups to VCA Masters
An existing Mix group can be assigned to a VCA
Master, or a new Mix group can be assigned to a
VCA Master while it is being created. Only one group can be assigned to a VCA Master at a time.
A VCA Master cannot control a group that includes itself.
To assign an existing group to a VCA Master:
â– Click the Group Assignment selector on the
VCA Master track and choose an available group from the pop-up menu.
Assigning an existing group to a VCA Master
To assign a new group to a VCA Master:
1 While creating a new group, select Mix or
Mix/Edit as the Group type.
2 In the Group dialog, choose an available VCA
Master track from the VCA pop-up menu.
Assigning a new group to a VCA Master
Track Membership in Multiple VCA Groups
It is possible for a single slave track to be a member of more than one VCA-controlled group. In this case, the contribution of all VCA Master
Volume faders is summed on the slave track.
Mute, Solo, Record Enable, and TrackInput follow the same rules for enabling or disabling slave tracks.
Inserts
Pro Tools lets you insert up to five inserts on each audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, or Instrument track. Each insert can be either a software plug-in insert or a hardware insert , or an instrument plug-in .
Inserts provide the following features:
• Plug-ins and hardware inserts route the signal from the track through the effect of your choice, and automatically return it to the same track.
• Hardware inserts send and return the signal to corresponding input and output channels of an audio interface, which can be connected to outboard effects.
• Some Instrument plug-ins (such as Virus Indigo) accept audio from the track input (letting you use them as processing plug-ins.
• Inserts on audio, Auxiliary Input, and Instrument tracks are pre-fader.
• Inserts on Master Faders are post-fader.
• Inserts can be bypassed or made inactive.
• Most plug-in controls are fully automatable.
See Chapter 29, “Plug-in and Hardware Inserts” for details about using plug-ins and
inserts.
Track Output Format and Plug-ins
Pro Tools supports mono, multi-mono, stereo, and multichannel plug-ins (Pro Tools HD with
Surround Mixer only).
Because inserts process in series, changing the plug-in format can alter the channel format. For example, inserting a mono-to-stereo plug-in on a mono Auxiliary Input changes the signal path from that plug-in through the rest of the track.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 633
This restricts all hardware inserts or plug-ins after the stereo plug-in to be stereo-in/stereo-out plug-ins (or the supported multichannel format).
Plug-in Formats
Pro Tools supports mono and stereo plug-ins, including the following three types of plug-in paths:
• mono-in/mono-out
• mono-in/stereo-out
• stereo-in/stereo-out
Pro Tools HD sessions running with the Surround mixer also support 3–8 channel multimono and multichannel plug-ins.
Views in the Mix and Edit
Windows
The Mix and Edit windows can be configured to show or hide various mixing controls, using menu commands or view selectors.
Most of these views are available in both windows, unless noted.
Window View Selectors
Both the Edit window and Mix window provide
Window View selectors to configure their views.
Click the Edit Window View selector
Click the Mix Window View selector
Mix Window View selector
Displaying Views
To display all views in the Mix or Edit window, do one of the following:
â– Select View > Mix Window (or Edit Window) >
All.
– or –
â– Click the Mix Window View selector (or Edit
Window View selector), and select All.
To display none of the views in the Mix or Edit window, do one of the following:
â– Select View > Mix Window (or Edit Window) >
None.
– or –
â– Click the Mix Window View selector (or Edit
Window View selector), and select None.
To show or hide available views in the Mix and Edit windows, do one of the following:
â–
Select View > Mix Window (or Edit Window) and one of the view types (such as Comments).
– or –
â–
Click the Mix Window View selector (or Edit
Window View selector), and select one of the view types (such as Comments).
Edit Window View selector
634 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Comments View Shows any text entered as comments in the Track Name/Comments dialog. For
more information, see “Naming Tracks” on page 126.
Sends View (Sends A–E and Sends F–J) Shows send assignments in each track. Deselect to
hide. For more information, see “Configuring
Sends View in the Mix and Edit Windows” on page 640.
Inserts View
Sends (A–E) View
Sends (F–J) View
Comments View
Comments View in the Mix and Edit windows
Mic Preamps View (Pro Tools HD Only) Shows controls in each track for the Digidesign PRE.
Deselect to hide. For detailed information, see the PRE Guide .
I/O View
Views in the Mix window
I/O View (Edit Window Only) Shows Input and
Output selectors, and Volume and Pan indicators in each track. Deselect to hide.
Mic Preamps View
Instruments View Shows MIDI controls on Instrument tracks (MIDI Input selector, MIDI Output selector, MIDI volume, MIDI pan, and MIDI mute).
I/O View (Edit window)
Instruments View
Inserts View Shows inserts (software plug-ins and hardware I/O inserts) in each track. Deselect to hide.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 635
Shift-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) on the volume or pan fields in the Edit window I/O
View to adjust the volume or pan controls with a pop-up fader.
Delay Compensation View (Mix Window on
Pro Tools HD Only) The Delay Compensation
View displays the total amount of plug-in delay on each track, lets you apply a user offset of track delay, and displays the total amount of delay that Pro Tools applies to each track. The Delay Compensation View can be shown in the
Mix Window.
I/O View Volume pop-up fader (Edit window)
I/O View Pan pop-up slider (Edit window)
Real-Time Properties View (Edit Window
Only) Shows controls for Real-Time Properties for MIDI and Instrument tracks. For more infor-
mation on Real-Time Properties, see “MIDI Real-
Plug-in
Delay indicator
User Offset
Track Compensation indicator
Delay Compensation View
Delay values can be specified in either samples or milliseconds, as selected in the Display Preferences page. For more information on Delay
Compensation, see “Delay Compensation” on page 656.
Track Color View Shows track color in each track. Deselect to hide. For detailed information,
see “Color Coding for Tracks, Regions, Markers and Groups” on page 146.
Transport View (Edit Window Only) Displays functional transport controls in the top upper–right of the Edit window. These controls are the same as those in the Transport window. For
more information, see “Transport Window” on page 99.
Real-Time Properties View (Edit window)
Transport Controls (Edit window)
636 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Hiding Views in the Edit Window
You can quickly hide View columns in the Edit window using a simple keyboard shortcut.
To hide a View column in the Edit window:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) at the top of the column you want to hide (Mic
Pre, Comments, Instrument, Inserts, Sends A–E,
Sends F–J, I/O, Real-Time Properties, or Track
Color).
Audio Input and Output Paths
Pro Tools lets you configure the physical input and outputs of your audio interfaces and also internal bus paths and subpaths in the I/O Setup dialog and the Hardware Setup dialog. These hardware inputs and outputs, and internal bus paths can be assigned as inputs and outputs on audio, Auxiliary Input, Instrument tracks, and
Master Faders.
Input Audio Path
Input Path selectors determine the source input for audio, Auxiliary Input, and (optionally) Instrument tracks. Track inputs can be set from a hardware input or internal bus paths or subpaths. For detailed information on assigning
track inputs, see “Assigning Audio Track Inputs” on page 133.
Hardware input and bus paths can be configures in the I/O Setup. For more information, see
You can also define what physical ports are routed to Pro Tools input ports in the “Main” page of the Hardware Setup dialog. For more in-
formation, see “Configuring Pro Tools System
Settings (in the Playback Engine)” on page 32.
Output Audio Path
Track Output Path selectors route the post-fader signals to the assigned output or bus paths. The
Output Path selector routes the main track output to the chosen main or sub-path. Tracks can be routed directly to hardware output or internal bus paths and subpaths for submixing (main or sub-paths).
The track format (mono, stereo, or multichannel) determines the available main and sub-path choices for track output. For detailed informa-
tion on assigning track outputs, see “Assigning
Audio Track Outputs” on page 134.
When audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and
Instrument tracks are created, their mono, stereo, or greater-than-stereo multichannel format is defined:
• Mono tracks can be assigned to any available mono, stereo, multichannel main and subpaths.
• Stereo tracks can be assigned to any available mono, stereo, or multichannel main and subpaths.
• Multichannel tracks (Pro Tools HD only) can be assigned to any mono path, or path of the same number of channels (for example, an
LCRS track can be assigned to a mono or LCRS path).
Output Windows
Output windows provide the essential track mixing controls (such as track panning and volume), as an alternative to Mix and Edit window views. Multichannel Output and Send windows also provide expanded Panner views, and other
surround-specific controls. See Chapter 34,
“Surround Panning and Mixing (Pro Tools HD
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 637
Output windows are useful in large sessions to leave important tracks in an anchored location, unaffected by Mix and Edit window (or control
surface) banking. See “Output Windows for
Tracks and Sends” on page 645.
Multiple Output Assignments
Pro Tools audio, Auxiliary Input, and Instrument tracks can be assigned to multiple output paths. Assigning to multiple paths is an efficient way to route an identical mix to other discrete outputs, for simultaneous monitor feeds, headphone mixes, or other situations where a parallel mix is needed.
To assign a track to multiple outputs:
1 Assign a main output path by selecting it from the track’s Output Path selector.
2 Start-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) an additional output path in the track’s Output
Path selector. The newly selected output destination is added as an additional output.
Alt-Start-click (Windows) or Option-Control-click (Mac) to add the assignment to all tracks, or Alt-Shift-Start-click (Windows) or
Option-Shift-Control-click (Mac) to add to all selected tracks.
Display of Multiple Output Assignments
When a track is assigned to multiple output paths, the Output Path selector denotes multiple assignment status and active/inactive status with the following indicators:
• A plus sign (+) indicates that the track has multiple output assignments.
• In the Output Path selector menu, all currently assigned track outputs are checked to indicate they are active for the current track.
• An asterisk (*) indicates that one or more currently assigned outputs is Inactive.
Inactive Outputs
An output path can be made inactive, either globally in the I/O Setup dialog (affecting all tracks assigned to that path), or locally per assignment
(only affecting that output on that audio track or Auxiliary Input).
When opening sessions, outputs will be made inactive automatically if the required hardware or other resources are not available.
Inactive outputs retain all associated automation playlists. Edits made in the session also affect the inactive track’s output automation playlists.
See “Making Tracks Inactive” on page 145.
Inactive Outputs and DSP Resources
Making a track output inactive silences the output, while retaining all automation and playlist data. Inactive outputs do not consume resources for TDM mixer connections, but any assigned plug-ins on the track continue to use their required DSP resources. RTAS plug-ins require
CPU resources, and TDM plug-ins use the DSP available on Pro Tools|HD cards.
You can free up DSP of unused plug-ins by making a track inactive, or by just making the plugin inactive.
See “Active and Inactive Items” on page 11,
and “Making Inserts Inactive” on page 667
for more information.
Indication of multiple output assignments
638 Pro Tools Reference Guide
About the “No Output” Option
Track outputs can be set to No Output. Assigning a track output to No Output loses any panning automation associated with the track.
Tracks assigned to No Output will not be audible, but they do not free their associated DSP resources.
Assigning Sends to Tracks
To add a send to a track:
1 Make sure Sends View is enabled in the Mix or
Edit window (see “Views in the Mix and Edit
Windows” on page 634 for information).
2 Click the Send selector on the track and choose a path from the pop-up menu.
Sends
Pro Tools lets you insert up to ten sends (A–E and F–J) on each audio track, Auxiliary Input, or
Instrument track.
Sends provide the following features:
• Sends can be set as pre- or post-fader.
• Send level, pan, mute, and LFE controls can be configured to follow Groups.
• Send level, send mute, and send pan (for stereo and multichannel sends) are fully autom-
atable. See “Automating Sends” on page 702.
• Send controls can be displayed and edited from the Mix or Edit windows, or in their own output windows.
• Sends can be assigned to available output and bus paths (main or sub-paths), in mono or stereo, or any of the supported multichannel formats for surround mixing.
• Each send can have multiple assignments (for example, to available output and bus paths).
Sends must be returned to the mix through an
Auxiliary Input, audio track, or Instrument track, to be audible in Pro Tools. They can be monitored and processed through an Auxiliary
Input (or Instrument track), recorded to audio tracks, and bounced to disk. (Bouncing and mix-
down are explained in Chapter 31, “Mixdown.”)
Assigning a send to a stereo bus path
The send can be a mono or stereo (or any of the supported multichannel formats for surround mixing) output or bus path.
Send window (mono)
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 639
3 Set the output level of the send in the Send window by doing one of the following:
• Adjust the Send Level fader.
– or –
• Set the send level to unity gain (0 dB) by
Alt-clicking (Windows) or Option-clicking
(Mac) the Send Level fader.
When you create a new send, its initial output level depends on the setting of the “Sends Default to –INF” preference.
To change the default setting for sends:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Operation tab.
2 Do one of the following:
• Select Sends Default to “–INF.”
– or –
• Deselect Sends Default to “–INF” and new sends will default to unity gain (0 dB).
To remove a send from a track:
â– Click the Sends button on the track and choose No Send from the pop-up menu.
Send Formats
Mono and Stereo Sends When you click the
Sends button on a track, you can choose from a list of mono or stereo output or bus paths.
Multichannel Sends (Pro Tools HD Only) When you click the Sends button on a track, you can choose from a list of multichannel output or bus paths.
Send Path Choices
The choices available in track Send selectors include bus and output paths.
The names, format, and channel mapping of busses and output paths can be custom-
ized in the I/O Setup dialog. See “Creating and Editing Paths” on page 49.
Internal Mix Busses Pro Tools HD provides 128 busses and Pro Tools LE provides 32 busses for routing signals internally. Internal bus paths are useful for submixing and processing with plugins. Bus paths are defined in the I/O Setup dialog, and are available in all supported channel formats (mono, stereo, or multichannel, as supported on your system).
Hardware Outputs Hardware sends are often used for headphone cue mixes, or for sending signals to external effects processors. Sends do not automatically return audio as do hardware inserts.
Configuring Sends View in the Mix and Edit Windows
Audio tracks, Auxiliary Inputs, and Instrument tracks include two sets of Sends Views: Sends
A–E (sends 1–5) and Sends F–J (sends 6–10). The
View menu provides separate options for viewing these sends in the Mix and Edit windows.
To display sends in the Mix window:
â– Select any of the following:
• View > Mix Window > Sends A–E.
• View > Mix Window > Sends F–J.
To display sends in the Edit window:
â– Select any of the following:
• View > Edit Window > Sends A–E.
• View > Edit Window > Sends F–J.
640 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Sends View Options
Sends are displayed in the Mix and Edit window according to the Sends A–E View and Sends F–J
View options. Each Send View has six view choices: Assignments View and five individual
Send Views (A–E or F–J).
Assignments View
This is the default Sends View, showing all five of the Sends A–E or Sends F–J sends on all tracks displayed in the Mix and Edit windows.
Send selectors
Send A, Assignment View
To show all send assignments:
1 If sends are not currently visible on your tracks, select View > Mix Window (or Edit Window) > Sends A–E (or Sends F–J).
2 Do one of the following:
• Select View > Sends A–E > Assignments or
View > Sends F–J > Assignments.
– or –
• When displaying sends in an individual
Send View (such as Send A View), Controlclick (Windows) or Command-click (Mac) the Send selector and select Assignments.
Individual Send Views (A–J)
Individual Send Views (such as Send A) provide send level, pan, and mute controls for a single send across all tracks.
Assignments View, no sends (left) and with an assigned send (right)
In Assignment View, send controls are adjusted
from Send windows. See “To view a different track Output or Send window:” on page 646.
multichannel pre-fader stereo post-fader no assignment
Send A View, with different types of send assignments
Send controls can be adjusted directly from these Send Views. Sends can also be opened for
control or metering in Send windows. See “Output Windows for Tracks and Sends” on page 645.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 641
To display the controls for an individual send across all tracks:
1 If sends are not currently visible on your tracks, select View > Mix Window (or Edit Window) > Sends A–E (or Sends F–J).
2 Do one of the following:
• Select View > Sends A–E (or Sends F-J) and select one of the individual Send Views
(such as Send A).
– or –
• In Assignment View, Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac) the Send
Assignment selector.
Send Assignment selector
Sends Views
Editing Sends in the Mix and Edit
Windows (Individual Send Views)
Individual Send Views (such as Send A) display all the controls of an individual send in the sends area of the Mix and Edit windows. These views provide full access to all controls for that send on all tracks.
Send selector
Send
Level fader
Send Assignment button
Send Pan sliders
Send Mute button
Pre/Post Fader button
Send level and mute can follow Mix groups, to adjust multiple send controls from a single set of controls.
Individual Send Views and Meters
When you display the controls for an individual send, you also have the option of displaying send level meters.
Send level meters show peak values and indicate clipping that occurs while the meter is displayed
(if a send clips any time before its meter is displayed, this is not shown). If you are using a slower computer, hiding send level meters can improve screen redraw times.
To display send level meters when viewing individual sends:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Display tab.
2 Select Show Meters in Sends View and click
OK.
To clear a send meter’s Clip indicator:
â– Click the Clip indicator.
To clear all meters, do one of the following:
â–
Option-click any Clip indicator.
â–
Choose Track > Clear All Clip Indicators.
â–
Press Alt-C (Windows) or Option-C (Mac).
In Assignment View, edit sends by opening
their Output windows. See “Output Windows for Tracks and Sends” on page 645.
Send meter
Send A View, with stereo send shown
642 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Send Status Display
When displaying all controls for an individual sends, the Send status is visible directly in the
Mix or Edit windows.
In Assignment View, Send status is displayed as follows:
• By default, the Send button is grey, to indicate that it is unmuted.
• The Send button text is red when the send has clipped.
• The Send button is blue when the send is muted.
• The Send button is lit whenever a send’s window is open.
Unmuted Clipped Muted Window is open
When opening sessions, sends will automatically be made inactive if the required hardware or other resources are not available.
Inactive send
(italicized and greyed out)
Active send
(plain text)
Inactive track
(entire track is italicized and greyed out)
Indication of Send mute, clipping, and window status
If you use a control surface (such as D-Control or Digi 002) with Pro Tools, colored outlines around sends, inserts, and outputs indicate the current controller focus.
Inactive Sends
Sends can be made inactive. Inactive sends free their DSP and mixer resources, while retaining their position in track Sends View. Inactive sends do not output audio. However, Inactive sends retain all related automation playlists. In addition, edits made to regions on tracks with inactive sends can still affect the sends automation playlists.
Display of inactive sends
To make a send inactive:
â–
Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) on the Send assignment.
– or –
â–
Make the Track inactive. See “Making Tracks
To toggle sends in the same position (A–J) and assigned to the same path on all tracks active or inactive:
â–
Control-Start-Alt click (Windows) or Command-Control-Option click (Mac) a send button in the position you want to toggle.
To toggle sends in the same position (A–J) and assigned to the same path on all selected tracks active or inactive:
â–
Control-Start-Alt-Shift-click (Windows) or
Command-Control-Option-Shift-click (Mac) a send button in the position you want to toggle.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 643
Moving or Copying Sends
Sends can be moved or copied to other tracks, or to other positions on the same track using conventional drag and drop. Sends can be dropped to create new sends at the destination, or dropped onto existing send assignments to replace them.
Sends can be moved and copied to tracks with compatible send formats (mono, stereo, or other). Pro Tools alerts you when you try to move or copy a send to an incompatible destination. (For more information, see “Send Format and Track Compatibility” on page 644).
To move a send:
â– Click the send name and drag it at a new position in the original track or in a different track.
To copy a send:
â–
Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac) the send and drop it at a new position.
Moving or copying a send maintains all routing assignments, automation (if any), level/pan/mute settings, and output format.
Send Format and Track Compatibility
Sends can only be copied to other tracks with a compatible send output format (mono, stereo, or other). In addition, the following conditions apply when moving or copying sends among tracks:
• When copying a stereo send from a mono track to a stereo track, Send pan automation
(if any) will be dropped without warning.
• When copying a stereo send from a stereo track to a mono track, the left Send pan automation data is retained and the right side data is dropped. A warning dialog appears for you to confirm or cancel this destructive operation.
• When moving or copying a send and replacing an existing send, all automation on the existing send will be replaced. A warning dialog appears for you to confirm or cancel this destructive operation.
Copying Track Settings to Sends
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Sometimes you need send settings to match the settings in the track itself—for example, to provide a headphone mix based on the main mix.
You can copy the current values or the entire automation playlist from selected tracks to any of their sends.
For more information, see “Copying Track
Automation to Sends” on page 702.
644 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Linking Send Pan and Main Pan
Controls
You can link pan controls of individual Sends to the Main pan controls of their corresponding tracks, allowing for fast setup of cue mixes or effects processing.
Linking Send Pan to Main Pan
Linked Send pan controls appear in light grey.
To link a Send’s Pan controls to the Main Pan controls of a track:
1 Click the Send Assignment button for the
Send you want to link to open the Send window.
2 In the Send window, click the FMP (Follow
Main Pan) button.
To change the default FMP (Follows Main Pan) setting for newly created Sends:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Under Setup, select or deselect Send Pans Default to Follow Main Pan.
Output Windows for Tracks and Sends
Track outputs and sends can be opened for display and editing in dedicated windows.
• Track Output windows provide track fader, pan, automation, solo, and mute controls.
• Send windows provide send level, pan, automation, and mute controls.
• Standard Output and Send window controls provide additional routing, assignment, and display settings.
To open a track Output window:
â– Click the Output Window button in the channel strip.
Opening a track Output window
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 645
To open a Send window:
â–
Click the Send Assignment button in the Mix or Edit window. click here or here
To set a window to remain open when opening additional Output windows:
â– Make sure the Target is disabled.
Target enabled Target disabled
Opening a Send window
To view a different track Output or Send window:
â– Click an Output Window button, or Send Assignment button, in the Mix or Edit window.
If a similar Output window was already open with a highlighted Target icon (red, lit), the newly selected send will open in its place.
Opening Multiple Output Windows
Multiple track and Send windows can be displayed simultaneously using either of the following methods.
To open additional Output windows:
â– Shift-click any Output Window button or
Send Assignment button.
Multiple Send windows
For additional information, see “Targeted Windows” on page 649.
Panner Linking
Stereo outputs provide two panning controls, one for each side of the left/right pair. Multichannel outputs provide a multichannel panner.
The Output window provides controls to unlink
(or link) channels for precise panning of stereo and multichannel tracks.
In the default Linked mode, all sides match changes to any other side’s Pan control. This is
Absolute Link mode. To mirror panning
changes, see “Inverse Linked Panning” on page 647.
646 Pro Tools Reference Guide
When unlinked, Pan controls are completely independent of each other.
To enable inverse linking:
1 Enable the Link icon.
2 Select an Inverse mode.
Linked (left), unlinked (middle), front inverse linked
(right) Output windows
To enable linking:
â– Enable the Link icon.
To unlink an output for independent panning:
â– Deselect the Link icon.
Inverse Linked Panning
When linked and set to Inverse mode, panning moves are inverted or reversed in the other channels.
Inverse panning reflects one side’s location and direction in the other side. For example, when enabled for Front Inverse, if you pan one side of a stereo track output from right to left, the other side will exactly mirror that movement and pan left to right.
Front Inverse linking is available on all systems.
Rear Inverse, and Front/Rear Inverse linking are available on Pro Tools|HD systems only, and only appear as options on multichannel plugins and panners/output windows.
Link
Front Inverse
Front/Rear Inverse
Rear Inverse
Link and Inverse selectors (multichannel track)
Standard Selector Controls in
Output Windows
All Output windows provide standard selectors for path, automation, and other controls in the top area of the window (the Output Editor area).
Path Meter View
Track selector
Output View selector
Path selector
Automation Safe button
Output window standard controls
Close
Target
Inverse Pan
Link
Path Meter View
Track selector
Send selector
Path selector
Pre/Post Fader button
Automation Safe button
Send window standard controls
Close Closes the window.
Close
Target
Inverse Pan
Link
Track Selector Provides access to any audio track, Auxiliary Input, or Master Fader in the session.
Output View Selector Provides access to other outputs (track and send) in the track, if any, displaying the selected output in the current window.
Send View Selector (Send Window Only) Provides access to other sends on the track.
Output Path Selector Allows you to assign the
Output path for the current track or send.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 647
Pre/Post Fader button (Send Window Only) Determines whether the send is pre- or post-fader.
Automation Safe Protects track and send level, pan, and other controls from automation overwrites by placing them in Automation Safe
mode. See Chapter 30, “Automation” for more
information.
Inverse Pan Reflects one side’s panning location and direction in the other side (for example, left- and right-channel Pan controls).
Link and Unlink Lets you link and unlink left and right (or other) outputs in stereo (or multichannel). Unlinked mode provides discrete adjustment of individual sides, or channels. When
linked, all changes affect all channels. See “Panner Linking” on page 646.
Target Identifies the target of plug-in settings commands. Also sets the current window for
display of Output windows. See “Targeted Windows” on page 649.
Path Meter View Opens the path Meter View.
These meters display levels of the selected path
(not the levels of the track or send).
Path Meter
View button
Send meter Path meters
Path Meter selector
Path Meter View in a Send window
Track Fader, Pan Controls, and Solo,
Mute, and Automation Controls
Output windows provide the associated track’s
Volume fader, Pan controls, Solo and Mute switches, and Automation Mode selector. Use these to adjust or automate the controls of the
Output window.
648 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Targeted Windows
When lit (red), the Target indicates its window is
“targeted,” and the next window opened of the same type replaces the current display (unless it is opened as an additional window with the
Shift modifier). When unlit, the target is gray, and the current window anchors to its current contents and location on-screen. Opening additional windows does not affect anchored windows.
To set an open Send window as the target window:
â– Click the Target, so that it is lit (red).
Plug-in windows have additional features related to the Target (such as Focus of Set-
tings commands). See “The Plug-in Window” on page 672.
Using Output Windows
Output windows provide standard Pro Tools track, send, Target, and other controls.
To move to a different track:
â– Click the Track selector and choose a track from the pop-up menu.
To reassign output:
â–
Click the Output Path selector and select a path from the pop-up menu.
Selecting a path in the Output window
To display the controls for a different send on the same track:
â– Click the Send View selector and select the send.
Accessing another send in the Output window
To assign a different send to the same track:
â–
Click the Send selector and choose an output or bus path from the pop-up menu.
To add an additional output assignment to the current send:
â– Press Start (Windows) or Control (Mac) while selecting an additional output path from the
Send selector (or Output Path selector.
Selecting a track from the Output window
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 649
Signal Routing for Monitoring and Submixing
The bussing and mixing features in Pro Tools support many possibilities for submixing and monitoring, including the ability to:
• Monitor and mix playback of audio tracks with audio inputs or with MIDI instruments
• Bus submixes for effects processing or monitoring
• Mix submixes with Master Faders
Monitoring and Mixing Audio with
Instrument Tracks
Use Instrument tracks to monitor and mix audio from instrument plug-ins or external MIDI instruments in a Pro Tools mix.
To use an Instrument track to monitor and mix the output of an instrument plug-in:
1 Use an existing or create a new Instrument track.
2 Choose View > Mix Window > Instruments to show the MIDI controls of the Instrument track.
3 Select an instrument plug-in from the first Insert selector on the Instrument track (such as
Digidesign’s Xpand!).
Monitoring and Mixing Audio with
Auxiliary Input Tracks
Use Auxiliary Input tracks to monitor and mix audio from external sources, such as MIDI instruments, tape, or microphone inputs, in a
Pro Tools mix.
To use an Auxiliary Input track to monitor and mix external audio sources:
1 Connect the audio outputs of your audio source (such as a MIDI synthesizer or tape output) to available inputs on your Pro Tools audio interface.
2 If necessary, configure the I/O Setup dialog for
the input paths you plan to use (see Chapter 6,
3 Use an existing or create a new Auxiliary Input track with a channel format that corresponds to the channel format of your audio source (mono, stereo, or multichannel).
4 Set the input of the Auxiliary Input track to the corresponding input path.
5 Assign the track output to the appropriate path or paths for monitoring.
6 Adjust the Auxiliary Input fader to mix the audio input.
650 Pro Tools Reference Guide
MIDI Output selector
MIDI Volume control
MIDI Pan control
Instrument plug-in
Audio Input selector, set to no input
Audio Output selector
Instrument track configured to control and monitor an instrument plug-in (Digidesign Synchronic)
4 The virtual MIDI node (port) for the instrument plug-in should be automatically selected for the Instrument track’s MIDI Output. If not, select the MIDI channel and corresponding port for the instrument plug-in.
5 Assign the track output to the appropriate path or paths for monitoring.
6 Adjust the Instrument track fader to mix the audio input.
7 If you are controlling the Instrument plug-in from the Instrument track, you can also mix using the MIDI Volume and Pan controls in the Instrument View.
To use an Instrument track to monitor and mix audio from an external MIDI instrument:
1 Connect the audio outputs of your external
MIDI instrument (such as a MIDI synthesizer) to available inputs on your Pro Tools audio interface.
2 If necessary, configure the I/O Setup dialog for
the input paths you plan to use (see Chapter 6,
3 Connect the MIDI input and output of your external MIDI instrument to available MIDI input and output ports on your MIDI interface.
4 If necessary, configure the MIDI Studio Setup
(Setup > MIDI > MIDI Studio).
5 Use an existing or create a new Instrument track with a channel format that corresponds to the channel format of your audio source (mono, stereo, or multichannel).
6 Choose View > Mix Window > Instruments to show the MIDI controls of the Instrument track.
7 Set the audio input of the Instrument track to the corresponding input path.
8 In the Instrument track’s Instrument View, set the MIDI output to the corresponding MIDI port connected to the MIDI input of your external MIDI instrument.
9 Assign the track output to the appropriate path or paths for monitoring.
MIDI Output selector
MIDI Volume control
MIDI Pan control
Audio Input selector
Audio Output selector
Instrument track configured to control and monitor an external MIDI instrument (K2600XS)
10 Adjust the Instrument track fader to mix the audio input.
11 If you are controlling the external MIDI instrument from the Instrument track, you can also mix using the MIDI Volume and Pan controls in the Instrument View.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 651
To monitor and mix audio from an Instrument plugin with multiple audio outputs:
1 Use an existing or create a new Instrument track.
2 Choose View > Mix Window > Instruments to show the MIDI controls of the Instrument track.
3 Select a multi-output instrument plug-in from the first Insert selector on the Instrument track
(such as Digidesign Strike).
4 The virtual MIDI node (port) for the instrument plug-in should be automatically selected for the Instrument track’s MIDI Output. If not, select the MIDI channel and corresponding port for the instrument plug-in.
5 In the plug-in window, assign the individual audio outputs of the plug-in. (In the Strike plugin, channel outputs are assigned from the Mix page.)
6 Create an Auxiliary Input track for each output of the plug-in. Make sure the channel format of the Auxiliary Inputs corresponds to the channel format of the plug-in outputs (mono, stereo, or multichannel).
7 Set the inputs of the Auxiliary Input tracks to receive the individual outputs of the plug-in.
8 Assign the outputs of the Auxiliary Input tracks to the appropriate path or paths for monitoring.
9 Adjust the Auxiliary Input faders to mix the individual outputs of the plug-in.
Instrument plug-in
Inputs from plug-in outputs
Instrument plug-in with multiple outputs routed to
Auxiliary Input tracks
Creating a Submix
A submix is created by routing multiple audio sources to a common bus or output path. This
“submixes” the sources to a single path that can be returned to an Auxiliary Input, where the submix can be processed with plug-ins or external effects processors.
Audio is routed to a submix by assigning any combination of sends and track output to available bus or output paths.
Submixing with Track Outputs or Sends
You can use both track outputs and sends to route audio for submixing, depending on whether you want a discrete or send and return submix.
652 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Discrete Submix Output
Pro Tools lets you discretely route source audio through a submix. This is preferred for dither or other mastering processing, where you do not want unprocessed audio heard in addition to the processed signals. Use track outputs (not sends) to assign tracks to a bus path for discrete submixing. In this arrangement, the balance of processed and unprocessed signal is controlled by plug-in wet/dry settings.
To create a discrete submix:
1 Set the output of the tracks you want to include in the submix to a stereo bus path.
2 Pan each track.
3 Choose Track > New.
4 Specify the track type (Aux Input) and format
(stereo), then click Create.
5 Set the input of the Auxiliary Input to the same bus path to which you assigned all contributing tracks.
6 Set the output of the Auxiliary Input track to your main stereo mix outputs (typically, outputs
1–2).
7 Set the Auxiliary Input Track level.
8 To process the submix, assign a plug-in or hardware insert on the Auxiliary Input.
9 Set the controls of the plug-in. The plug-in Bypass and Wet/Dry controls (if available) determine the amount of effect heard.
The contributing track faders control the balance within the submix. The Auxiliary Input track controls the output levels of all tracks routed to it.
You can apply mix automation to the volume, pan, mute, and send level, send pan, and send mute controls of the Auxiliary Input.
You can also bounce a submix to disk to free up the voices for use by other tracks. See
Chapter 31, “Mixdown” for more information.
Send and Return Submixing for Effects
Processing
When you are submixing for reverb, delay, and similar effects processing, use sends to achieve traditional send/return bussing. You can use a real-time plug-in or a hardware insert as a shared resource for all tracks included in a submix. The wet/dry balance in the mix can be controlled using the track faders (dry level) and Auxiliary Input fader (effect return, or wet, level).
See Chapter 29, “Plug-in and Hardware Inserts” for more information.
Send and Return with a Plug-in or
Hardware Insert
To create an effects return submix with a plug-in or hardware insert:
1 Assign each track’s main output to your main mix outputs.
2 On the source tracks, assign a send (mono or stereo) and select a mono or stereo bus path from the Send selector. Configure the sends for pre- or post-fader, as needed.
3 Choose Track > New.
4 Specify the track type (Aux Input) and format
(stereo), then click Create.
5 From the Auxiliary Input track’s Input Path selector, select the send bus path.
6 Assign a plug-in or hardware insert on the
Auxiliary Input.
7 Set the effect to “100% wet,” and set any other controls.
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 653
8 From the Auxiliary Input track’s Output Path selector, select an output path (main outputs).
Adjust the individual track faders to balance the dry (unprocessed) tracks. With the send set to pre-fader, the amount of effect is controlled by the level of the Send Level fader or the Auxiliary
Input Volume fader. If the send is post-fader, the
Send Level fader follows volume level.
Effect (plug-in or hardware)
Insert
Send to effect bus
Controls level of send to effects bus
Input set to send bus path
Output set to main mix outs
Send and Return Submixes with
External Devices
To create an effects return submix with an external device:
1 Assign each track’s main output to your main mix outputs.
2 Assign a send (mono or stereo) and set the send destinations on the source tracks to the output path connected to the external device.
Configure the sends for pre- or post-fader, as needed.
3 Choose Track > New.
4 Specify the track type (Aux Input) and format
(stereo or mono), then click Create.
5 From the Auxiliary Input track’s Input Path selector, select the input path connected to the external device.
6 From the Auxiliary Input track’s Output Path selector, select an output path (main outputs).
Controls level of dry signal
Controls level of effect return
Send/return setup for a plug-in or hardware insert
654 Pro Tools Reference Guide
7 Adjust the individual track faders to balance the dry (unprocessed) tracks.
The amount of effect is controlled by the level of the Send Level fader or the Auxiliary Input Volume fader.
Send to external device
Input set to device’s return
Output set to main mix outs
To create a monitor submix:
1 Assign each track’s main output to your main mix outputs.
2 Assign a send (mono or stereo) and set the send destinations on the source tracks to the output path connected to the external device.
Configure the sends for pre- or post-fader, as needed.
3 Choose Track > New.
4 Specify the track type (Aux Input) and format
(stereo or mono), then click Create.
5 From the Auxiliary Input track’s Output Path selector, select the output path (not the main outputs) for monitoring the mix.
Adjust the Auxiliary Input track fader to control the volume for the monitor mix.
Controls level of dry signal
Controls level of effect
Send/return setup for an external device
Creating Monitor Submixes
Route track sends to one or more Auxiliary Input tracks to monitor submixes in a studio environment. For example, you may want to provide the bassist with a drum submix for tracking a new bass part.
Drum submix for monitoring
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 655
Creating a Master Send Level Control
A Master Fader can control the overall level of bus and output paths.
To create a Master send level control:
1 Choose Track > New.
2 Specify the track type (Master Fader), and mono, stereo, or any of the supported multichannel formats for surround mixing.
3 Click Create.
4 Do one of the following:
• Set the output of the Master Fader to the same path that you are using to send to an
Auxiliary Input track.
• Set the output of the Master Fader to match the path that you have chosen for your effects send.
You can then adjust send levels to balance the source tracks, and use the Master Fader as a master level control for the entire submix.
Soloing Tracks in a Submix
Soloing any tracks implicitly mutes all other tracks, including Auxiliary Inputs. Solo-safing an Auxiliary Input prevents this implicit muting and lets the Auxiliary Input continue to pass audio when its source tracks are in Solo.
To solo safe an Auxiliary Input:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the Solo button on the Auxiliary Input track.
To solo an individual track that is part of a group:
â– Start-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the Solo button.
Generating Stereo Output from a Mono
Send/Return
You can use an Auxiliary Input to generate a stereo output from a mono send. Set the send destination to a mono Auxiliary Input track and place a mono to stereo plug-in on the Auxiliary
Input. The output of the Auxiliary Input becomes stereo.
To create a “stereo” effect from a mono source, you must use reverb, delay, or other time domain effects.
Delay Compensation
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Pro Tools provides Delay Compensation for managing DSP delays that occur on audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, or Instrument tracks because of plug-in use and mixer routing. With
Delay Compensation enabled, Pro Tools maintains time-alignment between tracks that have plug-ins with differing DSP delays, tracks with different mixing paths, tracks that are split off and recombined within the mixer, and tracks with hardware inserts.
To maintain time alignment, Pro Tools adds the exact amount of delay to each track necessary to make that particular track’s delay equal to the delay of the track that has the longest delay.
Delay Compensation should be enabled during mixing and playback for optimal delay-compensated sound. When recording, Delay Compensation should usually be turned off.
To enable Delay Compensation:
â– Choose Options > Delay Compensation.
656 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Delay Compensation Settings
There are three settings in the Playback Engine dialog for dedicating DSP resources for Delay
Compensation:
None Allocates no DSP resources for Delay Compensation.
Short Allocates minimal DSP resources of Delay
Compensation for each channel. This is the most efficient setting for Pro Tools|HD Accel systems.
Long Allocates maximum DSP resources of Delay Compensation for each mixer channel. Long
Delay Compensation uses the same DSP resources used by high DSP overhead plug-ins.
To configure the Delay Compensation Engine:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine.
2 From the Delay Compensation Engine pop-up menu, select a Delay Compensation setting.
3 Click OK.
The Delay Compensation status will be saved as a session and system preference.
Delay Compensation View
The Delay Compensation View displays the total amount of plug-in delay on each track, lets you apply a user offset of track delay, and displays the total amount of delay that Pro Tools applies to each track. The Delay Compensation
View can be shown in the Mix Window.
Plug-in
Delay indicator
User Offset
Track Compensation indicator
Delay Compensation View
To view Delay Compensation information:
â– Select View > Mix Window > Delay Compensation.
Delay Compensation Time Mode
Delay values can be specified in either samples or milliseconds, as selected with the Delay Compensation Time Mode option in the Display
Preferences page. This option is only available when Delay Compensation is enabled (Options
> Delay Compensation).
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 657
Plug-in Delay (dly) Indicator
The Plug-in Delay (dly) indicator shows the total plug-in and hardware insert delay on the track.
This delay total is used by Pro Tools to calculate the delay applied to other tracks to keep them time-aligned. The track with the highest plug-in and insert delay displays delay information in orange.
The delay information for a track is displayed in red if the track delay exceeds the compensation
limit. For more information, see “Delay that Exceeds the Compensation Limit” on page 658.
User Offset (+/–) Field
This field lets you adjust track delays manually while Delay Compensation is enabled. This is useful for the following cases:
• For time-aligning a track in a plug-in is incorrectly reporting its delay.
• For adjusting the timing “feel” of a track.
To change track delay using the User Offset field:
1 In the Delay Compensation View, click in the
User Offset edit field.
2 To set your delay value (in samples or milliseconds depending on your current preferences), do one of the following:
• Enter a positive number (with or without the “+” modifier) for a positive delay or negative number (with the “–” modifier) for a negative delay.
• Control-drag (Windows) or Commanddrag (Mac) in the User Offset field to scroll to a new value.
• Press the Up and Down Arrow keys to increase or decrease the numerical values.
3 Press Enter.
To bypass the user delay:
â–
Start-Control-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the User Offset field. The user defined delay will appear greyed out, and it will no longer be applied to the track.
Track Compensation (cmp) Indicator
This indicator shows the amount of compensation Pro Tools applies to each track.
Delay that Exceeds the Compensation
Limit
When the total delay on a track causes the System Delay amount (shown in the Session Setup window) to exceed the amount allowable for the selected Delay Engine (in the Playback Engine dialog), data on that track will no longer be properly time-aligned.
Both the Plug-in Delay indicator and Track
Compensation indicator turn red to indicate that the track delay exceeds the Delay Compensation limit.
To compensate for delay that exceeds the compensation limit:
1 Bypass the “report” for the track by Start-Control-clicking (Windows) or Command-Controlclicking (Mac) the Plug-in Delay indicator.
The track information is greyed out once it is bypassed.
2 Manually slide the audio data on that track earlier by the number of samples displayed in the Plug-in Delay field.
658 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Low Latency Monitoring During
Recording
For recording, Pro Tools automatically suspends
Delay Compensation to provide a low latency monitor path through the main outputs of the record-enabled tracks. When an audio track is armed for recording (in stop), TrackInput-enabled, DestructivePunch-enabled, or punched in, the track’s Delay Compensation is automatically suspended (and the Track Compensation indicator displays 0).
You can suspend this automatic suppression of
Delay Compensation as needed by doing the following:
To apply Delay Compensation to tracks where
Delay Compensation was suspended:
â– Start-Control-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the Track Compensation indicator. Track delay will be applied to the track and the Track Compensation indicator will display in blue.
Track Compensation on Auxiliary Inputs
Delay Compensation on Auxiliary Inputs can be bypassed to let you monitor outside sources
(such as the audio tracks of a slaved video deck) with minimal latency, while still reporting the track’s delay.
To bypass an Auxiliary Input’s Delay
Compensation:
Start-Control-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the Track Compensation indicator. The reported track delay will be zero, and will appear greyed out.
Delay Compensation for MIDI
When Delay Compensation is active, a MIDI event that is recorded to sound “in time” with delay-compensated material actually is recorded late by the length of total delay in effect.
To compensate, MIDI events are shifted back in time by the total session delay following each
MIDI recording pass.
Low-Latency Recording with Virtual
MIDI Instruments
When a MIDI or Instrument track that is routing
MIDI data to an instrument plug-in is record-enabled, Pro Tools automatically suspends Delay
Compensation through the main outputs of the audio track or Auxiliary Input that the instrument plug-in is inserted on. This allows for latency-free monitoring of the instrument plug-in during recording.
Delay Compensation for virtual MIDI instruments works only when all MIDI and audio connections take place inside of
Pro Tools. For example, Pro Tools does not suspend Delay Compensation when you are using ReWire to connect software synthesizers and samplers in other ReWire client applications (such as Live and Reason).
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 659
MIDI and Audio Processing Plug-ins
Some audio processing plug-ins (such as Bruno and Reso) and many instrument plug-ins let you process audio while allowing MIDI data to control processing parameters. When you record enable a MIDI or Instrument track that is controlling an audio processing plug-in, the track the plug-in is inserted on will go into low-latency mode, effectively making the processed audio play early.
To keep audio time-aligned when recording using a
MIDI controlled plug-in on an audio track:
â–
Start-Control-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the Track Compensation indicator for the audio track to apply Delay Compensation.
To keep audio time-aligned when recording using a
MIDI controlled plug-in on an Auxiliary Input:
1 Start-Control-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the Track Compensation indicator for the Auxiliary Input to bypass Delay
Compensation.
2 Enter the total system delay into the User Offset field.
Dither
Dither is a special form of randomized noise used to mask quantization noise in digital audio systems. Digital audio’s poorest distortion performance exists at the lowest end of the dynamic range, where quantization distortion can occur. Dither reduces quantizing errors by introducing very low-level random noise, thereby minimizing distortion artifacts as audio reaches low level. With dither there is a trade-off between signal-to-noise performance and less-apparent distortion. Proper use of dither lets you squeeze better subjective performance out of a
16-bit data format (such as Red Book compact discs).
Pro Tools|HD systems process all audio internally at 24-bit, and Pro Tools LE processes internally at 32-bit, floating. Without dither to process the 24-bit data to 16-bit, the extra 8 bits are truncated (dropped entirely) when written to media or a device with a 16-bit maximum (such as CD recorders, and many DAT machines).
Dithering, on the other hand, preserves lowlevel (quiet) fidelity in a surprising way—by adding a small amount of noise to a signal.
660 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Dither in Pro Tools
There are several dither options provided in
Pro Tools. Each has a specific application within the various operations that could benefit from dithering.
In addition to the TDM, RTAS and AudioSuite dither plug-ins, Pro Tools has a built-in dither capability.
Dither Mixer Plug-ins (Pro Tools HD Only) There are two Mixer plug-ins that feature dither with noise shaping: Stereo Dithered and Surround
Dithered. For more information, see the
Pro Tools|HD Getting Started Guide . Standard Stereo and Surround Mixers do not have dither and require use of dither plug-ins.
Dither on Final Output for Mixdown You can insert a real-time dither plug-in on a Master Fader that controls your output mix, to dither your final mix for CD or other 16-bit media. Inserts on
Master Fader process post-fader. This form of dithering lets you use dither plug-ins from
Digidesign or third-party manufacturers. When
using the Bounce to Disk, see “Dither and
AudioSuite Dither For AudioSuite plug-in processing, dither is based on the Dither plug-in.
For most AudioSuite plug-ins, dither can be automatically applied in the Processing Preferences page. The Use AudioSuite Dither checkbox enables a preset, N-shaped dither.
The following AudioSuite plug-ins can automatically apply dither when processing:
• EQ III
• Compressor II
• Limiter II
• Gate II
• Expander/Gate II
• Normalize
• Gain
• DC Offset Removal
• Time Compression/Expansion
• Pitch Shift
For information about AudioSuite Dither, see the Digi-Rack Guide.
Fades and Crossfades In the Fades dialog (Edit >
Fades > Create), the Use Dither option enables a preset, noise-shaped dither.
Operation preferences, for AudioSuite dither
Create Fades dialog
Chapter 28: Basic Mixing 661
Noise Shaping
Noise is an integral part of the dithering process.
Noise shaping can further improve audio performance and reduce perceived noise inherent in dithering. Noise shaping utilizes digital filtering to move noise from frequencies around 4 kHz to near the Nyquist frequency. Essentially, noise shaping lessens our perception of the noise inherent in dithering by shifting audible noise components to a range in which the human ear is less sensitive.
Noise Shaping is available in the Dither plug-in.
For more information about dither during
mixdown, see Chapter 31, “Mixdown.”
Using a Control Surface with
Pro Tools
Control surfaces add hands-on control to
Pro Tools functions. You can use a control surface to adjust on-screen faders and knobs, activate transport controls, or scrub and shuttle in
Pro Tools.
There are several optional Digidesign control surfaces for mixing in Pro Tools:
Digidesign’s D-Control and D-Command (Pro Tools
HD Only) Innovative tactile worksurfaces that employ a familiar, intuitive channel strip/center section console layout.
Digidesign’s Control|24 (Pro Tools HD and LE
Only) Dedicated controller that provides access to most Pro Tools recording, mixing, editing, signal routing, plug-in control, and automation features.
Digidesign’s Command|8 Low cost USB-based control surface for Pro Tools. Command|8 is a compact, convenient, and flexible control surface for Digidesign-qualified Pro Tools systems.
662 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware
Inserts
Pro Tools provides up to five unity-gain inserts on each audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and Instrument track. Audio, Auxiliary Input, and Instrument track inserts are pre-fader, and
Master Faders inserts are post-fader.
An insert can be either a software DSP plug-in or a hardware insert . A Pro Tools insert routes the signal from the track to a plug-in or external hardware effect of your choice and automatically returns it to the same track. Inserts do not alter the original audio source files, but process audio in real time, during playback. You can permanently apply real-time effects to tracks by recording or bouncing the effect to disk (see
Chapter 31, “Mixdown” for more information).
Plug-in Inserts Plug-in inserts are software inserts that process audio material on a track in real time. For example, the DigiRack EQ, compressor, and delay plug-ins supplied with your
Pro Tools system can be used as real-time plugin inserts.
For more information about the plug-ins supplied with your Pro Tools system, see the
DigiRack Plug-ins Guide.
Additional real-time plug-ins are available from
Digidesign and from many third-party developers.
For information about optional Digidesign plug-ins, see the electronic Digidesign Plugins Guide. For information about thirdparty plug-ins, visit the Digidesign website
(www.digidesign.com).
Hardware I/O Inserts Hardware I/O inserts can route audio through an external device connected to parallel inputs and outputs of an audio interface. You can process the audio material on a track with a hardware insert in real time.
Hardware I/O insert
Insert paths require audio interface inputs and outputs, and are determined by the I/O Setup configuration of your system.
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 663
General Information
When more than one insert is used on a track, they are processed in series. Each effect is added to that of any previous plug-ins or inserts (flowing from top to bottom in the Mix window Inserts View, and left to right in the Edit window
Inserts View).
Inserts on audio tracks and Auxiliary Inputs and
Instrument tracks are pre-fader. You can cause clipping if you boost their gain to extremes, especially on tracks recorded at high amplitude.
Watch on-screen metering for indication of clipping. (Inserts on Master Faders are post-fader.)
Using Inserts for Effects Processing
Inserts can be used in two ways:
On Single Tracks An insert can be applied to an individual audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, or Instrument track.
With in-line inserts, you control the amount of effect by adjusting the balance (or the wet/dry mix) controls of the plug-in or external device.
As Shared Resources An insert can be used as a shared resource in a send-and-return arrangement, by bussing signals from several tracks to an Auxiliary Input, and then applying the insert to the Auxiliary Input track. You can then control the send level for each track, and the overall level of the effect can be controlled from the
Auxiliary Input track. Using sends and other signal routing features helps maximize your system’s processing power.
For examples of send and return busses and
other submixing setups, see “Signal Routing for Monitoring and Submixing” on page 650.
Insert Formats
Mono Inserts Used on mono tracks. Inserts that occur on a track after a stereo insert are automatically used in stereo as well.
Stereo Inserts Used on stereo tracks. A stereo hardware I/O insert sends the signal to an input/output path.
Mono In/Stereo Out Plug-in Inserts Used to return a stereo effect from a mono source. Certain plug-ins (such as D-Verb) let you generate stereo output from a mono channel. A track made into stereo in this way has panning controls for each channel of the stereo signal. Any inserts that occur on a track after a stereo insert are automatically used in stereo as well.
Multi-Mono Plug-in Inserts Used on stereo or greater-than-stereo multichannel tracks when a multichannel version of the plug-in is not available. Controls for all channels are linked by default so that you can adjust them in tandem.
You can unlink controls for independent adjust-
ment using the Master Link button. See “Linking and Unlinking Controls on Multi-Mono
Multichannel Plug-in Inserts Used on stereo and greater-than-stereo multichannel tracks. On greater-than-stereo multichannel tracks, the controls for all channels are generally linked together.
Relinking may cause automation to be lost.
See “Linking and Unlinking Controls on
Multi-Mono Plug-ins” on page 681
664 Pro Tools Reference Guide
TDM and RTAS Plug-ins
There are three plug-in formats supported by
Pro Tools (TDM, RTAS, and AudioSuite), two of which can be used as real-time inserts, as follows:
TDM Plug-ins Used with Pro Tools HD systems, these plug-ins rely on the processing power of
DSP on Pro Tools|HD system cards.
RTAS Plug-ins Similar to their TDM counterparts, but unlike TDM plug-ins, they rely on and are limited by the host processing power of your computer.
AudioSuite Plug-ins Non-real-time, file-based processing plug-ins for Pro Tools (see the Digi-
Rack Guide).
Depending on your Pro Tools software, plug-ins can be used as follows:
Pro Tools HD
• Both TDM and RTAS plug-ins can be used on audio, Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and Instrument tracks.
With Pro Tools HD, RTAS plug-ins placed on Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and Instrument tracks will use additional voices and may introduce extra latency based on the HW Buffer Size. For more information,
see “Voice Usage and Total Latency for
Pro Tools LE
• RTAS plug-ins can be used on audio, Auxiliary
Input, Master Fader, and Instrument tracks.
For tips on maximizing RTAS performance, see the DigiRack Plug-ins Guide.
Voice Usage and Total Latency for
RTAS Plug-ins
(Pro Tools HD Only)
With Pro Tools HD, the initial insert of an RTAS plug-in may cause additional latency, and will take up two additional voices per channel (one voice for input and one voice for output) in the following conditions:
• When inserted on an Auxiliary Input or
Master Fader track
• When inserted on an Instrument track that does not contain an instrument plug-in
• When inserted after a TDM plug-in on any kind of track
For example, the initial insert of an RTAS plugin on a mono Auxiliary Input track uses two voices (one channel with two voices), while the initial insert of that plug-in on a stereo Auxiliary
Input track uses four voices (two channels with two voices each).
Subsequent RTAS plug-ins on the same track do not take up additional voices unless a TDM plug-in is inserted between other RTAS plug-ins.
Avoid inserting TDM plug-ins between
RTAS plug-ins on any kind of track—this causes unnecessary voice usage and may cause additional latency.
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 665
Furthermore, one additional voice is used for each occurrence of any of the following conditions when using voices for RTAS plug-ins on a track:
• When you use the external key side-chain of an RTAS plug-in on that track
• When you select multiple track outputs for that track (one voice used for each output)
• When you select an AFL/PFL Path output in the Output tab of the I/O Setup dialog
(one voice used for each channel)
When you use Pro Tools 6.9.x or lower to open a session originally created with
Pro Tools 7, any RTAS plug-ins inserted on
Auxiliary Input or Master Fader tracks—or after TDM plug-ins on any kind of track— will become inactive.
Viewing Inserts
Both the Mix and Edit windows can be configured to show or hide inserts. Plug-in windows provide complete access to plug-in controls.
To show (or hide) inserts, do one of the following:
â– In the Mix window (or Edit window), select
View > Mix Window (or Edit Window) > Inserts.
Inserts
Sends (A–F)
Showing Inserts in the Mix Window
– or –
â– Select Inserts View from the Edit Window or
Mix Window View selector.
View selector
Showing Inserts using the View selector
666 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Display of Plug-in Window Status
In the Mix and Edit window, the plug-in button and selector display the currently inserted plug-
in, its bypass state (see “Bypassing Plug-ins” on page 680), target status, and window status.
Lit plug-in name
Indication of open plug-in window
Indicating the Controller Target
If you are using a control surface with Pro Tools, only one plug-in can be targeted at a time. The current controller target, if any, is indicated with a color outline around its name:
Target outline
The controller target
Making Inserts Inactive
Plug-in and hardware inserts can be made inactive to free up their resources for other uses.
When a plug-in insert is inactive it retains its assignment, position, and related automation playlists. However, it will not pass audio and does not consume any DSP or TDM resources.
When opening sessions, inserts will automatically be made inactive in any of the following situations:
• The system has insufficient DSP resources.
• A plug-in is not installed.
• A plug-in type is not available (RTAS or TDM).
• Opening the session results in plug-in type substitutions. This can happen if the type is available but substituting would result in an unsupported condition, such as opening a session containing a TDM plug-in for which an RTAS version is unavailable.
To make an insert inactive, do one of the following:
â– Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-
Control-click (Mac) the Insert button.
– or –
â–
Make the track inactive. See “Making Tracks
To toggle inserts in the same position on all tracks active or inactive:
â– Control-Start-Alt click (Windows) or Command-Control-Option click (Mac) an Insert button in the position you want to toggle.
To toggle inserts in the same position on all selected tracks active or inactive:
â–
Control-Start-Alt-Shift-click (Windows) or
Command-Control-Option-Shift-click (Mac) an
Insert button in the position you want to toggle.
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 667
Inactive Plug-in Inserts
Inactive plug-in inserts retain all associated automation playlists. In addition, any edits made in the session affect the plug-in automation playlists. You cannot record automation or adjust the controls for an inactive plug-in.
Inactive
(italicized)
Active
(plain text)
Display of inactive plug-ins
Inserting Plug-ins on Tracks
To use a real-time plug-in, insert it on a track.
Plug-ins cannot be inserted or removed during recording.
To insert a plug-in on a track:
1 Make sure the Inserts View is shown in the
Mix or Edit window.
2 Click the Insert selector on the track and select
the plug-in that you want to use. (See “TDM and
RTAS Plug-ins” on page 665 for related informa-
tion.)
Insert selector
Display of inactive Plug-in window
Inactive Hardware Inserts
Inactive hardware inserts retain their assignments, but do not pass audio and do not consume any DSP resources.
Hardware inserts do not provide a bypass control. You can use the inactive feature whenever you need to mute or bypass a hardware insert.
Inserting a TDM plug-in
You can insert a plug-in on a track by dragging one of its Plug-ins Settings (.txf) files from a DigiBase browser onto an available track Insert position in the Mix window. See
“Dragging and Dropping Plug-in Settings
To remove an insert from a track:
â– Click the Insert selector and choose No Insert.
Removing a plug-in
668 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Ordering RTAS and TDM Plug-ins on Audio Tracks
(Pro Tools HD Only)
With Pro Tools HD, when RTAS and TDM plugins are combined on an audio track, Auxiliary
Input, or Master Fader, the order in which they are inserted produces different results:
RTAS Plug-ins Grouped Before TDM Plug-ins No additional voices will be used, and no processing latency will occur. RTAS plug-ins will be bypassed when Record Enable or TrackInput monitoring is enabled for that track.
TDM Plug-ins Grouped Before RTAS Plug-ins Each initial insert of an RTAS plug-in after a TDM plug-in on a track will cause processing latency,
Record Enable or TrackInput monitoring is enabled for that track.
As a rule, always group plug-ins of the same type together, especially if inserting RTAS after TDM plug-ins. Otherwise, additional voices may be unnecessarily used.
Ordering Recommendations
When combining RTAS and TDM plug-ins on an audio track, use one of the following two strategies based on your recording needs:
• To ensure that RTAS plug-ins stay active when you record enable a track or use TrackInput monitoring, order all TDM plug-ins before
RTAS plug-ins.
– or –
• To conserve voices and minimize processing latency, order all RTAS plug-ins before TDM plug-ins.
Plug-in Menu Organization
You can customize how plug-in lists (plug-in menus) are organized in the Insert selector and
Plug-in selector.
Use the “Organize Plug-in Menus By” pop-up menu in the Pro Tools Display Preferences page to organize plug-in menus in a Flat List (with plug-ins in alphabetical order), or by Category,
Manufacturer, or Category and Manufacturer.
Insert selector
Plug-ins organized by category (using the Insert selector)
Plug-ins organized by Manufacturer (using the Plug-in selector)
“Organize Plug-in Menus By” Pop-Up Menu
Flat List Organizes plug-ins in a single list, in alphabetical order.
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 669
Category Organizes plug-ins by process category
(such as EQ, Dynamics, and Delay), with individual plug-ins listed in the category submenus.
Plug-ins that do not fit into a standard category
(such as the DigiRack Signal Generator), or third-party plug-ins that have not had a category designated by their developers, appear in the Other category. Plug-ins can appear in more than one category.
Plug in categories include:
• EQ
• Dynamics
• Pitch Shift
• Reverb
• Delay
• Modulation
• Harmonic
• Noise Reduction
• Dither
• Sound Field
• Hardware
• Instrument
• Other
• Effects
The Effects subfolder organizes special effects, multi-effect processors, and other plug-ins. All plug-ins that specify their plug-in category as an
“Effects” type will be displayed within the Effects subfolder.
If no plug-ins within a certain category are installed on your system, the subfolder named for that category will not appear in the menu.
Manufacturer Organizes plug-ins by their manufacturer (such as Digidesign, Eventide, Line 6, and McDSP), with individual plug-ins listed in the manufacturer submenus. Plug-ins that do not have a Manufacturer defined will appear in the “Other” manufacturer folder.
Most Digidesign-distributed third party plug-ins will be grouped under Digidesign when this option is enabled.
If no plug-ins by a certain manufacturer are installed on your system, the subfolder named for that manufacturer will not appear in the menu.
Category and Manufacturer Organizes plug-ins in two levels of menus. The top menus display plug-ins by process category (such as EQ, Dynamics, and Delay), with individual plug-ins listed in the category submenus. The bottom menus display plug-ins by manufacturer (such as Digidesign, Eventide, Line 6, and McDSP), with individual plug-ins listed in the manufacturer submenus.
To select how plug-ins are organized:
1 Open or create a session.
2 Choose Setup > Preferences, and click Display.
3 Click the “Organize Plug-in Menus By” popup menu, and select one of the view options.
4 Click OK.
The current “Organize Plug-in Menus By” setting is saved with Pro Tools preferences (it is not saved with the Pro Tools session file).
670 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Control Surface Support
Digidesign control surfaces with multi-color
LCDs (such as D-Control) indicate plug-ins as follows:
• Plug-in categories (such as EQ) and plug-in manufacturers (such as Digidesign) are indicated in green text.
• Specific plug-ins located in the plug-in subfolders (such as EQ III in the EQ subfolder) are indicated in yellow (amber) text.
Control surfaces with single-color displays (such as ProControl and Command|8) do not indicate plug-in view choices. They display contents of a plug-in folder as a single list of plug-ins.
Plug-in Favorites
To find a plug-in faster, a plug-in can be designated as a favorite . Favorite plug-ins are shown at the top of the plug-in menu.
When a plug-in becomes a favorite, it is still shown in its plug-in category and its name appears in bold.
Favorite plug-ins
Plug-in categories
Default EQ and Dynamics Plug-ins
You can set a default EQ plug-in and Dynamics plug-in, which places them at the top of the Insert selector pop-up menu on-screen, and first in the list of menu choices when assigning inserts on ICON work surfaces.
Default plug-in display in Insert selector menu
To set a default plug-in:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Under Setup, choose a plug-in from the Default EQ or Default Dynamics pop-up menu.
3 Click OK to close the Preferences window.
Menu display of favorite plug-ins
To designate a plug-in as a favorite:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the Insert selector and select a plug-in from a to designate it as a favorite.
To change the status of a plug-in favorite:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the Insert selector and select a plug-in favorite that you no longer want designated as a favorite.
When selecting the plug-in favorite to change, you can select the plug-in from the list of favorites at the top of the plug-in menu, or in its plugin category (where the plug-in appears in bold).
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 671
Moving and Duplicating Plugin and Hardware Inserts
You can move or duplicate an insert by dragging it to a different position on the same track or a different track. Inserts that are moved or duplicated retain their original settings and automation.
Plug-ins cannot be moved or duplicated during recording.
To move an insert:
â–
Drag the insert to a new insert location.
The Plug-in Window
The Plug-in window appears whenever you click a plug-in’s Insert button on a track. This floating window lets you edit the adjust the controls of any real-time plug-in insert in use on a track.
Insert selector
Insert button
Insert button and selector on track
Settings menu
Track selector
Librarian menu
Insert Position selector
Plug-in selector
Previous setting
Compare
Automation Safe
Next setting
Settings
Menu selector
Auto button
Effect
Bypass
Target button
Convert plug-in
Clip
LED
Moving a plug-in
Dragging an insert on top of an existing insert will replace it and any automation.
To duplicate an insert:
â– Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac) the insert to a new insert location. Duplicated plugin inserts retain their original settings and automation.
You can also duplicate Sends. See “Moving or Copying Sends” on page 644
Plug-in window (mono Trim shown)
Track Selector Accesses any non-MIDI track in a session.
Insert Position Selector Accesses any insert on the current track.
Plug-in Selector Lets you select any real-time plug-in installed in the Plug-ins folder (that is created when you install Pro Tools).
Effect Bypass Button Disables the currently displayed plug-in. This lets you compare the track with and without the effect.
672 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Convert Plug-in Selector Lets you convert the insert from a TDM plug-in to an RTAS plug-in of the same type (or vice-versa). This feature can only be used on plug-ins that are available in both TDM and RTAS formats.
Clip LED Lights red to indicate if any meter in a plug-in has clipped (not available on all plugins). The Plug-in Clip LED follows Pro Tools settings for clip indication.
Ω
Settings Menu Lets you copy, paste, save, and import plug-in settings.
Librarian Menu Recalls settings files saved in the plug-in’s root settings folder or in the current
session’s Settings folder. See “Using the Librarian” on page 675.
Next (+) and Previous (–) Setting Buttons Let you select the next or previous plug-in setting from the Librarian menu.
You will lose the current settings if they are not saved before you use the Next and Previous Setting buttons. Always save your settings to the Librarian menu.
Plug-ins Settings Select Button Accesses the
Plug-in Settings dialog, which lists the settings files for the current plug-in. From this list, you can select a new setting, or audition a series of settings.
Compare Toggles between the original saved plug-in setting and any changes you have made to it so you can compare them.
Auto Button Lets you enable individual plug-in
controls for automation recording. See “Automating Plug-ins” on page 703.
Automation Safe When enabled, prevents existing plug-in automation from being overwritten.
Target Button When multiple Plug-in windows are open, clicking this button selects that plugin as the target for any computer keyboard com-
mands. For more information, see “Targeted
Key Input Selector Lets you select audio on a particular input or bus and route it to trigger the plug-in. This menu only appears on plug-ins that feature side-chain processing. Key inputs are monophonic.
Key Input selector
MIDI node
MIDI node display in a plug-in header (Bruno shown)
MIDI Node Display Shows MIDI node information for MIDI-enabled plug-ins. MIDI nodes are virtual connections from Pro Tools to software instruments and other MIDI-enabled plug-ins.
MIDI nodes are useful for routing multiple MIDI tracks to different channels of a single virtual
MIDI device. MIDI node numbers are also displayed in a track’s MIDI Output selector.
Master Link Button When enabled, links the controls on all channels of a multi-mono plugin so that they can be adjusted in tandem.
Master Link button
Link Enable buttons
Channel Selector
Phase
Invert
Plug-in window (multi-mono 1-Band EQ shown)
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 673
Link Enable Buttons Let you selectively link or unlink the controls of specific channels of a multi-mono plug-in. Each square represents a speaker channel. The Master Link button must
be disabled to use the Link Enable buttons. See
“Linking and Unlinking Controls on Multi-
Channel Selector Accesses a specific channel within a multichannel track for plug-in control editing. This menu appears only on multi-mono plug-ins inserted on tracks with more than one channel. Shift-clicking this selector opens a separate Plug-in window for each channel of the multichannel track on which the plug-in is inserted.
Phase Invert buttons
LFE Enable
Plug-in window (multichannel Compressor shown)
Phase Invert Button Inverts the phase polarity of the input signal on some plug-ins.
LFE Enable Enables plug-in processing of the
LFE (low frequency effects) channel on a multichannel track formatted for 5.1, 6.1, or 7.1 surround formats on some plug-ins. To disable LFE processing, deselect this button.
Tempo Sync Enables compatible plug-ins to automatically synchronize to the session tempo, for rhythmic delay, echo, and similar effects.
Opening Plug-in Windows
To open a plug-in window:
â– Click the plug-in button in the Mix or Edit window channel strip.
By default, each plug-in you open will appear in the same location as a currently open plug-in, replacing it in the same window location.
Opening Multiple Plug-in Windows
Pro Tools normally displays a single plug-in window from which you can adjust the controls of any session plug-in. You can also open additional Plug-in windows for specific plug-ins.
Once you begin working with multiple plug-in windows, you will need to click the Target button on the plug-in whose controls you want to adjust using keyboard commands.
To open an additional plug-in window:
â– In the Mix window, Shift-click the Insert button of a plug-in.
To open plug-in windows for each channel of a multi-mono plug-in:
â–
Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
Channel selector in the Plug-in window of a plug-in insert.
To close all currently open plug-in windows:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the close box of any currently open plug-in window.
674 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Plug-in Window Controls
All plug-ins provide standard Pro Tools controls for track and insert selection, bypass, and other controls, in addition to the EQ, dynamics, and other processor-specific controls.
To select a different plug-in on the same track:
â– Click the Insert selector and select a plug-in from the pop-up menu.
Using the Librarian
The Settings Librarian makes it easy to create your own library of plug-in settings. Using the
Librarian and Settings pop-up menus, you can copy, paste, save, and import these settings from plug-in to plug-in, or from session to session.
Choosing a plug-in from the Plug-in window
To choose a different track:
â– Click the Track selector and choose a track from the pop-up menu.
Choosing a track from the Plug-in window
Target Window and Settings Shortcuts
When multiple plug-in windows are open, a highlighted target indicates the target window.
Pro Tools keeps a single plug-in target window.
Opening a new plug-in opens it as the new target window, in the same location. In addition, the plug-in target window is also the focus of keyboard shortcuts for plug-in settings.
Librarian menu
Once you create and save settings files to disk
(and tell Pro Tools where to find them by assigning their root folder) they appear both in the Librarian menu and in the Plug-in Settings dialog.
The also appear as Plug-in Settings files (.txf) in
DigiBase browsers.
You can also use the Plug-in Settings dialog to select settings or audition plug-in set-
tings. See “Plug-in Settings Dialog” on page 678.
The Settings Menu
Use the Settings menu commands to save, copy, paste, and manage plug-in settings files.
Settings menu
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 675
Settings menu commands include:
Save Settings Saves the current settings. This command overwrites any previous version of the settings. The setting then appears in the Librarian menu.
Save Settings As Saves the current settings under a different name.
Copy Settings Copies the current settings. You can then apply these settings to the same type of plug-in on a different track by choosing the track in the Plug-in window and pasting the settings with the Paste Settings command.
Paste Settings Pastes settings copied with the
Copy Settings command.
Import Settings Imports a settings file from a location other than the Root Settings folder or Session folder.
Delete Current Settings File Permanently deletes the current settings file from disk.
Lock Settings File Prevents the current settings from being overwritten by the Save command.
If you attempt to save control settings, you will be required to save them using a different name or disk location.
Set As User Default Defines the current settings as the User Default for a specific plug-in.
Settings Preferences
The Settings Preferences sub-menus are for choosing preferences for saving and importing plug-in settings. They include:
Set Plug-in Default To Sets the default setting to either Factory Default (the standard default setting for that plug-in) or User Default (your custom setting).
Save Plug-in Settings To Selects the folder where plug-in settings are saved. If you choose Session
Folder, the settings are saved in a folder named
“Plug-in Settings” within the current Session folder. If you choose Root Settings Folder, the settings are saved in the folder you specified with the Set Root Settings Folder command.
Set Root Settings Folder Selects a location or root folder for saving and importing settings.
This root settings folder must be named “Plug-in
Settings.” Use this command only if you want to choose a location other than the default Plug-in
Settings folder.
The default location for the Root Plug-in Settings folder is as follows:
Windows Program Files\Common Files\
Digidesign\DAE\Plug-in Settings
Mac Library/Application Support/
Digidesign/Plug-in Settings
To save plug-in settings to any location other than the default Plug-in Settings folder, you must first create a folder named
“Plug-in Settings” in the new location and then save to that folder.
Choosing a Destination for
Settings
Before you save plug-in settings, select their destination folder.
To select a destination folder:
â– From the Settings pop-up menu, choose Settings Preferences > Save Plug-in Settings To, and choose Session Folder or Root Settings Folder.
If you choose Root Settings folder, Pro Tools saves to the default Root Plug-in Settings folder unless you have specified a different location for the Root Settings folder.
676 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To select a different Root Settings folder:
1 From the Settings pop-up menu, choose Settings Preferences > Set Root Settings Folder.
2 Select the folder you want to use as your Root folder and click Select.
Creating Subfolders for Settings
To make it easier to find specific types of settings, you can subdivide settings files by creating subfolders for them.
Librarian menu
To create a settings subfolder:
3 From the Settings pop-up menu, choose Save
Settings.
4 Click the New Folder button and type a name for the subfolder.
5 Name the setting and click Save. The setting is saved within the subfolder.
Managing Settings
Use the Settings pop-up menu to manage settings.
Unlinked multi-mono plug-ins have specific
rules for settings. See “Linking and Unlinking Controls on Multi-Mono Plug-ins” on page 681.
To save a setting:
1 Choose Save Settings from the Settings popup menu.
2 Type a name and click OK. The setting appears in the Librarian menu.
Press Control+Shift+S (Windows) or Command+Shift+S (Mac) to save plug-in settings.
To load a previously saved setting:
â–
Choose the setting from the Librarian pop-up menu.
To import a setting:
1 Choose Import Settings from the Settings popup menu.
2 Locate the settings file you want to import and click Open. Pro Tools loads the setting and copies it to the root destination folder.
To copy a setting:
â–
Choose Copy Settings from the Settings popup menu.
Press Control+Shift+C (Windows) or Command+Shift+C (Mac) to copy plug-in settings.
To paste a setting:
1 Open the destination plug-in.
2 Choose Paste Settings from the Settings popup menu.
Press Control+Shift+V (Windows) or Command+Shift+V (Mac) to paste plug-in settings.
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 677
To create a custom User Default setting:
1 Create and save a setting.
2 Choose Set As User Default from the Settings pop-up menu.
To make a plug-in default to your custom setting:
â– From the Settings pop-up menu, choose Settings Preferences > Set Plug-in Default To > User
Setting.
Changing Settings with the Next (+) and
Previous (–) Setting Buttons
These buttons let you select the next or previous setting of the Librarian menu.
To change plug-in settings using the +/– buttons:
â– Click the Plus (+) or Minus (–) buttons to select the next or previous plug-in settings file.
The next (or previous) settings file are enabled, and the Librarian menu changes to reflect the new setting.
You will lose the current settings if they are not saved before you use the Next and Previous Setting buttons. Always save your settings to the Librarian menu.
Editing Settings on Unlinked Multi-
Mono Plug-ins
When a multi-mono plug-in is unlinked, importing, copying, pasting, or bypassing settings affects only the currently selected channel.
To apply an operation to all channels of an unlinked plug-in:
â– Hold down the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Mac) while performing the command.
Plug-in Settings Dialog
The Plug-in Settings dialog lists the settings files for the current plug-in type. From this list, you can select a new setting, or audition a series of settings. Auditioning plug-in settings is especially useful for selecting patch names for virtual
MIDI instrument plug-ins or trying out different effects types applied to your audio.
Use the Folder pop-up menu at the top of the
Settings dialog to switch between plug-in settings subfolders, or root and session settings folders.
The Plug-in Settings dialog includes the following:
Folder This pop-up menu lets you switch between settings located in root or session folders
(and any available subfolders).
Patch Field This field displays the name of the active (highlighted) setting.
Increment Patch Every X Sec This option lets you audition contiguous plug-in settings onthe-fly by automatically scrolling through them for a specified number of seconds.
Plug-in Settings dialog
678 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To change plug-in settings using the Plug-in
Settings dialog:
1 Click the Settings Select button.
2 Do one of the following:
• Select a plug-in setting from the dialog list.
– or –
• Use the Arrow keys to scroll through the available settings.
To switch between settings subfolders, press
Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) and use the Up/Down Arrow keys.
3 Click Done.
Auditioning Plug-in Settings
When the Plug-in Settings dialog is open, you can have Pro Tools automatically scroll through and audition the settings files saved in the plugin’s root settings folder or in the current session’s settings folder.
To audition plug-in settings:
1 Click the Settings Select button.
2 From the dialog list, click a setting—the starting point from which you will scroll through the settings files.
3 Enter a value for the number of seconds that will elapse between each program change.
4 Select the option for Increment Patch.
After the specified number of seconds, Pro Tools selects the next setting.
5 When you are finished auditioning settings, do one of the following:
• Click Done to stop incrementing patches, and to close the Plug-in Settings dialog.
– or –
• Select the Increment Patch option to stop incrementing patches and keep the Plug-in
Settings dialog open.
DigiBase and Plug-in Settings
Files
Searching for Plug-in Settings Files
To search for plug-in settings files:
1 In the Workspace browser, click the Search icon.
2 Select Plug-in Settings File from the Type popup menu.
Searching for plug-in settings files
3 To further narrow your search, type all or part of the name of the plug-in settings file you want.
4 Click Search.
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 679
5 To sort your search by Plug-in Name or Manufacturer, click the corresponding column title.
To change plug-in settings by drag and drop:
â–
Drag and drop a plug-in settings file from a
DigiBase browser to the plug-in window. The plug-in settings file must be for the same plug-in name. For example, you cannot replace a
1-Band EQ 3 with a plug-in setting for 4-Band
EQ 3.
Plug-in settings files found in the Workspace browser and sorted by Plug-in Name
With DigiBase Pro (Pro Tools HD and
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 only), you can create catalogs of specific plug-in settings that you work with frequently to streamline your workflow. For more information on DigiBase Pro and Catalogs, see the Pro Tools Reference Guide.
Dragging and Dropping Plug-in Settings Files
You can insert a plug-in with a specific plug-in settings file, as well as change plug-in settings of inserted plug-ins by dragging and dropping plug-in settings files from a DigiBase browser.
To insert a plug-in by drag and drop:
â– Drag and drop a plug-in settings file from a
DigiBase browser to an Insert in the Mix (or
Edit) window.
Dragging and dropping a plug-in settings file to a plug-in
Bypassing Plug-ins
Plug-ins can be bypassed from their Plug-in window, or from the Mix and Edit window Inserts
View.
When a plug-in insert is bypassed, the Insert selector in the Mix window changes its color to blue for easy visual reference. If some, but not all channels of an unlinked multi-mono plug-in are bypassed, the Insert selector appears purple.
Dragging and dropping a plug-in settings file to an
Insert
680 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To bypass a plug-in, do one of the following:
â–
Click the Plug-in window’s Effect Bypass button.
– or –
â–
Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the plug-in’s Insert button in the Mix or
Edit window. bypassed (blue) some channels bypassed (purple) not bypassed
To link the controls of specific channels:
1 Deselect the Master Link button if it is not already deselected.
2 Click the Link Enable buttons for the channels whose controls you want to link. For example, on plug-ins that do provide discrete LFE controls from the LFE Enable button, you can link all channels except the LFE by highlighting the icons representing the five full-range speakers in a multi-mono plug-in.
Indication of bypassed plug-in state
Linking and Unlinking Controls on
Multi-Mono Plug-ins
When a multi-mono plug-in is used on a stereo track or greater-than-stereo multichannel track
(Pro Tools HD only), the controls are linked by default. Adjusting the Gain control on one channel, for example, will adjust it for all channels.
You can unlink multi-mono plug-in controls on specific channels of a track and edit them independently. You can also selectively link the controls of specific channels.
Link Enable buttons
Channel selector
Master Link button
All channels linked except the LFE
Editing Plug-in Controls
You can adjust plug-in controls by dragging the control’s slider or knob, or by typing a value into the control’s text box. For instructions on editing specific plug-ins, see the plug-in’s documentation.
The DigiRack plug-ins (installed with
Pro Tools) are documented in the DigiRack
Plug-ins Guide .
To adjust a plug-in control:
1 Begin audio playback so that you can hear the control changes in real time.
2 Adjust the controls of the plug-in for the effect you want.
3 Close the Plug-in window to save the most recent changes.
Channel selector and Link controls (shown with Link disabled)
To unlink controls on a multi-mono plug-in:
â– Deselect the Master Link button.
To access controls for a specific channel:
â– Select the channel from the Channel selector.
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 681
Editing Parameters Using a Mouse
You can adjust rotary controls by dragging horizontally or vertically. Parameter values increase as you drag upward or to the right, and decrease as you drag downward or to the left.
Keyboard Shortcuts
â—† For finer adjustments, Control-drag (Windows) or Command-drag (Mac) the control.
â—† To return a control to its default value, Altclick (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the control.
Editing Parameters Using a Computer
Keyboard
You can use your computer keyboard to edit plug-in controls.
If multiple Plug-in windows are open, Tab and keyboard entry remain focused on the plug-in that is the target window.
The plug-in target window is the focus of keyboard shortcuts for plug-in settings. To make a plug-in the target for any computer keyboard commands (including key shortcuts), click the plug-in’s Target button in its
Plug-in window.
To change control values with a computer keyboard:
1 Click or Navigate to the control text field that you want to edit to activate the field.
To move forward through the different control fields, press the Tab key. To move backward, press Shift+Tab.
2 Change the value by doing one of the following.
• To increase a value, press the Up Arrow on your keyboard.
• To decrease a value, press the Down Arrow on your keyboard.
• Type the value.
In fields that support values in kilohertz, typing “k” after a number value will multiply the value by 1,000. For example, type
“8k” to enter a value of 8,000.
3 Do one of the following to confirm the value:
• Press Enter on the numeric keyboard to input the value and remain in keyboard editing mode.
– or –
• Press Enter on the alpha keyboard (Windows) or Return (Mac) to enter the value and leave keyboard editing mode.
To clear plug-in clipping
â– Press Alt-C (Windows) or Option-C (Mac).
Plug-in Automation and Safe
All real-time plug-ins can be fully automated, and support all Pro Tools Automation modes
(Write, Touch, and Latch, plus Trim).
The Auto button opens the Plug-in Automation dialog, where you can enable individual plug-in
controls for automation recording. (See “Automating Plug-ins” on page 703 for more informa-
tion.)
The Safe button engages Automation Safe mode.
When enabled, existing plug-in automation is
protected from being overwritten. (See “Record
Safing Plug-in Automation” on page 704.)
682 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Using a Side-Chain Input
The side-chain input is the split-off signal used by a plug-in's detector to trigger dynamics processing, and is generally drawn internally from the input signal. However, some plug-ins let you switch between internal and external side-chain processing.
With external side-chain processing, a plug-in's detector is triggered by an external signal (such as a separate reference track or audio source) known as the key input .
A typical use for external side-chain processing is to control the dynamics of one audio signal using the dynamics of another signal (the key input). For example, a kick drum track could be used to trigger gating of a bass track to tighten it up, or a rhythm guitar track could be used to gate a keyboard pad.
Side-Chain Filters
Some plug-ins feature key high-pass and lowpass filters. These controls let you define a specific frequency range in the side-chain signal with which to trigger the plug-in effect. A common production technique is to use these controls to filter a drum track so that only specific high frequency sounds (such as a hi-hat) or low frequency ones (such a tom or a kick) trigger the effect.
Using a Key Input for External Side-
Chain Processing
To use a key input for external side-chain processing:
1 Click the plug-in’s Key Input selector and select the input or bus carrying the audio you want to use to trigger the plug-in.
Choosing a Key Input
2 Click the External Key to activate external side-chain processing.
3 Press the Spacebar to begin playback. The plug-in uses the input or bus that you chose as a key input to trigger its effect.
4 During playback, do any of the following to fine-tune key input triggering:
• To hear the audio source you have selected to control the key input, enable Side-Chain
Listen or Key Listen (depending on the plug-in). When finished, disable Side-
Chain Listen/Key Listen to resume normal plug-in monitoring.
• To filter the key input so that only specific frequencies trigger the plug-in, use the filtering controls (if available) to select the frequency range.
5 Adjust the plug-in’s Threshold control (if available) and other controls as needed.
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 683
Instrument Plug-ins
Instrument plug-ins are software instruments
(such as synthesizers or samplers) that generate audio and that can be controlled with MIDI. Instrument plug-ins can be inserted on audio,
Auxiliary Input, and Instrument tracks.
By inserting an instrument plug-in on an Instrument track, you can control both the
MIDI input to the plug-in and audio output
of the plug-in from a single track. See “Monitoring and Mixing Audio with Instrument
MIDI Output routed to plug-in
MIDI Velocity meter showing MIDI input
Instrument plug-in insert
Audio Output selector
Level meters showing audio output
Instrument plug-ins are inserted on tracks in the same way as other plug-ins. Instrument plug-ins can be moved and duplicated, their controls can be bypassed, safed and automated, and their settings can be saved in the same way as other plug-ins.
Using Hardware Inserts
You can connect external devices, such as reverb or effects processors, to your Pro Tools system and use them as hardware inserts on individual tracks or on submixes.
Pro Tools inserts utilize corresponding hardware input and output channels to send and return the audio. Inserts can be defined, and their channels mapped to audio interface channels, in the I/O Setup dialog.
If you plan to use a device as an insert, be sure to connect the device to matching inputs and outputs on your system. For example, a hardware insert being supplied by outputs 7–8 needs to be returned to hardware inputs 7–8.
Delay Compensation can be applied to
Hardware Inserts. See “H/W Insert Delay
To define a hardware insert:
1 Choose Setup > I/O, then click the Inserts tab.
2 Select an insert path, or click New Path to create a new Insert path.
3 Double-click the Path Name to enter a custom path name for the insert.
Instrument plug-in inserted on an Instrument track
684 Pro Tools Reference Guide
4 Make sure the insert path is set to the correct format (mono, stereo, or other).
5 Map inserts in the Channel Grid as needed.
Insert and Output paths have special rules re-
garding channel mapping (see “Overlapping
Channels and Valid Paths” on page 54).
Assigning Hardware Inserts
To assign an external hardware insert to a track:
â– Select an insert from the track Insert selector.
Selecting a hardware I/O insert
Bypassing Hardware Inserts
Hardware inserts do not provide a bypass control. To monitor playback without a hardware insert, either set it to Inactive, remove it by reassigning it to No Insert, or use a bypass switch on
the hardware device itself. (See “Making Inserts
Inactive” on page 667 for more information.)
Connecting and Integrating
External Devices
Pro Tools can create dedicated connections to external analog or digital devices. The number and type of connections depends on what kind of system you have.
To connect an external device to a Pro Tools system:
1 Connect an unused output (or pair of outputs for a stereo device) of your Pro Tools system to an input of the external signal processor.
2 Connect the output of the external signal processor to an unused input (or pair of inputs for a stereo device) of your Pro Tools system.
3 Define what physical ports are routed to
Pro Tools input and output ports, as appropriate, in either the Hardware Setup dialog or
I/O Setup dialog.
4 Define output, input, or insert paths as appropriate in the I/O Setup dialog.
If you plan to use a device as an insert, be sure to connect the device to matching inputs and outputs on your system. For example, to use outputs 7–8, the insert has to use inputs 7–8 also.
For additional information on connecting external devices, refer to your Pro Tools Getting Started Guide .
Connecting Effects Units Digitally
If you want to use the digital inputs and outputs on your Pro Tools system as effects sends and returns to a digital effects device, Pro Tools should be the clock master in most cases. Set your digital effects device to accept an external digital clock so that it synchronizes to Pro Tools.
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 685
To set up a digital send to an external device from a Pro Tools|HD system:
1 Do one of the following:
• On a 192 I/O, 192 Digital I/O, 96 I/O,
96i I/O, or 888|24 I/O, choose Setup >
Hardware, choose the peripheral, format, and clock format, and set the channel pair to Digital.
• On an 882|20 I/O or 1622 I/O, choose
Setup > Hardware, choose the peripheral, and set Channel 1–2 input to Digital.
2 Choose Internal from the Clock Source popup menu.
3 Click OK.
To set up a digital send to an external device from a Digi 002 or Digi 002 Rack system:
1 Choose Setup > Playback Engine and choose the peripheral.
2 Do one of the following:
• If the external device is connected to the
S/PDIF RCA jacks, deselect S/PDIF Mirroring. (When S/PDIF Mirroring is on, digital output at the S/PDIF RCA jacks exactly mirrors the output of analog Channels 1–2.)
• If the external device is connected to the
Optical ports, choose a format (most likely
S/PDIF for an effects device) from the Optical Format pop-up menu.
3 Choose Internal from the Clock Source popup menu.
4 Click OK.
5 Optionally, configure the I/O Setup dialog with new path names for effects routing.
If you set the Optical Format to S/PDIF,
Pro Tools will watch the Optical port for any audio input, and ignore any audio input on the S/PDIF RCA jacks.
Using External Clock Sources (for
Recording and Monitoring)
When recording or monitoring, Pro Tools can synchronize to an external clock source. Options for external clock vary according to the type of Pro Tools system you are using.
Pro Tools|HD Systems
Pro Tools|HD systems can receive external clock through any of the digital inputs on any
Pro Tools|HD I/O (including AES/EBU, S/PDIF, and Optical).
With an expanded Pro Tools|HD system that includes Legacy interfaces (such as the 888|24
I/O), connect to the digital input on Channels
1–2 of the Legacy audio interface in order to clock from them. Legacy I/Os only support
44.1 kHz and 48 kHz sample rates.
To determine correct card order and audio interface connections, refer to the
Pro Tools|HD Getting Started Guide.
To select an external clock source for a
Pro Tools|HD system:
1 Choose Setup > Hardware.
2 Select the appropriate Pro Tools|HD I/O in order to display its settings in the Main page.
3 If necessary, enable the appropriate Digital
Format (if you have not already done so, according to the instructions in your Getting Started
Guide or I/O Guide ).
4 Set the Clock Source to match the type of input.
5 Configure input routing of the digital source, using the Input and Output pop-up menus, if necessary.
6 Click OK to close the Hardware Setup dialog.
686 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Digi 002 or Digi 002 Rack Systems
Pro Tools can receive external clock from the
Optical input or S/PDIF input.
To select an external clock source for a Digi 002 or Digi 002 Rack system:
1 Choose Setup > Hardware.
2 Set the Clock Source to match the type of input.
3 If you choose Optical, make sure the Optical
Format matches the type of optical input you are sending to your Pro Tools system.
If you set the Optical Format to S/PDIF,
Pro Tools will watch the Optical port for external clock, and ignore any clock input on the S/PDIF RCA jacks.
Mbox 2, Mbox 2 Pro, and Mbox Systems
Pro Tools can receive external clock from the
S/PDIF input on these interfaces.
To select an external clock source for an Mbox 2,
Mbox 2 Pro, or Mbox system:
1 Choose Setup > Hardware.
2 Choose the SPDIF (Windows) or SPDIF/RCA
(Mac) from the Clock Source pop-up menu.
3 Click OK.
Your digital input device must be connected and powered on for Pro Tools to synchronize to it. If your input device is not powered on, leave the Clock Source set to Internal.
Chapter 29: Plug-in and Hardware Inserts 687
688 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 30: Automation
Pro Tools features dynamic automation of mixing controls on each of the track types. You can write automation moves and view them in real time during playback of your session. You can also edit automation data with the same techniques you use to edit audio and MIDI data.
Automation Accuracy with
Control Surfaces
Digidesign Control Surfaces Digidesign’s D-Control, D-Command, ProControl, Control|24, and
Command|8 control surfaces support the automation features in Pro Tools. Digidesign control surfaces provide 10-bit resolution, or 1,024 steps of fader resolution. Pro Tools interpolates this input to 24-bit resolution on playback, resulting in extremely accurate and smooth fader automation.
For details on using Digidesign control surfaces to create mix automation, refer to your
Digidesign control surface guide .
MIDI Control Surfaces Most MIDI control surfaces have 7-bit resolution, or 128 steps.
Pro Tools interpolates this input to 24-bit resolution on playback, resulting in accurate and smooth fader automation.
Automation QuickStart
Pro Tools provides many options for recording, replacing, and editing automation data.
The basic steps for automation recording are:
• Enable the automation type that you want to record (volume, pan, mute, send level, send pan, send mute, or plug-in automation).
• Put the appropriate tracks in an automation writing mode (Write, Touch, or Latch, or a
Trim mode).
• If you are automating a plug-in, enable the individual plug-in controls to be automated.
• Automation Safe any plug-ins, outputs, or sends that have existing automation data that you want to protect from being overwritten.
• Begin playback to begin automation recording, and adjust controls as needed. Pro Tools remembers all moves performed on enabled controls.
To edit automation once it has been recorded, you can:
• Repeat the above steps to write new automation over the previous data.
• Graphically edit the automation data in the
Edit window.
• Cut, copy, paste, or delete automation data
(certain restrictions apply).
Chapter 30: Automation 689
Automation Playlists
Each Pro Tools track contains a single automation playlist for each automatable parameter.
On audio tracks, these parameters include:
• Volume
• Volume Trim (Pro Tools|HD only)
• Pan
• Mute
• Send Level
• Send Level Trim (Pro Tools|HD only)
• Send Pan
• Send Mute
• Plug-in controls
On Auxiliary Input tracks, these parameters include:
• Volume
• Volume Trim (Pro Tools|HD only)
• Mute
• Pan
On Master Faders, these parameters include:
• Volume
• Volume Trim (Pro Tools|HD only)
On MIDI tracks, these parameters include:
• Volume (MIDI)
• Pan (MIDI)
• Mute
On Instrument tracks, these parameters include:
• Volume (audio)
• Volume Trim (audio) (Pro Tools|HD only)
• Mute (audio)
• Pan (audio)
On VCA Master tracks (Pro Tools HD only), these parameters include:
• Volume
• Volume Trim
• Mute
You can display and edit each of these automatable playlists individually from Pro Tools, even during playback.
In addition, on MIDI and Instrument tracks you can display and edit other continuous MIDI controller data (such as mod wheel, breath controller, foot controller, or sustain) in a similar manner. For more information on editing MIDI
data, see “Continuous Controller Events” on page 571.
Automation Playlists with Audio and MIDI Regions
Pro Tools handles audio regions and their automation playlists differently from MIDI regions and their automation playlists.
Audio Tracks
On audio tracks, automation data resides on a separate playlist from audio data and regions.
Each edit playlist on an audio track shares the same automation data.
690 Pro Tools Reference Guide
MIDI and Instrument Tracks
On MIDI tracks and Instrument tracks, all controller automation data except for MIDI Mute data, or audio mute (Instrument tracks only), is stored in the MIDI region that contains it. Each edit playlist on the track is separate, and represents a distinct performance, complete with controller automation.
MIDI Mute data is independent of the MIDI data in a MIDI region. This lets you mute playback of individual MIDI or Instrument tracks in Pro Tools without altering the controller data.
Trim Automation Playlists
Separate Trim automation playlists are available for Volume trim and Send Level trim. Volume trim is available on all track types except MIDI tracks. Send Level trim is available on audio tracks only.
Each Trim automation playlist shows the position of the Trim fader with yellow breakpoint automation that can be edited. For more infor-
mation on Trim playlists, see “Trim Mode” on
page 694 and “Viewing Automation” on page 698.
Multiple Edit Playlists and Audio
Track Automation
All edit playlists on a single audio track share the same automation data. When you record or edit automation data in an audio track, the automation data is stored in the track’s corresponding automation playlist so it can be edited with, or independently from, its associated audio regions.
MIDI continuous controller data always follows region editing, with the exception of mute. See “MIDI and Instrument Tracks” on page 691 for more information.
â—† When you copy or cut audio data from a track while it is in Waveform View, the underlying automation data is cut or copied with it.
â—† If you paste audio data from other locations or tracks into an edit playlist, you may change the underlying automation data on the track.
â—† When you trim regions using Edit > Trim, the underlying automation data remains unchanged.
For more information, see “Editing Automation” on page 713.
Duplicating Tracks for Playlist Editing
The Duplicate Track command provides a convenient way to make a working copy of a track to experiment with routing, plug-ins, and automation. This protects the original track and its automation data from being edited or overwritten.
For more information on duplicating tracks
command, see “Duplicating Tracks” on page 128.
Chapter 30: Automation 691
Automation Modes
Automation modes control how a track’s automation data is written and played back. Each track provides an Automation Mode selector for selecting the track’s Automation mode.
Off Mode
Off mode turns off automation for all automatable parameters:
• Volume
• Pan
• Mute
• Send volume, pan, and mute
• Plug-in controls
• MIDI volume, pan, and mute
In Off mode, automation data for these parameters is ignored during playback. All other MIDI controller data is sent.
Automation can be switched from Off to another Automation mode during playback or record.
Read Mode
Read mode plays any automation that was previously written for a track.
Write Mode
Write mode writes automation from the time playback starts to the time it stops, erasing any previously written automation for the duration of the automation pass.
AutoMatch can be applied to a Write automa-
tion pass. See “AutoMatch Time” on page 697.
“After Write Pass, Switch To” Option
You can set Pro Tools to automatically change to Touch mode or Latch mode, or remain in
Write mode after the completion of an automation pass in Write mode.
To set the Automation mode after a Write pass:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Under Automation, select an “After Write
Pass, Switch To” option (Touch, Latch, or No
Change).
3 Click OK to close the Preferences window.
Touch Mode
Touch mode writes automation only while a fader or switch is touched or clicked with the mouse. When the fader is released, the writing of automation stops and the fader returns to any previously automated position, at a rate determined by the AutoMatch and Touch Timeout
settings. See “Automation Preferences” on page 696.
In Touch mode, certain control surfaces start writing automation as soon as you touch them.
These include touch-sensitive fader controllers, such as Digidesign’s D-Control, D-Command,
ProControl, Control|24, Digi 002, Command|8, or the Mackie HUI.
With other control surfaces in Touch mode, writing of automation does not begin until the fader hits the pass-through point , or the previously automated position. Once you reach the pass-through point with the fader, or a nontouch sensitive rotary control, writing of automation begins and continues until you stop moving the fader.
692 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Latch Mode
Latch mode works in the same way as Touch mode, writing automation only if you touch or move a control. However, unlike Touch, writing of automation continues until you stop playback or “punch out” of the automation pass by changing the Automation mode to Read or
Touch.
AutoMatch can be applied to a Latch automa-
tion pass. See “AutoMatch Time” on page 697.
Latch mode is particularly useful for automating
Pan controls and plug-ins on non-touch sensitive rotary controls, since it does not time out and revert to its previous position when you release a control.
See also “Writing Automation to the Start,
End, or All of a Track or Selection” on page 724.
AutoJoin with Latch Mode
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Pro Tools provides two different methods to resume writing automation on controls that were active at the point where the transport stopped:
AutoJoin Lets you automatically resume writing automation in Latch mode.
Join Lets you manually resume writing automation in Latch mode. Join is available only with
Digidesign-supported control surfaces.
To enable AutoJoin from Pro Tools:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Click the AutoJoin button.
AutoJoin button
AutoJoin Enable button in the Automation window
See your control surface guide for details on using Join and AutoJoin with a control surface.
Chapter 30: Automation 693
AutoJoin Indicator
After a Latch automation pass with AutoJoin enabled, the AutoJoin indicator appears in the
Pro Tools Edit window.
All other controls follow Latch behavior, writing automation when touched and continuing until playback stops, or until you punch out of writing automation.
AutoJoin indicator
AutoJoin indicator in the Edit window
The AutoJoin indicator is a vertical line that signifies the point where the last automation pass was stopped, and the point where the “join” will automatically occur on all tracks that were writing during that previous pass. When automation writing is resumed from this point, the line disappears.
To use Join or AutoJoin to resume writing on controls that were writing when the transport stopped, restart the transport before the AutoJoin indicator.
Touch/Latch Mode
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Touch/Latch Automation mode places a track’s
Volume control in Touch mode and all other automatable controls in Latch mode.
In Touch/Latch mode, the Volume control follows Touch behavior, writing automation when touched and returning to previously written levels when released.
Selecting Touch/Latch mode
Trim Mode
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Pro Tools HD can adjust (or trim ) existing track volume and send level automation data in real time. Pan, mute and plug-in automation cannot be trimmed in this manner. Trim mode works in combination with the other Automation modes
(Read, Touch, Latch, Touch/Latch, and Write) and is useful when you want to preserve all of your volume automation moves, but need to make levels a bit louder or softer to balance a mix.
When writing automation in Trim mode, fader moves write relative rather than absolute values.
The existing automation data is changed by the amount of increase or decrease (or the delta value) indicated by the faders.
When Trim mode is enabled, non-trimmable controls behave in the same manner as in the standard Automation modes, with the exception of Write/Trim mode, where non-trimmable controls operate as in Touch mode.
694 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Trim Automation Modes
When a track is in a Trim automation mode (except for Trim Off) its main Volume faders and all
Send level faders are displayed in yellow. When trimming, a track’s Volume indicator or Send
Level indicator shows the delta value being written rather than the absolute value.
Behavior of the Trim Automation modes also depends on the Coalesce Trim Automation pref-
erence setting. See “Coalescing Trim Automation” on page 723.
Trim Off
Trim Off turns off reading and writing of all automation (main and trim) for a track. All automation moves are ignored during playback.
Trim faders are temporarily set to zero when a track is set to Trim Off mode.
Depending on the Coalesce Trim Automation preference setting, changing a track to Trim Off can coalesce Trim automation on that track. See
“Coalescing Trim Automation” on page 723.
Automation can be switched from Trim Off to another Automation mode during playback or record.
Read Trim
In Read Trim mode, Volume and Send level
Trim faders are disengaged from the main automation playlist and follow any existing Trim automation. You can move a Trim fader during playback to audition new trim values, but no automation is written. When the Trim fader is released, it returns to any previously written Trim automation values.
If a track does not contain Trim automation, you can move a Trim fader during playback to audition new trim values, but no automation is written. The Trim fader retains its position until the track is removed from Trim mode, or if you manually coalesce the Trim level.
When this mode is enabled, non-trimmable controls (all controls other than track volume and send level) behave as if they are in regular
Read mode—no automation data is written.
Touch Trim
In Touch Trim mode, Volume and Send level
Trim faders are disengaged from the main automation playlist and follow any existing Trim automation. When a Trim fader is touched, writing of Trim automation begins. When the fader is released, writing stops and the fader returns to any previously written Trim automation values.
The rate of the fader’s return to previous trim values is determined by the AutoMatch Time specified in the Automation Preferences page.
See “AutoMatch Time” on page 697 for more in-
formation.
When this mode is enabled, non-trimmable controls (all controls other than track volume and send level) behave as if they are in regular
Touch mode—they follow the previously written automation until touched. When they are touched, their absolute positions are written until the control is released or until playback stops.
Latch Trim
In Latch Trim mode, Volume and Send level
Trim faders are disengaged from the main automation playlist and follow any existing Trim automation. When a Trim fader is touched, writing of Trim automation begins. Writing of Trim automation continues until playback stops, or until you punch out of writing automation.
Chapter 30: Automation 695
When this mode is enabled, non-trimmable controls (all controls other than track volume and send level) behave as if they are in regular
Latch mode—they follow the previously written automation until touched. When they are touched, their absolute positions are written until playback is stopped.
Touch/Latch Trim
In Touch/Latch Trim mode, Volume and Send level faders are disengaged from the main automation playlist and follow any existing Trim automation. The main Volume Trim fader follows
Touch Trim behavior, and Send level Trim faders follow Latch Trim behavior.
Write Trim
In Write Trim mode, as soon as playback begins, writing of Trim automation begins for Volume and Send levels, and continues until playback stops, or until you punch out of writing automation.
When Write Trim mode is enabled, non-trimmable controls (all controls other than track volume and send level) are not in Write mode, but behave as if they are in regular Touch mode
(no automation is written unless a control is touched). This is to prevent the controls from overwriting all of their automation data on every pass in Write Trim mode.
The “After Write Pass, Switch To” preference affects Write Trim mode. After an automation pass in Write/Trim mode, tracks automatically switch to the Trim mode version of the setting specified by this preference.
Automation Preferences
Pro Tools gives you several options for controlling the writing and playback of automation data.
To display Automation preferences:
â– Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
Mixing Preferences page
For detailed information on Pro Tools
Automation preferences, see “Mixing Preferences” on page 73.
Send Levels and Trim Mode
(Pro Tools HD Only)
You can set Pro Tools to exclude Send levels from Trim mode, so that only the Main Volume goes into Trim when a track is put into Trim mode. This gives you more flexibility in setting
Send levels while in Trim mode.
696 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To exclude Send levels from Trim mode:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Under Automation, deselect Include Sends in
Trim Mode.
Any uncoalesced automation on a Send will still coalesce when the other automation on its track is coalesced, even if “Include Sends in Trim Mode” is deselected.
3 Click OK.
Smoothing
When you perform automation moves (including Trim moves) with a continuous control,
Pro Tools records the move as a series of very small steps, resulting in a staircase pattern with many breakpoints. Smoothing intelligently resolves this staircase pattern into a single, smooth ramp from one breakpoint to the next.
(Smoothing does not apply to switched controls such as mutes or plug-in bypasses.) With smoothing enabled, the resulting automation data is often a more accurate representation of actual automation moves.
AutoMatch Time
AutoMatch Time is the amount of time it takes for a fader to return (by ramping up or down) to the level of automation still on the track as the automation pass ends. This time value is set in
the Automation Preferences page (see “Automation Preferences” on page 696).
AutoMatch is automatically applied to all Touch mode passes, and can be applied to Latch or
Write passes.
The AutoMatch Time also determines the rate at which delta values written with the Trim will return to 0 dB (delta value of zero).
The AutoMatch feature works with continuous controls (such as Volume or Pan) by ramping their values back to previously automated levels.
There are some stepped controls (for example, the EQ type in the 1-band EQ plug-in) that provide more than two discrete steps over their operational range. AutoMatch has no effect on these controls.
Thinning
Thinning automatically reduces the overall number of breakpoints in an automation playlist (including Trim playlists) in order to improve system performance. The amount of thinning applied is determined by the Degree of Thinning setting in the Automation Preferences page. When using high amounts of thinning, the resulting automation may differ noticeably from the original automation moves. Thinning only applies to audio tracks, and does not affect
MIDI tracks. For instructions, see “Thinning
Automation Follows Edit Option
When disabled, automation events are not affected by edits to audio or MIDI notes. When enabled, automation events are affected by edits to audio or MIDI notes.
To disable Automation Follows Edit:
â– Choose Options > Automation Follows Edit.
Chapter 30: Automation 697
Automation Safe
Outputs, sends, and plug-ins can be placed in
Automation Safe mode. In Automation Safe mode, any automation associated with an Output window (such as track or send level, panning, or mute), or plug-in on that track, is protected from being overwritten while automating other items on that track.
Viewing Automation
Pro Tools creates a separate playlist in the Edit window for each type of automation in a track, including a playlist for each type of Trim automation. This data can be viewed and edited in the same way as audio and MIDI data.
You can easily toggle between different
Track Views. See “Changing Track Views” on page 337.
To display an automation playlist:
â–
Click the Track View selector and select from the pop-up menu the automation type you want to view.
Automation Safe enabled
Automation Safe enabled send
Automation Safe mode suspends automation recording for the selected track output, send, or plug-in that is enabled. You can also suspend automation recording and playback session-
wide from the Automation window. See “Enabling and Suspending Automation” on page 708.
Displaying a standard automation playlist
Displaying Trim automation playlists
Volume
Trim data
Trim automation playlist
698 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Displaying Trim Automation Along with the Main Playlist
(Pro Tools HD Only)
The appearance of Trim automation depends on
how it is set to be coalesced. See “Coalescing
If automation is not set to coalesce after every automation pass, you can display Trim automation data along with the main Volume or Send level automation data in the same automation view. This Trim automation display cannot be directly edited.
To display the Trim automation playlist along with main automation playlist on tracks:
â–
Choose View > Automation > Trim Playlist.
Displaying the Composite
Automation Playlist
(Pro Tools HD Only)
If automation is not set to coalesce after every automation pass, you can display a composite automation playlist that shows the contribution of the Trim automation to the main Volume or
Send Level automation data. This composite playlist display cannot be directly edited.
The composite playlist is shown in both the main automation playlist and the Trim automation playlist.
To display the composite playlist:
â– Choose View > Automation > Composite
Playlist.
Volume data
Volume
Trim data
Display of Trim automation in a main Volume playlist
Composite playlist
Volume
Trim data
Volume data
Display of Trim automation and the composite playlist in a main Volume playlist
AutoMatch Indicators
There are triangular AutoMatch indicators at the bottom left of each channel strip in the Mix window. When lit, these indicate the direction the fader will automatically move when AutoMatching.
AutoMatch indicator
Triangular AutoMatch indicators on a channel strip
Chapter 30: Automation 699
Writing Automation
You can write automation for all automatable controls by moving those controls during playback.
To write automation on tracks:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Make sure the automation type is write-enabled.
Automation window
3 In the Mix or Edit window, click the Automation Mode selector on each of the tracks you want to automate, and set the Automation mode. For the initial automation pass, choose
Write mode.
After the first automation pass, you can write additional automation to the track without completely erasing the previous pass by choosing Touch mode or Latch mode. These modes add new automation only when you actually
move a control. (See “Automation Modes” on page 692.)
To write additional automation to a previous pass:
1 Enable Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
2 In the Edit window, make a selection or place the cursor in the location where you want to start writing automation.
3 In the Mix or Edit window, click the Automation Mode selector on each of the tracks you want to automate, and set the Automation mode to Touch or Latch mode.
4 Click Play to begin writing automation.
5 Move the controls you want to automate.
6 When you have finished, click Stop.
If you write automation in Touch mode with Loop Playback enabled, writing of automation will automatically stop at the end of the looped selection. At the beginning of each successive loop, you can then touch or move the control again to write new data.
Setting the Automation mode of a track
4 Click Play to begin writing automation.
5 Move the controls you want to automate.
6 When you have finished, click Stop.
700 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Storing an Initial Control Position
When you create a new audio, Auxiliary Input,
VCA Master, MIDI, or Instrument track, it is automatically placed in Read mode. Even though the track is in Read mode, you can set the initial position of any automatable control, and it is saved with your session.
In this initial state, only a single automation breakpoint appears at the beginning of each automation playlist. If you move the control without writing automation, this breakpoint will move to the new value.
You can permanently store the initial position of an automatable control by doing any of the following:
• Place the track in Write mode and press Play to write a few seconds of automation data to the track
• Manually place a breakpoint on the automation playlist somewhere after the initial break-
point. (See “Graphical Editing of Automation
Data” on page 714 for more information.)
Automating Switched Controls
When automating switched controls (such as mutes, plug-in bypasses, or switched controls on plug-ins) Pro Tool s treats them as touch sensitive controls. Automation data is written for as long as the switch or button for that control is pressed or touched.
For example, if you have just written a series of mute on/off states on a track in quick succession, the manual method for clearing this automation data would require you to move to the
Edit window, choose automation playlist for
Mute, select the mute automation data, and delete it. In Pro Tools, this can be done automatically.
To automate a switched control (such as the Mute button):
1 Perform another automation pass on the track.
2 When you reach the location of the mute state you want to remove, press and hold down the switched control (such as the Mute button).
When playback gets to the first muted section, the Mute button becomes highlighted.
3 As long as the button is held down, Pro Tools overwrites the underlying data on the track with the current state of the switch (on or off) until playback is stopped.
Automating Switched Controls in Touch
Mode
When automating switched controls (including mute, plug-in bypass, and any switched control on a plug-in) in Touch mode, these controls will latch in their current state after they are touched.
However, to preserve any automation for that switched control later in the timeline, this latched behavior ends if either of the following occurs:
• If an existing automation breakpoint is encountered, Pro Tools stops writing automation at that point.
• If you stop playback or punch out of writing automation before reaching an existing automation breakpoint, Pro Tools AutoMatches to the underlying automation state.
Chapter 30: Automation 701
Setting Switched Controls for
Momentary Behavior
In some cases, such as when overwriting or extending Mute automation, you may want to momentarily write automation for a control by holding it down, and not have the control latch.
To set switched controls for momentary behavior:
1 Choose Options > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Deselect Latching Behavior for Switch Controls in Touch.
3 Click OK to close the Preferences window.
Automating Sends
Pro Tools provides automation of send level, send mute, and send pan (for stereo and multichannel sends only). This makes it easy to control effect levels and placement during mixdown with great precision.
Send level and mute can also be configured to follow groups.
To automate a send level, mute or pan:
1 In the Automation window, make sure the automation type is write-enabled (send level, send mute, send pan).
2 In the Mix or Edit window, set the Automation mode for each track containing sends you want to automate. For each track, click the Automation Mode selector and set the Automation mode. For the initial automation pass, choose
Write mode.
3 If sends are not currently visible on your tracks, select View > Mix Window (or Edit Window) > Sends A–E (or Sends F–J).
4 To display send controls, do one of the following:
• Click the send to open the Output window for the send that you want to automate.
– or –
• Choose View > Sends A–E (or Sends F–J) and select one of the individual views (such as Send A).
5 Click Play to begin writing automation.
6 Move the controls you want to automate.
7 When you have finished, click Stop.
Send level, mute, and pan can also be con-
figured to follow Mix Groups. See “Automation Preferences” on page 696 for infor-
mation.
Copying Track Automation to Sends
(Pro Tools HD Only)
There may be times where you want a track’s send settings or automation to mirror the settings or automation in the track itself, for example, when creating a headphone mix based on the main mix, or when an effect level needs to follow the levels in a main mix. You can copy the current settings or the entire automation playlist for the selected controls to the corresponding playlist for the send.
702 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To copy a track’s settings or automation to one of its sends:
1 Select the tracks you want to edit by clicking on the track names to highlight them.
2 Choose Edit > Automation > Copy to Send.
Automating Plug-ins
You can automate changes to virtually all plugin controls. Automating a plug-in is slightly different from other automation procedures, because you must enable individual plug-in controls for automation.
To enable plug-in controls for automation:
1 Open the Plug-in window for the plug-in you want to automate.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click the Automation Enable button in the
Plug-in window.
Copy To Send dialog
3 In the Copy to Send dialog, do any of the following:
• Select Current Value to copy the current settings of the corresponding controls.
• Select Automation to copy the entire automation playlist for the corresponding controls.
4 Select the controls you want to copy.
5 Select the sends to which to copy the automation, and click OK.
When overwriting automation, Pro Tools presents a confirmation dialog. To suppress this dialog, press Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac) while clicking OK.
You can undo the results of the Copy to Send command.
Automation Enable button
Accessing the Plug-in Automation dialog
– or –
• Control-Alt-Start-click (Windows) or Command-Option-Control-click the Track View selector in the Edit window.
3 In the plug-in automation dialog, choose the controls to automate and click Add. If there are multiple plug-ins on the same track, you can select from among them by clicking their buttons in the Inserts section of this dialog.
Plug-in automation dialog
4 Click OK to close the Plug-in Automation dialog.
Chapter 30: Automation 703
To automate a plug-in:
1 In the Plug-in Automation Enable window, make sure plug-in automation is enabled.
2 In the Mix or Edit window, for each track containing plug-ins you want to automate, click the
Automation Mode selector and set the Automation mode. For the initial automation pass, choose Write mode.
3 Click Play to begin writing automation, and move the controls you want to automate.
4 When you have finished, click Stop.
Enabling Automation for Individual
Plug-in Parameters
You can enable individual plug-in controls directly from the Plug-in window.
To enable a plug-in parameter from the plug-in window:
1 Make sure the plug-in window is open for the plug-in you want to automate.
2 Control-Alt-Start-click (Windows) or Command-Option-Control-click (Mac) the control for the parameter.
Enabling Automation for All Plug-in
Parameters
To enable all plug-in parameters:
1 Make sure the plug-in window is open for the plug-in you want to automate.
2 Control+Alt+Start-click (Windows) or Command+Option+Control-click (Mac) on the Auto button at the top of the plug-in window.
Automatically Enabling Plug-ins for
Automation
You can set Pro Tools to automatically enable all controls of a plug-in for automation when you first add the plug-in to your session.
To automatically enable all plug-in controls for automation:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Select “Plug-in Controls Default to Auto-Enabled.”
3 Click OK to close the Preferences window.
Record Safing Plug-in Automation
You can protect plug-in automation from being overwritten by using Automation Safe mode.
To enable plug-in safe mode:
1 Open a plug-in.
2 Click the Safe button so that it is highlighted.
Safe enabled
Enabling plug-in automation for individual parameters
Automation Safe enabled plug-in
704 Pro Tools Reference Guide
AutoMatching Controls
(Pro Tools HD Only)
AutoMatch button
AutoMatch button in the Automation window
AutoMatching All Controls
You can AutoMatch all currently writing controls to their existing automation levels.
To AutoMatch all currently writing controls:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Make sure the automation types you want to
AutoMatch are write-enabled.
3 Start playback.
4 When you reach a point in the track where you want to return control to their previously written values, click the AutoMatch button in the Automation window.
All currently writing controls stop writing automation and return to any previously written values according to the AutoMatch Time setting in the Mixing preferences.
AutoMatching Individual Tracks
You can invoke AutoMatch on individual tracks. All controls currently writing automation on the track stop writing and return to existing automation levels.
To AutoMatch all controls on a track:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the Automation Mode selector on the track.
AutoMatching Individual Automation
Types
You can invoke AutoMatch on individual automation types across a session.
To AutoMatch all controls of one automation type:
â– In the Automation window, Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Mac) the button for the automation type (Volume, Pan, Mute,
Plug-in, Send level, Send pan, or Send mute).
AutoMatching Individual Controls
(D-Control and D-Command Only)
On ICON worksurfaces, you can invoke AutoMatch on individual controls or control types on single channels.
To AutoMatch all controls of a type on a channel:
â– Hold Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) and press any of the following in the Channel
Strip Mode controls for the track whose controls you want to AutoMatch:
• Inserts
• Sends
• Pan
• Dyn (D-Control only)
• EQ (D-Control only)
Chapter 30: Automation 705
To AutoMatch a pan control or the controls for an individual insert or send:
1 Press the switch in the Channel Strip Mode controls to display the Pan controls or the top level of Inserts or Sends for the channel.
2 Hold Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) and press the Rotary Encoder Select switch for the control you want to AutoMatch:
• For Sends, the Send level, pan, and mute will AutoMatch.
• For Inserts, all automated controls will AutoMatch.
• For Pan, all pan sliders on the channel will
AutoMatch.
To AutoMatch all controls for a plug-in displayed in the Dynamics or EQ section:
â–
Hold Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) and press the Auto switch in the Dyn or EQ section of the console.
4 In the Automation window, make sure the controls you want to automate are write-enabled.
5 Click the Automation Mode selector on the track where you want to write automation and do one of the following:
• Choose Latch mode to allow priming of all automation-enabled controls on the track.
– or –
• Choose Touch/Latch mode to leave the main Volume fader in Touch mode and allow priming of all other automation-enabled controls.
6 While the transport is stopped, touch or move the controls you want to start writing at the beginning of the automation pass. When at least one control on a track is primed, the Automation Mode selector displays in bold.
Automation
Mode selector
Priming Controls for Writing
Automation in Latch Mode
(Pro Tools HD Only)
If a track is in Latch or Touch/Latch automation mode, you can prime individual controls for writing automation while the transport is stopped. This Latch Prime capability lets you prepare for an automation pass before starting playback.
To prime controls for writing automation in Latch mode while the transport is stopped:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Under Automation, select Allow Latch Prime in Stop.
3 Click OK to close the Preferences window.
Automation mode indicator before (left) and after priming of latched controls (right)
7 Start playback. All primed controls begin writing automation at their primed values.
706 Pro Tools Reference Guide
8 Stop playback to finish the automation pass.
All tracks are taken out of their Latch Prime state.
You can use the Write to Punch command at the end of your automation pass to write the current value back to the start of the pass.
Taking Tracks and Controls Out of Latch
Prime
You can take individual tracks or automation types out of their Latch Prime state before or during an automation pass.
â—† When you take a track or automation type out of Latch Prime before starting playback, it stays in Latch mode but the corresponding controls are not primed to write when playback starts.
â—† When you take a track or automation type out of Latch Prime during an automation pass, the corresponding controls AutoMatch to their currently written values.
â—† If you AutoMatch a control that is in a Latch
Prime state, the control will no longer be primed.
To take a track out of Latch Prime:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the Automation Mode selector on the track.
The selector button unbolds to indicate that the track is no longer primed.
To take all tracks out of Latch Prime, do one of the following:
â– Alt-Control-click (Windows) or Option-Command-click (Mac) the Automation Mode selector on a track.
– or –
â– Click the AutoMatch button in the Automation window.
AutoMatch button
AutoMatch button in the Automation window
To take all selected tracks out of Latch Prime, do one of the following:
â–
Alt-Control-Shift-click (Windows) or Option-
Command-Shift-click (Mac) the Automation
Mode selector on a track.
– or –
â–
Alt-Shift-click (Windows) Option-Shift-click
(Mac) the AutoMatch button in the Automation window.
Chapter 30: Automation 707
To take an automation type out of Latch Prime on all tracks, do one of the following:
â– In the Automation window, Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Mac) the button for the automation type (Volume, Pan, Mute,
Plug-in, Send level, Send pan, or Send mute).
5 Issue a Back and Play command, roll back the external machine to before the punch in point, or enable pre-roll.
6 Start playback. When the transport reaches the punch-in point, automation writing begins.
Automation type buttons
Automation types in the Automation window
Rolling Through Automation Punch
Points in Latch Prime
After you prime controls for writing automation while the transport is stopped, you can set
Pro Tools to automatically punch in at that point after issuing a back and play command, or after rolling back and locking to time code.
To set Pro Tools to automatically punch in automation writing on a track:
1 Locate the cursor where you want to punch in automation.
2 Prime controls for writing while the transport
is stopped. (See “Priming Controls for Writing
Automation in Latch Mode” on page 706.)
3 In the Automation window, click the AutoJoin button.
4 In the Automation window, click the Capture button and then click the Punch Capture button. The AutoJoin marker (a vertical red line) appears on-screen at the punch point.
708 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Enabling and Suspending
Automation
From the Automation window, you can enable or suspend writing for the following types of automation across all tracks:
• Volume
• Volume trim
• Pan
• Mute
• Plug-in
• Send level
• Send level trim
• Send pan
• Send mute
Automation can be suspended or enabled during playback (without having to stop the Transport).
Suspending Automation on All Tracks
To suspend automation on all tracks:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Do one of the following:
• To suspend writing of all automation on all tracks, click the Auto Suspend button.
– or –
• To suspend writing of a specific type of automation on all tracks, click the button for that automation type (volume, mute, pan, plug-in, send level, send mute, or send pan).
Automation window
To suspend Trim automation on all tracks
(Pro Tools HD only):
â– In the Automation window, Command-click
(Mac) or Control-click (Windows) the Suspend button.
Suspending Automation for Individual
Controls
You can suspend automation for one or more controls. When a control is suspended, its control name is italicized in the Track View selector.
Suspending automation from the Edit window obeys Edit groups. To suppress grouped behavior, hold Start (Windows) or Control
(Mac) while suspending a control.
To suspend automation for individual controls on a track:
1 In the Edit window, set the Track View selector to show the automation playlist for the control you want to suspend.
2 Do one of the following:
• To suspend writing and playback of automation for only the displayed control,
Control-click (Windows) or Commandclick (Mac) the control name in the Track
View selector.
• To suspend writing and playback of automation for all controls, Control-Shift-click
(Windows) or Command-Shift-click (Mac) the name of any control in the Track View selector.
• To suspend writing and playback of automation for a specific control on all tracks,
Control-Alt-click (Windows) or Command-
Option-click (Mac) the name of the control in the Track View selector.
Suspending Trim automation
The Suspend button highlights yellow to indicate that Trim automation is suspended.
Chapter 30: Automation 709
To suspend Trim automation for individual controls on a track (Pro Tools HD only):
1 In the Edit window, set the Track View selector to show the automation playlist for the Trim control you want to suspend (Volume Trim or
Send level Trim).
2 Do one of the following:
• To suspend only the displayed Trim control on a single track, Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac) the control name in the Track View selector.
– or –
• To suspend the displayed Trim control on all tracks, Control-Alt-click (Windows) or
Command-Option-click (Mac) the control name in the Track View selector.
Automation Window Buttons
â—† When an automation type is writing automation on any track in the session, the corresponding button in the Automation window displays bold red text.
â—† When an automation type is enabled but is not writing anywhere in the session, the corresponding button in the Automation window displays normal red text.
Writing
Enabled
Not Enabled
Viewing Automation Enable
Status
Track Automation Mode Selectors
â—† When a track is enabled for automation but not writing automation, the Automation mode selector shows the mode in normal red text.
â—† When any control on a track is writing automation, the Automation mode selector shows the mode in bold red text.
Automation Mode selector showing enabled state (left) and writing state (right)
Automation window showing possible automation states
Automation Enable Guidelines
The following rules determine whether automation is enabled for a track:
â—† Although Pro Tools shows a single Automation mode for each track, all automatable controls associated with that track are not necessarily in the same Automation mode.
â—† If automation is globally suspended in the Automation window, all automatable controls behave as if they were in Off mode, regardless of the track’s current Automation mode.
â—† If automation for a control is suspended by
Control-clicking (Windows) or Command-clicking (Mac) its name in the Track View selector, that control behaves as if it were in Off mode, regardless of the track’s current Automation mode.
â—† If automation for a control is suspended in the Automation window, that control behaves as if it is in Read mode when the track is in a recordable Automation mode (Touch, Latch, or
Write mode).
710 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Deleting Automation
Automation data takes the form of a line graph with editable breakpoints. The easiest way to remove automation in a track or selection is to manually delete breakpoints from the automation playlist.
Removing data in this manner is different from using the Cut command, which creates anchor breakpoints at the boundaries of the remaining
data. For details, see “Cutting, Copying, and
Pasting Automation” on page 717 .
To remove automation data, display the automation playlist you want to edit by selecting it from the Track View selector, and do one of the following:
To remove a single breakpoint:
â– With the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool, Altclick (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the breakpoint.
To remove several breakpoints at once:
â–
Use the Selector tool to select a range that contains the breakpoints, and press Backspace
(Windows) or Delete (Mac).
To remove all automation data of the displayed type:
â– Click with the Selector tool in the track and choose Edit > Select All, then press Backspace
(Windows) or Delete (Mac).
To remove all automation for all automation playlists on a track:
1 Use the Selector tool to select a range of data to be removed.
2 Press Start+Backspace (Windows) or Control+Delete (Mac).
All automation data within the selection is removed for all automation playlists on that track, regardless of whether automation is write-enabled for those controls.
Clearing Trim Automation
(Pro Tools HD Only)
If Trim automation has not been coalesced on a track, you can clear it. When you clear Trim automation, automation breakpoints on all Trim playlists are deleted and all Trim faders are reset to zero.
To clear Trim automation:
1 Select the track where you want to clear the
Trim automation.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Track > Clear Trim Automation.
– or –
• Right-click the track name and choose
Clear Trim Automation from the pop-up menu.
Thinning Automation
Pro Tools writes a maximum density of automation data during an automation pass in the form of breakpoints. Since Pro Tools creates ramps between breakpoints, it may not need all of the captured points to create a sonically accurate representation of the automation moves that you have made. Each breakpoint takes up space in memory allocated for automation, so thinning data can maximize system efficiency and performance.
Pro Tools provides two different ways to thin automation data and remove unneeded breakpoints: the Smooth and Thin Data After Pass option and the Thin Automation command.
Chapter 30: Automation 711
Using Smooth and Thin Data After Pass
When this option is selected in the Mixing Preferences page, Pro Tools automatically thins the automation breakpoint data after each automation pass.
3 Choose Edit > Automation > Thin
(Pro Tools HD) or Edit > Thin Automation
(Pro Tools LE) to thin the selected automation by the amount you have selected in the Mixing
Preferences page.
The Smooth and Thin Data After Pass Option
In the default settings for new sessions, the
Smooth and Thin Data After Pass option is selected, with the “Some” setting chosen. In most cases, this setting yields optimum performance while providing an accurate reproduction of your automation moves.
If you choose None, Pro Tools writes the maximum possible number of breakpoints. You can still perform thinning at any time with the Thin command. For more information on smoothing
automation data, see “Smoothing” on page 697.
Using the Thin Automation Command
The Thin Automation command lets you selectively thin areas in a track where automation data is too dense. You can use the Undo command to audition the results of thinning (comparing thinning and not thinning) before you apply it permanently.
To use the Thin Automation command:
1 In the Edit window, click the Track View selector to display the automation type you want to thin.
2 With the Selector tool, highlight the automation data you want to thin. To thin all automation of the selected type in the track, click with the Selector tool in the track and choose the Select All command.
Drawing Automation
Use the Pencil tool to create automation events for audio and MIDI tracks by drawing in any automation or MIDI controller playlist, including
Trim automation if it has not been coalesced.
The Pencil tool can be set to draw a series of automation events with the following shapes:
Pencil tool shapes available for automation
Choosing a Pencil tool shape
Free Hand Draws freely according to the movement of the mouse. In audio tracks, the shape has the number of breakpoints needed to smoothly interpolate and reproduce the automation shape. In MIDI tracks, the shape is reproduced as a series of steps, according to the resolution setting in the MIDI Preferences page.
Line Draws a straight line. In audio tracks, the line has a single breakpoint at either end. In
MIDI tracks, the controller value changes in steps according to the resolution setting in the
MIDI Preferences page.
712 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Triangle Draws a sawtooth pattern that repeats at a rate based on the current Grid value. In audio tracks, the pattern has a single breakpoint at each extreme. In MIDI tracks, the controller value changes in steps according to the resolution setting in the MIDI Preferences page. Amplitude is controlled by vertical movement of the Pencil tool.
Square Draws a square pattern that repeats at a rate based on the current Grid value. Amplitude is controlled by vertical movement of the Pencil tool.
Random Draws a random pattern of levels that change at a rate based on the current Grid value.
Amplitude is controlled by vertical movement of the Pencil tool.
Using Pencil Tool Shapes
You can draw automation for audio as well as
MIDI tracks. For example, use the Triangle pattern to control continuous functions, or the
Square pattern to control switched functions such as Mute or Bypass.
Since the Pencil tool draws these shapes using the current Grid value, you can use it to perform panning in tempo with a music track, or on frame scene changes when working in post production.
For more information on MIDI continuous
controller data, see “Continuous Controller
Resolution of MIDI Controller Data
When using the Pencil tool to draw MIDI automation, the data is drawn as a series of discrete steps. You can control the resolution (or density) of these steps to help manage the amount of MIDI data sent for a given MIDI controller move.
To set the resolution for the Pencil tool:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click MIDI.
2 Enter a value for “Pencil Tool Resolution
When Drawing Controller Data.” The value can range from 1 to 100 milliseconds.
3 Click OK to close the Preferences window.
The illustrations below show the same MIDI controller automation drawn with different
Pencil tool resolution settings.
MIDI Data drawn with resolution of 10 ms
MIDI Data drawn with resolution of 100 ms
For better performance, consider selecting a smaller value for MIDI controls that need higher resolution (such as MIDI volume), and a larger value for controls that may not require a high resolution (such as Pan).
Editing Automation
Pro Tools provides several ways to edit automation data, including Trim automation if it has not been coalesced., for any track in your session. You can edit automation data graphically by adjusting breakpoints in any automation playlist. You can also cut, copy, and paste automation data in the same manner as audio and
MIDI data.
Chapter 30: Automation 713
Graphical Editing of Automation
Data
Automation data takes the form of a line graph with editable breakpoints. By dragging these breakpoints, you can modify the automation data directly in the Edit window. When you drag an automation breakpoint up or down, the change in value is numerically or textually indicated. Dragging an automation breakpoint to the left or right adjusts the timing of the automation event.
Using the Grabber Tools
The Grabber tools lets you create new breakpoints by clicking on the graph line, or adjust existing breakpoints by dragging them. Alt-click
(Windows) or Option-click (Mac) breakpoints with a Grabber tool to remove them.
Using the Trim Tools
The Trim tools let you adjust all selected breakpoints up or down by dragging anywhere within that selection.
Using the Trim tool to move breakpoints
Editing Automation Types
Each automatable control has its own automation playlist, that can be displayed by choosing
it from the Track View selector. “Viewing Automation” on page 698.
Editing Volume Automation
Drag a breakpoint up or down to change the volume (dB value). Drag a breakpoint to the left or right to adjust the timing of the volume change.
Using the Grabber tool to create a new breakpoint
Using the Pencil Tool
The Pencil tool lets you create new breakpoints by clicking once on the graph line. Alt-click
(Windows) or Option-click (Mac) breakpoints with the Pencil tool to remove them.
Track volume automation
Editing Pan Automation
Drag a breakpoint down to pan right, and up to pan left. Drag a breakpoint to the left or right to adjust the timing of the panning moves.
Using the Pencil tool to delete a breakpoint
Track Pan automation
714 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Editing Mute Automation
Drag the breakpoint down to mute a section.
Drag a breakpoint up to unmute the section.
Drag a breakpoint to the left or right to adjust the timing of the mute.
Track mute automation
Editing Stepped Control Automation
Automation for certain controls (such as MIDI controller values or plug-in settings) appears as a stepped pattern on the breakpoint line. Drag a breakpoint up or down to a different step to change to a new control value. Drag a breakpoint to the left or right to adjust the timing of the stepped control change.
Stepped control automation
Editing Automation Breakpoints
To edit automation breakpoints, display the automation playlist for the control you want to edit by selecting it from the Track View selector, then do one of the following:
To create a new breakpoint:
â–
Click with the Pencil tool or any Grabber tool on the line graph.
To edit one breakpoint:
â–
Click an existing point on the line graph with the any Grabber tool and drag it to a new position.
To clear one breakpoint:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) with any Grabber tool.
To edit several breakpoints at once:
â–
Use the Selector tool to select a range in the automation playlist that contains the breakpoints, and do one of the following:
• To move the breakpoints earlier or later in the track, press the Plus key (+) to nudge them later (to the right) or the Minus key
(–) to move them earlier (to the left). The breakpoints move by the current Nudge value.
• To adjust the breakpoint values, click with any of the Trim tools in the selection and drag the breakpoints up or down.
When you use a Trim tool to edit a selection containing breakpoints, new anchor breakpoints are created before and after the selected area. To suppress creation of anchor breakpoints, press Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac) while using a Trim tool.
To edit all breakpoint values in a region:
â–
Click in the region with any of the Trim tools and drag the breakpoints up or down.
Chapter 30: Automation 715
Constrain New Breakpoints to Next or
Previous Automation Value
New automation breakpoints can be constrained and written to the same value as the next or previous breakpoint.
Original automation
After write to next breakpoint
After write to previous breakpoint
Constraining and writing new breakpoints (at Marker 1)
Writing a new breakpoint to the next or previous automation value is accomplished using any Grabber tool, but is not supported with the Smart Tool.
To write a new breakpoint to the next automation value:
â– Press and hold Alt+Shift (Windows) or Option+Shift (Mac) while writing a breakpoint (by clicking with any Grabber tool in a track’s automation playlist).
To write a new breakpoint to the previous automation value:
â–
Press and hold Control+Alt (Windows) or
Command+Option (Mac) while writing a breakpoint (by clicking with any Grabber tool in a track’s automation playlist).
716 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Editing Automation on Stereo and
Multichannel Tracks
Stereo and multichannel tracks display a single automation playlist per track. Only one playlist for volume and mute is available for the stereo or multichannel track.
For multi-mono plug-ins, automation playlists for each individual channel can be displayed and edited when the plug-in is unlinked, and the track is in Expanded Track Display.
Expanded Track View
By default, a single automation playlist is displayed on stereo and multichannel tracks. The playlist occupies the entire height of the track
(similar to mono automation playlists).
Optionally, you can display an expanded view of the track whereby the same automation playlist is displayed across each channel.
Plug-in Automation Playlists on Stereo and
Multichannel Tracks
Some multichannel plug-ins provide a single set of automatable controls for all channels in a track. Other multichannel plug-ins and all multi-mono plug-ins provide a single set of controls for all channels when linked, or discrete controls for each channel when unlinked. Refer to your plug-in guide for more information.
To view and edit the individual playlists of a multimono plug-in:
1 Unlink the plug-in.
2 Select the required playlist from the Track
View selector.
Trimming automation on an active grouped track
To individually edit a automation for a member of a group without affecting the other members, do one of the following:
â–
Press the Start key (Windows) or Control
(Mac) while you perform the edit.
multi-mono plug-in unlinked
Selecting an automation playlist for an unlinked multi-mono plug-in
Editing Automation on Grouped
Tracks
When you edit automation on an audio track that is a member of an active Edit Group, the same type of automation is also edited on all tracks that are part of that group. This occurs even if the playlist for that type of automation is not currently displayed on the other grouped tracks.
Examples
â—† If you create new automation breakpoints on a grouped track (with the Pencil tool or any
Grabber tool), other members of the group have breakpoints placed relative to that track.
â—† If you move automation on a grouped track
(with any of the Trim tools), other members of the group have their breakpoints trimmed relative to that track. This lets you trim entire sections of a mix.
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting
Automation
Cutting automation data is different from deleting it, and yields different results (although both change the existing automation data). Copying automation leaves the original automation data intact.
You delete automation data by selecting a range of breakpoints and pressing Backspace (Win-
dows) or Delete (Mac). See “Deleting Automation” on page 711 for details.
You cut automation data by selecting a range of breakpoints from an automation playlist and selecting the Cut command.
When you cut automation data and when you paste it into a new location, anchor breakpoints are added to the beginning and end points of the data. This is done to preserve the true slope
(of continuous controls, such as Volume faders or pans) or state (of switched or stepped controls, such as Mutes) of the automation data both inside and outside the selection.
Chapter 30: Automation 717
The following illustrations show the difference between cutting and deleting automation data.
In Figure 34, a track is set to display volume au-
tomation, and a range of automation data is selected.
Figure 34. Selecting automation data
If the Cut command is chosen, anchor breakpoints are created at each end of the selection, and the automation slope on either side of the
cut data is preserved, as shown in Figure 35.
Figure 35. After cutting the automation data
If the data is deleted by pressing Backspace
(Windows) or Delete (Mac), the automation data is removed, and automation values span the gap between pre-existing breakpoints, as in
Figure 36. After deleting the automation data
In addition, if cut or copied data is pasted elsewhere in a track, breakpoints are created at the end points of the pasted data to preserve its
“neighboring” (incoming and outgoing) auto-
mation value and slope, as shown in Figure 37.
Figure 37. After pasting the automation data in another location
Editing and Track Views
Audio and MIDI tracks each have a Track View that acts as the main format for purposes of editing. When the main format is displayed, any edits performed on the track apply to all data in the track.
The main view formats are:
• Audio tracks: Blocks and Waveform
• MIDI tracks: Blocks, Regions, and Notes
For example, when an audio track is set to
Waveform or Blocks, cutting, copying and pasting affects the audio data and all types of automation data on that track. If the track is set to show Pan automation, only the Pan data is affected.
When a selection includes multiple tracks, if any of those tracks is in its main view format, all data on all selected tracks is affected.
To edit all automation types on an Auxiliary Input or Master Fader track, do one of the following:
â– Make an Edit selection that includes at least one audio or MIDI track that is displayed in its main format.
– or –
â– Press Control while cutting or copying the automation data.
For additional flexibility, you can use playlists or the Duplicate Track command to work nondestructively on a copy of the edit data.
718 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Tips for Cutting, Copying and Pasting
â—† On audio tracks, when you are in Waveform
View and cut or copy a section of the waveform, any automation data associated with the waveform is also cut or copied.
â—† On audio tracks, when you are in Waveform
View and cut audio data from a track also containing automation data, breakpoints are automatically created at the boundaries of the remaining automation data.
â—† On audio tracks, pasting waveform data also pastes any associated automation data.
â—† On Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, or Instrument tracks, only the displayed automation data is cut or copied. To cut or copy all automation data on these types of tracks, press Control while cutting or copying.
â—† In tracks where an automation playlist contains no data (when there is only a single breakpoint at the very beginning of the track), if you cut data, no new breakpoints are created.
â—† In cases where regions overlap (such as when moving regions in Slip mode) and an overlapping region is removed, any overlapped automation breakpoints are lost.
â—† If cut or copied data contains a type of automation not currently on the target track,
Pro Tools prompts you before allowing you to paste the data.
â—† Cut or copied automation data for plug-ins or sends that do not exist on the target track is ignored when pasted.
Cut, Copy, Clear, and Paste Special
Commands
The four “special” commands (Cut Special,
Copy Special, Paste Special, and Clear Special) simplify the tasks involved with moving or clearing different types of automation data and
MIDI controller data between tracks, sends, and plug-ins. These commands let you
• Edit automation and MIDI controller data only (without associated audio or MIDI notes).
• Edit automation and MIDI controller data without having to change Track Views
In addition, the Paste Special command lets you copy one data type to another (for example, Left
T
Pan data into the Right Pan playlist)
You cannot paste MIDI controller data to automation data nor automation to MIDI.
Cut Special
The Cut Special commands lets you cut just automation data from the current selection (without associated audio or MIDI notes) and place it in memory to paste elsewhere, as follows.
Choices include:
All Automation Cuts all automation or MIDI controller data whether it is shown or not.
Pan Automation Cuts only pan automation or
MIDI pan data whether it is shown or not.
Plug-in Automation Cuts only the plug-in automation that it is shown.
Copy Special
The Copy Special commands let you copy just automation data from the current selection
(without associated audio or MIDI notes) and place a copy of it in memory to paste elsewhere, as follows:
Chapter 30: Automation 719
All Automation Copies all automation or MIDI controller data whether it is shown or not.
Pan Automation Copies only pan automation or
MIDI pan data whether it is shown or not.
Plug-in Automation Copies only the plug-in automation that it is shown.
Paste Special
The Paste Special commands let you paste automation data into another region (without affecting associated audio or MIDI notes) in the following ways:
Merge Lets you add the pasted data to any existing automation data of the same type in the destination selection. This can be useful for consolidating MIDI data from several tracks into a single MIDI track. For example, you like the pitch bend on the synth trombones and want to apply it to the synth guitar.
Repeat to Fill Selection Pastes multiple iterations of the automation data to the entire selection range. If you select an area that is not an exact multiple of the copied region size, the remaining selection area is filled with a trimmed version of the original selection. This lets you easily create drum loops and other repetitive effects. Before the data is pasted, Pro Tools prompts you to specify a crossfade to smooth transitions between regions.
To Current Automation Type Pastes the automation data or MIDI controller data from the clipboard to the selection as current automation type or MIDI controller. This lets you copy automation from any type to any other type. For example, you can copy a Left Pan automation to
Plug-in automation. Or, you can copy MIDI volume data and paste it to MIDI pan.
Clear Special
The Clear Special commands let you clear just automation data from the current region, as follows:
All Automation Clears all automation or MIDI controller data whether it is shown or not.
Pan Automation Clears only pan automation or
MIDI pan whether it is shown or not.
Plug-in Automation Clears only the plug-in automation that it is shown.
Special Paste Function for Automation
Data
Normally, when you copy and paste automation data, it is pasted in an automation playlist of the exact same type (for example, Left Pan data is pasted into the Left Pan playlist).
However, there may be times when you want to paste from one data type to another (for example, Left Pan data into the Right Pan playlist).
The Special Paste function lets you copy one data type to another.
If you want to paste automation or MIDI controller data only (without its associated audio or
MIDI notes), use the Paste Special command
(see “Paste Special” on page 720).
720 Pro Tools Reference Guide
For this special paste mode to function, the following must be true:
• Every track selected for pasting must be currently displayed as automation data.
– and –
• There must be only one automation playlist on the Clipboard for each target track. (The
Special Paste function cannot copy multiple automation playlists for each track.)
You cannot interchange automation data between audio and MIDI tracks, or between continuous controls (such as faders or pans) and switched or stepped controls (such as mute or MIDI controllers).
To paste data into a different automation playlist:
â– Press the Start key (Windows) or Control
(Mac) when choosing Edit > Paste.
Glide Automation
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
The Glide Automation commands let you manually create an automation transition (or glide) from an existing automation value to a new one, over a selected area.
When gliding multiple parameters at the same time, such as with the Surround Panner or plug-ins, use the Edit > Automation >
Glide to All Enabled option.
To apply a Glide Automation to the current automation parameter type:
1 In the Automation window, make sure the automation type is write-enabled.
2 Click the Track View selector to choose the automation type you want to automate.
3 Drag with the Selector tool in the track to select the area you want to write the glide to.
4 Change the automation parameter to the value you want at the end of the selection. For example, to glide automation volume to –Infinity, move the Volume fader to –Infinity.
5 Choose Edit > Automation > Glide to Current.
You can also press Alt+Forward Slash (/)
(Windows) or Option+Forward Slash (/)
(Mac).
To do a Glide Automation to all current enabled parameters:
1 In the Automation window, make sure the automation types are write-enabled.
2 In each track you want to automate, click the
Track View selector and select from the pop-up menu the automation type you want to automate.
3 With the Selector tool, click and drag horizontally to include all the tracks you want to automate in a selection (drag vertically to define the time range).
4 In each track you want to automate, change the automation parameter to the value you want at the end of the selection.
5 Choose Edit > Automation > Glide to All Enabled.
You can also press Alt+Shift+Forward Slash
(/) (Windows) or Option+Shift+Forward
Slash (/) (Mac).
Chapter 30: Automation 721
Glide Automation Considerations
When Glide Automation is applied to automation data, it behaves as follows:
• When a selection is made, automation breakpoints are written at the start and end points of the Glide Automation. The automation value at the start of the selection is the start point of the Glide Automation and the end of the selection is the end point of the Glide Automation. The Glide Automation that is created between the two is based on the length of the selection and the end value that is selected.
• If automation breakpoints follow the selection, they are not changed, but the value selected for the end of the selection is written from the end point up until the next breakpoint.
• If no automation breakpoints follow the selection, the value selected for the end of the selection is written to the end of the track.
• If no selection is made, a breakpoint is written to the current location, and the value selected for the Glide Automation is written to the next breakpoint.
Trimming Automation
(Pro Tools HD Only)
If you have already written automation, you can modify automation data for track volume and send levels in real time by using Trim mode.
When a track is trim-enabled, you are not recording absolute fader positions, but relative
changes in the existing automation. See “Trim
Mode” on page 694 for more information.
To enable Trim mode:
â–
In the Mix or Edit window, click the Automation Mode selector of the track where you want to trim automation, and select Trim.
Enabling Trim mode
When a track’s Trim mode is enabled, its Volume and Send Level faders turn yellow, and its
Automation Mode selector is outlined in yellow.
This outline appears solid if the track is trim-enabled, and flashes whenever trimming is occurring on the track’s volume or send levels.
Writing Trim Automation
The writing of Trim automation depends on
how it is set to be coalesced. See “Coalescing
Trim Automation” on page 723. If automation
is not set to coalesce after every automation pass, Trim automation moves are written to a separate Trim playlist.
To trim track Volume or Send levels:
1 In the Automation window, make sure the automation type (Volume or Send level) is writeenabled.
2 Click the Automation Mode selector of the track where you want to write automation and choose the automation mode (Touch, Latch,
Touch/Latch, or Write).
3 Click the Automation Mode selector and choose Trim.
4 Start playback, and adjust the Volume or Send levels.
5 Stop playback to finish the Trim pass.
722 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Coalescing Trim Automation
You can set Pro Tools to commit, or coalesce ,
Trim automation to the main automation playlist by the following methods:
After Every Pass Trim moves are automatically applied when the transport is stopped at the end of an automation pass. Trim automation playlists are cleared, and Trim faders are returned to zero.
On Exiting Trim Mode Trim moves are stored separately in the Trim automation playlist until they are coalesced. Trim automation is automatically coalesced on a track only when you take the track out of Trim mode. You can repeat an automation pass, edit Trim automation manually on any of the Trim playlists, or clear Trim automation before coalescing with this method.
Even when automation is set to coalesce on exiting Trim mode, you can use the Coalesce Trim Automation command to commit Trim moves at any time.
Manually Trim moves are stored separately in the Trim automation playlist until they are coalesced. With this setting, the only way to coalesce Trim moves is with the Coalesce Trim Automation command. You can repeat an automation pass, edit Trim automation manually on any of the Trim playlists, or clear Trim automation before coalescing with this method.
To set the method by which Trim Automation is coalesced:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Under Coalesce Trim Automation, select one of the following:
• After Every Pass
• On Exiting Trim Mode
• Manually
To coalesce Trim automation on a track when exiting Trim mode:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Under Coalesce Trim Automation, select On
Exiting Trim Mode.
3 Click OK to close the Preferences window.
4 Make sure the Pro Tools transport is stopped.
5 On the track where you want to coalesce Trim automation, click the Automation Mode selector and deselect Trim.
The Trim automation is applied to the main automation playlist, Trim automation playlists are cleared, and Trim faders are returned to zero.
If transport is playing and you are writing automation, you cannot directly enter or exit Trim mode. You must AutoMatch before exiting Trim mode. This prevents any abrupt jumps in automation values.
To manually coalesce Trim automation on a track:
1 Select the track where you want to coalesce the Trim automation.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Track > Coalesce Trim Automation.
– or –
• Right-click the track name and choose Coalesce Trim Automation from the pop-up menu.
The Trim automation is applied to the main automation playlist, Trim automation playlists are cleared, and Trim faders are returned to zero.
Chapter 30: Automation 723
Writing Automation to the
Start, End, or All of a Track or
Selection
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Pro Tools lets you write current automation values from any insertion point forward (or backward) to the end (or beginning) of a track or Edit selection in a track, or to an entire track or Edit selection, while performing an automation pass.
Automation Write to Start/End//All buttons
Write Automation to Start, End, and All buttons in the
Automation window
The standard Write Automation to Start, All, or
End commands do not operate when the
Pro Tools transport is stopped. It only affects automation for those parameters that are currently write-enabled and currently writing automation data.
Optionally, Write Automation to Start, All, and
End can be configured to always be applied au-
tomatically. See “Writing Automation to the
Start, End or All of a Track or Selection on Stop” on page 725.
Requirements for Standard Write
Automation Commands
For automation data to be written for a specific parameter, the associated track must be in one of the following Automation modes and meet the following conditions:
Latch Mode The control for the parameter must be changed (touched) during the automation pass.
Touch Mode The control for the parameter must be changed (touched).
Write Mode All controls on that track must be in
Write mode.
This command can be undone.
To write current automation values to the start, end, or all of a track or Edit selection:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Make sure that the automation type is writeenabled.
3 Do one of the following:
• Click in a track at an insertion point.
– or –
• Drag with the Selector tool to select a portion of the track.
4 Click Play to begin playback.
5 Make sure you are actively writing on the appropriate track if you are in Latch or Touch mode.
6 When you reach a point in the track or selection that contains the automation data you want to apply, click the Write Automation to
Start, All, or End button in the Automation window.
724 Pro Tools Reference Guide
7 Stop playback.
The current values of all write-enabled automation at that point are written to the corresponding area of the track/selection.
Write to Start, End or All and Trim Mode
While in Trim mode, it is also possible to write trim delta values for track volume and send levels to the start, end or all of a track or Edit selection.
To write current trim delta values to the start, end, or all of a track or selection:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Make sure the automation type (track volume or send level) is write-enabled.
3 In the Mix or Edit window, click the Automation Mode selector of the track you want to trim automation, and select Trim. The track Volume and Send Level faders turn yellow.
4 Do one of the following:
• Click in a track at an insertion point.
– or –
• Drag with the Selector tool to select a portion of the track.
5 Click Play to begin playback.
6 When you reach a point in the track or selection that contains the trim setting (delta value) you want to apply, click the Write Automation to Start, All, or End button in the Automation window.
7 Stop playback.
The relative changes to the track volume and send levels at that point are written to the corresponding area of the track/selection.
Writing Automation to the Start,
End or All of a Track or Selection on Stop
The Automation window provides options for writing automation on any automation playlist
(including Trim playlists) after a valid automation pass has been performed.
The Write Automation to Start, End or All modes can be configured to disable or remain enabled after a valid automation pass.
See “Requirements for Standard Write Automation Commands” on page 724.
Automation Write On Stop buttons
Write On Stop controls in the Automation window
To configure Write on Stop modes to disable after an automation pass:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Click to enable one of the Write On Stop modes (Start, All, End).
The enabled Write on Stop arrow appears in blue.
To configure Write on Stop modes to remain enabled after an automation pass:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) one of the Write On Stop buttons (Start, All or End) to enable the Write On Stop mode.
The enabled Write on Stop arrow appears in red.
Chapter 30: Automation 725
Writing Automation to the
Next Breakpoint or to the
Punch Point
(Pro Tools HD Only)
While performing an automation pass,
Pro Tools lets you write current automation values from the current insertion point forward to the next automation breakpoint, or back to the punch point (the location in the track where automation writing started).
â—† Write Automation to Next Breakpoint lets you update automation within a track without overwriting automation located earlier or later in the timeline, and without having to define a selection before editing automation.
â—† Write Automation to Punch Point lets you fill back an automation value within a track after finding the right level or setting during an automation pass, without having to go back and repeat the pass.
Like the standard Write Automation to Start,
End and All commands, the Write Automation to Next Breakpoint and Write Automation to
Punch Point commands do not operate when the Pro Tools transport is stopped. They only affect automation for those parameters that are currently write-enabled and currently writing automation data.
Optionally, the Write Automation to Next
Breakpoint and Write Automation to Punch
Point commands can be configured to be applied automatically after a valid automation
pass has been performed. See“Writing Automation to the Next Breakpoint or to the Punch
Write Automation to Next Breakpoint and
Write Automation to Punch Point have the same requirements as Write Automation to
Start, End and All commands. See “Writing
Automation to the Start, End, or All of a
Track or Selection” on page 724.
To write current automation values to the next breakpoint:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Make sure that the automation type is writeenabled.
3 Click in a track to define an insertion point.
4 Click Play to begin playback.
5 Make sure you are actively writing on the appropriate track if you are in Touch, Latch, or
Touch/Latch mode.
726 Pro Tools Reference Guide
6 When you reach a point in the track where you want to apply the current settings, click the
Write Automation to Next Breakpoint button.
6 When you reach a point in the track where you want to apply the current settings, click the
Write Automation to Punch Point button.
Write to Next Breakpoint button
Write to Next Breakpoint on Stop button
Write to Punch Point button
Write to Punch Point on Stop button
Write To Next Breakpoint buttons in the Automation window
7 Stop Playback.
The current values of all controls being written at that point are written up to the next breakpoint.
Write Automation to Next Breakpoint remains enabled after a valid automation pass. Unlike standard Write Automation commands, it cannot be configured to disable after an automation pass.
To write current automation values back to the automation punch point:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Make sure the automation type is write enabled.
3 Click in a track to define an insertion point.
4 Click Play to being playback.
5 Make sure you are actively writing on the appropriate track if you are in Touch, Latch, or
Touch/Latch mode.
Write To Punch Point buttons in the Automation window
The current values of all write-enabled parameters are written back to the point where the first control began writing automation.
Write To Next Breakpoint or Punch
Point and Trim Mode
While in Trim mode, it is also possible to write trim values for track volume and send levels to the next written breakpoint or back to the automation punch-in point.
To write current trim values to the next breakpoint or to the punch point:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Make sure that the automation type (track volume or send level) is write-enabled.
3 In the Mix or Edit window, click the Automation Mode selector and select Trim. The track
Volume and Send Level faders turn yellow.
4 Click in a track to define an insertion point.
Chapter 30: Automation 727
5 Click Play to begin playback.
6 When you reach a point in the track where you want to apply the current trim values, click the Write Automation to Next Breakpoint button in the Automation window.
To write current trim values to the punch point:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Make sure that the automation type (track volume or send level) is write-enabled.
3 In the Mix or Edit window, click the Automation Mode selector and select Trim. The track
Volume and Send Level faders turn yellow.
4 Click in a track to define an insertion point.
5 Click Play to begin playback.
6 When you reach a point in the track where you want to apply the current trim values, click the Write Automation to Punch Point button in the Automation window.
To configure Write Automation to Next Breakpoint on Stop:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Click the Write Automation to Next Breakpoint on Stop button or the Write Automation to Punch Point button.
When this option is enabled, automation writing will be performed automatically forward to the next breakpoint after a valid automation pass has been performed.
To configure Write Automation to Punch Point on
Stop:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Click the Write Automation to Punch Point on Stop button.
When this option is enabled, automation writing will be performed automatically back to the automation punch-in point after a valid automation pass has been performed.
Writing Automation to the Next
Breakpoint or to the Punch Point on Stop
The Automation window provides an option for automatic Write Automation to Next Breakpoint on Stop or Write Automation to Punch
Point on Stop.
Write Automation to Next Breakpoint remains enabled after a valid automation pass. Unlike standard Write Automation commands, it cannot be configured to disable after an automation pass.
728 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Guidelines for “Write To”
Commands
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Using “Write To” Commands
During Playback
You can carry out any of the “Write Automation
To” commands without stopping the Pro Tools transport. On supported control surfaces, the corresponding “Write To” button flashes until you stop the transport.
While the Pro Tools transport is moving, issuing
“Write Automation To” commands affects writing of automation in the following ways:
• Write to Start/Selection Start: Currently writing controls continue writing automation
• Write to All/Selection: Currently writing controls (except controls in Write mode) punch out of writing automation
• Write to End/Selection End: Currently writing controls (except controls in Write mode) punch out of writing automation
• Write to Next Breakpoint: Currently writing controls (except controls in Write mode) punch out of writing automation
• Write to Punch point: Currently writing controls continue writing automation
Applying “Write To” Commands to
Selected Tracks
The “Write Automation To” commands normally apply to all tracks currently writing automation. It is possible to apply these commands to selected tracks only.
To apply any of the “Write Automation To” commands to currently selected tracks:
1 Select the tracks where you want to apply the
“Write To” commands.
2 Alt-Shift-click (Windows) or Option-Shiftclick the corresponding “Write Automation To” button.
Supressing Warnings when Using
“Write To” Commands
When you carry out any of the “Write Automation To” commands (except Write to Next
Breakpoint), Pro Tools posts a dialog warning that automation values will be changed in the session. You can suppress these warnings.
To suppress “Write To” warning dialogs:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click Mixing.
2 Under Automation, select Suppress Automation “Write To” Warnings.
Chapter 30: Automation 729
Overwriting or Extending
Mute Automation
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Pro Tools lets you overwrite or extend an existing mute event in real time, without changing the current mute state.
A mute event can be overwritten when the automation pass begins before the first mute event and ends after the second event. In this case, the current on/off state of the mute is maintained.
Original mute automation
(mute off, mute on, mute off)
Original mute automation
(mute off, mute on, mute off)
Mute on event overwritten
Overwriting a mute automation event
A mute event can be extended when the automation pass begins before an on or off event and stops before the end of the second event.
Mute off event extended (up to automation pass end)
Extending a mute automation event
Mute Overwrite/Extend is supported in Touch and Latch mode, as follows:
Touch Mode Writes the current state as long as the Mute button is held.
Latch Mode Writes the current state until you stop or AutoMatch out.
To overwrite a mute state on one or more tracks:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Make sure Mute is write-enabled.
Mute automation enabled
Mute enable button in the Automation window
730 Pro Tools Reference Guide
3 In the Mix or Edit window, click the Automation Mode selector of the track where you want to overwrite the mute state, and set the Automation mode to Touch or Latch mode.
To overwrite mute states on multiple tracks, set all tracks to the same Automation mode.
4 In each track you want to automate, click the
Track View selector and select mute.
5 Place the cursor before the start of the mute event you want to overwrite.
8 After the end of the second mute event, release the key and the Mute button.
With Touch mode, you have to hold the
Mute button for the duration of the write.
Example: Stop automation pass here, after end of mute event
Stopping automation after the end of a mute event
9 When you have finished the automation pass, click Stop.
Example: Place cursor here, before start of mute event
Placing the cursor before the start of a mute event
6 Begin playback.
7 Press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) and the track Mute button before the start of the mute event you want to overwrite.
To overwrite mute states on multiple tracks, press Alt+Control (Windows) or Option+Command (Mac) and the Mute button on one of the tracks to be automated.
Mute on state overwritten
Example of mute state overwritten
To extend a mute state on a track:
1 Choose Window > Automation.
2 Make sure mute is write-enabled.
3 In the Mix or Edit window, click the Automation Mode selector of the track you want to automate, and select Touch or Latch mode.
To extend mute states on multiple tracks, set all the tracks to the same Automation mode.
4 In each track you want to automate, click the
Track View selector and select mute.
Chapter 30: Automation 731
5 Place the cursor before the start of the mute event you want to extend.
9 When you have finished the automation pass, click Stop.
Example: Place cursor here, before start of mute event
Placing the cursor before the start of a mute event
6 Begin playback.
7 Press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac) and the track Mute button before the start of the mute event you want to extend.
To extend mute states on multiple tracks, press Alt+Control (Windows) or Option+Command (Mac) and the Mute button on the track.
8 Before the end of the second mute event, release the key and the Mute button.
If you extend past the subsequent on or off event, the entire event will be changed.
Example: Stop automation pass here, before end of mute event
Stopping automation before the end of a mute event mute off state extended (up to automation pass end)
Example of mute state extended
Creating Snapshot
Automation
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
Pro Tools lets you write automation data values for multiple parameters in a single step. You can write snapshot automation in two ways:
To a Selection Automation data is written to the
Timeline selection (as well as the Edit selection if linked). Anchor breakpoints are placed just before and after the selection so that data outside the selection is not affected.
To a Cursor Location Automation data is written at the insertion point. After the insertion point, the automation ramps to the next breakpoint value, or if no breakpoints exist, remains at the newly written value for the remainder of the session.
For more information on cutting, copying, and pasting automation data within a session, see
“Writing Automation to the Start, End, or All of a Track or Selection” on page 724.
732 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To write snapshot automation:
1 In the Automation window, make sure that the parameters you want to edit are write-enabled. Deselect any parameters whose automation you want to preserve.
2 In the Edit window, click the Track View selector to show the automation you want to edit.
3 Write a breakpoint in the playlist if none currently exists, as follows:
• Place the cursor in the playlist (or make an
Edit selection), then choose Control+Forward Slash (/) (Windows) or Command+Forward Slash (/) (Mac).
– or –
• Select the Grabber tool and click anywhere in the playlist.
4 Do one of the following:
• Select an area in the track’s playlist (or within multiple tracks) where you want to apply the automation.
– or –
• Place the cursor at an Edit insertion point.
5 Adjust the controls you want to automate.
You can also change a plug-in preset.
6 Choose Edit > Automation and do one of the following:
• To write the current value to only the currently displayed automation parameter, choose Write to Current.
– or –
• To write the current settings for all automation parameters enabled in the Automation window, choose Write to All Enabled.
Adding Snapshot Automation to Empty
Automation Playlists
When you use a Write Automation command on an automation playlist with no previously written automation data, the selected value is written to the entire playlist and not just the selected area.
This is because a playlist with no automation data contains only a single automation breakpoint that corresponds to the current position of the control for the parameter. The position of the breakpoint is updated whenever the parameter value is changed.
If you do not want the Write Automation command to write the selected automation value to the entire playlist, you can:
• Anchor the automation data by placing the cursor at the end of the session (or any other endpoint) and choosing Write to Current.
– or –
• Click with any Grabber tool on each side of the selection.
This lets the Write Automation command write only to the selected area.
Writing Snapshot Automation over
Existing Automation Data
When you move the playback cursor, the automated controls in Pro Tools update to reflect the automation data that is already on the track. To keep the settings you have made for a snapshot, you can suspend automation parameters to prevent them from updating.
Chapter 30: Automation 733
To write snapshot automation over existing data:
1 In the Automation window, make sure that the automation parameters you want to edit are write-enabled. Deselect any parameters whose automation you want to preserve.
2 Adjust the controls for the parameters you want to automate.
3 Click the Automation Mode selector and select Off mode for the tracks where you want to apply the automation.
4 With the Selector, select the range where you want to apply the automation.
5 Choose Edit > Automation and select one of the following from the submenu:
• To write the current value to only the automation parameter currently displayed in the Edit window, choose Write to Current.
– or –
• To write the current settings for all automation parameters enabled in the Automation window, choose Write to All Enabled.
6 Click the Automation Mode selector and select Read mode for the tracks you want to play back with automation.
Capturing Automation and Applying it
Elsewhere
The Write Automation commands can also be used to capture automation states at specific locations in a track and apply them to other locations in the track.
To capture and apply automation:
1 In the Automation window, make sure that the automation parameters you want to edit are write-enabled. Deselect any parameters whose automation you want to preserve.
2 Click the Automation Mode selector and select Read mode for the tracks that have automation you want to capture.
3 Make sure to select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
4 With the Selector tool, select the location where you want to capture automation. All automated controls update to reflect the automation at that location. (If you make a selection, the controls update to reflect the automation at the beginning of the selection.)
5 In each track you want to apply the captured automation, click the track’s Automation Mode selector and set the Automation mode to Off.
6 With the Selector tool, select the location where you want to apply the automation.
7 Enable the automation parameters previously suspended.
8 Choose Edit > Automation and select one of the following from the submenu:
• To write the current value to only the automation parameter currently displayed in the Edit window, choose Write To Current.
– or –
• To write the current settings for all automation parameters enabled in the Automation
Enable window, choose Write To All Enabled.
9 Click the Automation Mode selector and select Read mode for the tracks you want to play back with automation.
734 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Snapshot Automation and
Trimming of Automation Data
Pro Tools lets you use trim values as snapshots and apply the relative changes (delta values) to the selected automation by using the Trim Automation command. This works in much the same way as the Write Automation command, except that it writes delta values instead of absolute values to automation data.
You can use trim values in writing snapshot automation to any automatable parameter.
To create a snapshot of relative changes in automation data:
1 In the Automation window, make sure that the automation parameters you want to edit are write-enabled. Deselect any parameters whose automation you want to preserve.
2 Select the area of the track you want to edit.
All automated controls update to reflect the automation at the beginning of the selection.
3 Move the controls for the parameter up or down by the amount you want to change the data.
4 Choose Edit > Automation and do one of the following:
• To write the current delta value to only the currently displayed automation parameter, choose Trim to Current.
– or –
• To write the current delta value for all automation parameters enabled in the Automation window, choose Trim to All Enabled.
Previewing Automation
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Automation Preview mode lets you audition changes to a mix and compare them to existing automation values without committing them to the automation playlist.
When you put Pro Tools in Automation Preview mode, you can preview values for automationenabled controls on any track that is in a writable automation mode.
While in Automation Preview mode, when you touch or move a control, it isolates the control, disengaging it from its automation playlist. The control stops reading or writing automation, allowing you to freely audition changes.
When you have found a level or state that you want to use, you can then commit or punch the previewed value to the automation playlist for the isolated controls.
â—† If you punch during playback, the automation mode is set to Latch and writing begins at the preview value.
â—† If you punch while the transport is stopped, the automation mode is set to Latch and the control is primed at the preview value.
It is not necessary for the Allow Latch Prime in Stop preference to be enabled for Preview to put a control into Latch Prime.
Chapter 30: Automation 735
Previewing New Automation
Values
To preview a new automation value for a control:
1 Make sure the track where you want to preview the value is enabled for automation
(Touch, Latch, Touch/Latch or their corresponding Trim modes).
2 Make sure the automation type you want to preview is enabled in the Automation window
(Volume, Pan, Mute, Send level, Send pan, Send mute, or Plug-in).
3 Click the Preview button in the Automation window. The button lights green to indicate that
Preview mode is active.
Taking Controls Out of Isolated
State
You can take controls out of their isolated state without leaving Preview mode.
To take all controls on a track out of their isolated state, do one of the following:
â–
Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the automation mode selector on the track.
– or –
â–
Change the track automation mode to Read or Off.
To take all controls of an automation type out of their isolated state:
â– In the Automation window, disable the automation type.
Preview
Punch
Preview
Preview controls in the Automation window
4 To isolate a control, touch or move an automation-enabled control.You can isolate controls during playback or while the transport is stopped.
The Automation Mode indicator on the track lights green to indicate that at least one of its controls is isolated, and the Punch Preview button in the Automation window lights to indicate a preview value is available to punch.
5 Start playback and adjust the isolated control to audition the changes.
Isolating Multiple Controls
In some cases, such as when starting a new mix, you may want to isolate multiple controls at the same time.
To isolate all currently write-enabled controls:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
Preview button.
To isolate all write-enabled controls on all selected tracks:
â– Alt-Shift-click (Windows) or Option-Shift click (Mac) the Preview button.
736 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Suspending Preview Mode
You can temporarily suspend Preview mode, allowing you to toggle between preview values and existing automation.
To suspend Preview mode:
â– Control-click (Windows) or Command-click
(Mac) the Preview button.
Punching Preview Values
After you have isolated a control and auditioned a new value, you can punch (write) the value to the automation playlist.
To punch a preview value to the automation playlist:
â– Click the lit Punch Preview button.
Capturing Automation
(Pro Tools HD Only)
You can capture current automation values at one location in a session and quickly apply them in another location with the Capture and
Punch Capture commands. The Capture command temporarily stores the value of all controls currently writing automation, and the
Punch Capture commands writes those stored values to all enabled automation types.
â—† ICON Systems allow for the capture of up to
48 different values, or snapshots .
â—† All other systems allow for the capture of a single value.
Preview Mode and “Write To”
Commands
The “Write Automation To” commands work as follows with Preview mode:
Before punching preview values The “Write Automation To” commands (except Write to Next
Breakpoint) can be used to extend previewed values. The “Write Automation To” command will only apply to isolated controls. Pro Tools remains in Preview mode.
After punching preview values The “Write Automation To” commands (except Write to Next
Breakpoint) can be used to extend the punched value in the same manner as other automation.
Capture
Punch
Capture
Capture controls in the Automation window
Capturing Automation Values
You can capture the current automation values of actively writing controls.
To capture automation values:
1 Make sure all tracks whose automation values you want to capture are in a write-enabled state
(Write, Touch, Latch, Touch/Latch or Latch).
2 Make sure the automation types you want to capture are enabled in the Automation window
(Volume, Pan, Mute, Send level, Send pan, Send mute, or Plug-in).
Chapter 30: Automation 737
3 Start playback. When you reach a location where you want to capture the current automation states, click the Capture button in the Automation window.
The Punch Capture button in the Automation window lights to indicate a captured value is available to punch.
Punching Captured Automation
Values
After automation values are captured, they can be punched (written) to another location in the track. Any tracks set to Read or Off are unaffected.
â—† If you punch during playback, the automation mode of any track set to Touch is set to
Latch and writing begins at the captured value.
â—† If you punch while the transport is stopped, the automation mode of any track set to Touch is set to Latch and the control is primed at the captured value.
To punch captured automation values:
1 Move to a location where you want to apply the captured automation states. You can do this during playback or while the transport is stopped.
2 Click the Punch Capture button in the Automation window to apply the captured automation states. The captured states are applied to all automation types that are currently enabled in the Automation window.
To capture the automation values of all controls:
â–
When you reach a location where you want to capture the current automation states, Alt-click
(Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the Capture button.
To capture the automation values of all controls on selected tracks only:
â– When you reach a location where you want to capture the current automation states, Alt-Shiftclick (Windows) or Option-Shift-click (Mac) the
Capture button.
Punching Automation Values for
All Controls
You can punch all captured automation values to another location on their corresponding tracks (except those tracks with their Automation Mode set to Off).
To punch the automation values of all controls:
â– When you reach a location where you want to apply the captured automation states, Alt-click
(Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the Punch
Capture button. Any track set to Read or Touch are set to Latch. Any tracks set to Off are unaffected.
To punch the automation values of all controls on selected tracks only:
â– When you reach a location where you want to apply the captured automation states, Alt-Shiftclick (Windows) or Option-Shift-click (Mac) the
Punch Capture button. Any selected tracks set to
Read or Touch are set to Latch. Any selected tracks set to Off are unaffected.
Capturing Automation Values for
All Controls
You can capture the state of all automatable controls (except on tracks with their Automation Mode set to Off) in a session, regardless of whether they are currently writing automation.
738 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Capture and Trim Mode
The Capture and Punch Capture commands work with Trim automation in the same way as regular automation. Pro Tools saves Trim status when capturing, so if you attempt to punch captured Trim values while displaying a non-Trim automation playlist, Pro Tools will automatically apply the values to the corresponding Trim playlist.
Punch Capture and “Write To”
Commands
After issuing a Punch Capture command, the affected controls are writing automation (in Latch mode), so any of the “Write Automation To” commands can be used to extend the punched value in the same manner as other automation.
Capture and Preview Mode
Loading Captured Values into Preview
You can preview and modify captured automation values in Preview mode before punching the values to the automation playlist.
To capture an automation value and use it to preview:
1 Make sure the track where you want to preview the value is enabled for automation
(Touch, Latch, Touch/Latch or their corresponding Trim modes).
2 Make sure the automation type you want to preview is enabled in the Automation window
(Volume, Pan, Mute, Send level, Send pan, Send mute, or Plug-in).
3 Capture an automation value that you want to preview in another location on a track. (See
“Capturing Automation Values” on page 737.)
4 Go to a location where you want to preview the captured automation states, and click the
Preview button in the Automation window.
5 Click the Punch Capture button.
The affected controls are isolated and updated to the captured values. The Punch Preview button in the Automation window lights to indicate the preview value is available to punch.
6 Start playback and adjust the isolated control to audition the changes.
7 When you are ready to punch the preview value to the automation playlist, click the lit
Punch Preview button.
Capturing Values While in Preview
Mode
When you are in Preview mode, you can capture the values of isolated controls and apply them elsewhere on a track. By capturing preview values, you can leave the underlying automation unchanged at the place where you capture.
On ICON systems, you can use preview mode to capture multiple snapshots without changing automation.
To capture a preview value:
1 Activate Preview mode and isolate a control.
(See “Previewing New Automation Values” on page 736).
2 Start playback and adjust the isolated control to audition the changes.
3 When you are ready to capture preview value, click the Capture button in the Automation window.
The Punch Capture button in the Automation window lights to indicate a captured value is available to punch.
Chapter 30: Automation 739
VCA Master Track Automation
(Pro Tools HD Only)
To display the composite playlist on VCA slave tracks:
â– Choose View > Automation > Composite
Playlist.
Displaying Automation on VCA
Master Tracks
The following controls on VCA Master tracks can be automated and have separate automation playlists:
• Volume
• Volume trim
• Mute
These automation playlists follow the same behavior as automation playlists on other track types. For more information on Volume trim
automation, see “Trimming Automation” on page 722.
Displaying the Composite
Automation Playlist on Slave
Tracks
When a track is a VCA slave, you can display a composite automation playlist that shows the contribution of the VCA Master to the Volume or Mute automation data on the slave track.
This composite playlist reflects the actual position of the Volume fader on the slave track.The composite playlist display cannot be directly edited.
Volume automation playlist
Composite playlist
Viewing composite automation on a VCA slave track
Coalescing VCA Automation
There are several ways to commit, or coalesce , the contribution of a selected VCA Master track’s Volume and Mute automation to the automation playlists of its slave tracks.
Clearing the VCA Master
You can use a VCA Master to write grouped automation, coalesce the VCA automation to all of the slave tracks, and clear the automation on the VCA Master. The coalesced tracks will play back exactly as they did when they were in the
VCA group.
To coalesce automation from a VCA Master to all of its slave tracks and retain the VCA Master:
1 Select the VCA Master track whose automation you want to coalesce.
2 Do one of the following:
• Choose Track > Coalesce VCA Master Automation.
– or –
• Right-click the VCA Master track name and choose Coalesce VCA Master Automation from the pop-up menu.
740 Pro Tools Reference Guide
The composite Volume level and Mute state are coalesced to each of the slave tracks. The VCA
Master Volume fader is reset to zero, the VCA
Mute is set to unmuted, and any automation on the VCA Master is cleared.
Deleting the VCA Master
You can temporarily use a VCA Master to write grouped automation, then coalesce the VCA automation to all of the slave tracks by deleting the VCA Master. The coalesced tracks will play back exactly as they did when they were in the
VCA group.
To coalesce automation from a VCA Master to all of its slave tracks and delete the VCA Master track:
1 Select the VCA Master track whose automation you want to coalesce.
2 Choose Track > Delete.
The composite Volume level and Mute state are committed to each of the slave tracks.
This action cannot be undone.
Removing a Slave Track from a VCA
Group
You can remove an individual slave track from a
VCA group, which commits the VCA automation to that track, leaving the VCA Master and the other slave tracks untouched. The coalesced slave track plays back exactly as it did when it was in the VCA group.
To coalesce automation from a VCA Master to an individual slave track:
1 Do one of the following:
• Choose Modify Groups from the Group
List pop-up menu.
• Click the Group ID indicator on the track and choose Modify from the pop-up menu.
• Right-click the Group name in the Group
List and choose Modify from the pop-up menu.
2 In the Groups dialog, select the VCA-controlled group that includes the slave track.
3 In the Groups dialog, click Tracks and remove the slave track from the group.
4 Click OK.
The slave track is removed from the VCA group, and the composite Volume level and Mute state are coalesced to the track.
Chapter 30: Automation 741
Duplicating a Slave Track
When you duplicate a slave track without duplicating its group assignments, the VCA automation is coalesced to the duplicate track. The coalesced duplicate plays back exactly as if it were in the VCA group.
To coalesce automation from a VCA Master to a single slave track by duplicating the track:
1 Select the slave track whose automation you want to coalesce.
2 Choose Track > Duplicate.
3 In the Duplicate Track dialog, deselect Group
Assignments.
4 Click OK.
The composite Volume level and Mute state are coalesced to the duplicate track. The original slave track is preserved, and the VCA group is unchanged.
Coalescing Automation Across an Edit
Selection
You can commit VCA automation across an Edit selection in a VCA Master track, without committing the automation on the entire length of the track.
To coalesce automation in an Edit selection on a
VCA Master track:
1 Select the VCA Master track whose automation you want to coalesce.
2 Make an Edit selection in the VCA Master track that includes the range of automation you want to coalesce.
3 Do one of the following:
• Hold Start (Windows) or Control (Mac) and choose Track > Coalesce VCA Master Automation.
– or –
• Hold Start (Windows) or Control (Mac) and
Right-click the VCA Master track name and choose Coalesce VCA Master Automation from the pop-up menu.
The composite Volume level and Mute state are committed to each of the slave tracks over the
Edit selection. The VCA Master Volume is set to zero, the VCA Mute state is set to unmuted, and any automation on the VCA Master is cleared for the selected area only.
742 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 31: Mixdown
Pro Tools lets you record and bounce tracks to disk. The Bounce to Disk command lets you write a final mix to disk, create a new loop, print effects, or consolidate any submix. You can also submix, route, and record busses and inputs to new audio tracks.
Bounce to Disk This command writes the current session (if no selection), Edit, or Timeline selection as new audio files to disk. Any available output or bus path can be selected as the bounce source. Use Bounce to Disk to write or master any output or bus path directly to disk.
Sample rate, bit depth, and other conversion processes can be applied during or after the bounce. The Bounce to Disk command lets you bounce all available voices to disk without holding any in reserve. Though you can hear the bounce being created in real time, you cannot adjust mixer or other controls during a Bounce to Disk.
Recording to Tracks This is the process of submixing and recording to new audio tracks, as you would any input signals. This method requires available tracks, voices, and bus paths to accommodate the submix and the new tracks.
While recording to tracks, you can adjust mixer or other controls.
Selecting Audio for Loops, Submixes, and Effects
Both Bounce to Disk and recording to tracks operate on the current Timeline or Edit selection, if any. This makes it easy to turn multitrack selections into mono, stereo, or multichannel loops.
Submixes, stems, and other specialized types of mixes can also be printed to disk using either method, or recorded out to a DAT, MDM, or other recording, transfer, or archiving medium.
Printing effects to disk is the technique of permanently adding real-time effects, such as EQ or reverb, to an audio track by bussing and recording it to new tracks with the effects added. The original audio is preserved, so you can return to the source track at any time. This can be useful when you have a limited number of tracks or effects devices.
AudioSuite plug-ins provide another option for printing a plug-in effect to disk. See the
DigiRack Plug-ins Guide for details.
Use Bounce to Disk if you need to convert the bounce files, or if you do not want or need to interact with mixer controls during the bounce.
Record to new tracks if you want to adjust controls while the files are being written.
Chapter 31: Mixdown 743
Dither and Bounce to Disk
Dithering can significantly improve audio quality. Generally, dithering is necessary when reducing the bit depth for digital audio.
If you use Bounce to Disk, it is important to understand that the Bounce to Disk process does not apply dither.
To dither a bounce file, you should insert one of the included Digidesign Dither plug-ins, or another dithering plug-in, on a Master Fader assigned to the bounce source path. Master Faders are often preferable to Auxiliary Inputs because
Master Fader inserts are post-fader (better for dithering).
If you do not use a dithering plug-in on your bounce source path, and you choose to convert to a lower resolution during or after a Bounce to
Disk, the resultant file will be converted by truncation.
When to Use a Dithering Plug-in
You should use a dithering plug-in in any situation where you are reducing bit depth, for example, when mastering to a 16-bit file with the
Bounce to Disk command, or when mastering to an external device that records at 16-bit.
This is even necessary when using 16-bit sessions. Even though 16-bit sessions use 16-bit files, they are still being processed at a higher bit rate:
• 24-bit audio input and output signal paths with internal 48-bit mixing and processing for
Pro Tools|HD systems
• 24-bit audio input and output signal paths with internal 32-bit floating point processing for Pro Tools LE systems
For this reason, whether you are using a 16-bit session or a 24-bit session, it is recommended that you use a Dither plug-in when mastering to
16-bits.
When mastering to 24-bits, it is not necessary to use a Dither plug-in.
Using Dither on an Output Mix
Pro Tools includes real-time dithering plug-ins that improve 16-, 18-, or 20-bit performance and reduce quantization noise when mixing or fading low-level signals.
The dithering plug-ins have no user-selectable controls other than Bit Resolution and Noise
Shaping controls.
For more information about dither, see
To use a dithering plug-in on a submix:
1 Choose Track > New and select Master Fader
(stereo) from the pop-up menu.
2 Set the output of the Master Fader to the output or bus path you want to bounce.
3 Assign the outputs of all audio tracks in the session to the same path you selected in step 2.
The Master Fader now controls the output levels of all tracks routed to it.
4 On the Master Fader, click an Insert button and choose one of the Digidesign Dither plugins.
744 Pro Tools Reference Guide
5 In the dithering plug-in window, choose an output Bit Resolution and Noise Shaping setting.
When you Bounce to Disk you can convert the file to the appropriate resolution. Before being converted by the Bounce to Disk command, the signal will have been dithered to the resolution and noise shaping settings in a dithering plugin.
For more information about the Digidesign dithering plug-ins, refer to the DigiRack
Plug-ins Guide .
Voice Requirements
Recording a submix to new tracks requires an available voice for each track that you want to record. Make sure you have enough voices available to play back all tracks that you want to record and enough voices available to record the destination tracks.
In contrast, the Bounce to Disk command lets you bounce all available voices to disk without holding any in reserve, but you cannot manually change any controls during the bounce. See
“Bounce to Disk” on page 746 for more infor-
mation.
For information about voice management,
see “Track Priority and Voice Assignment” on page 136.
Recording to Tracks
You can create a submix in your Pro Tools session and record it to available tracks in the same session. This technique lets you add live input to the mix, as well as adjust volume, pan, mute, and other controls during the recording process.
You can also use this technique instead of
Bounce to Disk to create mixed tracks directly in your Pro Tools session.
With Pro Tools HD, RTAS plug-ins placed on Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and Instrument tracks will use additional voices and may introduce extra latency based on the HW Buffer Size. For more information,
see “Voice Usage and Total Latency for
To record a submix to a track:
1 Apply any plug-ins or external processors you want to add to your audio tracks or Auxiliary Inputs before you record.
2 Set the main channel output of the tracks you want to include in the submix to a bus path. If you are using stereo or multichannel tracks, set the panning of each track.
Chapter 31: Mixdown 745
3 Choose Track > New and create one or more mono, stereo, or multichannel audio tracks.
4 If you are recording in stereo, pan the new stereo track (or two mono tracks) hard left and right.
5 Set the input of each destination track to match the bus path from which you are recording.
6 Set the output of your new tracks to your main output path.
7 Select Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection.
8 Select audio to record. The start, end, and length of the recording can be based on the cursor location or Timeline and Edit selections.
• Selection-based recording automatically punches in and out of recording at the selection start and end. Be sure to include time at the end of a selection for reverb tails, delays, and other effects.
• If you do not make a selection, recording will begin from the location of the playback cursor. Recording will continue until you press Stop.
9 Record enable the new tracks and click Record in the Transport window.
10 Click Play in the Transport window to begin recording the submix.
11 If recording a selection of audio, recording will stop automatically. If performing an openended recording, click Stop, or punch out of recording. Make sure Loop Playback is not enabled.
Bounce to Disk
The Bounce to Disk command lets you mix down with all available voices on your system.
Since it records to separate audio files, you do not have to reserve any tracks for a bounce.
Pro Tools bounces are done in real time, so you hear audio playback of your mix during the bounce process (though you cannot adjust it).
You can use the Bounce to Disk command to create and automatically import loops, submixes, or any audio into your session. You can use it to create a final mono, stereo, or multichannel master, in any of several audio file formats. Bounce to Disk provides conversion options for sample rate, bit resolution, and format.
When you bounce a track to disk, the bounced mix includes the following:
Audible Tracks All audible tracks that are routed to the output which is selected as the source of the bounce are included in the bounce. Any muted tracks are not included in the bounce. If you solo one or more tracks, only the soloed tracks are included in the bounced mix.
Automation All read-enabled automation is played back and incorporated in the bounced mix.
Inserts and Sends All active inserts, including real-time plug-ins and hardware inserts, are applied to the bounced mix.
Selection or Track Length If you make a selection in a track, the bounced mix will be the length of the selection. If there is no selection in any track, the bounce will be the length of the longest audible track in the session.
746 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Time Stamp Information Bounced material is automatically time stamped so that you can drag it into a track and place it at the same location as the original material. For more information
about time stamping, see “Time Stamping” on page 814.
Bounced Files Are Delay-Compensated
Pro Tools compensates for any bus and plug-in delays due to a bounce. This means that if a bounce file is imported back into a session, and placed directly in time against the source mix, it is time-aligned with the original source mix.
Record-Enabled Tracks and TrackInput-Enabled
Tracks Cannot Be Bounced
Pro Tools does not allow you to bounce tracks that are either record-enabled or in Input Only monitoring mode.
To Bounce to Disk:
1 Make a Timeline selection to define the range to be bounced.
2 Choose File > Bounce to > Disk.
3
Configure the Bounce options (see “Bounce
4 Click Bounce.
Bouncing with Mute Frees Assigned
Voice (Pro Tools HD Only)
When bouncing sessions that include muted tracks, enabling “Mute Frees Assigned Voice” can, in some instances, increase the number of tracks that can be successfully bounced. See
“Mute Frees Assigned Voice” on page 145.
Bounce Options
When you use the Bounce to Disk command, you can configure several file options.
Bounce to Disk dialog, with conversion and options enabled
Bounce Source
Select any mono, stereo, or multichannel output or bus path as the source for the bounce. All currently active output or bus paths as defined in the I/O Setup dialog are available as the
Bounce Source.
To set the bounce source:
â–
Select an output or bus path from the Bounce
Source selector.
Select a bounce source
Chapter 31: Mixdown 747
Enforce Avid Compatibility
Creates frame-accurate edits, wraps the files as
OMFI (unless File Type is MXF), and limits the sample rate options to 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. Dithering without noise shaping will be applied to files being exported from 24-bit to 16-bit.
File Type
Selects the (creator) type for the bounced files.
Selecting a file type
Sound Designer II
(Mac Only)
This was the native format for older Mac-based
Pro Tools systems. Select this to use the bounced audio with any Digidesign application for Mac.
BWF (Broadcast .WAV Format)
This was the native format for older Windowsbased Pro Tools systems, but is now supported on Windows and Mac. To use a BWF (.WAV) file in Pro Tools, you can drag and drop from the DigiBase browser, Windows Explorer or Mac
Finder, or a folder, or you can use the Import
Audio command. Files in this format do not have to be converted to be used in Pro Tools.
AIFF (Audio Interchange File Format)
To use an AIFF file in Pro Tools, you can drag and drop from the DigiBase browser, Windows
Explorer or Mac Finder, or you can use the Import Audio command. Files in this format do not have to be converted to be used in
Pro Tools.
QuickTime
QuickTime is Apple’s multimedia audio file format. Pro Tools does not directly support this type of file in its sessions. To use a QuickTime audio file within Pro Tools, use the Import Audio command. The QuickTime format is popular for attaching to emails, to simplify long-distance project review and approval. Many popular multimedia applications also support
QuickTime.
Sound Resource
(Mac Only)
This file type is supported by some Mac software applications. Pro Tools does not directly support this type of file in its sessions. To use a SND file within Pro Tools, use the Import Audio command. The SND format is useful if you plan to use your audio with other Mac applications that do not support Sound Designer II or AIFF formats.
Windows Media
(Windows Only)
Windows Media formatted files can contain audio, video, or script data stored in Windows Media Format. A Windows Media Format file may have an .asf, .wma, or .wmv file name extension.
748 Pro Tools Reference Guide
MXF (Material Exchange Format)
(Pro Tools with DigiTranslator Only)
MXF is a media file format that includes both video and audio files, and is designed for the interchange of audio-visual material with associated data and metadata. It was designed for improving file-based interoperability between servers, workstations, and other content creation devices.
AAF and OMF sequence format files can refer to
MXF media files, or have MXF media files embedded within them. Pro Tools with DigiTranslator supports AAF embedded sequences.
See the DigiTranslator Guide for more information.
MPEG-1 Layer 3 (MP3)
The MPEG-1 Layer 3 compression format (MP3) is used for streaming and downloading audio over the Internet, and for playback on portable devices. The MP3 Option is required to use this file type.
The MP3 Export Option is available for purchase from the online DigiStore at the Digidesign website (www.digidesign.com).
The MP3 encoder provided as an install option with Pro Tools is a fully functional 30-day demo version. To purchase the full version of the MP3 encoder, visit Digidesign’s website (www.digidesign.com).
When you select this format, the Resolution pop-up menu in the Pro Tools Output Options dialog is unavailable. The resolution is set by the encoder.
The sample rate chosen is given to the codec as a base sample rate for operations. The actual sample rate of the resulting file is determined in the MP3 Encoder Options dialog. For example, if a base sample rate of 48000 Hz is chosen, the
MP3 Encoder Options dialog will allow output streams in 48, 24, or 12 kHz, depending on encoding quality.
When you export or bounce to MP3 format, you can set the following options:
Encoder Settings
Encoder Speed Determines the audio quality of the bounced file. There are two options: Highest
Quality and Fastest Encoding Time.
The Highest Quality setting can take up to five times longer to process audio than the Fastest
Encoding setting, so you should use it only when the highest fidelity is essential and you have a considerable amount of time to devote to the encoding process.
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Encodes the file at a single bit rate that you choose from the CBR pop-up menu. Because the bit rate is fixed, the quality of the encoded audio will vary depending on the nature of the material being compressed. This option is best for streaming over the Internet, since it has predictable bandwidth requirements.
MP3 Export Options
Chapter 31: Mixdown 749
ID3 Tag Info Settings
ID3 Tag Type The ID3 tag stores data about the encoded audio file that is used by MP3 players to display information about the file. Pro Tools supports three versions of this tag, in order to provide backward compatibility with older MP3 players:
• ID3 v1.0: Appears at the end of a streaming
MP3 file, so that tag information is only displayed after software streaming is finished.
• ID3 v1.1: Same as version 1.0, but adds track number information to the tag.
• ID3 v2.3: Appears at the front of a streaming
MP3 file, so that tag information is displayed when streaming begins.
While ID3 v2.3 is becoming the standard
MP3 format, not all MP3 players currently support ID3 v2.3. Contact the developer of your player software for compatibility information.
Title/Artist/Album/Comment Type the title, artist, and other information for the MP3 file. This information is displayed by many MP3 players.
Genre Choose a genre for the file. This information is displayed by many MP3 players, and can appear in searchable catalogs and databases.
Track Number If you select ID3 tag type v1.1 or v2.3, you can enter a CD track number for the file. This information is displayed by many MP3 players.
Year Enter a year for the file. This information is displayed by many MP3 players.
Mac File Settings
Mac File Type and Creator If you expect your file to be used on a Mac, you can enter the Mac file type and creator. This will allow users to doubleclick the file to open their MP3 player.
Default Button
To restore all settings in this dialog to their default values, click Defaults.
Format
This is the format for the bounced result.
Choices are Mono (Summed), Multiple Mono, and Stereo Interleaved.
To set the bounce file format:
â–
Select a file format from the Format selector.
Bounce dialog (file Format type)
Mono (Summed) Creates a single disk file that is a summed mono mix of the current sources being monitored.
Before bouncing to disk, make sure your levels are below –3 dB to avoid clipping that occurs when left and right signals exceed –3 dB below maximum, or full code (0 dBFS).
750 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Multiple Mono Creates multiple mono files with the same number of channels as the source path.
• If the source output or bus path is stereo, two mono files will be created, and appended with
“.L” and “.R” suffixes on bounce.
• If a multichannel format is used (for example, six-channel, 5.1), individual mono files will be created for each member of the path. Files will be appended with path suffixes according to the path definition in the I/O Setup dialog.
• If the source output or bus path is mono, the pop-up menu will switch from multiple mono to mono, and will create one mono file (no summing of multiple sources).
Stereo Interleaved Creates a single, interleaved file that contains all of the bounced streams from the chosen output path. In an interleaved stereo bounce, tracks assigned to odd-numbered outputs are sent to the left channel, and tracks assigned to even-numbered outputs are sent to the right channel.
Pro Tools also lets you bounce multichannel interleaved files of any supported file type. This can simplify file management of mixes and projects for backup and archiving.
Pro Tools does not support interleaved files natively. This means that they must be split into multi-mono files on import (requiring additional disk space).
Resolution
This option lets you select between three different bit resolutions for the bounce conversion.
Bounce to Disk does not apply dither when converting during or after a bounce to a lower resolution (including when bouncing to 16-bit).
When you need to create a lower resolution bounce file, use a Dither plug-in, or similar, on a
Master Fader assigned to the bounce source path. This dithers the bounce file, before the
Bounce to Disk conversion truncates bits into
the final file resolution. (See “Dither and
Resolution choices include the following:
8-bit This resolution is often used in multimedia applications. If the material you are working with is relatively simple, you can use the
Pro Tools “Squeezer” feature for optimal results.
See “Sample Rate Conversion Quality Option” on page 752 for details.
16-bit This is the Compact Disc standard bit resolution.
24-bit This setting provides the highest resolution. It is useful when you want to create a final mix without losing any resolution (for example, if you are delivering a final mix that will be ready to master).
If your session is 16-bit, you should still apply
Dither, because all Pro Tools sessions process internally at 24-bit.
To set the bounce file resolution:
â– Select a bit depth from the Resolution selector.
Chapter 31: Mixdown 751
Sample Rate
This option lets you save to any of several sample rates. Choices are dependent on your
Pro Tools system and Digidesign audio interfaces.
Sample Rate Conversion Quality
If you choose a sample rate that differs from the original sample rate of the session, the conversion options become available. You can configure the conversion quality, and schedule conversion to occur during, or after, the bounce. See
“Sample Rate Conversion Quality Option” on page 752 for more information.
The following are the more common sample rates, and their applications. Higher sampling rates will provide better audio fidelity for recording and playback, and also for processing with dynamics, dither (with noise shaping), and analog emulation plug-ins.
192000 This is a supported sample rate for some audio DVDs, and provides the highest quality audio fidelity with compatible audio interfaces
(such as the 192 I/O).
176400 You may want to work at a sample rate of 176.4 kHz if the final delivery will be at
44.1 kHz (such as compact disc). This will provide a slightly faster sample rate conversion to
44.1 kHz than from 192 kHz.
96000 This is a supported sample rate for DVD audio and provides high-quality audio fidelity with compatible audio interfaces (such as the
192 I/O, 96 I/O, 96i I/O, and Digi 002).
88200 You may want to work at a sample rate of
88.2 kHz if the final delivery will be at 44.1 kHz
(such as compact disc). This will provide a slightly faster sample rate conversion to
44.1 kHz than from 96 kHz.
48000 This is a standard sample rate for Professional and DVD video, as well as some broadcast and recording label archiving, and is supported by DA-88/98, DAT, and ADAT decks.
44100 This is the standard sample rate for compact discs (CD), and is supported by DA-88/98,
DAT, and ADAT decks.
Custom For a custom sample rate, click in the sample rate window and manually enter in a value.
Pull-Up and Pull-Down Rates All available sample rates support pull-up and pull-down rates, or other specialized rates.
Sample Rate Conversion Quality
Option
When you specify a different sample rate for a bounced file (for example, when mixing a session recorded at 96 kHz to 44.1 kHz for release on an audio CD), Pro Tools uses the Conversion
Quality option to determine the quality of sample rate conversion used.
There are five possible settings, ranging from
Low (lowest quality) to Tweak Head (highest quality). The higher the quality of sample rate conversion, the longer it takes to convert the bounced file.
Use Squeezer
(8-Bit Resolution Only)
The Use Squeezer option uses a proprietary DSP algorithm specifically designed for performing
8-bit conversion of simple source files such as voice-overs. It optimizes the dynamics of the audio by preprocessing it using compression, limiting, and gating before conversion to 8-bit resolution. This results in greater apparent
752 Pro Tools Reference Guide
loudness in the signal, and improved intelligibility. If you are converting a more complex 16bit audio file to 8-bit resolution, test this option before converting all of your material.
Help
The Help button opens a display-only dialog that describes the Bounce to Disk features.
Convert During or After Bounce
The Bounce to Disk dialog can perform any conversion options, including sample rate and bit depth conversion, during a bounce or postbounce.
The following options are only available when bouncing to a different file type, format, resolution, or sample rate.
Convert During Bounce This option may take less time than Convert After Bounce, but does so at the expense of plug-in automation playback accuracy.
Convert After Bounce The Convert After Bounce option, though it takes more time, offers the highest level of plug-in automation accuracy possible.
Import Into Session After Bounce
The Import After Bounce option automatically imports the newly bounced files into the Region
List so you can place them in tracks. If your newly bounced files are split stereo files (Multiple Mono), they are listed together in the Region
List.
The Import After Bounce option is only available if the target file type and sample rate for the bounce is the same as the file type and sample rate of the current session, and the target resolution (bit rate) is the same or lower than the resolution of the session. In addition, tracks bounced to a Stereo
Interleaved file cannot be automatically imported after a bounce.
Recording a Submix (with
Bounce to Disk)
You can create a submix with the Bounce to Disk command by muting tracks or bypassing inserts that are not part of the submix, and selecting the part of the session you want to bounce. Or, you could solo only the audio you want to bounce.
You can also create a submix by recording to
new tracks. For details, see “Recording to
To bounce a submix to disk and bring it into the session:
1 Configure your submix using sends, Auxiliary
Inputs, and Master Faders. (See “Signal Routing for Monitoring and Submixing” on page 650.)
2 Do one of the following:
• To bounce the entire session, click Return to Zero in the Transport window to go to the beginning of the session.
– or –
• To bounce a portion of the session, enable
Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection, and make a selection in the Edit window.
3 Choose File > Bounce to > Disk.
4 Configure bounce options and settings.
5 Verify the bit resolution for the bounced file matches the bit resolution of the session.
Chapter 31: Mixdown 753
6 Verify the sample rate for the bounced file is supported by the session and the audio interface.
7 If required, verify the file type and format for the bounced file matches the file type and format of the session.
8 Select the Import After Bounce option.
9 Click Bounce.
10 Select a destination for the new audio file, enter a name, and click Save.
Pro Tools bounces are done in real time, so you hear audio playback of your mix during the bounce process. You cannot adjust controls during a Bounce to Disk.
To bring bounced files back into tracks:
1 Do one of the following:
• If the newly bounced audio was automatically imported into the session, drag the new files from the Region List to existing tracks in your session.
If you bounced from a selection point, you can snap the file to the bounce point: Startdrag (Windows) or Control-drag (Mac) the region from the Region List to the destination track.
• If the bounced files are not available in the
Region List, import them into the session with the Import Audio command, or drag and drop the bounced files from a DigiBase browser.
• If you are placing multiple files, keep channels time-aligned with each other by Shiftselecting them in the Region List, and dragging them simultaneously into existing tracks of the right format.
2 When working with stereo tracks, set the Pan controls hard left and hard right.
3 Solo the track with the bounce on it.
4 Click Play in the Transport window to hear the results of the bounce.
Final Mixdown
In final mixdown, you create a mix that includes all your edits, automation, and effects processing.
To bounce a final mix to disk:
1 Adjust track output levels, and finalize any mix automation for each track in the session.
2 Adjust any real-time plug-in and effects settings and their automation for each track in the session.
3 Make sure that all of the tracks you want to include in the bounce are audible (not muted or inactive).
4 Assign the output of each of the tracks you want to include in your bounce to the same output or bus path.
5
Add dither. See “Dither and Bounce to Disk” on page 744.
754 Pro Tools Reference Guide
6 Do one of the following:
• To bounce the entire session, click Return to Zero in the Transport window to go to the beginning of the session.
By default, the bounce will end at the last audio waveform or MIDI note. To end the bounce sooner, make an Edit or Time selection to define the end (and start) of the bounce.
– or –
• To bounce a portion of the session, enable
Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection, and make a selection in the Edit window.
7 Choose File > Bounce to > Disk.
8 Choose the source path you want to bounce.
9 Configure other Bounce to Disk settings as ap-
propriate. See “Bounce Options” on page 747.
10 Click Bounce.
11 Select a destination for the new audio file, enter a name, and click Save.
Mastering
In the final mastering process, you might record directly to disk, DAT, DVD, CD, stereo mastering recorder, or a multitrack recorder (for surround mixes).
Once you have created a master of your session, you can transfer it to a portable medium for duplication. You can transfer the master file to CD or DAT to be used as a master for pressing compact discs.
Mastering to a Digital Recorder
Although it is usually best to master sessions directly to hard disk, Pro Tools also lets you master digitally, direct to any AES/EBU-equipped or
S/PDIF-equipped digital recorder such as a DAT deck.
24-Bit Input and Output
Pro Tools|HD systems support full 24-bit audio input and output signal paths, with 48-bit internal mixing and processing, providing an additional 16 bits of headroom at the top of a channel’s dynamic range, and 8 bits at the bottom.
You can exchange files with other 24-bit recording systems without any bit-depth conversion
(as long as they are in a compatible file format).
Pro Tools LE systems support 24-bit input and output, and uses 32-bit floating point mixing and processing internally. You can exchange files with other 24-bit recording systems without any bit-depth conversion (as long as they are in a compatible file format).
Chapter 31: Mixdown 755
Mastering and Audio Compression
Although audio compression is often an indispensable tool in analog recording, it can present problems in the digital domain. If you compress an input signal at a very high ratio, you create a signal that contains a much higher overall power level compared to its transients. By recording a number of such signals at the highest possible level on multiple tracks, you create a scenario that is more likely to clip the mixed output signal.
High-power compressed signals, when mixed together, create an extremely high-level output.
This output may rise above the full-code level, resulting in clipping.
To avoid this problem, watch the overall level of your program material—use a meter on a Master
Fader, or use an external mastering deck’s meters to help identify clipping. If you are mastering to hard disk, avoid mixing full-code audio signals together at unity or “0” level, as this invariably causes clipping.
Mastering and Error-Correcting Media
Random access media (such as hard disks, optical cartridges, Bernoulli cartridges or WORM drives) can produce a true digital copy of your data, because every bit value is maintained. Sequential media (such as DAT tapes) use error correction schemes to fix the occasional bad data that is received in a digital transfer. These corrections are deviations from the actual data, and with successive reproductions, represent a subtle form of generation loss.
You can avoid this loss by creating and maintaining masters on random-access digital media
(such as a hard drive) and transferring them to sequential digital media (such as DAT tapes) only as needed.
To configure Pro Tools for direct digital stereo mastering:
1 Connect your digital recorder to your system’s digital outputs. If your system has multiple digital outputs, use channel 1 and 2 of the audio interface.
2 In Pro Tools, set the appropriate digital format and output from the Hardware Setup dialog or
I/O Setup dialog. (See “Configuring Pro Tools
Hardware Settings” on page 38.)
3 Set the clock on the master device to slave to
Pro Tools digital clock, or to provide master
clock to Pro Tools. (See “Configuring Pro Tools
Hardware Settings” on page 38.)
4 On your digital recorder, choose the appropriate digital format for the connections.
5 In Pro Tools, set all audio tracks you want to your master outputs 1–2 path.
6 Click Return to Zero in the Transport window to go to the beginning of the session.
7 Press Record on your digital recorder.
8 Start playback of your session.
9 When your session has finished playing, stop the digital recorder.
756 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Part VIII: Video, Sync, Surround
757
758
Chapter 32: Pro Tools Setup for
Surround (Pro Tools HD Only)
This chapter explains how to set up and configure Pro Tools sessions for multichannel mixing.
Multichannel mixing is supported on
Pro Tools|HD systems only. In this chapter, all references to Pro Tools refer to Pro Tools|HD systems.
For information on fundamental surround concepts, see the Pro Tools Sync & Surround
Concepts Guide.
Pro Tools Audio Connections for 5.1 Mixing
While all 5.1 mixing formats provide the same speaker arrangement, there are three primary standards in use for the track layout of the individual channels that comprise the 5.1-format multichannel mix.
In the following table, it is assumed that surround channels are mapped to outputs 1–6 of a
Pro Tools audio interface. Use channels 7–8 to monitor a stereo mix for a stereo version, or for cue mixes and monitoring.
Table 33. Track Layouts for 5.1 Formats
Formats Track Layout
1
L
2
C
3 4 5 6
R Ls Rs LFE Film
(Pro Tools default)
L R C LFE Ls Rs SMPTE/ITU for Dolby
Digital (AC3) and Control|24
DTS with ProControl
L R Ls Rs C LFE
To connect your audio interfaces for 5.1 format mixing and monitoring:
1 Determine the 5.1 format and track layout you want to use.
2 Connect the output channels of your audio interface to the corresponding input channels of your monitoring system according to the as-
signments listed in Table 33 on page 759.
If you use a Digidesign control surface, see its guide for more information.
Chapter 32: Pro Tools Setup for Surround (Pro Tools HD Only) 759
Configuring Pro Tools for
Multichannel Sessions
Configuring Pro Tools and sessions for multichannel mixing can be done in any (or all) of the ways described in this section.
New Sessions
You can create a new session and choose a surround mix I/O Settings file as the default
I/O Setup. See “New Sessions and I/O Settings” on page 760.
Remixing Sessions in Surround (Importing
Multichannel I/O Setups)
By creating or importing a surround mix I/O Settings file in the I/O Setup dialog, multichannel paths can be made available in any stereo (or other format) session. You can then reassign track routing from the original stereo paths to multichannel paths. Inactive and active paths
simplify reassignment. See “Importing Multichannel I/O Setups” on page 761.
Custom Multichannel Paths
You can customize and redefine existing paths in the I/O Setup dialog. For more information,
see “Custom Multichannel Paths” on page 762.
Importing Session Data
By using the Import Session Data command
(File > Import > Session Data), you can import tracks and media from other sessions plus their associated paths and track assignments. After importing session data, you can use the
I/O Setup dialog to configure main and subpaths for the requirements of the session. For
more information, see Chapter 6, “I/O Setup.”
New Sessions and I/O Settings
When you create a new session, you can specify a surround format that you want to use as your
I/O Setup. Default path configurations are provided as I/O Settings files, for stereo and surround mixing.
In order to see multichannel options in
Pro Tools, the Surround Mixer plug-in must be installed in the Plug-ins folder. This plug-in can be installed with Pro Tools (see the Getting Started Guide). If it is not installed, you can move it from the Plug-ins
(Unused) folder to the Plug-ins folder.
Once you create the new session, you can create and import tracks, import audio, and assign signal routing to set up your mix.
To create a new session for multichannel mixing:
1 Choose File > New Session.
2 Select one of the available 5.1 settings from the I/O Settings menu (Film, SMPTE/ITU, or
DTS/ProControl Monitoring).
Configuring a new session for a 5.1 mix
3 If needed, change other parameters in the Session Parameters section.
4 Name the session.
5 Click Save.
760 Pro Tools Reference Guide
The surround presets preconfigure the I/O Setup dialog for the new session with default 5.1 format main and sub-paths for outputs and busses.
Standard 5.1 format (film) output paths
Surround Mix Settings Files
The surround mix I/O Settings provide output and bus paths for three specific track layout standards in the new session. (For information
on inputs and insert paths, see “Default Input and Insert Paths with 5.1 Settings” on page 761.)
Settings Files and Track Layouts
5.1 Settings Track Layout
Film (Pro Tools Standard)
SMPTE/ITU
(Control|24 Monitoring)
DTS (ProControl Monitoring)
L C R Ls Rs LFE
L R C LFE Ls Rs
L R Ls Rs C LFE
All three 5.1 format I/O Settings (Film,
SMPTE/ITU, or DTS/ProControl Monitoring) provide the following default output and bus paths for the new session:
Default 5.1 Output Paths
• One 5.1 main output path, with sub-paths for 5.0 (no LFR), LCR, Left/Right (stereo), and Center (mono).
– and –
• One stereo main path with two mono subpaths.
Default 5.1 Bus Paths
• One 5.1 main bus path, with sub-paths for
5.0 (no LFE), left/right (stereo), LCR, and center (mono).
– and –
• One stereo main path with two mono subpaths.
Default Input and Insert Paths with 5.1 Settings
The 5.1 Mix settings files provide default stereo main paths and mono sub-paths for inputs and inserts. If you need multichannel input paths or inserts, you can create them in the I/O Setup di-
alog (see “Custom Multichannel Paths” on page 762).
Importing Multichannel
I/O Setups
The I/O Setup dialog can import and export settings files. Importing I/O Setup settings files is useful when you want to remix a stereo session in surround. You can also use this feature to prepare a session for transfer to a different Pro Tools system, or to simply save and exchange
I/O Settings.
Chapter 32: Pro Tools Setup for Surround (Pro Tools HD Only) 761
To import a multichannel I/O Setup settings file:
1 Choose Setup > I/O.
2 Click Import Settings.
3 Select the settings file to import and click
Open.
4 If the current session has existing path definitions that do not match those in the imported settings file, Pro Tools asks whether you want to delete the existing paths or retain them and add the imported settings to your session.
• Click No to add new paths to your current I/O
Setup configuration.
• Click Yes to replace your current I/O Setup configuration with the imported settings.
5 Click OK to close the I/O Setup.
Exporting I/O Settings
Exporting I/O Setup settings files lets you build a library of multichannel setups for different projects.
To export an I/O Setup settings file:
1 Choose Setup > I/O.
2 Click Export Settings.
3 Name and Save your current I/O Settings.
In addition, the I/O Setup dialog, like the Main page of the Hardware Setup dialog, provides controls for routing the physical inputs and outputs on your audio interface to available inputs and outputs in Pro Tools.
When creating 5.1 format paths, you can
specify the default track layout. See “Default Path Order for 5.1 Tracks” on page 764.
Remapping Channels
The I/O Setup dialog and its Channel Grid also let you remap channels. This is especially useful to route channels within a multichannel path, without having to repatch your audio interfaces.
You can remap paths to any required configuration, limited only by your systems resources, and the I/O Setup dialog requirements for chan-
nel overlapping and naming (see “Valid Paths and Requirements” on page 54 for more infor-
mation).
See also “Example Paths and Signal Routing for a Surround Mix” on page 774.
Example LCRS Setup
The following example shows one possible way to configure the I/O Setup dialog to mix in 4channel LCRS format, with a 96 I/O.
Custom Multichannel Paths
The I/O Setup dialog lets you create and customize signal paths for any supported multichannel mixing format.
Multichannel paths and sub-paths are mapped to inputs, outputs or internal busses in the
Channel Grid. When you select a preset 5.1
I/O Settings file, default layout for the corresponding multichannel format paths you create will match the selected format’s track layout.
Example LCRS output main and sub-paths
For additional I/O Setup information, see
“Creating and Editing Paths” on page 49.
762 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To define an LCRS path:
1 Choose Setup > I/O, and click the Output tab.
2 Click New Path.
3 Select LCRS from the Path Format selector.
4 Name the path LCRS.
5 In the Channel Grid, click in the box below the first (left-most) audio interface channel for the path. Pro Tools automatically fills up the adjacent units to the right. If you click in the LCRS row under channel 1, the LCRS path will be mapped across channels 1–4.
6 Select the new LCRS path and click New Sub-
Path.
7 Name the new sub-path LCR and select LCR as the Path format. Click in channel 1 in the LCR row to map the path.
8 Select the LCRS path, click New Sub-Path, and create a stereo sub-path for front Left and front
Right.
9 Select the LCRS path, click New Sub-Path, and create a mono sub-path for the Center channel.
10 Select the LCRS path, click New Sub-Path, and create a mono sub-path for the Surround channel.
11 Click OK to close the I/O Setup.
5.1 Tracks, Formats, Mapping, and
Metering
Path definitions in I/O Setup determine how audio is routed through, and metered on, your audio interfaces.
Pro Tools internal (on-screen) metering of 5.1 format paths always follows the Film track layout:
L C R Ls Rs LFE
Pro Tools track layout of 5.1 format audio tracks in the Edit window also conforms to the Film layout (arranged top to bottom). See the illustra-
tion “5.1 Track Layouts, Routing, and Metering” on page 764
.
In the I/O Setup dialog, you can route these signals out of your audio interfaces according to any track layout (such as DTS or SMPTE/ITU).
To re-map channels in a path:
â– Click and drag a channel to a new valid location in the Grid. Other channel assignments will move (shuffle) to accommodate dragged channels.
Default I/O Selectors in I/O
Setup
The Output tab of the I/O Setup dialog provides selectors for setting I/O defaults in your multichannel sessions.
Default Path Order I/O Setup Options
Default selectors in the I/O Setup dialog
Chapter 32: Pro Tools Setup for Surround (Pro Tools HD Only) 763
Default Path Order Selects the default track layout (or, path order) for new 5.1 format (sixchannel) paths.
Controller Meter Path Selects the path that will be shown in Digidesign control surface output
meters. See “5.1 Tracks, Formats, Mapping, and
Metering” on page 763 for more information.
Audition Paths Selects the monitoring path for previewing audio in the Region List, Import Audio dialogs, and DigiBase. Only outputs on your primary interface can be used as your Audition path.
New Track Default Output Selects the default output path for all new tracks, for each supported track format.
The New Track Default Output can be set to bus paths, as well as output paths.
AFL/PFL Path Selects where tracks are routed to when they are soloed in AFL (After Fader Listen) or PFL (Pre Fader Listen) Solo mode.
AFL/PFL Mutes (Output Path) Selects which output is muted when AFL (After Fader Listen) or
PFL (Pre Fader Listen) Solo mode is enabled, and a track is soloed.
Default Path Order for 5.1 Tracks
You can specify the default track layout for all new 5.1 format paths you create.
To choose a new default 5.1-format path order
(track layout):
1 Choose Setup > I/O.
2 Click the Output tab.
3 Use the Default Path Order menu and submenus to choose the track layout you want.
Default Path Order selector in I/O Setup
5.1 Track Layouts, Routing, and Metering
5.1 Format
Film
(Pro Tools Standard)
L C R Ls Rs LFE
Tracks Track Meters
L C R Ls Rs LFE
SMPTE/ITU
(Control|24 Monitoring)
L R C LFE Ls Rs same
L C R Ls Rs LFE
(top to bottom) same
L C R Ls Rs LFE
(left to right)
Channel Map in I/O Setup
L C R Ls Rs LFE
L R C LFE Ls Rs
DTS
(ProControl Monitoring)
L R Ls Rs C LFE same
L C R Ls Rs LFE same
L C R Ls Rs LFE
L R Ls Rs C LFE
Figure 38. Track layout of different 5.1 formats
764 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 33: Multichannel Tracks and
Signal Routing (Pro Tools HD Only)
Surround sessions typically include a combination of mono, stereo, and multichannel audio,
Auxiliary Input, Master Fader, and Instrument tracks, and inserts and busses.
Once the appropriate I/O Setup has been imported or configured, audio, Auxiliary Input,
Master Fader, and Instrument tracks can be mixed in multichannel for surround using
Pro Tools mixing features.
Multichannel I/O and signal routing is determined by the paths defined in the I/O Setup dialog.
Multichannel mixing is supported on
Pro Tools|HD systems only, and only when the
Surround Mixer plug-in is installed in your plugins folder. In this chapter, all references to
Pro Tools refer to Pro Tools|HD systems.
Multichannel QuickStart
The following is an overview of how to get started mixing in multichannel for surround in
Pro Tools.
To mix in multichannel:
1 Open any stereo Pro Tools session to remix it in surround. (You can also create new, empty
surround sessions. See “New Sessions and I/O
2 Configure the I/O Setup dialog with multichannel inputs, outputs, busses, and inserts, as
needed. (See “Configuring Pro Tools for Multichannel Sessions” on page 760.)
Chapter 33: Multichannel Tracks and Signal Routing (Pro Tools HD Only) 765
3 Do one of the following:
• Create new tracks, and assign track outputs and sends to your multichannel paths.
Configure signal routing as needed for submixing, bussing, processing, and monitoring. For tracks that do not need to be panned in 360°, place them in the mix using sub-paths and signal routing. (See
“Multichannel Signal Routing” on page 769.)
• Use the Import Audio command (File > Import > Audio) to import multichannel audio files.
• Use the Import Session Data command
(File > Import > Session Data) to import existing 5.1 tracks, busses, and other data.
(See “Importing Tracks and Track Attributes” on page 218.)
• Drag and drop multichannel audio files from DigiBase browsers, Windows Explorer, or Mac Finder.
4 Adjust surround panning using the multichannel Track Output and Send windows. (For information on mixing and panning for sur-
round, see Chapter 34, “Surround Panning and
Multichannel Audio Tracks
Multichannel audio tracks contain an individual channel for each signal in the track (for example, a 5.1 track would have six channels for left, center, right, left surround, right surround, and LFE).
Multichannel audio tracks can be:
• Recorded directly into Pro Tools, using multiple microphones or microphone arrays, or routed to appropriate multichannel Pro Tools
Input paths
• Imported from other Pro Tools sessions
• Edited, processed, and mixed in combination with mono and stereo tracks
5.1 format multichannel audio track
5.1 format audio files and tracks conform to the
Film track layout standard. Regardless of path mapping in the I/O Setup dialog, all 5.1 format audio tracks and meters follow the Film standard track layout:
L C R Ls Rs LFE
Multichannel audio tracks are not required to mix in multichannel formats. Mono, stereo, and all supported track formats can be mixed using
Pro Tools track outputs and sends. See “Multichannel Signal Routing” on page 769.
766 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Placing Audio in Multichannel
Tracks
You can drag audio files and regions from Digi-
Base browsers, the Region List, Windows Explorer, or Mac Finder, or from other tracks, to place them in multichannel audio tracks.
To do so, the number of channels being dragged must match the destination track format. For example, you can only drag a stereo pair or two mono regions onto a stereo audio track. Similarly, you can only place audio into an LCR track when you have selected three regions. With 5.1 tracks, you must select six mono files or regions.
When dragged into a multichannel track, audio files are placed from top to bottom in the exact order that they appear in the Region List or playlist from which they came.
For this reason, you may want to rename audio files before dragging them, so that they are in a preferred order. Rename them so that sorting them By Region Name in the
Region List results in the preferred order.
(For example, with a 5.1-format track, you can rename the audio tracks, so that the arrangement of the tracks corresponds to L, C,
R, Ls, Rs, and LFE.)
Solo, Mute, and Gain in Multichannel
Tracks and Paths
Stereo and multichannel tracks consist of multiple audio signals, linked together. By default, multichannel tracks are linked and are controlled by a single channel fader, and solo and mute switches.
For discrete control of signals, multichannel tracks can be converted into individual mono tracks. For discrete level and phase adjustment, you can insert and unlink a multi-mono Trim plug-in. Both of these techniques are explained below.
Once converted to mono, multichannel tracks cannot be relinked into their original multichannel format. However, a multichannel track can be reassembled by dragging the corresponding number of mono files (with the appropriate file suffixes) into a multichannel track, although some automation data may be lost. As an alternative, record the submix of the mono tracks to disk on a multichannel track.
To convert a multichannel track into discrete mono tracks:
1 Select the multichannel track.
2 Choose Track > Split Into Mono.
To have discrete control of gain on individual channels of a multichannel track:
1 Insert a multi-mono Trim plug-in on the multichannel track.
2 Unlink the Trim plug-in by clicking the Link icon so that it is unlit.
3 Use the Channel selector to display the controls for a channel, and adjust the gain.
See “Linking and Unlinking Controls on
Multi-Mono Plug-ins” on page 771 for
more information.
Chapter 33: Multichannel Tracks and Signal Routing (Pro Tools HD Only) 767
Track and Output Formats
When you create new tracks, you specify mono, stereo, or a supported multichannel format for the new tracks.
In the Mix and Edit windows, the track format of a track’s output is always visible by the number of track meters contained in its fader strip
(for example, a single meter for mono tracks, a pair of meters for stereo tracks, and six meters for 5.1 tracks).
Assigning track output determines the format of that output. For example, a mono track always has a single track meter, even when assigned to a stereo output path. If that same mono track is assigned to a 5.1 output path, it's output will be split among those six output channels, depending on the position of its panner.
Changing Format
Changing the output format for a given track has several effects:
• The panner that appears in the track will change to reflect the new output format.
• It may be necessary for one or more pan related automation playlists to be created or deleted.
Because changing the output format has these effects, a warning dialog appears whenever you change the output format of a track to a format of fewer channels. Specifically, this will occur whenever automation playlists will have to be deleted.
Multiple Output Assignments and Track Format
When a track is assigned to more than one path of differing formats, the main output for that track will match the format of the assigned path with the greatest number of channels.
Multiple Outputs and Automation Playlists
When a track has multiple output assignments,
Pro Tools sorts panning data appropriately for each assigned path. For example, if you assign a mono track to a stereo path and a 5.1 path simultaneously, that track will have a 5.1 panner in the Mix or Edit window. When you pan the track, Pro Tools interprets the 5.1 panning moves into stereo panning moves.
This provides a type of parallel mixing. You can create a variety of mixes of differing formats all at the same time by routing your elements to multiple paths.
Control-Start-click (Windows) or Command-Control-click (Mac) any control in an
Output window to show its automation playlist in the Edit window and view any pan automation.
768 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Multichannel Signal Routing
To mix in a multichannel format, tracks are assigned to multichannel paths.
Tracks can be mixed in surround using the following two methods:
• By setting a track main output to a multichannel path.
• By assigning a multichannel send to route audio to a multichannel path.
Additional output assignments can be added by
Start-clicking (Windows) or Control-clicking
(Mac) the Selector tool and assigning another path.
Multichannel Sends
All track formats, including mono and stereo, let you assign one or more multichannel sends.
This provides a multichannel panner in the
Sends View. Sends are also useful to bus tracks for multichannel plug-in processing.
Figure 39 shows a mono audio track with a 5.1
(6-channel) send (View > Sends A–E > Send A).
This channel’s main output path is mono (“Center music”). It has a multichannel send providing a multichannel panner
This channel’s output path is multichannel, so the track provides a multichannel panner
Multichannel send panner
Mono output format
Mono meter
Two different ways to configure tracks for multichannel mixing
Multichannel Track Outputs
Tracks can be routed to multichannel output or bus paths using the track’s Output Path selector.
This provides a multichannel panner and meter in the Mix and Edit window I/O View.
Figure 39. A mono audio track with a mono output format and a multichannel send
Chapter 33: Multichannel Tracks and Signal Routing (Pro Tools HD Only) 769
Pro Tools bussing and submixing features are available for all channel formats, from mono/stereo through 8-channel. For examples of multichannel monitoring, effects processing, and bussing, see “Mixing with Paths and Sub-
Paths” on page 772. For mono and stereo mix
examples, see Chapter 28, “Basic Mixing.”
Mono, Multi-Mono and
Multichannel Plug-ins
Plug-ins can be used in mono, multi-mono, or multichannel formats.
Multichannel Auxiliary Inputs and
Master Faders
A multichannel Auxiliary Input or Master Fader is used as a return for the multichannel bus.
Sends are useful when you need to create an additional, independent mix simultaneously (perhaps of a distinct format), requiring dedicated fader, mute, solo, and automation controls.
You can assign Master Faders to main and subpaths. Main paths must match the format of the
Master Fader, and only one Master Fader can be active and assigned to any single (active) main or sub-path. A Master Fader cannot be assigned to a sub-path if its associated main path is already assigned on another Master Fader. See
“Master Fader Tracks” on page 628.
Multichannel Instrument Tracks
Plug-in formats
For information about mono, stereo, and mono-
in/stereo-out plug-ins, see Chapter 29, “Plug-in and Hardware Inserts.”
Multi-Mono Plug-ins Are designed for use on stereo or greater-than-stereo multichannel tracks.
Multi-mono plug-ins are useful, or required, in the following situations:
• When a plug-in does not involve multichannel correlated processing (for example, when applying EQ to select sides of a multichannel signal)
• When you need to adjust signals within the multichannel track independently
• When a plug-in does not support multichannel formats
Multichannel tracks can be used to monitor and route multichannel instrument plug-ins or multichannel external MIDI instruments.
When a multi-mono plug-in is first inserted on a multichannel track, the plug-in controls are linked. You can unlink them for independent
adjustment. See “Linking and Unlinking Controls on Multi-Mono Plug-ins” on page 771 for
more information.
Multi-mono plugs-ins can also be inserted on stereo tracks, to apply unlinked plug-ins on the left and right channels.
770 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Multichannel Plug-ins Are designed for use on stereo and multichannel tracks that require correlated processing, including stereo and multichannel limiting, compression, and similar effects.
Linking and Unlinking Controls on Multi-
Mono Plug-ins
When a multi-mono plug-in is used on a multichannel track of more than two channels, the controls are normally linked. Adjusting the
Gain control on one channel, for example, will adjust it for all channels.
If necessary, you can unlink plug-in controls on specific channels of a track and edit them independently. You can also selectively link the controls of specific channels.
For example, to apply equal filter cutoffs to the
Ls and Rs (surround) channels in a 5.1 mix, you could link enable just those channels in an unlinked, multi-mono EQ plug-in. Adjusting the controls in the plug-in window for either channel (Ls or Rs) adjusts the other, linked channel as well.
Link Enable buttons
Master Link Button When enabled, links the controls on all channels of a multi-mono plugin so that they can be adjusted in tandem.
Link Enable Buttons Let you selectively link the controls of specific channels of a multi-mono plug-in. Each square represents a speaker channel. The Master Link button must be disabled to use the Link Enable buttons.
To unlink controls on a multi-mono plug-in:
â– Deselect the Master Link button. It is lit when linked, unlit when unlinked.
To access controls for a specific channel:
â– Select the channel from the Channel selector.
To open a plug-in window for all channels of a multi-mono plug-in:
â– Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the
Channel selector.
To link the controls of specific channels:
1 Deselect the Master Link button if it is not already deselected.
2 Click the Link Enable buttons for the channels whose controls you want to link.
For more information on using plug-ins, see the DigiRack Plug-ins Guide .
Channel selector
Master Link button
Channel selector and Link controls
Channel Selector Accesses a specific channel within a multichannel track for plug-in parameter editing. This menu appears only on multimono plug-ins inserted on tracks with more than two channels.
Chapter 33: Multichannel Tracks and Signal Routing (Pro Tools HD Only) 771
Paths in Surround Mixes
Because Pro Tools provides a flexible routing and submixing environment, you can maximize your system’s available resources by first identifying the elements that you want to pan dynamically and those that can be placed in certain channels only (see “Mixing with Paths and Sub-
Paths” on page 772).
Once you have identified these elements in your session, you can use a combination of main and sub-path assignments, and multichannel panning.
Mixing with Paths and Sub-Paths
It is rare that every track needs to be “flown” (actively panned in between more than a pair of speakers). In most situations, certain elements are placed in certain speakers and remain there, providing the foundation for a mix.
Figure 40 on page 773 illustrates an example of how panning and signal routing can be combined in a multichannel mix. The following sections describe how to organize your session and signal routing to maximize the available resources.
See “Extending Stereo Mixing Conventions to Surround Mixing” on page 773 for related information.
When to Assign Multichannel Outputs
â–
Assign 5.1 paths only to those tracks that need to be panned to all six channels.
For example, a sound effects track with a jet flyover should be assigned a 5.1 path to be able to fly the sound from front-to-back. In a music mix, you can fly a solo instrument or make a synth pad swirl around the room as a special effect.
Elements that need to be heard in all speakers simultaneously can also be assigned to the multichannel output, whether or not they need active panning in the sound field.
When to Use Sub-Paths
â– To help simplify large sessions, use sub-paths to route static (or, stationary) elements directly to the output channel or channels.
For example, film dialog is often mixed to the center channel to anchor this essential sound element to the picture. Instead of assigning a sixchannel panner to dialog tracks and panning the tracks to the center speaker only, you can route the dialog track’s main output to a mono
(Center) sub-path.
772 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Bus routing
Main output to sub-paths
Tracks routed to sub-paths Tracks panned in 3D
Auxiliary Input routed to main paths
Main outputs to 5.1 paths for surround panning
Figure 40. Using signal routing and sub-paths to mix in surround
Extending Stereo Mixing Conventions to
Surround Mixing
Stereo mixing sets the precedent for active and static panning, and surround mixing can benefit from the same basic principles.
Panning a sound back-and-forth between the left and right speakers is best used as a special effect. In a typical music mix, the basic tracks are placed in the stereo sound field and remain there.
Surround mixes can become incoherent if too many elements are continuously moving, For special effects, some tracks can be panned dynamically, bouncing between speakers or sweeping from one side to the other.
Chapter 33: Multichannel Tracks and Signal Routing (Pro Tools HD Only) 773
Example Paths and Signal
Routing for a Surround Mix
The examples that follow show how Auxiliary
Inputs, Master Faders, and other Pro Tools signal routing features can be used for stem mixes, submixes, and similar project needs.
In these examples, music and effects are being mixed for a trailer, in 5.1 surround. Separate stem mixes (for music and for effects) are to be mastered to 8-track MDM.
Additional stereo output paths, with mono subpaths, have also been defined for the remaining channels.
Example Bus Paths
Figure 42 shows example bus paths.
Example Multichannel Paths
Signal routing is the key element in any
Pro Tools surround session. Signal routing is configured and defined in the I/O Setup dialog.
Example Output Paths
Figure 41 shows output paths defined in the I/O
Setup dialog of an example session that was created on a Pro Tools|HD system with one 96 I/O audio interface.
Figure 42. I/O Setup, example bus paths
Two 5.1 format main paths have been defined
(“Music” and “FX”), each with several subpaths.
Example Sub-Paths
Sub-paths let you route to selective channels within the multichannel surround output. In
Figure 43, the Mix 5.1 bus has several sub-paths
that show this.
Figure 41. I/O Setup, example output paths
Sub-paths have been defined for Mix, Music, and FX main output paths.
774 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Figure 43. I/O Setup, example sub-paths
5.0 Sub-Path The 5.0 FX bus is a 5-channel subpath. Use this type of sub-path routing to conserve mixing resources with tracks you want to keep out of the LFE channel.
LFE Path A custom LFE sub-path has been added to provide a discrete mono path for the LFE channel.
Signal Routing Examples
The following examples show how main and sub-paths can be used, using an example session consisting of a 5.1 main mix, with music and effects stems (or submixes).
Submix Stem Examples
Figure 44 shows a routing configuration for an effects submix. Some tracks are routed to stereo sub-paths, while others are assigned to mono,
LCR, or other sub-paths. Two tracks (one stereo, one mono) are assigned to multichannel busses for surround panning. A 5.1 Auxiliary Input assigned to the FX main bus path serves as a submixer.
Figure 44. FX stem
Chapter 33: Multichannel Tracks and Signal Routing (Pro Tools HD Only) 775
Figure 45 shows a routing configuration for music tracks.
Figure 45. Music stem
Most of the music tracks in this example are routed to the front left/right channels, using a stereo subpath. A 5.1 Auxiliary Input controls the bus and stem output.
Main Stems Example
Figure 46 shows two Auxiliary Input channels assigned to additional 5.1 format paths for a main mix.
Figure 46. Main stems
776 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Multiple output assignments make it possible to configure a number of multi-format mixes. For example, you can assign an additional stereo output to tracks and create a stereo mix at the same time as a 5.1 mix. For more information,
see “Multiple Output Assignments” on page 638.
Figure 48 shows how a “traditional” LFE track can be routed to only the LFE channel. This example uses a custom-defined LFE sub-path to the FX main bus path.
LFE Examples
LFE tracks and other audio can contribute to the
LFE output in two ways:
• Using the LFE fader in Output windows. This
LFE signal is post-fader.
– or –
• Using a custom sub-path to route channels discretely.
Figure 47 shows a channel Output window,
sending and metering to the LFE channel.
Aux LFE meter LFE fader
Figure 48. Discrete LFE routing
LFE faders can follow Mix and Edit Groups.
For information, see “Selecting Group Attributes” on page 160.
Figure 47. LFE contribution from a stereo output
Using the LFE fader, you can add any amount of any multichannel path to the overall LFE output. In the above example, the track’s Center percentage has been turned off, and the LFE fader has been raised to route it to the LFE channel.
For instructions on how to create a sub-
path, see “Custom Multichannel Paths” on page 762.
LFE and Filtering
Pro Tools applies no filtering to LFE signals.
Some delivery requirements may require filtering for the LFE track. See the Pro Tools Sync & Surround Concepts Guide for more information.
Chapter 33: Multichannel Tracks and Signal Routing (Pro Tools HD Only) 777
778 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 34: Surround Panning and
Mixing (Pro Tools HD Only)
This chapter explains how to pan and mix in surround with Pro Tools.
Multichannel mixing is supported on
Pro Tools|HD systems only. In this chapter, all references to Pro Tools refer to Pro Tools|HD systems.
Before you can pan a track in surround, it must be assigned to an appropriate multichannel output or bus path.
The I/O Setup dialog defines the bussing and output architecture of the Pro Tools multichannel surround mixer. If you have not already done so, it is recommended that you become familiar with main and sub-paths and the
I/O Setup dialog before starting multichannel
Pro Tools projects.
See Chapter 32, “Pro Tools Setup for Surround (Pro Tools HD Only)” for more infor-
mation on multichannel configurations and I/O Setup options. For multichannel
signal routing, see Chapter 33, “Multichannel Tracks and Signal Routing
Introduction to Pro Tools
Surround Panning
There are four different track panning methods available:
• In the Edit window, using the reduced-height
Panner Grid in the I/O View
• In the Mix window, using the reduced-height
Panner Grid
• In the Output window, using the full-size
Panner Grid
• Through pan automation editing
Control surfaces provide additional panning options. Refer to the documentation for your control surface for more information.
Chapter 34: Surround Panning and Mixing (Pro Tools HD Only) 779
Mix and Edit Window Panner Grids
In the Mix and Edit window, multichannel Panner Grids are displayed on tracks that have multichannel track or send output assignments.
To pan from the Mix or Edit window:
1 To pan in the Edit window, make sure I/O
View is being shown (View > Edit Window >
I/O). Panner Grids are always displayed in Mix window tracks that support panning.
2 Begin playback.
3 Click and drag on the appropriate multichannel track’s Panner Grid in the Mix or Edit windows.
Click and drag to pan
Pan Location Cursor Color while Automating
The Pan Location cursor is green when the track is in Automation Read mode, red in an Automation Touch, Latch, Touch/Latch, or Write modes, and yellow in Automation Off (or Automation Suspend) mode.
In Trim mode, the Volume fader and LFE fader are yellow.
Output windows provide additional features and controls (and a much larger Grid). For de-
tails, see “Output Windows” on page 780.
Panning in the Track Grid
The Pan Location cursor follows your movements as long as you hold down the mouse button. Movements are scaled so that, once you click to “grab” the Pan Location cursor, you do not need to limit your movements to the small
Track Grid area.
Output Windows
Output windows provide panning controls
(called panners), as well as standard Pro Tools controls, for tracks of all mix formats (from 3channel LCR through 8-channel 7.1).
For information on Output window standard
controls, see “Standard Controls” on page 781.
For information on Output window panning
controls, see “Surround Panner Controls” on page 782.
Some of the features of Output windows include:
• X/Y (joystick-style) panning
• 3-Knob panning
• Full Divergence and Center Percentage control
• AutoGlide
• LFE feed
• Multichannel meters
• Pro Tools target window support
Multiple panners can be opened simultaneously, or a single window can display the current panner.
780 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To open an Output window:
â–
Click the Output Window button in the track in the Mix or Edit window (I/O View).
Standard Controls
All Output windows provide standard Pro Tools controls for routing, path assignment and other track features. These controls are located at the top of all Output, Send, Insert, and Plug-in windows. Some controls are specific to the type of window.
Show meters
Track selector
Path selector
Output selector Automation Safe
Target icon
Opening a multichannel Output window
For instructions on managing multiple Out-
put windows, see “Output Windows for
Tracks and Sends” on page 645.
Panner Control section
For details on these standard features, see
“Standard Selector Controls in Output
Track Fader, Solo, Mute, and Auto
All Output windows provide track volume and mute controls. You can adjust and automate track volume, or mute, directly using these controls. The larger fader and Mute button are equivalent to those in the Pro Tools Mix window.
Chapter 34: Surround Panning and Mixing (Pro Tools HD Only) 781
Surround Panner Controls
When assigned to tracks or paths with four or more channels, the Output window provides an X/Y
Grid for surround panning. The speakers associated with the panner’s multichannel format are displayed in their relative positions outside the Panner Grid. These speakers are also used as Snap Pan to
Speaker controls.
This section identifies all the controls and features found in Pro Tools multichannel panners.
Click to show meters
Snap Pan to Speaker icons
LFE fader
Pan Location cursor
X/Y Grid
Panning Mode button
Position
(knob panners)
Divergence
Track fader and meter
Center %
Track Automation.
Solo, and Mute
Figure 49. Output window with a 5.1-format multichannel panner
782 Pro Tools Reference Guide
The X/Y Grid and Pan Location
Cursor
The X/Y Grid is where multichannel panning information is input and displayed. You can input pan information using X/Y mode, 3-Knob mode, or by entering numeric values in the Position data fields. You can also edit pan automation graphically in the Edit window.
Panning Mode Button
This button, located below the X/Y Grid, provides access to Surround panning modes (see
Pan Location cursor
X/Y mode icon
Panner Mode button set to X/Y mode
Position Controls
The Position controls let you set the positions of the panner.
X/Y grid
X/Y Grid and Pan Location cursor
Multichannel panners default to X/Y mode. In
X/Y mode, the track’s current pan position is represented by a green dot. This dot is the Pan
Location cursor, and its color indicates track automation status using standard Pro Tools colors:
Green The track is in automation Read mode.
Red The track is in automation Write, Touch,
Latch, or Touch/Latch mode.
Yellow The track is in automation Off mode (or
Automation Suspend) mode.
Position and Center % controls
Front Displays and controls the current front Xaxis (left/right) position of the panner.
Rear Displays and controls the current rear Xaxis (left/right) position of the panner. In default X/Y Panning mode, Rear is linked to Front position and cannot be controlled independently.
F/R (Front/Rear) Displays and controls the current Y-axis position of the panner.
Center % Control
Center % controls how much of the signal is routed to the center speaker. This lets you mix a track to the front with a phantom center (0%
Center value) or to three-channel (LCR) when panning front.
Chapter 34: Surround Panning and Mixing (Pro Tools HD Only) 783
Divergence Controls
Divergence determines the width of the panned signal with respect to neighboring speakers. (For more information, see the Pro Tools Sync & Surround Concepts Guide ). There are three Divergence controls:
Front, Rear, and F/R Divergence Provide separate, automatable divergence control over front speakers, rear speakers, and between front/rear, respectively.
The LFE fader determines how much of the current track’s signal will be routed to the LFE channel. LFE faders in Track and Send windows can follow groups. The Pro Tools LFE channel is always full-bandwidth. For more information
on how to use the LFE fader, see “LFE Faders in
Multichannel Panners” on page 790.
Panning Modes
The Panning Mode button provides access to four panning modes: X/Y mode, Divergence Editing, 3-Knob mode, and AutoGlide mode. Panning controls can be automated in all four modes.
Divergence controls
For examples of how divergence settings af-
fect output panning, see “Divergence and
Center Percentage” on page 788.
Snap Pan to Speaker Icons
The Snap Pan to Speaker icons let you force the panner to the speaker’s location. For example, clicking on the upper left speaker moves the Pan
Location cursor to the upper left corner of the
X/Y Grid.
LFE Fader
The LFE fader is only available in “.1” surround formats (5.1, 6.1, and 7.1).
LFE fader
Panning Mode button
Panning Mode button (X/Y mode shown)
Panning Modes
X/Y Mode Joystick-style panning by dragging the Pan Location cursor within the X/Y Speaker
Grid. See “X/Y Panning” on page 785 for more
information.
3-Knob Mode Point-to-point panning, between
pairs of speakers. See “3-Knob Panning” on page 786 for more information.
Divergence Editing Divergence X/Y Grid can be dragged to resize the divergence boundaries.
784 Pro Tools Reference Guide
AutoGlide Mode Point-to-point panning from the Pan Location cursor to a new destination
over a specified AutoGlide Time. See “AutoGlide
Mode” on page 787 for more information.
To enable a Panning Mode:
â– Click on the Panning Mode button in the Surround Panner until the desired mode icon is displayed.
X/Y Panning
To pan in X/Y mode:
1 Click on the Panning Mode button until the
X/Y mode icon is displayed.
X/Y mode icon
Panner Mode button set to X/Y mode
2 Drag the Pan Location cursor, or click anywhere in the Grid and drag to pan the track. The location of the Pan Location cursor determines the pan position of the signal. For example, to pan something to the left rear speaker, move the
Pan Location cursor to the lower-left corner of the Grid.
It is not necessary to click exactly on the Pan
Location cursor. Clicking anywhere in the
Grid will move the Pan Location cursor relative to where you click or take over with a hardware panner. Panning does not jump to the click position.
X/Y Panning
To snap the Pan Location cursor to a location in the Grid:
â– Hold down the Control key and click anywhere in the X/Y Grid.
Grid Options and Shortcuts
Fine-Adjust Mode Hold down the Control key
(Windows) or Command key (Mac) for fine adjustment of all Panner controls.
Constraining to X or Y Movement Shift-drag the
Pan Location cursor to constrain its movement to the X or Y direction.
Reset to Default Alt-click (Windows) or Optionclick (Mac) in the Panner Grid to reset all controls to their default position.
Snap Pan to Speaker Click one of the Snap Pan to Speaker icons to force the panner to that speaker location.
Display Automation in Edit Window Control-
Start-click (Windows) or Command-Controlclick (Mac) a control to display that control’s playlist in the Edit window.
All Pan controls can be automated, including pan position and divergence. See
Chapter 30, “Automation” for details.
Chapter 34: Surround Panning and Mixing (Pro Tools HD Only) 785
3-Knob Panning
Pro Tools provides 3-Knob mode as an additional way to input pan moves.
3-Knob mode lets you:
• Pan in straight lines, moving the Pan Location cursor using the Position rotary knobs with full movement of front, rear, and front-rear position.
– and –
• Pan discretely between pairs of speakers.
For example, when panning front-left to rearright in 3-Knob mode, audio will be heard from just those two speakers (assuming full divergence is in effect).
By comparison, in X/Y mode a diagonal pan may result in audio being heard in some or all channels.
X/Y pan position meters
3-Knob trajectory meters
X/Y mode
Panning and metering in X/Y mode
The difference is that 3-Knob mode pans discretely between the front and rear position of the panning trajectory , while X/Y mode panning takes place in the full 360° Panning Grid. Divergence and Center Percentage are variable in both Panning modes.
To enable 3-Knob Panning mode:
â– Click on the Panning Mode button until the
3-Knob mode icon is displayed.
3-Knob mode
Panning and metering in 3-Knob mode
3-Knob mode icon
Panner Mode button set to 3-Knob mode
The panner trajectory line appears across the
Grid, extending from the front (X-axis) to the rear (Y-axis).
To pan in 3-Knob mode:
1 Adjust the Front and Rear Position knobs to set the trajectory line.
2 Rotate the Front/Rear Position knob to pan along the trajectory. The Pan Location cursor is constrained to the white trajectory line.
786 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To change the 3-Knob trajectory angles, do one of the following:
â– Drag either endpoint (Front or Rear) of the trajectory line.
– or –
â– Adjust the Front or Rear Position controls.
To change the current trajectory position (left-toright) and retain its current angles:
â–
Drag the trajectory line (not its endpoints) to a new position.
To do an AutoGlide automation pass:
1 Click the Panning Mode button until the
AutoGlide mode icon is displayed.
AutoGlide Mode
AutoGlide mode lets you quickly write Surround
Panner automation by clicking new locations in the Surround Panner window, instead of manually moving the Surround Panner controls.
When writing automation in AutoGlide mode, the Pan Location cursor cannot be dragged from its location.
The time it takes to glide from point to point
(from the Pan Location cursor to the new destination) is called the AutoGlide Time. This time is set in the Mixing Preferences page and has a range of 10 msec to 10000 msec (10 seconds).
To set the AutoGlide Time
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the Mixing tab.
2 Set the AutoGlide Time in the Automation section.
The Panning Mode button displays a slanted dotted line that ends with a filled in dot (representing a cursor) at its top right corner.
2 In the Mix or Edit window, click the Automation Mode selector and select an Automation mode for the track you want to automate.
3 Press Play to begin playback.
4 Set a new destination for the cursor by doing one of the following:
• Click a Snap Pan to Speaker icon to glide to its speaker location.
– or –
• Click in the pan window to glide to a specific location in the X/Y Grid.
Snap Pan to
Speaker icons
Pan
Location cursor
AutoGlide mode icon
Panner Mode button set to AutoGlide mode
AutoGlide mode
Panning Mode button (AutoGlide mode shown)
Chapter 34: Surround Panning and Mixing (Pro Tools HD Only) 787
The Pan Location cursor will begin to move towards the new destination in the time it takes to travel the AutoGlide Time. When the new destination point is reached, a new breakpoint will be written at the new location.
5 Repeat the previous step if you want to write additional panning moves.
6 Stop the transport when finished.
Divergence
In the Panner Grid, the current divergence values are displayed using a purple outline.
Divergence display
Divergence and Center
Percentage
The Divergence and Center Percentage controls range from 0 to 100, and can be automated.
They are especially useful for ensuring audibility and coverage in large venues, and to increase clarity of voices.
Front Divergence Controls divergence between front speakers (X-axis only).
Rear Divergence Controls divergence between the rear speakers (X-axis only).
Front/Rear Divergence Controls divergence between front and rear (the Y-axis).
Center % (Percentage) Determines whether there is a discrete center image, a completely phantom center image, or a variable amount in between.
Divergence controls
Divergence display and controls
By default, Pro Tools surround panners are
100% or fully divergent, meaning that a signal that is panned completely to one speaker will only be audible in that speaker.
Pan Location cursor meters
Full divergence for discrete panning to front, left
(meters show signal only in front, left)
788 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Lower divergence settings result in a progressively wider source signal. When Divergence is less than 100%, tracks will be routed to neighboring speakers to some degree, even when the
Pan Location cursor is positioned next to a single speaker.
Pan Location cursor meters
Center % (Percentage)
Center Percentage controls whether there is a discrete center channel for the track or a phantom center channel.
Center Percentage Example
In film and video production, the center channel often contains dialog. To enhance the clarity of dialog, it is often beneficial to keep elements such as music out of the center speaker. By reducing the Center Percentage on music tracks, music panned to the front of the soundfield can be panned to only the left and right speakers, forcing them to have a variable phantom center image.
Front
Divergence
Front Divergence at 0% for widest panning (note meters showing signal in all three front speakers)
To adjust divergence:
â–
Adjust the Front, Rear, and Front/Rear Divergence controls as necessary.
To adjust divergence graphically:
1 Click on the Panning Mode button until the
Divergence Editing icon is displayed.
Pan Location cursor meters
Center %
Discrete center (Center Percentage at 100)
Divergence Editing icon
Panner Mode button set to Divergence Editing
2 Drag in the Grid to resize the divergence boundaries.
Pan Location cursor meters
Center %
Phantom center (Center Percentage at 0)
Chapter 34: Surround Panning and Mixing (Pro Tools HD Only) 789
To adjust Center Percentage:
â–
Adjust the Center Percentage knob as appropriate.
As you reduce the Center Percentage value, the center speaker at the top of the Grid becomes less visible. At 0, the center speaker is completely invisible, reflecting the setting for fully phantom center.
LFE Enable
Some multichannel plug-ins, including the multichannel DigiRack Dynamics III Compressor/Limiter, provide LFE Enable. This lets you enable or bypass processing of the LFE channel if present.
Center speaker less visible
LFE Faders in Multichannel
Panners
The LFE fader controls how much of the track is sent to LFE. LFE faders are only available when a track is assigned to a path whose format supports LFE (5.1, 6.1, or 7.1).
To mix to the LFE channel:
â– Adjust the LFE fader in any “.1” surround format Output window.
For general information about LFE, sub channels, and related topics, see the
Pro Tools Sync & Surround Concepts Guide.
LFE Faders and Groups
Track and send LFE faders can follow Mix and
Edit Groups by being enabled in the Group Attributes page in either the Create Groups or
Modify Groups dialog. LFE faders can be assigned to follow groups as a global attribute or
on a group by group basis. See “Selecting Group
LFE Enable in the multichannel DigiRack Dynamics III
Compressor/Limiter
To process the LFE channel in a multichannel plugin:
â– Click to enable LFE Enable in supporting multichannel plug-ins. LFE Enable is highlighted when LFE processing is enabled, and unhighlighted when LFE processing is bypassed.
When LFE Enable is unavailable, try using the multi-mono version of the plug-in.
Pan Playlists
Multichannel panners have an automation playlist for each position and divergence control.
Pan automation can be drawn, edited, cut, copied, and pasted from the Edit window.
For more information, see Chapter 30,
790 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Surround Scope Plug-in
The Surround Scope plug-in provides a 360° meter for metering multichannel paths during mixing.
5.1 Format Track Layouts
All 5.1-format meters (including those displayed in the Surround Scope meter, on tracks, and in
Output windows and their Path Meter Views) are always arranged in the following order:
L C R Ls Rs LFE
For more information on Pro Tools meter-
ing, see “5.1 Tracks, Formats, Mapping, and Metering” on page 763.
To use the Surround Scope Plug-in:
â–
On a multichannel Master Fader, click an Insert button and select Multi-channel TDM plugin > Sound Field > Surround Scope.
Surround Scope plug-in
Surround Scope displays output levels in both a
360° Grid, and in traditional LED meters.
For details on Surround Scope, refer to the
Digidesign Plug-ins Guide.
Chapter 34: Surround Panning and Mixing (Pro Tools HD Only) 791
792 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 35: Working with
Synchronization
Synchronization allows one system to output time code and the other device to follow that time code. Pro Tools is synchronized to other devices using SMPTE/EBU time code or MIDI
Time Code.
For more information on different
SMPTE/EBU formats, and other concepts related to time code, refer to the Pro Tools
Sync & Surround Concepts Guide .
Pro Tools Synchronization
Options
There are several options for synchronizing
Pro Tools to an external source or using
Pro Tools as the master device. Not all options are available on all Pro Tools systems, as noted.
SMPTE Trigger Only
This solution is useful for short projects if both systems are extremely close in speed, but even the best systems will rarely stay perfectly synchronized for longer than a couple of minutes.
SMPTE Trigger Resolved with a SYNC
Peripheral
(Pro Tools HD Only)
You can use an optional Digidesign SYNC peripheral to resolve Pro Tools recording and playback speed with any of the following clock reference sources while slaving Pro Tools to time code:
• LTC
• Video source
• House video reference
• VITC
• 1x Word Clock
• AES/EBU “null” clock
• Pilot Tone
• Bi-Phase
This enables long-term, high-fidelity synchronization when all transports within the system are resolved to this common synchronization source, or by resolving to any variations in incoming time code while slaving to time code.
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 793
SMPTE Trigger while Locking to an Unresolved
Source
SMPTE Trigger can be used with an optional
SYNC peripheral or equivalent device to resolve
Pro Tools recording and playback speed while slaving to LTC. This enables long-term, accurate synchronization by resolving to any variations in incoming time code. SYNC peripherals also support VITC and Bi-phase/Tach positional reference.
SYNC Peripheral Synchronization
Options
By adding a Digidesign SYNC peripheral to your
Pro Tools|HD system, you can use Pro Tools as the master device in your synchronization setup. All other devices are then slaved to
Pro Tools.
You can use Pro Tools in conjunction with a
SYNC peripheral to generate LTC, MIDI Time
Code, or MMC commands. When the SYNC peripheral is reading incoming SMPTE time code, it regenerates the time code through the LTC or
MTC output connector. This signal can be passed along to other slave devices.
MachineControl™
Digidesign SYNC peripherals also support
Digidesign MachineControl software, which provides many specialized features for post-production synchronization tasks including remote track arming, VTR emulation, serial time code, and other capabilities. (See the MachineControl
Guide for more information, or contact your
Digidesign dealer.)
For instructions on connecting an external synchronization peripheral to your Pro Tools system, refer to your Getting Started Guide.
If you are using a SYNC peripheral, refer to its documentation.
794 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Ext. Clock Output
Pro Tools can be used as the master device in your synchronization setup, where all other devices are then slaved to Pro Tools word clock output.
With Pro Tools|HD systems, clock output can be configured for 1x word clock, or 256x Slave
Clock for Digidesign Legacy I/Os (such as 888|24
I/O). See the Pro Tools|HD Getting Started Guide for more information on clock output and Legacy I/Os.
To set Ext. Clock Output:
1 Choose Setup > Hardware in Pro Tools.
2 Click the Ext. Clock Output pop-up menu and select an available signal.
3 Click OK to close the Hardware Setup dialog when you have finished.
If the Legacy Port is enabled (as opposed to the Expansion Port) then the Ext. Clock
Output automatically switches to
Slave256x. To reset the Ext. Clock Output, the Port Settings button must be set back to
Expansion and the Legacy I/O must be set to
No Interface. (To set a Legacy I/O to No Interface, select its name in the Peripherals list, then choose No Interface from the
Interface pop-up menu.)
Session Setup Window
The Session Setup window lets you configure various time code-related settings on your system. The window also includes display-only areas for session sample rate, file format, and bit depth.
Pro Tools LE systems with DV Toolkit 2 support various time code-related settings
(such as Time Code and Feet+Frame Timebase rulers). For a complete list, refer to the
DV Toolkit 2 Guide.
Session Setup Window
The Session Setup window is organized into three view sections. Session displays and settings are displayed at the top of the window.
The SYNC Setup & Session Offsets section, and the Time Code Settings section, can be shown or hidden using their dedicated expand/collapse triangles. See Figure 50 on page 795.
Clock Source
To show the Session Setup window:
â–
From a Pro Tools session, choose Setup > Session.
To expand SYNC Setup & Session Offset section:
â– Click the SYNC Setup & Time Code Offsets expand/collapse triangle.
The controls in this section configure settings of
Digidesign SYNC Peripherals. Settings are provided for Clock and Positional Reference, Video
Format, and Variable Speed Override.
To show Time Code Settings section:
â–
Click the Time Code Settings expand/collapse triangle.
The controls in this section provide time code generation and freewheel options, and separate pull up and down selectors for audio and video rates.
Session displays and settings
SYNC & Time Code
Offsets section
SYNC Setup settings
Time Code Settings section
Generator settings
External Time Code
Offset settings
Pull Up/Pull Down settings
Freewheel settings Time Code Reader offset
Figure 50. Session Setup window with a SYNC Peripheral
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 795
Session Displays and Settings
Sample Rate
This display indicates the sample rate for the current session.
Bit Depth
This display indicates the bit depth for the current session.
Audio Format
This display indicates the file format for files recorded in the session.
Clock Source
Use this menu to configure the system Clock
Source. You can choose between a SYNC peripheral, an internal clock source from a Digidesign peripheral, or an external clock source connected to a Pro Tools|HD audio interface.
Changes made to Clock Source in the Hardware Setup dialog will be reflected in the
Session Setup window and vise versa.
Clock Source Options
SYNC When using a SYNC Peripheral, Pro Tools receives its clock source from the SYNC peripheral. The SYNC Peripheral can in turn reference an external clock source, selected in the SYNC
Setup section of the Session Setup window.
Internal In Internal mode, your system references your Digidesign peripheral’s internal clock and plays back at the session’s sample rate.
External Clock Sources Depending on your
Pro Tools|HD audio interface, external Clock
Source options can include AES/EBU, S/PDIF,
S/PDIF Optical, ADAT Optical, TDIF, and Word
Clock (optional word clock rates are available at
796 Pro Tools Reference Guide higher session sample rates). External sources can be any multiple of the “base” rate. The base rate is 44.1 kHz for 88.2 and 176.4 kHz sources.
The base rate is 48 kHz for 96 and 192 kHz sources. If an external source is chosen and no valid sync clock is detected at the External Clock
In, the I/O will return to Internal mode.
If a SYNC Peripheral is enabled in the
Peripherals dialog, and is correctly connected in the Loop Sync chain, the SYNC peripheral can be the Loop Master, and
Pro Tools|HD audio interfaces will clock as Loop Sync slaves.
For more information on external clock sources, refer to your SYNC peripheral documentation.
System Delay
When Delay Compensation is enabled, this display indicates the total amount of delay (in samples) applied by the system to compensate for plug-ins and mixer routing delays.
Session Start
Use this field to specify a SMPTE start frame lo-
cation for your session. See “Setting a SMPTE
Session Start Time (Start Frame)” on page 800.
Incoming Time (Current Time)
This display indicates incoming time code.
Time Code Rate
This pop-up menu lets you set the SMPTE time code rate for the current session.
Feet+Frame Rate
Feet+Frame rates for sessions can be set with the
Feet+Frame Rate selector. Supported rates are
23.976, 24, and 25 fps.
Set this rate to match the rate of the film projector, or the video if the film projector speed is taken into account. For example, doing a Telecine transfer from a 24 fps film projector to
NTSC video would necessitate the projector running at 23.976 fps. This is regardless of whether the session is using pull down audio or not.
Time Code 2 Rate
This pop-up menu lets you set a secondary frame rate that can be displayed in the ruler alongside the main Timecode ruler. This lets you reference frame rates in the Timeline that are different from the session time code rate.
SYNC Setup and Time Code
Offsets
(Pro Tools HD Only)
Sync Setup
The controls in the SYNC Setup section let you configure SYNC peripheral settings, including clock reference, positional reference, video format, and VSO.
Clock Reference This menu lets you set the
Pro Tools clock reference.
â—† When using a Digidesign SYNC peripheral, the Clock Reference selector lists all supported clock types for the SYNC peripheral.
â—† When using Pro Tools|HD systems without a
SYNC peripheral, choices include any currentlyenabled digital format or source available from your Pro Tools|HD I/O (such as AES, S/PDIF, or
1x Word arriving at the Pro Tools|HD interface’s
Word Clock In port).
Positional Reference Use this menu to set the time code source for Pro Tools to use for positional reference.
Video Format Use this menu to set the session for NTSC or PAL format.
\
Variable Speed Override (VSO) Variable Speed
Override (VSO) requires a Digidesign SYNC peripheral.
When a SYNC peripheral is connected to a
Pro Tools|HD system, the VSO controls are located in the SYNC Setup section of the Session
Setup window.
VSO controls in the Session Setup window
Refer to your SYNC peripheral documentation for instructions on using VSO to varispeed Pro Tools playback.
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 797
Locked Indicator The Locked indicator stays lit when the SYNC peripheral is locked to the selected clock reference. The Locked indicator flashes if the selected clock reference source is missing or out of lockable frequency range.
Speed Cal Indicator This indicator provides the accuracy of the incoming clock reference. The
Speed Cal indicator is lit when the output frequency is within 200 ppm (0.02%) of the selected sample rate. The Speed Cal indicator turns off when the output sample rate is not at the expected (or target) rate.
External Time Code Offsets
In the External Time Code Offsets section,
Pro Tools lets you compensate for devices that are consistently offset by a fixed number of frames (such as some color–corrected video masters), or for material that starts at a different time than the session.
Pro Tools provides three different types of Session Start Time Code Offset settings. These offsets include:
• MMC (MIDI Machine Control)
• 9-Pin (Serial machine control)
• Synchronization peripherals (such as a
Digidesign SYNC peripheral, or a MIDI interface that provides MIDI Time Code).
Positive and negative offset values can be entered to offset Pro Tools time code display later or earlier, respectively.
Unique values can be defined for each of these three types offsets, or you can link all three to adjust in unison.
If you are using Digidesign’s MachineControl option, additional options for External Time
Code Offsets are available. See the MachineControl Guide for more information.
Time Code Settings
Generator
The Generator lets you enable Pro Tools generation and output of LTC and MTC. For more in-
formation, see “Generating Time Code” on page 806.
Using Peripheral This option outputs time code from the device selected in the Synchronization page of the Peripherals dialog.
Using MTC This option outputs time code to the destination selected in the Synchronization page of the Peripherals dialog.
Freewheel
The choices in the Freewheel section let you configure how Pro Tools will freewheel , or continue playback if time code is interrupted or corrupted. Use these options to protect against errors that can occur if your SMPTE time code source has “drop outs” or temporary lost signals.
None No freewheel is applied.
Frames Sets a number of frames to freewheel, from 1 to 120 frames. This value defaults to 8 frames, which is the recommended setting for most applications.
Jam Sync Lets Pro Tools trigger synchronization to incoming time code, and continue to play back even if time code input is completely interrupted. It can be useful if time code is damaged, or has been accidentally erased from your source tape.
798 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Pull Up/Down
When Pro Tools is used in conjunction with a
SYNC peripheral, or a third party peripheral that supports pulled sample rates, this option allows you to “pull up” or “pull down” the current sample rate.
For general information, see the Pro Tools Sync &
Surround Concepts Guide . For more information
on applying pull factors in Pro Tools, see “Pull
Up and Pull Down” on page 802.
Remember, pull up and pull down are applied differently in different workflows.
Make sure you check each project’s specific workflow before you begin your work.
Time Code Reader Offset (Sync Offset)
This field lets you set a trigger offset for incoming
MIDI Time Code (anywhere from –100000 to
+100000 samples). This allows you to create a permanent offset to fine-tune the point at which Pro Tools synchronizes relative to incoming time code. For example, a value of –50 makes an event in Pro Tools occur 50 samples before the same event in the incoming MIDI
Time Code. Use this to compensate for timing differences between various SMPTE-to-MIDI
Time Code converters or analog-to-digital/digital-to-analog converters.
Preparing to Work with SMPTE
The first step when preparing to work with
SMPTE is to choose an appropriate SMPTE frame rate. Pro Tools supports all standard SMPTE frame rates. If you are working with SMPTE striped tape, it is important to know the frame rate. In some cases, a SYNC peripheral can be used to do this.
For a full explanation of SMPTE frame rates, see the Pro Tools Sync & Surround
Concepts Guide .
Configuring Pro Tools for
SMPTE
Synchronization and MachineControl system settings are enabled in the Pro Tools Peripherals dialog. These settings are system settings, and remain constant regardless of the particular session you are working on. Configure these settings before opening a session.
MachineControl is supported on
Pro Tools|HD systems only.
Other settings are configured in the Session
Setup window, such as the session Time Code rate, the Feet+Frames rate, the session start frame, and time display format. These settings are session-specific settings. These settings can only be configured when a session is open.
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 799
Selecting a SMPTE Format
To choose a SMPTE format:
1 In Pro Tools, choose Setup > Session.
2 Choose a frame rate (SMPTE format) from the
Time Code Rate selector.
3 Enter the Time Code Freewheel frames (if any)
in the designated box (see “Freewheel” on page 798).
Setting a SMPTE Session Star t
Time (Start Frame)
The Session Setup window also allows you to set a SMPTE Start Frame for your session. Video work tapes are rarely striped beginning at a
SMPTE frame address of 00:00:00:00. You can quickly enter a start time for your session based on an appropriate frame number from your project tape. The Pro Tools SMPTE-related functions (such as Spot mode) will then use this value as their reference for the session’s start point.
Start Time When Striping Tape
If you are generating time code, it is a good practice to stripe your time code beginning at
01:00:00:00 (subtracting time for initial black, bars and tone, or logos). This prevents problems that can occur with some synchronizers when the striped time code crosses from 23:59:59:29 to 00:00:00:00 (commonly referred to as the
“midnight” boundary).
To set a SMPTE Start Time for your session:
1 Choose Setup > Session.
2 Enter a SMPTE frame number in the Session
Start field.
To capture an incoming SMPTE address as the session start time:
1 Click in the Session Start field.
2 Begin playback of the time code source.
3 At the location where you want to capture the incoming value, press Equal (=) in the numeric keypad.
4 Press Enter to accept the value. You can then edit the captured address. The session uses the frame number you enter as its SMPTE start frame when online.
If there are existing regions on the tracks and you are changing the original SMPTE start frame to a later time (from 00:00:00:00 to 01:00:00:00, for example), all existing regions on tracks will remain in their relative positions, but will start later by the time value added to the start frame.
5 If you are changing the session start time in an open session in which tracks already exist, a warning dialog appears after Session Setup window. Choose from one of two options:
Maintain Time Code Places the additional session time at the start of the session, and keeps existing regions in their original time code locations.
Maintain Relative Position Places the additional session time at the start of the session, and maintains the relative position of existing regions to the new start frame. For example, if you change the session start frame from 01:00:00:00 to 00:59:00:00, Pro Tools adds one minute of session time to accommodate the new start frame, and moves all existing regions earlier in time to maintain their relative position to the start frame.
800 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Redefining a Time Code Position
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
Use this command to redefine the current time code position and session start time. By creating an insertion point (or selection), and then entering the new time code position for that location, the session start time will be recalculated based on the new, relative Time Code location.
To redefine a current Time Code code position:
1 With the Selector tool, click in a track (or make a selection) where you want to redefine the position.
If your insertion or selection is not on a grid boundary, it will round to the closest boundary.
2 Choose Setup > Current Time Code Position.
3 Enter a new SMPTE frame number in the dialog to correspond to the time code shown in the dialog.
4 Click OK.
Redefining a Feet+Frames
Position
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
Use this command to redefine the current
Feet+Frames position. By creating an insertion point (or selection), and then entering the new
Feet+Frames position for that location, the session start time is recalculated based on the new, relative Feet+Frames location.
Typically, this command is used for integrating test tones, pre-roll, Academy leader, and similar pre-program material into Pro Tools sessions.
To set a relative frame position for a session
(Feet+Frames):
1 With the Selector tool, click in a track (or make a selection) where you want to redefine the position.
If your insertion or selection is not on a grid boundary, it will round to the closest boundary.
2 Choose Setup > Current Feet+Frames Position.
3 Enter a Feet+Frame position to correspond to the time code shown in the dialog.
4 Click OK.
Displaying Time in SMPTE Frames
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
In Pro Tools, you can set the Main Time Scale to
Time Code (SMPTE) and this will be displayed in the Main Counter. Though Pro Tools will still synchronize to incoming SMPTE time code if the Time Scale is displayed in Bars:Beats, Minutes:Seconds, or Feet.Frames, it is usually more useful to use SMPTE time code as your reference.
To set the Main Time Scale to SMPTE Time Code, do one of the following:
â– Choose View > Rulers > Time Code.
– or –
â– Click the Main Counter selector in the Edit window and select Time Code.
Selecting Main Time Scale with Main Counter selector
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 801
Pro Tools displays time code values in the currently selected SMPTE frame rate.
Sub Counter and Sub Time Scale
Display
You can display a Sub Time Scale in the Sub
Counter. For example, if the Main Time Scale is set to Time Code, and you want to compare
SMPTE time to “wall clock,” when you are using
29.97 Non-Drop frame rate, click the Sub
Counter selector and select Min:Secs as the Sub
Time Scale.
Pull Up and Pull Down
Pro Tools supports up to 4% pull up and pull down, with support for an additional 0.1% up or down. Separate rates can be set for session audio and video (when video has been imported or captured into the session).
When referring to 4% pull up and pull down, the precise percentages used in pull ups is
4.167%. See Table 36 on page 804.
While a Digidesign SYNC peripheral is not required in order to use the extended pull up and down options provided in Pro Tools, a SYNC peripheral is the only device that can be controlled from within Pro Tools, and that recalls and restores pull factors automatically when a session opens. Other synchronization peripherals must be configured manually.
Pull up and down settings do not affect time code generated by a SYNC peripheral.
Configuring Pull Up and Pull Down
To pull up or pull down audio or video:
1 Choose Setup > Session.
2 From the Time Code Settings section of the
Session Setup window, select a Pull Up/Down
Rate.
Audio Rate Pull Up and Down
Video Rate Pull Up and Down
Session Setup window
Audio Rate Pull Up/Down Controls audio sample
rate. See “Audio Sample Rate Pull Up and
Video Rate Pull Up/Down Controls video rate.
See “Video Frame Rate Pull Up and Down” on page 805.
The choices available in these menus are determined by the session frame rate. Combinations can be applied by choosing from both menus.
4% pull factors are not available in 176.4 and 192 kHz sessions.
The choices available in these menus are also determined by the Preferences and Auto Match
Pull Factors settings in the Time Code Rate menu. See “Extended Pull Up and Pull Down” on page 803 and “Auto Match Pull Factors” on
802 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Extended Pull Up and Pull Down
Preference and Session Setup Controls The Audio Rate Pull Up and Down menu offers all possible combinations of pull ups and pull downs for the audio sample rate, regardless of the session frame rate.
In addition, if there is a QuickTime movie in the timeline, the video rate can be pulled up or down by 0.1%, regardless of the session frame rate. Though not an approved workflow, earlier versions of Pro Tools also enabled pull down of
QuickTime video clips when audio was pulled down, so this option is included in Pro Tools
5.3.1 and higher to maintain compatibility with earlier sessions.
Auto Match Pull Factors
Auto Match Pull Factors is available from the session Time Code Rate menu in the Session
Setup window. When Auto Match Pull Factors is enabled, Pro Tools adjusts audio and video playback rates as needed to match any changes to the current session Time Code Rate.
Auto Match Pull is applied relative to the current pull up setting. While enabled, if the session frame rate is changed in such a way that the video would have to be pulled by an unsupported amount, the video remains unaffected.
This setting is latching, is not enabled by default, and its state is stored with the session.
Example of Auto Match Pull Factors
Auto Match Pull Factors links audio and video pull factors when changing session frame rate.
For example, assume a Pro Tools session is set to a frame rate of 25 fps, the audio and video are both playing with no pull ups, and Auto Match
Pull Factors is enabled.
If you then change the session Frame Rate to
24 fps, both the Audio and Video Rate Pull settings would change by –4.0% (the appropriate pull setting required by the change in frame rate).
Auto Match-enabled pull factors are applied to any existing Audio Rate Pull Up/Down or Video
Rate Pull Up/Down settings. For example, if audio was already being pulled –0.1% when you changed the session Frame Rate from 29.97 to
24 fps, then the Audio Rate Pull Up/Down menu would switch to None.
Audio Sample Rate Pull Up and
Down
The Audio Rate Pull Up/Down menu applies pull up or down factors to session audio record and playback. All pull rates are available, regardless of session frame rate.
Audio Rate Pull Up/Down menu in Session Setup
See also “Auto Match Pull Factors” on page 803.
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 803
Audio Rates and Pull Up/Down Options
Table 36 lists actual sample rates of each pull up and pull down option and combination
(rounded to the nearest whole Hz):
Table 36. Sample Rates at Pull Up and Pull Down Settings
Pull Up/Down
+4.1667% and +0.1%
44100
45983
48000
50050
Sample Rate
88200 96000
91967 100100
+4.1667% 45938 50000 91875 100000
45892 49950 91783 99900 +4.1667% and –0.1%
+0.1%
–0.1%
–4.0% and
+0.1%
44144
44056
42378
48048
47952
46126
88288
88112
84757
96096
95904
92252
–4.0%
–4.0% and
–0.1%
42336
42294
46080
46034
84672
84587
92160
92068
176400 n/a n/a n/a
176576
176224 n/a n/a n/a
192000 n/a n/a n/a
192192
191808 n/a n/a n/a
804 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Video Frame Rate Pull Up and
Down
The Video Pull Up/Down selector lets you change the frame rate of QuickTime movie playback independently from the audio pullup/down rate. The selector is located below the
Audio Rate Pull Up/Down menu in the Session
Setup window.
Video Rate Pull Up/Down menu in Session Setup
See also “Auto Match Pull Factors” on page 803.
The choices available in the Video Rate Pull
Up/Down menu depend on the file format and frame rate of the QuickTime movie. Video pull rates are saved with the session.
Effect of Using Pull Up or Pull Down
The following sections describe how related
Pro Tools features are affected by pull up and down rates.
Time Code Ruler
Video pull up and down does not affect the Time
Code ruler. Be sure to set the session Frame Rate to the correct frame rate for your project. For example, if working with 24 fps video and you pull the video up by 4%, switch the session Frame
Rate to 25 fps to keep the Time Code ruler aligned. Similarly, if working with 24 fps video that is pulled down by 0.1%, switch the frame rate of the session to 29.97.
When working with 25 fps Avid media and the video is set to pull down by 4%, set the session
Frame Rate to 24 fps.
Plug-ins
For proper operation at larger (4%) pull rates, plug-ins must utilize sample clock instead of an absolute time clock. All Digidesign plug-ins are based on sample clock.
Higher Sample Rates and Pull Factors
4% audio pull rates are not available in 176.4 and 192 kHz sample rate sessions.
No Video Recording with Pull Ups
(Avid Video Peripheral Required)
Video may not be recorded to the timeline if a video pull up is selected. If the video track is record-enabled while video pull ups are enabled, or if you attempt to set a video pull up rate while the video track is record-enabled, Pro Tools will post a dialog and disallow video recording. To proceed with digitization, reset the Video Rate
Pull Up menu to None.
Putting Pro Tools Online
To trigger playback or recording from an external source, the Pro Tools Transport must be placed online . This tells Pro Tools to listen for incoming time code.
To put the Pro Tools Transport online, do one of the following:
â– Choose Options > Transport Online.
â– Click the Online button at the far left of the
Transport.
â– Press Control+J (Windows) or Command+J
(Mac).
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 805
The Online button flashes while Pro Tools waits for a SMPTE frame to trigger playback. When time code is received, playback begins and the
Online button becomes highlighted. The Edit
Selection indicators in the Edit window, and the
Incoming Time field in the Session Setup window display the incoming time code.
To take Pro Tools offline, do one of the following:
â– Deselect Options > Transport Online.
– or –
â– Deselect the Online button in the Transport window.
Recording Online
The Operation Preferences page contains two options that affect how Pro Tools initiates recording when online.
Record Online at Time Code (or ADAT)
Lock Makes online recording begin as soon as
Pro Tools receives and locks to time code or
ADAT sync. In this case, you do not need to make an insertion or selection in a track to designate a start point.
Record Online At Insertion/Selection Makes online recording begin wherever you have placed the insertion point in a track. Recording then continues until Pro Tools stops receiving time code. If you make a selection in a track,
Pro Tools will record online only for the length of the selection.
Generating Time Code
Using a SYNC peripheral, Pro Tools can generate
SMPTE and MIDI Time Code (MTC). You can then make Pro Tools a master synchronization source with other devices slaved to it.
A SYNC peripheral cannot generate 30 fps,
24 fps, or 23.976 fps time code while locked to video input or video reference
A SYNC peripheral cannot generate 30 fps,
24 fps, or 23.976 fps time code while it is locked to a video clock signal. If you set Pro Tools to generate 30 fps time code while the SYNC peripheral is locked to a video clock signal, the
SYNC peripheral will actually generate at the
NTSC color standard 29.97 fps. Pro Tools can generate time code at non-NTSC frame rates if you use the internal clock or external word clock on the SYNC peripheral as a synchronization source.
To generate time code using a SYNC peripheral:
1 Connect the SYNC peripheral LTC Out to the
SMPTE in connector on the devices you are slaving. If you are slaving a device that recognizes
MTC, connect the MTC OUT connector of the
SYNC peripheral to the MIDI IN connector of the slaved device.
2 Make sure your SYNC peripheral is powered on.
3 In Pro Tools, choose Setup > Peripherals and click Synchronization.
4 In the Digidesign Synchronization Device section of the Synchronization page, select Enable
SYNC Peripheral.
5 Click OK to close the Peripherals dialog.
806 Pro Tools Reference Guide
6 Choose Setup > Session, and choose the appropriate frame rate from the Time Code Rate pop-up menu.
If you change time code rates in the middle of a session, many SMPTE-to-MIDI Time
Code converters need to be turned off and turned on again to be able to recognize the new frame rate.
7 In the SYNC Setup section of the Session Setup window, choose a clock reference from the
Clock Reference selector. Not all clock choices are available at all sample rates. See “External
Clock Sources” on page 796.)
8 Click the Online button on the Transport, then click Play. Pro Tools generates and outputs time code from the SYNC peripheral.
Using MIDI Machine Control
Pro Tools provides the capability to transmit location information to external devices and to control their transports using MIDI Machine
Control (MMC).
Controlling External Devices
Using MMC
Any device that supports MMC can be controlled directly from within Pro Tools, with either the device or Pro Tools acting as clock master.
The external devices supported by Pro Tools implement “open loop” communications only. Because of this, while Pro Tools is the Transport
Master, any direct operation of the receiving device’s transport will not be communicated back to Pro Tools. Instead, you can use the Transport pop-up to select the external device (MMC in the pop-up) and use the Pro Tools on-screen transport controls to drive the device.
Pro Tools does not support remote track arming of MMC-controlled external devices. You need to manually arm tracks for recording on the external device.
Digidesign’s MachineControl option supports remote track arming for Sony 9-pin
and V-LAN enabled devices. See “Remote
Enabling MIDI Machine Control in
Pro Tools
Pro Tools as MMC Master
When Pro Tools is the Master, it sends MMC commands to the slave device and receives MTC information back from the slave device.
To slave an external device to Pro Tools using
MIDI Machine Control:
1 Connect a MIDI Out port on your Pro Tools
MIDI interface to an appropriate port on the slave device.
2 Connect the MTC out from the slave device to a MIDI In port on your Pro Tools MIDI Interface.
3 In Pro Tools, choose Setup > Peripherals and click the Synchronization tab.
4 Deselect Enable SYNC Peripheral if it is selected.
5 From the MTC Reader Port pop-up menu, select the MIDI In port to which the slave device is connected (the source of MTC information from the slave device).
6 Click the Machine Control tab in the Peripherals dialog.
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 807
7 In the MIDI Machine Control (Master) section, select Enable.
Machine Control page of the Peripherals dialog
8 In the MIDI Machine Control (Master) section, select the MIDI Out port to which the slave device is connected from the pop-up menu.
9 Set the MMC ID number for which this information will be sent in the “ID” field.
MMC commands contain an ID number to identify which machine should respond to the
MMC command. There are 128 MMC ID numbers, from 0–127. The default of ID #127 is a special setting that transmits to all 128 MMC IDs.
With a setting of 127, Pro Tools will transmit
MMC commands to all MMC IDs.
10 Set a pre-roll time for your MMC slave device. Pre-roll is needed to provide the device with sufficient time to lock to the time code transmitted by Pro Tools. This value will vary depending on the external device. If the pre-roll time is insufficient, the device may not be ready to lock until after the current time code position has passed.
11 Click OK to close the Peripherals dialog.
12 In the Pro Tools Transport window, choose
Transport = MMC.
Pro Tools will now be able to control the selected device’s transport and act as the clock master.
13 To have the Pro Tools transport chase the playback location of the slave device, click the
Online button in the Transport window.
Pro Tools as MMC Slave
When Pro Tools is the slave, it receives MMC commands from the master device and sends
MTC information back to the slave device.
In order for Pro Tools to receive MMC commands, the MMC source must be enabled in the Input Devices dialog. For more informa-
tion, see “Enabling Input Devices” on page 298
To slave Pro Tools to an external device using MIDI
Machine Control:
1 Connect a MIDI In port on your Pro Tools
MIDI interface to an appropriate port on the master device.
2 Connect a MIDI Out port on your Pro Tools
MIDI Interface to the MTC in port on the master device.
3 In Pro Tools, choose Setup > Session.
4 In the Time Code Settings section of the Session Setup window, select Using MTC.
5 Choose Setup > Peripherals and click the Synchronization tab.
6 Deselect Enable SYNC Peripheral if it is selected.
7 From the MTC Generator Port pop-up menu, select the MIDI Out port to which the master device is connected (this the destination of MTC information from Pro Tools).
8 Click the Machine Control tab in the Peripherals dialog.
808 Pro Tools Reference Guide
9 In the MIDI Machine Control (Slave) section, select Enable.
To control external devices from the Pro Tools
Transport:
â– Select either Pro Tools or MMC from the
Transport pop-up in the Pro Tools Transport window. The selected item will act as Transport
Master.
Machine Control page of the Peripherals dialog
10 Set the MMC ID number (channel) on which this information will be received in the “ID” field.
11 Click OK to close the Peripherals dialog.
Pro Tools will now respond to MMC commands from the external device.
Operating MMC Devices with the
Pro Tools Transport
You can use the Pro Tools Transport window as the remote controller for all your enabled devices (such as a nonlinear video deck). To do so, set the enabled devices to listen to the address you enter for MMC. The Transport window will then drive the Pro Tools transport and any slaved devices.
Choosing a Transport Master
• When the Transport Master is set to
Pro Tools, the playback position is governed by the on-screen cursor in Pro Tools.
• When the Transport Master is set to MMC, the playback position is governed by the external device’s play position.
MMC Transport Settings
When using MMC, you can set the following options for machine transport behavior in the
Synchronization Preferences page.
Machine Chases Memory Location When selected, navigating to a specific location in a session with a Memory Location causes a connected transport to chase to that location.
Machine Follows Edit Insertion/Scrub When selected, navigating to a specific location in a session by moving the selection point or by scrubbing a track causes a connected transport to chase to that location.
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 809
Taking a Device Offline
Use the Online pop-up menu in the Transport
Master selector to take a MIDI (or Machine) device offline.
To take a device offline:
1 Click the Transport Master selector.
2 Click on the Online pop-up menu and deselect the device (Machine or MIDI) by clicking on it. Device choices depend on the current Transport Master and which devices have been set up in Pro Tools.
Online pop-up menu
Deselecting a device to take it offline
To bring a device back online, click and reselect it in the Online pop-up menu.
The Online pop-up menu will only display devices that have been properly set up in
Pro Tools.
To set up MIDI devices, see “Enabling MIDI
Machine Control in Pro Tools” on page 807.
To set up machine devices, see the Machine-
Control Guide.
Setting Minimum Sync Delay
Lock-up time delay is the amount of time your system’s devices need to achieve synchronization “lock.” This amount varies for each device.
Pro Tools lock up delay is set by entering a value for Minimum Sync Delay in the Synchronization window of the Peripherals dialog. The lowest value available is 15 frames. Find the shortest possible lock-up time that your equipment can operate at consistently, and set this as the Minimum Sync Delay. On systems utilizing Digidesign MachineControl, enabling the Use Serial
Time Code setting will make machines lock up much faster. (Serial time code requires both the
SYNC peripheral and external devices to be locked to house video reference.)
To set a Minimum Sync Delay:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences, and click Synchronization.
2 Enter a number of frames in the Minimum
Sync Delay field.
3 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
Configuring Minimum Sync Delay for External
MMC Devices Locked to House Sync
When controlling a house-synced device from
Pro Tools through MMC, the device will first lock to the MMC location and then align the color framing. Within house sync code are 4 frames for ensuring color frame lock. If the minimum synchronization setup time is less than the time required to achieve both location and color frame lock, playback will begin before the device has aligned the color frames. In this scenario, you should set the Minimum Sync Delay to be more than the time required for color frame lock. This is not a problem with a SYNC peripheral, which will drop out of lock until the color frame is locked.
810 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Setting Pro Tools LTC Source
When locking Pro Tools to a stable time code source, enable the Stable LTC Source preference.
When selected, this option suppresses the normal 1-second wait time before Pro Tools attempts to lock to incoming LTC.
To set the Pro Tools LTC Source option:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences, and click Synchronization.
2 Do one of the following:
• For stable time code sources (such as an
LTC generator), select the Stable LTC
Source option.
• For time code sources such as tape decks, deselect the Stable LTC Source option.
3 Click OK.
MIDI Beat Clock
Some MIDI devices such as drum machines, hardware sequencers, and arpeggiators can only synchronize to MIDI Beat Clock. To synchronize these devices to Pro Tools, you can transmit
MIDI Beat Clock to them. Many plug-ins also support MIDI Beat Clock.
To transmit MIDI Beat Clock:
1 Choose Setup > MIDI > MIDI Beat Clock.
2 In the MIDI Beat Clock dialog, select the Enable MIDI Beat Clock option.
Remote Track Arming
Digidesign’s MachineControl™ option for
Pro Tools allows you to remotely arm tracks on supported 9-pin (or V-LAN for transport only) decks. Without MachineControl, Pro Tools does not support remote track arming of external devices. MachineControl lets Pro Tools act as the master or slave to external Sony 9-pin (or V-LAN for transport only) machines, in addition to providing remote track arming from within
Pro Tools.
Choose Setup > Machine Track Arming Profiles to configure your system, and choose
Window > Machine Track Arming to display the Machine Track Arming window.
MIDI Beat Clock dialog
3 Select the devices you want to receive MIDI
Beat Clock. If your MIDI interface does not support transmitting MIDI Beat Clock to separate ports, only the interface appears as a destination.
4 Click OK.
For information on remote track arming with MachineControl, see the MachineControl Guide .
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 811
Spotting Regions to SMPTE
Frame Locations
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
Spotting is the process of assigning music and sound cues to specific SMPTE frame locations in a film or video. This function can be used to spot:
â—† Entire regions, selected with the Time Grabber tool. Multiple regions can also be selected, and
Pro Tools will reference the first region in your selection.
â—† A specific location within a region, by clicking with the Selector tool at that location, and choosing Region > Identify Sync Point.
â—† Sessions or tracks, dragged from a browser to the session Timeline or Region List.
Information in these fields is displayed in
SMPTE Time Code, Minutes:Seconds,
Feet.Frames, Samples, or Bars & Beats, depending on which Time Scale format is selected.
Spot Mode
In Spot mode, a region in a track can be quickly spotted by simply clicking it with the Time
Grabber tool.
You can also drag a region from a DigiBase browser, or from the Region List, to a track while in Spot mode.
The Spot Dialog
The Spot Dialog appears when you drag a region to a track or click a region with the Time Grabber tool in Spot mode. The numeric fields function as both data displays and editing controls for the currently selected regions.
Spot dialog
A highlighted numeric field indicates the current active field for numeric entry editing. Entering a value in a field allows you to move a selected element to the time location that you enter. The Start, Sync Point, and End fields are accessible when the Time Grabber tool is active.
Only the Start or End (depending on where you click the mouse) and Duration fields are active
when one of the Trim tools is active (see “Using the Trim Tools in Spot Mode” on page 814).
To increase or decrease SMPTE values in the Spot dialog by a specific number of frames, press Plus (+) or Minus (–) on the numeric keypad, enter a number, and press the Enter key.
Use Subframes Option
A subframe is 1/100th of a frame. The Use Subframes option enables you to use these smaller units for greater accuracy. This command adds an additional time field in the SMPTE
812 Pro Tools Reference Guide
hours:minutes:seconds:frames box, which appears as the far right time field when enabled.
Use a Period (.) to separate subframe values from whole frames.
To spot a region to a specific SMPTE frame:
1 Choose Window > Edit.
2 Set the Main Time Scale to Time Code. (See
“Setting a SMPTE Session Start Time (Start
3 Click the Spot button at the top left of the Edit window to put Pro Tools into Spot mode.
Additional time field with “Use Subframes” enabled
Subframe measurements are not available in the Current Time field.
Capturing Time Code
Pro Tools also allows you to easily capture frame locations on-the-fly in the Spot dialog by pressing the Equal key, or by clicking the Current
Time button while valid time code is being received by Pro Tools. With VITC, you can accurately capture a paused or “crawling” VTR’s
SMPTE location.
When Time Code is selected for the Time Scale, pressing the Equal key captures the incoming time code. When Bars:Beats is selected for the
Time Scale, pressing the Equal key will capture to the nearest measure.
Although the Capture Time Code button works with free-running Linear Time Code (LTC) or
VITC, frame numbers of a paused frame can only be captured with VITC.
SYNC peripherals can read VITC. With
MachineControl and a SYNC peripheral, you can also read serial time code.
To use Remote mode with MachineControl, you will need an approved serial port. For a complete list of currently approved ports, see www.digidesign.com.
Spot mode enabled
4 Identify the SMPTE frame location where you want to trigger playback of your region by pausing your video deck on that frame.
5 With the Time Grabber tool, click a region in a track, or in the Region List, and drag it into a track. The Spot dialog appears.
6 Enter the SMPTE frame location by doing one of the following:
• If you are using VITC, you can press the
Equal (=) key on the numeric keypad, or click Current Time Code to enter a paused
VTR’s current SMPTE location.
– or –
• If you are using LTC, when Time Code is selected for the Time Scale, press the Equal
(=) key on the numeric keypad to capture the incoming time code. When Bars:Beats is selected for the Time Scale, press the
Equal key to capture the nearest measure.
7 If you recorded the region while online, you can use the Original Time Stamp button to recall and enter the SMPTE frame location at which the region was originally recorded. You can also access a user-defined Time Stamp in the same
fashion. See “Time Stamping” on page 814 for
more information.
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 813
8 Click OK to close this dialog. The region spots to the chosen SMPTE frame location. When the session is online, this frame number will trigger playback of the region.
Auto-Spotting Regions
The Pro Tools Auto-Spot Regions option simplifies the task of spotting regions even further. If you are using VITC with this option enabled, or
MachineControl software, you can pause your video at an appropriate SMPTE frame location, click a region with the Time Grabber tool, and the region will be automatically spotted to the current time code location.
You can also use MachineControl’s serial time code ability to auto-spot by enabling Machine-
Control and enabling serial time code in the peripheral.
To Auto-Spot a region:
1 Choose Options > Auto-Spot Regions.
2 If you are using VITC, identify the SMPTE frame location where you want to trigger playback of your region by pausing your video deck on that frame.
3 Click the region with the Time Grabber tool.
The region will be automatically spotted to the current time code location (or machine location).
Clicking a region with any of the Trim tools will allow you to trim the region to the current time code location.
Using the Trim Tools in Spot Mode
You can use the Spot dialog to trim your regions, including start/end/duration times and referencing incoming time code addresses. If you click a region with any of the Trim tools in Spot mode, the Spot dialog will appear, allowing you to enter a value in the Start or End and Duration fields to specify exactly where you want to trim the region’s beginning or end. Use this to edit the length of a region to correspond to a particular visual “hit point.”
Trimming a region that contains a sync point
(see “Identifying a Synchronization Point” on page 816) does not affect the SMPTE location of
the sync point, unless the region is trimmed past the sync point.
Time Stamping
Pro Tools time stamps every region recorded online with the original SMPTE time at which audio was recorded. You can recall this original
SMPTE time for a region by clicking the Original
Time Stamp button in the Spot dialog.
You can also spot a region to a separate user-defined SMPTE time stamp, defined using the
Time Stamp command in the Region List popup menu. Once the region is time stamped using this command, you can click the User Time
Stamp button to re-spot a region to its user-defined SMPTE location.
Auto-spotted regions are spotted by their start times, unless you have identified a
Sync Point (see “Identifying a Synchronization Point” on page 816). If the region con-
tains a Sync Point, the region is spotted to it.
814 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Show Original Time Code in
Regions
This command displays the original “time stamped” SMPTE times in all regions currently placed in tracks. This SMPTE frame number represents the time at which the region was originally recorded online with Pro Tools, and does not necessarily reflect the region’s current
SMPTE location in a track.
To display Original Time Stamps in regions:
â– Select View > Region > Original Time Stamp.
To hide Original Time Stamps:
â– Select View > Region > No Time.
To time stamp a region (or regions) with a new
SMPTE frame number:
1 In a track, select the region that you want to time stamp.
2 From the Region List pop-up menu, choose the Time Stamp command.
Creating a User Time Stamp
If you want to create a separate user-defined
SMPTE time stamp, you can use the Time Stamp command in the Region List pop-up menu. This command lets you select a region (or regions) and redefine its SMPTE time stamp. The Original
Time Stamp and the User-Time Stamp are then stored with your session.
When audio is first recorded, the User Time
Stamp will match the Original Time Stamp, but you can change the User Time Stamp at any time using the Time Stamp command. This feature is particularly useful in post production situations where the SMPTE time code on video
“work prints” often changes from one edit revision to another.
Time Stamp dialog
3 Enter a new SMPTE time by doing one of the following:
• Enter the numbers manually (with the help of the arrow keys).
• Click the Current Time Code button (or press the Equal key), if you want to capture the incoming time code address.
• Click the Current Selection button, if you want to enter the start time of the current on-screen selection.
4 Click OK to close this dialog.
This command can be used in “batch mode” to set new time stamps for several regions at a time.
To do this, simply select several regions and choose the Time Stamp Selected command. One after another, a dialog will open for each region, allowing you to quickly enter new values.
Once entered, the user time stamps can be displayed in all regions currently placed in tracks.
To display User Time Stamps in regions:
â– Choose View > Region > User Time Stamp.
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 815
To hide User Time Stamps:
â–
Choose View > Region > No Time.
Identifying a Synchronization
Point
The Pro Tools Identify Sync Point command lets you identify a specific point within a region for audio spotting purposes.
Imagine the following sound effects spotting scenario: You have a single sound effect that consists of a creaky door slamming shut, followed by a few seconds of ambient reverberation. The slam portion of the effect—which you must precisely match to picture—occurs neither at the very beginning of the audio file nor at the very end. It is somewhere in the middle, making it tough to spot. In this scenario, use the Identify Sync Point command to create a point in the region and synchronize that point to a
SMPTE frame.
For more information on Sync Points, see
To create a sync point in a region:
1 Do one of the following:
• Click with the Selector tool at the point in the region that you want to synchronize to a SMPTE frame location.
– or –
• Press the Down Arrow key while playing back.
2 Choose Region > Identify Sync Point. The current SMPTE time is automatically entered as the
SMPTE location for the sync point. A small down arrow appears at the bottom of the region, with a vertical, light grey line indicating the location of the sync point.
Sync Points
Sync points
816 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Troubleshooting
Synchronization
If you are having problems getting SMPTE synchronization to work properly, the following suggestions may help you troubleshoot and solve common problems.
Use the Incoming/Current Time Field in the
Session Setup Window as a Reference
The Incoming Time indicator in the Session
Setup window indicates whether or not
Pro Tools is receiving time code. If this field appears to be inactive when inputting time code into your time code reading device, check your hardware device settings, the device’s connection to your computer, and your Multimedia
Setup (Windows) and AMS (Mac).
When using MachineControl, the Incoming
Time indicator displays 9pin code, even though the LTC device may not be connected.
Stripe SMPTE Before You Record
All tapes in your setup (both audio and video) must be striped with SMPTE Time Code before any audio is recorded onto them or to Pro Tools.
If tapes aren’t striped, your system may seem to work, but synchronization will never properly occur. The machines and Pro Tools will drift farther and farther apart the longer they run.
The same problem occurs when audio is recorded into Pro Tools without a resolved SMPTE source (for example, if it was recorded before the current session). The audio cannot be accurately synchronized with an analog tape recorder or video tape deck, since the Pro Tools audio was not recorded referenced to the SMPTE time code from the analog tape deck or video tape deck.
Resolve All Components of Your System
When striping time code, make sure that the time code generator and the video record deck are resolved to the same crystal reference. For example, when striping 29.97 Drop Frame time code onto a VTR, both the SMPTE generator and the VTR should be resolved to the same “black burst” or house sync generator. During playback, the master deck should be resolved to
“black burst” or house sync.
This convention provides compatibility for your tape between the record and playback passes, and when it’s played back in other facilities on different equipment. This also means that when playing back a tape striped with time code, the playback deck should be resolved to the same synchronization rate as the record deck was resolved to at the time of the striping. When you stripe time code using an audio transport, it should be “free-running” and unresolved, but should be resolved with a house sync-referenced synchronizer during playback.
Know the True Frame Rate on Your Media
If you get your media from a production company instead of recording them yourself, be absolutely sure that they indicate the SMPTE frame rate used on the tape correctly. Several time code formats use the same frame count
(such as 23.976 fps and 24 fps) yet they run at slightly different frame rates per second.
A Digidesign SYNC peripheral (and some thirdparty products) can be used to help determine frame rate.
Chapter 35: Working with Synchronization 817
29.97 fps Non-Drop Rate Not Recognized
29.97 fps Non-Drop is a slightly slower version of 30 fps Non-Drop time code. When 29.97 fps
Non-Drop is used with color video, each video frame matches up with each SMPTE frame without having to use a drop-frame coding. This makes any frame number mathematics much simpler, since no frame numbers are dropped.
Some hardware and software devices do not recognize 29.97 Non-Drop as a separate frame rate.
For example, any standard SMPTE-to MTC-converter does not explicitly recognize it. You must set the convertor to expect 30 fps Non-Drop instead. In fact, many devices that read SMPTE work acceptably by reading 29.97 Non-Drop if they are set to expect 30 fps Non-Drop.
Any SMPTE reader that uses the time code numbers to make real-time calculations (as Pro Tools does when it tries to trigger and synchronize to
SMPTE) also needs to know that the frame format is 29.97 and not 30 fps. Since Pro Tools allows this choice of frame rate this does not really pose a problem. The problem exists because many users cannot readily distinguish 29.97 from 30 fps.
Even though NTSC tapes only use 29.97, some production companies will distribute video work prints striped with 29.97 fps but mark them as “30 fps NTSC,” by which they actually mean 29.97 fps Non-Drop.
By the time you get the tape, you may have no idea what’s actually on it. Feeding 29.97 Non-
Drop to Pro Tools when it’s set for 30 fps Non-
Drop will result in timing errors of about 1.8 frames per minute, causing audio playback to trigger out of sync.
Use a Consistent Clock Source
When possible, media files should be played back using the same sync reference signal they were recorded with. This assures the closest match between record and playback sample rates.
818 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Chapter 36: Working with Video in
Pro Tools
This chapter covers video features in Pro Tools.
Differences between QuickTime and Avid video support are noted throughout.
For detailed information on features that apply specifically to working with Avid video in Pro Tools, see the Avid Video Peripherals Guide.
Introduction
Pro Tools lets you do the following with video:
• Create video tracks and import video to the
Timeline
• Lock video tracks
• Import video into Pro Tools using menu commands or drag and drop
• Extract audio from QuickTime movies
• Scrub audio in tandem with video
• View video in the Video window or output it through FireWire to an external monitor
• Bounce the video track to a QuickTime movie
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 and
Pro Tools HD let you do the following with video:
• Import multiple video files into the Timeline
• Create multiple video tracks with Quick-
Time movies and Avid video in the Timeline
• Select from multiple video playlists on each video track
• Mix multiple codecs in video tracks
• Organize, group, and edit video regions in the Timeline much like audio regions
• Organize, group, and edit video regions with audio regions
• Manage video regions
• Undo multiple video operations
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 819
About QuickTime
Using QuickTime Movies in
Pro Tools
Pro Tools supports the import, playback, and editing of QuickTime movies.
QuickTime Requirements
Quicktime is required for Pro Tools if you plan to include movie files, or import MP3 or MP4
(AAC) files in your sessions. QuickTime for
Windows XP is available as a free download from the Apple website (www.apple.com).
For information on which version of Quick-
Time is compatible with your version of
Pro Tools, visit the compatibility pages of the Digidesign website
(www.digidesign.com).
QuickTime Movie Playback
Performance Options
The Operation Preferences page provides three options for QuickTime Playback Priority:
Normal This setting gives no extra priority to movie playback over other screen update tasks such as metering, moving faders, and so on. In most cases you should use this setting.
Medium This setting gives QuickTime movie playback a higher priority relative to other
Pro Tools screen update tasks. Use this setting if you experience inconsistent QuickTime movie playback with the Normal setting.
Highest This setting gives QuickTime movie playback highest priority. In this mode,
Pro Tools disables screen activity and requires you to use the Spacebar to stop playback. Use this setting if you require uninterrupted Quick-
Time movie playback.
See also “FireWire Playback of QuickTime
Hard Drive Tips for Best Performance
For best results, always use dedicated video-only and audio-only drives.
For complete information on hard drive requirements, visit the Digidesign website
(www.digidesign.com).
Applying Pull-Ups to QuickTime
Movies
Applying a pull-up to QuickTime movies in a session may have unpredictable effects on the playback of any Avid video in that session. Only use video pull-up for sessions that do not contain Avid video.
Before Starting Your Project
Before you start any project that requires working with video, consider the following:
Frame Rate Before receiving video, obtain the frame rate. Use this frame rate when setting the frame rate of your Pro Tools sessions and when capturing video.
Creator Application and Codec Before receiving video as media files, find out the application and codec used to create those files. Then confirm that you can play those files in Pro Tools. It is always a good idea to get a sample file in advance.
820 Pro Tools Reference Guide
QuickTime Movie Time Code Burn-in Before receiving QuickTime movies, request the time code display to be “burned in” (superimposed) if possible. This ensures that Pro Tools places the file at the correct time code location in the
Timeline.
Sufficient Space on Video Drives Ensure sufficient space is available on dedicated video-only drives. Video files take up significantly more space than audio, and must be kept on separate drives from audio files to prevent performance problems.
2 In the New Tracks dialog, do the following:
• Select Video Track from the Track Type pop-up menu.
– and –
• Enter the number of new video tracks.
3 Click Create.
A new empty video track appears. Video tracks may appear slightly different depending on your system configuration or the type of video added to a video track.
Video Tracks
Video tracks let you add or import video to the
Timeline, as follows:
• Pro Tools LE lets you add or import one video track per session, with a limit of one video playlist and one QuickTime movie on that track.
• Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 let you add multiple video tracks to the Timeline, with multiple video playlists and multiple QuickTime movies per track.
• Pro Tools HD with an Avid video peripheral lets you mix QuickTime and Avid video in the
Timeline (but not together on the same video track).
To create a new video track:
1 Choose Track > New.
Empty video track
Main Video Track
The main video track is the video track that is currently online, and will be played back with any audio in the session.
When the main video track is offline, you can play back the audio in your session without playing back the video. When the video is offline, the Video Online button changes to grey so you can tell at a glance whether your video is offline or simply playing black fill.
If no video track is currently online, the main video track is the video track that was last online.
New Tracks dialog
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 821
To select the main video track:
â–
Click the Video Online button of any track that is offline (grey) to put it online (blue), making that track the main video track.
Main video track
Video Online button (offline and online, respectively)
Multiple Video Tracks in the
Timeline
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
You can add multiple video tracks to the Timeline, but only one video track can be played back at a time. This track is known as the main video track.
You can perform all of the same operations with video playlists as you can with audio playlists, including:
• Duplicating a playlist
• Creating a playlist
• Assigning a playlist to another video track
• Renaming a playlist
• Deleting a playlist
For more information, see “Playlists” on page 352.
Multiple Codecs on an Individual
Video Track
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
A single video track can contain video regions compressed with different video codecs. However, once the first video file has been added to a session, all additional video files added to the
Timeline must have the same video engine rate as the first video file.
Multiple Video Track Playlists
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
Playlists provide an easy way of changing back and forth between alternate versions of a video track.
Playlist selector
Video Track Controls and
Indicators
Video Track View
The video track can be viewed in Frames View or in Blocks View, both of which display all video region boundaries and metadata. Video frame images are displayed only in Frames View.
When switching from Blocks mode to
Frames mode during playback, the video track will not update to displaying frames until playback is stopped.
822 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To set the view for the video track:
â–
On the video track, select Frames or Blocks from the View Options pop-up menu.
Frames View
In Frames View, video data is displayed as pictures in the video track. These pictures are computed based on the video image, and scale according to your track zoom and height settings.
They allow you to easily find a scene or sequence in the video track.
Blocks View
In Blocks View, video frames are replaced by colored blocks.
Video track in Blocks View
Video Track Type Icons
A video track displays a QuickTime icon or an
Avid icon depending on the type of video added to it. No icon displays when the video track is empty.
QuickTime icon
Avid icon
Video track in Frames View
Frames do not display properly if you change zoom settings during playback. Black frames are drawn until playback is stopped. You should stop playback before changing zoom settings if you want to view frames.
If video pull-up or pull-down is enabled, frames do not change position.
Frames View Performance
When using Frames View to view movie content in the video track, your computer may exhibit reduced or sluggish performance. If this happens on your computer, hide the video track or switch to Blocks View.
Video tracks displaying QuickTime and Avid icons
You can add any supported video to an empty video track, in which case the icon will update and the video track will play back only that type of video.
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 823
Differences in Video Tracks with
QuickTime Movies and Avid Video
(Pro Tools HD Only)
When an Avid video peripheral (such as the
Avid Mojo SDI) is connected to your system and powered on, the following conditions apply:
• All video tracks display a Video Output selector, but only tracks containing Avid video display a Video Input selector.
• You can add Avid video to an empty video track.
• Only Avid video tracks contain a Record
Enable button.
See the Avid Video Peripherals Guide for detailed information on using the Record Enable button and the controls in the I/O
View.
Video Online Button
The Video Online button lets you select the main video track, switch that track online or offline, and see at a glance by color whether a video track is offline (grey) or online (blue).
To switch a video track online or offline:
â–
Click the Video Online button of any track that is offline (grey) to put it online (blue), making that track the main video track.
â–
Click the Video Online button of the main video track to take it offline, and Pro Tools will not output video.
Locking Video Tracks
You can lock one or more video tracks to prevent any video regions on those tracks from being edited.
When a video track is locked, Pro Tools restricts all editing operations involving the track (except for locking and unlocking video regions).
A locked video track displays a small lock to indicate that the video track has been locked and cannot be edited. (The lock does not appear if the Track Height of the video track is set to
Mini.)
Lock icon
Video track offline
Video track online
Video Online button (offline and online, respectively)
Locked video track
Locking or unlocking a video track does not alter the lock status of individual regions. If a region was locked before you lock the track, the region will still be locked when you unlock the track. However, unlocking a region in a locked track will not allow you to edit that region. It will behave as if the region were locked until you unlock the track.
824 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To lock a video track:
1 Select the video track or tracks you want to lock.
2 Do one of the following:
• Start-click (Windows) or Control-click
(Mac) the name of any selected video track, and select Locked.
– or –
• Right-click the name of any selected video track, and select Locked.
Lock icon time code rate manually with the Time Code
Rate pop-up menu in the Session Setup window.
In order for the grids and rulers to align with the actual frames of the video files in the Timeline, the session's Time Code Rate setting should be set to match the video engine rate (the frame rate of the first video clip added).
Video Engine Rate Indicator
The Video Engine Rate indicator displays only in the main video track (whether it is online or offline) and shows the video engine rate, which is the number of video frames per second output by Pro Tools.
Locked video track
Video
Engine
Rate
Setting the Video Engine Rate
The video engine rate represents the number of video frames output by Pro Tools per second, and is determined automatically by the frame rate of the first video file added to a session.
Video files subsequently added to the session must have the same video frame rate as the video engine rate.
The video frame rate is displayed for each video file in the DigiBase browsers, and the current video engine rate is displayed in the I/O View of the main video track.
See “Video Engine Rate Indicator” on page 825 for information on the Video En-
gine Rate indicator in the I/O View.
The video engine rate is independent of the session's time code rate, which determines the number of frames displayed per second in grids, rulers, and counters. You can set the session
Video Frame Rate
The Video Engine Rate indicator is normally black, but turns red if one of the following conditions are present:
• The video engine rate does not match the session’s current Time Code Rate setting.
– or –
• A pull-up has been applied to the video, causing the video engine rate to differ from the session Time Code Rate.
The Time Code Rate is set in the Session
Setup window. For more information, see
“Session Setup Window” on page 795.
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 825
Importing Video into Pro Tools
Pro Tools provides the following methods of importing video files into the Timeline, Region
List, and new or existing video tracks:
• Using the Import Video menu command
• Dragging from the Region List to the Timeline (Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with DV
Toolkit 2 only)
• Dragging from a DigiBase browser or from
Windows Explorer or Mac Finder
• Using the Import Session Data command
The video frame rate of the first video file added to a session determines the session’s video engine rate. Video files subsequently added to the session must have the same video frame rate as the video engine rate.
In general, audio and video media should be stored on separate dedicated drives.
When importing audio and video at the same time, however, Pro Tools may copy both to the same drive. To avoid performance problems, move the video to the desired video playback drive before importing the audio and video into your session.
When you import MPEG-2 video into
Pro Tools, only the video portion of the file is imported and the resulting video regions cannot be edited.
In a DigiBase browser, you can designate your audio drives to play or record audio but only transfer video, or vice versa. For de-
tailed instructions, see “Audio and Video
Volume Designators” on page 196.
Importing Video into Pro Tools Using the Import Video Command
The Import Video menu command lets you choose one or more video files to import into
Pro Tools.
When you use this method to import video into
Pro Tools, the Video Import Options dialog appears. This dialog contains multiple options for customizing how files are imported.
To import video into Pro Tools using the Import
Video command:
1 Do one of the following:
• Choose File > Import > Video.
– or –
• Press Alt+Control+Shift+I (Windows) or
Command+Control+Shift+I (Mac).
2 In the Select Video File to Import dialog, select one or more video files.
3 Click Open.
4 Configure the Video Import Options dialog as desired, and click OK to import video into
Pro Tools.
See “Configuring Video Import Options” on page 827 for detailed instructions.
Importing Video into Pro Tools with
Drag and Drop
You can drag and drop video files from a
DigiBase browser or from Windows Explorer or
Mac Finder to the Timeline, a track, a Track List, or the Region List.
When you use this method to import video into
Pro Tools, the Video Import Options dialog appears. This dialog contains multiple options for customizing how files are imported.
826 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To import video into Pro Tools using drag and drop:
1 Drag and drop one or more video files from a
DigiBase browser or from Windows Explorer or
Mac Finder to the Track List, Timeline, or an existing video track.
2 Configure the Video Import Options dialog as desired, and click OK to import video into
Pro Tools.
See “Configuring Video Import Options” on page 827 for detailed instructions.
Importing Video into Pro Tools Using
Import Session Data
You can use the Import Session Data command to import video from other Pro Tools sessions or
(with DigiTranslator 2.0) from an AAF or OMF sequence. Any video files you import must have the same video frame rate as the video files in the session.
For information on importing session data,
see “Importing Tracks and Track Attributes” on page 218. For detailed infor-
mation on importing AAF or OMF sequences into Pro Tools, see the
DigiTranslator Guide.
Dragging Video Files from the
Region List to the Timeline
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
You can add QuickTime movies to the Timeline by dragging and dropping directly from the Region List to a video track.
To add video files to a video track by dragging them from the Region List:
1 Select one or more video files in the Region
List.
2 In any Edit mode, drag the selected video files to a blank area in the Timeline (to create a new video track) or an existing video track (to place it within that track).
Configuring Video Import Options
The Video Import Options dialog appears when you import video into Pro Tools by using the
Import Video command or dragging video files from a DigiBase browser or from Windows Explorer or Mac Finder.
Video Import Options dialog
See “Bypassing the Video Import Options
Dialog” on page 828 for details on bypassing the Video Import Options dialog when dragging and dropping video files.
Destination Section
The Destination section of the Video Import
Options dialog lets you choose a general destination for imported video in Pro Tools.
Main Video Track The video file is imported directly to the track that is currently online
(known as the main video track) and into the
Region List. If no track is currently online, the video file will be imported to the last existing video track that was online.
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 827
New Track Each video file is imported into its own individual track and into the Region List.
Region List (Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only) Each video file is imported directly into the Region List, where it will be available to drag and drop into the Timeline.
Location Pop-Up Menu
If you do not select the Region List as a destination in the Destination section, the Location pop-up menu lets you choose precisely where in the Timeline Pro Tools places imported video.
Session Start Places the video file at the start of the session.
Song Start Places the video file at the Song Start position.
Selection Places the video file at the edit cursor position or within the selection (if one was made).
Spot Displays the Spot dialog, which lets you spot video to precise locations based on any of the Time Scales.
Original Time Stamp (Avid Video Only) Places
Avid video in the Timeline at a time code location that corresponds to the timestamps from the original source tape. With multiple video files, this places all video files in the Timeline at their respective original timestamps.
Additional Video Import Options
Gaps Between Regions (Pro Tools HD and
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2 Only) When you import more than one QuickTime movie or
Avid video file into a track, they will be shuffled together by default. This option lets you indicate the number of seconds by which each video clip will be separated when imported into the video track.
828 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Import Audio from File (QuickTime Movies Only)
When selected, the audio from the QuickTime movie you are importing will be extracted and placed into new mono or stereo audio tracks in the Timeline. (Mono or stereo audio with a sampling rate of 48 kHz or lower are supported.)
When unselected, only the video portion of the
QuickTime movie will be imported into
Pro Tools.
Remove Existing Video Tracks When selected, all existing video tracks will be deleted before
Pro Tools imports video into the session.
Remove Existing Video Regions When selected, all existing video regions will be removed from the Timeline and the Region List before
Pro Tools imports video into the session (but left on disk). This option is useful if you want to import a video file into the session with a video frame rate that does not match the current video engine rate.
See “Setting the Video Engine Rate” on page 825 for more information.
Clear Main Video Track Playlist When selected, all existing video regions in the currently-selected playlist on the main video track will be removed from the track before Pro Tools imports video into the session. No other playlists, video tracks, or video regions will be affected. (This option is only enabled if the main video track is selected as the Destination option.)
Bypassing the Video Import Options Dialog
You can bypass the Video Import Options dialog when dragging video files into Pro Tools. The video files are added exactly where you drop them in the Timeline following the current
Pro Tools editing mode.
To bypass the Video Import Options dialog when importing video into Pro Tools:
â– Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac) one or more video files from a DigiBase browser,
Windows Explorer, or Mac Finder into the Region List or the Timeline.
Extracting Audio from
QuickTime-Compatible Video
(QuickTime-Compatible Video Only)
You can extract the following audio file formats from QuickTime-compatible video files without importing the video:
• Qualcomm
• AAC (MPEG-4)
• Digital video audio streams
• MP3
• QDesign
• uLaw 2:1
• aLaw 2:1
• Intel ADPCM
• Microsoft ADPCM
• IMA 4:1
• 32-bit floating point
• 64-bit floating point
• 16-bit Big Endian
• 16-bit Little Endian
• MACE 6:1
• MACE 3:1
The audio is converted to the session’s sample rate and bit resolution, and a new region appears in the Region List for each imported file.
The regions are listed in the Region List with the region name, the number of the originating track, and the number of the region from the track.
To import audio from a QuickTime movie without importing the video, do the following:
1 Choose File > Import > Audio.
2 In the Import Audio dialog, navigate to the
QuickTime movie from which you want to import audio, and select it.
3 Under the Region section, click the name of the audio region you want to extract from the
QuickTime movie, and click Convert Region or
Add Region.
4 Select other audio files as desired, and click
Done to import the audio.
5 In the Audio Import Options dialog, choose whether to import the audio into a new track
(and the Region List) or the Region List only.
Sample Rate Conversion Quality
If you import QuickTime audio that was not originally recorded at the session’s sample rate, the sample rate is converted to match the audio to your session. Pro Tools allows you to choose the quality of the sample rate conversion by means of the Conversion Quality setting in the
Editing Preferences page.
There are five possible settings, ranging from
Low (lowest quality) to Tweak Head (highest quality). The higher the quality of sample rate conversion, the longer it takes to convert the bounced file.
To set the sample rate conversion quality:
1 Choose Setup > Preferences and click the
Processing tab.
2 Click the Conversion Quality pop-up menu and select a conversion setting.
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 829
Video Regions
You can create video regions that function in much the same way as audio regions.
Video region as displayed in Frames View in the
Timeline
A video region is a segment of video data, and can be a portion of video or an entire video file.
In Pro Tools, video regions are created from
QuickTime or Avid files, and can be arranged in corresponding video track playlists. Video regions can also be grouped, looped, and color coded.
When using Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2, you can add, edit, and change viewing options for video regions in the same ways as audio regions. All edits to video regions
are nondestructive. (See “General Video Editing” on page 831 for more information.)
Just like audio regions, video regions display in
Pro Tools in the Region List or the Timeline.
When using Pro Tools LE, the following limitations apply to video regions:
• You can add only one video region to a session. It can be played back, but cannot be edited and will not be listed in the Region List.
• When you import video or open a session created by Pro Tools HD or Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2, only the main or first available video track containing QuickTime regions will be imported. You can play back and view multiple regions, and tab through region boundaries. However, you cannot edit them.
Video Regions in the Region List
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
A video region displays in the Region List with a small video icon next to its name.
Video region icon
Video region as displayed in the Region List
For information on working with regions in
the Region List, see “The Region List” on page 357.
Showing or Hiding Video Regions in the
Region List
The Region List pop-up menu provides commands that let you show or hide video regions in the Region List.
830 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To show or hide video regions in the Region List:
1 In the Edit window, click the Region List popup menu, and choose Show.
2 Select the Video option to show or hide video regions.
General Video Editing
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
Most editing operations that are available for audio regions can also be applied to video regions. This section describes all available video editing operations. Unless noted, the procedure for each video editing operation is the same as its audio editing counterpart.
See the appropriate section in this guide for detailed information on performing editing operations.
Basic Video Editing Features
• Nondestructive editing
• Display of region names, region times, and other data in playlists
• Multiple video playlists
• Multiple Undo
• Video regions and video region groups in
Region List
• All Edit modes
• All Edit Tools (except for Time Compression Expansion and Pencil tools)
Playing and Selecting Video Track Material
• Selecting within video frame boundaries (see
“Selecting within Video Frame Boundaries” on page 832)
• Selecting and editing across multiple Video
and audio tracks (see “Selecting and Editing
Across Multiple Audio and Video Tracks” on page 832)
• Link or unlink track and Edit selections
• Auto-scroll video tracks
• Loop playback
• Universe window (see “Browsing Video in the
Video Universe Window” on page 835)
Working with Regions and Selections
• Capture regions
• Separate regions and Separate Grabber Tool
• Region overlap and underlap
• All trimming commands except for TCE
• Heal separated regions
• Place, align, slide, shuffle, and spot regions
• Sync points
• Nudging
• Shift command
• Quantize region to Grid (rounds to nearest video frame)
• Replace region command
• Cut, Copy, Paste, and Clear commands
• Special Cut, Copy, Paste, and Clear commands
• Repeat to fill selection
• Editing across multiple tracks
• Duplicate command
• Repeat command
• Region groups (see “Video Region Groups” on page 833)
• Region looping
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 831
Managing Regions
• Insert “silence” (see “Using the Insert Silence Command to Insert Space in Video
• Compact Selected (nothing happens to the video, and at least one audio track must be selected)
• All naming and displaying of region commands
Editing Caveats
The following caveats apply to video editing in
Pro Tools:
• MPEG-2 video in the Timeline cannot be edited.
• If you create and enable a track group containing audio and video tracks—and any audio track has region boundaries that do not line up with video frame boundaries— you cannot tab through those region boundaries.
Selecting and Editing Across
Multiple Audio and Video Tracks
You can create a selection across multiple audio and video tracks, and cut, copy, or paste audio and video simultaneously.
Before After
Selecting and editing across multiple tracks (Slip mode shown)
Audio and video that is selected and cut, copied, or pasted follow the current Edit mode.
General Editing Operations Not
Applicable to Video Regions
The following editing operations are applicable to audio regions, but are not applicable to video regions:
• Fades
• Mute/unmute regions
• AudioSuite plug-ins
• Waveform Repair with the Pencil tool
• Strip silence
• Consolidate regions
Selecting within Video Frame
Boundaries
Pro Tools does not let you select, play back, or edit a partial video frame. The following rules apply when selecting or editing video:
• When you make a selection in a video track, the selection boundaries follow the current
Grid setting but round to the nearest video frame boundary, as follows:
• If the selection includes more than half of a video frame, the video frame is included within the selection.
• If the selection includes less than half of a video frame, it is not included in a video selection.
832 Pro Tools Reference Guide
• When you paste a selection containing video to a video track, the insertion point automatically aligns with the closest video frame boundary.
When you paste audio and video simultaneously, this video frame re-alignment may result in the audio not being positioned exactly where you placed it. A warning dialog displays when this occurs.
Using the Insert Silence Command to Insert Space in Video Tracks
The Insert Silence command lets you insert space into a video track.
This command allows you to make a selection on a track (or tracks) and insert precisely that amount of space. You can also select across video and audio tracks, and use the Insert Silence command to insert audio silence and space simultaneously.
In Shuffle mode, all video data on the track is shuffled later in the track by an amount equal to the selection. In Slip, Grid, or Spot mode, the Insert Silence command works just like the Edit >
Clear command.
To insert space into a video track:
1 Make a selection in a track or tracks. The length of the selection determines the duration of the space inserted.
2 Choose Edit > Insert Silence.
Renaming Video Disk Files
When renaming audio regions in either the
Timeline or the Region List, you have the option of also renaming the audio files on disk. However, this does not apply to video files on disk.
To rename video files on disk, you must rename them in a DigiBase browser or in Windows Explorer or Mac Finder.
Video Region Groups
(Pro Tools HD and Pro Tools LE with
DV Toolkit 2 Only)
You can include video regions within region groups for the following operations:
• Creating region groups
• Creating multitrack region groups (including audio tracks)
• Editing region groups
• Creating fades and crossfades for audio files in region groups
• Importing and exporting region group files
See “Region Groups” on page 452 for de-
tailed information on working with region groups.
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 833
Using the Video Window
Pro Tools provides a Video window that lets you view, display, or scrub video.
Avid video displays in the Video window only when scrubbed or shuttled.
To display the Video window, do one of the following:
â– Select Window > Video.
– or –
â– Press Control+9 (Windows) or Command+9
(Mac).
Video window (with pop-up menu shown)
Changing Video Window Options
The Video window pop-up menu lets you do the following:
• Toggle online status of the main video track.
• Toggle output of QuickTime movies between the Video window and an external monitor via the FireWire port.
• Resize the Video window.
To toggle the online status of the main video track:
â– Right-click (Windows or Mac) or Control-click
(Mac) the Video window, and select Online.
To toggle output of QuickTime movies between the Video window and FireWire, do one of the following:
â– Choose Options > Video Out FireWire.
– or –
â– Right-click (Windows or Mac) or Control-click
(Mac) the Video window, and select Video Out
FireWire.
Resizing the Video Window
You can resize the Video window by dragging or using the Video window pop-up menu.
To resize the Video window by dragging:
â– Place the cursor at the bottom left or bottom right of the Video window, and drag the window to the size you want.
To resize the Video window by using the Video window pop-up menu:
â–
Right-click (Windows or Mac) or Control-click
(Mac) the Video window, and choose from the following resize options:
• Half Size
• Actual Size
• Double Size
• Fit Screen
Scrubbing the Video Track
Due to the latency introduced by all FireWirebased video peripherals, the video on an external monitor will not be in sync with the Scrubber tool. To scrub video without latency, you can scrub in the Video window.
If you scrub directly on the video track, only the video will scrub (no audio will play). If you scrub on an audio track, audio and video will scrub simultaneously.
834 Pro Tools Reference Guide
To scrub a video track:
1 Ensure that scrubbing in the Video window is enabled by selecting Options > Scrub in Video
Window.
2 Select the Scrubber tool.
Scrubber
Scrubber tool
3 Click in the video track and drag the Scrubber.
To scrub with finer precision, press the
Command key while scrubbing.
Shuttling the Video Track
Shuttle Lock mode lets you use the numeric keypad to shuttle up to two tracks forward or backwards at specific speeds: 5 is normal speed, numbers from 6 up to 9 provide increasingly faster fast-forward speeds, and numbers from 4 down to 1 provide progressively faster rewind speeds
(4 is the slowest rewind Shuttle Lock speed, 1 is the fastest). If multiple tracks are selected, only the first two tracks are shuttled.
To play the video track with the shuttle lock:
1 With Pro Tools HD, make sure the Operation preference for Numeric Keypad mode is not set
to Shuttle (see “Operation Preferences” on page 66).
2 With the Selector tool, click in the track where you want playback to begin. To shuttle on two tracks, Shift-click in a second track.
3 Press the Start key (Windows) or Control
(Mac) and a number on the numeric keypad:
0–9 (9 is fastest, 5 is normal speed, and 0 stops shuttling).
Once Shuttle Lock mode is initiated, Fast Forward and Rewind become highlighted in the
Transport window.
4 Press additional keys to change the playback speed, or press Plus (+) or Minus (–) to switch the playback direction (plus for forward, minus for backward).
5 To stop playback, press Start+0 (Windows) or
Control+0 (Mac).
To exit Shuttle Lock mode, do one of the following:
â– Click Stop in the Transport window.
– or –
â– Press the Spacebar.
Browsing Video in the Video
Universe Window
(Pro Tools HD Only)
The Video Universe, which is accessible from the Universe window, lets you view, navigate, zoom, and select video regions on the main video track.
The Video Universe window displays the center video frame of each video region in the main video track. Video frames are ordered sequentially according to their order in the Timeline, and the colored strip under each frame represents the color coding for that region.
To display the Video Universe window:
1 Make sure the Video Online button in the main video track is set to an online (blue) status.
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 835
2 Choose Window > Universe to display the
Universe window.
3 Right-click (Windows or Mac) or Control-click
(Mac) anywhere in the Universe window, and choose Video Universe.
Video Universe with video frames representing video regions on the main video track
Increasing or Decreasing the Size of
Video Frames
To increase or decrease the size of video frames in the Video Universe window:
â– Right-click (Windows or Mac) or Control-click
(Mac) anywhere in the Universe, and select Increase or Decrease.
Selecting Zoom Resolutions in the
Video Universe
When you move the cursor over the top half of a video frame in the Video Universe, it displays and behaves as a zoom tool. This tool lets you zoom in on one or more video regions to fill the entire Edit window display.
To use the Video Universe window to zoom video regions in the Edit window:
1 Move the cursor over the top half of any video frame until it becomes a zoom tool.
2 Do one of the following:
• To move the beginning of a video region to the far left of the Timeline while maintaining the current zoom resolution in the Edit window, click the video frame representing the region once.
• To zoom in on a video region so that it fills the entire Edit window, double-click the video frame representing the region.
• To zoom a range of selected regions so that they fill the Edit window, click and drag on the video frames that represent the regions.
Selecting Ranges in the Video Universe
When you move the cursor over the bottom half of a video frame in the Video Universe, it displays and behaves as a selector tool. This tool lets you select ranges within one or more video regions in the Edit window.
Video frame with selector tool
To use the Video Universe window to select ranges in video regions in the Edit window:
1 Move the cursor over the bottom half of any video frame until it becomes a selector tool.
Video frame with zoom tool
836 Pro Tools Reference Guide
2 Do one of the following:
• To place the cursor at the beginning of a video region, click the video frame representing the video region.
• To select an entire video region from start to end, double-click the video frame representing that region.
• To select one or more entire regions from start to end, drag the video frames representing the video regions.
If the Edit window does not display the selected video regions, it will automatically scroll to show the beginning of the selection.
Selecting Zoom Resolutions and
Ranges Simultaneously in the Video
Universe
When you move the cursor over a video frame in the Video Universe while pressing Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac), the cursor appears as a selector tool. This tool lets you zoom and select ranges simultaneously.
To use the Video Universe window to select and zoom simultaneously in the Edit window:
1 Move the cursor over any area of any video frame in the Video Universe window until it becomes a selector or zoom tool.
2 To select a range of video regions while simultaneously zooming to fill the Edit window, Altdrag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac) multiple video frames.
Playback of HD QuickTime
Movies
Pro Tools lets you import and play back Quick-
Time High-Definition video files.
When playing HD video through an Avid video peripheral or other device locked to a standard-definition video reference (such as a black burst generator), the display updates at the frame rate of the video reference.
Setting Session Time Code Rate for HD QuickTime Movie Import
When playing back QuickTime movies with frame rates higher than 30 fps, Pro Tools syncs properly only if the Time Code Rate in the Session Setup window is set to half of the video frame rate of the video files.
For example, to properly play back a QuickTime
HD movie at 59.94 fps, change the session’s
Time Code Rate to 29.97 frames per second.
To set the session’s Time Code Rate:
1 Choose Setup > Session.
2 In the Session Setup window, select the appropriate time code rate in the Time Code Rate popup menu.
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 837
FireWire Playback of
QuickTime DV Movies
With the addition of an external DV transcoder
(decoder), you can play QuickTime DV25 movies out through your computer’s Firewire port.
These can include QuickTime movies exported as QuickTime DV from Avid.
When playing DV movies via FireWire on
Mac, best performance is achieved by using a dedicated video-only hard drive.
Avid video peripherals support most Quick-
Time movie formats.
For the latest compatibility information on
Firewire transcoders, visit the Digidesign website (www.digidesign.com).
QuickTime DV25 performance may vary, depending on the specifics of your system and projects.
Supported QuickTime Movies
Consolidated and Referenced Media QuickTime
DV movies can be either complete (consolidated) Quicktime files (where media is copied into a Quicktime file) or Quicktime reference files (where just a small composition is in the
Quicktime file which references the original DV files).
Codec Requirements When exporting from
Avid, always use the Apple DV codec. Do not enable “Use Avid Codec” in the export dialog. If an
Avid-codec DV movie is imported into
Pro Tools, you will not be able to play it.
DV Stream Movies Pro Tools does not support audio from a DV Stream file. DV Stream files contain the entire data stream that has been transferred or recorded over the FireWire cable
838 Pro Tools Reference Guide from a camera. In this type of file, the audio and video data are stored in an interleaved fashion, as opposed to a QuickTime file where audio and video are stored separately.
See also “Exporting QuickTime DV from
Avid” on page 839.
Playing QuickTime DV Movies through the FireWire Port
To Play QuickTime DV Movies through the FireWire
Port:
1 Import a QuickTime DV movie into a
Pro Tools session. (See “Importing Video into
Pro Tools” on page 826 for detailed informa-
tion.)
2 Choose Options > Video Out Firewire.
When this item is enabled, Pro Tools will play
DV movies (NTSC or PAL) out the FireWire port to an external DV decoder. This can improve system performance by removing the need for the movie to be decompressed by the CPU and displayed on the computer screen.
If the Video window is open when video is playing out the FireWire port, it will display text indicating that video is playing out the FireWire port.
Compensating for Video
Monitoring Delays
You can compensate for delays in the video output that may be introduced by external decoders and certain types of displays
To compensate for delays caused by video monitoring devices:
1 Choose Setup > Video Sync Offset.
2 In the Set Video Sync Offset dialog, enter a value in the QuickTime Video Offset field that is appropriate to compensate for the delay caused by your video monitor chain. The amount of delay introduced varies based on your system and the type of video peripheral you are using.
When using an Avid peripheral with Quick-
Time, 18 quarter-frames is a good starting point, but you will need to verify the precise setting for your system. (Third-party devices are available to help you measure this delay.)
Video Sync Offset dialog
Once this value is set, it should not need to be updated unless you change components in your video monitoring chain (such as projectors or plasma screens).
Exporting QuickTime DV from Avid
The following instructions list export settings for Avid Xpress Pro. These settings are required to create QuickTime DV movies that can be played back in Pro Tools through the Firewire port.
To export a QuickTime DV reference movie for
Pro Tools Firewire playback, set the following:
1 Enable the following export options:
• Flatten video tracks
• Fill in spaces with black
• Render all video effects
• Use Apple DV Codec
• Enable the Apple DV codec
2 Make sure Use Avid Codec is not enabled.
These export settings can be saved in
Avid Xpress Pro as a default, simplifying future media exchange. Refer to your Avid
XPress documentation for more information on export settings and defaults.
Tips for Optimizing Movie Playback
When using Pro Tools to play QuickTime movies (without an Avid video peripheral), the quality of the playback is dependent on the speed of your computer and hard drive, the size (in pixels) of the movie, and the quality of the video hardware used to capture and play back the digitized video.
For more consistently smooth movie playback, here are some suggestions:
â—† Use a supported Avid video peripheral.
â—† Use the fastest computer possible.
â—† Disable the Automation preference for Faders
Move During Playback.
â—† Set Scrolling option to None (Options >
Scrolling > None).
â—† Reduce the size of the Edit window to the smallest possible size.
â—† Close unnecessary windows.
â—† Reduce the overall length of the SCSI chain of your computer system for improved throughput.
â—† Reduce the pixel size of the movie (for example, reduce it from 640 x 480 pixels to 320 x 240 pixels).
â—† Hide the video track when not needed.
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 839
Bouncing the Video Track to a
QuickTime Movie
When you have finished your final mix and synchronized your audio events to the movie, you can bounce the main video track (QuickTime or
Avid video) and a mono or stereo mixdown of your session to a new QuickTime movie.
You can choose from a variety of standard
QuickTime codecs, which are fully compatible with other QuickTime applications.
Because all formats and codecs have not been tested, you should verify the Quick-
Time movie bounced successfully.
Pro Tools cannot bounce audio or video to an MPEG-2 video file.
To bounce video and audio in the video track to a
QuickTime movie:
1 Finalize your mix.
2 Make sure the video track you want to bounce is currently the main video track. (The track’s
Video Online button must be highlighted blue.)
3 Make sure that all of the audio tracks you want to include in the bounce are audible (not muted or inactive).
4 Assign the output of each of the tracks you want to include in your bounce to the same stereo output or bus path.
5 Do one of the following:
• To bounce the entire session, click Return to Zero in the Transport window to go to the beginning of the session.
– or –
• To bounce a portion of the session, enable
Options > Link Timeline and Edit Selection, and make a selection in the Edit window.
6 Choose File > Bounce to > QuickTime Movie.
The Bounce dialog appears (if you are bouncing
QuickTime movies) or the Bounce to QuickTime dialog appears (if you are bouncing Avid video to QuickTime movies).
7 Select your mix’s output or bus path from the
Bounce Source selector.
8 If you are bouncing Avid to QuickTime and you want to configure QuickTime video settings, click Options.
9 Configure other settings as appropriate.
Pro Tools is qualified to bounce to Quick-
Time DV25. Bouncing to other formats may work but has not been tested.
See Apple documentation for detailed information on configuring QuickTime movie settings.
10 Click Bounce.
11 Select a destination for the new QuickTime movie, enter a new name, and click Save.
Bouncing video may take quite a bit longer than real-time, depending on the format of the source video, the format of the bounced video, and processing speed.
840 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Using Pro Tools LE to Import
Video from Other Versions of
Pro Tools
When you use Pro Tools LE to import video or open a session created by Pro Tools HD or
Pro Tools LE with DV Toolkit 2, some components of the session may open differently or not open at all, as follows:
• Only the main video track is displayed. If no video track was selected as the main video track when the session was saved, the first video track containing QuickTime movies in that session is displayed.
• Only the playlist that was chosen when the session was saved will be displayed.
• All QuickTime movies on the main video track will be displayed, but the video track will be locked and cannot be edited.
• All additional video tracks, playlists, and video regions will not be shown. However, they will continue to be saved with the session, and will be available if the session is opened on a system that supports them.
When using Pro Tools LE to work with video in such a session, you can do the following:
• Use the Tab key to move the Location Cursor to video region boundaries.
• Add and edit audio tracks.
• Bounce the video track to disk as a QuickTime movie.
• Export the session, including the full video track.
See “Bouncing the Video Track to a Quick-
Chapter 36: Working with Video in Pro Tools 841
842 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Index
Symbols
+ and – (see Plus (+) and Minus (–))
Numerics
16-bit
176.4 kHz
192 kHz
24-bit
3 Second Clip Hold option 65, 124
3 Second Peak Hold option 65, 123
A
active
Add Marker/Memory Location button 527
Add Tempo Change button 493, 509
adding
AES/EBU
AFL/PFL Mutes (Output Path) selector 61
AFL/PFL Path
After Playback Scrolling option 395
After Write Pass, Switch To option 76, 692
All MIDI Notes Off command 581
all tracks
selecting in Timebase rulers 405
Allow Latch Prime in Stop option 75
Allow Track Arm Commands in Local Mode option 79
alternate channels
Always Display Market Colors option 65
Always Fill Channel Strips When Banking option 74
Apply Real-Time Properties option 236
archiving
preparing with Compact Selected 488
Assignments View (Sends View option) 641
Audio During Fast Forward/Rewind option 66, 391
Index 843
audio files
Audio Pull Up and Pull Down 802
fitting to an Edit selection 412
Audio Track RecordLock option 69, 319
placing audio in multichannel tracks 767
AudioSuite
AudioSuite Buffer Size preference 76
auditioning
a region in the Region List 362
selection start and end points 408
Auto Input Monitoring mode 261
Auto Region Fade In/Out Length preference 70, 476
Auto Rename Region List command 489
AutoGlide Time preference 75, 787
844 Pro Tools Reference Guide
AutoJoin
AutoMatch
individual automation types 705 individual controls 705 individual controls with ICON 705
AutoMatch Time preference 75, 697
Automatically Copy Files on Import option 77, 228
Automatically Create Click Track in New Sessions option 77
Automatically Create Fades for Imported REX and ACID files option 72
Automatically Find and Relink 242
automating
and multiple output assignments 768
capturing and applying elsewhere 734
coalescing Trim automation 723
cutting, copying, and pasting 446, 717
display of fade boundaries and shapes 481
plug-in accuracy in bounce 753
writing to selection, selection start, or selection end 724
Automation Follows Edit option 697
Automation modes
Automation Preferences
Smooth and Thin Data After Pass option 712
Punch Preview button 737 suspending 737
Write Automation To commands 737
Auto-Name Memory Locations While Playing option 71, 528
Auto-Name Separated Regions option 71, 418
auto-naming
Avid
Avid Video Errors Stop Playback option 68
Avid Video NTSC Has Setup option 68
Avid Xpress DV
codec requirements for export 838
B
Back/Forward Amount preference 67
extending selections 392 repeating 392
backing up sessions automatically 68, 85
Bar|Beat Markers
from Identify Beat command 510
generated with Beat Detective 545
beat triggers
generating Bar|Beat Markers 545
groove templates
bit depth, for session 83, 796
Bounce to Disk command 743, 746
Help 753 recording a submix 753
sample rate conversion options 752 sample rate conversion quality 752
Bounce to QuickTime Movie command 840
bouncing
browsers
general information 104, 164, 169
Buffer Size
Index 845
bussing
submixing and effects processing 650
Bypass button
C
Calculator Entry mode (for numeric entry) 404
Calibration Reference Level preference 70
cancelling record takes 280, 305
capturing automation values 737
Catalogs
Center Playhead Scrolling option 396
Change Duration command 583, 598
Change Edit to Match Timeline command 411
Change Meter command 513, 515, 516
Change Timeline to Match Edit command 411
Change Velocity command 583, 596
channel mapping
chasing
Classic Numeric Keypad mode 17, 67
Clear All Clip Indicators command 123, 124, 642
Clear command (Region List) 363, 490
Clear Special commands 447, 720
Clear Trim Automation Track command 132, 711
846 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Click plug-in 272 click track 272
Clip Hold options
closing multiple plug-in windows 674
Coalesce Trim Automation options 76
Coalesce Trim Automation Track command 132
Coalesce VCA Master Automation Track command 132
Coalesce when Removing Slaves from VCA Group option 75
coalescing
Collection Mode, Beat Detective 554
Comments Fields (DigiBase) 179
Compact Selected command 363, 488
compatibility
compressed QuickTime audio formats 829
configuring
audio tracks for recording 277
connecting
effects units 685 external audio devices 685
Constant command (Tempo Operations) 504
continuous controller events 13
Continuous Scroll with Playhead option
Continuous Scrolling During Playback option 396 and half-screen 396
control surfaces
Controller Meter Path selector 59
Conversion Quality option 213, 752, 829
Convert WAV files to AES31/BroadcastWave option 77, 244
converting session
audio file format 88 bit depth 88 sample rate 88
Copy Special commands 446, 719
copying
all automation playlists for a track 446
MIDI notes with the Split command 601
track control settings to sends 644
Create Click Track command 272
creating
Mac and PC compatible sessions 247
Markers and Memory Locations 526
Crossfade Preference for Pre/Post-Roll option 72, 472
equal gain 469 equal power 469, 471
Current Feet+Frames Position command 801
Current Meter indicator 104 current tempo 104, 492
Current Time Code Position command 801
Cursor
Custom Shuttle Lock Speed preference 67
cutting
MIDI notes with the Split command 601
D
DAT recorder, recording from 293
database
default
Default Dynamics preference 73, 671
Default Note On Velocity preference 77, 563
Default Path Order selector 61
Default Region Color Coding options 66
Default Settings, for TC/E plug-in 77
Default Track Color Coding options 65
Degree of Thinning preference 74
Delay
delay
Delay After Play Command preference 79
Delay Before Locking to Time Code option 79
Index 847
applying to automatically bypassed tracks 659
bypassing 658 changing track delay 658
configuring Delay Compensation Engine 657
exceeding compensation limit 658
Plug-in Delay (dly) indicator 658
Delay Compensation Engine
Delay Compensation Time Mode option 70, 657
Delay Compensation View 125, 636
Delay Compensation View option 657
Delay for External Devices options 78
Delete Active Groups (Group List) commands 152
Delete Active Groups command 158
Delete Current Settings File command 676
deleting
deleting items
delta
destination folder for plug-in settings 676
destructive editing
Destructive Record mode 269, 282
DestructivePunch File Length preference 70, 329
848 Pro Tools Reference Guide
DIgiBase
DigiBase
Automatically Find and Relink 190
Comments
Create Catalog from Selection 174
deleting folders from Catalogs 183
Duration 177 region groups 177
modifiers (browser search) 185
Plus (+) and Minus (–) buttons 186
Search Criteria
shared network volumes 168 sharing database files 168
Spacebar Toggles File Preview 175
suitable volumes (see Transfer files) 188
Update Database for Selected 174
waveform display
Workspace
DigiBase and DigiBase Pro
DigiBase Pro
Copy Database Comments to Clip Names 175
Copy File Comments to Clip Names 175
saving a search as a Catalog 187
sharing catalog database files 168
DigiTranslator Integrated Option 230
Disable “Input” When Disarming Track (In “Stop”) option 69
and cross-platform sessions 267 and system volume 267
resizing the window 265 window 265
Disk Space window 268 options 268
Display (Group List) command 151
Display Events as Modified by Real-Time Properties option 77,
Draw Grids in Edit Window option 366
Draw Waveforms Rectified option 342
Show Meters in Sends View option 642
displaying
file info for audio regions 358
region names 340 region times 340
dither
resolution and Bounce to Disk 751
Index 849
divergence
drag and drop
from the Region List to tracks 424, 425
Draw Grids in Edit Window option 63, 366
Draw Waveforms Rectified option 63, 342
DSP
and inactive inputs and outputs 135
dubber
Duplicate Track command 128, 133, 691
duplicating
Duration
durations, for MIDI notes
editing with Change Duration command 598
making more legato 599 making more staccato 599 randomizing 599
DV
DV25 Movies
Dynamically Allocated Voicing 137
E
moving to region boundaries 406
Edit Insertion Follows Scrub/Shuttle option 66, 383
Edit insertion point
850 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Change Edit to Match Timeline command 411
Change Timeline to Match Edit command 411
Clear Special commands 447, 720
Copy Special commands 446, 719
Identify Sync Point command 434
Play Edit Selection command 412
Play Timeline Selection command 412
Repeat to Fill Selection command 447
Strip Silence command 483, 485
TCE Edit to Timeline Selection command 411
Trim Automation to All Enabled command 735
Trim Automation to Current command 735
Trim Region End to Fill Selection command 422
Trim Region End to Insertion command 421
Trim Region Start to Fill Selection command 421
Trim Region Start to Insertion command 421
Trim Region to Fill Selection command 422
Trim Region to Selection command 421
Write Automation commands 733, 734
Edit Selection Follows Region List Selection option 71, 399
Edit Selection indicators 98, 403
Edit selections
auditioning with Playhead enabled 412
copied from Timeline selection 411 copied to Timeline selection 411
edit smoothing, with Beat Detective 552
Edit Window Default Length preference 64
Edit Window Follows Bank Selection option 74
editing
nondestructively for audio 343
Auto-Name Memory Locations While Playing option 528
Auto-Name Separated Regions option 418
Crossfade Preference for Pre/Post-Roll option 72, 472
Edit Selection Follows Region List Selection option 399
Includes Take Region Lengths That Match option 288
Includes Take Region Names That Match Track Names option 287
QuickPunch Crossfade Length preference 314, 318
Region List Selection Follows Edit Selection option 358,
Separate Region Operates On All Related Takes option
Enable Session File Auto Backup option 68
enabling
Enforce Mac/PC Compatibility option 90, 247
equal gain crossfades 469 equal power crossfades 469, 471
All MIDI Notes Off command 581
MIDI Track Offsets command 580
Remove Duplicate Notes command 581
Expand to New Tracks command 133
Expanded Track Display 339, 716
Expanded Transport View 108, 289
Export MIDI Settings dialog
Apply Real-Time Properties option 236
MIDI File Format pop-up menu 236
Export Region Definitions command 230, 363
Export Region Groups command 240
Export Regions as Files command 228, 363
Export Selected Tracks as OMF/AAF command 230
Export Session Info as Text command 230
Export Settings button (I/O Setup) 57
exporting
audio 228 audio from regions 228
OMFI files 230 region definitions 230
to include adjacent regions 403 to Markers and Memory Locations 403 to region boundaries 403, 500
External MIDI instrument
external side-chain processing 683
Index 851
External Time Code Offsets 798
F
Fast Forward
incrementally 391 locating with 391
Feet+Frames position
field recorder
expanding alternate channels to new tracks 442
importing monophonic audio files 217 importing polyphonic audio files 217
File 748 file formats (audio) 748
Export Selected Tracks as OMF/AAF command 230
Export Session Info as Text command 230
Import Audio to Track command 214
Import Region Groups command 239
852 Pro Tools Reference Guide files
Find Matching Tracks option 222
Find Regions
Include Subsequently Added Regions 360
FireWire
First Selected MIDI Track preference 78
Flatten Performance command 583, 595
folders
frame rate
Frames View
G
Global MIDI Playback Offset preference 78, 580
editing breakpoints with 499, 714
Grid
Absolute 365, 433 configuring 365
Draw Grids in Edit Window option 366
setting the Grid value 433 suspending 433
grid panners in Mix and Edit 780
Grid/Groove Quantize command 583, 584
Group ID indicator
Group Name
groups
enabling 161 keyboard selection 161
linking Mix and Edit Groups 150
unlinking Mix and Edit Groups 150
H
half-speed playback 295 half-speed recording 295
hard drives
recording to system volume 267
hardware
updating I/O Setup after changing 52
Meters pop-up menu for 96 I/O 39
help
HFS+ drives
hidden tracks
and group edits 132 and groups 132
Hide All Floating Windows command 113
Hide and Make Inactive Track command 132
hiding
High Quality QuickTime Image option 68
Highest QuickTime Playback Priority setting 68, 820
Horizontal Zoom Out button 367
I
I/O Settings files
I/O Setup
I/O Setup dialog 43, 46 resizing the window 43
Identify Beat command 509, 510
Identify Sync Point command 434, 816
Ignore Errors During Playback/Record option 35
Import Audio to Track command 214
Import Key Signature Map option 224
Import Marker/Memory Locations 224
Import Region Groups command 239
Import Session Data command 218
Import Session Data dialog 219
Import Settings button (I/O Setup) 58
Import Settings command (plug-ins) 676
Import Window Configurations 224
Index 853
importing
audio and Conversion Quality 213
multichannel audio files from a field recorder 217
offline items from Catalogs 203
inactive
Master Faders and assignments 629
Include Control Changes in Undo Queue option 75
Include Sends in Trim Mode option 75
Includes Take Region Lengths That Match option 71, 288
Includes Take Region Names That Match Track Names option
Infinite Clip Hold option 65, 124
Infinite Peak Hold option 65, 123
MIDI Event List View Filter dialog 617
Input Only Monitoring mode 261
Input Quantize command 583, 604
Insert Silence command 486 and Shuffle mode 486
inserting
for hardware I/O 663 for plug-ins 663
making inactive (and active) 667
post-fader on Master Faders 628, 664
Instrument plug-in
Internal mode (Clock Source option) 796
internal side-chain processing 683
Items
J
K
key signature map
854 Pro Tools Reference Guide
L labeling
Latch Mode
Latch Record Enable Buttons option 68
Latching Behavior for Switch Controls in “Touch” option 74
latency for recording and monitoring 263
level faders
Level meters
Levels of Undo preference 72, 357
LFE
for audio tracks 123 for Aux Input, Master Fader, and Instrument tracks 123
examples of discrete versus contribution 777
Linear command (Tempo Operations) 504
Link Mix and Edit Group Enables option 73
Link Record and Play Faders option 68, 262
Link Selection button 397, 398
Link Timeline and Edit Selection option 397
Link Track and Edit Selection option 127, 398
linking
locating
Location indicators
locations, for MIDI notes
Lock Settings File command 676
Timeline Selection Markers 289
loop recording
and pre/post-roll 284 audio 284
copying and pasting automation 464
trimming with Loop Trim tool 379
looping
low latency monitoring
Bounce to Disk 264 during recording 264
Low Latency Monitoring option 263
M
Mac sessions
compatibility with Windows 247
Machine Chases Memory Location option 78, 809
Machine Cues Intelligently option 78
Machine Follows Edit Insertion/Scrub option 78, 809
Machine Track Arming window 811
Make Active/Inactive Track command 132
Marker/Memory Locations
tick-based and sample-based 525
Index 855
Master Faders
as master send level control 656
post-fader inserts 628 signal flow 628
Master View for tracks 338, 718
mastering
Matching Start Time Takes List preferences 71
measures
Medium QuickTime Playback Priority setting 68, 820
Selection Memory Locations 525
Memory Locations window 525, 529
viewing options for Markers 531
Merge mode (see MIDI Merge mode)
meter
meter map
Meter Ruler
extending an Edit selection to 514
meters
Metronome Click button 103, 273
856 Pro Tools Reference Guide
control surfaces 13 controller devices 13
patch name files (.midnam) 575 patch names 575
setting the Grid value for editing 562
sound source 13 tone generator 13
MIDI clips and Region List 358
MIDI File Format pop-up menu 236
MIDI files (see Standard MIDI Files)
MIDI notes
auditioning with the mini-keyboard 565
selecting with the mini-keyboard 565
Flatten Performance command 595
Grid/Groove Quantize command 584
Restore Performance command 594
Select/Split Notes command 602
MIDI Operations window 583, 584
Default Note On Velocity preference 563
Global MIDI Playback Offset preference 580
Pencil Tool Resolution When Drawing Controller Data option 573
Pencil Tool Resolution When Drawing Controller Data preference 78, 713
MIDI Replace mode 103, 271, 301
MIDI Setup commands
MIDI Track Offsets command 580
MIDI tracks
assigning to multiple channels 303
selecting a pitch range in 603
Minimize Additional I/O Latency option 35
Minimum Sync Delay preference 79, 810
Minutes:Seconds Time Scale 348
fades and regenerating 190 skipping 190
Mix Window Follows Bank Selection option 74
Mixing Preferences page
MMC (see MIDI Machine Control)
Modify Groups (Group List) command 151
Momentary Solo Latch option 144
monitoring
MIDI recording with MIDI Thru 299
mono
Move Song Start command 515, 520
moving
MTC (MIDI Time Code)
multichannel plug-ins 664, 771
Index 857
multilingual application support 254
multi-mono
multiple outputs
multiple tracks
extending selections to 404, 405
fitting audio regions to Edit selection 412
Mute Audio Inputs in Auto Input option 324
Mute Frees Assigned Voice option 145
Mute Record-Armed Tracks While Stopped option 69, 324
Mute/Unmute Region command 439
muting
N
New Group (Group List) command 151
New Memory Location dialog 290
New Track Default Output selector 60
New Tracks Default To Tick Timebase option 71
No Output
no scrolling during playback 395
Nondestructive Record mode 269
858 Pro Tools Reference Guide
recording to a new playlist 282
Non-Linear Transport Error Suppression option 79
Normal QuickTime Playback Priority setting 68, 820
MIDI and Instrument tracks 344 mini-keyboard 344 scrolling up or down 344
selection range 402 selection start/end points 402
numeric entry
Use Separate Play and Stop Keys 67
O
Object Select in Edit Window command 363
offline
files, relinking 174 files, selecting in DigiBase 174
on-the-fly punch recording
Open Ended Record Allocation preference 70, 268
opening multiple plug-in windows 674
Audio During Fast Forward/Rewind option 391
Auto Region Fade In/Out Length preference 476
Edit Insertion Follows Scrub/Shuttle option 383
Link Record and Play Faders option 262
Machine Chases Memory Location option 809
Machine Follows Edit Insertion/Scrub option 809
Open Ended Record Allocation preference 268
Operation/Destination Track pop-up menus 221
Operations menu
Link Timeline and Edit Selection option 397
Link Track and Edit Selection 127, 398
Low Latency Monitoring option 263
Optical
Optical (S/PDIF)
Link Track and Edit Selection option 127, 398
Mirror MIDI Editing command 559
Mute Frees Assigned Voice option 145
Video Out FireWire Port command
OR
Organize Plug-in Menus By option 64, 669
Output Options
outputs
default 5.1 paths and sub-paths 761
P
Page Scrolling option 390, 395
panning
multichannel automation playlists 790
Use Absolute Pan Linking option 73
Parabolic command (Tempo Operations) 505
Paste Special commands
To Current Automation Type 447, 720
pasting
paths
with Repeat to Fill Selection command 447
active and inactive 54 applying 54
sub-path surround examples 774
PEC/Direct Style Input Monitoring option 69
Index 859
resolution for inserted controller events 573
selecting the Pencil tool shape 560 shapes 560, 712
Pencil Tool Resolution When Drawing Controller Data option
Pencil Tool Resolution When Drawing Controller Data preference 78, 713
Performance Volume
pitch, for MIDI notes
transposing with Transpose command 600
Play Edit Selection command 408, 412
Play MIDI Notes When Editing option 77
Play Start Follows Timeline Selection option 66
Play Start Marker Follows Timeline Selection option 414
Play Timeline Selection command 408, 412
playback
and Edit selections 412 and Timeline selections 412
moving to region boundaries 413
playing
Edit selections with Playhead enabled 412
Timeline selections with Playhead enabled 412
Playlist selector 8, 353 playlists 8, 352
and nondestructive MIDI editing 346
automation playlists 353, 690, 698 auto-naming 353
plug-in controls
adjusting 681, 682 linking 681
Plug-in Controls Default to Auto-Enabled option 74
Plug-in Delay (dly) indicator 658
Plug-in selector
plug-in settings librarian 675
plug-in window
closing multiple windows 674 opening multiple windows 674
plug-ins
“Organize Plug-in Menus By” 669
automation accuracy in bounce 753
Channel selector for multi-mono 771
creating a default setting 678
making inactive (and active) 12
mono-to-stereo 664 multichannel 664 multi-mono 664, 770
Plug-ins Settings Select button 673
Plug-ins Settings Select button 673
860 Pro Tools Reference Guide
PRE settings
pre/post-roll
Preferences
Automatically Copy Files on Import option 228
DestructivePunch File Length 329
Mute Audio Inputs in Auto Input 324
Mute Record-Armed Tracks While Stopped 324
Preferences dialog 63 opening 63
Pre-Process using Standard Conform 552
Preserve Fades when Editing option 72
Preserve Folder Hierarchy command
Items To Copy
Pro Tools
Pro Tools LE
Pro Tools menu
Pro Tools video track
Program Change dialog 574, 575
pull up and pull down
and plug-ins 805 and rulers 805
Punch In Frame Offset preference 79
Punch Out Frame Offset preference 79
Timeline Selection Markers 289
punch recording
and pre/post-roll 283 audio 283
Q
Quantize
Quantize command
Quantize Regions command
quantizing
QuickPunch Crossfade Length preference 72, 314, 318
QuickTime
QuickTime movies
playback quality 820 requirements 820
QuickTime Playback Priority options
Index 861
R
randomizing
Real-Time Properties
Display Events as Modified by Real-Time Properties option 77
displayed in the Edit window 614
displayed in the MIDI Event List 613
Real-Time Properties View 608, 636
Real-Time Properties window 608
Recalculate Waveform Overviews command 363
Recall Memory Location Selection at Original Track option 71
Recompute Invalid Overviews option 64
Nondestructive Record mode 269
Record Online at Insertion/Selection option 70
Record Online at Time Code (or ADAT) Lock option 70
recording 277 a mono audio track 277 a stereo audio track 277
configuring Instrument tracks 301 configuring MIDI tracks 301
862 Pro Tools Reference Guide
with Round Robin Allocation 266
redefining
Feet+Frames position 801 time code position 801
reference or copy when importing 228
region boundaries
extending selections to 403, 500
region group file format (.rgrp) 238, 459
region group files
exporting to different hard drives 240
mixed 454 multitrack 454 regrouping 454
displaying file info for audio regions 358
Export Regions as Files command 228
repeating a previous search 360
Region List Keyboard Focus 361
Export Region Definitions command 230
Time Stamp Selected command 432
Timeline Drop Order command 424
Region List Selection Follows Edit Selection option 71, 358,
Ungroup All Regions command 454
Region Name
Right-click pop-up menu 114, 363
aligning to region start points 426
clearing Real-Time Properties 613
conforming with Beat Detective 550
displaying names 340 displaying times 340
dragging to multichannel tracks 451
extending selections to include 403
nudging regions with fades 478
placing at Edit insertion point 425
selecting 399 selecting all in a track 399
separating with Beat Detective 548
separating with Separation Grabber 419
shuffling 428 on multiple tracks 428
trimming to Edit insertion point 421 trimming unwanted data from 421
user-defined 334, 488, 490 whole-file audio regions 334
and Separate Region command 288
relinking
Remove Duplicate Notes command 581
removing
Rename command (Region List) 363, 488
Renamed Audio Files
renaming
Index 863
Repeat to Fill Selection command 447
repeating selections and regions 449
Replace Region command 363, 439
Restore Performance command 583, 594
Rewind
incrementally 391 locating with 391
RTAS plug-ins 665 additional latency 665 voice usage 665
RTAS Processors setting 32, 33
rulers
Conductor rulers 347 displaying all 347
Minutes:Seconds Time Scale 348
S
S/PDIF
Sample Rate Conversion options 221
sample rate conversion quality 213, 752, 829
Sample Rate Conversion Quality preference 77
Save Copy In command 88, 89, 247 saving a copy of a session 88
Save Plug-in Settings To command 676
saving the session file with a new name 87
Scale command (Tempo Operations) 507
scaling note velocities 568, 597
864 Pro Tools Reference Guide
Scroll Into View Track command 132
Scroll to Track Banks Controllers option 74
Scroll To Track command 127, 395
scroll wheel
and MIDI track’s Note display 344, 374
scrolling a Pro Tools window 393
zooming in the Edit window 374 zooming in the Edit windows 374
scrolling
Notes View up or down 344, 374
Pro Tools window vertically or horizontally 393
Continuous Scrolling During Playback 396
Scrub in Video Window command 835
scrubbing 383 a single audio track 383 and edit cursor 383
playback speed and direction 383 resolution 383
S-Curve command (Tempo Operations) 506
Select Parent in Project browser 199
Select Parent in Workspace command 363
Select Tracks in Group command 152
Select Unused Regions command 490
Select/Split Notes command 583, 601, 602
selecting
all regions in a track 399 all regions in all tracks 399
with Edit Selection indicators 403
Selection Changes Alternate Playlists 352
Selection commands
selections
across multiple tracks 399, 404
and Edit Groups 398 and hidden tracks 398 and Timeline Selection Markers 398
auditioning start and end points 408
extending to the Meter Ruler 514
extending to the Tempo ruler 494, 531
including Conductor rulers 405
moving to the next/previous region 406
nudging 402, 436 nudging start/end points 402
storing with Memory Locations 525
Send Pans Default to Follow Main Pan option 73
Send to Back command (Region menu) 420
Send via DigiDelivery command 233
copying track automation to 702
for hardware I/O 640 for mix busses 640
Sends Default to -INF option 73
Separate Region Operates On All Related Takes option 288,
Separate Region Operates On All Related Takes preference 71
session data
Session Data to Import menu 222
Session File Backups folder 85
creating for surround mixing 760
files
opening 85 opening from a Transfer volume 85
Set As User Default command 676
Set Plug-in Default To command 676
Set Record Tracks to Auto Input command 262
Set Record Tracks to Input Only command 262
Set Root Settings Folder command 676
Set Servo Lock Bit at Play (Tamura Support) option 79
settings
choosing a destination for 676
copying 677 creating subfolders 677
importing 677 pasting 677 saving 677
Settings Preferences command 676
Click/Countoff Options dialog 272
shortcuts for keyboard input 682
Show All Tracks Group command 152
Show Meters in Sends View option 65, 642
Show Only Tracks in Group command 152
Index 865
Show/Hide Region List button 357
Show/Hide Track List/Group List View button 130, 151
Show/Hide Tracks in Group command 152
shuttle
Shuttle Numeric Keypad mode 18, 67, 385
side-chain
signal flow
signal routing
Smooth and Thin Data After Pass option 74, 712
SMPTE
Snap To commands 429 snapping to the following or preceding region 429
adding to empty automation playlists 733
writing over existing automation 733
soloing
866 Pro Tools Reference Guide
sorting
Sound Designer II file format 748
Split Into Mono Track command 133, 450, 767
splitting stereo and multichannel tracks 450
spotting
Stable LTC Source option 79, 811
Standard VCA Logic for Group Attributes option 75
Start To Insertion command 421
Start, End, and Length display 98, 289
stepped control automation 715
stereo interleaved files, exporting 229
Stereo Mix
stereo tracks
Stop at Shuttle Speed Zero option 79
Stretch command (Tempo Operations) 508
Strip Silence command 483, 485
subfolders, creating for settings 677
submixes
Suppress Automation “Write To” Warnings option 74
surround
and sends 769 basic signal routing 769
configuring Pro Tools and sessions 760
discrete level, solo, mute 767
pan playlists and automation 790
using paths 772 using sub-paths, examples 772
Suspend All Groups (Group List) command 151
suspending
automation 708, 709 writing automation 708
SYNC I/O
synchronization
resolving 817 troubleshooting 817
Synchronization Preferences 78
system
shutting down 31 starting up 31
T
takes
auditioning 286 auditioning from Matches List 286
Takes List pop-up menu
tasks
failed 207 grouped 207 pausing during playback 207
TCE Edit to Timeline command 411
templates
tempo
effects on Markers and Memory Locations 525
Tempo Edit Density pop-up menu 498
tempo map
from Identify Beat command 509
Tempo Operations commands
Tempo ruler
extending an Edit selection to 494, 531
Index 867
time code
freewheeling 798 generating 798, 806
time code position
Time Code Rate pop-up menu 796
Time Compression/Expansion plug-in 411
Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool 76, 375, 570
Time Operations window 512, 515
Time Stamp command 287, 363, 815
Time Stamp Selected command 432
and selecting on all tracks 405
sliding Timeline selections 411
Timeline Selection Markers 397
Timeline and Edit selection, unlinked 396
Timeline Drop Order command 424
Timeline Insertion/Play Start Marker Follows Playback option
Timeline Selection Markers 289, 397
auditioning with Playhead enabled 412
copied from Edit selection 411 copied to Edit selection 411
start, end, and length fields 102
Timeline Selection Markers 410
toggling
Track Compensation (cmp) indicator 658
track controls
track layout
hiding 130 pop-up menu 130 showing 130
Auto Input Monitoring mode 261
Clear All Clip Indicators command 123, 124, 642
Input Only Monitoring mode 261
Set Record Tracks to Auto Input 262
Set Record Tracks to Input Only 262
Split Into Mono command 450, 767
Write MIDI Real-Time Properties command 613
Track Name
Track Name/Comments dialog 126
Track Position Numbers Stay with Hidden Tracks option 64
Track Record Enable indicator 101
Expanded Track Display 339, 716
TrackInput Monitor indicator 101
868 Pro Tools Reference Guide
tracks
appending new material to end of 282
configuring MIDI recording 301
converting multichannel tracks into mono tracks 767
deleting 128 duplicating 128, 691
locating with Fast Forward/Rewind 391
trimming unwanted data from 421
Transfer
selecting files in DigiBase 174
Transfer volume
transients
detecting with Beat Detective 540
Transport
Track Record Enable indicator 101
Transport Numeric Keypad mode 18, 67
Transport RecordLock option 69, 319, 323
Transport View options 103, 290, 291, 389
start, end, and length fields 102, 289
Transpose
Trim automation
Trim Region commands
Trim to All Enabled Automation command 735
Trim to Current Automation command 735
Time Compression/Expansion Trim tool 76, 375, 570
trimming
automation breakpoints 500, 714, 722
regions to Edit insertion point 421
regions with Scrub Trim tool 377
unwanted region and track data 421
U unavailable I/O
Ungroup All Regions command 454
unlinked Timeline and Edit selection 396
unlinking plug-in controls 681, 771
Use Absolute Pan Linking option 73
Use All Available Space preference 70
Use AudioSuite Dither option 76, 661
Use F11 for Wait for Note option 77, 301
Use MIDI to Tap Tempo option 77
Use Separate Play and Stop Keys option 67
User Default setting, creating 678
user-defined regions 334, 488, 490
Index 869
V
VCA Masters
velocities
velocities, for MIDI notes
editing 567, 596 editing velocity 567
video
recording limits with pull 805
Video Out FireWire Port command 838
Video Sync Offset command 838, 839
video track
View Filter
Edit Window View options 95, 634
Region Sync Point View option 434
Transport View options 103, 290, 291, 389
viewing blocks in the video track 823
views
voices
auto-assignment of ascending 138
870 Pro Tools Reference Guide volume
volumes
VSO (see Variable Speed Override)
W
Waveform
Waveform View 341 waveforms 341
and zero-crossing 343 avoiding clicks and pops 343
drawn rectified 342 guidelines for editing 342
repairing with Pencil tool 451
Machine Track Arming command 811
Windows sessions
Write Automation commands 733, 734
Write Automation To commands
Write Automation to Next Breakpoint command 726
Write Automation to Next Breakpoint on Stop command 728
Write Automation to Selection/Selection Start/Selection End buttons 724
Write MIDI Real-Time Properties command 613
writing
automation to next breakpoint 726
automation to selection, selection start, or selection end
X
XML (Extensible Markup Language) 575
X–OR (Cancels Previous Solos) Solo Latch option 144
Z
all the way out 368 around a track point 368
continuously 367 horizontally for all tracks 367
return to the previous zoom level 368
to make all regions visible 368
vertically for all audio tracks 367
vertically for all MIDI tracks 368
zooming without changing playlists 373
Index 871
www.digidesign.com
DIGIDESIGN
2001 Junipero Serra Boulevard
Daly City, CA 94014-3886 USA
Tel: 650.731.6300
Fax: 650.731.6399
TECHNICAL SUPPORT (USA)
Tel: 650.731.6100
Fax: 650.731.6384
PRODUCT INFORMATION (USA)
Tel: 800.333.2137
INTERNATIONAL OFFICES
Visit the Digidesign website for contact information
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement